TRANSACTIONS

OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY,

liELD

AT PHILADELPHIA,

PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE.

VOL. U.— NEW SERIES.

PHILADELPHIA:

PRINTED AND PUBIJSIIF.D BY ABIiAlIAM SMALL.
1825.

195.5

Eastern District of Pennsylvania, to wn -.

BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the thirty-first day of Dccombci,
in the forty-ninth year of tlie Inilependence of the United States of America,
A. D. 1825, Abraham Small of the said district hath de|)ositcd in this office
the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as proprietor, in the words fol-
lowing, to wit :

" Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, held at Philadelphia,
for Promoting Useful Knowledge. — Vol. II. I^ew Series."

In conformity to the Act of Congress of the United States, intituled, " An
Act for the encouragement of Learning, by securing the copies of Maps, Charts,
and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors of such copies, during the times
therein mentioned," — And also to the Act, entitled, " An Act supplementary
to an Act, entitled, 'An Act for the encouragement of Learning, by securing
the copies of Maps, Charts, and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors of sucK
copies, during the times therein mentioned,' and extending the benefits thereof
to the Arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical and other prints."

D. CALDWELL,

CHerk of the Eastern District of Pennsylvania.

ADVERTISEMENT.

The followifig are the Rules adopted for the government of
Coinvdttees iJi the choice of papers for publication.

First. — " That the grounds of the Committee's choice of
'■'' papers for the press, should always be the importance or sin-
'■'■ gularitji of the subjects, or the advantageous manner oftreat-
" ing them, without prete?idi?ig to ansuer, or to make the
" Society answerable, for the certainty of the facts, or pro-
" priety of the reasonings, contained in the several papers so
^^ published, xvhich must still rest on the credit or judgment of
" their respective authors."

Secondly. — " That neither the Society nor the Committee of
" the press do ever give their opinion as a body upon any
" paper they may publish, or upon ariy subject of Art or Kature
"' that conies before iliem.''

LIST OF THE OFFICERS

OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETV,

FOK THE YEAR 1825.

Patron. His Excellency, the Governor of Pevnsylvania.

Presidekt. *

Vice-Presidents.

Secretaries.

Counsellors elected for three years.
Id 1823.

In 1824.
In 1825.

Curators.

William Tilchman.

r Peter S. Duponceau.
< Zaccheus Collins.
(_ Robert M. Patterson.

S Robert Walsli.
George (Jrd.
VVillijim H. Keating.
Franklin Bache.

{

Adams.

Thomas Say.
^^'iUiam K. Horner.
James Mease.

TREAsuHE»and Librarian.

John Vaughan.

LIST OF MEMBERS

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY,

Elected since the publication of the First Volume of the New Series oj their

Transactions.

(Those whose names are marked with an asterisk,(*) are since dead.

RESIDENT MEMBERS.

George Ord, Philadelphia, (omitted in the last Volume.)

John Quincy Adams, Secretary of State, Washington.

*Josiah Meigs, Washington.

James G. Thomson, University of Pennsylvania.

Parker Cleaveland, Bowdoin College, Maine.

John C. Warren, M.D., Cambridge University, Boston.

James Jackson, M.D., Cambridge University, Boston.

Daniel Drake, M.D., Transylvania University, Kentucky.

Jacob Bigelow, M.D., Cambridge University, Boston.

Roberts Vaux, Philadelphia.

L. H. Girardin, St. Mary's College, Baltimore.

John Eberle, M.D., Philadelphia.

Stephen Elliot, Charleston, South Carolina.

Redmond Conyngham, Pennsylvania.

Rev. Fred. Christian Schaefter, New York.

William P. Dewees, M.D., Philadelphia.

William E. Horner, M.D., University of Pennsylvania.

Franklin Bache, M.D., Philadelphia.

William Gibson, M.D., University of Pennsylvania.

Rev. Samuel F. Jarvis, Boston.

Isaiah Lukens, Philadelphia.

William Strickland, Philadelphia.

John Pickering, Salem, Massachusetts.

Langdon Cheves, Philadelphia.

Levc.lt Harris, Philadelphia.

John B. Gibson, Judge of the Supreme Court of Pennsylvania.

George Alexander Otis, Boston. ■

Clement C. Biddle, Philadelphia.

UST OP MEMBERS. vii

Elisha De Butts, M.D., University of Maryland.

James Workman, New Orleans.

Mathew Carey, Philadelphia.

Solomon ^^'. Conrad, Philadelphia.

Richard Harlan, M.I)., Philadelphia.

Cotidy Raguet, Philadelphia, (now at Buenos Ayres.)

William H. Keating, University of Pennsylvania.

Lardner Vanuxem, Columbia College, South Carolina.

Samuel Jackson, MD., Philadelphia.

*Rev. John Plilt, Philadelphia.

William Darlington, M.D., Pennsylvania.

Joseph, Count de Survilliers, Philadelphia.

•Jason O. B. Lawrance, M.U., Philadelphia.

Benjamin H. Coates, M.D., Philadelphia.

Nathaniel A Ware, Philadelphia.

James Cooper, New York.

William James Macneven, M.D., of the University, New York.

Stephen H. Long, Major in the .\rn»y of the United States, Philadelphia.

Henry Seybert, Philadelphia.

Rev. Moses Stuart, Andover College, Massachusetts.

Joseph B. M'K.ean, Philadelphia.

Charles Bonaparte, Philadelphia.

FOREIGN MEMBERS.

Noel de la Morinifire, Paris.

Nicholas Fuss, Perpetual Secretary of the Imperial Academy, St. Petersburg.

Gotthelf Fischer, of the Imperial Academy, St. Petersborg.

♦John Murray, M.I)., Edinburgh.

•Louis Mathieu Langles.

William Theoph. lilesius, of the Imperial Academy, St. Petersburg.

Count J. I). Laiijuiiiais, Paris.

A. G. Desmarest, Professor of Natural History, ficc. Paris.

H. M. Uucrotay de Blainville, M.I)., Paris.

P. A. Latreille, Entomologist at the Museum of Natural History, Paris.

Alexandre Brongniart, Prof, of Mineralogy at tlie Mus. of Nat. Hist. Paris.

»J. A. Albers, M.D., Bremen.

Baron Joseph Von Hormayr, Vienna.

William Marsden, London.

John James Berzelius, Professor of Chemistry, Stockholm.

J. A Borgnis, Civil Engineer, Paris.

Mathieu Lesseps, Paris.

M. de Montgcry, Paris.

Peter Af/.elius, M.D., Professor of Medicine in the University of Upsal.

James Wiley, M.D., Surgeon General of the Armies of Russia, St. Petersburg.

Gustavus, Count de Wettcrstedt, Member of the Swedish ,\cadcmy, Stockholm.

Baron William Von Humboldt, Horlin.

Peter Poletica, St. Petersburg, (formerly Minister to the United SUtcs.)

P. Pedersen, Minister to the United States from Denmark.

Samuel Parkes, London.

Zacharias Nordraark, Professor of Mathematics, in the University of Upial.

Vlli LIST OP MEMBERS,

Jons Svanberg. Professor in the University of Upsal,

Jose Bonifacio de Andrada e Selva, Kio de Janeiro. .

Gotllob Krnst Scliuize, Professor in the University of Goettingea.

Gaspar Deabbate, Consul General to the United States from Sardmi*.

Baron Coquebert de Montbret, Paris.

Rev. Dr. William Hengo Collyer. London.

H. C. Schumacher, Professor of Astronomy, Copenhagen.

Rear Admiral Paul de Lovenhorn, Denmark.

I.ucien Bonaparte, Prince de Canino, Rouie.

William Lawrence, London.

The Chevalier du Ponceau, Fontenay le Comte, France.

Alexander Pearson, M.D., Canton.

Julius Klaproth, Paris.

Admiral A. J. Von Krusenstern, St. Petersburg.

C. J. Temminck, Paris.

Severin Lorich, Charge d'Aflfaires to the U. States from Sweden and Norway.

John J. Bigsby, M.D., England. ,„ •

Count Nicholas de Romanzoff, Grand Chancellor of Russia.

Count John Laval, Russia.

OBITUARY NOTICE

OF

ROBERT PATTERSON, LL.D.

Late President of the American Philosophical Sociely.

It lias been a custom in this Society, that on the ileath of the President,
an oration in honour of the deceased should be duliveied by one of the Mem-
bers ; and it was very much the wish of the Society that this tribute of
respect should have been paid to their late worthy and respected President
Dh. Robert Pattekson. It was omitted, however, in consequence of his
positive request, communicated by the friend who attended him during his last
illness. Nevertheless it was thought proper that a short memorial of his use-
ful and well spent life should be placed on the records of the Society.

Robert Patterson was born on the 30th of May, 1743, near Hillsborough, in
the north of Ireland. His family was respectable, though not aflluent. Ills
great-grandfather, John, emigrated from Scotland during the persecution of the
Presbyterians by the house of Stewart, and siiflTcred with his fellow Protestants
at the memorable siege of Derry. The subject of this Memoir was sent to
school at an early age, and soon became distinguished for his love of learning.
He was particularly conspicuous for his progress in Matliemalics. To this
object, indeed, his genius so strongly impelled him, that in a short time he
was able to give lessons to his master.

The French having made a descent on the coast of Ireland about the year
1759, a martial spirit was excited in the youth of that kingdom which became
universal. Patterson, then a youth of sixteen, burning with patriotic ardour,
was enrolled in a militia company, of which he was made Serjeant. He devoted
himself to his military exercises, and soon became so distinguished for his skill
and good conduct, as to attract the attention of the officers ol a Itritish regi-
ment stationed near Hillsborough, who oflered to procure him a commission,
if he would go into the Ring's service. This he declined ; the duties of civil
life being more congenial to his nature. He chose rather to remain in a situ-
ation where he might pursue his studies, while he enjoyed the society of his
family. Having completed his education, he determined to try his fortune in
America ; and accordingly embarked for Philadelphia, where he arrived, in
October, 1768, without friends, and almost without money, having shared with
a fellow passenger the contents of his slender purse.

On his arrival in Philadelphia, he visited some of the members of the relieiou*
society to which he belonged, and was received by them with great kindness

9*

X OBITXJAUY NOTICE OF DR. ROBERT PATTERSON,

and hospitality. One of them indeed went so far as to offer him the loan of a
sum of money sufficient to establish him in mercantile business. Though he
did not accept this offer, having determined to make the business of teaching
the main object of his life, yet he remembered it to his last moment with
unceasing gratitude.

After spending a week in Philadelphia, he set out on foot for Bucks County,
for the purpose of seeking employment as a schoolmaster. In this he was
successful. He was immediately engaged in his favourite pursuit. His first
school was in Buckingham, and one of his first scholars Andrew Eliicott,
afterwards celebrated for his mathematical knowledge displayed in the service
of the United States. In no part of the world is more respect paid to that
truly respectable character, the instructor of youth, than in the United States.
Instances are frequent, where those who have commenced their career as
schoolmasters have risen to the highest honours of the State. This is a sound
feeling, and as long as it prevails there will be no danger of want of education.

The regular publication of the Nautical Almanac, established by Dr. Mas-
kclyne about tlie time when Patterson taught in Buckingham, turned the atten-
tion of the principal navigators in the American ports to the calculations of
the longitude from lunar observations, in which they were eager to obtain
instruction. Availing himself of this desire, he removed to Philadelphia, where
he soon had for his scholars the most distinguished commanders who sailed
IVom this port.

In the 3ear lT7i, the parents of Br. Patterson, two of his brothers, and two
sisters, attracted no doubt by his success and the encouraging accounts re-
ceived from him, came to this country. One of his brothers, a presbyterian
clergyman, is still living, at Pittsburg, and one of his sisters, a widow lady, in
Philadelphia. In the year 177i2, having accumulated the sum of five or six
hundred pounds, he was persuaded by a friend whom he consulted, to invest
it in merchandise, and open a country store in New Jersey. But never was
there a man less fitted for this business. His books indeed were kept with
mathematical correctness ; but to the drudgery of a retail salesman he was
unequal. Every customer seemed an intruder who detained him from his
studies. He was soon sensible that nature never designed him for a store
keeper. He seized therefore the first opportunity of closing his mercantile
concern, and resuming his former avocation. This he was enabled to do to
advantage, being appointed Principal of the Academy at Wilmington, in the
State of Delaware, about the beginning of the year 1774. On the 9th of May,
in the same year, he was married to Ame Ewing, daughter of Maskell Evving,
Esq. of Greenwich, Cumberland County, New Jersey. With this lady, who
has now the misfortune of lamenting his death, he lived in the most affectionate
union for upwards of fifty years. They had eight children, two of whom died
in infancy. His son Robert, with hereditary talents improved by liberal edu-
cation, succeeded his father in the office of Vice-Provost of the University of
Pennsylvania some years before his death, and fills his place with great repu-
tation. About the time that Dr. Patterson took charge of the Academy at
Wilmington, the differences between Great Britain and her colonies were
hastening to a crisis. The First Congress, assembled at Philadelphia in the
autumn of the year 1774, gave intimations to the people that it would be pru-
dent fo prepare for the event; and immediately after the battle of Lexington
in April, 177.5, the whole country by an unanimous impulse formed itself into
associations for tiie purpose of learning the military exercise. i?o ignorant

LATE PRESIDENT OF THE SOCIETY. Xl

were they of every tiling like military art, tliat every person wlio coiihl per-
form the common manual cxortisc became a man of conse(|uonce, anil \va9
looked up to by his neighbours. Then it was that Dr. Palter?on reaped the
fruits of his youthful lab'iurs in Irelan<l. Ardenllv devoted to the cause of i!ie
colonies, he tendered his services as a military instructor, which were thank-
fully accepted. Three companies were put under his direction, whom he
attended before sunrise in the morning, and after the dismissal of the school
in the alternoon. Saturday was the lield day, when all the companies met,
and were trained toget!:er. As soon as the militia of Delaware were organised
by authority, he received from the Comn\ittee of Public Safety the commission
of adjutant in a regiment commanded by ColonrI, afterwards Governor,
M'Kinley. Soon after (he Declaration of Independence, many students in the
^Vilmington Academy from the West Indies and the Southern States were
called home, an<l the duties of the Professors were suspended. Mndct these
circumstances, Dr. Patterson, determining to share the fate of the c<uintry,
removed to a small farm which he had purchased in the neighbourhooil of his
father in law, in New Jersey. Having placed his family in safety, he went
into service with the militia who were opposed to the enemy. Alter the
disastrous campaign of irrti, he returned to his family, but hail not been at
lioine a week, when the militia were again called out to immediate service, the
British army having almost overrun the State of New Jersey. He did not
hesitate to obey the call, and repaired immediately, with his ritleon his shoul-
der, to the appoinfpfl rpiiiloxvoiis, witli the intention of serving in the ranks.
But before the troops were ready to march, he received from (jovcrnor Liv-
ingston the commission of brigade major, with orders to join General New-
combe's brigade. In this oHice he was honourably engaged in active service,
until the British army evacuated Philadelphia and New Jersey in 17T3, when
the brigade was disbanded.

The critical period in the destiny of the United States was now past. The
capture of Burgoyne's army and the alliance with France aflbrded a moral
certainty of the ultimate establishment of their independence. Such was the
confident opinion of the people, and accordingly they began to turn their
thoughts towards civil atVairs, and the important business of' education. The
old College and .\cademy of Philadelphia were new modelled, their foundation
enlarged, and a University created. Patterson was well ac(|uaintcd with Dr.
Ewing, the Provost of the University, and applied to him for employment as
a mathematical teacher. The Provost received him with great kindness, and
told him he was the very man they wanted, and advised him to oiler himself
without delay to the Board of Trustees as a candidate for the Professorship
of Mathematics. In consequence of this advice, he entered into the University
in December, 1779. He was appointed first a Professor and afterwards Vice-
Provost, in which station he continued until the year 1814, when he resigned,
and was succeeded by his son. During this long [leriod he performed hisolficial
duty with great integrity, industry, and ability, and rcndereil essential services
to the University and the country. This was f>is proper sphere. With laborious
application he ran the course which nature had pointed out, and his elTort*
■were crowned with complete success. But arduous as were his duties in the
University, he found time for other useful employments. Being highly es-
teemed by his fellow citizens, he was electeil a member of the Select Council
of Philadelphia, ofwhicli he was chosen President in 1799. In this aiiscmbly
his habits of business, and his love of order and regularity, were extremely

2

Xll OBITUARY NOTICE OP DR. ROBERT PATTERSON.

serviceable. Of tliis the Council were very sensible, and on his resignatiou
honoured him with an unanimous vote of thanks.

In the year 1805, he received from Mr. Jefferson, President of the United
States, with whom he had been in habits of friendship, the unsolicited ap-
pointment of Director of the national Mint. This office he filled with great
reputation until his last illness, when he resigned, and his son in law. Dr.
Moore, was appointed bj President Monroe in his place.

In the year 1816 the Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania, in testimony
of their approbation of his long tried talents and services, conferred on him
the honorary degree of Doctor of Laws.

That he should be a Fellow of the American Philosophical Society was a
matter of course. He was elected in 1783, and remained an active, zealous,
and useful Member to the time of his death. He was chosen Secretary in
1784, Vice-President in 1799, and ultimately in 1819 raised to the Chair
which had been filled by Franklin, Rittenhouse, Jefferson, and Wistar. His
zeal for the interests of this Institution was always conspicuous, and he con-
ducted himself during his Presidency to the entire satisfaction of the Society.

Nature had been liberal to Dr. Patterson. She endued him with strength of
body and solidity of understanding. His mind was peculiarly adapted to the
exact sciences, in which he made considerable progress, and was certainly a
distinguished teacher. He was not however satisfied in any case with mere
abstract mathematical truth, but always sought for its application to some prac-
tical purpose. This appears from his works wKich are all elementary, and
his numerous papers published among the Transactions of our Society. His
practical knowledge of mathematics was held in high estimation. Our most
ingenious mechanicians were in tne constant habit of resortin"- to his judg-
ment and advice. But one, and the most important, trait in Ins character is
yet to be mentioned, — \).\% fervent and unremitted piety. From early youth to
the last moment of his protracted life, it penetrated and pervaded his whole
mind, and influenced all his conduct. He belonged to what is commonly called
the Scotch Presbyterian Church, of which he was an elder nearly half a cen-
tury, and which will long have cause to lament his loss.

His constitution was so remarkably strong, that he reached the limit of his
long existence almost without sickness, and was even robust until within a few
months of his death. At length the powers of life gave way, and, without pain,
and apparently without disease, he died on the 22dof July, 1824, in the 82d
year of his age.

CONTENTS.

Rules for the government of Committees in the choice of papers for

publication. ....... \^

List of the odicers of the Society for the year 1825. - - v

List of the Members of the Society elected since the publication of

Vol. I. of the New Series of their Transactions. - - - vi

Obituary Notice. ----.-. is

No. L

Descriptions of Insects of the Families of Carabici and Hydrocanthiri
of Latreilie, inhabiting North America. By Thomas Say.

No. IL

Description and Chemical Analysis of the RetinasphaU, discovered at
Cape Sable, Magothy River, Ann Arundel Couaty, Maryland. By
G. Troost. ----... 110

No. in.

Analyses of the Chrysoberyls of Haddam and Brazil. By Henry Sey-
bert 116

No. IV.

Geological Account of the Vallpy of tlu- Ohio: in a l':ttcr from Daniel

DraKc, M.U. to Joseph Correa de oerra. - - - 124

Xiv CONTENTS.

No. V.

Tables of Observations on the Winds, the Currents, the Gulph Stream,
the Comparative Temperature of the Air and Water, &c. made on
the North Atlantic Ocean, during Twenty -six Voyages to and from
Europe, (principally between Philadelphia and Liverpool,) between
the years 1799 and I8ir, inclusive. By John Hamilton. - - 140

No. VI.

Observations on the Trap Rocks of the Connewago Hills near Middle-
town, Dauphin County, and of the Stony Ridge near Carlisle, Cum-
berland County, Pennsylvania. By the Honorable John B. Gibson. 156

No. VII.

\n Account of two North American Species of Cyperus, discovered
in the State of Georgia: and of four Species of Kyllingia, found
on the Biazilian coast, and on the Rio de la Plata in South America.
By William Baldwin, M.D. - - - l^r

No. VIII.

Catalogue of Plants collected during a Journey to and from the
Rocky Mountains, during the summer of 1820. By E. P. James,
attached to the Exploring Expedition commanded by Major S. H.
Long, of the United States Engineers ; by whom it was commu-
nicated to the Society, with the permission of the Hon. J. C. Cal-
houn, Secretary of War. - - - - - -172

No. IX.

Remarks on the Sandstone and Floetz Trap Formations of the West-
ern Part of the Valley of the Mississippi. By E. P. James, attached
to the Exploring Expedition commanded by Major S. H. Long, of
the United States Engineers ; by whom it was communicated to
the Society, with the permission of the Hon. J. C. Calhoun, Secre-
tary of War. ------- *9^

No. X.

Some Observations on the Anatomy and Physiology of the Alligator
of North America. Lacertii Alfigator, Gmel. Crocoddus Lucius,
Cuvicr. Communicated to the American Philosophical Society by
N. M. Hentz, Member of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phi-
ladelphia -------'-*

CONTENTS. XV

No. XI.

Analysis of the Hydraulic Lime used in coiisUuciiiig llie Kiic Canal

in the State of New York. By Henry Seybert. - - 229

No. XII.

Papers on Various Subjects connected with the Survey of the Coast of
the United States. By F. R. Hassler. . ." . . 232

(For a List of the several Papers contained in this Number,
see page 4'20.)

No. XIII.

Memoire pour accompagoer le Tableau des Observations Mfcteorolo-
giques faites a Washington, depuis le 17 Avril 1823 jusqu'au 18
Avril 1824. Par Jules de Wallenstein, Menibre Correspondant de
I'Acadcmie d'Histoire de Madrid. - - - - 4-21

No. XIV.

On the Language, Manners, and Customs of the Berbers, or Brebcr«,
of Africa. Communicated by William Slialer, Consul of tiie United
States at Algiers, in a Series of Letters to Peter S. Du Ponceau, and
by the latter to the Society. ..... 43$

No. XV.

Solution of a General Case of the Simple Pendulum. By Eugcnius

Nulty. - - - - - - - - 4G(>

No. XVI.

Notice nf a New Crystalline Form of the Yenite of Rhode Tslaml.

By Dr. G. Troost. ...... 4:»

Donations, &c. - - - - - - - 4hl

TRANSACTIONS

OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY.

NEJV SERIES.

No. 1.

Descriptions of Insects of the families of Carabici and Hv-
DRocANTUAKi of Latveille, inhabiting JVorth America.
By Thomas Say. — Jiead, 2Gth Aug. 1819.

In the first Volume of the New Series of the Transactions
of this Society, I commenced the rei^ular description of our
North American insects, by a Monograph of the iniligenous
Cicindeletse ; a Linnsean genus which occupies the first station
in the improved classification of I.atrcille.

I now proceed to lay before the Society descriptions of
such of our native insects, as were included by Linn*-, in his
three genera, Carabus, Dytiscus, and Gi/rinus. The two
former of these, but more particularly the first, arc now
considered as great families, constituting numerous e;encra,
and asrcealtiy to the order in which 1 have enumerated Ihem,
immediately succeeding the Cicindeletie, in the system which
I have ado|)ted.

The Carabii are very numerous, are insccli\nrf)us, ter-
restrial, com.nonly inhabiting moist places, under stones, or

VOL. II. A

2 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

fallen trees, under bark or on flowers, ^'c. They generally
run briskly when disturbed, and many species diffuse a foetid
odor, or discharge a peculiar, pungent, acetous gas.

The Dytiscii are much less numerous than the preceding,
but are equally nourished by animal food. They inhabit the
waters, occasionally visiting the surface for the purpose of
respiration ; they move with rapidity and ease through the
water aiid the air, but on land their gait is embarrassed by
the natatory form of the posterior feet.

The Gyrinii, which are now included in the same family
with the Dytiscii, are comparatively few in number of
species, and those few are so intimately united in nature by
a similarity of character and habit, that no division has yet
been found necessary in the genus, which still remains un-
changed as it was first established in the artificial system.
These insects, like those of the preceding Linntean genus,
are insectivorous and aquatic ; they do not, however, like
them, remain at the bottom to seek their prey, but chiefly
confine themselves to the surface. They describe graceful
curvatures or gyrations on the surface of the water, with a
pleasing facility of movement, without exhibiting to the eye
the oar-like feet by which that celerity is effected. When
alarmed, they dive to the bottom with swiftness, carrying
with them a globule of air, that their respiration may
not be suspended. When irritated, they eject a lactescent
fluid, which, in many instances, diffuses an agreeable odor,
somewhat similar to that of the Calycanthus floridus of bo-
tanists. They fly with much ease and chiefly at night, but
their movements on land are uncouth and embarrassed.

After thus briefly noticing the most prominent features
exhibited by these insects, it may be proper to observe, that
the descriptions are drawn out from such specimens only as
have fallen under my own observation, and which I had an
opportunity of examining and comparing together, in order
tlie more effectually to indicate their differential characters.
The individuals are chiefly preserved in my cabinet ; and for
such as I do not possess, I have carefully referred to those
collections from which I have described them. I have scru-

INHABITING NOUTH AMERICA. 3

pulously retained all the specific names, which have been
given by the late Rev. F. V. Melslieitner, in his Catalogue of
the insects of Pennsylvania; excepting only such as have
been previously employed in the same genera by other en-
tomologists ; and so far as I could ascertain tliem by the aid
of the scientific intelligence of his son the Kev. J. F. Mel-
sheimer, who has liberally furnished me with specimens
from his collection. I am also indebted to Mr. Tlionias
Nuttall, who has confided to my care his entire collection,
with permissiorj to avail myself of the opportunity of de-
scribing such of them as are new.

I have not thought it necessary to draw out the generic
descriptions at length, as this has already been done with
suftkicnt detail by Professor Bonelli of Turin ; whose excel-
lent papers 1 have not yet had the good fortune to peruse.
If, in the description of some of the species, I have been an-
ticipated by the labours of this, or any other author, I shall
immediately relinquish my claims, and do justice to the real
discoverers, when their labours shall meet my eye.

To the inflexible Linntean entomologist, who may object
to the numerous genera which arc here adopted, 1 will merely
observe, that each of those divisions which are here called
famihes, he may regard as only genera, (as they coinciile
with those of Linnaeus.) and to each of the species dcscrilicd
he may add the characters of those divisions wiiicii arc, in
this essay, called genera ; tlms the system as it stands, com-
plicated as it is by the vast accession of discoveries of recent
date, will aftbrd hitn every facility, whicli he might suppose
to result from a scru|)ulous adherence to the Linmean
method.

The modern entomologist will readily perceive that I have
not adopted all the genera of M. Bonelli, hut that many of
these are included under the genus Fcronia of Latrcillc.
In this respect I had no option; having no definitions of such
genera, with the exception of those contained in the Ih-gne
Animal, many of which are too brief to be exclusively rr
lied upon.

DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

ENUMERATION OF SPECIES.

Brachinus.
B. fumans.

1.
s.

C. siniiatus.
C. decorus.

3.
4.

Cymindis.
C. viridipennis,
C. purpureus.

5. C. pilosus.

1.

2.

L. tricolor.
L. vittata.

3.
4.

Lebia.
L. atriventris.
L. ornata.

5. L. viridis.

6. L. platicoUis

Galerita.
G. Americana.

Odacantha.
1. 0. Pennsylvanica. s. 0. dorsalis.

SCARITES.

S. subterraneus.

Pasimachcs.
1. p. depressus. a. P. subsulcatus.

1. C. bipustulata.
S. C. viridis.
3. C. lineolata.

1. H. caliginosus.

2. H. bicolor.

3. H. eraticus.

4. H. Pennsylvani-

cus.

5. H. faunus.

Cmvina.

4. C. pallida. 6. C. globosa.

5. C. sphfericoUis. 7. C. pallipennis.

MORIO.

M. georgise.

Harpalus.

6. H. herbivagus. IS,

7. H. simiiis. 13

8. H. vulpeculus. 14. H. agricolus.

9. H. iripennis. 15. H. Baltimorieo:

10. H. viridis. sis.

11. H. hylacis. 16. H. caeuus.

H. rusticus.
H. carbonavius.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA.

1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

6.

7.

8.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

F. niusculis.
F. basilaris.
F. impuncticol-

lis.
F. angustata.
F. obesa.
F. lineola.
F. pallipes.
F. atriniedea.
F. longicornis. 24.

F. uiiicolor.
F. stygica.
F. nicesta.
F. sigillata.
F. placida.
F. tartarica.

Feronia.

16. F. n\uta. 80. F. nutans.

17. F. submaigina- 31. F. cincticollis.
ta. 33. F. decora.

18. F. impunctata. 33. F. deccntis.

19. F. ventralis. 34. F. cxtensicollis.
adoxa. 33. F. ocliropcza.
grcgaiia. 36. F. lucublanda-
teiininata. 37. F. chalcitcs.
autuinnalis. 38. F. caudicalis.
liiul)ata. 39. F. interstitialis.
parmata. 40. F. ohscilcta.

20
21
22
23

25

F.
F.
F.
F.
F.
F.

26. F. cupiipcnnis. 41. F. punctifor-

27. F. coiivcxicol-

lis.

28. F- lionesta.

29. F. 8-punctata.

mis.

42. F. recta.

43. F- liypolithos.

Abax.
A. coracinus.

1. C- scriceus.

2. C. a'Stivus.

3. C. litliophilus.

4. C- emarginatus.

1. D. purpuratus.

CntJENics.

5. C. pusillus.

6. C. laticollis.

7. C impuncti-

frons.

DicjEiiUs.
2. D. dilatatus.

Epomis.
E. tomeutosus.

8. C.-nemoialis.

9. C. solitarius.
10. C. PennsylvR-

nicus.

3. D. furvus.

Panaceus.

1. p. crucigerus.

3. P. fasciatus.

1.

9.

C. elevatus.
C. unicolor.

CVCHRUS.

3. C. stciiostomus. 4. C. bilobu?

1. C. scrutator

Calosoma.

9. C. calidum-

DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Carabus.
1. C. silvosus. 3. C- linibatu'j.
S. C. interruptus.

Nebria.
N. pallipes.

Elaphrus.
E. riparius.

1, B. honestum. 5.

S. B. punctate stri- 6.

atum. 7.

3. B. levigatura. 8.

4. B. dorsalis. 9.

1. T. conjunctus. 2.

1. D. fimbriolatus. 3.

2. D, verticalis.

COLYMBETES.

i. C. erytropterus. 5. C. nitidus.

2. C- fenestralis. 6. C. bicarinatus.

3. C- ambiguus. 7. C, venustus.

4. C. seriatus.

Bembidium.
B. contractum.
B. niger.
B. oppositum.
B. affinis.
B. inornatum.

Trechus.
T. partiarius.

Dytiscus.
D. mediatus.

4. C. serratus-

Omophron.
O, labiatum.

NOTHIOPHILTJS,

N. semistriatus.

10. B. flavicaudus.

11. B. proximus.

12. B. Isevum.

13. B. variegatum.

14. B. tetracolon-

3. T. rupestris.

4. D. tseniolis.

8. C. glyphicus.

9. C. obtusatus.
10. C. stagninus-

1. H. undulatus.

2. H. oppositus.

HYnROCANTHUS-

H. iricolor.

3.
4.

1. G. Americanus. 3

2. G> emarginatus.

Laccophilus.
L. maculosus. 2. L. proximus.

Hydroporus.

H. niger. 5. H. lacustris.

H. catascopium. 6. H. affinis.

Haliplus.
1. H. 12-punctatus. 2. H. triopsis.

Gyrinus.
G. analis. 4- G. linibatus.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 7

DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.

ORDER AND SECTION.— COLEOPTERA PENTAMERAp

Tribe I. Entomophaoa, — Famihi II. Carabici.

Genus Brachinus. Web. Fabr.

Anterior tibia emarginatc ; elytra truncated at tip ; palpi fili-
form ; labium subquadrate ; neck none ; abdomen with
interior vesicles inclosing a caustic, volatile, and detonating
fluid; nails simple.

Species.

B.fumans, ferrugineous ; elytra blue-black; venter, testa-
ceous-black.

Brachinus fumans, ferruginous ; elytra blackish azure. Fabr. Syst. Elttil.
p. 219.

Body ferrugineous, with numerous minute hairs.

Head front longitudinally impressed ; each side near the base

of the antennae.
Thoi'ax with a longitudinal impressed line from the head to

the scutel.
Scutel minute, blackish brown.
Elytra blackish-azure ; al)out seven slightly impressed, very

obtuse grooves, more distinct near tlic suture, .ind obsolete

at the outer margin ; separating lines rounded.
Venter dark reddisli brown.
Length eleven-twentieths of an inch.

Ratiier common under stones, ^c. in various parts of North
America. In common witii tiie other species of tlie genus,
it discharges from the posterior extremity of the l)ody, when
alarmed or irritated, a caustic fluid ; this is remarkable by an

8 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

audible detonation, with its accompanying cloud of smoke,
as in the discharge of a gun. ,.

Genus Cymindis,

Anterior tibia emarginate ; elytra, truncated at tip ; exterior
maxillary palpi filiform ; labiales terminated by a securi-
form joint ; neck none ; body depressed and destitute of
the secretory organs which furnish the detonating fluid :
nails pectinated.

Species.

1. C. *simiatits, black ; feet testaceous; elytra with a pale
humeral spot and margin.

Length, one-fourth of an inch.

Body punctured, glabrous; antennse, labrum, and palpi

rufous.
Thorax transverse, shghtly contracted behind, lateral edge

abruptly and minutely excurved behind, forming a minute

acute angle, basal hues obsolete, basal edge sinuately

rounded.
Elytra blackish brown, with a pale, rufous, humeral spot,

margin and obsolete gemminate spot behind, strife acute,

punctured, interstitial lines flat, broad.
Postpectus, punctures obsolete.
Fett testaceous.
Venter impimctured.
Found by Mr. J. Gilliams in Maryland.

2. C. decoriis. Head blue ; thorax rufous ; elyti^a green po'
lished.

Length, three-tenths of an inch.

Carabus decerns alatus, cyaneus, thorace pedibusque rufis. Fabr. Syst, Eleut.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA.

Head blackish-blue, obsoletcly punctured ; beneath jjurplc-
black ; antennw fuscous; two basal joints ruibus-obscure ;
mouth black ; mandibles rufous beneatli.

Trunk rufous, impunctured ; beneath somewhat paler.

Thorax with an impressed line, and obsolete transverse

rugfe.
Elytra green polished, with punctured striae ; deflected edge

purplish.
Feet rufous; tips of the thighs, and base of the tibia black;

penultimate tarsal joints bilobated.
Venter obscure blueish black.
Found by Mr. Nuttall on the Missouri.

3. C. *viridipenms. — Elytra green, polished, margined with
C'jpreous.

farabus prasinus. Mehh. Catalogue.

Inhabits Pennsylvania ; rare.

Bodii destitute of hairs.

Head purple-l»lack ; vertex glabrous ; front impressed eacli
side near the anlennse ; antennvc testaceous, rather darker
towards the tip.

Thorax green tinged with purple; a longitudinal impressed
line, and transverse, minute, parallel rugse ; posterior an-
gles aiigulatcd ; beneath purple-black, green each side.

Feet purplc-l)lack, paler towards the tips; penultimate tarsal
joint bilol)ate.

Scutel testaceous,

Eltjtra striate, green, polished, reflecting in some lights a
slight purpurcscent tinge ; outer margin cupreous : stii:e
distinct, acute, distant, tlie marginal one with distant
punctures from the humerus to the ape.\.

Venter blackish.

Length half an inch.

This was sent to me !)y Dr. J. F. Melsheimer : I have not
ibund a specimen, and tlicrefore iiavc considered it as a rare

n

10 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

species. The name prasinus having been already applied
to a different species has rendered it necessary to change it.

4. C. *purpiii'eus purple or violaceous; antennae, mouth, and
tibije black.

Lejigth nearly seven-twentieths of an inch.

Head obsoletely punctured, deep violaceous,

Anteiince fuscous, three basal joints rufous, obscure.

Trunk deep violaceous ; a longitudinal impressed line, and
transverse obsolt^te rugse.

Elytra deep violaceous, obsoletely punctured ; and with
minutely punctured, acute, distant strife ; a line of mar-
ginal punctures ; tibia and tarsi black-brown ; penultimate
tarsal joint bilobate.

Venter violaceous ; tail black.

In form and magnitude resembles C. viridipennis, but is
more depressed, and wider. Brought by Mr. Nuttall from
the Missouri.

5, C. *pilosus black-brown, punctured ; mouth, antennae, and
feet rufous; elytra with punctured strise and interstitial
lines.

Carabus pilosus. Melsh. Catal.

Body somewhat hairy.

Head deeply punctured; no distinct frontal impression.

Antennm and 7nouth rufous.

Thorax with numerous, profound, approximate punctures,
and a longitudinal impressed line which Iiardly attains the
anterior edge.

Elytra with punctured obtuse strije which are sub-equal to
the interstitial lines ; punctures transverse, dilated, ap-
proximated ; interstitial lines punctured.

Epipleura rufous, punctured ; feet rufous ; pectus punctured.

Venter obscure, rufous, with distant minute punctures.

Lewg^A two-fifths of an inch.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. il

I have not met with a living specimen of tliis insect : it is
rare.

Far. a. A longitudinal, rufous, humeral spot ; punctures ot
the interstitial lines numerous, dilated. — In the Phila-
delphia Museum.

Far. 0. Thorax hiack margined with rufous; a longitudinal,
rufous, humeral spot.

Far. y. Thorax, head, and humeral spots rufous.

The thorax of this species seems to vary in the length of
its transverse diameter.

Genus Lebia. Lotr. Bonell.

Anterior tibia emarginate ; elytra truncated at tip; palpi lili-
form ; terminal joint cylindrical, hardly truncate; tliorax
wider than long ; penultin\ate tarsal joint bilobatc ; nails
pectinated.

Species.

1. L. * tricolor — TIcad black ; mouth, antennje, thorax, and
feet ferruginous ; elytra green, polished.

Length al)()ut tlirce-tenthsujf an incli.

Head black, polished ; front minutely corrugated ; vertex
glabrous.

Mouth, labrnm, and antenna- ferruginous or pale testaceous.

Thorax ferruginous, glabrous, or very minutely rugose ; a

• longitudinal impressed lin<^ ; margin depressed and some-
what dilated ; angles rounded ; beneath ferruginous.

Feet colour of tlic tliorax.

Scutel colfturofthe thorax.

Elytra profoundly striate; stria? im|)unctured ; interstitial
lines convex; mar2;inal line interrupted by punctures from
the liumcrns to the apex.

Fenter l)lackish.

Length about three-tenths of an inch.

2

IS DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Not uncommon in Pennsylvania. Found also by Mr. T.
Nuttall on the Missouri. The name of Lebias has been more
recently applied by Cuvier, to designate a genus of fishes,

g. L. vittata rufous ; elytra black, with a white fillet and

yellowish margin ; feet black.
Length rather more than one-fourth of an inch.

Winged ; thorax orbicular, rufous ; elytra black, with a white vitta. Fabr.
Syst. Eleut. I. p. 202. Mus. D. Yeats.

.intennx black; head rufous; sciitel small, rufous; elytra glabrous, shining
black with a longitudinal white fillet in the middle ; body ferruginous ; legs
black. Tiirt.

Antennas h\a.c\i.', head mions; eyes black; thorax rufous, hardly broader than
the head ; scutel rufous ; elytra black, slightly striated ; exterior margin and
triangular spot around the scutel rufous ; a longitudinal white line on each ;
beneath fulvous ; feet black with half of the thighs rufous. (Length of figure
one-fourth of an inch.) Oliv. III., p. 98, pi. 6, fig. 69, a. b.

Body impunctured, nearly destitute of hairs.

Head rufous; antefince black-brown, rufous at base; palpi
black.

Tnnik rufous, glabrous.

Thorax with an impressed longitudinal line-

Elytra with acute distant striae ; two parallel black viftfe, — the
outer one originating on the humerus and abbreviated
near the middle of the tip, — inner one originating at the
middle of the base, becomes common before the middle of
the suture, and is abbreviated near the inner angle of
the tip; an elongated common whitish triangle at base, a
white vitta on the middle, and a pale rufous margin and
tip.

Feet deep black ; nails pectinated ; coxce rufous.

Venter rufous.

Var. a. — Colour of the outer margin extended round the
base to the scutel, thighs rufous at base, common black
vitta continued to the tip.

If the figure given by Olivier be correct, the specimens

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. i3

here described must be considered a variety. Several indi-
viduals \v(ne btou2;IU from the Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.
They are occasionally taken, in Pennsylvania, on flowers.
When recent, it is of a much more bright red than when
lona; preserved in tiie cabinet. The red becomes pale, and
the white vitta vellowish.

Caught in Mr- K. Haines's garden, Germantown.

3. L. *atriv€ntns ferruginous ; elytra deep purple ; venter
black.

Length one-fourth of an inch.

Body inipunctured, naked or with very few hairs.

Antemue brown ; three first joints ferruginous ; palpi l)lackisii.

Thorax, disk convex; margin towards the hind angles de-
pressed ; hind angles rounded ; a longitudinal impressed
obsolete line.

Elytra deep-blue, with acute, distant, not deeply impressed
striif , a series of punctures on the external margin from
the humerus to the middle of the tip; punctures more dis-
tant on the middle of the margin.

J^ails pectinated ; venter purple-black.

Found under stones, ^'c

4. L. *ornata rufous ; head and elytra black ; the latter with
a yellowish edge and four spots-

Carabus 4-notatus. Melsh. Catal.

Length, male one-fifth — female one-fourth of an inch.

fiorf^/impunctured and almost destitute of hairs.

Head black; three basal joints of antcnnfe rufous.

Trunk rufous, paler beneath-

Thorax with an ol)soIctc longitudinal impressed line ; disk

somewhat convex; margin depressed.
Feet pale ; naih pectinated.
Elytra striated ; stri;c acute, distant ; two large sul)triangular

or subovate spots near the base ; two smaller ones near

the tip ; and outer edge yellow.

I* DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Venter pale yellow or reddish brown.

Var. a. The two basal spots of the elytra wanting.
Far. 0. Head corrugated. — Probably a distinct species.

This species varies in the form of the basal spots, which
are sometimes elongated or confluent with the margin, and
either abbreviated or attaining the base. The posterior
spots also occur enlarged, so as to be confluent with the
apicial margin. It strongly resembles Dromius -i-tnaculatus,
but the venter is not black, and the spots of the elytra are
diflxjrently formed.

On flowers, (the blossom of the blackberry, ^'c.) in May,
June, July, and August — Not uncommon.

The name ^-notatus has already been made use of in this
genus ; I have therefore been compelled to change it.

5. L. *viridis green, polished, immaculate ; antennae, palpi,
and feet black.

Length upwards of one-fifth of an inch.

Body impunctured, nearly destitute of hairs.

Head green, with a few oI)solete punctures; antennce black-
brown ; labriim and palpi blackish ; nasiis cupreous.

Trunk green polished ; beneath darker.

Thorax with an impressed line.

Elytra obsolete ; strije distant, acute ; outer margin punc-
tured ; a single puncture near the inner tip.

Feet black ; 7tails pectinated.

Ve?iter blackish-sreen.

O'

Var. a. Dark purplish blue ; strite of the elytra indistinct,
beneath purple-black ; antennae black.

Very common on flowers. Tlie thorax and elytra, when
examined by a high magnifier, are granulated.

6. L. *platicolUs rufous ; elytra black-brown edged with ru-
fous J margin of the thorax depressed.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 15

Length, nearly two-iifths of an inch.

Nf^ad (lark rufous: tips of the luamlihles and eyes black.

77w7-a.r rufous, iinpunctured, rather wider than lona:, widest
before the middle, somewhat narrowed behind : hind an-
gles very ol)tuse ; n»argin depressed ; dorsal line sliglitly
impressed : f)asal lines obsolete.

Elytra l)lackish-t)r()wn, with a pale rufous edge ; strife acute ;
interstitial lines flat.

Feet testaceous.

Venter dusky ; blackish towards the tip, and on the tips of the
segments.

Far. a. A humeral, submarginal, pale, rufous, longitudinal
spot ; disk of the thora.x dark rufous, margin |)ale. — Mu-
seum of Mr. Peale.

This species is perhaps a Dromia.

Genus Galerita- Fab.

Anterior tibia emarginatc ; elytra truncate at tip ; palpi secu-
riform ; tongue exserted, coriaceous in the middle,
membranaceous eacli side, and pointed at tip; neck dis-
tinct ; penultimate tarsal joint bilobate.

Species.

G- Miericana l)lack; thorax and feet ferruginous; elytra
black- blue.

G. Amtrkana black : thorax ferruginous ; elytra azure. Fab. Syst. Ekut. II..
p. -Z\4. Latr. Jicf^ne .Qniinal.

Carabus lantts. Fab. Syst. Ekut. /., 136. 51.

Carabus bicolor. Drury Ent. I., lab. 42, fig. 2.

Zuphium Jimericanum. Lamarck, .'in. San. Vert., Vol. 4, p. 505.

Jlntenmr redilisli, filiform, a IKtlc longer Ihan half the hocly ; head Wntk, n<l-
vanred ; thnrar narrow, sub< urdate, redilisli ; (lylra black or bluei-li binck.
striated ; beneath black ; fed reddish, lon^;. iV. .imtr. Cab. oj M. (iiirol
dWrcy. Oliv. ,•5, p. G.'>, t. G,/. 72.

Galerita Americana. Edinb. Encyc.

16 DESCBIPTION OF INSECTS

Length three-fourths of an inch.

Body with very short dense hairs.

Head black ; front with two indented lines ; vertex with an
obsolete rufous spot ; antennae testaceous ; second, third,
fourth, and tip of the first joints black ; palpi testaceous.

Thorax and feet ferruginous.

Elytra black-blue opake ; about eight distant, acute, impunc-
tured strife.

Very common under stones, ^'c. in various parts of the
United States, and in Florida. Found also by Mr. Nuttall
on the Missouri.

Genus Odacantha. Fahr.

Anterior tibia emarginate ; elytra truncated at tip ; head at-
tenuated behind ; palpi filiform ; tongue exserted, coria-
ceous in the middle, and membranaceous each side.

Species.

!• 0. Pennsylvanica black ; elytra rufons, with punctured
striae at the base ; marginal spot, sutural spot and tip, black.

Agra Pennsylvanica. Edinb. Encyc.

Drypla Pennsylvanica. Lamarck. Jin. San. Vert. IK, p. 505.

Body with a few distant hairs.

Head black, destitute of punctures, polished ; antennae, four
basal joints rufous.

Thorax black, with excavated punctures each side, which
disappear near the tips ; a longitudinal impressed line each
side above.

Feet pale testaceous ; knees dusky or black ; tarsi, penul-
timate joint entire.

Elytra rufous, striate with punctures which are obsolete be-
hind the middle ; a large, common, longitudinally ol)long-
oval, black spot on the middle, and common, ti ansverse,
terminal, larger one, which is connected by the black hind

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 17

margin with a spot on the middle of the margin, which is
also generally connected with the eonmion middle one.
Fe/itev glabrous, black, often with a slight testaceous shade
before.

Not uncommon beneath stones, ^'C. Found also by Mr. T.
Nuttall on the Missouri. It has been referred to the genus
Agra, but the palpi arc decidedly those of Odacantha as de-
scribed by M. Latrcille,

S. O. dorsalis. — Head black ; thorax rufous ; elytra testa-
ceous ; suture black.
Length tliree-tenths of an inch.

Odacantha dorsalis. Fuhr. Si/sl. Ehut. I., p. 229.

Hf^ad black ; clifpeiis, labmm, innuth, and anlenim rufous.

Thorax cylindrical, somewhat contracted before the base,
punctured; punctures numerous, minute, sparse or want-
ing on the disk; a longitudinal dorsal im|)rcsscd line, and
an obsolete, dilated, dusky vilta on each side.

Elytra yellowish-white, striate ; strife regularly and distinct-
ly punctured ; a common blackish sutural line, dilated
before the tip.

Pectus |)ale rufous.

Feet testaceous; tarsi, penultimate joint bilobate.

Venter blackish.

Inhabits the southern states.

This ought unquestionably to form a distinct genus from
that of the preceding species.

Genus Scaritks. Fab.

Anteiior tibia cmarKinatc and crenatc ; elytra entire ; ari-
tentif siiort, tliird and fourth joints moniliform, subequal ;
labrum sliort, dentated ; mandil)les elongated, dentate ;
palpi fdiform; tongue dilaieil, very short, emarginatc at
tip; thorax rounded behind; body subcylindiical.

VOL. II. C

18 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Species.

S. subterraneus black, immaculate ; head bisulcate before :
elytra striated ; feet, second pair, with two permanent
spines on the tibia.

Length about nine-tenths of an inch.

Black ; anterior feet digitated ; head sulcated before ; elytra striated ; stria
smooth. Fabr. Syst. Eleut. I., p. 124.

Carabus interruptus. Fuess. Arch. 161, /. 29, /. 4.

Black ; head with two longitudinal impressions ; elytra striated. Oliv. III.,
p. 8, pi. 1, Jig. 10.

Head with two indented parallel lines before, half the length
of the head; majidibles profoundly canaliculate above,
teeth above striated ; antennce attaining the base of the
anterior feet, ferruginous, darker at base ; labium subca-
rinate on the middle, with a double impression at base ;
giila with an impressed line which is furcate before.

Trunk somewliat scabrous each side beneath ; thorax^ a lon-
gitudinal impressed line and a transverse anterior one ;
posterior edge emarginate ; feet, second pair, armed with
two permanent prominent spines, on the outer edge be-
low the middle, of which the inferior one is larger ; ehftra
distinctly and rather strongly striated : strife impunctured ;
margin scabrous ; epipleura glabrous ; humerus carinated
before, carina terminating abruptly in an angle.

Very common in almost every part of North America.

Genus Pasimaciius. Bonell. Latr.

Anterior tibia emarginate and crenate ; elytra entire ; anten-
nse short, third and fourth joints not moniliform ; labrum
dentated ; mandililes strongly dentate ; palpi filiform ;
tongue dilated, very short, and emarginate ; thorax sub-
cordate, truncate behind ; body dilated, depressed.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 19

Species.

1. P. depressus black, glal)i'ous ; thorax and elytra margined
with purple ; elytra perfectly smooth.

Length eleven-tenths of an inch.

Carabus depressus. Melsh Calal.

Scariles depressus. — Tliorax subquadratc, black ; elytra glabrous. Fabr. Sy»t.
Eleul., p. 123.

Scarites depressus. — Antennx black, obscure at tip ; head with two impressed
lines before ; thorax with a loiisitudiiial impresseil line ; borders sometimes
black-blue ; tarsi black-brown. O/iv. If/., .Vo. 36, p. 5, t. 2, /. 13.

Bodif glabrous, l)lack. ini[)uncUirc(l.

Head transverse qiialratf, witlj two indented longitudinal

lines njore than lialfits l('ni»;th; anteiiniv black-i)rownisI) at

tip, first joint black : lahnim unequal : tf/andihles as h)ng

as the head, strongly dentate in the middle ; tooth in tlic

left one double.
Thorax with an impressed line and two indentations near

the base ; exterior margin purple ; excurvcd near the

base.
Eli/tra glabrous, perfectly smootli ,• outer margin purple,

with a line of elevated granules.
Tarsi l)lack-brown.
far. a. I. ess iliiuted ; margins blue; elytra smooth, with a

slight appearance of hues ; sternum striated at tip. — From

the Missouri. — Cabinet of Nuttall.

This fine large insect is of frequent occurrence iri the
United States beneath old logs, stones, ^c, and is very pro-
bably the same as tlie ilepresaua of Cayenne: to which coun-
try authors have referred this species.

2, P. *mhsitJcatus l)lack, glabrous ; thorax and elytra mar-
gined with blueish-purple ; elytra with olisolete lines.

f.rn!rf/i four-fiftlis of an inch.
Bodi/ black, impunctured.

2

so DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Head impressed, frontal lines profound; antennm with ferru-
ginous hairs towards the tip.

Thorax margined with blued-purple, slightly contracted be-
hind ; edge near the posterior angles slightly excurved ;
dorsal and basal lines very distinct.

Elytra with broad shallow sulcations ; with (in some parts)
obsolete rudiments of punctures ; interstitial lines slightly
elevated, convex, obtuse ; margin blued-purple, with a re-
gular series of minute, elevated, ocellate granules.

I found several specimens of this insect in Georgia and
Florida. It is sufficiently distinct from the preceding ; being
smaller, more of an oval form, the thorax less contracted
at the base, and the elytra subsulcate; the lateral edge
also is excurved at the base, which character distinguishes
it at once from the marginatm of Fabr. and the subloevis of
Palisot. How closely it may correspond with the siilcatus
of Macleay I am unable to determine, not having vet seen
his work.

1 have to regret the circumstance of my not having it in
my power to refer to M. Palisot de Beauvois's splendid" work
on the insects of Africa and America. The seventh number
only, belonging to the library of the Philadelphia museum,
has yet met my eye ; although I have made several attempts
to procure an entire copy of the work from Paris.

Genus Clivina. Litr.

Anterior tibia emarginate and crenate ; elytra entire ; labrum
entire ; mandibles with obsolete teeth ;' tongue prominent,
membranaceous each side ; thorax rounded.

Species.

1. C. hipustulata black ; thorax impunctured ; elytra with
punctured strife, and a large obscure rufous spot near the
tip and at tlie base of each.

Length three-tenths of an inch.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. SI

Scariles bipuslulatus? black; elytra striated: a large ferruginous spot bchinrl.
Fabr. /., p. I2j.

Scarites bipuslululun. Melsh. CatuL

Scarites 4-maculatus. Palisot de Beauvois.

BofUi blackish ; beneath piceous.

Head somewhat unequal before ; antemm and -palpi reddish

brown.
Thorax l)lack, itnpunctured ; a lonfi!;itudinal impressed line

joining a transverse angulatcd one before ; lateral carinated

edge abbreviated and recmved at tlie tip.
Elytra I)rown-black, stron2;ly striated; striie nearly equal to

the intermediate lines and punctured, punctures excavated;

a large obsolete spot at the base, and a large and more

distinct spot near the tips of each, rufous; ep'ipleura witli

large and profound punctures at base,

A large species by no means common. I think it highly
probalile that the -i-tiiaci/latus of Palisot is no other than this
insect; if so, tlic spots of the elytra, and especially those of
the base, in his figure, are by far too distinct; indeed, the
former are always obsolete and sometimes not at all visible.

S. C.*virklis dark green, l)encath blackish; elytra punc-
tured. cu|)rcous on the disk, edge blueish ; feet testaceous.
Length one-fourth of an inch.

Scarites viridis. Melsh. CatuL

Body somewhat hairy.

Head equal, dark cupreous-green; antennm i^rxd month ru-
fous; mnndiblf'S black at tip.

Trunk beneath reddish black; thornr cuijreous-oireen,
somewhat liairy; lateral carinated edi^e al)l)reviat('d. very
oblique, rectilinear; a dorsal impressed line. and anterior,
transverse, anctdated one ; elytrn dark cupn-ous tiui^ed
with e;reen. hairy : striie obsolete, lines of rlisfaiit punc-
tures obsolete behind, margin greenish, edge blue, an im-

33 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

pressed line near the suture excurved at its base near the
sutmei feet testaceous.

3. C. Hineolata blackish ; head with several elevated lines ;
thorax with three impressed ones ; elytra striate.

Lejigth one-fifth of an inch.

Head with several elevated lines, of which the two interior
are largest, forming a groove between them, and con-
tinued and connivent upon the labrum ; behind the ele-
vated lines, punctured.

Thorax, three impressed longitudinal lines ; intermediate
one attaining the anterior transverse angulated one, — la-
teral ones abbreviated near the anterior margin ; lateral
edge continued and projecting into a slight angle behind
the middle.

Elytra black-brown or greenish, striate ; strife punctured,
profound, and equal to the intermediate lines.

Feet testaceous.

Readily distinguishable from the preceding ones by the
elevated frontal lines as well as by the impressed line of
the thorax.

4. C. ^pallida pale yellowish ; thorax depressed, truncate
before, lateral edge minutely angulated behind the
middle.

Length one-fifth of an inch.

Bodif pale, yellowish, inunaculate.

Head sulcated each side before.

Thorax little elevated, with a longitudinal impressed line,
suliquadrate, truncate the entire width before, rounded
behind; lateral edge attaining the base, with a slightly
projecting angle behind the middle, al)ove which is a
small puncture.

jE///^m strongly striate-puncturcd; a marginal series of short
transverse lines, forming quadrate intervals.

INHABITING NORTH AMEUICX. ^8

Found on Chinquoteage island, coast of Virginia, under
yellow-pine baik.

5. C. *sphKrico(lis. — Thorax globose, with an impressed
line; elytra witli punctured distant stria-.

Leni^th one-fifth of an incli.

Bodii irnpunctured, witii a few scattered hairs, beneath l)lark.

Head black, longitudinally indented each side ; moutli and

antcmut rufous.
Thorax purple-black, rounded before and behind ; lateral

edge obsolete near the [)asc. more distinct before, and

destitute of any angle behind ; an impressed dorsal line.
Ehjtru reddish-brown or bronzed, with punctured strisc ;

stria- distant.
Feet dark rufous.
Venter black.

Differs from the succeeding species, in being larger and
in having the strife more distant from each other, — or, in
other words, less dilated.

This and the two following species belong to the genus
Discfiyriiis of Bonclli.

6. C. *globulosa Ijlack ; mouth, antcnnfp, and feet rufous ;
elytra with punctured obtuse stria-.

Length, from one-tenth to five-fortieths of an inch.

Scariles globiilosus. Alelsh. Catal.

Head black, longitudinally indented on each side; mouth and

antenna rufous ; neck beneath rufous.
Trunk beneath l)lack, tinged each side with rufous.
Thorax pur|)le-l)lack. glo!>ose, rounded l»elore and i)eliind;

lateral edge obsolete near the l)ase, more distinct before,

and destitute of a projecting angle behind ; an impressed

dorsal line.
Elytra black, striate-punctured ; punctures crpial in leni^lli

to the intermediate spaces and nearly equal in breadlh to

the interstitial lines.

34 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Feet rufous ; venter black.

This resembles Scarites gibbtis, of whicli no description
has been given, sufficiently chaiacteristic, to enable us to
judge of their differences. It may not be improper to ob-
serve here, that the same figure of Fuess. Arch. — the 17tli
of plate 29, has been referred to, both for the S. gibbus and
Carnbus ? globator ; it is probable tiierefore that they are
one species, particularly as Herbst calls it globator, and has
the S. gibbus of Fabr. as a synonym.

7. C. *pallipe?inis reddish-brown, beneath black ; elytra pale
yellowish.

Length three-twentieths of an inch.

Body impunctured, beneath black, sides reddish-brown.

Head reddisii-brown ; antennae and mouth paler.

Thorax globose, somewhat truncated before, rounded be-
hind, colour of the head, a longitudinal impressed line,
lateral edge obsolete behind.

Elytra pale yellow or whitish, striated : strife distant, with
obsolete punctures ; an obsolete blackish oblique spot at
base, another at tip, and a still less distinct one behind
the middle.

Feet rufous.

Venter testaceous-black, and (like the trunk) margined with
rufous.

Found at Egg-harbour, coast of Virginia and Florida, and
is common.

Genus Morio. Latr.

Anterior tibia emarginate ; elytra entire ; palpi filiform ; an-
tennte moniliform, joints subequal ; tongue prominent,
truncate at tip, and membranaceous each side ; mandibles
acute.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. £0

Species.

M. Georgia deep black above, beneath piceous-black ; nasus

with four elevated lines.
Length nearly three-fifths of an inch,

Scarites Georonas piceous blackish ; /Aorax subcordate ; e/y/rrt canaliculate, striie
subcienate, those of the margin dentate. Palhot de Beauvoin, Vol. I., No. 7,
pi. 15, /. 5.

Body elongated, black, immaculate.

Head, an elevated line and groove over the eyes and base
of the antennae, two indented frontal lines ; ;;rtsw5, four
elevated longitudinal lines ; aiitenmr, ferruginous hairs at
tip, basal joint piceous : labriim piceous-black, emargi-
natcd at tip ; mandibles canaliculate on exterior base.

Thorax glabrous, narrower behind; angles acute ; a strongly
impressed dorsal line, and an abbreviated indented one
each side at hind angles ; exterior margin with six or eight
hairs; a slight emarginure before the hind angles; no ab-
breviated stria near the scutel.

Elytra striate; stritc impunctured, slightly crenate, marginal
one more conspicuously so; marginal interstitial line
ocellatcly punctured from base to tip ; humeral angles
slightly acute.

I found two specimens under the bark of a decaying tree,
in South Carolina; I have not met with any in this state.

Genus Harpalus, Latr.

Anterior tibia emarginate ; four anterior tarsi dilated in the
male ; elytra entire ; antenna' filiform, joints sulicylin-
driral : labrum subquadrate, entire, or very slightly emar-
ginate ; palpi filiform ; tongue exserted, cylindrical arnl co-
riaceous in the middle, and membranaceous each side, tip
truncate, unarmed ? neck none.

VOL,. II. D

S6 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Species.

1. H, caliginosus black; antennw, palpi, tarsi, and anterior

coxpe ferrucinous-brown.
Length one inch, breadth two-fifths nearly.

Apterous ; thorax square, black-obscure ; elytra striate ; antennx testaceous.
Inhabits North America. Fabr. Syst.Eleut. I., /). 188.

Antennx and palpi ferruginous-brown ; head smooth with two slightly im-
pressed points before ; thorax broad, smooth ; scutel small, triangular ; body
black ; thighs with a range of small impressed points. Oliv. III. 35, pi. 6,
f. 64, and^pl. 7, f. Si.

Carabus politus. Melsh. Catal.

Head glabrous ; antennce, palpi, and edge of the labriim fer-
ruginous-brown ; an indented puncture each side on the
front; .labrum slightly emarginate at tip; labium unarmed
in the sinus.

Trunk beneath punctured.

Thorax with numerous minute punctures, longitudinal line
obsolete, area of the hind angles depressed and confluently
punctured, posterior angles acute.

Tarsi and coxae of the two anterior pairs of feet ferruginous-
brown.

Elytra striate ; striae impunctured ; margin opake, with nu-
merous minute punctures and a few larger ones.

Venter black, rarely piceous.

The largest species of the genus in this country ; when
irritated it diffuses a very pungent vinegar-like odour. If
the species described by Fabricius is in reality apterous, as'
he supposed it to be, this insect is a distinct species ; and the
name given by Mr. Melsheimer will be retained. It is very
common.

3. H. bicolor ? black, beneath deep piceous ; antennae, palpi,

and feet testaceous.
Lengthy male less — female more than three-fifths of an inch.

INHABlTtNG NORTH AMERICA. V7

Winged ; body above black, beneath ferruginous. Inhabits North Americn.
Mm. D. Lewin. Fabr. S. Ekut. I., p. 193.

Resembles C. rttficornis ; head black ; /Aornj; almost square, witli a loug;itu(linal
line impressed in the middle, and two impressions posterior ; elytra biiick,
striated; body beneath brown, more or less clear. Cab. of M. Bosc. Oliv.
III., p. 57, lab. II, f. 9-2, 6., Length seven-tenths of an inch.

Carabus ostraceicornis. Mehh. Catal.

Head black ; antenntt and vimith rufo-tcstaccous ; gula

piceous.
Thorax glabrous on the disk ; a dorsal impressed line : area

of the hind angles depressed and confluently punctured.

posterior angles rounded.
Elytra striate, slrise impunctured, margin with numerous

punctures -. pfclus and pustpediis piccous-bluck, piceous on

the disk, with obsolete punctures.
Feet testaceous, pale ; venter plceous-black ; tail paler.

A very common insect under stones, ^c. It does not
pertectly correspond with the description of bicolor of
authors, but I do not know what other insect they allude to.
Mr. Marsham describes this insect as aa inhabitant of Great
Britain.

3. H. *eratic\is reddish-brown, beneath testaceous; elytra
fuscous : tliorax a little contracted at base.

Length three-iit'ths of an inch nearly.

Bodij glabrous, reddish-brown, beneath testaceous.

Head not darker tlian the tliorax ; antemm fuscous towards
the tip.

Thorax broad as the elytra, gradually contracted behind,
marginal groove somewhat dilated, dorsal and t)asal lines
distinct, continued to the base, anterior transverse line
widely curved, base not wider than the tip, each side ol)-
soletely punctured, basal edge rectilinear, lateral angles
obtuse slightly rounded.

Elytra darker tlian the thorax, striate, striie inii)uncturcd.
interstitial lines convex.

as DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Feet pale testaceous.

It is very probable that this species may prove to be the
H. Pennsylvanicus, instead of the following one, as the
thorax, in being narrowed behind, agrees with the figure
OHvier has given of that insect.

4. H. Pennsylvanicus reddish-brown ; head darker, beneath
testaceous ; thorax punctured each side at base.

Length three-fifths of an inch.

Reddish-brown ; head dusky ; shells striate ; body beneath, antennx, and feet
testaceous. Inhabits Pennsylvania. Turt., p. 470. Degeer. 4, t 17, f. 22.

Head brown -testaceous, obscure ; thorax brown-testaceous, nearly as broad as
elvtra, with a somewhat impressed line ; elytra striated, brown-testaceous ;
body beneath and feet testaceous. Cab. of M. Banks. Oliv. III., p. 72, /. 8,
/. 92.

Head dusky reddish-brown ; lahruni darker, fip excepting the

central porfion depressed and hairy ; mandibles black at

fip ; antennae testaceous, paler at base.
Pectus and postpectus testaceous ; thorax reddish-brown, as

broad as the elytra, transversely quadrate, angles rounded,

a dorsal slightly impressed line, base each side impressed

and confluently punctured.
Elytra striated, strife impunctured ; interstifial marginal lines

obsoletely punctured, exterior one with a few larger sub-

ocellate punctures.
Feet pale testaceous ; venter pale testaceous.

5. H. *faunus dark reddish brown ; antennse, palpi, and feet
paler ; thorax punctured behind.

Length half an inch.

Carabus faunus. Melsh. Catal.

Body reddish-brown obscure, beneath rather paler,

Head^ nasal suture disfinct; antemiK and palpi pale testaceous.

Thorax quadrate, hardly narrowed before or arquated at

INHABITING NORTH AMEHICA, 29

tlie sides, hind angles rounded, dorsal line faintly im-
pressed, basal lines dilated and with tliehind niarn;iM con-
spicuously punctured, lateral inarii,in depressed, puiiclurt-d.

Elytra striate, strisv with distant minute punctures, punctures
of the marginal line not ocellate.

Feet pale testaceous.

Of this insect I have seen but two specimens: one of
which was sent me by my friend Dr. J. F. Alelsheimer of
Hanover.

6. H. *herbivagiis deep black-brown, beneath piceous-
black : labrum piccous-black ; thoracic angles rounded ;
feet reddish-brown.

Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Head black ; antenme and palpi testaceous.

Thorax, impressed line obsolete, lateral basal lines very dis-
tinct, margin somewhat depressed, posterior angles round-
ed, not depressed or punctured above.

Elytra, stride impunctured, tip obtusely rounded, marginal
punctures continued, edge ferruginous.

Feet reddish-brown.

Not uncommon. Very much resembles the next, but
differs from it by the more obtuso termination of tiie body,
^'C. This may possibly be the H. (hibius of Palisot. but his
description is not sufliciently detailed to enable us to deter-
mine satisfactorily.

7. H.* siniiUs blackish, beneath piceous-l)lack ; elytra green-
ish or cupreous: labium ferruginous; posterior thoracic
angles subacute ; feet pale testaceous.

Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Head purple-black ; antenna brown, base and palpi testa-
ceous : Idhruni ferruginous.

Thorax purple-black, liind angles subacute and with the

30 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

margin slightly depressed, impunctured, dorsal line ob-
solete, basal lines subimpressed.

Elytra dark green or cupreous ; striae impunctured, edge
ferruginous, tip acutely rounded.

Feet pale testaceous.

I collected this species in North Carolina, where it ap-
pears to be rather common. It is distinguishable from the
preceding only by immediate comparison : the tips of the
elytra when taisen together are more acute, the labrum fer-
ruginous, hind thoracic angles more acute, feet much paler,
and the thorax more distinctly transverse.

8. H. *vulpeculus rufous ; elytra brownish, impunctured ;
posterior thoracic angles rectangular.

Length nearly two-fifths of an inch.

Body glabrous, beneath obsoletely punctured.

Head with the mandibles black at tip.

Thorax a little contracted behind, base each side depre^^sed
and punctured, dorsal line obsolete, lateral angles rectan-
gular, basal edge rectilinear.

Scutel dark rufous.

Elytra blackish-brown, strise profound, impunctured, inter-
stitial lines convex, impunctured.

Pectus and postpedus obsoletely punctured ; feet paler.

This, at first view, resembles Feronia inter stitialis.
I have but a single specimen, which is a female.

9. H. *iripennis black ; elytra black-blue iridescent ; feet
testaceous.

Length o\\f'-v.}\\r{\\ of an inch.

Body l)lack, beneath dark piceous.

Jlntenmv, labrum, mouth, and feet rufo-testaceous, the latter

paler.
Thorax somewhat wider than long, widest in the middle,

liardly narrower at base than at tip ; lateral edge piceous.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. gf

almost re,2;ularly arquated ; ant!;les obtusely rounded ; basal
edge rectilinear; dorsal and basal lines obsolete ; base wiib
numerous sligbt punctures.
Elytra blackish, vvitii blue and iridescent reflexions.

10. W. *vividis green, l)eneath black ; feet rufous ; tiiorax
punctuied; elytra with minute liairs.

Length two-fifths of an inch.

Head tinged with bronxe; anteiimr am] palpi rufous ; fahrum
piceous.

Thorax before and at base slightly bronzed; punctures nu-
merous, obsolete on the anterior disk.

Elytra sligluly tinged witii brassy, with acute, impunctured
striiv, and numerous short hairs ; interstitial lines flat.

Feet rufous.

Bears some resemblance to Feronia lucublandus.

11. H. *hyhicis black; labrum, mouth, and feet testaceous;
abdomen piceous ; base of the thorax narrowed, angles
obtuse.

Length three-tenths of an inch.

Body l)lack, l)cneath piceous.

Labrum^ mandibles exce|)ting at tip, palpi, three basal
joints of the antennit^ and feet rufo-testaceous ; antennit
dusky.

Thorax of equal diameters, narrower at base than the elytra,
broadest in the middle; lateral edge regularly arquated;
angles very obtuse, posterior edge rectilinear; a longi-
tudinal, slightly impressed, contiimous line ; basal lines
very distinct.

Elytra with a very slight greenish shade ; strite not distinctly
punctured; intcisiitial lines dfpresscl : hnsal joitit of the
anterior and intciincdiate tarsi dilated and granulated
beneath, tlie remaining joints hardly dilatt-d.

The first or basal joint of the antciior and intermediate

32 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

tarsi only is dilated, and it is granulated beneath as in c(«nm,
and of course does not, strictly speaking, belong to this
genus. The Baltimnriensis, carbonarius, agricolus, caeniis,
and riisticus have also granulations or rather close set hairs
on the dilated tarsi of the male. On account of this distinc-
tive character, I should have referred them all to that divi-
sion of Feronia in which M. Latreille places Epomis, &jc.,
did not that author expressly state that insects of that divi-
sion ought to have the two anterior tarsi only of the male
dilated.

12. H. *rusticus deep black-brown; base of the antennse,
mouth beneath and palpi, and posterior thoracic angles
reddish-brown ; glabrous beneath.

Length from two-fifths to half an inch.

Carahus rusticus. Melsh. Catal.

Jintennm brown, two basal joints reddish -brown; labiuiu
black ; maxillce ^nA palpi reddish-brown.

Thorax glabrous, a dorsal impressed line, and two abbre-
viated ones at base ; margin not depressed, but continuing
the general curve to the edge ; hind angles obsoletely
reddish-brown.

Elytra, striae im punctured ; second, fourth, and sixth inter-
stitial lines punctured near the tip, marginal one with
ocellate punctures not interrupted in the middle.

Pectus and postpectus not hairy.

Var. a. Elytra reddish-brown.

Very similar to H. carbonarbis and equally common ; but
is readily distinguishable by tlie colour of the thoracic
angles, naked breast, punctures of the interstitial lines, ^c.

13. H. *carhonarius black; palpi and base of the antennsp
piceous ; sternum and postpectus somewhat liairy.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 88

Length nearly eleven-twentieths of an inch.

Carabus carbonarius. Melsh. Calal.

Jintennce blackish-brown, basal joints piceoiis ; palpi piccoiis
at the tips of the joints ; vertex with uti obsolete piceous
spot visil)le in a particular light.

Thorax, dorsal line not deeply impressed ; extci ior and pos-
terior lateral margin depressed and somewhat rugose ;
basal lines not definite ; l)ase not nairowed.

Elytra, stritt- impunctured. punctures on the marginal inter-
stitial line few and hardly occllate, sixth inteistitial line
punctured near the tip ; sternum a little haiiy from the
head to the tip : posfpectus somewhat hairy on the disk.

Fenter, first segment hairy beneath.

A very common species. — The hairs beneath are small,
and require the aid of the microscope to be discovered.

15. H. *agricolus black; palpi and antennae piceous, the
latter paler at base ; sternum and postpectus glabrous.

Length from nine-twentieths to one half of an inch.

Antennw dusky piceous, basal joint light piceous; palpi pi-
ceous, paler at tip ; vertex with an obsolete, piceous spot,
visible in a particular ligl)t.

Thorax slightly narrower at base, dorsal line distinctly but
not deeply impressed, lateral margins (lc|)ressed and a
little rugose, spaces of the basal lines deeply impressed
and densely punctured.

Ehitra, strife profound, impunctured ; sixth interstitial line
with a single puncture.

This species resembles the precodinc; one, but it has a
shorter and more robust form, and tin- thorax is somewhat
narrower at the base than in the middle, which is not the
case in carbonarius. It is also common.

16. H. *Iiallimoriensish];\ck; elvtra reddish-brown. blarki><h
on the disk; feet pale testaceous.

VOL. II. F.

34 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Length two-fifths of an inch.

Carabus Baltimoriensis. Melsh. Catal.

J^asus with about three hairy punctures each side at tip ; an-
tennae black-brown, base, labruni, palpi, and base of the
mandibles pale reddish-brown.

Thorax black, somewhat narrower behind, posterior angles
acute, dorsal line distinct, basal lines dilated, and with the
posterior margin conspicuously punctured.

Scutel blackish.

Elytra, base, exterior and posterior margins reddish-brown,
common disk blackish.

Feet testaceous.

Distinguished from all the preceding ones by the thorax
being much narrowed behind.

17. H. *cmius blackish slightly tinged with green ; palpi and

base of the antennse testaceous.
Length seven-tenths of an inch.

Carabus cienus. Melsh. Catal.

Head green-black slightly tinged with cupreous; antennas
brown, three basal Joints and palpi testaceous.

Thorax black very slightly tinged with green, transverse ;
hind margin punctured as broad as the middle, and equal
to the base of the elytra ; dorsal and posterior lines dis-
tinct, beneath black.

Ehftra striate, strife impunctured, acute, interstitial lines flat.

Feet testaceous : thighs testaceous-black ; dilated tarsi gra-
nulated beneath.

Genus Feronia.* Latr.

From this genus, as defined by Latreille, in the Regne Ani-
mal, I have distinguished Abax, Epomis, Chlcenins, and
Dicehis, as distinct genera.

* This name is also made use of in botany, and ought therefore to be changed.

INHABITING NOUTH AMERICA. 89

Species.

1. F. *musculis. — Body oval, piceous; thorax at base as

broad as tlie elytra.
Length otje-tiftli to ono-fourtli of an inch.
B III If oval, lark piceous or hlackisii ; lieneath piceous.
L/ibrum piceo is ; antennn and palpi rufous.
Thorax from the middle to tin; base as broad as the base of

the elytra ; hind anj!;les subacute, not depressed ; lai ;ral

mari;;in not depressed, but with an elevated line; dorsal

and basal lines indistinct.
Elytra striate, stria* indistinctly punctured, lateral interstitial

li le serrate before and behind on the inner edge.
Feet rufous or piceous.

This species I found common on the eastern shore of
Virginia, in October, on the blossoms of the kinks bush.
When caught, like very many of the tribe, they diffuse a
strong fwtid odour. In Florida I took several specimens
on the wing in a conflagrated salt marsh. — Belongs to the
genus Amaru of Bonelli.

3. F. *basillaris oval, blackish-bronzed, beneath l^lack ; feet
piceous ; thorax punctured each side at base, and as
broad as the elytra : palpi blackish.

Length three-tentlis of an inch.

Carahus samaragdulus. Mchh. Calal.

Body oval, blackish-bronzed or purplish-black ; beneath
black.

Antennte deep-brown, three l)asal joints rufous ; pntju l)lark.

Thorax from the middle to the base as broa I an the elytra,
numerous distinct punctures each side at base, posterior
angles acute, margin not depressed.

Elytra striate, stripe punctured, marginal interstitial line ser-
rate on the inner edge, margin tinged with green.

36 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Feet deep piceous.

Closely resembles impuncficolHs, but the stn?e of the elytra;
and the hind angles of the thorax are punctured. — The name
somaragdulus having l)een appropriated to a very different
insect, 1 have substituted that of basillaris. It belongs to the
genus Amara of Bonelli.

3. F. *impnndicolHs oval, blackish-bronzed, beneath black ;
thorax im punctured and as broad at base as the elytra ;
palpi blackish.

Length three-tenths of an inch.

Bodij oval, slightly attenuated behind, blackish-bronzed or

purplish-black ; antetmce brown, three basal joints rufous ;

palpi black.
Thorax from the middle to the base as broad as the base

of the elvtra, base impunctured, hind angles acute, dorsal

and basal lines distinct, margin not depressed.
Elytra somewhat narrowed behind, with impunctured stride,

lateral interstitial line serrate on the inner edge.
Feet piceous-black.

This insect is not uncommon in Pennsylvania; it was
also found by Mr. Nuttall on the Missouri. — Corresponds
with the cliaracters of the genus Amara of Bonelli.

4. F. ^angustata oval, blackish-cupreous, beneath black ,•
feet rufous; thorax impunctured, as broad as the elytra:
palpi rufous.

Length hardly one-fourth of an inch.

Bndif oval, above blackish-cu|)reous, beneath black.

Jintcrvut and palpi pale rufous.

Thorax from the mid<ile to tlie base as broad as the elytra,

impunctured. posterior angles acute, margin not depressed,

d')rsal and basal lines distinct.
Eljftra striate, impunctured, uiarginalinterstitial line serrat*

on the inner edge.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. gy

Feet rufous.

Taken by Mr. Nuttall on the Missouri. Resembles ha&il-
laris and impuncticolUs, but is much smaller, and differs
from the first by being impunctured, and from the last bj
the colour of the antenntv, palpi, feet, ^'c. Belongs to the
genus Amara of Bonelli.

5. F. *obesa black, beneath piceous ; antennae, mouth, and
feet rufous.

Length more than two-fifths of an inch.

Body black ; antenna' and mouth reddish-brown ; 7tasus and

labritm very dark reddish-brown.
Thorax slightly margined, much punctured at base, dorsal

line slightly imj)ressed, basal lines distinct.
Elytra with stria? very distinctly punctured, interstitial lines

depressed, beneath piceous.
Mdomen and/ec/ reddish-brown.

A very short and wide species, belonging to the genus
Amara of Bonelli. It was found at Harrowgate, the seat of
my friend Mr, J. Gilliams.

6. F. lineola pale yellowish-testaceous ; elytra each with a
black line.

Length three-tenths of an inch full.

Carabtts lineola winged, ferruginous ; elytra with a black line. Fabr. Sy»l.
Eleut., I , p. 197. Mm. D. Banks, Inhabits North America.

Carahu.1 lineola. — Elytra striate ; thorax paler, -with two black linear spots.
Turt.

Carabus lineola ferruginous ; thorax equal, with two points ; elytra with tw»
black lines.

lAke C fernifrinosus ; nn/pnua? ferruginous, as long as thorax; head ferru-
ginoas ; th'^rar a liitle narrowpr than the elytra, ferniginous with two point*
black obscure; ely'ru ferruginous, striated, aline upon t-ach bifurcated .inte-
riorly ; bndi) bciMMtli brown ferruginous ; /f/ ferruginous. Cab. of M
Banks. OUv. IJL.p. "8, pi 7, Jig. 75.

38 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Head testaceous-yellow ; antennae subglabrous, and with the
palpi paler ; a black transverse line on the vertex ; and tips
of the mandibles and eyes black.

Thorax colour of the head, transverse, subquadrate, rather
narrower than the elytra, angles rounded, a dorsal im-
pressed line which is somewhat indented before, a black
longitudinally rhombic spot each side of the middle, an
irregular smaller one each side at base, and a transverse
obsolete arquated one before ; all beneath and feet paler,
anterior ones five-spined on outer edge of the tibia, two
terminal spines approximate.

Elytra paler than the thorax, each with a black, abbreviated,
vitta, furcate before, and an abbreviated, black, obsolete
band at base, striate ; strise acute, distant, impunctured ,
margin impunctured.

Var. a. Thorax rufous, immaculate ; head black.

This species 1 might have referred to C. fureatns of
Fabr., had he not quoted for lineola a figure of Olivier's
which agrees very well with this insect ; an agreement to
which, when combined with his accompanying description,
no doubt can be attached.

Is not furcatus the same insect ? I should suppose the
species named comma to be also closely allied to it.

7. Y. pallipes. Head black; thorax and elytra pale testa-
ceous, the former black on the disk, and rounded at the
posterior angles, — the latter witli an abbreviated black
vitta ; beneath black ; feet pale.

Lengthy male one-fourth — female three-tenths of an inch.

Carabus pallipes winged, black ; thorax rounded ; thorax and elytra with a
pale margin ; feet pale. Fabr. Syst. Eleut. I., p. 200. Mm. Dr. Hunter.
Inhabits North America.

Antennae black, pale at base ; head black ; mouth ferruginous ; elytra striate,
black, border pale. Turt.

Antennx ferruginous, obscure ; Aearfblack; wio«<A and ;)a/pi ferruginous ; thorax

INHABITING NOUTH AMERICA. 39

black, margined with ferruginous ; elylra striated black, border ferruginous
pale ; fcorfy beneath black ; feet pale. Cab. Dr. JIunler.

Oliv. III., p. 89. pi. 9,/. 99. Carolina.

Carabusfurcalus. Mehh. Catal.

Body beneath black.

Head deep black ; anteiinoe and palpi ferruginous.

Tfiorax pah; testaceous ; a large black spot occupying the

disk, sometimes distinguished into several obsolete lines,

a longitudinal impressed abbreviated line.
Feet pale ; anterior ones six-spined on the outer edge of the

tibia, two terminal s[)ines approximate.
Elytra paler than the thorax, striated, impunctured, each

with a broad, black, abbreviated vitta, which is separated

from the suture by the first elevated line.

Var. a. Pale testaceous beneath,

Far.fl. Elytra with a common black disk, formed by the

junction of the vittsu at the suture.
Far. >. Thorax immaculate.

Very like a lineola, but is a little smaller, and more de-
pressed ; and otiierwise sufficiently distinct. I should have
been in doul)t whether this species or tlie next was the true
pallipes of Fabr., had it not been for the specific character
^•thorax rotundatns'" applierj by that naturalist to his insect,
a character more decidedly applicable to this species.

It is not uncommon, and appears to be a general inha-
bitant of this country, Nuttall found it on the Missouri.

8, F. *atrimedea pale rufous ; head, disk of the thorax and
of the elytra black ; tx-neath black ; feet testaceous ; pos-
terior tlioracc angles acute,

Li'ngth one-fourth of an inch.

Bnd]i black beneath.

Hrad l)lack ; antennrr, ba«5e rufous ; pnlpi rufous.

Thorax rufous, with a l)Iack disk ; edge slightly excurvcd
near the hind angles ; iiind angles acute ; dorsal line dis-

40 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

tinct ; basal lines indefinite, indented ; base each side punc-
tured.

Elytra with impunctured striae and depressed interstitial
lines, pale rufous or testaceous with a common black disk,
which is dilated behind the middle and attenuated before.

Feet testaceous.

A greater portion of the antennae and feet were wanting
in the specimen, but one of the anterior tarsi which was
remaining was much more dilated than that of the preceding
species. From the Missouri. Nuttall.

9. F. *longicornis apterous, dark piceous, beneath paler j

antennte rufous ; feet testaceous.
Length rather more than half an inch.

Carabus longicornis. Melsh. Catal.

Body glabrous, dark piceous, beneath piceous.

Front longitudinally indented each side; antennas rufous,
half as long as the body, the joints attenuated towards their
bases ; labriim truncate, rufous ; palpi rufous.

Thorax contracted behind, edge slightly excurved at the hind
angles, anterior transversely indented line profound, dor-
sal line at base abruptly canaliculate, basal lines dilated,
suhorbicular, profound, scabrous, extending from near the
dorsal line to the angle.

Elytra^ interstitial lines of the disk convex, glabrous, striae
obtuse, punctures approximate, transverse, extending upon
the sides of the striae, sixth and seventh striae obsolete.

Feet testaceous.

This species is not of frequent occurrence, inhabits moist
places under stones. It appears to belong to the genus
Percus of Bonelli.

10. F. *unicolor apterous, glabrous, black; tips of the an-

ixnABiTTNG Nonrn America. 41

tenna? brownish : tarsi piccous ; stiire of the elytra punc-
tured.

Length seven-tenths of an inch.

Bodif 2;lal)rous, black, iiiipunctiired.

Hi (ill (uitcninr brownish towards the tips, joints attenuated
towards the bases; lahrum truncate; pulpi piceous.

Thorax transverse, contracted beiiitul rather abru|)tly, tip of
tlie posterior angles ol)tusely rounded, siiblobatc : dorsal
line jiot attainino; tlie base, ijasal lines indcnteil, ex-
curved to the angles, anterior transverse line obsolete or
wanting, lateral edge much rounded, abru()tly cxcurved
behind.

Eli/fra convex, strife not deeply impressed, punctures lon-
gitudinal, alihreviatcd stri:e near the suture, obsolete
marginal interstitial line serrate with occUate punctures,
third line with a single puncture near the middle.

Feet black ; tibia at tip and tarsi dark piccous.

This species is referable to the genus Pterochistus of Bo-
nelii.

1 1. F. *sti/gica apterous, black, glabrous, impunctured ; strite

impunctured ; l)asal thoracic lines dilated.
Length more than three-fifths of an inch.

Carahus »li/irictin. Alclsh. Catitl.

Body lilack, impunctured, glabrous.

AntennK rather surpassing the base of the thorax, brownisli

towards the tips, the joints attenuated towards their bases;

palpi rufous.
Thorax, diameters sul)equal, gradually a little contracted

behind, edge not excurved at the hind angles, hind aivsh's

not prominent, rounded, basal lines double, dilated, orlji-

cular. and scal)r()us. I»asc wider tl)an the petiole.
Elytra slightly tiiiaed with brown, stiise indented, ini|)Mnc-

tured, interstitial lines convex, third with a sirjglc punc*

ture behind; ivings none.

VOL. II. F

42 DESCBIPTION OF INSECTS

Feet black ; tibia and tarsi deep piceous.
Belongs to the genus Pterostichus of Bonelli.

'0'=

12. F. *m(Esta apterous, black, glabrous ; thorax as broad as
the elytra, much contracted behind ; elytra very obtusely
rounded behind, striae impunctured.

Length seven-tenths of an inch.

Body black, glabrous, impunctured, rounded behind.

Antennae brownish or ferruginous towards the tips; palpi
piceous.

Thorax before the middle as broad as the base of the elytra,
much contracted behind, posterior angles obtusely rounded,
dorsal line very distinct, basal ones excavated, slightly
punctured and placed at the lateral angles, base not wider
than the petiole, basal edge rectilinear.

Elytra slightly tinged with purplish, very obtusely rounded
behind, striae profoundly indented, impunctured, inter-
stitial lines very convex, third with about four distant
punctures.

Postpectus, peduncle punctured each side.

Feet, thighs robust ; ta7^si piceous.

Is distinguished from stygicus by the very narrow tho-
racic base, and very obtuse termination of the body.

13. F. *sigillata apterous, black, glabrous; thorax slightly
contracted behind, anterior transverse line acute and
deeply impressed ; elytral strife punctured.

Length more than seven-tenths of an inch.

Body black, glaltrous, impunctured.

Jintennae brownish towards the tip ; lahrum dark piceous ;
mandibles ol)liquely striated above conspicuously; palpi
piceous.

Thorix broadest before the middle, gradually a little con-
tracted behind, dorsal line acute, impressed, continued,
anterior transverse line acute, deeply impressed resem-

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 48

bliiig a suture, area of the basal lines indented, each witli
two shorter oblique lines, lateial edge slightly cur\ed, not
perceptibly excurved near the base, basal angles rounded,
base much wider tlian the petiole.

Eliitra, striiL' not very deeply impressed, distinctly punc-
tured. al)l)reviated stria* near the scutel, ol)solete, inter-
stitial lines depressed, third one with two distant obsolete
punctures behind tlic middle ; u'hii(s none.

Pectus in some lights slightly tinged with green ; tarsi
piceous.

Resembles tarfariciis, but is distinguished by the thoracic
hind angles beinu; less acute and the elytral stri.T punc-
tured ; from unicolor it is at once distiuKuished by the less
rounded form of the thorax and its less contracted base ;
from sttjgicus, to which by form it is more closely allied, it
may be readily separated, by the punctured stria?, ^'c.

Found on Mr. 11. Haines's farm, Germantown.

It belongs to the genus Ptcrosiichus of Bonelli.

11. F. *pJnci(Ja blackish, glabrous; thorax transversely sub-
orbicular, margined ; elytra with acute impunctured striie.
Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Carabus pellalus. Melsh. Catal.

Head purplc-l)lack slightly tinged with green ; antemm black-
ish, rufous at base ; ;w//;i rufous or piceous.

Thorax a little narrower than the elytra, transversely sul)-
orI)icular, blackish, slightly tin!2;ed with green; mari:;in
depressed, edge a little recurved, particularly at llie hind
angles, which are not excurved ; dorsal line and anterior
transverse line impressed, basal liius almost oljsolete in
the concavitv of the lateral base, which is a little rugous.

Elytra l)lackis'h with an obsolete purplisli tint; striie not
profound, acute, impuncluretl ; interstitial lines very
slightly convex.

» 9

44 DESCRIPTrON OP INSECTS

Pectus and pnatpedus l)lack ; feet black ; tibia and iflrsi pi-
ceous ; abdomen black.

15. F. Hartarica entirely black, immaculate, glabrous; strife
of the elytra impunctured.

Le?jgth three-fourths of an inch.

Body glabrous, black.

Head, frontal lines distinct ; antemm with ferruginous hair
towards the tips, joints attenuated towards their bases ;
labrum truncate.

Thorax large, transverse, gradually a little contracted behind,
base nearly equal to the base of the elytra, dorsal line
profoundly and equally impressed, anterior transverse line
more profoundly impressed, confluent with the marginal
groove at the anterior angles, basal lines strongly im-
pressed, excurved, and distinctly confluent with the mar-
ginal groove behind the angles, lateral edge excurved at
the hind angles, posterior angles acute.

Elytra, strise impunctured, interstitial lines very convex,
third with three remote punctures, one near the base,
one near the middle, and one towards the tip.
• Feet black ; tarsi piceous.

16. F. ^rnuta black; thorax punctured each side at base;

elytra with obsoletely punctured stria?.
Length half an inch.

Carabus adoxus, Melsh. Catal.

Body glal)rous, black.

^Mtennm ferruginous towards tip, joints attenuated towards

their bases ; palpi piceous.
Thorax m the middle as broad as the elytra, gradually a little

contracted to the base, where it is very slightly excurved ;

base somewhat de|;ressed, and distinctly punctured each

side, dorsal line distinctly continued to the base.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. -ta

Ehjtra^ strise ol>solotrly ptinctiivcd, interstitial lines ronvcx,
third one witii a |)uncluic at the l)ase, one in the iniilillr,
and one near the tip.

Fed hiack ; tibia and tarsi piceous ; postpedits punctured eacli
side.

Differs from admits, to vvliich it is closely allied, in having
less robust anteruifi*, veslij^es ol" punciurrs in the fjyiral siii;c,
the thorax more rounded and less cxeurvcd at tlic posteiior
angles, and the dorsal line not ahbrevialed beliind.

17. F. *subjnarginata I)lackish. p;lal)rous, all beneath piceous ;
thorax with a depiessed nKiri:;in. tlie edge reflected, base
each side, and elylral stii;e punctured.

Lengtii hair an incli.

Anteium and palpi deep piceous ; labnim truncate, piceous.

Thorax in the middle as broad as the elytra. I)ase punciuicil,
marginal groove dilated, piceous. resembling a nai row de-
pressed margin and reflected edge, dtjrsal line distinct,
lateral edsre not excurved near the hind angles, base wi-
der than the petiole, posterior angles prominent and
rounded.

Elytra, striae punctured, interstitial lines convex, third one
with a puncture behind tlic middle and one near the lip.

Feet piceous; pns/iwcfiis puncturrd each side l)ehind the in-
termediate feet, and at the base : renter inipunctured.

This species very much resemMes Jr(vv///.s\ but the thorn \
is more dilated, and the elytra narrower. It may be distin-
guished by ha\ing the postpectus punctured both at base and
each side.

18. F. *impunefo1a black. 2;labrous. itnpunctured ; antenn.r

and palpi pale luCous; P-et testaceous.
Lnigfli a little more than two-jilths of an inch.
Body black, inipunctured, glabrous.

46 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Jintennce slender, extending beyond the humerus, and with
the palpi pale rufous.

Thorax broadest rather before the middle, contracted be-
hind, margin a little depressed behind, the edge somewhat
recurved, posterior angles obtusely rounded, base im-
punctured.

Elytra profoundly striated, strife impunctured, interstitial
lines convex, the third one with two distant punctures.

Feet testaceous.

Resembles suhmarginatus and decentis^ but is entirely des-
titute of punctures ; the form of the thorax also is perfectly
distinct. I caught it on Mr. R. Haines's farm in Germantown.

19. F. ^veyitralis black, glabrous, all beneath piceous-black ;
thorax at base not wider than the pedicel of the post-
pectus.

Letigth rather more than two-fifths of an inch.

Body above black, polished, beneath piceous.l)lack.

Antennae piceous, with ferruginous hairs towards the tip ;
labrum deep piceous ; palpi piceous.

Thorax before the middle as broad as the elytra, gradually
much contracted behind, base hardly wider than the pe-
dicel, lateral margin not depressed, edge not excurved be-
hind, dorsal line slightly impressed, basal lines distinct,
conspicuously punctured.

Elytra narrowed behind, strife punctured, interstitial lines
hardly convex.

Pectus impunctured ; feet rufo-testaceous ; postpectiis and
venter punctured.

Very like suhmarginatus ; but the form of tlie thorax is
very different. It was taken in Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

30. F. *adoxa apterous, black, glabrous, impunctured j strife

impunctured ; basal thoracic hnes not dih^ted.
Length ijalf an inch.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 47

Carabus adoxus. Melsh. Calal.

Body black, glabrous, i in punctured.

AfitenjKv robust, the joints attenuated towards tbcir basos),
and with the palpi dark rufous ; labvuin truncate, dark
rufous.

Thorax large, iinpunctured, gradually contracted bebind,
edge excurved at the bind angles, dorsal line not attaining
the base, basal lines strongly impressed, cutting the i>ase
near the angles ; pectus im|)unctured ; poMpcctns punctured.

Elytra, striaj impunctured, interstitial lines convex.

Feet piceous ; abdomen piceous.

Corresponds with M. Latreille's definition of the genus
Pterochistus of Bonelli.

21. F. *gregaria dark reddish-brown; limbs and margin of
the thorax paler, thorax at base equal to the base of the
elytra.

Carabus ^regarius. Melsh, Catal.

LengtJi two-fifths of an inch.

Body dark ciiesnut, blackish each side beneath.

Head dark ciiesnut : eyes and tnaiidibirs at tip black ; antenmt
and palpi reddish-brown, the former iialf as long as tlic
body.

Thorax rather longer than liroad, impunctured, lateral mar-
gin distinct and witli the posterior margin paler, tlic latter
rather broader than at tip and equal to tlie base of the
elytra, dorsal and posterior lines indistinct, angles rounded.

Elytra with impunctured strife, margin paler and distantly
punctured, without emargina near the tip, but regularly
rontulcd i?i that part.

Epipleurn distinctly canalicidate to near the tip ; /ct/ colour
of the antennse, long : renter blackish.

Belongs to the kciuis Calathus of Bonelli and Latreille.

48 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

33. F. Herminata deep reddish -brown ; elytra darker; an-
tennfe and feet testaceous ; thorax not contracted behind.
Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Carabiis terminalus. Mdsh. Catal.

Body dark reddish-brown.

Eyes blackish ; antennae and palpi testaceous, somewhat
darker af tips.

Thorax transverse, with a distinct, depressed margin each
side, not narrowed beliind, posterior angles subacute, at-
tainina; the humeral ones, dorsal line indistinct.

Elytra somewhat oi)ake, darker than the thorax, strife im-
puiictured, suture and edge paler, marginal punctures dis-
tinct, a distinct sinus near the tip.

Feet testaceous; venter aiu\ postpectus blackish each side.

This species appertains to the genus Calathus of Bonelli.

S3. F. *autumnalis blackish-brown ; antennae and feet testa-
ceous, lateral edge not distinctly excurved behind.
Length three-tenths of an inch.

Carabus autumnalis. Melsh. Catal.

Body depressed, deep blackish-brown.

Head black ; antennce and mouth yellowish testaceous, the
former brownish towards the tip.

Thorax a little narrower behind, broadest before the middle,
margin nut depressed, dorsal and basal lines distinct, pos-
terior angles subacute, hardly attaining the humeral angles,
lateral edge not distinctly excurved behind.

Elytra i)lackish, polished, stria* impunctured, edge with a
very obtuse sinus near the lip, marginal interstitial line
serrate within.

Feet testaceous.

It seems to belong to the genus Calathus of Bonelli.
Rescml)les terminatus, but is smaller, and the thorax is a
little narrowed behind, and is destitute of a depressed margin.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 4tt

24. F. *limbata dark rcddisli-biown; thorax rounded;
elytra deeply margined with testaceous ; postpcctus pedun-
culated.

Length from one-fourtii to three-tenths of an inch.

Carabiis limbatus. Mehh. Calal.

Bodji deep reddish-hrown.

JintenriK at base, and palpi paler.

Thorax suborl)icular, margin not depressed, edge consisting
of a simple elevated line, anterior angles subacute, dorsal
line indistinct, basal lines indented ; pectus paler.

Feet testaceous; petiole distinct.

EUftra with distinctly punctured stria?, disk black-brown to
the filth stria, remaining margin testaceous, margiiial in-
terstitial line with a few larger punctures behind, none in
the middle.

Rather rare.

25. F. *parmatn black ; thorax rounded ; feet testaceous ;
elytra margined with testaceous; postpectus pedunculated.

Length three-tenths of an inch.

Carabus parmalua. Mehh. Catal.

Bodii black.

.Ijitemuv and pntpi rufous.

Thorax transversely suI)orbicular, destitute of depressed

maioiin oi elevated edge.
Feet pale rufous : petiole very distinct.
Elytra striate, impunctured, disk black-brown to the sixth

stria, margin pale lufous, marginal interstial line slightly

punctured on the inner edge.
renter black.

Much resembles F. limhafa. but the stria- of tlie elvtra are
not punctured and the edge of the thorax is destitute of an
elevated line.

VOL. II. — «:

50 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

26. F. *cupnpen7iis green, polished j common disk of the
elytra cupreous, brilliant.

Carabus metallicus. Melsh. Catal.

Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Head green : a?ifejince, labrum, and palpi black.

Thorax impuncUired, green varied with purple, rather nar-
rower than the elytra, regularly curved each side to the
bases, posterior angles none, dorsal and basal lines dis-
tinct, the latter dilated.

Elyfra cupreous, brilliant, margin green, striae acute, inv
punctured. interstitial lines flat.

Pectus and postpedus dark gieen.

Feet green ; tibia, and tarsi, and trochanters piceous.

Far. a. Elytra brilliant green slightly tinted with cupreous ;
head and thorax tinged with purplish.

A very beautiful and brilliant insect. The name metallicus
having been applied to a very different insect, the above is
substituted for it.

27. F. *convexicollis green varied with cupreous, all beneath
black ; thorax submarginated, punctured behind.

Length more than seven-twentieths of an inch.

Body beneath black.

Head green, with slight cupreous reflections j lahruni purple-
black ; maiidibles I)lack.

Thorax green, elevated portion cupreous, margin depressed
more perceptibly towards the hind angles, breadth greatest
in the middle, hardly contracted behind, base as broad as
as the elytra and punctured.

Elytra green slightly varied with cupreous, particularly at
the sutural base, strife with indistinct, distant punctures,
interstitial lines somewhat convex, third one with three
distant punctures behind the middle.

Postpedus punctured each side ; feet black.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 5i

I have seen but a single specimen, which was deficient in
anteniife, palpi, and also in tarsi, with the exception of two
joints of the second pair ; these were not dilated. It was
brought from Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

28. F. *honesfa h\ack; beneath and feet piceons ; above ini-
punctured ; thoracic lines profoundly indented ; lateral
edge excurved behind.

Length more than three-tenths of an inch.

B()d]i black with a piceous shade, i)eneath piceous.

Antenncv and palpi rufous ; labruin piceous.

Thorax impunctured, broadest before the middle, gradually
contracted bcliind, dorsal and l)asal lines profoundly in-
dented, lateral edge excurved near the base, basal angles
rectangular.

Elytra piceous-black, deeply striated, stria; impunctured, in-
terstitial lines convex, third one with a puncture near the
middle.

Postpectus each side and peduncle punctured.

Feet piceous ; venter punctured each side at base.

S9. F. 8-pimctafi/s green ; elytra witli a common cupreous
disk, third interstitial line with four distant, large, excavated
impressures.

Length full three-tenths of an inch.

Carabiis 8-punctatus. Fabr. Syat. Elettt. I., p. 186.

Boilij beneath dark green.

Head green slightly varied with cupreous ; aiitennn and palpi
black.

Thorax green, somewhat cupreous on the disk, rounded
behind, lateral curve equal, hind ant:;les none, dorsal line
distinct, l)asal ones |)roroun(lly impressed.

Elytra green opake, common disk to the fourth stria cu-
preous, polished, stria' acute, interstitial lines flat, third
one with four distant, profoimdiy excavated, quadrate
impressures.

2

52 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Feet piceous.

Remarkable by the very conspicuous elytral series of
dilated punctures, Mr. Marshal describes this species as a
native of Great Britain.

30. F. ^nutans green, polished, beneath black ; elytra cu-
preous ; feet testaceous at base.

Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Head green, beneath black ; antennae, labium, and palpi
black.

Thorax impunctured, green, rather narrower than the elytra,
broadest in the middle, regularly arquated each side to the
base, posterior angles none, dorsal and basal lines d'stinct,
the latter dilated, orbicular, base not wider than the pe-
tiole.

Elytra dark cupreous slightly tinted with greenish, strise im-
punctured, interstitial lines nearly flat.

Pectus and postpectus black.

Feet piceous ; thighs testaceous at base.

Verier black.

Closely approximated to cupripennis, but may be distin-
guished by the colour of the under part of the body, base
of the thighs, and elytra. The specimen I bought several
years ago in New York.

31. F. ^cincticollis piceous-black, beneath somewhat paler;
thorax margined; elytral stride impunctured.

Le7igth nine-twentieths of an inch.

Body black tinged with piceous, impunctured, beneath
piceous.

Antefinae and palpi rufous.

Thorax narrower than the elytra, contracted behind, mar-
gined, margin rufous, somewhat recurved, edge excurved
near the posterior angles, which are obtuse.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 58

Elytra, strife iminiiictuiod, acute, seventli one ol)soletc. inter-
stitial lines slightly convex, third with two or three punc-
tures.

Pectus and postpectiis impunctured ; feet piceous.

33. F. *decora. Head deep green ; thorax rufous ; elytra
dark cui)rcous.

Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Head deep green, purplisli at base; antennrt and palpi
rufous, dusky at tip ; lahrum and nanus purplisli.

Thorax pale rufous, narrower than the elytra, broadest be-
fore the middle, a little contracted behind, hind angles ob-
tuse, dorsal line slightly impressed, basal ones distinct.

Elytra, disk obscure cupreous to the eighth stria, margin
green, interstitial lines somewhat convex, striaj impunc-
tured.

Pectus pale rufous ; postpectus black slightly purpurescent,
impunctured.

Feet testaceous ; abdomen black, piceous behind,

33. F. *dccentis black, depressed ; third interstitial line tri-
punctate ; thorax each side at base depressed and punc-
tured ; feet l)lack.

Length eleven-twentieths of an inch.

Carabus gagathes. Mclsh. Catai.

Body l)lack, depressed, glabrous.

Jlntf^nna' piceous black : pufpi dark piceous.

Thorax narrower than the elytra, slii!;htly contracted behind,
maririn somewhat depressed behind, edge recurved, pos-
terior edge very slightly exeurved, posterior angles not
round<-d. dorsal line indrnted, anterior transverse line an-
gularly and deeply in<Ifnted, l)ase each side excavated
and (oiiHuently punctured.

Elytra, stria' with transverse, numerous, lineolar punctures,
interstitial lines convex, the tiiird one with tlucc reniDte.

54 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

lateral punctures, of which one is obsolete and placed
near the base on the exterior side, one near the middle
on the anterior side, and one near the tip.
Feet black ; tarsi piceous ; postpedus with a few punctures
at base each side before the intermediate feet.

This species occurs not unfrequently. As Panzer has
given the name gagathes to a German insect which is distinct
from this species, I have of course adopted a new one.

34. F. *extensicoUis. Head and thorax greenish ; elytra green
or purplish, beneath piceous-black ; feet testaceous.

Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Carabus extensicollis. Melsh. Catal.

Head dusky green ; antennae and palpi rufous ; labrum trun-
cate.

Thorax narrower than the elytra, longitudinal, immargined,
blackish-purple or greenish, gradually contracted behind,
slightly excurved at the iiind angles, base somewhat sca-
brous, basal lines dilated, concave, dorsal line distinct.

Scutel blackish-purple.

Elytra green or purple, strife impunctured, interstitial lines
convex, third one with four or live obsolete remote punc-
tures.

Feet testaceous.

35. H. *ochropeta blackish ; thorax rounded behind ; elytra
with perlaceous reflections ; feet testaceous.

Length one fourth of an inch.

Carabus ochropezus. Melsh. Catal.

Body dabrous, blackish, beneath piceous.

Jl?itejm(e brown ; base and palpi i iifous.

Thorax somewhat rounded, posterior angles very obtusely

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 55

rounded, dorsal line obsolete, basal lines excavated, base
will) iunierous small punctures, edge dull rulniis.

Elijtra dark brown or lilackis i, with ()l)solete perlaccous
reflections, stria> inipunctured, interstitial lines depressed,
sutural edge and deflected margin rufous or piceous.

Pectus and posfpectns inipunctured.

Feet testaceous.

Far. a. Elytra blackish-testaceous, almost destitute of the
perlaceous reflections.

36, F. *lucublanda green or reddish-purple, polislicd, all
beneath black : head and thorax inipunctured, margin of
the tlioiax depressed.

Length eleven-twentieths of an inch nearly.

Carabus lucublandus. Melsh. Calal.

Body glabrous, green, polished, beneath black.

Head impunctured ; antennii and palpi brown rufous at base,
three basal joints of the former with a dusky carina.

Thorax impunctured, widest in the middle, a very little nar-
rowed l»eliind by a regularly curved edge, base nearly as
broad as the elytra, basal angles rectangular, oixuse, lateral
margin very distinctly and abruptly depressed, dorsal line
acute, lateral ones, two on each side, indented.

Elytra green or reddish-purple, margin pur|)lish-opake, in-
terstitial lines convex, inipunctured, the third with two or
three remote punctures, strise purplish within, impunc-
tured.

Feet blackish-piceous or rufous.

Agreeably to M. Latrcille's definition of the PoeciUm of
Bonelli. this insect prol)al)ly belongs to that cjeniis : the ca-
rina of the antcnnjc is not confined to the third Joint, hut is
extendid to the second a?id first, and is very definite and
striking ; but the character attributed to that genus of •' thorax

56 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

narrowed behind" is not suflRciently obvious in our insect.
Win^s perfect.

The name Pacilia designates a genus in ictliyology.

37. F, ^chalcites green, polished, beneath black ; feet black ;

head and thorax impunctured, margin of the thorax not

depressed.
Length half an inch.

Carabus chalcites. 'Melsh. Catal.

Body glabrous, green, polished, beneath black.

Head impunctured ; antennm brown, rufous at base, third
joint with a l)lackish carina ; labrwn black ; palpi piceous.

Thorax impunctured, not contracted l>ehiiid, dorsal line dis-
tinct, base as broad as the elytra, basal lines two each side,
margin not depressed, basal angles rectangular, acute.

Scutel green or cupreous.

Elytra polished, green, slightly tinted with cupreous, margin
opake, interstitial lines convex, impunctured, strise within
black and with indented lines each side.

Feet black ; tibia and tarsi deep piceous.

Common. Brought also from the Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

This species belongs to the a;enus Poecillus of Bonelli. It
seems to resemble the Harpalus viridi-eeneus of Palisot, but
the thorax is less contracted at base, has four basal lines, and
the feet are blackish.

38. F. *caudicalis winged ; black ; joints of the antennfe at-
tenuated at their bases; thorax witii the exterior edge ex-
curved at base ; elytra with slightly punctured strise.

Length less than half an inch.

Body black, glabrous, polished.

Antemioi and palpi piceous.

Thorax contracted behind, lateral edge excurved near the

INHABITING xNORi'H AMERICA. 5?"

basal angles, dorsal line very distinct, continued tu the
base with a much shorter one at tlic lateral angles, space
of tlie basal angles depressed and punctured, basal lines
distinct, not attaining the basal edge.

Eliffra, strity impiessed, slightly punctured, interstitial lines
convex.

Pectus and posfpectus each side punctured ifeet dark piceous.
Somewhat allied to F. adoxus, but is winged, the antcnnse

arc far less robust, the thorax is smaller, punctured at the

basal angles, and slightly punctured in the stria* of the elytra.

39. F. *interstitinlis rufous; elytra brownish, punctured,
with iridescent reflections; posterior thoracic angles
rounded.

length full seven-twentieths of an inch.

Head rufous ; mandibles black at tip.

Thorax rufous, transverse, quadrate, widest in the middle,
edge curving equally, base depressed each side and witli
numerous punctures, anterior margin punctured, and a
few remote punctures on the disk, dorsal line impressed,
posterior angles obtusely rounded.

Elytra blackish-brown with iridescent reflections, stria* pro-
found, interstitial lines convex, conspicuously and densely
punctured, edge rufous.

Pectus pale rufous; feet rufo-testaceous ; postpectus black.

Venter rufous.
It was brought from Missouri by Mr. Nuttall, and is very

rare in Pennsylvania.

40. F. *obsoleta totally deep black, immaculate, impunc-
tured, glabrous.

Length one-fourth of an inch.
Body black, glabrous, impunctured
Antennae at base deep blackish-piceous.
Thorax narrower than the elytra, rounded rather wider bc-
voii. n. — H

58 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

fore the mid lie, hind an^\e? slig;htly projecting, the edge
not exciirved, base impunctined, dorsal line obsolete, basal
lines vvantinj*;.

Elytra, strise obsolete or slightly impressed, impunctured.

Feet black-piceous ; tibia rather lighter.

Seems to belong to the genus Argiitor.

41. F. *punctiforims black ; thorax rounded behind, basal
lines punctiform ; elytral strife punctured.

Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Body black, glabrous.

Antennw brown, piceous at base ; palpi blackish.

Thorax, lateral curve regularly rounded, posterior angles
very obtusely rounded, dorsal line obsolete, basal lines
each in the form of a dilated puncture, base impunctured.

Elytra, strife slightly punctured, interstitial lines depressed,
third one with three remote punctures.

Pectus and postpectus impunctured.

Feet black ; tibia and tarsi blackish-piceous.

Probably referable to the genus Jlrgutor.

42. F. *recta [)\ceous.h\ack ; antennpe, palpi, and feet rufous;
thoracic impressed lines very distinct, posterior angles
rounded.

Le?igth rather less than three-fifths of an inch.

Body piceous-l)lack, glabrous, beneath rather paler.
. Jlntennte brownish, base and palpi rufous ; labrum piceous.

Thorax as broad as the elytra, edge regularly curved, pos-
terior angles abruptly rounded, base impunctured, dorsal
line very distinct, basal lines longitudinally rectilinear, pro-
foundly indented.

Elytra, strife punctured, interstitial lines convex, in some
liglits a faint pearlaceous gloss.

Pectus and postpectns impunctured ; feet rufous.

Resembles Harpalus ochropezus, but is decidedly not of

I-VnAUlTIKO NORTH AMERICA. 69

tliat genus. It corresponds with the genus Ars;ii/or of Go-
ndii.

43. F, *hypoUthos a{)tcrous, black, glabrous ; feet rufous :

stiitp of the elytra piinctiiicd.
Length more than clcvcn-twentictlis of an inch.
Antenmc dark piceous; palpi rufo-piccous.
Thorax narrowed behind, dorsal line decj)ly impressed, sur-

fi\ce obsolctely transversely wrinkled, basal lines dilated,

distinctly indented, angles obtusely rounded, lateral edge

regularly arquated.
Ehftra, strise not deeply impressed, irregularly punctured.
Thighs and coxit rufous : tibia and tarsi dark rufous.

This species seems to belong to tiic genus Pterostichus
of Bonelli, and it may be distinguished from those which we
have mentioned to be referable to that genus by the colour of
its feet.

Genus Abax. Bond.

Anterior tibia emarginate; antemifo moniliform ; elytra en-
tire, united; wings none; labium with the intermediate
tooth obtuse or truncated ; thorax large, transversely quad-
rate, basal angles each with two abbreviated strisej an-
terior tarsi of the male with three dilated joints.

Species.

A. *coi^acinus black, beneath piccous-black ; elytra striate,

a line of marginal ocellate punctures.
Length three-fifths of an inch.

Carabus coracinus. Mehh. Calal.

Body beneath piceous-black.

Head black ; a deeply impressed, acute, transverse line be-
tween the bases of the antennte, equally distinct with tiic

60 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

articulation of the lahrum ; eyes prominent : lahrum deep
piceous ; antennae hairy, brown, piceous and glabrous at
base, somewhat shorter tlian the thorax.

Thorax black, somewhat transverse-quadrate, anterior and
posterior diameters equal, anterior an^jles rounded, little
promini',nt, posterior ones rectangular, attaining the outer
humeral ansjles, lateral edge obscure piceous, margin ob-
soletely purple, a dorsal impressed hue and basal abbre-
viated one each side.

Elytra blackish faintly tinged with reddish purple, striated,
striae acute, minutely punctured, a marginal line of ocellate
punctures, which are more distant in the middle ; epipleura
reddish-purple.

Genus Epomis. Bonel. Latr.

Anterior tibia emarginate ; two anterior tarsi dilated in the
male, and furnished beneath with dense, granuliform pa-
pillae ; antennae filiform ; labrum entire ; palpi with the
terminal joint dilated, obtriangular.

Species.

E. *tomentosus dusky cupreous opake ; elytra and feet black.
Length three-fifths of an inch.

Carabus tomentosus. Melsh. Calal.

Head impunctured, dark cupreous ; antenuK black, two basal

joints rufous ; lahrum piceous ; palpi black.
Thorax cupreous, with numerous, green, confluent punc

tures, as broad as the elytra at base, and gradually con-

tracting by a curved line to the head.
Elytra greenish-black, striate, striae distinctly punctured.
Pectus and posfpectiis Ijlack, punctured ; feet black ; abdomen

black.

Not uncommon in Pennsylvania. A specimen was brought

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 61

jfrom the Missouri, by Mr. Nuttall, which varies ia being en-
tirely green above.

Genus Chijenius. Bonel. Latr.

Anterior tibia emars;inate ; two anterior tarsi dilated in the
male and funiisiicd beneath witli dense, granuliforni pa-
pilhe ; antennae tiliform, joints elongated j labrum entire;
palpi filiform.

Species.

i. C. sericeus green, beneath black; antcnnjc and feet pale

rufous ; head punctin-ed.
Length about three-fifths of an inch.

Carabus sericetm alatus, ater, capite, thorace, et elytris viridi-nitcntibus, aii-
tennis pedibusque rufis. Forst. Nov. Sp. Ins, Cent. Oliv. Encyc. Meth.

Carabus Fosleri. Turt. Linn. II., p. 464.

Carabus sericeus. Melsh. Catal.

Body green, bencatli black, with very sliort numerous hairs.

Head polislied, punctured ; ontruna', and jxilpi pale iid'ous,
the former paler at base ; labrum rufous ; mandildes ferru-
ginous at base.

Thorax distinctly transverse, densely punctured, polished,
dilated in the middle, posterior lateral edge rectilinear or
slightly excurved, dorsal and basal lines very distinct, base
rather narrower than the elytra.

Elytra not wider behind the middle, with numerous minute
punctures, striate, stria' acute, minutely punctured, intcr-
sfitial lines flat.

Feet rufous ; pectus and postpcctus punctiued ; abdomen with
minute punctures.

Var. a. Elytra purplish.
Very closely resembles the next, but difTcrs in the less

elongated forni of the thorax. Common in the middle states,

and was brouglit from the Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

63 UESCRII'TION OF INSECTS

2. C. ^wstivus green-cupreous; elytra purple-black; an-
teiinsB and feet rufous; head punctured.

Length seven-tentlis of an inch.

Carabus amelhystinus. 3Iehh. Catal.

Body greenisli-cupreous, beneath black, with very short nu-
merous hairs.

Head polished, punctured ; antennm and palpi rufous, shaded
towards the tips ; labnim ferruginous ; maiidibles blackish.

Thorax as long or rather longer than broad, dilated in the
middle, posterior lateral edge rectilinear or slightly ex-
curved, densely punctured, polished, dorsal and basal lines
very distinct, base narrower than the elytra.

Elytra dark purple, opake, perceptibly a little dilated behind
the middle, with very minute, numerous punctures, striate,
strife a little obtuse, punctured, interstitial lines depressed,
a little convex.

Pectus and postpectus punctured ; feet rufous ; abdomen mi-
nutely punctured.
This cannot be ajnethijstinus of authors, if the figure of

that insect by Olivier be correct.

3. C. ^lithophilus green, beneath black ; head punctured ;
feet testaceous ; antennae fuscous, paler at base.

Length less than seven-twentieths of an inch.

Body green, with very short, numerous hairs, beneath black.

Head punctured ; frojit smooth ; antennce fuscous, base and
palpi testaceous, the latter dusky at tip ; labrum and man-
dibles piceous-black.

Thorax wider somewhat behind the middle, transverse-quad-
rate, lateral edge regularly and equably curved, posterior
angles slightly rounded, surface densely punctured, punc-
tures large, dorsal line acute, posterior ones dilated.

Elytra villous, minutely punctured, strije punctured, inter-
stitial lines flat.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 68

Pectus and postpedits with dilated glabrous punctures ; feet

rutb-testaceous ; venter with villous piiiictuics.
Closely allied to sericeus atid ivdivus, hut is much smaller.

4. C. *emarginatus green-cupreous ; elytra purplc-l)lack ;
antennfe and feet rufous; head punctured ; lal)rum deeply
emarginatcd.

Length eleven-twentieths of an inch.

Body green tinged with cupreous, with very short numerous
hairs.

Head polished, punctured; antemm v^nCi palpi rufous; labriim
profoundl-y and obtusely emarginate. ierruginous.

7'Ao/-«.r transverse-quadrate, dilated in the nnddle, |)olished,
densely punctured, lateral edge curved regularly to the
hind angles, dorsal and I)asal lines very distinct, base
nearly equal to the l)ase of the elytra.

Elytra dark-purj)lc, opakc, with numerous very minute punc-
tures, strife punctured, interstitial lines depressed.

Pectus and postpectus punctured ; Z^'^?^ rufous; abdomen mi-
nutely punctuied.
Very like C. (vstwus, but is readily distinguished by the

curvatures of the thoracic edge being regularly continued

to the posterior angles, and l)y the more deeply emargi-
natcd labrum. Not uncommon.

5. C. *pusillus green, polished; elytra purple ; antenna and
feet rufous ; head punctured : labrum deeply cmarginate.

Length less than seven-twentieths of an inch.

Body with very short numerous hairs.

Head green, polished, punctured ; nntennir and palpi rufous,
brownish towards the tips ; labrum piceous, deeply cmar-
ginate.

Thorax with large punctures, a little contracted behind, pos-
terior lateral edge somewhat cxcurved, dorsal line not
deeply depressed, basal ones indented.

Elytra purple, interstitial lines convex, with distinct punc-

64 DESCKIPTION OF INSECTS

tuves, strife with the punctures not larger than those of

the interstitial lines.
Feet pale rufous.
Not a common species. Known by its small size.

6. C. *laticoUis dark violaceous ; elytra black ; antennse and
feet rufous; head punctured; thorax at base as broad as
the elytra.

Length rather more than three-fifths of an inch.

Body hairy, deep violaceous glossed with green, beneath
black.

Head punctured ; antennm reddish-brown, base and palpi ru-
fous ; labrum truncate, ferruginous.

Thorax densely punctured, transverse-quadrate, narrowed
before, base not contracted, as broad as the elytra.

Elytra with numerous minute punctures, strise with small
punctures, interstitial spaces perfectly flat.

Feet rufous ; abdomen with small punctures.

Approximates closely to cesthms and sericeus, but differs

in the form of the thorax, which is proportionally larger.

Brought from the Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

7. C. *impunctifro?is dark green ; elytra black ; antennre and
feet rufous ; head impunctured ; thorax at base as broad
as the elytra.

Length three-fifths of an inch.

Body dark green, beneatli black ; elytra black.

Head green, polished, impunctured ; labrum emarginate, fer-
ruginous.

Thorax obscure green, transverse-quadrate, punctured,
punctures minute, base as broad as the elytra.

Elytra black, punctures numerous, minute, stri?e with distinct
punctures.

Feet rufous.
Distinguishable from all the preceding ones by the glabrous

front, and small size of the thoracic punctures. Rare.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 65

8. C, *nemoraUs ciipreoiis-grecn, beneath black ; elytra
pui|)Ie-black : anteiiiue and feet rufous ; head inipunc-
tured : thorax at base narrower than the elytra.

Length half an inch.

Carabus amethystimis. Mehh. Calal.

Bodij with very short, numerous hairs, cupreous-green;
eliih'd dark pur|)le, beneath black.

Head glabrous, polished ; labrum ferruginous, truncate ; an-
te/tnce and palpi rufous-

Thorax broadest in the tniddic. posterior lateral edge slightly
excurved. base narrower- than the elytra, punctures nu-
merous, small, impressed lines distinct.

Sciitel not dai ker than the elytra.

Eli/tj'a deep pui|)le obscure, with numerous minute punc-
tures and punctured strife, inteistiiial lines depressed.

Sternum slightly tinged with green : feet rufous-

Is at once distinguished from astivus by the impressed

front, and from impunctifrons by Iiavingthe tliorax nanowed

behind. Common in Permsylvania. I found it also in

Georgia and Florida.

9. C. *solitarius green, polished, beneath piceous; feet pale ;
head impunctured; thorax at base narrower than tjie
elytra, subcordate.

Lerii^h near eleven-twentieths of an inch.

Bodif green, polished, bencatli piceous-black.

Head impunctured; antenrue hvovfinsh, pd\er athase; labrum

truncate, pale ferruginous.
Thorax dilated before the middle, contracted behind, dorsal

lines and base punctured, disk each side impunctured.
Scuiel pur[)lish.
Eli/tra green, polished, strife indented, obtuse, [junctures

distinct, intervals not equal to their lenui;th and Itecoming

obsolete towards the tip, interstitial lines convex, with

very distinct punctures.

VOL. II. 1

66 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Feet pale, joints somewhat darker ; tail pale.

Differs from all the preceding ones in having the lines in-
tervening between the strife convex. It was taken on the
Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

10. C. * Peiinsylvimicus green, polished, beneath piceous ;
elytra blackish; feet rufous; head impunctured; intersti-
tial lines of the elytra somewhat convex.

Length not quite lialf an inch.

Carabus Pennsylvanicus. Melsh. Catal.

Body green, polished ; elytra dark purplish, with an obscure

greenish margin ; beneath deep piceous.
Head impunctured ; antennae brown rufous at base ; labrum

ferruginous, slightly emaiginate.
Thorax dilated in the nnddle, punctured, somewhat con-
tracted behind, edge slightly excurved near the base.
Elytra with numerous minute punctures, strife with approxi-
mate punctures which are obsolete towards the tip, inter-
stitial lines convex.
Feet rufous.

Resembles nemoraHs, but is known by the convex inter-
stitial lines and less profoundly emarginated labrum.
Not common.

Genus Dicjelus*. Bonel. Latr.

Anterior tibia emarginate ; two anterior tarsi dilated in the
male and furnished beneath with dense, granuliform pa-
pillae ; antennse filiform ; labrum profoundly emarginate.

* Since the prefatory observations to this essay were printed, I have had the
good fortune to find, in the library of this Society, the fifth volume of the Class
of Physical and Mathematical Sciences of the Memoirs of the Imperial Aca-
demy of Turin. This volume is particularly interesting to me at this time,
as it contains a portion of the essay on the Linnsean Carabii by M. Bonelli,
entitled " Observations entomologiques". From this essay 1 have made a few
quotations in this genus.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. {]■;

Species.

1, D. purpuratus blackish; thorax margined with purple;
elytra purplish.

Length nine-tenths to clevcn-tcnths of an inch.

Carabus purpuratus. Melah. Cutal.

Dicxlus purpuratus thorace transverse, aiger, purpureo irroratus, elytris sul-
catis, corpore abbreviato, dilatato. Bonel. Obs. Entom. Vide Mtm. de
V Acad. Imper. de Turin.

Bochj beneath black, impunctured.

Head lilack ; anleimu: witli ferruginous hairs towards the tip.

Thorax black, tinged with purple, margin purple or purple-
blue, depressed lateral edge reflected.

Elytra blackish glossed witli purple, strife profound, impunc-
tured, interstititial lines very convex ; beneath black.

2. D. Tiolaceiis above and beneath violaceous: antenna*,
moutii, and feet black.

Length one inch and one-tenth nearly.

Dicxlus violaceus thorace transverse, quadrate, violaceus, antennis, pedibusque
nigris, elytris sulcatis. Bonel. Oba. Entom. Vide Mem. de /' ,icad. Imptr.
de Turin.

Head black obsoletely tinged with purplish ; moidli and an-

tennK black.
Thorax with the disk black, but faintly tinged with viola-
ceous; tiiis colour is very obvious on the lateral and pos-
terior margins.
Elytra deeply striated ; the disk is less distinctly violaceous
than the margin, and in a particular light exhibits a sliglit
greenisli tinge ; l)eneath violaceous, more particularly on
each side ; epipletira bright violaceous.
This seems to be more especially an inhabitant of the
southern and south-western states. The second and third
interstitial lines from tlie suture, in my specimen, arc con
nected before the middle by a transverse line.

9

68 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

3. D. *dilatatus black, inipuncturod, immaculate ; strise ob-
solotely punctured towards the tip.

Length Ibui-lifths of an inch.

Carabus dilatatus. Mehh. Catal.

Thorax entirely black, margins depressed, lateral edge

slightly reflected, dorsal line abbreviated, depression of

the base distinctly sinuated before.
Elytra totally black, strife piofound, obsoletely punctured

towards the tip, interstitial lines very convex, subcari-

nated.

4. D. elongatus black, impunctured, immaculate, striae im-
punctured.

Length three-fifths of an inch.

Caralms furviis. Mehh. Catal.

Dicselus elongatus thorace subquadrato, nigcr, eljtris sulcatis, corpore elon-
gate. Bonel. Obs. Entom.

Jintennm gradually becoming ferruginous towards the tip.

Thorax of nearly equal diameters, contracted before, margins
depressed, lateral edge slightly reflected, dorsal line con-
tinued to the base, basal depression not distinctly smuated
before, basal lines distinct.

Elytra black, strise profound, impunctured, interstitial lines
very convex ; humeral elevated line elongated.

.5. D. *sc7ilptilis black ; elytra with serpentine striae and
sculptured interstitial lines.

Length four-fifths of an inch.

Body entirely black, immaculate.

Thorax, margins depressed, lateral edge slightly reflected,
dorsal line abbreviated.

Elytra, strite very irregularly serpentine, punctured, inter-
stitial lines irregular, unequal, a few adventitious punc-
tures distinct from the strise arranged in circles or irre-
gular figures.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. QQ

This species was brought iVom Missouri hy Mr. Nuttall.

G. D. splemlidus. Thorax violaceous ; elytra cupreous bril-
liant.

Lengtli nine-tenths of an inch.

Head black.

Thiirax widest in the middle, very slightly narrowed at
base, lateral and posterior margins depressed, lateral edge
reflected, disk less oI)viously violaceous tlian tlic margins.

Elytra highly polished, mars,iii violaceous, humeral carina
extending two thirds the length of the elytra, sirise pro-
foundly impressed, beneatli blueish purple.

Feet lilack.

This is the most splendid s])ccies of the genus yet disco-

vered. It was brought from Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

Genus Panagjeus. Latr.

Anterior tibia emarginate ; elytra entire : exterior maxillary
and lal)ial palpi with the terminal joint sub-securilbrm ;
tridenlate, middle tooth short, oI)tuse ; tongue short; head
small ; lal)ium much wider at base; neck distinct, abrupt ;
tliorax orbicular ; abdomen subquadrate ; antcnnse iili-
form.

Species.

1. P. *crucigerus black, hirsute; elytra with four large ful-
vous spots.

Length nine-twentieths of an inch.

Bodjf l)lack, opake, punctured.

Head with ()l)solete punctures ; antermw with a few rufous
hairs towards the tip.

Thorax transversely sub-oval, widest l)ehind the middle,
punctures numerous, dilated, and distinct, edge al)ruptly
excurved near the posterior angles, which are small,
prominent, acute.

Eljifrn witii obtuse stritc, punctures dilated, each elytrinn
with two large fulvous spots, of which one is near the

70 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

base, rounded, attaining the margin, and the other near
the tip, orbicular, and distinct.

Pectus, postpectus, and abdomen each side at base with di-
lated punctures.
Closely resembles the Crux major of Europe, but is a

much larger insect. I found a specimen on the sea beach

of Senipuxten, eastern shore of Maryland, which was cast

up alive by the waves, the last of September.

3. P. *fasciatus ferruginous, hirsute, punctured ; elytra ful-
vous, with a black band and tip.

Length seven-twentieths of an inch.

Head punctured ; nasus impunctured, glabrous ; antennix
fuscous ; palpi black.

Thorax widest behind the middle, convex, punctures nume-
rous, large, lateral edge deeply and widely excavated be-
hind, posterior angles prominent, distinct.

Elytra fulvous, with a common black band rather behind
the middle, contracted on the disk, and dilated at the su-
ture and margin, deflected base and tip black, striae ob-
tuse, punctures large, distinct, transverse ; epipleura with
a distinct, impressed, punctured stria.

Pectus and postpectus with dilated punctures ; feet black.

Venter deep piceous, punctured each side at base.
Very distinct from the preceding species, and is a rare

insect.

Genus Cychrus. Fabr.

Anterior tibia entire; elytra entire, embracing the abdomen ;
external maxillary and labial palpi dilated, compressed,
sub-securiform, or obconic ; mandibles elongated, biden-
tate near the tip; labium profoundly emarginate, not
wider at base than at tip ; labrum elongated, very pro-
foundly emarginate j tongue very small ; abdomen robust,
convex.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 7I

Spec it's-

i. C. elevat)is blackish; elytra roddisli-ciipreous, brilliant ;

humeral cdsjc and lateral margin of the thorax ictlected,

the latter hardly contracted behind.
Length nearly four-fifths of an inch.

Cychrus tlevatus thoracis margiae reflexo, elytris violaccis, corporc atro.
Fttbr. Sysl. Elettf. I., p. 166.

Carabus eleiHttus aptere ; bords du corcelet arrondis, rclcvcs ; corps noir ;
elytrcs violettes. Oliv. Enl., iXo. 35, p. -16, /. 7, /. 8'3.

Head black very sligjlitly tinted with violet, impunctured;
anfenncv brownish towards the tips.

Thorax black, slightly tinted with violaceous, dilated
and reflected each side, gradually more reflected to the
hind angles, hardly contracted behind, surface concave,
with small, numerous, inegular punctures, base nearly as
broad as the base of the elytra, basal edge falcate each
side, basal angles prominent, acute.

Elytra cupreous-red, brilliant, strite numerous, obtuse, inter-
stitial lines narrower than the strijie, obtuse, humeral edge
dilated, reflected, elevated, and rounded ; epijileura con-
fluently punctured.

Pectus with a few punctures at base, lateral margin with mi-
nute punctures ; postpectus and venter each side at base
with large punctures.
The original brilliant pigment of the elytra, which is of a

reddish-cupreous colour, is very readily rubbed ofl'even by

a touch of the finger, leaving a i)lackish ground. The ele-

vatus of authors is said to be an inhabitant of South America,

probably through error.

3. C.unicolor blackish; elytra reddish-cupreous, brilliant;

humeral edge and lateral margins of the thoi ax reflected,

the latter contracted i)ehind.
Length more than one inch.

Cychrus unicolor thoracis margine reflexo, corporc atro, cljtri* striiti*.
Fahr. Synt. Eleul., I. p. 166.

73 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Carabus unicolor aptere ; bords du corcelet arrondis, releves ; corps noir ; ely-
tres stiiees. Oliv. Ent. No. 35, p. 47. pi 6. fig. 62.

Head black slightly tinged with blue ; anteniiK brown at tip.
Thorax blackish-blue, Jateral margins reflected, disk a little
convex and witli an impressed line, lateral margins widely
reflected, widest rather before the middle, and narrowed
behind, posterior angles rounded.
Elijtra l)right cupreous-red or purplish, with numerous strise
in which are large, dilated, and confluent punctures, be-
neath black.

The descriptions of the unicolor by Fabricius, Olivier, and
others do not satisfactorily correspond with our insect, inas-
much as the whole body is stated to be black. They also
state, but perhaps through error, that its native country is
South America.

This fine species is rare in Pennsylvania, and I have seen
but a single specimen of it, which was presented to me by
Mr. William Hyde of this city ; it was caught on the bank of
the Susquehanna river.

The form of the thorax in Olivier's figure, above quoted,
is incorrect in having its greatest diameter placed much too
far backward.

3. C. *stenostomus black ; elytra dark cupreous, margins not

reflected ; basal thoracic hues distinct.
Length half an inch.

Cychrus stenostomus. Melsh. Catal.

Head black, glabrous, impunctured ; antennie brownish to-
wards their tips.

Thorax black tinged with blue, rounded, widest in the mid-
dle, contracted behind, margin not reflected, base narrower
than the elytra, punctured, basal edge rectilinear, dorsal
line very distinct, basal lines profound, impressed, obtuse,
and punctured.

Elytra bronzed or dark cupreous, strife numerous, obtuse,
interstitial lines narrower than the striae, obtuse, edge

INIIVniTING NORTH AMEttK A 7.i

(lark blue, humeral edge not dilated nor reflected ; epi-
pleura punctured.
Pectus punctured at base ; poslpeclus and venter each side
at base punctured.

4. C. *bilobus reddish-cupreous, beneath black, margins not
reflected, basal thoracic lines obsolete.

Length two-fifths of an inch.

Bodif beneatli black.

Head black with a very slight violaceous tint ; antennas and
palpi pale piceous.

Thorax reddish-cupreous tinted witli violaceous, brilliant,
broadest ratlier before tlic middle, much narrowed behind,
lateral margin not dilated nor reflected, i)asc depressed and
much punctured, basal lines obsolete, basal edge rectilinear,
not wider than the pedicel oT the postpectus, disk some-
what bilobated, being convex each side and gradually in-
dented in the middle by the dorsal line, anterior margin
depressed and rugose in the middle.

Elytra reddish-cupreous, strlte numerous, punctured.

Pectus beneath, postpectus, and abdomen each side punc-
tured.

Genus C.vlosoma. JFeber.

Anterior tibia entire ; elytra entire; exterior maxillary and
labial palpi witli the terminal joint hardly larger than the
preceding joint ; mandibles unarmed, robust ; labrum
transverse, bilobate ; labium profoundly emarginatc and
with a short acute tooth in the middle ; antenna', second
joint one third as long as the following one ; thorax trans-
versely suboval ; abdomen subquadrate.

Species.

1. C. 5crw/a/o;- violaceous ; thorax witli a golden margin;

elytra green margined with reddish-cupreous.
Length from twenty-three-twentieths to fivc-lourths of an

inch.

VOL. II. K

74 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Carabus scrutator. Oliv. Ent., No. 35, pi. 3, 32, a. b.

Calosoma scrutator. Fabr. Syst. Ehut., Pars 2, p. 213. Melsh. Catul. and
Leach Zool. Misc. Vol. II., p. 93, pi. 93.

Body beneath green varied with golden cupreous.

Head impunctured, black, with violaceous reflections, orbits
above golden ; antenme with ferruginous hair towards the
tip; beneath green; tooth of the labium very short,
hardly prominent.

Thorax impunctured, blackish-violaceous, with an uninter-
rupted golden margin, dorsal line abbreviated, obsolete,
basal lines none, basal edge subrectilinear, the lateral
angles not extending backwards.

Elytra bright green with a very slight cupreous reflection ;
strife reticulated by much smaller transverse lines which
are more deeply impressed in the strife so as to resemble
transverse punctures, strife fifteen, transverse lines very
numerous, fourth, eighth, and twelfth interstitial lines each
with several distant impressed punctures, exterior margin
reddish-cupreous.

Feet violaceous ; venter green, incisures each with a golden
cupreous base and lateral spot.

Far. a. Head distinctly punctured, disk of the thorax green
with a very slight violaceous tint ; length nine-tenths of an
inch.
This species makes a very near approach to the syco-

phanta of Europe ; but as Dr. Leach observes, it differs from

that insect in colour, in being less convex, and in having

a shorter thorax.

3. C. calidum black ; elytral stripe reticulated, equal, with a

triple row of indented gold dots.
Length from nine-tenths to nine-eighths of an inch-

G. calidum. Fabr. Syst. Ehut.
Carabus calidus. Melsh. Catal.

Head black, with crowded minute confluent punctures j aii-
tennce brown towards the tip.

INIlAUiriNU NORTU AMKUICA. 73

Thorax black, with ciowiKmI, minute, confliieni puiKluic?.
posterior lateral margin rellccteil, |)ostcrior an':;lcs rounded
and extending backwards l)e}ond tlie basal line.
Elytra black, strire reticulated by smaller transverse linos,
wliicl), near tlie base, arc niucli more deeply impressed,
so as almost to granulate the interstitial lines, stria' MI'teen.
transverse lines very numerous, Iburlli, eighth, and twelltli
interstitial lines with several equal, equidistant, dilated,
orbicular, impressed, golden dots, and a solitary one near
the scutel, exterior marginal groove grccnisli.
Pectus each side with minute crowded punctures; sternum
impunctured ; postpectus each side, and each side of the
abdomen with rather larger punctures.
I was formerly misled respecting this insect by that por-
tion of the specific description of Fabricius which ascribes
to it an apterous character. In this error I was corrected by
Professor Wiedeman of Kiel, who assures me that Fabiicius
was mistaken, and that his species is certainly winged.

Genus Carabus. Lin. Latr.

Anterior tibia entire ; elytra entire ; exterior maxillary and
labial palpi subtriangular, dilated ; mandibles not elon-
gated, robust; lal)rum short, transverse, bilobatc ; labium
profoundly emarginatc and with a central tooth ; antenna;,
second joint lialf as long as the next; thorax subcordate,
emarginate behind ; abdomen oval.

Species.

1. C. *sylvosiis apterous, black ; thorax and elytra margined
with violaceous, the latter with a triple series of excavated
punctures.

Length rather more than an incii.

Carabus $ilvostis. Melsh. Calal.

Body black, glabrous.

76 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Antennae brownish towards the tips ; palpi, terminal joint

dilated.
Thorax margined, margin violaceous, gradually more re-
curved to the posterior angles, posterior angles very ob-
tusely round, slightly extending backwards beyond the
basal line, base depressed and with the lateral margin
somewhat scabrous, dorsal line obsolete, basal lines want-
ing.
Elytra black, margin violaceous, disk nearly smooth with
al)out thirty strife of minute impressed punctures and
three distant series of remote excavated ones.
All the species of this genus that 1 have seen, as well as
those of Procrustes, Calosoma, ^c. have the tibia of the se-
cond pair of feet of the male densely ciliated near the ex-
ternal tip, with fulvous hair.

3. C. *M?^e;T?//;^?/s apterous, blackish ; elytra slightly bronzed ;

fourth, eighth, and twelfth interstitial lines interrupted ;

striae concave with impressed punctures and elevated ones.
Length nine-tenths of an inch.

Carabus granulatus. Melsh. Catal.

Head black ; antennae and palpi deep piceous, the former
fuscous towards the tip.

Thorax black, with numerous, minute, indented punctures,
which are obsolete on the disk, dorsal and basal lines
conspicuous, margin towards the posterior angles slightly
reflected, posterior angles rounded, prominent behind the
the basal line.

Elytra black-bronzed, stria? with a somewhat lateral series
of punctures and numerous elevated ones, interstitial
lines fifteen, two of wiiich are more conspicuous, fourth,
eighth, and twelfth interrupted, interrupted lines acute
behind, a submarginal series of elevated punctures.

Feet black ; venter deep piceous or black.

The impressed punctures of the intervening lines of the

IXHABITING NOHTII AMERICA. 77

■ e1vt»'a are sometimes obsolete or Nvaiiling, This species docs
not agree witli the description of C. granulatiis either as
respects the colour of the antenna- or that of tlie hody. And
although it corresponds wiih llie description of '((tdatus
better tlian any other insect I liave yet seen, yet tlie difler-
ences are so stril<ing as to forliid its Ijcing referred to that
species. Tliis will l)c placed beyond a doubt by comparing
Olivier's description with the above, and particularly that
portion of it relating to the elytia. of which he says that they
are " presque lisses ou sans stries bien in;u(ju«'-es, avec
trois rangees des points enfonces."

S. C. *limbuti/s apterous, l)lack ; margin of the elytra j)ur-
plish ; fourth, eighth, and twelfth interstitial lines inter-
rupted.
Leugtii four-fifths of an inch.
Body black, glabrous.
Head obsoletely corrugated above the eyes ; antenjur fuscous

at tip.
TAoraa- impunctured, rugulous at base.
Elytra margined with purple, strife with transverse lineolar
punctures, interstitial lines elevated, equal, distinct, mar-
ginal ones and tips sliglitly reticulated, fourtii, eiglUii, and
twelfth interrupted.
Pectus impunctured ; postpectus each side at base obsoletely
punctured ; feet black ; renter each side obsoletely punc-
tured.

This insect very much resembles C. interruptus, but dif-
fers in the form of the punctures of the elytra and in having
this part margined with purple ; tlic form also is less elon-
gated.

Taken by Mr. J. Gilliams in Maryland.

-1. C. *serratns apterous, black ; thorax and elytra margined
with obscure violaceous, interstitial lines reticulated, three
interrupted ones.

Length more than seven-tenths of an inch.

78 DESCRirTION OF INSECTS

Carabiis catenaius. Melsh. CataL

Body black, glabrous.

Head smooth, impunctiired ; antetmm fuscous beyond the
middle.

Thorax, exterior margin obscure violaceous, and with the
base somewhat scabrous, disk impunctured, dorsal and
basal lines ol)solete, the latter oblique.

Elytra margined with obscure violaceous, edge near the base
slightly serrate, interstitial lines about fifteen, obtuse
and smooth, connected by numerous transverse septae
which are equally prominent and obtuse, not continued,
fourth, eighth, and twelfth line dilated, interrupted, obtuse.

Postpectus and venter each side punctured.

Tile name catenatus has been applied by Panzer to a

species inhabiting Carniola.

Genus Nebria. Latr.

Anterior tibia entire ; elytra entire ; exterior maxillary and
labial palpi with the last joint elongated, subcylindrical,
the latter of equal joints ; tongue not longer than the la-
brum, and not tricuspidate at tip ; labrum entire ; labium
profoundly emarginate, and with an emarginate, obtuse,
central tooth ; mandibles not dilated at base ; thorax trun-
cate, cordate ; abdomen oval, depressed ; antennae filiform.

Species.

N. */)a%;es black; thorax dilated, very short; feet testaceous.

Length nearly half an inch.

Body black, glabrous, depressed.

Head with two obsolete piceous spots on the vertex ; mouth
piceous ; palpi paler at base ; aiitennce rufous, base paler ;
labium elongated, nearly as long as the labrum, bisetous
near the tip.

Thorax much abbreviated, as broad as the elytra, much con-
tracted behind, exterior and posterior margins depressed,

INH.VBITING NORTH AMERICA. 79

lateral ed^e reflected, dorsal line conspicuous, posterior

angles acute.
Elytra profoundly striated, stri;e punctured on the sides, in-

terstitial lines convex.
Pectus and postpedus with obsolete dilatetl punctures ; feel

testaceous; venter piceous towards the tip, iiupunttured.

In this species the eniargina of the anterior tibia is very
small and placed vtu-y near to the tip, so as to he undisco-
verable but by particular examination. Ju(li!;in2; from the
geneiic deOnition whicli authors have c;ivcn. liiis species
must ditter from the other species of this genus in tiie form
of the labium, which is elonu;atcd, acute, as in I'ni^onophorus,
and has on each side near the tip a lomi; hair or bristle, in-
stead of spines, as in the latter genus: it does not tiierefore
agree witli tlie character given of the labium of J^ehria, —
"labium subquadrate," "labium short," " nearly quadrate,"
^c, nor yet witli that of Pogotiophoriis, of wiiich tliis part is
tricuspidate. But as it will not agree with any other than the
two genera above mentioned, and as it difters from the lat-
ter genus in not having the mandibles dilated at base, nor the
maxillary palpi mucli elongated, I have thougiit proper to
place it with the present genus, to which it seems to have the
closest afllnity.

Genus Omopiiron. Latr.

Tongue very short; antenuip iiliform : maxilbe ciliated on
the exterior side ; body short, nearly Iiemis|)hcrical ; tho-
rax trapezoidal, transverse, sinuatcd, or lol)ed behind ;
anterior pair of tibia slightly emarginate on the inner side.

Species.
0. labiatum blackish : labrum, margin of the thorax and of

the elytra whitish : antennse, palpi, and feet testaceous.
Length one-fourth of an inch.

Scolyltn Inhialm nigcr. labio thoracis elytrorumque margine argcnteis. Fabr
S'yal. Ekut. J., p. 248.

80 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Head blackish, base punctured ; eyes large ; Jiasus triangular,
piceous, with a yellow hind margin ; untennw and palpi
testaceous ; labrum white somewhat silvery.

Thorax black-brown, broad as the elytra at base, gradually
narrowed before, basal line sinuated each side and angu-
lated in the middle, punctures obsolete on the disk, dorsal
Ihie obsolete, basal lines none, lateral margin white some-
what silvery near the edge, edge black-brown.

Scutel not perceptible.

Elytra black-brown, strife thirteen, towards the tip and mar-
gin obsolete, punctures distant, impressed only on the la-
teral paries of the strise, interstitial lines convex, margin
whitish somewhat silvery near the edge, dilated and undu-
lated behind with several punctiform hyaline maculte.

Pectus and postpectus punctured, piceous ; feet testaceous j
veiiter pale piceous, impunctured.
This specimen I obtained near Great Egg-harbour, New

Jersey, on the skirt of a forest.

Genus Elaphrcs. Fabr.

Antennae hardly longer than the head and thorax, somewhat
more robust towards the tip ; external maxillary and labial
palpi with the ultimate joint subcylindrical, longer and
larger than the preceding joint ; labium profoundly emar-
ginate ; maxilla; hardly ciliated on their external side ;
thorax subcylindrical, somewhat dilated in the middle,
unequal, longer than broad ; anterior tibia emarginate on
the inner side.

Species.

E. riparius? dark brownish-green, a little bronzed; elytra
with dilated, orbicular, impressed spots, and three elevated
studs each side of the suture.

Le?igth more than three-tenths of an inch.

E riparius. Fabr.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. gl

Body dark brownish-green, opake, beneath rather paler, po-
lished, glabrous, punctures very numerous, crowded.

Head slightly corrugated between the eyes ; nntenim and
labriim blackish ; mandibles green each side at base, |)i-
ceous within near the tip ; palpi above piceous, beneath
paler; gnla ini|)unctured.

Thorax broadest rather before the middle, narrower than
the elytra, a transversely indented curved line before the
middle, and a longitudinal abbreviated one, lateral edge
hardly prominent, slightly excurved behind, posterior an-
gles inconspicuous, base not wider than tlic petiole.

Elytra equally punctured with about twenty large, dilated,
orbicular, impressed, purplish spots, and two or three
equidistant, elevated, elongate, subquadrate, impuncturcd,
bronzed spots each side near the suture, the anterior one
largest, a few obsolete elevated lines.

Postpectas green tinged each side witli cupreous ; feet green ;
femora and tibia piceous at base; venter green, disk im-
puncturcd, segments brassy at tip.

Genus NoTniopiiiLus. Dumeril.

Antennse not longer than the head and thorax, rather more
robust towards the tip: external maxillary and labial palpi
with the terminal joint sul)cylindric, large, and longer tiian
the preceding joint ; labium profoundly emarsinate ;
inaxilhe hardly ciliated on their external side ; tliorax de-
pressed, transverse, subquadrate : anterior tibia emargi-
nate on their inner side.

Species.
N. *semistriatns brownish bronze : front corruiated ; elytra

with punctured striu- and a longitudinal eipial space near

the suture.
Length rather more than one-fifth of an inch.

FAaphrus aemistriadi.i. Mel ah. Catal.
vol,. II. — I,

83 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Body brownish bronze, glabrous, immaculate, beneath black-
ish.

Head with six or eight frontal, longitudinal, elevated lines,
abbreviated on the vertex; nasus with several elevated
lines at tip, and a transverse interrupted one at base ;
lahrum, a single impressed, longitudinal line ; antennae and
palpi deep fuscous, paler at base.

Thorax as broad as the elytra, transverse quadrate, broadest
before the middle, slightly contracted to the base, punc-
tures numerous, approximated, obsolete each side of the
disk, dorsal line impressed, punctured, basal lines in-
dented, lateral edge slightly curved, posterior angles rec-
tangular; scutel rounded at tip, impunctured.

Elytra^ strife obtuse with large punctures, interstitial lines
hardly wider than the striae, a dilated, smooth, polished,
longitudinal, continued space separated from the suture
by a series of impressed rounded punctures.

Pectus punctured ; postpedus with a few punctures eacii
side ; feet black.

Far. a. Dark green ; tibia piceous.

Far. ^. Feet rufous ; thorax more contracted behind.

Genus Bembidium. Latr.

External maxillary and labial palpi with the penultimate
joint largest, dilated ; terminal joint abruptly very slender
and short ; anterior tibia emarginate on the inner side.

Species.

i. B. ^honestum bronzed, beneath dark blueish-green ; an-
tennse, palpi, and feet piceous ; thorax much narrower
than the elytra, basal line oblique each side.

Length one-fourth of an inch.

Tachys aereus. Melsh. Catal.

Head black, very slightly bronzed ; palpi piceous, penulti-
mate joint of the exterior ones blackish.

INHABITING NORTH AMKKICA. gg

Thorax black, slightly bronzed, impunctured, narrower than
the elytra and contracted a little towards the base, broadest
rather before the middle, posterior angles acute, promi-
nent, from tip to tip not equal to the diameter before the
middle, dorsal lines distinct, basal lines abbreviated, in-
dented, somewhat dilated, marginal groove uninterrupted
at the hind angles, basal edge oblique each side.

Elytra bi'onzed, stritc impressed, not obsolete near the tip,
punctures approximated, interstitial lines flat, tliird with
two punctures on the outer edge, one near the middle,
and the other behind.

Pectus ^nd. posipectus impunctured, deep blueish green.

Feet piceous ; troclmntevs and base of the thighs paler.
Panzer has applied the na?iie which Mr. Mclsheimer

adopted to a different insect of this genus.

2. B. *punctato-striatiim blackish, beneath dark green po-
lished, thorax hardly narrower than the elytra, basal line
oblique eacli side.

Length from one-fourth to nearly three-tenths of an inch.

Body all above black obsoletely bronzed, beneath deep green
highly polished.

AntemiK fuscous, basal joint rufous ; palpi rufous at base,
darker towards the tip.

Thorax broadest in tlie middle, narrowed before, somewhat
contracted before tiie posterior angles, breadth from lip
to tip of the posterior angles equal to the breadth of the
middle, basal edge oblique each side, dorsal line slightly
impressed, basal lines indented, conspicuous.

Elytra^ stripe impressed, obtuse, not obsolete near the (ip,
punctures rounded, conspicuous, interstitial lines slightl\
convex, third one with a dilated indentation near the mid-
dle, and another I)cliind.

Humerus obtusely angled ; feet dark rufous.

Var. a. Body above bright cupreous; im|)resscd clytral spots
green ; thighs and tiliia each at tip greenish.

2

84 liJbSCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Very similar to the preceding species, but, independently
of colour, it may be readily distinguished from it by the
much wider thorax and the impressed elytral spots.

3. B. Hevigatum above green, polished, beneath blackish ;
elytral strife not impressed, punctured.

Length rather more than one-fourth of an inch.

Body all above green, polished, beneath blackish, polished.

Anteiinae and palpi rufous.

Thorax impunctured, broadest in the middle, nearly equal
to the base of the elytra, contracted behind, posterior an-
gles rectangular, basal line nearly rectihnear, marginal
groove interrupted at the posterior angles by an oblique
acutely carinated line, dorsal line slightly impressed,
basal ones profoundly indented.

Elytra destitute of impressed stripe, punctures rounded,
somewhat dilated, obsolete behind the middle, interstitial
lines flattened.

Feet dark rufous ; venter slightly piceous on the disk.

This species was obtained in Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

•1. B. *dorsalis greenish polished, beneath blackish > elytra
testaceous, with two obsolete undulated bands.

Length upwards of one-fifth of an inch.

Body beneath piceous-black, polished.

Head green somewhat brassy ; front longitudinally convex
in the middle ; antemue brown, testaceous towards the
base ; palpi testaceous, darker towards the tip.

Thorax green slightly tinged with cupreous, marginal groove
interrupted at the posterior angles by an oblique carinated
line, dorsal line obsolete, basal ones dilated, basal edge
oblique each side.

Elytra whitish-testaceous, strife punctured, profound, not
obsolete near the tip, interstitial lines hardly convex, third
with a transverse linear impression before and one behind
the middle, area of the scutel greenish, two fuscous, ob-

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 8S

solete, undulated bands behind the middle, the posterior

one less deliiiite.
Feet whitish-testaceous.
Found in Missouri by Mr. Nuttall.

5. B. *co?itrncfu7n blackish-brown, thorax nuich contiactcd
behind, Irnsc iuudly hroudcr than tiie peduncle, rectilinear.

Lengtli one-lifth of an inch.

Head iilack ; untenmv brown, base rufous ; lahnirn deep pi-
ceous ; mandibles piccous before the tip : palpi piccous-
black.

Thorax black, slightly cupreous, widest rather before the
middle, nuich contracted behind, lateral groove not di-
lated, posterior angles very small, base, excepting the an-
gles, hardly wider than the peduncle, basal line rectilinear.

Elytra blackish, or dark piceous slightly glossed with cu-
preous, witli a very indistinct paler posterior margin and
tip, stria' impressed, obsolete at tip, lateral ones shortest,
punctures very distinct, approximated, interstitial lines
flat, third with a puncture before and one behind the
middle.

Feet testaceous.

The |)ale hind margin and tip are usually obsolete, and

often almost imperceptible; it varies in extending to the base,

but is ordinal ily in the form of a very indistinct, sul)tcrminal.

marginal spot, and an apicial larger one.

6. B. *niger purple-black; elytra bronzed, stria' obtuse, ob-
solete at tip: feet rufous.

Length more than tlnee-twentieths of an inch.

Tachya niger. MeUh. Catal.

Bodji beneath piccous-lilack.

Head blaekish tinted with pin-plc ; anteruifr fuscous; base

and palpi rufous.
Thorax black, slightly purpurescent, broadest rather before

86 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

the middle, lateral edge slightly excurved near the pos-
terior angles, basal edge slightly oblique each side.

Elytra dark bronzed, strise obtuse, somewhat canaliculate,
obsolete behind, punctures transverse, interstitial lines
convex.

Feet rufous.

At once distinguishable from the preceding species by its

smaller size.

7. B, *oppositum black ; elytra fuscous, each with two large
remote whitish spots.

Length one-eighth of an inch.

Tachys A-guttatus. Melsh. Catal.

Head black ; antennae brown ; base and palpi testaceous.

Thorax black, somewhat pedunculated, wider before the
middle, much contracted behind, posterior angles salient,
acute, basal edge oblique each side, and, excluding the
angles, hardly wider than the peduncle.

Elytra fuscous or blackisii, each with a large, whitish, lon-
gitudinally suboval spot attaining the humerus and exte-
rior margin, distant from the suture, and one less than
half as large, rounded, placed on the disk behind the
middle, strise obsolete, wanting behind, punctures of the
strise distinct.

Feet testaceous.

Subject to considerable varieties in size and in depth of

colouring of the elytra. The term 4<-guttatus of Mr. Mel-

sheimcr is preoccupied.

8. B. *ajinis black ; elytra each with two large, distant, ob-
solete, pale spots, and a smaller one on the humerus be-
fore.

Length one-eighth of an inch.

Thorax black, wider before the middle, much contracted
behind, posterior angle salient, acute, basal edge oblique

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 87

each side, and, excluding the angles, hardly wider than
the peduncle.

Elytra blackish, each with obsolete, marginal, pale spots,
one placed before the middle not attaining the humerus,
one smaller behind the middle attaining the margin, and
one smallest before the liumerus, stri;v impressed, want-
ing at tip, punctures distinct.

Feet testaceous.

Very similar to the preceding, but may be distinguished

by the larger anterior spot being placed ronsidcraMy I)e-

hind the humerus and by the more profoundly impressed

strife.

9. B. *inornatum black ; feet piceous ; elytral stri^r obsolete,
impunctured.

Length one-tenth of an inch.

Bodif deep black, polished.

Antenme brown ; base and palpi rufous.

Thorax nearly as broad as the elytra, somewhat narrowed

behind, lateral edge hardly excurved behind, posterior

angles rectangular, basal edge rectilinear.
Elytra black, dorsal stria; obsolete, obtuse, impunctured.

lateral striae wanting.
Feet piceous.
Often under the bark of decaying trees.

10. B. *flaTicaiidus \y\cto\xs ', elytra with obsolete, impunc-
tured strife, and pale at tip.

Length three-fortieths of an inch.

Head blackish ; antennw, labrum, and palpi pale rufous.

Thorax piceous-black, transverse quadrate, broadest in the
middle, not contracted behind, posterior angles rectan-
gular, basal edge rectilinear.

Elytra i)lackish, from near the middle to the tips ycllowisli
white, striar im[)unctured, wanting each side and at tip, in
terstitial lines cotivex.

Feet pale rufous J venter piceous at tip.

88 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Far. a. Entirely testaceous.

These I found very numerous under the bark of decaying
trees.

11. B. ^proximus. Head and thorax piceous; elytra testa-
ceous with a blackish common disk, striae obsolete, im-
punctured.

Length rather more than one-tenth of an inch.

Head blackish piceous ; antemice rufous ; base and palpi
paler ; labrimi rufous.

Thorax piceous, transversely subquadrate, slis;htly contracted
behind, posterior angles rectan.gular, base much broader
than the pedicel, basal Une slightly oblique each side, dor-
sal line distinct, basal ones indented.

Elytra testaceous, a common black spot on the middle hardly
attaining the margin, region of the scutel dusky, strife very
obtuse, obsolete, wanting each side and at tip, impunc-
tured, interstitial lines convex.

Pectus and postpectus piceous ; feet testaceous ; venter black-
ish, paler at tip.
Approaches the preceding, but, colour apart, it may be

known by the thorax being more contracted behind.

13. B. *l(eviwi piceous ', palpi whitish; elytra destitute of
strife.

Length one-twentieth of an inch.

Body piceous tinctured with rufous.

Head rather darker ; antennw paler at base ; palpi whitish.

T/wraa: transversely subquadrate, broadest before the middle,
hardly narrowed behind, lateral edge not excurved behind,
posterior angles slightly obtuse angular, basal edge nearly
rectilinear, dorsal line obsolete, basal ones wanting.

Elytra impunctured, destitute of strife, excepting an obsolete
sutural one.

Feei testaceous.

I arrange this species with Bembidium from the habit, the

palpi in the specimen I possess being mutilated.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 89

13. B. *variegafum black ; head and tliorax tin2;cd witli
greenish ; elytra varied witli testaceous^; feet pale piccous.

Length one-fifth of an incii.

Budt/ impunctured, glabrous, beneatli black.

Head black slightly bronzed; antenna- and palpi fuscous, base

piceous.
Thorax blackish slightly bronzed, tinged each side with green,
broadest in the middle, a little contracted behind, lateral
edge a little excurved near the base, posterior angles rec-
tangular, dorsal and basal lines distinct, an elevated acute
line at the posterior angles.
Elytra black variegated with testaceous, or testaceous varied
with black dots and lines, and with a slight cupreous
tinge, stritv punctured, profound, interstitial lines convex,
third one with two distant punctures.
Feet fuliginous.

Very closely allied to B. dorsalis, wliich may be a mere
variety of this insect. This species is sul)Jcct to great va-
riety in its elytral markings, the chief colour of the elytra
being sometimes black and sometimes pale testaceous, witii
a greater or less number of lines and spots.

14. B. *tetracolum greenish-black ; feet rufous ; elytra each
with two rufous spots.

Length nearly one-fourth of an inch.

Head deep greenish ; antenmc fuscous ; base and palpi ru-
fous.

Thorax broadest before the middle, contracted behind, la-
teral edge excurved at base, base punctured.

Elijfra blackish, stiia* punctured, interstitial lines convex,
third one with two distant punctures, a longitudinal, sub-
marginal, rufous spot originating on the humerus, and an
oblique, almost common, elongated one behind the middle.

Feet rufous.

VOL. II. M

go liESCKIPTION OP INSECTS

Genus Tuechus. Clairville.
Anterior tibia emarginate ; anterior and intermediate tarsi of
the male dilated ; elytra and wings entire ; palpi filiform,
the last joint of the exterior ones as long or longer than
the preceding joint, not narrowed at base, but forming
with that joint a fusciform mass.

Species.

1. T. *conjunctus. Head piceous-black ; thorax rufous, im-
punctured ; elytra dusky ; feet testaceous.

Length three-twentieths of an inch.

Body impunctured, glabrous.

Head black or deep piceous; antennae brown ; base and palpi
testaceous ; labrum piceous ; mandibles rufous at base.

Thorax rufous, rounded behind, dorsal line not deeply im-
pressed, basal lines slightly excavated, base impunctured.

Elytra blackish, margin and suture piceous obscure, strise
impunctured, interstitial lines depressed.

Pectus rufous ; sternum black ; feet testaceous ; postpectus
black ; abdomen black.
Very common. The disk of the thorax is sometimes

dusky or blackish.

3. T. *partiai'ius. Head black ; thorax rufous, rounded be-
hind, punctured at base ; elytra pale, disk dusky ; feet tes-
taceous.

Length less than three-twentieths of an inch.

Body glabrous, beneath black.

Head black ; antennae brown ; base and palpi testaceous ;
nasiis and labrum piceous.

Thorax rufous, rounded behind, dorsal line distinct, con-
tinued to the base, posterior lines excavated, dilated, and
punctured, a few obsolete punctures before.

Elytra pale rufous or testaceous, somewhat darker on the
disk, strise impunctured.

Pectus rufous ; sternum black ; feet testaceous ; postpectiis
and abdomen black.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 91

Very closely allied to the preceding, is less common, and
is distinct by the punctures of the thorax, by tlie less abrupt
posterior termination of that pait, and by the consequent
less obtuse form of the angles.

3. T. *7'upestris. Head black; thorax dark rufous, punctured
at base, posterior angles not rounded, beneatli black ; feet
testaceous.

Length nearly one-fifth of an inch.

Body glabrous, beneath black.

Head black ; antennce brown ; base and palpi testaceous ;
nasus and labriim deep piceous-

Thorax deep biackisli rufous, gradually a little narrowed
from before the middle to the hind angles, wiiich are
slightly angulated, the edge very slightly excurved at the
hind angles.

Elytra with impunctured strise, disk l)lackish, margin and su-
ture dark rufous ; pectus piceous-black ; sternum black ;
feet testaceous ; postpectus and abdomen black.

Far. a. Length less than one-tenth of an inch.
Strongly resembles the two preceding species, l)ut is sufll-

ciently distinct by tiie form of the posterior thoracic angles.
It is highly probable that far. a. is in reality a distinct

species.

Family HI. Hydrocanthaui.

Genus Dytiscus. Lin. iMtr.

AntennfP longer than the head, setaceous ; scutel distinct ;
three basal joints of the anterior tarsi, in the male, dilated,
patelliform ; palpi filiform.

Species.

1. D. */;n&7-/o/fl/?/.9 attenuated before, blarkish-green above ;
thorax and elytra yellowish on the outer margin, the lat
ter with three sf>iies of punctures.

9S DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Dytiscus fimbriolalus. Melsh. Calal.

Length one inch and one-fifth.

Body dark green, beneath piceous-black, impunctured, very

distinctly widest behind and narrowed before.
Head smooth, with a slightly impressed spot on each side of
the front ; nasus and iabrum yellowisii, the latter with an
impressed transverse puncture each side, the former
blackish at base above ; trophi and antennae rufous ; man-
dibles at tip and labium black-piceous.
Thorax with numerous, minute, impressed, irregular lines,
an anterior, abbreviated, indented, transverse line each
side of the obsolete dorsal one, lateral margin yellowish.
Elytra with very numerous, abbreviated, longitudinal, irre-
gular, impressed, unequal lines, which are obsolete near
the suture, tip, and on the outer margin, three series of
distant punctures slightly villous, lateral one indistinct,
costal margin yellowish, which becomes obsoletely semi-
deltoid near the tip.
Pectus and postpectus piceous-black ; feet piceous ; femora
and basal joints of the anterior pairs yellowish-rufous ;
venter piceous, three lateral rufous punctures on each side.
A black spot is often present on the middle of the yellow
thoracic margin. This species approaches exceedingly near
to D. limbatus of E. India ; but, according to the observations
of Dr. J. F. Melsheimer, it is smaller, the colour is less oli-
vaceous, more of a deep green, and the form a rather longer
oval.

2. D. *verlicalis suboval, above blackish with greenish re-
flections ; thorax and elytra margined with yellowish, the
latter with an oblique subterminal line.

Length one inch and three-tenths.

Body impunctured, above black, with olivaceous green reflec-
tions, beneath piceous-black, sul)oval, very sligl)tly broadest
behind and hardly narrowing before.

Head large ; vertex with an obscure rufous spot, a geminate,
impressed, punctured spot near the nasus, numerous super-

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. <).}

ciliary punctures ; nasus and labrinn yellowish, the tormcr
wjtii an ahl)reviated impressed hne each side helbrc ; nn-
tenim and palpi rufous at hasc, piccuus at tip : labium veu-
tricose between the insertion of the pal|)i. rufous; liihinm
and gula rufous.
Thorax margined each side witii yellowish, a lonG;itudiiiul
impressed line, a transverse, somewhat undulated, sub-
marginal line of impressed punctures eacl.' side before,
and a more abbreviated sparse one each side behind.
Elytra margined each side witii villowish, wliidi l)ecomes
obsolete behind, a yellowish, oblique, sulUcrminal line l)e-
hind, three very distinct scries of |)unctures, with alternate
series of minute remote ones.
Pectus pale rufous; stmiuni black, hardly elevated before:
postprctus piccous-black ; Ji-ft piceous ; fcuiora and basal
joints of the anterior pairs rufous ; venter piccous-black.
three obsolete, lateral, piceous spots.
Differs much from the preceding species, in l)cing far
more robust before, and instead of the semideltoid termina-
tion of the yellow margin, there is an oblique subterminal
line, as in 1). margiualus, but it is very distinct from the lat-
ter species, by not having the yellowish anterior and posterior
thoracic margins.

3. D. *nw(liatus blackish. ])uncturcd. beneath i)lack : thorax
with a yellowish l)an(l anil margin ; elytra fasciate behind.

Length about eleven-twentieths of an inch.

Head rufous-yellow varied with dusky, base black ; front
with sometimes two ol)liqiic blackish spots ; 7iusus paler :
labrum whitish, particularly on the anterior margin.

Thorax l)lack, a yellowish margin and abbreviated narrow
band which is aljruptly dilated backward ticar the lateral
margin, where it becomes conlluent with the basai
margin; aciitel black, impunctincd.

Elytra blackish-brown varied with yellowish, minute, irrc
gular lines, and as well as the thorax with niminous. mi-
nute punctures, a yellowish, narrow, exterior, and subsu-

94 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

tural margin, and a common, arquated, somewhat undu-
lated band behind the middle, and a terminal one, obso-
lete or confounded with the tip.

Anterior /ee^ and s^e/'/zz/w testaceous ; posterior /(^e^piceous;
thighs black; venter, third, fourth, and fifth segments each
with a large, rufous, lateral spot.
The grooves of the elytra in the female of this species are

obsolete and abbreviated, and not more distinct than those

of the male.

4. D. HcenioUs blackish ; thorax margined each side with
rufous ; elytra covered with confluent black points, three
acute, pale rufous, longitudinal lines on each elytron.

Length rather more than half an inch.

D. pictus. Melsh. Catal.

Body oblong-oval, not wider behind, black varied with rufous,

beneath piceous-black.
Head with a double, impressed, very distinct line each side
before ; antennae, labrum, and nasus rufous, the latter
with an impressed hne each side.
Thorax with a slightly punctured, transverse line before, and

an obscure rufous margin.
Elytra rufo-testaceous, but rendered black by small, dense,
confluent punctures, which are entirely confluent near the
suture, an immaculate outer margin, and undulated sub-
basal line, three acute pale rufous lines on each elytron,
punctured strise indistinct, that next the suture more ob-
vious and composed of an interrupted series of minute
punctures.
Pectus and postpectus piceous-black ; feet rufo-piceous ; ven-
ter piceous-black, segments piceous at tip.
I have seen but one sex of this species, a female, which
was sent to me by Dr. J. F. Melsheimer, under the name
which I have adopted ; that of pictus above quoted having
been previously applied to a diff*erent insect, althou2;h that
insect does not belong to this genus in a rigid arrangement.

INUADITINU NOUTll AMERICA. 1)5

Genus Colymbetes. ClabtUle.

Antenna longer than the head, setaceous ; scutel distinct ;
basal joints of the four anterior tarsi of the male almost
equally dilated, not patelliform ; palpi filifornK

Species.

1. E. *eriftro])terus black ; elytra dark reddish-brown, mar-
gin and base paler ; feet towards the tips piceous ; body
rounded behind.

Length not quite two-fifths of an inch.

Dytisats erytroplerus. MeUh. Calal.

Body black, above divided by minute lines into minute, ir-
regular, longitudinal, or suborbicular spaces.
Head black, two indistinct piceous spots on the vertex, and
an abbreviated line and puncture on the front each side ;
antennw and palpi rufous.
Thorax black, dorsal line abbreviated, obsolete, lateral edge

arquated ; scutel black, plain.
Elytra reddish-brown, darker on the posterior disk, inmia-
culate, exterior margin and base paler, rounded behind,
inflected margin l)lack.
Pectus and postpectus black ; sternum acutely carinated ; feet
piceous, middle of tlie thighs black, nails of the anterior
pair in one sex dilated in the middle and compressed ;
venter black, segments piceous at tip.
Rather less convex than the succeeding species, and some-
what more dilated. The colour of the head and thorax is
manifestly distinct from that of the elytra, and forms a good
specific character.

•i. C. *fenestralis black, sliglitly bronzed ; elytra four spotted,
anterior spots obsolete, terminal ones distinct, beneath
piccous-black.

Length two-fillhs of an inch.

96 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

Dytiscus fenestralis. Melsh. Calal.

Bodij black, above slightly bronzed and divided into very mi-
nute, suborbicular, depressed granules, beneath piceous-
black.
Head with two obsolete piceous spots on the vertex, a de-
finite, impressed, abbreviated, oblique, frontal line, with a
smaller oblique one above, each side ; antennee and palpi
piceous.
Thorax, an obsolete, punctiform, central line, often wanting.
Elytra, on each a submarginal, elongated, obsolete, rufous
spot behind the middle, and a subtriangular one near the
tip.
Pectus and postpedus not obviously granulated ; sternum
acutely carinated ; feet piceous ; vetiter with very nu-
merous, oblique, irregular lines.
Far. a. Above dark reddisli-brown, margin paler, spots yel-
low, distinct, beneath piceous ; feet pale rufous.
My friend Dr. J. F. Melsheimer, in a letter written some-
time since, observes that " the two yellowish macula near
the apex of the elytra differ oftentimes in de[)tii of colouring
and in size. I have several specimens that have the macula
of an irregular, others of an oval or elongated form, and the
colour of all the different shades from a faint yellow to a
light brown. It delights in miry forest springs, where it
feeds on tender vegetables and minute insects. If it is
caught and pressed between the fingers, it will exudate from
the divisional line of the stethidium {truncus) and abdomen,
a white milky substance. It moves with great activity."

It undoubtedly approaches very closely to C. fenestratus
of Europe, which insect has the same fenestrate elytral
spots ; as well as another insect, which is described by Mar-
sham under the name of D. obscurus.

3. C. *ambiguus black ; elytra dark reddish-brown ; feet
rufous; body somewhat acute behind; vertex with obsolete
piceous spots.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 1)7

Length not quite seven-twentieths of an inch.
Boiiij black, above with n\inutc, depressed, irregular gra-
nules.
Head black, two indistinct piccous spots on the vertex and
an abl)reviatcd frontal line and puncture each side ; an-
teniia; and pnfpi |)ale rufous.
Thorax l)lack, dt)rsal line obsolete ; scutel black.
Elytra dark reddish-brown, ini maculate, margin and base

paler, apex acute ; epipleurd black.
Sternum acutely curinated ; fed pale rufous, posterior ones
rufous.

For this insect I am indebted to my friend Dr. J. F. Mcl-
sheimer, who sent it to me as a distinct s[)ecies. It ap-
proaches very closely to E. erjitropfrrus, but may be distin-
guished by its smaller size, less dilated form, more gradually
attenuated and more acute posterior termination of the body.

4, C. *seriatns black, immaculate, slightly purple-bron/cd;

elytra with about three irregular series of punctures on

each; lateral edge of the thorax somewhat rectilinear.
Length seven-twentieths of an inch,
Boihi black, immaculate. aI>ove very slightly bronzed, divided

into very minute, suborbicular, depresse(l granules, beneatli

black.
Head, a transverse frontal puncture each side, with double.

parallel, obsolete, smaller ones above ; mdemur and palpi

rufous.
Thorax. sul)margin slightly depressed, dorsal line obsolete,

lateral and basal edges nearly rectilinear, posterior angle?

sul^acute,
Ehitra. on each three irregular series of villous punctures,

aiul a sul)margiiial less ilisiinct one ; fpijtln/ra |)ici-()iH.
Sternum acutely carinatrd. (lepressed behind, sliirlitly ele-
vated, obtuse before : feet rufous, posterior pair pireoiis.

This insect was sent me as di«<tiiut by Dr. J. F. .Mcl-
sheimiT. It is very closely allied to (' '■''''>•'•/<. bn> i- «<.n
sideralily larger.

VOL. 11. — N

98 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

5. C. *nitidus black ; elytra with about three irregular series
of punctures on each ; lateral edge of the thorax arquated
each side.

Length three-tenths of an inch.

Dytiscus nitidus. Melsh. Catal.

Body black, immaculate, polished, and divided into very mi-
nute, irregularly orbicular granules, beneath black.
Head, a transverse, abbreviated, frontal line each side, su-
perior punctures obsolete or wanting ; antennce and palpi
rufous.
Thorax, dorsal line abbreviated, central, lateral edge ar-
quated, posterior angles subacute.
Elytra with three irregular series of villous punctures, and
a submarginal and sutural less distinct one; epipleura
black.
Sternum acutely carinated, depressed behind ; feet piceous,
anterior ones rufous.

The chief difference between this species and the prece-
ding one appears to rest in the general form and size of the
body, the colour and markings being nearly the same; the
present is much smaller, of a more rounded oval, and much
more obtusely rounded before.

6. C. *bicarmatus reddish-brown, punctured ; sternum bi-
carinated.

Length rather more than three-tenths of an inch.

Body reddish-brown or ferruginous, oblong-oval, with minute
numerous punctures.

Head, lateral frontal line oblique, puncture above wanting.

Thorax, a submarginal slightly rugose line, dorsal line ob-
solete.

Elytra attenuated behind, rather darker tlian the thorax,
about three obsolete irregular series of punctures.

Sternum bicarinate ; feet, anterior pairs paler.

7. C. *venustus pale rufous, beneath testaceous ; elytra
blackish lincated with whitish.

INHABITING NOBTH AMERICA. >J\i

Length about three-tenths of an inch.

Bodi/ pale rufous, minutely punctured, beneath testaceous
tinged with reddish, minutely lineuted.

Head blackish at base ; aritennce and palpi testaceous.

Thorax at the middle of the liasc and lip blackish.

Elytra blackish, witli very minute, numerous, fenestrate punc-
tuics, a submarginal whitish line interrupted at tip, passing
round the humerus, and falcate on the base, an abbreviated
subsutural one at base, hardly attaining tlie middle, and
two or three smaller obsolete ones near the marginal line.

Sternum acutely carinated.

A remarkal)ly handsome and distinct species. It is not

common, and may probably prove to be the interrogatus of

Fabricius.

8. C. *ghjphiciis dark brown or blackisli ; elytra profoundly
striated.

Length one-fifth of an inch.

Dyliscus glyphicus. Mehh. Calal.

Body dark reddish-brown, miimtely punctured, beneath

blackish, minutely lineated.
Thorax with an anterior, indented, rugous, submarginal line.
Ebjtra with eleven profoundly impressed slri:e. alternately

abbreviated towards the tip, the inner ones abbreviated at

base, marginal one extending from the middle towards the

tip.
Feet rufous.

This insect varies in being of a paler colour. I found it
numerous in fresh water ponds oti Sullivan's Island, South
Carolina.

9. C. *nhfumtu!i black ; elytra four-spotted, punctured.
Length three-tenths of an inch.

Bfuli) black.

Head with two obsolete piceous spots on the vertex, a single

100 DESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

impressed, abbreviated, frontal line each side; aMennw
and palpi piceous.
Elytra with two or three distinct series of punctures, some-
what irregular, scattered behind, eacii elytron with a pale,
fenestrate, elongated, submarginal spot behind the middle,
and a subtriangular one near the tip.
Feet piceous.
Far. a. Body beneath testaceous ; frontal spots obsolete.

This species approaclies very near to fenestralis, l)ut dif-
fers in having the series of large distinct punctures, in being
not more than half the size of that insect and more obtuse
before. Found on Mr. R. Haines's farm, Germantown,

10. C. *stagni?ius oval, black, beneath rufous; vertex with
two piceous spots ; elytra with a submarginal whitish line
behind.

Length less than seven-twentieths of an inch.

Dytiscus stagninus. Melsh. Catal.

Body oval, obtuse behind, black, beneath rufous.

Head with two obscure piceous spots on the vertex, a single,

impressed, transverse, abbreviated line and point each

side before ; nasiis and labrum piceous.
Elytra with three dilated lines of irregular, profound, rather

large punctures, becoming confused at tip, an abbreviated,

submarginal, whitish hne on each elytron, originating near

the middle of the tip.
Tergum with a few hairs each side behind.

Genus Laccophilus. Leach.

Antennae setaceous, longer tlian the head ; scutel none ; an-
terior tarsal joints of the male not patelliform; palpi fili-
form.

Species.

1. L. *maciilosus yellowish-testaceous; elytra blackish, li-
neated and spotted with white.

IXHABITING NOnrn AMERICA. iDt

Length one-fourth of an inch.

Dytiacusmandostts. Mthh. Catal.

Body yellowish-testaceous, u;lat)rous.

Elytra blackish, three spots or dilated lines at base, of whicli
one is humeral and one subsutural, each einare;itiato at
tip and profoundly so on the inner side, and the tliiid ratlier
shoitcr, arisinc; from the middle of tiie liasc, two marniiial
spots of which the anterior one is much the largest, a
common irrej2;ular spot l)chind the middle, and an apicial
common band, white, tip obliquely truncate.

Var. a. Trunk beneath black.

Var, n. Yellowish-testaceous ; elytra with a common black
band behind the middle.
Rather a common insect. — The last variety is a rcmar-

kai)lc one ; but, when closely examined, traces of some of

the spots are perceptible upon it.

S. L. ^proximus yellowish-testaceous ; elytra blackish obso-

letely spotted with dull whitish.
length three-twentieths of an inch.
Body yellowish-testaceous, paler beneath.
Elytra with spots as in the preceding species, but obsolete.

the larger marginal one distinct.

This species 1 found very numerous in the fresh water
marshes of South Carolina. I do not hesitate to give it as
distinct from the preceding, although so closely allied to it
by the elytral macuht. It is readily distinguishable by its in-
ferior size.

Genus Hvdroporus. ClairrUle.

The four anterior tarsi apparently four-jointed, the fourth
joint minute, and with the base of the fifth concealed in
a profound fissure of the third Joint; body oval, the
breadth greater tlian tlic heiglit; scutcl none

lOS DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

Species.

1. H. *undulatus ferruginous ; elytra trifasciate with black.
Length about three-twentieths of an inch.

Dytisous undulatus. Melsh. Calal.

Body ferruginous, very numerous, minute, villous punctures,

hairs adpressed to the surface.
Head destitute of large, indented, frontal punctures; antefince

and palpi paler.
Thorax at base and tip black, lateral edge very slightly ar-

quated.
Elytra^ suture and three undulated irregular bands black, of

the latter, one is basal, one central, and the other subter-

minal.

The bands sometimes occur dilated and decurrent, so as
to form a common black disk to the elytra.

S. H. *oppositus blackish ; head and base of the thorax fer-
ruginous ; elytra with six whitish marginal spots or sub-
fascia.

Length rather less than three-twentieths of an inch.

Body with very numerous, villous, minute punctures, hairs
adpressed to the surface.

Head rufous or ferruginous, four or six indented, frontal, dis-
tant punctures.

Thorax ferruginous, black at tip, about three indented punc-
tures, placed transversely.

Elytra black, each with an irregular humeral spot, another
placed upon the margin behind the middle, and a third
apicial one yellowish, edge yellowish.

Postpectus and vetiter blackish or deep piceous ; pectus and
feet yellowish-testaceous.
This was sent to me as a distinct species by Dr. J. F.

Melsheimer. It is very like undulatus.

3. H. *niger black, villous, obscure, immaculate ; head and
lateral margins of the thorax and elytra obscure rufous.

INHABITING NORTn AMERICA. 103

Length more than tliree-twentieths of an inch.

Dytiscus niger. Mehh. Calal.

Body black, obscure, very numerous, minute, villous punc-
tures, hairs adpresscd to the surface.

Head obscure rufous, paler beneath, dusky each side of the
front, a slightly indiMitrd spot each side before instead of
the impressed line and punctures; anterinn' dusky towards
the tip of eachof tlie terminal joints; palpi, terminul joints
blackish-

Thorax black, very obscure rufous on each side, doreal line
none.

Elytra black, vciy obscure rufous each side near the base,
stri.T or macuhe none ; epiplenra rufous.

Pectus and pnsfpectus black ; feet rufous ; renter black, seg-
ments sliglitly piceous at tip.

4. H. ^catascopium black, obsolete, spotted and lineated with
rufous ; feet rufous.

Length three-twentieths of an inch.

Body black, obscure, with villous punctures, hairs adpresscd
to the surface.

Head obscure rufous, dilated orbits and base black, indented
frontal spots eacii side instead of impressed lines and [junc-
tures ; antenna', terminal joints blackish at their tips ; pafpi
terminal joint black.

Thorax black, a central longitudinal spot, and irregular sub-
marginal one each side rufous, dorsal impressed line none.

Elytra black, margirj rufous, with a transverse irregular pro-
cess at base, and another at the middle, and common api-
cial band, a double sutural line, an abbreviated line arising
from the middle of the l^ase, and a subsutural spot near
the middle, rufous, a distinct sutural stria and an obsolete
one near the middle.

Feet rufous.

5. H. *lacustris rufous, obscure; a common, impressed. Ion-

104 BESCRIPTION OF INSECTS

gitudinal line each side on the base of the thorax and
elytra.
Length more than one-twentieth of an inch.

Dytiscus lacustris. Melsh. Catal.

Body rufous, obscure, with minute puncttn'es.

Htadmih slightly impressed frontal spots; a/^^en/io?, terminal
joints tipped with blackish ; maxillary palpi blackish at
tip.

Thorax blackish at base and tip, base each side with an im-
pressed, acute, oblique line not attaining the anterior
margin.

Elytra with a blackish suture, base, and submargin, an im-
pressed, acute, longitudinal line as long as the thorax
arises from the middle of the base of each elytron, ap-
pearing to be a continuation of the lateral thoracic line.

Pectus and feet pale rufous ; postpedus blackish ; venter
pale rufous.

Var. a. Postpectus rufous.

6. H. afflnis rufous, obscure ; a common impressed, longitu-
dinal line each side on the base of the thorax and elytra ;
elytra varied with longitudinal black lines.

Length more than one-twentieth of an inch.

Body rufous, obscure, punctured.

Thorax blackish at base and in the middle, an impressed,
acute line each side at base not attaining the anterior
margin.

Elytra with a blackish suture, base, irregular submargin and
intervening abbreviated lines, punctures of the disic rather
larger, distinct, impressed line of tlie middle of the base
of each elytron much abbreviated, obsolete.
Differs from the preceding, to which it is very similar, in

[laving rather larger punctures on the disk of the elytra,

more distinct lines, and in having the impressed ones of the

base very short and indistinct.

INHABITING/ NORTH AMERICA. IU5

Genus Hydrocantiius. Say.

Antennae rather longer tlian the head, somewhat thicker in
the middle; scutelnone; maxillary pulpi fditbrm; labialcs,
terminal joint dilati'd, suhovate, compressed, entire ; an-
terior tibia mucronate, tarsal joints of the male not patel-
liform ; a small pectoral scale covering the origin of the
posterior feet.

Species.

H. *iricoIor ferrua;inous ; elytra dark reddish-brown, iri
descent, attenuated behind-

Length threc-twentietlis of an inch.

Bodif pale ferruginous, above glabrous, impuncturcd, beneadi
with villous punctures.

flead obtusely rounded before ; ei/es not elevated above the
surface ; anttnim elcvcn-jointcd, originating beneath ; la-
hriim rather large, al)ruptly deflected, or somewhat in-
flected, entire ; palpi whitish.

Thorax^ posterior angles acute ; aterniim not prominent be-
fore, beliind the origin of tlie anterior feet dilaicd. de-
pressed, and connate with the poststernum by a rectilinear
suture its whole widtb ; pnstsfrrni/m dilated, dejjrcssed,
equilateral, concealing the origin of the intermediate feet,
posterior scales equilateral, obliquely truncate at tip, and
concealing the origin of the posterior feet.

Feet, anterior tibia minutely j)ectinate beneath, and termi-
nated tn' a robust dccurved hook ; tarsi abbre\ iatrd.

Elytra daik reddish-brown, iridescent, destitute of punctures
or strise, and attenuated l)ehitid.
This seems to be a rare insect: I have seen but a single

specimen. This new genus certainly diftVrs from all the

genera of its family by the form of tlie labial palpi, of the

sternum and poststernum, mucronate anterior til>ia. ^e. Ft

rlosely approaches the genus Mnferus by the dilated labial
VOL. n. — o

106 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

palpi, but differs in having those parts entire. It also has
some relation to Haliplus by the scales which conceal the
origin of the posterior feet. The proper situation of this
new genus is between those two genera, but it is unquestion-
ably much more closely allied to the former.

Genus Haliplus. Latr.

Antennse ten-jointed ; palpi subulate ; scutel none ; tarsi fili-
form, five-jointed, posterior thighs concealed at base by a
clypeiform scale ; body oval, thick.

Species.

1. H. * i2-punctahis yellowish; thorax with two black spots

at base ; elytra punctured and spotted with black.
Length five-fortieths of an inch.

Bytisms maculaliis. Melsh. Catal.

Body pale yellowish, with numerous dilated punctures,

rounded behind.
Head immaculate.

Thorax, a distinct black spot each side at base.
Elytra pale, with profoundly punctured strife, punctures di-
lated, black, each elytron with six black dots placed l, 2,
1, 3, the anterior one before the middle, the two succeed-
ing ones on the middle-

The Dytiscus maculatus of Fabriciusis altogether different
from this species; it is a Colymbetes. I have, however,
thought proper to reject the name maculatus as applied to
this insect, lest it should be confounded witli the Fabrician
insect by those who adhere to his system or to that of
Linne.

S. H. Hriopsis pale yellowish ; thorax with a black spot be-
fore ; elytra whitish spotted with black-
Length nearly three-twentietlis of an inch.
Body pale yellowish, numerous dilated punctures.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 107

Thorax with a large, conspicuous, deep black spot on the
anterior margin.

Elytra paler tlian tlie body, stria' proloiindly punctured,
punctures colour of the elytra, suture, l)asc, tip, and six
spots on each elytron deep black, spots placed l, l, a, l, l,
the pcnultiiuatc one joining the suture, suture at the centre
dilated into a spot.

Genus Gyuinus. Lin.

Antennae shorter than the head, second joint with a lateral
process ; eijes apparently four ; two posterior pairs of feet
dilated, very much compressed.

Species.

1. G. .'9wje;7>fl;»/s blackish-bronze, beneath piccous; elytra

smooth, slightly sinuate at tip.
Length nine-twentieths, breadth more than one-fourth of an

inch.

Gyrinus Amtricamts Itevis, atcr, opacu«, pcdibus quatuor posticis testaccis.
Fuhr. Sijsl. Ekut., Purs 1, p. Z75.

G. .Imenrnnus bron/.t; ; pattcs fernigiripuscs ; ilytrns simploi), prr-<quc atriccs.
Oliv. Ent., III., A'o. 41, p. 12, pl.\, Jig. 3.

G. Americanus, Dr. Forsber^. Tran». Vpxnl. Xnrirfi/.

Body oblong-subovatc, blackish, slightly tinged with bron/.c
or purplish, beneath piceous.

Head, labrum deeply ciliated with white hair.

Thorax impunctured ; sciitd none.

Elytra with very minute, obsolete, distant punctures, di.sk
plain, each side with four or five obsolete stri.T, tip dis-
tinctly and very obtusely sinuated, a projecting angle at the
sutural tip.

Poststerman witli distant profound piinrtnres before ; /r/
testaceous, anterior pair rufous and destitute of a femoral
spine.
.\ verv common insect. When caught, a lactescent fluid

108 DESCRIPTION OP INSECTS

is secreted from the anal segment, that diffuses a strong odor,
very similar to that of the flowers of the Calycanthus.

2. G. *emarginatus blackish-bronze, beneath blackish ; ely-
tra smooth, each simply rounded at tip.

Length from nine-twentieths to eleven-twentieths of an inch.
Bodij blackish-green, slightly bronzed, beneath piceous-black

or fuliginous.
Head blackish-green ; labrum at tip and antejmce at base ci-
liated with white hairs.
Thorax impunctured ; scutel none.

Elytra with very minute, obsolete, distant punctures, stria^
seven or eight, more distinct in the male, obsolete, each
elytron rounded at tip, not sinuated nor dentated.
Poststernum punctured before, punctures profound and dis-
tant; feet, posterior pairs testaceous, anterior pair in the
male Furnished with a prominent angle or oi^tuse spine
near the tip of the anterior edge of the thigh.
The elytra appear emarginated at the tip of the suture
when at rest, in consequence of each of them having a round-
ed termination. This species has been hitherto confounded
with the Americanus with whicli it associates indiscriminately,
but is suffrcicnlly distinct by the armature of the anterior
femora of the male, and by the simply rotund termination of
the elytra in both sexes.

3. G. *analis l)lack sliglitly bronzed ; elytra with punctured
strife ; thorax with a transverse indented hue.

Length one-fifth of an inch.

Body beneath impunctured and tinged with piceous.

Front between the eyes with two impressed dots ; labrum at
tip and palpi at base ciliated with white hairs ; mouth be-
neath piceous; labial palpi testaceous, blackisii at tip.

Thorax with a transverse indented line rather i)efore the
middle not attaining to the lateral margins, and a short ob-
lique line on each side beiiind it curving towards the la-
teral edge ; scutel distinct, subtriangular.

INHABITING NORTH AMERICA. 109

Ehitro with about eleven distinct narrow stii:i' of punctures,
interstiiial lines depressed, each elytron very obtusely
rounded at tip.

Poststernutn impunctured ; feet rufous ; caudal segment tes-
taceous.
Resembles G. natator, but that insect is larger; it corres-

ponds in size with the marimis Gyllenh., but t!ic punctures

of the elytra are much smaller, and the termination of the

elytra is more obtusely rounded.

4, G. ^limbntiis black ; elytra with punctured strite ; cpi-
plcura yellowish.

Length rather more than onc-fifth of an inch.

Frojit bipunctured.

Tliorox witli an obsolete, transverse, impressed line before
tlie middle, and a short obUque line each side be ind the
middle.

Elfitra striate with small punctures, interstitial lines de-
pressed, each elytron obtusely roimdcd at tip. beneath
rufous ; epipleura and margin of the pectus beliiiid titr eye
yellowish.
I obtained this species in Georgia and East Florida. It

closely resemldes the preceding species, but may be at once

distinguished from it by the colour of llie epipleura and

inferior surface of the bodv.

No. II.

Description and Chemical Analysis of the Retinasphalt, disco-
vered at Cape Sable, Magothy River, Ann Arundel County,
Maryla?id. By G. Troost, M. D.^Read iQth Dec. 1833.

In the American Journal of Sciences and Arts edited by
B. Silliman, (Vol. III. p. 8) I published a description of a va-
riety of amber, and of a fossil substance supposed to be a
nest of an insect, discovered at Cape Sable, Maryland This
description was the result of only one analysis. It appears
now, from subsequent trials, that there occur, at that place,
two minerals, which are very similar in their appearance,
viz. the true amber, and a resino-bituminous substance
known by the name of Retinasphalt. It happened, acciden-
tally, that I selected, for the first analysis, some fragments
of the true amber ; and in consequence, taking for granted
that it was all the same substance, as the hardness, smell
when burnt, ^-c. appeared to be the same, I described it in
the above mentioned Journal as amber. Having returned
to my former residence, where I have every means to
vary my researches, I have submitted this substance again to
examination, and have discovered my error, and ascertained
that it consists of two, if not of three, others, of some-
what different nature, viz. amber, Retinasphalt, and a sub-
stance which corresponds with what Jameson calls iossil
copal.

I have now the honour to lay before the Philosophical
Society the result of my investigations.

HETINASPUALT. 1 1 1

RETINASPHALT.

The lietlnasphalt is cither perfectly opaque, or slin;htly
transparent at tlie edges ; the colour exiiihits every shade
of a mixture of yellow, grey, and brown, sometimes arran-
ged, in nearly concentric zones, so as to display the Ijcau-
tiful colours admirod in tlie. Egyptian jaspers, or disposed in
alteruiitc bunds, dots, spots, clouds, u^ in ilie other agates or
jaspers.

It yields with more case to the knife than amber ; brealo
easily, exhibiting a perfect conclioidul fracture ; and some
varieties seem to be of the same hardness with amber, and
sufficiently hard and compact to receive a line polish. Other
varieties arc poious, having sometimes tlie appearance of
bone which has been long exposed to the action of the sun,
and being in that case also of a greyish colour.

In lustre it is inferior to amber, having more of the lustre
of the gamboge, than that of copal ; and generally it seems
to be intermediate between these. Sometimes it is dull, jiar-
ticularly the porous variety. When homogeneous, comjiact,
and polished, it acquires by friction the negative electricity,
in the same degree as amber: the porous variety has this
property in a feeble degree.

E.\RTHY RETINASPHALT.

This usually occurs in fragments, or friable porous masses,
from the size of a grain of tnaizc and smaller, to that of u
walnut ; having a dull earthy as|)ect, intermixed with pyrites.
Its solidity docs not exceed that of clods of loam or of a stiff
soil, with which, externally, it has some resemblance ; and
like this sultstance, it cruml)les by friction between the fin-
gers. Its colour is grey, or yellowish grey, like ashes. IJy
exposure to heat it meits, and cxiiibits tlic properties of (he
ttrst variety.

113 DESCRIPTION OF

The first variety occurs in nodules or irrej^ular masses,
from the size of mustard seed to four or five inches in dia-
meter. Its external surface is of a dirty grey colour, cover-
ed here and there with pyrites, which substance often pene-
trates the whole mass, and on the decomposition of which
the whole cracks and crumbles to pieces. The surface is a
crust which has in some pieces a thickness of one-eighth of
an inch, and of whatever colour and lustre the included Re-
tinasphalt may be. Is always uf a dirty grey and dull.

Its specific gravity varies much, and does not coincide
with that given by Hatchet, who states it to be 1.13. I have
repeated the experiment several times, and have constantly
found that the fragments which did not contain any py-
rites, did not exceed 1.04. Some fragments which floated
on the surface of the water, I found to be 0.97 and 0.98,
and consequently the specific gravity varies from 0.97 to
1.04, and is thus lighter than any of the resinous substances
in their unaltered state which are found in the drug shops.
These, according to Brisson, vary from 1.0183, as Elemi, to
1.1363 as Labdanum. I found also my supposition as to the
great specific gravity, stated in the above mentioned memoir
on amber, ^c. verified ; namely that it was owing to the in-
termixture of pyrites, which by its decompositions has crum-
bled several specimens.

CHEMICAL PROPERTIES.

I digested some of it, broken up into small fragments, in
pure alcohol. This fluid exhibited some action on the sub-
stance even when cold. In less than an hour, some of the
colours, parficularly the lighter ones, had lost their polish, and
seemed to be covered with a dull earthy matter. After it
had been exposed for two days to the action of alcohol, the
whole of its gloss had disappeared, and though the frag-
ments had retained their former shape, they had neverthe-
less undergone a change in their consUtuents : the alcohol

IlETINASPIIAI/r. ll;i

had dissolved something which liad altered its former na-
ture, and it resembled now, in some measure, the caout-
chouc, heing somewhat clastic, whicli elasticity nevertheless
is again lost after some time. I then heated the alcohol to
l)oiling, for a quarter of an hour, and after cooling it, de-
canted it. In this state it exhibited a yellowish colour, not
quite as dark as that of madeiia wine.

It was during these trials that I discovered that it contain-
ed two different substances ; as some of the fragments retain-
ed all tlicir lustre and were unaltered by the action of alco-
hol. These I found to resemble, in every case, the true
amber of the Baltic sea.

To ascertain the true composition of the substances upori
whicli the alcohol acted, I digested 50 grammes in fme pow-
der, during five days, in pure alcohol, with moderate heat,
which gave a tincture of the colour mentioned above. This
operation was repeated till the alcohol ceased to act.

All the spirituous solution, after being carefully decanted,
was subjected to a slow distillation, wliich gave a residuum ol
a brown resin, weighing 20.75 grammes. The residue, which
was insoluble in alcohol, was digested in boiling water, but
without sensil)Ie effect. After it was carefully collected and
dried, it weighed 28.25 grammes, it was of a dull ash grey
colour, and friable, melting into a black and brilliant mass.
When put on hot iron, it melted immediately, emitting much
smoke, and at last burnt witli a brilliant llaine. Its odour is
agreeable, approaching in the beginning somewhat that of
amber, but soon resembling that of asphalt. A solution of
pure potash dissolved upwards of one-fourth of it, w!)ich
was precipitated by muriatic acid, forming a brown resinous
prccij)itate. It was solul)!e by heat in fat oil, and had all
the qualities of asphalt. After burnins, it left (.75 grammes
of an earthy matter, soluble in sulphuric acid, an(l forming
octaedral crystals by the addition of potasli, leaving a small
residuum of brown uricrystallisaltle sulpliate of iron. So
that this earthy matter was alumine and oxide of iron.

From these experiments, it appears, that this mineral is

VOL. II. P

114 DESCRIPTION or

the same as the Retinasphalt, which was first discovered at
Borytrace, England, and is composed of

Particular resin

43.5

Bitumen

55.5

Alumine and iron

1.5

Loss

,5

100.0

The true amber, which occurs at the same place, is usu-
ally of a brown colour, and transparent when the piece is
not thicker than one-eighth of an inch. Sometimes it is of
a honey-yellow, resembling in that case the amber of the
Baltic ; but this variety is rare. I found jneces at that place
of the size of three and four inches. By destructive distilla-
tion it gives succinic acid, and has all the other qualities of
the amber of the above cited place. This mineral is dis-
tinguishable from the Retinasphalt by the action of alcohol
upon it. When a piece of the latter is kept for some time
in this fluid, it soon loses its lustre, and becomes covered
with a dull grey crust ; the amber on the contrary retains its
lustre, and is not altered.

There occurs also a substance which has much resem-
blance to the copal ; possessing the same colour and trans-
parency. Alcohol seems to have little or no action upon it.
It occurs at Cape Sable, only in grains not exceeding the size
of a large pea.

It is probable that these vegeto-mineral substances are the
products of the same species of trees, and tliat their peculiar
nature is ascribable to local circumstances. They all occur ai
Cape Sable, in the same formation ; but as can be seen in the
description which I have pubhshed of that place in the ai)ove
mentioned Journal, this formation is composed of difteiput
strata of minerals. The uppermost is a loose sand, the lower
part of which is so strongly agglutinated by iron oxide, as to
form a coarse ferruginous sandstone. Tiiis stone is some-

nETINASPHALT. 115

times so rich in iron as to constitute the compact brown
oxide of iron (dichter brown eisenstein of Werner.) litluw
tliis stratum lies a bed of lignite, from three and a lialf to
four feet in thickness. This bed contains nearly all the va-
rieties of lignite, such as jet, brittle lignite, Iiituminous wood,
and brown lignite, penetrated throughout U\ pvrites. The
junction of this stratum with the above is a ntixture of lig-
nite and sand, no abrupt separations being pereepiiblc. It
is in this stratum that the Retinasphalt and amber are found ;
the latter invariably on the very top of the stratum of the
lignite; sometimes as much as half a foot above this bed in
the sand. The Retinasphalt occurs intermixed with wood
and pyrites. This being invarial)ly the case, woulil induce
the belief that they weie originally the same vegetable i^um
or resin, and that the ditVerence which now exists between
them is owing to their mineralogical position.

2

No. III.

Analyses of the Chrysoberyls fro?7i Haddam and Brazil. By
Heni'y Seybert. — Read, 5th March, 1824.

In the summer of 1833, I visited Haddam, in the State
of Connecticut. Among; the various substances there col-
lected, was the Chrysoberyl, a mineral much esteemed on
account of its rarity. It occurs disseminated in a coarse
grained granite, in which the predominant ingredient is
a white feldspar, which Professor Berzelius regards as AU
bite, perfectly resembling that of Finbo. In the same gra-
nite this celebrated chemist observed the Cobmibite* It
is also associated with greyish quartz, manganesian garnet
of a fine blood red colour, and a yellow granular substance,
which some mineralogists supposed to be a variety of the
cymophane ; but from its inferior hardness and general clie-
mical composition, I recognised it to be common beryl.

For the earliest chemical information concerning the
Chrysoberyl, we are indebted to Professor Klaproth. He
published his analysis of it in 1795,t and gave the following
constituents of it, viz. alumina, 71.50 ; hme, 6.; oxide of
iron, 1.50 ; silica, 18. ; loss, 3. Berzelius presented us with
a formula founded on this composition ;t but from his expe-
riments with the blowpipe he was led to conclude that it
contained no lime, and that it was a subsilicate of alumina. §
In this he was apparently confirmed by Professor Tiiom-

* Essai de' 1' Emploi du Chalumeau, p. 243.
t Beitrage, vol. i. p. 97.

X Systeme de Mineralogie, p. 219,— C*S+18A*S.
(> Essai de' 1' Emploi du Chalumeau, p. 325.

CHRYSOBERYLS FROM HADDAM AND BRAZIL. 1 17

son,* vvlio quotes Klaproth's analysis, and states that he ex-
amined the niiiieiul some years a2;o, Imt haviiiu; aecidentally
lost his results, he was unable to publish tiiem. He ot)-
serves, liovvever, that tlie only constituents he lound were
alumina, silica, and oxide of iron. When I was about to
prepare the comtnunication wiiicli I now have the honour to
lay before the Society, a more recent analysis of tiie Chry-
soberyl of Brazil, by M. Augustus Arfwedson, was observed,
by me, in Tilloch's Philosophical Maa;azine.t He conhrmed
the results of Professor Thomson, and considered the che-
mical composition of this substance to be — silica, 18.73; and
alumina, 81.43, with a trace of oxide of iron.

The cymophane, from Fladdam, was sent to M. Hauy by
the late I)i'. Bruce, in 1810, to have his opinion concerning
its nature. t Previous to that period, the mineralogists in
the United States supposed it to be Cnri/rulum. The late
celebrated crystallographer observes, " La cymo|)hane des
Etats Unis a d' abord et»^ prise pour une variete de corin-
don. Effectivemcnt elle se rapproche de ce mirieral parsa
durete, par sa pesanteur specilique, et me me par le resultat
de son Analyse, qui a donne environ 7^ parties d' ahiminc
sur 100, avec 18 de silice, ct 6 decliaux.".^ I was anxious
to examine the cymophane found at Haddam. especially as
M. Hauy does not name the author of the analysis he quotes.
The specimen used for my experiments was of a pale green
colour. It did not present any of the chatoyant appearance
so remarkable in the variety from Brazil, and some speci-
mens from Saratoga in New York, where it was lately dis-
covered by Dr. Steel. Its s|)ecific gravity. In' two trials, was
3. .508 and 3.;'597. It is not magnetic, and t)efore the blow-
pipe it is infusible. For a further description of the phy-
sical characters of this mineral, I refer to Hauy and Cleavc-
land.

' Thomson's Chemistiv, vol. iii. p. 213.

t No. for November, 18'23, p. oST.

1 Annates du Museum d' Hntoirc Naturcllr, tome xviii. p. 37.

§ Traite de Mincralogic, 2me Edition, vol. ii. p. .lOO.

118 CHRYSOBERYLS FROM

Three grammes of the mineral were examined under
the impression that Professor Klaproth's analysis was ac-
curately made. It was decomposed in the usual manner
with four parts of caustic potash, and subsequently treated
with diluted muriatic acid ; but the solution was imperfect.
The insolul)Ie matter was collected on a filter, and it
amounted to 25 or 30 per 100, It was repeatedly acted
on in the same way, and each time it diminished in quan-
tity, until the fourth experiment. It then weighed about
fifteen-hundreths, and thereafter resisted all furthei' efforts
to rend<r it soluble by these means. This residue was
then boiled in concentrated sulphuric and muriatic acids,
but neither of them dissolved more than one-third of it.
These solutions were tested by different re-a^ents, and great-
ly to my surprise, the addition of subcarbonate of ammonia
occasioned afloculent precipitate, which entirely re-dissolved
in an excess of the alkaline subcarbonate. 1 immediately
suspected the presence of Glucina, but was much at a loss
to explain its insolubility, until I observed Berzelius's analy-
sis of the Eticlase,* in which he met witii a compound of
glucina and oxide of tin that obstinately resisted acids. He
also met with refractory combinations of tliis eartli and the
oxides of manganese and cerium. I next endeavoured to dis-
solve the compound by the acid sulphate of potash ; but this
method did not succeed. I was not more successful with the
nitric and nitromuriatic acids ; nor could it be dissolved by
means of boric acid. Berzclius having discovered colum-
bium in the gangue of the cymophane from Haddam, tlie
insoluble residue was tested for the oxide of that metal, but
all my attempts were fruitless. At length, I supposed, that
as barytes could be brought into contact with this substance
more conveniently than potash at a high temperature, it
might decompose it. With this view, a portion of the inso-
luble matter was exposed to a strona; heat, during one hour
with six parts of nitrate of barytes in a platina crucible.

* Nouveau Systeme de Mineralogie, p. 289.

HADDAM AND DRAZIX.. I 1 ij

The calcined mass was boiled in nitric acid. In this nin
nearly two-thirds of the matter that could not he entirelv
attacked in any other way, were dissolved. The same
treatment was repeated, until nearly (he whole of it was ta-
ken up, whicli happened alter the fourth calcination. It was
then no fuithei- acted on.

After makin.2; numerous experiments on the matter that
resisted nitrate of harytes atnl nitric acid, 1 ascertainorl, tiiat
it was not acted on hy alkalies nor acids when used sepa-
rately, hut after having been previously calcined with caus-
tic potash, it readily dissolved in muriatic acid, yielding a so-
lution of a pale yellow colour, wliich gave a reddish preci-
pitate with an infusion of galls, a deep green precipitate
with the hydrosulphatc of potash, and a white precipitate
with alkalies. Hence it was oxide of titanium.

After the barytes was separated with sulphuric acid, the
nitric solutions were united, and treated with an excess of
subcarbonate of ammonia. An abundant precipitate ensu-
ed, which entirely re-dissolved in the excess of subcarbo-
nate. By ebullition it was again precipitated, and when
calcined, it was in the form of a liglit white powder, jiosses-
sing all the properties that characterise Gfitcina. With the
sulphuric and muriatic acids it formed very sweet as^trin-
gent deliquescent salts. By caustic potash it was precipi-
tated from its solutions, and the precipitate re-dissolved in
the excess of the alkali. Klaprotb and Arfwedson. in ihcir
analyses of the Chrysoberyl from Brazil, considered the iti-
solublc matter remaining after they had treated the mineral
with potasli and muriatic acid, to l)e Silira. This will ex-
plain why their results dillerso essentially from mine.

After having thus satisfied myself of the comp(tsition of
the residue above mentioned. I resumed my preliminary ex-
periments, and jiroceeded to examine the muiialie solution
ol)tained from the treatment of the mineral with potasb and
muriatic acid. From this solution some silica was separated.
A portion of tlie liquifl was treated with caustic ammonia,
and then tested for Li?ne with oxalate of potash, but none

130 CHRYSOBERYLS FROM

of it could be detected. To the remaining liquor a consi-
derable excess of subcarbonate of ammonia was added, and
the precipitated matter was digested twenty-four hours. It
was then separated by filtration, and the fluid was boiled till
all the ammonia was expelled. No glucina was thus pre-
cipitated. Hence we conclude, that the very small portion
of titanium above mentioned, rendered tiie whole of the glu-
cina so refractory. The alumina precipitated by the sul>-
carhonate of ammonia was mixed with a small quantity of
oxide of iron. It was soluble in caustic poiash, and with
this alkali and sulphuric acid it gave regular octsedral crys-
tals of alum. The liquor, when tested with phosphate of
soda and ammonia, was found to contain no Magnesia.

After the preliminary experiments, I commenced the fol-
lowing

ANALYSIS OF THE CHRYSOBERYL FROM HADDAM.

A. Five grammes of the mineral, reduced to small frag-
ments in an iron mortar, were carefully porphyrised in one
of agate, from which it acquired the additional weight of
0.13 grammes. The 5.13 grammes were then exposed to
a red heat, and thereby suffered a diminution of 0.40 per
100.

B. The calcined mineral {A) was heated, during one hour,
in the silver crucible, with caustic potash, and the product
was treated with diluted muriatic acid ; the solution was of
a lemon yellow colour. There remained a white insoluble
residue, which after calcination weighed 1.47 grammes. It
was repeatedly calcined with caustic potash, and treated with
diluted muriatic acid, with tlie following results :

After the 2d experiment, it weighed 0.97 grammes,
3d 0,89

4th 0,85

HADDAM AND BRAZIL. 12 i

By the fiftii treatment it was not diminished, and then pre-
sented itself in the form of a hght white powder, resemhUng
pure silica in appearance.

C. The residue (B) was repeatedly strongly calcined
with six parts of uitrate of barytes, and subsequently boiled
with nitric acid.

After the 1st treatment, there remained 0.4.3 grammes.

Sd 0.15

3d 0.00

And by the 4th operation only o.oi gramme was dissolved.

The remaining 0.05 grammes were essayed in the man-
ner related in the preliminary experiments, and thus proved
to be oxide of titanium. Hence we have 1. per 100 of that
oxide.

D. The nitric solutions were united and evaporated to
dryness, to expel the excess of the acid. The saline mass
was dissolved in water, and after the barytes was separated
■with sulphuric acid, an excess of subcarbonate of ammonia
was added to the solution. An abundant precipitate appear-
ed, which entirely rc-dissolved. The Glucirin was precipi-
tated by ebullition. After edulcuratiun and calcination, it
weighed 0.79 grammes, or 15.80 per 100.

E. The several muriatic solutions (B) were united and
evaporated to a dry mass, which was treated with muriatic
acid, and there remained 0.33 grammes of silica, from
which deduct 0.13 grammes acquired from the at!;ate n»or-
tai ; and there will be 0.20 grammes, or 4. per lOO as a con-
stituent of the mineral.

F. After tlie silica was separated from the liquid (E),
the alumina and oxide of iron were precipitated by means
of a great excess of subcarbonate of ammonia. Aftrr twenty-
four hours, the liquor was separated from the yellowish prc-

VOL. II. Q

IgS CHRYSOBERYLS FROM

cipltate, and was boiled, but no Glucina was precipitated from
it. The matter precipitated by the subcarbonate of ammonia
consisted of 3.68 grammes of alumina, or 73.60 per lOO.,
and 0.19 grammes of peroxide of iron, which, on account
of the colour of the mineral, must be estimated as protox-
ide. The 0.19 grammes of peroxide are equivalent to
0.169 of protoxide, or 3.38 per 100.

THE CONSTITUENTS OF THIS CHRYSOBERYL THEREFORE

ARE,

(Per 100 parts)

A.

Moisture

0.40

a

Oxide of titanium

1.00

D.

Glucina

15.80

E.

Silica

4.00

F.

Alumina

73.60

F.

Protoxide of iron

3.38

98.18

100.00

Loss 1.82

As the preceding results differed so essentially from the
analyses of the chrysoberyl from Brazil by Klaproth and
Arfwedson, I determined to examine a specimen from that
locality. 1.5 grammes were analysed in the manner above
mentioned, and the following results were obtained : —

UAUUAM AND BKAZIL,. 123

(Per lOQ parts)

Water 0.666

Oxide of titanium 2.666

Glucina 16.000

Silica 5.999

Alumina 68.666

Protoxide of iron 4.733

98.730
100.000

Loss 1 .270

In estimating these constituents according to the electro-
clieniical theory, I believe that the oxide of titanium, not-
withstanding its important agency in the analytical experi-
ments, must be regarded as an accidental ingredient, as well
as the oxide of iron, which in some measure may have been
derived from the iron mortar. As the cymophane of Brazil
appears to be constituted more conformably to the hypothe-
sis of chemical proportions than that of Haddam, the follow,
ing calculation may be made, founded on its composition,
which gives for the essential constituents of Chrysoberyl,

(Per inn part a)

Silica 6.61 containing Oxygen 3.3S

Alumina 75.75 35.38

Glucina 17.64 5.49

and very nearly corresponds with the following mineralogi-
cal formula, A*S-»-2GA*.

No. IV.

Geological Account of the Valley of the Ohio : in a Letter
from Daniel Drake, M. D. to Joseph Correa de Serra. —
Bead 7th Nov. 1818.

Cincinnati, Ohio, ist October, 1817.

Sir,

I PEAR that you have long since thought me inatten-
tive to your polite request, that I should send you a copy of
the Vertical Chart which I had sketched of the valley of the
Ohio river at this place. But so far from being regardless
of your wish, an over anxious desire to gratify it fully has
been the cause of my delay. I entertained, till lately, the
hope of collecting such facts as would lead to some certain
conclusions relative to the epochs and causes of this great
excavation ; but constant ill health, and an increase of my
ordinary engagements, have left me so small a portion of
time for research or reflection on extra-professional sub-
jects, that I no longer expect to do more than give you an
evidence of my disposition to amuse you.

Notwithstanding the delay of so many montlis, the gra-
phic execution of the present copy is very little better than
the original sketch which you saw in Philadelphia. It is,
however, I trust, as accurate a representation as the perfo-
rations and admeasurements hitherto made at this place will
admit. The elevations and projections are of course on
different scales ; which gives to the slopes a greater perpen-
dicularity than is correct j but of this, and the other effects

ACCOUNT or THE VALLEY OF THE OHIO. 1S5

produced by combinino; two propoitions in the same deline-
ation, it is supeifluous for nio to apprise you.

You arc, Sir, already apprised, from personal observation,
that the alluvial formation of which I have heie given you
the profile, is divided near its middle by the Ohio river, and
extends about a mile from either shore, exclusively of the
valley of Licking; river to the south, and that of Mill creek
to the noi th-west. When viewed from any of the surround-
ing hills, this hollow, or expansion, appears nearly of a
rhomboidal figure, and its area is equal, by estimation, to
eight square miles, i have seen several places, particularly
at the junction of other rivprs with tlie Ohio, where its val-
ley is dilated to the same extent ; but, in general, it does not
exceed half tliis widtli; and the current, instead of traversing
the alluvial grounds in the centre, meanders frotn side to
side, alteriiately approaching the hills of Ohio and Kentucky.
Thus the earthy j)lains of one side are generally opposed to
the rocky slopes of the other. Many of the former (in our
provincial dialect termed bottoms) arc so low as to suffer
frequent inundation ; but at Cincinnati and various other
places, some of them rise fifty or even a hundred feet above
the highest level of the river. The ascent to this elevation
is generally over two or three successive terraces, mounting
between twenty and fifty feet above each other, so as to ex-
hibit, when viewed from tlie stream, the elevations of a vast
amphitlieatre. The alluvial platforms along many of the
smaller rivers on the north side of the Ohio, are arranged
on the same plan ; but the ascent from one to the other is
generally less than that stated for tlie principal valley. Very
few of the slopes, or taluse.t, which we see in descending the
Ohio, are entirely covered with vegetables, and most of
them, towards their summits, exhibit naked perpendicular
cliffs, which are yet suffering disintegration, and sufficiently
indicate, that the last retreat of the sea was not at a verjf re-
mote period. From an inspection of these precipices, and of
the strata which are exposed to view in the bed of tlie river
at low water, it appears probable that the fleets shell limestone

1S6 ACCOUNT OF THE

of this quarter has experienced no disruption, for it has cer-
tainly suffered no elevation nor bouleversement. It still re-
tains its horizontal position, or at most, varies from that in
too slight a degree to warrant the conclusion, unequivocally,
that the valley was formed either by an explosion and con-
sequent rupture of the strata, or by their subsidence. How
far their shrinking, from exsiccation, after being laid bare,
may have contributed to its formation. 1 am not prepared to
decide.* A hollow produced, however, by any of these
causes, except perhaps the last, would, I apprehend, be a
deep and irregular fissure, instead of a broad and shallow
trench, like that of the Ohio.

To what agent, then, shall we ascribe this great excava-
tion? It is obviously impossible to answer this question
with certainty ; but it would not perhaps be rash to conclude
that, in its formation, there were two or three distinct and
successive stages or epochs. Some kind of channel and
some degree of declivity must have preceded the commence-
ment of every river ; but whether this and

the other initial excavations were produced by unknown
causes which acted on the bottom of the sea, or by a violent
elevation of that bottom at the time of its deliverance from
the waters, I shall not offer a conjecture. Whatever may
have been the first agent, the second undoubtedly was the
vast and resistless currents that Fuust have attended the trans-
portation of the ocean from one bed to another. To tliese
currents, acting upon strata not yet perhaps fully consoli-
dated, and unsupported by the roots of a single plant, we
may fairly attribute most of the extent and form of the pre-
sent vallies.

By supposing the change of place in the sea to have been
produced by the elevation of this continent, we can account
in some degree for those irregularities of surface which ori-
ginally directed the retiring waters into their present courses;
but the uniform levelness and extensive continuity of our se-

• See Mr. Longraaire's Speculations in the Annals of Philosophy, Vol. 78.

VALLEY OF THE OUIO. 1S7

coiulaiy formations, the comparative evenness of the surface,
and the entire al)sence of primitive transition and ancient fleets
rocks in situ, would seem to render it prol)al)le that the re-
treat of the sea was occasioned hy the sinking of another
continent, and not hy the elevation of this. Which of these
alternatives, however, may luive occurred, I shall not fiu'-
ther attempt to inquire ; but assume the hypothesis, that a
great convulsion destroyed the relative clevatioi\ of this re-
gion, and that which is now covered by the Gulph of Mexico
and (lie Carribean sea, from Florida to Cumaria ;* in conse-
quence of whicli the ocean flowed lienre into its new bed,
in the direction of the Mississippi. The valley of that ri-
ver was of course the first excavation effected by the re-
tiring waters. To this primary canal the otiiers succeeded
in the order of their distance from the common embouchure.
These vast operations continued in all prol)al)ility for several
ages, during whicli the valleys constantly became deeper,
wider, and more symmetrical. Meanwiiile the debris of
the various strata, at that time perhaps more friable than at
present, were rolled, polished l\v attrition, intermixed, and
accumulated in the lowest situations.

The currents, which I am supposing to have effected this
great work, seem not to havo been equally strong over eve-
ry part of tiie country. To the south of the river tiie val-
leys have less symmetry, exhibit less strikingly the impress
of aqueous currents, and contain but few rolled pebbles. On
the contrary, we observe in that region numberless excava-
tions which seem not referable to any action of the retiring
waters, or of the subsequent rains. In some parts of Ken-
tucky, these hollows, or ravines, are from one to two hun-
dred feet in depth, have fttee|) acclivities, and are so narrow
at l)ottom, that their transverse sections would very much
reseml)le in figure and magnitude the same sections of the
hills they separate. It is ditticult to believe these to have

* We may xiippose this to have been either a distinct and limited convul-
sion, or a part of tliat geuural revolution wliicli laid bare the cxi-ting conti-
nents of the globe.

128 ACCOUNT OP THE

been cut down by currents, and it would, 1 think, be more
rational to regard them as the signs and products of a for-
cible elevation of that quarter, or else as cracl^s from the
drying of the strata after being left by the sea, or even
as inequalities formed simultaneously with the deposition of
the strata where they are found. At some period subse-
quent to the complete retirement of the waters of the ocean, a
third era in the formation of our valleys seems to have com-
menced. The rivers became much reduced in size, and
began to flow in narrow channels, supported by the alluvion
which they had previously transported. From this time,
they appear to have effected but little horizontal detrition.
They have increased the depth of their beds, but not widened
their valleys. The Ohio, as you may see by a reference to
the Chart, has a channel below the bottom of the alluvial
deposits, to which it is confined, when not swollen by rains.
This, I apprehend, is its own worl<, and has been effected
since the existing state of the surface of the continent was
produced. In front of Cincinnati, the depth of this canal is
between thirty and forty feet in the centre, and it becomes
shallower as we ai)proach either sliore, apparently at the
same rate at which the velocity of the current decreases,
from the middle to the margins of the stream. This bed is
doubtless becoming deeper ; but the ratio of increase is ex-
tremely slow, as no abrasion takes place exxept when the
momentum of the waters is augmented by floods, which are
generally transient in their duration. At all other times, the
velocity of the current at the bottom is a minimum, or ap-
proaching to it. This is obvious in summer and autumn,
when the water is so low and transparent, that its bottom
may be seen from the surface. It may then l)e observed,
that the bed in many places, from side to side, is covered
with rolled pebbles ; and that the rocks, where not thus pro-
tected, are overspread with nunute algw 7nusci, dead leaves,
twigs, and other light bodies, whicli the gentlest current
wotdd sweep away. Now where there is no current, it is
obvious there can be no detrition.

VALLEY OP THE OHIO, 129

It is a common opinion of the people on the banks of tlie
Ohio, that its waters were always the same in quantity, and
formerly occupied, in succession, various parts of the valley,
at much higher levels than at present. By this supposition
they attempt to account for the alluvial deposits, which, in
many places, arise, as already stated, to the height of se-
veral yards above the most elevated high water mark of
these times. But the excavation underneath the ancient
beds of alluvion is as deep as that beneath the recent ones,
and will) the exception of the narrow channel in which the
river now flows, every part of the valley is equally pro-
found ; when therefore the former were accumulated, the
waters extended from hill to hill, and constituted a vast ri-
ver, which must have swollen at times more than a hundred
feet above tlie greatest altitude of the present comparatively
diminutive stream. No other supposition, it appears to me,
can account for the great elevation of the older alluvial
banks. An illustration of this, upon a small scale, is afforded
by the little torrents which descend during a shower, from
an eminence, along a pve-cxhting giiUy ,•* where the declivity
is great, and while the mass and motion of the waters are
considerable, nothing is deposited ; but as they decrease, the
pebbles, mud, and light bodies, which are borne along, sub-
side into beds, over which the reduced and narrow rivulet
continues feebly to meander. The cumparisun cannot be
extended any further ; for a succeeding vain will deluge these
little grounds, and perhaps raise them to a still greater
height : but the causes which furinerly spread the Ohio over
the whole valley, Jiave long since ceased to operate ; and
if its waters be not at this time diminishing, they are cer-
tainly not increasing.

I shall coiiclude this part of my letter with the following
observations : —

i. The expansions in some parts of the valley of the
Ohio, which I have conjectured were partly produced by

* Used provincially.
VOL. II. R

130 ACCOUNT OF THE

causes that acted before the retreat of the sea, or by the
convulsion which occasioned that event, must have consti-
tuted at one period a series of little lakes, which were gra-
dually, by tlie action of tlie waters, formed into the present
continued and irregular canal.

2. It has been already stated, that on the south side of
the Ohio its tributary streams flow in deeper vallies than on
the north. This is obvious from the difference in current,
when low, of these two classes of rivers, and from the very
different distances at which their waters are rendered stag-
nant by the floods of the Ohio, When this river is greatly
swollen, the current in the Kentucky river is destroyed near-
ly to Frankfort, a distance of forty miles, while that of the
Great Miami in this State, a river of almost the same mag-
nitude, is not suspended for more than twelve or fifteen.
The principal vallies of the north are, however, much wider
than those of the south. If they were all fissures originally,
those of the south were probably the deepest. The present
difference in their width has perhaps arisen from the sides
of the former being composed of hard limestone, with but
thin inter-laminffi of argillaceous matter, while the rocky
strata of the latter are widely separated by friable marl and
slate clay. It would appear, that to the south the currents
had produced more vertical, in the north more horizontal,
attrition.

3. In the very extensive artificial excavations made into the
old alluvial formation at this place, the only aquatic animal
remains, either of the river ur the sea, which have been dis-
covered, except those detached from the floetz rocks, were
the shells of a bivalve, which seems to be a species of Mi/a .•
but whether it inhabited the fresh or salt water, I am unable
to decide. Hence it would seem that when tliese grounds
were deposited, the waters had but few inhabitants. Those
of the ocean had withdrawn, and those wliich the river now
contains had not yet become its tenants. Whether this be
admitted or not, it is certain that the alluvial deposits made
at the present day are by no means free from river shells.

VALLEY OF THE OHIO. 131

4. That the valleys of this quarter are not the work of
causes which have acted regularly and unremittingly ever
since tlie recession of the sea, hut that there was a particular
and distinct period of evravatinn, is rendered still more proba-
ble, by the fact, that their declivities are every where cover-
ed with a body of loam and soil: For while the causes which
produced these slopes continued to act, it is im|)ossible that
mould or any loose matter should have been accumulated
upon them.

5. What length of time has elapsed since the final de-
scent of tlie ocean into its new bed, since the rivers com-
pleted the lateral excavation of their vallies, were reduced
to their present size, and began to deposit the low and recent
bottoms, I am not in possession any of data for determining.
An accurate survey by us of those grounds, of the imme-
diate and rocky channels of the streams, of the incomplete
and increasing taluses of our hills, and of the vegetable mould
which overspreads the face of the country, would lurnisli to
a succeeding generation some important facts for an esti-
mate of this kind. From the rate of advancement of the
dozens and natural sand level which border the southern
shores of Michigan, and perhaps some of the other lakes,
conclusions equally certain will hereafter, in all probability,
be drawn.* By a reference to the Chart, you will perceive
the lateral extent and various elevations of the alluvial for-
mation at this place. You may suppose the section to be

* I do not know that these downs have been mentioned by any traveller or
writer. I am informed by my friend Mr. William Harris, who was lately
employed under the (Jirectinn of the Surveyor General of the United States,
in running the northern boundary line of this State, that they are found
along the south eastern border of the lake for thirty or forty miles. In some
places they extend two or three miles from the head. They are very nume-
rous, of various shapes and sizes, and grouped in such a manner as to form
basins or concavities, some of which are filled with water. Not a single rivu-
let flows ftom among them. There is very little soil spread over any of these
hillocks, and partofthcm are quite destitute of vegetation. Others are thinly
covered with small pine and oak trees. It is possible that this formation m«y
have ceased growing, and that it cannot therefore serve as a natural chrono-
meter.

133 ACCOUNT OP THE

made along Main Street in this town, and through the cen-
tre of Covington on the opposite side of the river, a short
distance below the mouth of the Licking. It is necessary to
consider yourself as placed weet of this line, which is near-
ly on the meridian, with your face directed to the east, or
up the river. From this position, it may be seen, that tlie
plain, to the right hand, on the Kentucky side, has an ele-
vation between that, which, in this town, we term the bot-
tom, and that which is denominated the hill.

A very small part of the southern or Kentucky plain is
liable to inundation, but the lower part of the northern was
entirely ovei-flown in the year 1793, and has been partially
covered two or three times since.* These three tables dif-
fer somewhat in composition, as well as in elevation. That
on which the opposite villages of Newport and Covington
are built, is little else than a bed of sandy loam, to the great-
est depths that it has yet been perforated. The bottom or
lower plain on this side, is composed, in its superior parts,
chiefly of loam and various coloured clays proper for bricks
and coarse earthenware : in its inferior, of beds of strong
debris consisting chiefly of primitive and transition gravel,
which may be seen on the Covington side of the river, at
the same depth. The upper table, or hill, consists chiefly
of sand, gravel, and rolled pebbles, in some parts blended
together, in others composing separate beds, the strata of
which are either horizontal, or inclined and curved in va-
rious directions and degrees. Most of them dip, however,
to the north and north west. It oujjlit perhaps to be noted,
that the sand, when in distinct beds, is generally underneath
the pebbles. The greatest collection of the latter is in the
upper parts of the table near its southern margin, or that
which looks towards the river. Many openings have been
made into this part of the plain, and it requires but the
slightest inspection to perceive that it contains the wreck of
various and very distinct strata. It is indeed an epitome of

* It is proper to observe, that the corporation has lately thrown up a levee
that will prevent the future encroachments of the waters.

VALLEY OF THE OHIO. 133

all the formations of tlie northern part of the continent, a
great natural cabinet at once rich, confused, and instructive.
Its multifarious specimens may be arranged in the following
manner :

1. Fragments of fossil wood, which have been dug up at
various depti)s, from ten to ninety feet. They are not mi-
neralised, and appear to have belonged to trees of the same
species with some of tiiose which grow in our existing fo-
rests. I iiave not detected among them any tropical plants.

S. Grey, siliceous, and calcareous sand, which composes
a great portion of the plain, and has probably resulted from
the destruction of arenaceous limestone rocks, many strata
of which exist in this country to the north and east.

3. Veins of blue and yellow clay, afforded no doubt by
the marl, which in many parts of the limestone tracts, sepa-
rate the laminse of that formation.

4. Holled and angular fragments of blue shell limestone,
detached from the strata of the surrounding hills. Many of
these are large tabular masses, and seem to have been
brought only a short distance. None of them indeed could
have come down the river more than one hundred miles, as
this variety does not extend beyond that limit to the east.
They are very numerous.

5. Polished debris of tliat kind of grey sandy limestone
which tlie Sciota and Little Miami rivers traverse near their
sources, and which have evidently been rolled hither by the
copious streams that formerly flowed in the valleys of those
rivers. These fragments are as numerous as the last.*

6. Rubble and boulders of grey variegated and micaceous
sandstone, with minute fragments of coal, aluminous slate,
and shivers, generally rendered smooth by attrition. These
are from the country up the Ohio, where such strata are
found in place. They are not so numerous as the two last.

7. Foreign or adventitious debris, consisting of granite of
different colours, gneiss, micaslate. hornblende, sienite, xvacke,

• These, on account of tlie whiteness of the lime into which they burn, are
collected and used for that purpose.

134 ACCOUNT OF THE

porphyry^ trap, jasper, petrosilex, Jlmt, agate, quartz, and
various other ancient species. These are ot every size from
small gravel to boulders fit for street and court paving. They
are not angular, but have suffered attrition, until the distinc-
tive characters of many fragments are almost obliterated,
and a fracture must be made before they can be known.
They are blended intimately with the other stoney wreck,
and have not hitherto been found to occupy any distinct
bed. The source of this debris of primitive and transition
strata can be best ascertained by tracing its distribution over
the country. 1 have observed pebbles of this kind on the
Hudson river at West Point, where the plain is composed in
part of rolled fragments. But as they are in general larger
than those found on the Ohio, less worn and polished, have a
greater proportion of mica slate pebbles, which do not seem
to bear rolling to a great distance, and are mixed with rub-
ble from the sand stone mountains of Katskill, they should,
1 think, be considered as being detached from the adjacent
primitive rocks. An additional reason for this opinion may
be drawn from the silence of our excellent friend Professor
Mitchill as to the debris of ancient strata among the alluvion
of the upper parts of the valley of this river.* It seems
probable then that the currents whicli rolled and polished
these fragments, did not extend laterally as far as the basin
of the Hudson. We do not however depart from it west-
wardly but a short distance, before we meet with the ruins
of primitive strata. An observing traveller, Mr. J. C. War-
ren, informs me that he saw them on the Chenongo, a branch
of the Susquehanna, and observed them near all the streams
in passing thence by the town of Erie on the lake, and along
the Allegheny river to Pittsburg. Mr. Thomas Nuttall had
previously noted the same thing during a joumey in which
he visited most of the principal rivers and lakes in the west-
ern part of New York. So much for the north-east. To
the south-east and south, the valley of the Ohio seems to

* See Medical Repository, Vol. I.

VALLEY OF THE OHTO, 135

constitute the bouiulary of this debris. Beyond that river,
tliere are iiifleed l)ut lew water worn pebbles of anjf kind ;
and tiie narrow alluvions of the streams are generally argil-
laceous. I have travelled over most of the northern and
north-eastern parts of Kentucky, and do not now recollect
to have seen any foreign rolled pebbles. Mr. Warren has
visited the north-western portions of the same State, and at
my request was particularly attentive to this point, but did
not discover any. The acute and observing Mr, Nuttall
travelled througli tlic centre of the same State from north
to soutli on foot, but after leaving the valley of the Ohio op-
posite this town, he found none of these fragments until he
approached the French Broad, in Tennessee, whose source is
in a jirimordial formation. To the west and south-west, the
currents of the great valley have transported the debris
much farther. Mr. Nuttall has tiaced it only to the mouth
of the river St. Fiancois ; but my late lamented friend Dr.
Goforth met with it in tlie form of gravel, not many miles
al)ove Natchez. To the north-west, it was found by Mr.
Nuttall on the Missouri, as far as the great bend at the Man-
dan villages, beyond which he did not ascend. From the
mouth of tins river to Erie in Pennsylvania, the same perse-
vering naturalist met with it on the shores of all the rivers
and lakes which he visited, and from the information which
he has kindly afforded me by letter, it appears that this de-
bris is largei- and in greater quantities in that region than
this. Witliin the limits here sketclied, it is found in the vi-
cinity of all the streams, and forms with the ruins of the sur-
rounding strata the bases of all the fertile and level prairies.
We are hence. I think, justified in the conclusion, that its
origin was in tiie north, and tiiat it was brou<!;ht and depo-
sited on the surface of this country by currents which in an-
cient times flowed from beyond the lakes to the Gulf of
Mexico, and of which it may be regarded as the sign and
effect.

A more recent formation than many of the alluvial l)eds
contained within tlic limits just defined, is tlie stratum of loam

£36 ACCOUNT OF THE

spread over the surface of our hills and valleys in an over-
lying position. This appears to be the same that in the
north of Europe is denominated geest.,* and which Mr. De
Luc considers as the last deposit made by the sea before its
final retreat. Sir Humphry Davy regards the soil or fria-
ble argillaceous suiface of Great Britain at least, as having
resulted from the disintegration of the rocky strata under-
neath.f There are doubtless but few rocks that would not
be mouldered by exposure to the action of the atmosphere,
and where the waters, before their final retreat, made
no protecting layer, the argillaceous surface may be fairly
referred to decomposition. But there is much reason for
believing that the greater part of the geest of this country
has subsided from fresh water, and is a true alluvion. It varies
considerably, 1 acknowledge, in different places, but its essen-
tial consituents, clay, sand, and yellow oxide of iron, combined
in varying proportions, seem still to be present. It is indeed
destitute of tiie remains of aquatic animals, and might not
therefore be supposed to have had the origin here intimated ;
but the old alluvial beds which have manifestly been accu-
mulated by water, either salt or fresh, are almost equally de-
stitute of aquatic exuvise. On the other hand, it exhibits, in
some places, an obscure stratification, it does not abound
particularly in the undecomposed fragn»ents of the rocks
over which it is spread, its colour and density are nearly the
same from bottom to top, and it envelopes, as we shall pre-
sently see, along with more or less gravel, large masses of
adventitious rocks, conditions that sufficiently characterise it
as a distinct and ve2i\ formation. It has been washed by the
rains into the lower paits of the valleys, where beconiing
blended with the recent alluvion of the streams, it encloses
the bones of the arctic elephant, great mastodon, and other
extinct quadrupeds. On the south side of the Ohio, it is
only from four to eight or twelve feet deep ; but to the

» L' Histoire de la Terre et de 1' Homme, tome v.
t See his Elements of Agricultural Chemistry.

VALLEY Oi' THE OHIO. 137

north of that river, its tliickness becomes so great, that
tlie ftcetz limestone is but here and there seen projecting
through it.

The deposition of the geest seems to Iiave been the last
operation which the waters of the nortii performed upon
this region; and was of course sul)sequent to tlic excavation
of the valleys, as no deposit could liave remained upon their
acclivities, while the agent which formed them continued its
action. You are. Sir, already apprised, tiiat to tiiis forma-
tion belong the great blocks of foreign primitive, transition,
and old lloetz rocks, which have excited in travellers so
mucii astonishment, and which, in one point of resemblance
at least, approximate the region south of Erie, Huron, Mi-
chigan, ami the other lakes, so closely to that wliich stretches
tVom the southern shores of tlie Baltic sea.

'I'hese masses, in the neighl)ourho(Hl of this place, are for
die most part solitary, but in the interior of the State, it is
not uncommon to find them grouped into heaps which are
slightly covered with soil ; and it is, I suspect, an aggregation
of this kind, on one of the islands of Lake Huron, that a
British officer mistook for granite iii place.* Tiie size of
these masses extends from that of gravel and pcbi)les to the
diameter of eight or ten feet. The larger blocks are fre-
quently found iipo7i the old alluvial plains, but never, that I
have understood, within them. Their geographical range is
over the same region with the smaller foreign debris of our
valleys, but more limited to tlie south west. I have never seen
a single block on the opposite side of the Ohio, and am not
informed that any have been observed lower than the thir-
ty-ninth degree of latitude.

I do not entertain a doubt that these fragments were en-
veloped in large fields of ice in a region far beyond the
lakes, and floated hither by the same inundations that
brought down and spread over the surface of this country
the geest in which they are imbedded. In the southern parts

• See Thompson's Annals of Phil, for March, 1816.
VOL. II. S

138 . ACCOUNT OP THE

of this formation, they are not found ; but this should be attri-
buted to the influence of climate. The ice to which they were
attached could not of course pass a certain latitude ; and from
the great increase of these masses as we advance towards the
north, it would seem that many of the ice-bergs suffered
dissolution long before they arrived at this maximum. Fu-
ture observers will no doubt trace them to their parent stra-
ta in the arctic regions, as Von Buck has traced those which
are lodged on the shores of the, Baltic. 1 he ice islands of
the Atlantic ocean may reasonably be supposed to bring
down, and deposit on its bed in the Temperate Zone, pri-
mordial masses, similar to those spread over some parts of
this and the European continent. These islands are, I be-
lieve, not often seen further south than the forty-first de-
gree, near two degrees north of their southern boundary
here. This is probably attributable to the gulf stream ; but
for which, the larger tracts of ice would undoubtedly attain
as low a latitude as the southern limits of the primitive blocks
in this country : and hence a probable conclusion may be
drawn, that the temperature of the northern hemisphere
has undergone but little change since the remote epoch when
this part of the continent was for the last time subjected to
inundation.

i shall, Sir, no longer employ you with my premature,
and, 1 fear, abortive attempts at generalising some of the
geological phenomena of this country. I have, indeed, oc-
cupied too much of your time in tlie discussion of points
with which perhaps you were already better acquainted
than myself.

I have drawn liberally on your patience, because the
kindness which you have shown me at various times has in-
spired a hope, that you will excuse both the tediousness and
temerity of my speculations. However this may be, 1 trust

VALLEY OF THE OHIO. 130

you will at least perceive in them a manifestation of the pro-
found respect with which I have the honour to be,

Sir,

Your obliged friend and servant,

DANIEL DRAKE, M. D.

'•!

His Excellency,
The Chevalier Joseph Correa de Serra,
Min. Plenipot. of the

Kingdom of the Brazils,

a

No. V.

Tables of Obsenations on the Winds, the Currents, the Gulph
Stream, the Comparative Temperature of the Air and Wa-
ter, &c. made on the North Atlantic Ocean, during Twen-
ty-six Voyages to and from Europe, (principally between
PliUadelphia and Liverpool,) between the years 1799 and
1817, inclusive. By John Hamilton.

TABLE I.

Observations on the Winds.

Month

Day

Year

iife

3 t>aj

= 1

^ -6
~ ■—

5 t?

= g

>

Montli

Dav

Year

S.

W

E

N.

Jan.

20

1800

2

2

10

,-,

3

April

3U

1 800

25

2

3

27

1804

4

13

3

1

0

3»'

1802

21

1

5

3

29

1809

12

17

30

1804

27

1

1

1

,<;

181C

2

3

30

1805

29

1

17

1817

o

13

1

1

16

1807
1808

2

8
11

3

2
5

3

Davs.

98

20

45

15

8

III

13

1812

o

5
3
7

2

3

Feb.

14

1799

'.

6

2

"7

1815

1

10

„

23

1801

1

15

1

1

5

30

1817

6

14

S

o

28
If,
25

29

180:5
1812

1816

1

1.1

5
IS

11)

4
4

3
6

9

2

3

17

Da*.

'-34'

11

150

25

31

May

31
31

1800
18(11

1

19
17

r

c
5

1
5

Dnvs.

IS.'i

1,

(,<.■

'-'■2

19

12

March

21

179U

•J

13

1

3

•J

If,

1803

n

II

3

23

1802

4

9

.s

1

4

21

1805

I

15

'2

2

1

27

18(13

3

11

6

s

1

,31

isor.

S

II

11

o

o

17

1804

10

-i-

0

1

31

ISO,"

1

I'.l

8

1

o

26

1 80f>

o

15

5

.)

1

20

180S

3

13

G

o

'.j

31

1809

2

18

10

1

11

1812

o

5

1

2

1

25

1812

14

4

.^

3

18

12

•J

4

13

o

9

1

1

7

1815

1

6

.'.

1815

4

1

f,
1(1

ISlf.

i8ir

1
IS

1
4

1

4

26

1816
1SI7

4

S

2

8
7

5

1

Days.

198

22

105

38

19

14

Days.

264

22

l.?2

64! .

9

TABLES OP OBSERVATIONS, ijC.

141

1

5

5

Month

n»)

Year

N.

S.

5

W.

2

s

>

Montli
Uciob.

U.,y

Year

N

S

K

\V.

a

>

,1unc

21

ISUO

1

u

1

31 1802

1

0

VI

5

'i5

18(il

0

G

12 3

29 18Ui

2

»

20

3

'JS

ISllJ

5

1

7

15

31 1810

5

IS

3

'25

isu

1

14

<2

* 4

31

2

1

16

9

5

■.1>

11

l.T 1

20 1815

•1

1

1 .T

1815
1817

18 7
12 4

0-,

.i

0

I):.^.

141

14

•

2'

83

16

I)l.>5

!*->

8

•J.i

.?,■.

88 '20

Nov.

4
30
.10

1 7'J9
ISOO
1802

1

11

4

3 1
18 1

24 \

,)uly

3

irO'J

■i

4

._j

(1

1801

1

2

S 1

21

180G

2

5

6

7 1

l'.>

1802
1804
1809
1815

2

1

•2

8

1
5

1

n 1
IS 2
9 3

.3|

U

1809

3

2

8

IS

u

D.vs.

98

6

5

2.5

60' 4

Dec.

31

1799

7, 6

14

■4

M

181C

V

-

2

19

1

10

23
31
19
29

I800
1801

ISO,'.
1807

1

1

2
4

4

14

6

2

14

13

9

18

3
4

1
5

Days.

125

12

12

21

70

AilR.

.■51

1799

4

.s

7

II

ll

.31

I8(M)

o

.1

15

10

15

18IU

3

10

.^

19

ISOI

2

II

6

14

ISII

c

12

17

1802

/

o

r,

2

B

1

2

3

31

1 806

1

f,

•?j

1

11

1816

4

3

2

2

20

2<)

6

1807
1810

2
5

4

Q

a

9

1

0..ys.

1791

'.1

17 .1:

93

21

23

isir.

s

1

5

H

2.i

1817

2

"1

0

January .

98 davs

31

February
March .

AiM'il

•

. 135
198

. 2.;.i

264

Usyi

22.1 !

18

If,

29

129

Sept.

7

1799

1

1

4

1

—

May

14

1801

2

5

fi

1

June

. 172

21

180-1

1

2

5

10

3

July

125

28

1807

4

1

4

15

4

August

. 22.)

30

1809

o

1

J

22

2

Srptcmber

159

2fi

9

1

1

C

3

Ociober

. 144

/

1815

B

1

Nnrembcr

98

26

1817

5

15

4

December

. 179

Uact.

159

28

10

■.'8

( .J

IS

Total D.n<;

2029

REMARKS.

It appears from the foregoing table, that out of 2029 days,
the wind prevailed,

208 days from the Northward,
167 Southward,

361 Eastward,

1101 Westward.

192 Variable.

Days 2029

14S

TABLES OP OBSERVATIONS, ^C.

By the foregoing statement, it will be seen, that very fre-
quently I was at sea only daring part of the montiis.

In the division of the winds, I have called all the points
of the compass between NNW. and SSW. westerly; those
between SSW. and SSE. southerly ; those between SSE. and
NNE. easterly ; and those between NN E. and NNW. north-
erly. The observations were all made to the northward
of the latitude of B3° N. to about 55° N. The SW. winds
I consider to predominate, continuing to blow very frequent-
ly a week or ten days together. Whereas NW. winds sel-
dom blow more than three days together. Those from
SSW. to SSE. for the most part produce rain, and are of
short continuance ; being superseded by northerly or north-
west winds in a few hours.

The wind, according to the above statement, blew more
than one half the time from the westward, in the aggregate ;
and taking the months separately, never less than half, and
in some, two-thirds. From the eastward, it blew generally
one-fifth or one-sixth of the month.

TABLE II.

Observations on the Currents.

Month

N.

La..
W

i'i.

3 ^•

Direction of
Current.

Month

Lai.

Lot,
W

V .

Direction of
Cut-rent.

V

0

9

•

o

•

o

o

Jan.

48

24

5(1

.""i.i

Xorlhei'ly.

April.

50

13

49
52
53

51

50
50

Northerly.

Feb.

17

:-,.•

M

Sou(herI> 20' perday.

19

((

18

4S

52

" 15

48

2B

46

51

((

47

2.5

54

52

14

14

56

50

Southerly.

4.^

.12

5.)

54

IS

45

26

52

54

S. W. Strong.

•\\

34

54

55

17

44

29

54

54

Southerly 21' sd.

;)5

37
45

5fi
47
59

55
53
6J

14
" 22

42

22

62

57

*t

4'.'

.VI.iy

49

16

55

52Noritietlv.

48
47

21
26

50
57

March

4e

25

59

52

Soulhei-ly. Strong.

54

27

61

53

f

4.5

32

62

58

17'

4.1

29

6(1

54

i(

4.S

41

65

63

4-i

A3
,37

56
57

41

40

62

57

"

MADE ON THE ATLANTIC OCEAN.

143

Monll.

Ui.

N.

Lon.
W.

'"3

Dii'fcliun of

CuiTfllt.

iMooth

N.

Lon.
\V.

it
= <

Direction of
Current.

t.

O

u

^

^j

„

y

„

June

VJ

ii

5S

5S

SE.

Aug.

■W

35

63

62

Southerly. 23' per day.

17

59

50

"

4.}

37

61

62

" Strong.

48

14

56

50

Soullierly.

43

39

63

64

26'

46

"5

59

57

'* 27' per d;»j.

43

41

67

66

14

4S

18

56

58

" 20

is

45

66

68

tt

2L'

57

59

tt

43

49

56

48

SE. Strong.

36

61

63

19

43

23

64

64

Southerly 15'

4^

Si

59

61

16

43

24

68

66

15

v:9

58

61

" 20

42

50

56

55

"

■ 37

66

03

25

42

25

71

67

**

40

65

63

Sept.

49

2i

56

55

It

July

50

15

60

59

• {

47

2."'

il"i

55

'*

50

20

60

57

tf

47

S.i

62

57

Northerly. Strong.

49

18

61

59

"

47

3(1

6,i

58

15'

4'J

14

61

59

tt

45

3S

66

62

Southerly .

47

14

60

6«

18' sd.

45

39

65

62

"

49

17

61

59

ic

4.';

44

73

71

"

44

18

62

C2

18

a

30

63

ec

(t

4'.'

19

60

58

<<

45

34

70

62

it

44

20

64

6S

f<

45

40

61

60

<<

4.;

41

75

75

NW.

44

40

68

25

Cf

43

35
30

73

71

s\v.

42

44

60

65

((

41

71

70

41

3*

70

70

((

41
41
4t

31

33
38

71
74

-4

71

v:

7\

Soulhurly.

S\V.

Southerly.

41

42

67

73

SE. Current 20' sd.

Octob.

49

27

5S

56

Northerly. 17'

4u

42

75

75

aE. Coi tiuup inG. S.

411
49
4S

O",

33

58
57
52

58
58
58

15

Aug.

40

19

61

58

Southerly.

" 74' in 3 days.

49

23

60

57

fi

4."!

32

58

58

14

48

20

59

59

tt

47

25

55

50

Southerly 16

47

35

60

59

«

41

.16

59

61

" Strong.

47

25

56

56

" Strong.

43

47

53

58

Northerly Iff

47

27

58

58

<(

43

37

59

61

Southerlv. Strong.

47

15

61

59

14'

4'-'

39

54

59

K

46

43

67

61

Northerly.

49

16

58

57

'<

46

21

60

60

Southerly.

49

IS

58

57

<c

46

19

60

59

" 15'

49

2U

59

57

"

46

45

27

30

61

60

53
61

<f

tt

Not.

44

44

47
49

63

5*

Northerly.

I).c.

4)

49

5S

45

Xorthellv.

REMARKS.

In tlie monlli of January I was seldom at sea; and indeed
the weather is so boisterous in that as well as the other win-
ter months, that it is difficult, l)y celestial observations, to de-
tect a current. Nor can sufficient leliance be [jlacedonthc
steerage of the ship, or courses and distances by log, to be
certain of the true cause of any disac;rcement between the
dead reckoning and observations. But when the disagree-
ment happens to be on the same side, not only during se-

144 TASL£S OP OBSEBTATIOXS. ^.

vera] davs in succession, but for a number of royages. there
should be no hesitation in giving credit to the existence of
a current. I was a long time almost induced to conclude
that some of these currents, particularly those which conti-
nually prevail between the Grand Bank of Newfoundland
aiKl tbe coast of Europe, were periodical, runnir^ one half
the year in each direction. And the foregoing Table, with a
few exceptions, (and those might have been counter currents
on the e^?e of the great stream, for 1 have invariaMy found
the one always accompanying the other.) tends rather to
strengthen than to invalidate such an opinion.

In Febnary. as weU as March, from latitude 41= to 48=
X. the set seems to hare been to tbe southward, without a
angle exception.

In ApriL on the parallels of 46*^ to 50" X. and between
the meridiare idP (which is near soundings) and 56^ W. its
(Erection was northerly, while at other times, from 4S= to
5i' N. and from 14" to 59- W. it set to the southward.

In May, between 49' and 4-3= X. and 16" and 41= W, the
ctmrent ran invarnbly to the northward.

In June, always southeiiy, and for the most part strong.

In July, southerly all the time. And

In August with only two exceptions.

In September, the same.

In October, sometimes one way and sometimes the other :
but Ihroughoai the whole. I never knew the current to
dtaa^ from one day to another, only to vary in different
Tears. When that from the northward has prevailed to a
great extent. I have always experierK-ed a set in the oppo-
site direction- both in tbe neighbourhood of the eastern edge
of the Bank of NewfofODdbnd and ak)^ the west coast of
Irdand.

Tbese oheerratioos do not extend to the w estward of the
loBgitode of 45= W. or to the southward of 4i= X. The
cnnrents to the southward and westward of these limits be-
;lo tbe Gulf Stream.

IVIAOE ON THE ATLANTIC OCEAN.

145

TABLE in.

Observations un the Gulf Stream.

MoDib.

Lat.
N.

Long.
\V.

Month.

Lat.

N.

Lo.ig.
W.

E ^_

I?

s «

r" "c

c^

"" "c

O '

o '

1 '

o

Q '

o '

o

o

April 21.

32 IS

77 18

70

72

June 11.

38 4.'>

61 35

71

71

February 15,

32 40

78 9

65

71

November 1.

38 5i

57 46

71

70

April 22.

34 16

75 7

61

71

5.

38 52

52 22

67

68

SepiembcrS.

34 42

69 38

1 "

81

December 1.

38 3

67 17

60

68

6.

33 58

71 5

' 75

78

(Jciob"r 1.

39 13

58 13

71

76

October 23.

35 38

73 23

65

73

fVbruar) 21

39 1

53 lU

54

64

Sepiember28.

36 50

66 57

. 67

77

December 28

39 2

57 7

63

66

March 3.

36 40

72 11

69

72

29

39 3*

54 4f.

57

67

.M.} 2.

36 49

71 42

68

74

June 7.

39 37

48 41

69

71

March 29.

37 39

67 20

60

71

July 29.
30.

39 2

66 51

73

70

Sepierober2G.

37 42

71 7

67

73

39 12

69 44

75

73

•i9

.37 27

64 2

65

76

31.

59 41

63 39

77

74

.May 2.

37 54

68

54

70

Oclober 7.

.59 14

48 54

57

67

December 23

37 22

70 10

53

72

March 17.

59 59

58

57

58

24

37 39

69

67

72

May 24.

39 57

01 3

65

68

23.

37 50

67

63

69

Vovember 4.

39 6

52 3f)

66

68

May 3".

37 3G

68 42

71

73

Oclober 2.

40 6

56 37

09

70

December 21 .

37 49

63 45

59

63

3.

40 43

56 22

62

70

22.

37 47

60 10

62

63

July 31.

40 39

41 35

75

75

23

37 54

56 IS

6()

63

August 1.

40 *'•

42 56

75

77

Oclober 31.

37 34

61 39

71

70

2.

40 15

43 43

76

76

May 5.

37 49

68 58

53

67

3.

40 49

45 5

76 76

6.

37 34

66 59

55

68

1.

40 2IJ

60 32

771 76

7.

37 52

64 24

57

67

2.

40 52

57 19

74 72

March 30.

38 4

64 23

69

70

29.

40 27

64 25

64 73

Sepiember30.

38 5

62

69

77

30.

40 6

65 3

67 73

May 4.

38 2

61 15

61

69

31.

40 58

65 sr.

70 70

5.

38 9

57 50

68

69

September 1 .

4<) 33

67 11

69 71

December 26

38 30

64 21

59

70

Oclober 13.

40 40

65 9

55 69

27

38 26

61 33

01

70

14.

40 42

65 2"

59; 73

June 1.

58 25

62

65

70

July 1.

4| 20

57 22

64

74

2.

38 20, 59 36

64

69

October 4.

4l 14

53 5-

60

71

3.

38 281 58 23

65

72'

16.

4l 10

41 7

C)

65

July 27.

38 30. 68 26

72

72

September 16.

4l 41

54 51

70

75

Junr 10.

38 401 65 SS

70

73|

REMARKS.

The »reater part of these longitudes havinjj; been detei--
mined by an excellent chronometer, may he depended upon
as correct. It must however be evident to every navigator
of observation and experience, who has been in the habit of

VOL. II. — T

146 TABLES OF OBSERVATIONS, ^'C.

traversing this current, that it is impossible to define, with
any degree of accuracy, its precise limits ; as it is influenced
to a great degree by the wind.

Sometimes you find it spread to a greater breadth than
usual, with diminished force and altered directions, (at least
of several points,) at other times compressed into a narrow
stream, and running with increased rapidity.

However, in the above Taljle, I have kept nearly in the
middle of it, seldom approaching near either limit, or so far
to the north or south as I have often experienced its influ-
ence.

I have observed, that after it passes the tail of the Grand
Bank of Newfoundland, the main stream proceeds in a south-
east direction, while several ramifications, generally not very
strong in their currents, branch oft' to the INE. and from that
to east, with counter currents in the intermediate spaces.

About two years ago, having been detained several days
in that neighbourhood by light baffling winds, I had an op-
portunity, by my chronometer, and repeated observations
through the day, of ascertaining the various directions of
the currents, as well as their velocity. On both sides of the
Gulf Stream, a counter current, running in the opposite di-
rection, is invariably met with. I have frequently, with a
free wind, by often attending to the temperature of the wa-
ter with the thermometer, succeeded in availing myself of
its assistance, so as to have the ship drifted 4° ahead of her
reckoning. From the longitude of aliout 55° to soundings,
(in the south side of the Stream) to the northward, the same
effects are produced, but I think not quite in so great a
degree. In George's Bank, there are regular tides. And
the Gulf Stream often trespasses on the soundings to the
southward of Nantucket. From thence as far as the capos
of the Chesapeake, I have seldom failed to experience a
SW, current.

By the frequent use of a thermometer, the navigator may
always discover when he touches upon tlie Gnlf Stream ;
and if he is bound to the eastward, benefit by its current ;

MADE ON THE ATLANTIC OCEAN.

147

or if the confraiy, shun its influence. On the north side,
the difference of temperature of Gulf and ocean water, is
at least 10°, on an average ; but greater in the winter than
summer season. On the southern side of the Stream, the
difference of temperature is never less than 5°. If any one
will only be at the pains of trying the water two or three
times in the twenty-four hours, he cannot be mistaken on
this subject.

In other currents than the Gulf Stream, the water is ge-
nerally from 2° to 4° warmer than out of the current.

TABLE IV.

Temperature of the Air and Water on Soundings.

Mnnih.

Lat.

N.

^ o

Depth.

.Month.

Lat.
N.

e<

r- o

Depth.

OFF THE CAPES OF

DELAWARE.

GEORGE

'S BANK.

March 26.

Off Capes

43

46

Sou riflings.

luly 8.

"

O

6'.

54

53 fathoms.

5.

ar 45

50

44

50 rathoms.

9.

40 15

68

62

60

.\pril 11.

3' 32

56

41

35

12.

40 15

71

69

35

>Uixh 25.

Off Capes

49

42

Soundings.

.\ugust 13.

40 54

69

62

.Soundings.

6.

«*

48

42

17 latboras.

18.

40 20

70

68

60 failioms.

8.

it

36

41

20

12.

61

55

55

April 13.

38 34

54

41

22

September 22

40 42

65

61

50

22.

38 35

52

U

35

23.

40 13

68

62

S3

13.

52

42

20

20.

41 23

64

54

40

10.

39 15

56

44

Soundings.

21.

41 7

65

56

45

M«y 1.

2.

Off Dela.
38 12

56
63

50
50

38 fathoms.

22

41 12

56

56

41

18.

1.

July 15.

U.

**

60

5':

76

74

52
44
74
71

14
10
.»
50

0\ AND N

EAR TH

G Gf

tAND B.\NK OF

88 50
.19 6

J

JEWFOU

NDL

AND.

o

-

o

August 20.

39 56

73

68

60

M»rch 10.

42 3

52

36

Tail.

September 8

3i 3

67

71

Soundings.

13.

42 21

53

36

"

9

3< 2.1

67

65

M

April 5.

41 47

55

32

it

7.

38 37

64

61

fc

May 16.

42 57

52

41

• I

8

Off Capes.

64

6-.'

16 fathoms.

28.

42 U

54

39

• 1

26.

18 47

71

6'J

27

August 5.

4.1 28

59

57

<o filhoms.

27.

.TO 10

62

61

26

21.

43 21

56

48

t(

October 30.

Off Capes.

57

61

Soundings.

September 15.

42 10

58

48

Tail.

19.

38 50

57

60

20 fatboms.

30

41 57

51

53

Sound inea
Tail.

20.

38 20

57

61

IS

October 3.

42 S3

53

47

No»embcr 1 .

39 4

51

53

16

7.

43 IS

58

46

17 fathoms.

December 21 .

OffCapes.

4<i

V-

Soundinci.

D-cembcr 8.

42 54

58

39

Tail.

18.

**

21

39 IS ralboms. |

9.

43 31

58

45

Soundings.

148

TABLES OF OBSERVATIONS, ^'C.

Month.

Lat.

N.

c -

si

Depth.

AVERAGE TEMPERATURE OF THE

r- c

■J^p-

WATER, OFF THE DELAWARE, IN

o
March . . .43

OFF THE BRITISH CHANNELS.

p

January 30.

50 9

50

51

74 fa'homs.

April ... 43
May . . . .49
July ... 70
August . . . .70
September . . 65
October . . .60
November ... 53
December . . .40

February 27.

49 39

48

47

Soundings.

26.

51 19

55

44

65 fathoms.

March 28.
27.

7.

7.
April 19.

40 l«
50 15

50 29

51 15
49 57

53
5)
51
51
50

50
48
45
42
5U

Sounilings.

67 fathoms.

70

80

22.

49 32

52

49

Soundings.

19.

50 51

50

49

65 fathoms.

22.

50 51

46

48

50

21.

50 33

49

48

Soundings.

ON GEORGE'S BANK.

May 31.

49 43

57

54

76 fathoms.

M.

50 9

54

53

67

*

19.

50 28

53

58

85

July ... 50

20.

50 57

54

51

80

August . . .50

29.

51 40

56

53

75

September . . 50

30.

51 3

52

49

65

June 11.

50 49

54

50

70

20.

50 55

60

57

85

21.

50 54

62

58

Cape Cle.ir.

12.

51 47

55

5t

40 fathoms.

ON THE COAST OF IRELAND

21.

51 18

63

58

Kinsale.

July 2.-;.

49 9

60

58

Soundings.

o

24.

50 58

59

57

50 fathoms.

January and February about 48

August 15.

50 41

53

53

70

March ... 46

20.

50 54

62

59

60

April . . . .49

21

50 22

64

59

80

May . . - 52

17.

51 54

69

59

45

June . , . .54

19.

51 4

69

60

65

July ... 57

October 18.

50 28

60

58

90

August . . . .59

3.

50 52

5S

55

Soundings.

O.tober ... 57

1.

51 47

59

57

36 fathoms.

November . . .50

November 22.

50 32

52

48

67

December ... 47

23.

51 6

53

50

55

December 25.

50 40

62

47

80

REMARKS.

The experiments on George's Bank were too few to be
satisfactory. Besides, several of the temperatures in the
foregoing Table were not properly on George's Bank, but
to the southward of it, where the Gulf Stream often extends,
and the water is consequently always much warmer. It
will be found to be uniformly the case, that the water is
much colder on banks, than on soundings shelving gradu-
ally from the land. In summer, the difference of tempe-
rature of the water, on and off soundings, on the coast of

MADE ON THE ATLANTIC OCEAN. 149

America, is not so great, as at other seasons of the year;
and on the edge of soundings, it will mostly be found to be
colder than in shoaler water. On tlie other side of the At-
lantic, at least in St George's Channel, the reverse is the
case.

Off the coast of Ireland, the thermometer is of very little
service in indicating soundings ; the water seldom falling
more than 3°, and sometimes continuing tlie same as before.

In using the thermometer, I deem it quite unnecessary to
take into consideration the relative temperatures of the air
and water ; as the very great changes whicli frequently take
place in the former, from day to day, have no sensible ef-
fect on the latter, which only varies with the varying sea-
sons.

150

TABLES OF OBSERVATIONS, 5jC.

«

1^

<u

*

!^

^»

<~^

*».>

ft

•k^

s

'&.

=^

u

^

I'M

t9 €9

?9

19 09

65

8S

zs

9S

ss

ts

ts

ee

■BH

to ^

<6

tc is

V5

o>

to

Vi

?r

o

i

VN\

9S

se

1-5

es

5S

IS

OS

6t

zt

2t

9t

St

St

1

••^H

g

s

to

■Jiy

o

O

to

!^-'

»n

»n

o

s

o

S5

X

^

I'M

ss

19

95

ss

ts

o
to
c»

to

tn

to

5S

00

tn

IS

m

to

OS

6t

St

zt

2t

tlantic
Fear.

"H

•■'IV

in
If)

to

—

CO
in
00

CO
tn

00

in
to
in

m

'co"'
m

1

•I'M

r.9

U

09

65

8S

ZS

95

S5

ts

es

r.5

IS

15

•BU

to

en

oo

to
«n

to

CO
m

^ aj

J!V

r^

oo

in

r^

00

tn

m

CO

r, in the
bnth in t/

«

a.
u
CO

^

•«H

12

to

U

CI

to

OZ

CO

to

69
to
to

89

99

-»•
to

t9

CO

to

r-Q

19

09

65

85

o

in

>n

tn

m

in

m

•MV

5

CO

to

to

to

to

to

to

CO

to

CO

to

to

to

■n

to

^n
*n

1

<

5

■I'\^

r,.',

U

TZ

oz

oz

69

69

89

l\\

99

5'.)

i9

P9

■«H

to

to

to

CO

to

o
to

o

a:

-n

tS

^^

•jiy

to

£

to

!0

CO

to

to

3
in

in

to

^ ».

^

I'M

w

\l

U

Oi

OZ

69

69

89

Z9

09

59

1-9

t-9

and h
ngever

BH

S

CO

ts

OO

o

5

s

to

o

to

00

in

oo

■ity

00

to

00

to

CO

_s_

(C

<o

to

to

c

15

■11 \\

1 '

i;9

oz

oz

6'j

89

29

99

^^^9

t9

C9

r-9

19

BH

to

to

"5r-

tO

to

to

o
to

is

»n

in

m

m

in

.hX

•.nV

§

to

to

3

CO

to

O
to

a

in

m

in

in

m

^4

s

i^

I'M

oz

f;9

89

29

99

S9

t9

£9

r.9

19

09

65

85

«H

g

o
to

oo

g

oo
m

*o

OO

-■o
in

m

■♦a ^

■•'!V

to

3

o

3

CO

to

to

o

i^

m

ature of
t Latitud

a.

^

I'W

tQ

OP

r-'i

19

09

65

8S

IS

96

9S

+-C

ts

t:E

•«H

GO

m

to

>n

to
»n

in

g

S

5=

•■>!¥

s

oo

1^

in

O

>n

m

oo

to
in

<o
in

m

1

■|IM

19

9S

09

65

85

95 _

„ss_

ts

>n

SS

in

C?_

IS

b

IT!

_05

"H

!5

(O
*n

**

CO

<is cjj

•4!V

ES

oo
to

00

in

OO

in

o>
in

O)

t^

^

'+

«

in

Temp
differ

3
t^

^

[^

^

I'W

86

IS

PS

OS

Bt

8t

It

9^

9t

9t

5t

5t

5^

■■'!V

O

to

o

to

tf>

00

in

00

m

m
«n

00

in

«n
m

in

0*

in

to

0»

in

CO

tn

p

•i

l!M

r,9

IS

6t

9t

9t

91'

5t

5t

tt

tt

CO

O

1

•«H

fe

V)

5

S

00

I.-

to

•jiy

o

>n

tn

o

in

tn

in

•^

•jpni

1)8

TN

oo

S

3

^

3

-z

^

-*

-ft

^

MAOB ON THE ATLiANTlC OCEAN. 151

REMARKS.

The second column of Temperature of the Wa^er is taken
from a similar Table of General Jonathan Williams in his
Treatise on Thermometrical Navigation.

The mean temperature of the water for each distinct
montli, on a particular parallel of latitude, does not always
correspond with J. Williams's Table of the same kind, though
the mean annual temperatures in each latitude agree very
well as far down as the parallel of 40° N. when a unifor-
mity prevails, as far as 1 liave traced it to the south, viz.
38° N. I can, however, readily account for tlic water, by
my oI)servations, not being so warm, in general, as by his;
as in taking tlic mean, I have never brought into the cal-
culation those made in the Gulf Stream, or any other ascer-
tained currents. Now those parallels embrace the Gulf
Stream, for its course of seven or eight hundred miles at
least : and you will commonly experience a current in them
as far to the eastward as the Western Islands ; and it is well
known that the water is always warmer in currents than out
of them.

My mean, between longitude 15° and 45° west, agrees
with Williams's.

I Ijclicve the difference of temperature of the water in the
Gulf Stream, and its counter currents, to be very small, if
there be any at all, and that the breadth of the latter, par-
ticularly on the southern edge of the Gulf, is not inconsi-
deral)|c. For in the early part of n)y acquaintance with the
Gulf, before I had ascertained its limits, various courses, and
the iiinuence of the winds on these, I have several times,
when steering as I sup|)osed in the very centre of it, from
the npie;hl)ourhood of tlie Delaware to the Ranks of New-
foun Hand, afterwards discovered that I had been almost
all the time in the counter current. 1 consider it more

153 TABLES OF OBSBUVATIONS, ^C.

difficult, in short, to keep in the easterly current than in the
other, as the temperature of the water will always aj)p) ise you
when in or out of the current; and, with a free wind, a per-
son, bound to the westward, has only to steer out now and
then, until the temperature of the water begins to fall, and
by that means he will avoid penetrating through into the Gulf.
The substance called Gulf-weed is no mark by which the
stream can be distinguished, as it is met with in great quan-
tities throughout the middle latitudes, to the westward of
the Azores, and northward of Bermuda.

MADE ON THE ATLANTIC OCEAN.

153

pa
<

t2

o

O

03

<lJ

"W

•SA

^

C

>^

0

<n

0.1

•f

^

•«

c

c

c*

<i)

<i,)

0

J3

w

<;j

^

«• -^ "&

»o

0

0

«
^

81-

61-

0
■n

c

"1

I";

•n

00

in

•n

m
in

m

at

<

00

0

«

^.

-.

0

'--,

al.

m
■n

0
ir.

CO
«n

in

0

OS

■*

5:

-

0

■n

=%

■..

Ot

eo

OB

s

vs

ts. >n r^ «n —

m *n in tn »n

^

0

0
tn

-

0»

•n

•n

a» tc ao 0 y?
«n m in «c (£

0

7i

til

OS

«n

5

0
*n

tn

in

0

in

Is. -r <c — ao
m m m 0 •*

.

-

-

00

0*

(C

s

00 0 *o in 0
tn in in m m

0

^'

•f**
«

0

0»

»n

0

m

g

00

•r

•^

^

c

<

i.-»

«n

>n

•:-; h*

..Is

1-^

S

00

-*■

0

0

i

«©» C»|W C^tC In. 0 0

»^ 1 «

in 1 in

00

•*

<

« — lo >n to Oi o|— CO

0

00

m

0

»

&

55

V5

10

in

*n

00

0

-

C

IT

^

0
■0

L.'

<

'-0
«n

m

-^»

oc

■n

0

i

'0

tc

0

a:
in

in

a

00
in

•n

W-) in

0

V5

0
in

a*

in

4f|

0

•n

0

A3

0

e.

"5

i;-'

0

•^

oe
*n

oe
tn

0
tn

1

is

in

in
•n

•n

«n

<n

•n

g

S

f^

lA

1*

3

s?

in

_

o»

S

3

•jB

0

ft

S

to

-f

1

i?

0

0

*n

m

00

"n

to 0

48

to

to

to

C» 00

"n -f

in
in

■n

s

(is

<o

0

0

tj

to

0

l«

10
10

0

5

■i:

'n

8.5

in

■n

is sy ?»y

0 H- CO
■n 0 0

I'.

0 a» 0
w *c m

8S

to <n

in «

U
-?

0
n

3

.J-) «n —

.n 0 'J

-

00 0 00
(C ic m

or

in

m
>n

0

0

>

'J

in

■f

8S ,

■n in

cb

to
1^

»

•5

-

-f

C- 00

00

in

-

_

in

0

_£_

0*

g

,r

c

0

1.

T

3
C

JO
—5

C3

^
^

?

3

"5

B

c

6

.0

c
c

V

B

a

VOL. II. U

154 TABLES OF OBSERVATIONS, ^'C,

REMARKS.

The figures written across the Tines ai'e the mean ot
the difference (when any difference occurs) between this
and Table V. It is very apparent, from these observations,
that although you most generally find the water become
progressively colder the farther you advance to the nortli-
ward, or as the season itself becomes colder, yet this does
not always happen ; so that it is utterly impossii^le to form,
with accuracy, such a Table as the ingenious Mr. Williams
has attempted. Yet he is certainly entitled to a great deal
of credit for the correctness of many of the deductions in
his work on Thermometrical Navigation, considering tiie
limited ex[)eriments he had anopportunity of making, in the
very few voyages performed by him. He ai)pears to have
been so sanguine, as almost to believe that this science
might be reduced to such perfection, as to enable the navi-
gator to ascertain thereby the ship's place at sea. Of the
fallacy of this hope, the continued experience and unremitted
application of more than ten years (to and fro in the same
track) have convinced me beyond a doubt. Nevertheless,
I shall ever esteem the thermometer as a very important
and useful instrument in navigation. Although it is not
entitled to that implicit confidence that should induce a
person to incur risks in running for the land or soundings in
dark nights, or thick foggy weather, yet it may often appiise
him of the vicinity of danger, wlien he does not expect
it. In navigafing the Atlantic, between the United States
and Europe, if bound to the westward, the necessity of shun-
ning the current of the Gulf Stream is obvious to evei y one,
as well as the propriety of making use of its assistance
when going in the opposite direction. The irregularity of
the courses it pursues, together with its undefined limits, all
of which are considerably changed by the prevailing winds,

MABE ON THE ATLANTIC OCEAiN, 135

render it impossible for a person to know when he is in it,
by calculation, however well ascertained may be his latitude
and lonsijitudo. But by tlic thermometer, if he will only be
at the trouble of trying the water once or twice a day, he
can never be mistaken in identifying this current. I have
been acquainted with many ship masters who were in the
habit of carrying this instrument to sea with them, but who
never attempted to ap])ly it until they deemed themselves
in the neighbouriiood of soundings or of the Gulf, and were
consequently unqualified properly to appreciate its useful-
ness. For unless a person will l)c at tlie pains of making
his thcrmomctrical observations at least once a day, it is im-
possible he can avail himself of its good offices. It is only
from the relative temperatures and changes in them that
he can draw his conclusions. The extremes of, heat and
cold, which are not the same every year, must necessarily
give to the water of the ocean a corresponding tempera-
ture ; so that (as the foregoing Tables plainly shew) in tlie
same season, you will find this temperature very difllerent,
in difterent vears.

No. VI.

Ohsenations on the Trap Rocks of the Co?i7iewago Hills near
Middletown, Dauphin County, and of the Stony Iddge near
Carlisle, Cumberland County, Pennsylvania. By tlie Ho-
norable John B. Gibson, — Read 17 th J\ov. 1820.

On the Connewago Hills, between Elizabethtown and
Middletown, these rocks are found resting on the old red
sandstone, which extends from the North River, near New
York, to the Rappahannock, near Falmouth in Virginia ; and
which is here about ten miles broad. They exhibit nothing
like stratification, but constitute the summits of the hills ;
the sandstone preserving a common line of elevation, above
which all is either trap rocks, or a grey sandy mould pro-
duced from them by decomposition. These rocks are ba-
saltiform greenstone ; but they are accompanied by some
of the other members of the trap family, sucli as amygda-
loid, wacke, 65c. This basalt is of two kinds : The first is
of a dark iron grey colour, with a shade of blue, sometimes
verging on black ; its streak is an ash grey ; it is of a com-
pact granular structure, and is chiefly composed of feldspar
and augite 01 hornblende, but as I judge, after an attentive
examination with a pretty high magnifying power of the
microscope, most probably the latter: it rings when struck ;
but though extremely hard, gives, with difficulty, a few
sparks with steel, and when broken with a hammer, often
flies into thin pieces with siiarp edges : its fracture is rough.

OBSERVATIONS ON TRAP ROCKS. 157

sometimes inclining to splintery, and sometimes flatly con-
clioidal ; and it is pei lectly opake. These rocks have moul-
dered so much, that their original form cannot he ascer-
tained ; the shape in whicii lliey now appear undoubtedly
being the result of decomposition ; but the particular sj)ecies
of which 1 am now speaking, is usually found in spheroids
formed of concentric crusts that fall off in succession as the
mass decays. After the first coat is detached, tiiese balls
appear perfectly sound ; but on being broken, are found to
be enveloped with two or three other coats, in a progres-
sive state of preparation for falling off', which decreases to-
wards the centre till the mass becomes thoroughly sound.
The outermost ciust, by shrinking and chapping, is tilled
with an inlinite number of fissures which cross each other
in every direction, and disposed, on being completely de-
tached, to fall into very small pieces, that are soon entirely
disintegrated. Within the itmermost perceptible layer, the
mass, wliich never contains any foreign body as a nucleus,
is equally haid to its centre. In a single instance, I found
a quartz pebble, rounded by attrition, embedded in one of
these rocks ; but they disclose neither organic remains nor
vegetable impressions. What shews that the spheroids were
not originally formed on a nucleus, or that they did not at
first take a figurate form, is, that when, as sometimes hap-
pens, they are split by exposure to the weather, each part
assumes, in the progress of further decomposition, the foi m
of a distinct sphere, whose crusts take a new point for their
common centre, witliout regard to that by which the general
exfoliation before proceeded. In truth, I am of o|)inion tliat
basalt, or greenstone, is originally always amorphous, and
that it takes a determinate form only in a state of decom-
position ; as is shewn by the columnar basalt of t!ie Giant's
Causewaii in Jrdand ; of t!ic lake o[ Bulsonna in [fahf ; of
IlaUfbc.rg a!id Iliinnchersf in Sweden ; and other places ;
which exhibits regular prismatic forms onlv when it has long
been exposed to the action of the atmosphere ; lor when-
ever a part of the surliice has l)ccn removed, the interior

158 OBSERVATIONS ON

has exhibited only the incipient appearance of regular
forms ; and doul)tless every rock of the kind would, if pe-
netrated to a sufficient depth, be found to be a solid mass,
Humboldt, it is true, in his account of the breaking; out of
the volcano of Jorullo in the intendancy of Valladolid in
Mexico, says that strata of clay, enveloping l)alls of decom-
posed l)asalt in concentric laijers, were thrown out : but
these, although actually ejected in a figurate shape, it clearly
appears, were not then recently formed, but were the pro-
duct of anterior convulsions, and had long lain in the ground
in a state of decay. But the crystalline form of basalt has,
at all events, received an importance with respect to the
question of origin, which it by no means deserves : for al-
though it is conceded that columnar and other figurate forms
exist in rocks of aqueous origin, it has been proved, by the
well known experiments of Mr, Gregory Watt, that both
the columnar and globular structure may be produced by
the slow refrigeration of a mass of melted basalt ; and lava
has been found in Filicuda, one of the Lepari islands, in
perfect columns, and imperfectly columnar in the island of
Ponga.

The second species is soft and friable throughout, usually
amorphous, and of every intermediate shade between a dark
and an ash grey ; but most frequently of the latter. It is
of a coarse open structure, and so soft, that some specimens
may be crumbled between the fingers. It is not incrustated ;
but the whole mass, when disintegrated, falls into a coarse
sand with a rather slight intermixture of clay. It is not
very abundant, and is used witii advantage in giving a
smooth surface to tlie turnpike road which leads from Lan-
caster to Harrisburg ; the body of which is constructed of
the harder species, which is also sometimes amorphous.

Both kinds, wiien exposed to cwistant moisture, are co-
vered witii a reddish brown, whose depth of colour is in
proportion to their hardness : hence the harder masses con-
tain more iron. These rocks correspond, in almost every
particular, with the descriptions we have of the incrustated

TRAP ROCKS. 159

basalts of Euroj)e, except tliat they, as well as those of the
Stony Rid2;e, of which I shall presently speak, are decom-
posed miicli more readily below tiie sm lace of the ground
tl.an wlicn subjected to the action of the weatlier. As oxy-
gen is the chief, perhaps the only agent in dissolving them,
their iron must be in the lowest state of oxidation ; and their
decomposition is tliercfoie accelerated by a position, which
by constantly ex[)osing them to moisture, quickens the
change of their iron in its passage into a peroxide. But it
is by no means certain that their decom|)Osiiion is effected
exclusively byaiieans of tlie iron they contain; for tlie feld-
spar which is one of their constiuients, may, l)y l)eing de-
composed, also contribute to effect a decomposition of the
whole rock. When tlie ground is penetrated where the
rocks are most al)undant on the surface, nothing is usually
found hut a yellowish sand mixed with a portion of alumi-
nous clay, and forming a cold meagre mould of little value
for purposes of husl)andry. Hence it is a practice with the
owners of the land, who have of late l)egun to clear some
parts of it, to bury the rocks where they lie ; and it succeeds
very well.

The (juestion respecting the origin of traj) rocks has en-
gaged the attention of the most celebrated geologists, and
it would therefore l)e presumjituous in a sciolist to attempt
to discuss it further than as it is directly involved in the
subject on which he professes to treat. I may however i)c
permitted to remark, that there is nothing in the position of
the trap of the Connewago Hills, to indicate its being igni-
genous. The common answer to arguments drawn from
the ahsenceofall tlic characteristics of a volcanic mountain,
to wit that the basalt was formed on the bosom of the moun-
tain itself, and afterwards denuded by the removal of the
superincumbent ma'*s, cannot be admitted here ; liecause in
that case we ought notto expect to find it resting on even
the oldest of the secondary rocks. That it may have l)een
deposited on the sandstone by a volcano, before the present
continent was elevated above the level of the sea, would be

H50 OBSERVATIONS ON

a more plausible supposition ; but it would be altogether
gratuitous. Perhaps the Plutonists and Neptunists have l)oth
been wrong in refusing to admit of exceptions to their re-
spective theories ; and particularly with respect to the for-
mation of trap rocks, which probably ought not to be exclu-
sively referred to the agency of eitlier fire or water.

But the Stony Ridge near Carlisle piesents ai)pearances
more decisively volcanic. In structure, the trap of wliich
its rocks are composed, differs but little from tiiat of the
Connewago Hills, except that it is somewhat harder, of a
finer graiuilation, and a darker colour ; but ifcis decomposed
in the same way, is covered by the same ferruginous coat,
and would, on being analysed, probably exhibit liut little dif-
ference of result in the relative quantity of its constituent
parts. The rocks differ more in size and shape, those of
the Stony Ilidge being smaller, and very rarely globular.
They present no columnar appearance, but at the Carlisle
Ironworks, where the ridge has been penetrated, I have ob-
served something like arrangement in their position, al-
though I cannot say they were of a crystalline form. It is
however not so much in the structure of its rocks, as in the
position of the ridse itself, that the evidence of its igneous
origin is found. The valley is here about twelve miles wide.
Its bottom is formed of an extremely compact transition
limestone, which, dipping at an angle of from thirty to forty
degrees, presents the broken edges of its strata, and forms
a pretty uneven surface. Between the Conodoquinnet creek
and the North, or as it is here called, the Blue Mountain,
the limestone is covered by schistus, and between the Yel-
low Breeches creek and the South Mountain by gravel. This
limestone formation, though it occupies the valley in nearly its
whole extent, certainly for a distance of five hundred miles, is
not exclusively confined to it, but appears at the same level to
the south of the South Mountain, and forms the soil of Frede-
rick county in Maryland, of a great part of Yoik, and of the
whole of Lancaster counties in Pennsylvania. The North and
South Mountains are composed of quartzose masses, of grey

TRAl' KOCKS. H)i

wacke, and of a puddingstonc, which sometimes contains ma-
rine shells, 'i'he ridge in question then, four miles east of
Cailisleand distant twenty-lour miles from the basalt of the
Conncwago Hills, stretcliesjjy a course somewhat mcandrous,
from the foot of the North Mountain, across the valley, till
it arrives at within two miles of the South Mountain, where
it ttrminatcs abruptly, filling the cavities of the bottom of
the ViilJey, and forming an overlying unconformable mass
of the newest flcetz trap of Werner, so unlike every other
rock in the neighbouriiood, as to arrest the attention of the
inhabitants. Its base is about three hundred yards broad,
and its height from twenty to thirty, its summit being nearly
a dead line. The transverse direction and want of con-
formity to the stratification of the limestone, as well as the
isolated situation of the ridge, give it a strong appearance
of having originally been a stream of lava: to convince one
of which, nothing is wanting but an extinguished crater in
the North Mountain. But I by no means consider its ab-
sence a decisive objection ; for rocks undoubtedly volcanic
are found, where all vestiges of a crater have long been ob-
literated. But in the present instance I see no necessity for
one having ever existed. If there is any position in geology
thoroughly established, it is that the crust of the earth has
undergone a series of great and sudden revolutions, which
have buried all the countries that were before inhabited.
From the animal and marine organic remains alternately
imbedded in the dittcrent strata of transition and secondary
rocks, it is demonstrated by M. Cuvier, that every part of
the surface of the globe has, by subsidence or upheaving,
alternately l)ecn the bottom of the sea and dry land. To
what cause i)ut subterraneous tire can effects such as these
be attributed ? It is idle to talk of tlie motion of the sea
from east to west, of the action of the tides, or deposits of
sediment : unless we return to the exploded notion of the
earth having suffered violence from the oblique stroke of
a comet, we shall be unable to imagine any possible force

VOL. U. X

16S OBSERVATIONS ON

applied ah extra, that is competent to produce them. Elec-
tricity must also be rejected ; for the whole quantity of tliat
fluid which exists in the universe would be insufficient to
charge the earth so highly, as to produce by its discharge
the immersion of continents and the elevation of the bottom
of the sea above the level of its surface. Although there
are non-conducting bodies in the earth ; yet as water, which
at every temperature between ice and vapour is an excellent
conductor, pervades every part of it, it would be impossil)le
to confine the fluid to any particular place, and the whole
globe would have to be charged. But the clouds and every
thing coming into contact with the surface, would abstract
at least a portion of it. Every one who has experienced
the difficulty of confining this fluid by the best insulation of
glass or resins, will readily acknowledge this. Then to col-
lect a sufficient quantity of fluid, would require over the
whole surface of the earth an uninterrupted continuance of
a state of things favourable to such a result for a longer pe-
riod than can, in the nature of things, be expected ever to
have taken place. Besides, only dry earth is an electric per
se ; for when it is mixed with water, in which state only it
is a constituent part of the globe, its power of being electri-
cally excited is proportionally decreased ; so that the solid
parts of the globe would, independently of the effects pro-
duced on them by the contact of seas and rivers, be capa-
ble of excitement in a degree so very low, as to render them
inadequate under any circumstances to collect the quantity
of fluid required : but when to this is added the contact of
lakes, rivers, and seas, we shall find that the globe is alto-
gether incapable of being electrically excited. In Werner's
theory, the alternate submersion and emergence of the dif-
ferent portions of the earth's surface is not a postulate, and
of course he does not pretend to account for it. His notion
that the waters originally covered the whole surface, and
that they gradually, and at length finally, retired into caverns
at the earth's centre, left empty at the creation for their
reception, having first deposited the strata in the broken

TRAP ROCKS. 163

State, and inclined positions in which we now tind them, is
iiostile to every thing like ftiir induction from facts and pro-
positions conceded on all hands. Then to assign an ade-
quatc cause for the effects discoverable in the disjointed and
scattered condition of the earth's crust, we are driven hy
necessity to liave recourse to the tiieory of Dr. Hutton,*
which, although we may not choose to adopt it in its lull
extent, alone affords a rational solution of the difficidties
that embarrass the subject. While I acknowledge that his
theory of the consolidation of the stiata by means of heat
at the bottom of the sea, appears to be altogetlier unneces-
sary and beset with insuperal)le difficulties, I am compelled
by the want of any other adequate agent to assent to his
doctrine that the changes between oceans and continents arc
due to tlie expansive ])ower of heat from below. Earth-
quakes are doubtless tlie more languid efforts of the same
power ; and when during these, we behold the surface of the
earth tossing like a sea, while mountains are raised or districts
of country swallowed up, wc may judge of what it is capable
of effecting, when roused into full activity. In earthquakes
as well as volcanoes, electiicity acts an efficient l)ut subor-
dinate part ; for during an eruption, vivid flashes of liglit-
ning issue from the clouds of pumice and ashes sent up,
and shocks of earthquakes are frequent and violent. Moun-
tains are nothing but dislocated portions of the eartli's crust,
anrl nnist thciefore owe their formation to the same general
cause that effected the other parts of the giand revolution.
Else how could granite, the lowest of the known formations,

• The changes that have taken place on llie earth's surface, were, it seems,
at a very early perioil ascribed by Xanthus to earthquakes and subterraneous
6res, which, at the delude, elevated some portions of the bed of the sea, as
well as depressed others, and produced (lie iiic(|ualitic.s of tlie solid parts of
the globe. This o]iinion was afterwards, in 1692, in substance adopted by an
English geologist of the name of Hay ; and alsn iti 1740 by an Italian called
Laz^ro Moro. 'I'iieir writings may have suggested to Dr. Hutton a distin-
guishing feature of his theory : but none of them appear to have suspected
what he has, I think, established, a succession of continents which he calls a
succevsiun of worlds.

164 OBSEEVATIONS ON

be found constituting the summits of the highest peaks r
Every appearance connected with the structure of Alpine
mountains irresistil)ly tends to one conclusion, that they have
been pushed up through the superincumbent strata, whose
debris are found resting at their bases, or on their flanks. In
truth there is such an apparent mutual and intimate con-
nexion between those mountainous elevations of the crust,
and volcanoes and earthquakes, that it is impossible to re-
gard them as distinct phenomena. Earthquakes are more
frequent and violent in volcanic countries, and the moun-
tains become more gigantic as we approach the torrid zone,
the peculiar seat of volcanic action ; and in Europe, let me
add, earthquakes are more frequent in tiie vicinity of trap
formations than elsewhere. From all this there is reason
to conclude, that there are long ranges of subterraneous fire
at an immense depth, and that volcanoes are merely the
vents through which, as a safety valve, are discharged the
elastic vapour and other substances, which, wlien confined,
are the cause of earthquakes, and of the upheaving of moun-
tains or even continents.

But to return from this digression. Would it be surpris-
ing, if, during a convulsion capable of producing results so
tremendous as the breaking up of the earth's crust, a stream
of lava should escape through a lateral opening at the base
of a mountain newly formed, or that had been thrown up
by a previous effort of the same power ? A crater is formed
by the gradual accumulation of pumice and ashes ejected by
an established volcano ; but I see no reason to doubt that a sin-
gle eruption might take place in the manner suggested, which
would be sufficient to account for the absence of ail traces
of a crater and the want of that conical shape so observable
in the mountains of volcanic countries. But that conic shape
so decisively volcanic, furnishes no argument that the power
which caused it might not, by a different mode of opera-
tion, produce those long uniform ridges which constitute the
chains of mountains in North America. Humboldt describes
Antisan and Pichinca, two volcanoes in the province of

TRAP nOCKS. 165

Quito, as each having no cone at all ; but as being in one
direction a lengthened ridge, sometimes smooth and some-
times rough, with pointed rocks. In Europe and Asia, no
active volcano is situated in a chain of mountains ; but in
America, in a rangcof from four to live thousand miles north
and south, the most stupendous volcanoes form a part of the
Cordilleras ; and tliis range of subterraneous fire is crossed
l)et\veen the eighteentii and nineteenth degrees of nortli la-
titude, by another extending from the Gulf of Mexico to the
Pacific Ocean. HumI)oldt considers the wliole province of
Quito as a volcanic abvss covered with a crust whose craters
are ditlerent vents to one continuous mass of lire. When
we consider tlic influence which distant volcanoes are known
to have on each other, we cannot doul)t the existence of a range
of subteri'aneous fire serving to connect them ; and when we
see a line of volcanoes coinciding with the course of the long-
est chain of mountains in the world, we are forced to believe
that, as the mountains could not have produced the volca-
noes, the volcanoes must iiave had some concern in produ-
cing the mountains. It is not an extravagant tlieory. then,
that all chains of mountains have been produced by volcanic
fire, acting either generally and raising above the surface of
the sea the immense edges of the earth's crust as the ori-
ginal framework of a continent, or in veins at an immense
depth below tiie surface of land already elevated, with-
out, except in a few instances, breaking througii the crust
acted on ; and that masses of overlying trap may be volcanic
products, emitted, in either case, through accidental open-
ings, where no remains of a crater ai)pear. I know not whe-
ther this idea is in any respect new; but I acknowledge tliat
many of the arguments I have employed are not new ; but
as they were those which naturally and |)owcrfuIly resulted
from established facts, I thought myself justified in appro-
priating them to the support of my hypotlu-sis.

It may lie objected, that from the vicinity of the Conne-
wago Hills to the Stony Hidgc, it ought to be jiresumcd that
the trap of both places had a common origin. But to those

466 OBSERVATIONS ON TRAP ROCKS.

who require that a theory should explain and reconcile all
the phenomena connected with its subject, it may be an-
swered, that it is conceded by many advocates of the Hut-
tonian system, that some basaltic rocl<s may have been
formed in the humid way from eruptions of mud such as
issue from some volcanoes in South America : not those that
are properly called mud volcanoes, which are destitute of
heat, and whose eruptions are produced by a fermentation
in which common salt is supposed to be concerned ; but ac-
tual fire volcanoes Into which water has found its way. In
this manner a different origin may consistently be attributed
to the rocks of both places. But I do not say that tlie trap
of the Connewago Hills is not a volcanic product, but only
that it exhibits no peculiar indicia of igneous origin.

In conclusion, however, it must be acknowledged that the
footsteps of the agent employed to work those grand changes
of which we every where see such convincing proofs, are so
intricate and confused, that we never can expect with abso-
lute certainty to trace them home. The Huttonian system,
though open in some of its parts to strong objection, affords
the most rational solution of the most important phenomena
of the earth, and must eventually gain ground. Connected
with this subject there are few facts so devoid of interest as
to be unworthy of being communicated ; and the author of
these observations therefore trusts he will not be considered
a trespasser on public attention, by 'having given them pub-
licity.

No. Vll.

An Account of two North American Species of Cyperus, disco-
vered in the State of Georgia : to which is added four Spe-
cies of Kifllingia, found on the Brazilian coast, and on the
Rio de la Plata in South America. By William Baldwin,
M. D.—Read iGth April, 1819.

Culmo Iriquetro. Spiculis terminalibus capilidis..

Cyperus sparsiflorus.

Culmo suhnudo, erecto : foliis canaliculatis, nervosis, sca-
bris : capitulo gjloboso : iiivolucro 3 — 4-{)hyllo, foliolis cana-
liculatis scal)iis: spiculis laiiccolatis, acutis, 4 — 7-floris :
squamis remotis, ovatis, obtusis .• seininc triquetro, basi at-
tenuate. Pistillum trifulum.

Root tuberous. Culm 0 — 12 incbes bi^li, somewbat 3-an-
gled, and always erect. Leaves narrow, cbannellcd, witli
setaceous points, sborter tban tbe culm. Sheaths open, tinged
witli purple at base. Leaves of tbe involucre 3 — 4, rarely
5. one or more mucli longer tban tbe bead. Heads always
solitary. Spikelels generally very numerous and compact,
varying consideral)ly in lengtb and appearance. Scales ge-
nerally remote, l)ut sometimes close. Keels green, tbe mar-
gins a ycUowisb brown colour.

Vibabits pine barrens in tbe vicinity of Savaonah and St.
Mary's Georgia. Flowers, May — October.

168 ACCOUNT OP SOME SPECIES OP

Observations.
Specimens of this plant were transmitted to Dr. Muhlenberg, in 1813. Al-
though he referred it to his Scirpits cyperiformis, it is sufficiently distinct. It
differs principally by its erect culm, solitary head, and its shorter, nafrower.
and coloured spikelets.

Cyperus ovatus.

Culmo subniido : foliis linearibus : involucro subtetra-
phyllo : capitulis ovatis, obtusis, sessilibus, et pedunculatis :
pedunculis subteretibus, striatis, brevibus : ocreis obtusis :
spiculis linearibus, 4 — fi-floris, bibracleatis : squamis ovatis,
subacutis, remotiusculis : semine triquetro, nigro. Pistillum
trifidum.

Eoot fibrous. Culm about one foot higli, acutely trique-
trous. Leaves shorter than the culm, the sheaths open, and
purplish at base. Leaves of the involucre resembling those
of the culm, slightly scabrous on the margins. The heads,
as far as I have seen, are four in number, pedunculate, and
sessile. Spikelets generally 6-flowered, the superior flower
abortive. From one to two very small, obtuse, empty scales
are sometimes found beneath.

Inhabits low moist situations near St. Mary's in Georgia,
And appears to flower throughout the summer.

Observations.
There are still a considerable number of new or doubtful species of Cyperus
in the United States; and I have several belonging to this division of the ge-
nus from South America. An account of which, with observations on the es-
sential character of the genus, I reserve for a future occasion.

An Account of four Species of Kyllifigia, &'c.

Calyx Q-valvis. Corolla nulla.

Kyllingia tenuis.

Culmo triquetro, temii.^ basi folioso : foliis angusto-lanceo-
latis acutis ; involucro tnphyllo j eapitulo globoso, minimo :

CYPEBU8 AND KYLLINGIA. 169

gluniis inequalihiis, mciubraiiaceis, acutis, carinis albidis,
glabris: seniiiie ovale, compresso. Floribus trkmdris. Pis-
till urn bijidum.

Root creeping, perennial. Cidm 3 — 10 inches high. Leaves
1 — .i, much shorter than the cuhn, and entirely smooth.
Shmths closed. Two or tliree acute pointed sheaths, inde-
pendent of the leaves, are frequently found at the base of
the culm. Leaves of the invulucre generally vertical, with
a few scattering spines on the margin. Heads very small,
and always solitary.

Inhabits damp close soils on the shores of the Rio dc la
Plata, in the vicinity of Buenos Ayres. Flowers, February —
April.

KijUingia rigida.

Culmo triquetro : foliis linearibus, brevissimis, abrupte
acutis: involucro triphyllo, brevi, acuto : capitulo ovato, ob-
tuso : glumis inequalibus, membranaceis, obtusis, carinis vi-
ridibus, glabris : semine oblongo, subtriquelro. PistiUum
bifidum. Planta rigida.

Root creeping, perennial. Cidni 4 — 15 inches high.
Leaves very short, and rarely more than one exclusive of the
sheaths, of which there are two or three at the base of the
culm, closed, and acute. Leaves of the involucre generally
ex|)anded, and sometimes sliorter than tlie head. Head ge-
nerally ovate, but varies from globose to cylindrical. The
flowers appear to l)e diandrous.

Inbaliits low moist situations near Rio de Janeiro, and also
near Mahlenado, on the Rio de la Plata, in the Banda Orien-
tal. Flowers, January — .iprii

Observation.
This plant appears to be allied to ihe K. brevi/olia of Rottboll, but differs in
the culm. Vide If'illd. Sp. pi. v. 1, p. 256.

VOL. II.-

170 ACCOUNT OF SOME SPECIES OF

Kyllingia leiicocephala.

Oulmo subtriquetro, sulcato : foliis angustis, acutis : invo-
lucro tiiphyllo : capitulis i — 3-glorneratis, albis, subcylindri-
cis : glumis subsequalibus, membranaceis, obtusis, carinis pa-
lide viridibus : semine obovato, compresso, marginato : jlo-
ribus monandris, bibracteatis, bracteis inequalibus^ membra-
Jiaceis, obtusis, corolla multo brevioribus : pistillum bifidum.

Root librous. Cul?n 3 — 8 Inches high. Leaves rather
shorter than tlie culm, with sheaths open at base, and sca-
brous towards the summit. Involucre from one to four
leaved, but generally three, reflexed, and scabrous on the
margins. Heads solitary or in threes, the middle one much
the largest, vertical, and cylindrical ; the others are placed
opposite at its base, horizontal, and of a globular form. They
are at first white, but generally change on drying to a pale
yellow.

There is sometimes found in tliis species, besides the brac-
teas, a minute, ovate, obtuse scale, situated at the base of the
calyx.

Common in both high and low situations, at Rio de Ja-
neiro and at Bahia in the Brazils, and also at the Banda Ori-
ental on the Rio de la Plata, where I met with it in March.
1818.

Kylliiigia squarrosa.

Culmo exacte triquetro : foliis angusto-lanceolatis : invo-
lucro 3 — 6-phyllo, longissimo : capitulis 5 — 7-glomeratis,
subsquarrosis, cyWn&ncxs, uno in medio verticali : glumis sub-
aequalibus, obtusis, carinis viridibus -.floinbus triandris, bibrac-
teatis, bracteis inwqualibus, calyce brevioribus : pistillum tri-
Jidum.

Boot tuberous. Culm 6 — 18 inches high. Leaves shorter
than the culm, with closed sheaths, and the margins scabrous.
Leaves of the involucre similar to those at the base of the

CYPEllUS AND KYLLINGIA. 171

culm, and sometimes very long, expanded or reflexed.
Heads sometimes an inch in length, and of a hrown colour.
The exterior bract is ovate, acute, and longer than the inte-
rior, which is much liroader, and obtuse.

There is a small variety from 3 to 6 inches higii, with
Iieads from 2 to 3, not differing materially in other respects.

Common at Rio de Janeiro, and also in the Banda Orien-
tal on the Rio dc la Plata. Flowers, Januanj — .Ipril.

Observations.
The genus Kyllingia appears to abound beyond the southern tropic, on the
American continent. But three cpcrina are yet known within the limits of tlie
United States. Neither of these agree exactly with (l.o gonnlr rharacter given
to the genus. The K. monoccphala of Muhlenberg, and the ptcnila of Michaux,
have neither bracteas nor corollas.' The flowers of the K maculata of Mi-
chaux are furnished with a single braclea, which has been called a \-vcdved ca-
lyx by Mr. KUiott. The flowers of the K. hucocrphala and squarrosa have
each two bracteas. Perhaps the flowers of the foreign species which have been
described as furnished with both calyx and corolla, may merely be bracteated.
The bracteas are so situated as to appear like a C-valved calyx ; but on exami-
nation, they will be found in the species I have examined, unconnected with
the fructification, and remain, after the seed with its two glumes falls off, at-
tached to the rachis.

• It will be perceived that I have adopted ccdyx instead of corolla in those
species, I have described, which are not furnished with both.

2

No. VIII.

Catalogue of Plants collected during a Journey to and from the
Rocky Mountains, during thp summer nf isao. By E. P.
James, attached to the Exploring Expedition commanded by
Major S. H. Long, of the United States Engineers. And
by the Major cominunicated to the Society, xtith the permis-
sion of the Hon. J. C. Calhoun, Secretary of War.

The Collection of Plants made during the excursion of
the exploring party commanded by Major Long, in the sum-
mer of 1820, contains a considerable number of species not
enumerated in this Catalogue.

These have been necessarily withheld, for want of oppor-
tunity to make the requisite comparisons. Such only are
given, with a few exceptions, as have already been ascertain-
ed to belong to the Flora of North America.

In the arrangement and nomenclature, Nuttall's " Genera
of North American Plants" has been principally followed.

E. P. JAMES.

CLASS I.— Order 1.
HippuRis vulgaris. Linn.

Order 2.
Callitriohe verna. Willd. C. auturanalis.
CoRisPERMUM hyssopifolium. On the Missouri.

Blitum chenopodioides. Nutt. On the Platte and Arkansaw, on arid and
saline soils.

CATALOGUE OF AMERICAN PLANTS, 173

CLASS U.— Order 1.

Veronica officinalis. Linn. V. serpyllifolia. V. agrestis. V. arvcnsis. V.
percgrina. These five species are naturalised and common tiiioughout
the middle States. V. beccabuiiga. In small streams throughout the
nortlierii and middle States, and in Upper Louisiana. V'. scutcllata. V.
anagallis. On the Platte. V. plantaginea. N. S. ? Flowers spiked, uni-
bracteate. Capsule nearly orbicular, dehiscent at the margin. Radical
leaves numerous and large, oval-lanceolate, stiped. Margin crenate.
Those of the scape few, sessile, and alternate. Spike long, dense-flow-
ered.

This plant, so unlike iu habit and appearance to tlie American Species
of Veronica, seems referable to no oilier Genus among the Pediculariee
of Jussieu, to which it is manifestly nearly allied. Habitat on open
plains within the Rocky Mountains; flowering in June and July.

Leptandra virginica. Null. On the Arkansaw.

Gratiola aurea. G. virginica- G. aluminata. G. fontinalis, N. S. ? On the
Missouri.

LisDERNiA dilatata. Muhlenberg. L. attcnuata. On the Canadian fork of the
Arkansaw.

BiGxoMA catalpa. At Old Smithland, near the mouth of the Tennessee river.

JusTiciA peduncolosa. Fursli.

Utricularia fibrosa. JFaller. U. longirostris. Le Conte. U. gibba. U. cor-
Duta.

PiNGuicvLA acutifolia.

Lycopus vulgaris. L. virginicus. L. obtusifolius.

CuNiLA mariana.

*Hedeo.ma glabra : (Cunila glabella. Muhl. Cat.) IL pulegioides. H. hirtaof
NtilUill about the Paunee Villages.

Monarda fistulosa. Ohio. M. purpurea. M. punctata. M. rugosa. M.
clinipodia.

Salvia trichostemoides. On the Missouri.

CoLLiNSOMA canadensis. C. ovalis.

CiROAEA lutctiana C. alpina.

Lemna polyrhiza. L. minor.

CLASS HI.— Order 1.

Valeriana pauciflora.

Fedia radiata.

Iris cristata. I. versicolor. \. tripetala.

SisYRixcHiuM anceps. S. mucronatum. Nutt. On the Platte.

Calymema nyctaginea. i\lich. C.albida. C angustifolia. Platte.

CoMMELiNA communis. C. crecta.

Leptanthus ovalis. New York.

PoLYcxEMUM americaDum. Nutt. On the Platte.

Xyris anceps.

SoiRPus acicularis. S. capillaceus. S. trichodcs. S. simplex. S. filiformis.
S. palustris. S. quadrangulatus. S. mucronatus. 8. lacustris. S. debi-
lis. S. autumnalis. 8. coarctatus. S. sulcatus. S. eicaltatus. S. divari-
catus. S. polyphyllus. S. pubcrulus (Fiiubristylis pubcrulum; Nutt.)

174 CATALOGUE OP

S. retrofractus. S. cjperiformis. S. macrostachyos. S. brunneus. S.
atrovirens. S. pendulus.

Rhyncospora alba.

ScHOENus setaceus.

Cyperus fasciculatus. C. poBeformis and uncinatus of Pursh. On the Cana-
dian. C. autumnalis. C. compressus. C. filiculmis. C. flavescens.
C. gracilis. C. tenuiflorus. C. strigosus. C. tetragonus. C. flavicomus.

DuLicHiuM spathaceum.

Trichophorum cyperinum.

Eriophorum ceespitosum. E. polystachium. E. angustifolium. E. virgi-
nicum

Cenchrus echinatus. Very abundant in the sandy soils on the Canadian.

LiMNETis glabra. On the Missouri and La Platte.

Nardus stricta.

MiEGiA macrosperma. Persoon. Cane. Commencing on the Ohio near Louis-
ville, and found on all the rivers to the south.

Oryzopsis asperifolia. Mich. New York and Pennsylvania.

Eriocoma cuspidata. Nutt. (Stipa membranacea. Pursh.) On the Platte.

Order 2. — Proper Grasses.

MuHLENBERGiA diffusa. Schrebev. Common. M. erecta.

Trichodium laxiflorum. Muhl. T. decumbens. Muhl. |P

Leersia virginica. Pursh. Ricegrass. L. oryzoides. L. lenticularis.

Agrostis tenuiflora. A. spica venti. A. pauciflora. A. setosa. In mountain
marshes. A. stricta. A. canina. A. sericea. A. decumbens. A. vul-
garis. A. aspera. A. clandestina.

Calamagrostis mexicana. Null. (Arundo agrostoides. Pursh.) C. canaden-
sis. •

Anthoxanthum odoratum.

Beckmannia eruceeformis. On the Platte.

Crypsis squarrosa. Nutt. Near the Rocky Mountains.

Phleum pratense.

PoLYPOGON ramosum. Nutt. Agrostis racemosa. Mich. On the Missouri.

Alopecurus geniculatus. A. pratensis.

Panicum crus-galli. P. Walteri. P. virgatum. P. nitidum. P. dichotomum.
P. capillare. P. latifolium. P. scoparium. P. pauciflorum. P. scabrius-
culum. P. nervosum. P. villosum. P. barbulatum. P. angustifolium.
P. divergens. P. elongatum.

Pennisetum glaucum. P. viriJe. P- verticillatum. P. italicum.

DiGiTARiA sanguinalis. P. villosa. P. paspalodes.

Paspalum purpurascens. P. vaginatum.

AiusTiDA oligantha. A. dichotoma. A. pallens. On tiie Platte.

Stipa avenacea. S. canadensis. S. sericea. Very common and troublesome
on the Missouri and Platte. The pungent stipe of tlie seed penetrating
the firmest cloathing. The long awn is hygrometric. S. bicolor. S.
stricta. S. parviflora. Nutt.

Androi'ogon nutans. A. avenaceum. A. macrourum. A. virginicum. A.
tetrastaciiium. Elliott. A. furcatum.

AiUA aquatica. A. obtusata. A. cfespitosa. A. mollis.

HoLcus lanatus.

Sesleria dactyloides. NiM. On the Platte.

AMERICAN PLANTS. 175

PoA trivialis. P. pratensis. P. viridis. P. nemoralis. P. annua P. com-
pressa. P. nervata. P. parviflora. P. tenella. P. eragrostis. P. rep-
tans. On the Mississippi.

UsioLA spicata. U. paniculata. U. latifolia.

WiNDsouiA popeformis. Am//. W. ambigua.

Danthonia spirata. Nutt.

Festuca tenella. F. elatior. F. polystachya. F. diandra. F. fluctans.
F. nutans. F. spicata. On the Missouri.

Bromus secalinus. B. mollis. B. purgans. B. ciliatus. B. altissimus.

KoF.LERiA cristata. K. nitida. On the Missouri.

Arvndo cinnoides.

Atheropogov apiudioides. A. oligostachium. Nntt.

Leitlrus panicuiatus. /V(///. On the Platte.

Anthopoc.o.v lepturoides. Nutt.

iEoiLOPs hjstrix. Null. On the Missouri and La Platte.

Elymis canadensis. E. villosus. E. striatus. E. hystrix.

HoRDEU-M jubatum. (Wild Barley.) H. pusillum. Nutt. On the Missouri.

Order 3.
MoLLUGO verticillata.

Lechea major. L. minor. L. thymifolia. L. tenuifolia.
Proserpikaca palustris. P. pectinacea.

CLASS l\.— Order 1.

Cephalanthus occidentalis.

Dipsacus sylvestris.

Galium trifidum. G. latifolium. G. tinctorium. G. asprellum. G. triflo-
rum. G. hispidulum. G. circte/.ans. G. borcale.

DiODiA virginica. On the Canadian.

HotsTONiA cuerulea. H. tenella. H. serpyllilolia. H. angustifolia.

Mitchella repens.

Eleagnvs argentea.

LuDwiGiA sphwrocarpa. E. lanccolata.

Is.vardia palustris.

CoRNts florida. C. circinata. C. sericea. C. asperifolia. C. stricta. C.
sanguinea. C. alba. C. paniculata. C. alternifolia.

Centuncllis lanccolata.

Pla.vtago major. P. lanccolata. P. cordata. P. cucullata. P. interrupta.
P. virginica. P. lagopus* of Pursh. (P. gnaphaloides of Nuttull.) This
species constitutes almost the only vegetation in extensive tracts of the
gravelly plains on the upper part of the Platte. P. pusilla. Nutt. Col-
lected by Dr. L. C. Berk on the Illinois river. P. glabra. Nutt. In
moist soils and on the upper part of the Platte.

CENTAfRF.i.i.A paniculata.

Frasera Waltlieri. Near the Rocky Mouutains, on the Arkansaw.

Ammaxia ramosior. A. humilis.

SY>fPLocARros fcetida.

* This name ha> been prc?iouilj' employed Tor anolbcr ipccirt,

176 CATAIiOGUE OF

Order 2.

Hamamelis virginica. A variety, or perhaps a distinct species, is found about

the Hot Springs of the Washita.
Sanguisorba canadensis.

Order 4.

Myginda mjrtifolia. Nutt. On the Rocky Mountains, about the high peak.
Ilex opaca. On the Washita, Ohio, Cumberland, Sec. 1. voinitoria. On the

Washita, where the leaves are much used as a substitute for tea. I. pri-

noides. I. canadensis.
Sagina procumbens.
PoTAMOGETON natans. P. fluitans. P. heterophyllum. P. setaceum. P. per-

foliatum. P. lucens. P. crispum. P. gramineum. P. pectinatum.

CLASS Y.— Order 1.

Myosotis scorpioides. M. arvensis. M. virginiana. M. lappula. M. glo-
me rata, i^titt.

LiTHosPERMUM arvense. L. latifolium. L. angustifolium. L. apulum.

Batschia Gmelini. B canescens. B. longiflora. B. decumbens. Nutt.

Cynogi.oseuim officinale. C amplexicaule.

PuLMONAiuA virginica. P. ciliata. N.!s. f In the crevices of rocks along the
streams within the Rocky Mountains.

Onosmodium hispiduni. O. molle.

Lycopsis arvensis.

Phacelia bipinnatifida. P. fimbriata. P. parviflora.

HvDROPHYLLUM append iculatuui. H virgiiiicum. H. canadense.

Androsaob (iccideiitalis On the Platte

DoDEOATHEON Hieadia. D integrifolium.

Menyanthes trifoliata

Samolus valerandi On the Canadian, and near Lake Champlain.

LvsiMACHiA angustifolia. L. racemosa L quadrifoiia L ciliata, L. hy-
brida L thyrsiflora

DiAPENsiA lapponica. D barbulata On the gravelly plains of the Platte.

Convolvulus trichosanthes AJich. C ssepiuni. C staus, C. obtusifolius.
C panduratus.

Ipomaea coccinea.

Cantua coronopifolia C. aggregata. On the Canadian

Phlox acuminata P pilosa P. undulata P. subulata ? On the upper
part of the Platte

CoLLOMiA linearis Nutt. Near the Rocky Mountains.

PoLEMONiuM reptans

SoLANUM nigrum S dulcamara S virginicum S carolinense. S. triflo-
rum ? S hirsutura This plant appears to be distinct from the S tritlo-
rum of Nutudl. Stem hirsute, as are also the leaves ; peduncles about
S-ftowered, alternating with the leaves Habitat on the Platte, commenc-
ing near the Paunee Villages, and continuing to the mountains. 1 have
never seen it, except immediately about the burrowing places of the mar-
mots or prairie dogs, where it is almost constantly found.

AMERICAN PLANTS. t?"?

AvDROPEBA lobata A'h//. (Solanum l\etcrandrum Ph.) Common throughout

all the country on il;c Platte, and tl\e upper part of the Arkansaw,
Physalis viscosa P- pcnnsylvanica. P. obsrura
Uatuka stramonium. Hyoscyamus ni^er. Both naturalised.
Vehbasoum thapsus. V. blattaria. V. lyclinites.
Spigeha marylandica. In Kentucky anil the Arkansaw Territory.
Sabbatia angulosa. S. gracilis.
Azalea nudiilora. A. canescens. A. bicolor.
BuMELiA oblongifolia. Nutt. On the Mississippi.
Campanula decipiens. Persoon. C. divaricata. C americana. C.erinoides.

C. aniplexicaulis. C. unifiora of Persoon ? A small but beautiful species

with a single terminal flower. Habitat in the grassy plains about the head

waters of the Arkansaw.
Caprifolium sempervirens. C. parviflorum. On the Mississippi.
Xylosteum ciliatum.
Symphokia glomerata. S. racomosa.
DiF.RviLLA Tourneforti. About the Rocky Mountains.
Triosteum perfoliatum. T. parviflorum.
Kibes albinerviuni. It. rigens. li. rcsinosum. R. sanguineum. R. aureuin.

R. recurvatuin. K. pennsylvanicum. R. nigrum. R. hirtellum. R. gra-

cile. R. triflorum.
Drosera rotundifolia. D. longifolia.
ViTis labrusca. V. aestivalis. V. cordifolia. V. riparia. V. rotundifolia.

A new Species of V'itis is found on the Arkansaw, which having not seen

in flower, I must omit.
Cissus ampelopsis. C. hederacea. C. bipinnata. On the Canadian.
Impatiens fulva. I. pallida. Nidt.
Viola pedata. V. paiinata. V. sagittata. V primulifolia. PA. V. cucullata.

V. asari folia. P/». V. blanda. V. lanceolata. V. canadensis. V. stricta.

V. debilis. V. rostrata. V. pubescens. V. Nuttalli. V. concolor.
Clavtonia virginica. C. spathulisfolia. C alsinoides.
Rhamnus ainitolius.
ZizYPiivs volubilis.

Ceanothus americanus. C. intermedins. Missonri. C. sanguineus.
EuoNYMVs americanus. E. angustifolius.
Celastrus scandens.

Theshm umbellatum. lAivi. (Comandra umbellata. Nutt.)
QvERiA canadensis.

Order 2.

EcHiTES diSbrmis.

Apocyni'm cannabinum. A. androsamifolium. A. hypericifolium.

GoNOLOBUS macropliyllus. U. viridiflorus.

AscLEPiAs syriaca. A. phytolactoides. On the Platte. A. parviflora. A. in-

carnata. .\. obtusitoli'a. A. aniplexicaulis. A. viridis. A. cinerea. A.

verticillata. A. longifolia. A. lanuginosa. Kull. A tuberosa.*
Gentiana criniia. G. pneumonanthe. G. saponaria. G. ochroleuca. G. alba.

G. angostifolia.

• All ihttf iprriei, except A. tiritlu, tiiberoia, »Dil hmuginota, I hare letn on the Plallc or Ar-
kanuw, an<l ihc lattir iiif cics on lliu Canadian.

VOL. II. Z

178 CATALOGUE OF

EvoLvuLus argenteus. Null.

Heuchera villosa.

Panax trifolium. P. quinquefolium.

Sanioula marjlaiidica. S. canadensis.

Ammi capillaceuin.

CoNiuM maculatum?

Selinum canadense. (Ferula canadensis ? Linn.)

Heracleum lanatum. H. spliondylium. On the Missouri.

Ferula villosa. Nutt. F. fcenicularia. Null. On the prairies of Grand River.

Angelica triquinata. A. atropurpurea. A. lucida.

SiuM latifolium. S. lineare.

Erigenia bulbosa. Nutt. (Hydrocotyle bipinnata. Muhl.) On the Ohio.

CicuTA maculata. C. bulbitera.

Myrrhis canadensis. (Sison canadense.)

Ursapermum Claytoni. Nutt.

Chaerophyllum procumbens.

Seseli divaricatum.

Smyrnium integerrimum. S trifoliatum. (S. cordatum. Pursh.) S. aureum.

Atriplex canescens. A. argentea. Nutt. On the Platte.

Chenopodium album. C. hybridum. C. Botrys. C. ambrosioides. C. an-

thelminticum. C. subspicatum.
Salsola salsa. On the upper part of the Canadian.
Kochia dioica. Nutt. On the Platte.
Ulmus americana. U, nemoralis. U. fulva. U, alata? Very common in the

Arkansaw Territory, and in Missouri.
Planera aquatica.
Celtis occidentalis, var. integrifolia. Nutt. C. tenuifolia.

Order 3 — i.

Viburnum prunifolium. V. pyrifolium. V. lentago. V. nudum. V. denta-
tum. V. pubescens. V. lantanoides. V. acerifolium. V. osycoccus.

Sambucus canadensis S pubescens.

Rhus typhinum R glabrum R viridiflorum, R. vernix. R. toxicoden-
dron R radicans. R. aromaticum.

Staphylea trifoliata.

Sarothra hypericoides. Nutt. (S. gentianoides. Ph.)

Parnassia palustris. P. caroliniana. P. asarifolia.

Order 5 — 6.

Aralia nudicaulis. A. racemosa. A. hispida. A. spinosa.
LiNUM Lewisii. Ph. L. virginicum. L. rigidum.
Zanthorruiza apiifolia.

CLASS yi.— Order 1.

Tradescantia virginica. T. rosea.
Caulophyllum thalictroides.

Mahonia aquifolia. Nutt. (Berberis aquilblium. Ph.) On the Rocky Moun-
tains.
Prinos verticillatus. P. ambiguus. P. leevigatus. P. lanceolatus.

AMERICAN PLANTS. 179

Pascrativm mexicanum. P. rotatum

Allum fragrans A striatum. A augulosum. A- stellatum. A. triflorum

A cauadensc
Brodiaea granditlura. Un tlie Missouri.
Hypoxis erecta. H. graininea.
Yucca angustifolia. Null,
Agave virginica.
PuALANGiiM esculentum. <P. quamash. Piirsh.) On the Ohio and Arkaii

saw, &c.
Narthecivm americanuQi.

LiLiuM pennsylvanicum. L. canadense. L. philadelphicum.
Ervthromum lanceolatum. Ph. E. albiduin. A'ull.
ITvuLARiA perfoliata. U. flava. U. grandiflora. U. sessilifolia.
Stheptopl's distortus. S. roseus.
Smilacina uinbellata. S. stellata. S racemosa.
PoLYGONATVM canaliculatuin. P. raultiHorum. P. latifolium.
Orontium aquaticuni.
AcoRus calamus.
JuNcus aculus. J. glomeratus. J. eftusus. J. filiformis. J. setaceus. J.

maiginatus. J.nodosus. J. polycephalus. J. sylvaticus. J. acuminatus.

J. aristatus. J. bulbosus. J. tenuis. J. bufonius. J. compestris. J.

melanocarpus.
Floehkia pioserpinacoides. Tfllld. Very common about Franklin.

Order 3.

Calochortus elegans. Ph. Within the Rocky Mountains.

Melavthium hybridum. On the Missouri.

Veratrum viride. V paiviflorum. V. angustifolium.

Helonias erythrosperma.

Scheuchzekia palustris.

Gyromia virginica. Null. (Medeola. Linn.) G. picta(2? Ntitt.

Trillium sessile. T. cernuum. T. pictum. (T. erythrocarpum. Mich. Null.)

T. erectum.
RuMEx sanguineus. R. crispus. R. verticillatus. R. britannicus. R. cris-

palulus. R. aquaticus. R. acetosella. (Lapathum acetosellura.) R. ve-

DOSUS.

Order 6.
Alisma plantago.

CLASS Vll.— Order 1.

Trientalis americana. A variety of T. europea.

/EscuLus Pavia. vE. discolor. iE.llava. jt. macrostachya.

CLASS \IU.— Order 1.

Rhexia virginica. R, ciliosa.

(Enothera biennis. CE. mnricata. ffi. paiviflora. (E. grandiflora. CE.
sinuata. CE. albicaulis. A'ull. On the Platte. (E. pinnatifida. A'ull.

180 CATALOGUE OP

(E. csespitosa. Nutt. CE. serrulata. Nutt. QE. fruticosa. (E. alata-
JSutt. (CE. maciocarpa. Ph.) On the Canadian.

Gaura biennis, (i. angustifolia. G. coccinea. Two other Species apparent-
ly undescrlbed are met with about the south-west branches of the Arkan-
saw.

Epilobium spicatuni. E. tetragonum. E. coloratum, E. palustre. E. alpi-
num.

OxYcoccus macrocarpus. O. hispidulus. (Gaultheria hispidula. Ph.)

Acer rubrum. A. dasycarpum. Common on the Ohio, Cumberland, &c. A.
barbatum. A sacchariniim. A. nigrum. A. striatum. (Moose wood.)
A. montanum. A. negundo. (Negundo fraxinifolium of Nuttall.) This
last species extends westward to the valleys within the Rocky mountains.

DiBCA palustris. Most common in the northern States.

Jeffebsonia diphylla. On the Ohio.

Order 2.
Chrysosplenium oppositifolium.

Order 3.

Polygonum aviculare. Common on the Platte and Arkansaw, near the
mountains. (P. glaucum ? Nutt.) P. tenue. P. hydropiperoides. Mich.
(punctatum. EUiotl.) P. mite. P. hirsutum. P. virginianum. P. coc-
cineum P. pennsylvanicum. P. persicaria. P. sagittatum. P. arifo-
lium. P. cilinode. P. scandens. P. articulatum.

Cardiospermum helicacabum. Very abundant on the Canadian, two hundred
miles above its confluence with the Arkansaw. Undoubtedly a native.

CLASS IX.— Order 1.

Laurus benzoin. L. sassafras.

Eriogonum tomentosum. Ph. E. flavum. Nutt. E. parviflorum. Null, This
genus abounds near the Rocky Mountains.

CLASS X.— Order 1.

Arbutus uva-ursi. -On the Rocky Mountains.

Gaultheria procumbfens.

Vaccineum stamineum. V. album. V. dumosum. V. frondosum. tV. resino-

sum. V. corymbosum. V. nitidum. I have seen none of this Genus on

or about the Rocky Mountains. Many of them are found in the Mas.

scrnes.
Andromeda polyfolia. A. calyculata. A. angustifolia. A. spinulosa. Ph.

A. racemosa.
Kalmia latifolia. K. angustifolia. K. glauca.
Rhododendrum maximum.
Epigaea repens.

Ptehosi'oha andromedea. Nutt. At Albany and Greenbiish, N. Y.
MoNOTROPA latiuginosa. (Hypopithys lanuginosa. Nutt.) M. uniflora.
PvROLA uniflora. P. minor. P. secunda. P. rotundifolia. P. chlorantlia.

(P. asarifolia. Mich.

AMEUICAN PLANTS. 181

CuiMAFuiLA inaculata. C. iimbellata.

Ledum latifolium. In spnasnose swamps.

Clethra tomentosa. C. aliiifcjlia.

MjiLiA azederacli ? Indigenous on tKe Canadian.

JussiEUA leptocarpa. \ult.

Cassia ligustrina. C. linearis. C. marylandica. C. fascicuiata. C. nicti-

tans. C. chamwchrista.
SoPHORA sericea. j\'ull. On tlie Platte.
Baptisia leucoplitea. .V»//. On the Missouri. B. ccerulea. B. mollis. B.

tinctoria.
Thermia rhombifolia. yiilt. On tl\e Platte.
Cercis canadensis.

Order 2.

Saxifraga nivalis. Flowering in July among the snows of the Rocky Moun-
tains. S. virginica. S. pennsvlvanica.
TiARELLA cordifulia. T. trifoiiata.
MiTELLA diphylla. M. cordifulia. M. reniformis.
Sapo.saria utiicinalis.

SCLERAXTHIS anUiUUS.

Order 3.

CucuBULVs stellatus.

SiLENEquinquevulnera. S. pennsylvanica. S. virginica. S.regia. S. rotun-

difolia. ytilt.
Stellaria pubcra. S. media. S. graminea. S. uliginosa
Ahe.nahia latifolia. .\ serpyllifolia A. thymifolia. A juniperina.
MicROPETALo.N laHccolatum. M. gramineum. M. lanuginosum.

Order 5.

Spergula arvensis. S. saginoidcs.

Cerastium vulgatum C. viscosum- C. semidecandrum. C- glutinosum.
^ulf. ((' nutans? Ha/inesipie.) C arvense. C tcnuifolium C
elongatum One or two species, apparently undescribed, are found about
the Rocky Mountains.

.Vgrostemmv githago.

OxALis acetosella. O violacea. O. corniculata. O. stricta. O. Dillcnii.

Pe.nthohu.m srdoides.

Sedum pulchellum. S. ternatura. S. stcnopetalum. Punh, On the Rocky

Mountains.

Phytolacca decandra.

Order 6.

CLASS XL— Order 1.

Cactvs mammillaris. C viviparus Niilt C ferox. C fragilis.

These four Species of Cactus are very commnn on the arid plains of the
Platte and Arkansaw, near the mountains. C feros I have seen growing

VOL. II. — A 2

Igg CATALOGUE OF

at a great elevation upon the sides of the Rocky Mountains. C. cylindri-
cus ? Arborescent, rising to a height of eight or ten feet and much brancli-
ed. Habitat about the head waters of the Arkansaw and Canadian, where
are also two other shrubby Species.

Bartonia nuda. B ornata.

Mentzelia aurea. Nutt.

PnuNUs viro-iniana- P. serotina. P. canadensis. P. borealis. P pennsyl-
vanica." P nigra. P pygmpea. P. pumila P. depressa. P. chicasa.
Common and certainly indigenous on the Arkansaw-

Lythrum verticillatum. L salicaria. L. virgatum

CuPHEA viscosissima.

Order 2.

Agrijionia eupaforia A. parviflora. A striata.

Crataegus apiifolia C spathulata. C coccinea. C pyrifolia. C. elliptica.
C flava. C. punctata. C crus-galli.

Order 4.
Aronia arbutifolia. Nutt. A. melanocarpa. A. botryapium. A. ovalis. A.

sanguinea.
Pyrus coronaria P angustifolia.
Spiraea salicifolia. S. tomentosa. S. hypericifolia. S. opulifolia. S. arun-

cus
Gillenia trifoliata. G. stipulacea.

Order 5.

Rosa blanda. R. parviflora. R. nitida. R. gemella. R. Carolina. R. rubi-
folia.

RuBus occidentalis. R. villosus. R. strigosus. R. canadensis. R cuneifo-
lius R. hispidus. R. trivialis. R. inermis. R. odoratus. R. specta-
bilis ?

Dalibarda repens. D. fragarioides. Found mostly about mountains.

Dryas octopetala ? On the Rocky Mountains.

Geum strictum. G. agrimonioides. G- album. G. virginianum. G. geni-
culatum. G. rlvale. G. anemonoides.

PoTENTii.LA tridcntata. P. emarginata P. norwegica P- recta. P. pumi-
la. P canadensis. P. simplex. P. argentea P humifusa A'titf. On
the Missouri. P fiuticosa. On the Rocky Mountains. P- anserina. P.
pennsylvanica. P. supina. On the Mississippi.

CoMARUM palustre.

Fragaria canadensis. F. virginica.

CLASS XIL— Order 1.

TiLiA glabra. T.pubescens. T. heterophylla.
Helianthemum canadense. (Cistus canadensis ) H cricoi(les-
PoRTULAccA olcracea. Very common near the Rocky Mountains-
Talinum teretifolium. Pursh-
Cheledonu'.m majus.

AMERICAN PLANTS. 188

Stylopiiorum (liphyllum. Null. S. petiolatum. A'utt.

Argemone mexicana ? Flower very lars;e, anil invariably white. On tlie Platte.

Sangui.varia canadensis.

Podophyllum peltalum.

AcTAEA rubra. A. alba. Bigchtv.

.Sauracenia purpurea.

NuPHAR lutea. N. Kalniiana. N. ailvcna.

Nymphaea oilorata.

Uelphinium azureum. I), exaltatum. D. vircscens. Nutt.

Aqcileolx canadensis. Another most beautiful species is found ^rowinj;
near the limits of phuenogamous vegetation, on the Rocky Mountains.

Cimicifuga raceniosa. C. ainerirana.

IIypericim pyramidatum. H. ascyroides. 11. fasciculatum. II. tenuifoliuin.
H. perforatum. H. coryrabosuin. H. parviflorum. H. angulosum. H.
canadense.

Elodea virginica.

LiRioDEXDRON tulipifcra.

PoHCELiA triloba. P. parviflora.

Atragene aniericatia.

Clematis virginica. C. cordata. C. holosericea.

.'V.NEMovE ludoviciana. Null. About Council Bluffs. A. nemorosa. A. cu-
neifolia. A. tenclla. On the Platte. A. tlialictroides. A. pennsylvanica.
A. dichotoma. .\ virginiana.

I'halictrim cornuti. T. dioicum. T. rugosum. T. pubescens. T. purpu-
rascens. T. ranunculinum.

Hydrastis canadensis. On the Missouri.

Caltha palustris. A second Species with white (lowers is found in swampy
places, about the upper parts of the Rocky Mountains.

Corns trifolia.

Hepatica triloba.

Ranunculls flammula. R. lingua. R. pusillus. R. cymbalaria. R. aborti-
vus. R. nitidus. K. sceleralus. R. auricomus. R. pygmicus. R. pcnn-
sylvanicus. II. bulbosus. R. [ihilonotis. R. repcns. R- acris. R. ma-
rylandicus. R. recurvatus. R. fluviatilis. R. umphibius. N. S. ? Inha-
biting stagnant waters and marshy places near the Rocky Mountains. R.
iiitermcdius .' Smith, in I?ers's Eacycl. Habitat in marshy grounds, near
the confluence of the Ohio and Mississippi. Flowering in .January. R.

. N. S. ? Approaching R. abortivus, but much smaller. Calix

and corolla very minute, scarcely visible without a magnifuM-. Habitat on
inundated ground on the Cumberland and Tennessee Rivers, flowering in
February.

Brasenia peltata. (Hyilropeltis purpurea.)

CvAMUs luteus. On the Mis.souri and Arkaiisaw, in stagnant waters.

CLASS WW.— Order 1.

TcucRtfM canadense. T. virginicum.
Mentha borealis. M. canadensis. M. tenuis.
IsANTHfs CKruleus.

Hyssopis nepctoides. II. srrnphularifrfoliii»
Galeopsis tetrahit.

184 CATALOGUE OP

Synandra grandiflora. Null.

Stachys aspera. S. liyssopifolia. S. hispida. S. sylvatica.

Leonurus caidiaca.

Glechoma hederacea.

Hyptis capitata. H. radiata.

Pycnanthemum incanum. P. aristatum. P. virginicum. P. muticum.

Clinopodium vulgare.

Origanum \ ulgare.

Dracocephalum variegatum. D. virginianuiu. D. deaticulatuin. D. parvi-

flofutn. NiUt. On the upper part of the Platte.
Prunella pennsylvanica.
Scutellaria galericulata* S. lateriflora. S. integrifolia. S. pilosa. S. ca-

nescens.
Triohostema dichotoma.
Phkyma leptostachya.

Order 2.

Verbena aubletia. V. spuria. V. hastata. V. urticitblia. V. diftusa. V.
stricta.

Zapania nodiflora.

Caprahia multifida.

Herpestis r micrantha.

Scrophularia marylandica. S. lanceolata.

BiGNONiA radicans.

Buchnera americaiia.

Antirrhinum elatine. A. linaria. A. canadense.

Collinsonia verna. Null. Common in Missouri.

Gerardia purpurea. G. tenuifolia. G. tlava. G. quercifolia. G. pedicu-
laria, var. pectinata. On the Washita.

Pedioularia pallida. P. canadensis. P. iiammea. On the Rocky Mountains.

MiMULUs ringens. M. alatus. M. luteus.

Chelone glabra. C. obliqua.

Pentstemon leevigatum. P. pubescens. P. gracile. Null. P. cristatum.
Null. P. erianthera. 7V^(<//. P. cseruleum. iVw/^ P. albidum. M(//. P gran-
diflorum. Nutt. (P. Bradburii. Pursh.) P. coccineum. N. S. ? This last
plant, though closely allied, is scarcely a congener to the other Species,
and may probably be referred to some other Genus. Habitat on the de-
clivities of the Rocky Mountains. Plants of tlie Genus Pentstemon
abound in the vicinity of the Rocky Mountains; and some of the Species
extend on their sides to the extreme limits of phiKnogamous vegetation.

Martynia proboscidea. Common througiiout Upper Louisiana to the moun-
tains.

Euc}iKOMA coccinea. Null. E. grandiflora. Null. (Castilleja sessiliflora.)
At Council Blufts.

Bartsia alpina.

Mklampvrum lineare.

Orobanche americaiia. 0. ludoviciana. O. fasciculata. On the Canadian.
O. uniflora. O. virginiana. (Epifagus americaiius. Null.)

AMERICAN PLANTS. 185

CLASS XW.— Order L

Draba verna. D. nivalis. I), ripmotalis.

Alyssum ludoviciauutn. iVw//. (Myagruin argenteum. Pursh.)

CoRONOPUs didyinus.

Lf.pidium virginicum. Common in the most remote parts of Louisiana.

TuLASPi arveuse. T. alliaceum. 'f . bursa pastoris.

Order C.
Dentaria laciniata. D. diphylla. D. lieterophylla. D. multifida.
Cardamine spathulata. C. teres. C. virginica. C. pennsylvanica.
Barbarea vulgaris.
Sisymbrium amphibium. S. palustrc.
Erysimum officinale. E. parviflorum.
Cheiranthvs asper. Null. On the Platte.
Hbsperis pinnatiGda.
Arabis aipina. A. Ihaliana. A. lyrata. A. canadensis. A. pendula. A.

hirsuta.
Staxlkya pinnatifida. Ntitt. S. integrifolia. N. S. ? On the upper part of

the Arkansaw, with the preceding.
Cleome pentaphylla. C. dodecandra. C. serrulata. Ph. (Atalanta serru-

lata. Nittt.) On the Platte. Common.

CLASS W- Order 1.

Lobklia Dortmanna. Habitat in New York and Pennsylvania. L. amocna.

L. Kalmii. Common in New York and New England. L. intlata. L. si-

philitica. L. cardinalis.
Passiflora lutea? On the Arkansaw.

Order 3.

Geranium maculatum. G. roberlianum. G. N. S. ? On the Rocky

Mountains.
ScHRANKiA uncinata ? Apparently a second Species, with white flowers, is

found on the Canadian.

Order 4.
SiDA hispida. S. abutilon. S. alccoides. S. ? S. ? Two

species on the Platte.
Malva rotundifolia. M.coccinea. NuH.
Hibiscus grandiflorus. In the Arkansaw Territory. H. militaris. H. virgi-

nicus.

CLASS \\\.— Order 1.
Petalostemum candidum. P. violaceum. P. villosum.

Order 2.
Cohydalis cucullaria. C. formosa. C. fungosa. C.glauca. C. aurea.
VOL. II. B 2

186 CATALOGUE OP

PoLYGALA incarnata. P. paucifolia. P. senega. P. alba. On the Missouri.
P. sanguinea. P. verticillata. P. brevifolia. Ntttt.

Order 4.

Amorpha canescens. Nittt. A. nana. Null. A. fruticosa. This is almost

the only woody plant which is found on many extensive tracts of the plain

country about the river Platte.
LupiNus perennis. L. argenteus. L. pusillus. A suflfruticose species, very

large and beautiful, is found near the sources of the Canadian.
Orobus dispar. Nutt. O. longifolius. Nutt.
Lathyrus myrtifolius. L. venosus. L. polymorphus. Nutt.
Vicia americana. "V. sylvatica.
Phaca villosa. V. csespitosa. Nutt.
Oxytropis Lambertii. On the Platte.
Astragalus canadensis. Near Franklin Mountain. A. carolinensis. A. mis-

souriensis. A. Iiypoglottis. A. Laxmanni. A. carnosus. A. galegoi-

des. A. gracilis. Nutt. This Genus is abundant in the woodless plains

of the Missouri to the mountains.
Dalea alopecuroides. D. aurea. D. laxiflora.
Psoralea canescens. Nutt. P. cuspidata. Nutt. P. esculenta. Nutt. (Pomme

blanche) used as food by the Paunees and Canadian traders. P. incana.

Null. P. tenuiflora. P. arenaria. iV^^/^ Most of these species are found

in the sandy plains of the Platte and Arkansaw. P. onobrychis. Nutt.

P . N. S. ?

Melilotus officinalis. M. psoraloides. Nutt. Ohio.

Trifolium reflexum. T. lepeus. T. pratense. T. arvense. T. stolonife-

rum. MiM.
Stylosanthes elatior.

Glycirrhiza lepidota. Nutt. Hah. from St. Louis to the Rocky Mountains.
Lespedeza sessiliflora. L. capitata. L. polystachya. L. violacea. L. pro-

cumbens.
Hedysarum canadense. H. canescens. H. marylandicum. H. ciliare. H.

viridiflorum. H. cuspidatuni. H. paniculatum. ti. glutinosum. H.

viridiflorum. H. pauciflorum. H. boreale.
Phaseolus perennis.
Apios tuberosa.
Amphicarpa monoica. Elliott.
Galactea glabella.
Clitouia virginiana.
RoBiNiA pseudacacia. R. hispida.
Tephrosia virginiana.

Trigonella americana. Nutt. On the Platte.
Prenanthes altissima P. cordata P virgata. P. alba. P. racemosa- P.

illinoensis P. juncea. P. runcinata ? Hah- about the Rocky Moun-
tains.
Lactuoa elongata L integrifolia
SoNOHus niacrophyllus S leucophfcus. S pallidus. S. arvensis. S. ole-

raceus S ludovicianus Nutt. On the Platte
Hieraoium venosum H paniculatum H marianum H runciiiatum.
Krigia virgiiiiea K. amplexicaulis Nutt (Hyoseris amplexicaulis. Mich.)
Troximon glaucum. T. marginatum- Near the Rocky Mountains.

AMERICAN PLANTS. 187

Csicvs lanceolatus. C- altissimus C arvensis. Not yet naturalised in the

western States. C. discolor C liorridulus C undulatiis A'k//.
LiATRis spicata. L graminifolia. L cylindracea. L squariosa
Veknoma nOveboracensis. V. preealta V. altissima. Autt. V, angusti-

fulia
EuPATORivM sessilifoliuin. E- lanceolatum E ceanothifoiiura E jjurpu-

reum E mat-ulatum E punctatum E verticillatum. E perfoliatuni.

E agcratoides E ctplestinuin
CiiRYsocoMA graveolens. i^'ull. C. nauseosa. Un the Missouri.
Cacalia tuberosa
HvMExoPAPPL's tenuifolius.
Santolixa ? suaveolens. About the Rocky Mountaias.

Order 2.

Artemisia longifolia. A'uft. A. serrata. Null. A. columbiensis. A'uU. A.

gnaphaloidcs. A'ult. A. ludoviciana. Aulf. A. ceriiua. Am//. (A. dra-

cunculoides. Pitrsh.) A. sericea. A. biennis. A. canadensis. Most

of these species are found on the Platte.
Baccharis? angustifolia. A shrub on the Arkansaw.
Gnaphai-ilm margaritareum. G. polycephalum. G. purpurcum. G. planta-

gineuni. G. aniericanum. G. uliginosum.
Erigeron- puniilum. Null. On the Platte. E. asperum. Ntilt. E. glabellum.

I^ntl E. bellidifolium. E. purpureum. E. philadelphicum. E. strigo-

sum. E. heterophylluni. E. canadense.
Inula Hclenium. I. mariaiia. 1. villosa. I. linarifolia. I. linifolia. I.

alba.
Aster hyssopifoiiiis. A. tortifeiliii«. A. nemoralis. A. pauciHorus. On the

Platte. A. pilosus. A. biennis. A. multiflorus. A. sparsiflnrus. A.

squarrosus. A. concolor. A. sericeus. A. novw angliw. A. cyaneus.

A. oblongifolius. Null. A. undulatus. A. cordifolius. A. coryinbosus.

A. macrophylhis. A. spectabilis. A. gracilis. A. puniceus. A. novi-

belgii. A. acuminatus. A. Itevigatus. A. eminens. A. junceus. A.

miser. A. divergens.
SoLiDAGo canadensis. S. procera. S. serolina. S. ciliaris. S. reflexa. S.

lateriflora. S. aspera. S. altissima. S. juncea. S. arguta. S. bicolor.

S. petiolaris. S. livida. S. ceesia. S. flexicaulis. S. macrophylla. S.

viniinea. S. graminif(dia. S. tenuifolia.
Brachvris Euthami^e. Null.
DoNiA squarrosa.

Arnica montana. About the Rocky Mountains.
Senecio hieracifolius. S. elongatus. B. obovatus. S. balsamitae. S. lo-

batus.
Boeiiera glandulosa.

Trichopiivllum oppositifolium. A'u// On the Platte. T. . N. S. ?

Starkea pinnata. Null On the Missouri, Platte, flic.
Achillea tomentosa. A. millefolium.
Heliopsis Ifevis.
Helf.nivm antumnale.
\ctij<ella acaulis. Nutt

188 CATAIiOGUE OF

Order 3.

Galardia bicolor. Hab. on the grassy hills of the Platte.

Helianthus tubseformis. H. atrorubens. H. d'lvaricatus. H. frondosus. H.

trachelifolius. H. giganteus. H. altissimus. H. multiflorus. H. deca-

petalus.
RuDBECKiA purpurea. R. gracilis. R. columnaris. R. laciniata. R- digitata.

R. pinnata- R. ramosa. N. S- Hob on the Canadian.
BiDENs cernua. B. chrjsanthemoides. B. connata. B. frondosa. B. pilosa.

B- bipinnata.
Coreopsis lanceolata. C. trichosperma. C. tripteris. C. palraata. Nutt.
AcTiNOMERis helianthoides. Nutt. A. alata.
SiLPHiuM laciniatum. S. compositum. S. terebinthinaceum. S. laevigatum.

S. trifoliatum. S. triternatum. S. atropurpureum.
PoLYMNiA canadensis. P. uvedalia.
Parthenium integrifolium.
IvA xanthifolia. Nutt. I. axillaris.
A.MBROSIA trifida. A. elatior. A. artemisifolia. A. paniculata. A. tomen-

tosa.
Xanthium strumarium.

CLASS XNlll— Order 1.

Orchis ciliaris. O. blephariglottis. O. cristata. 0. psycodes. O. spectabi-
lis. O. rotundifplia. O. dilatata. Near the Rocky Mountains. O. fim-
briata. O. orbicularis. O. incisa.

GooDYKB* pubesceiis. (^Npfit.tiii pubesceiis. ffitld.)

Neottia tortilis. N. cernua.

PoGONiA ophioglossoides. P. divaricata.

Triphora pendula. Nutt.

Calopogon pulchellus.

Arethusa bulbosa.

Malaxis ophioglossoides. M. liliifolia.

CoRALLORHizA innata. C. odontorhiza. C. hyemalis.

Order 2.

CypRiPEDiuM candiduin. C. parviflorum. C. pubescens. C. spectabile.
AsARUM canadense.

CLASS XIX.— Order 1.

Caulinia fragilis. C. flexilis.

PoDOSTEMUM ccratophylluin.

Typha latifolia. T. angustifolia.

Sparganium ramosum. S. americanum.

Carex scirpoidea. C sterilis. C. squamosa. C. arenaria. C. bromoides.

C. retroflexa. C. stipata. C. muricata. C. multiflora. C.leporina. C.

scirpoides. C. lagopodioides. C ovalis. C scoparia. C. crinita. C.

acuta. C. pedunculata. C. ovata. C. varia. C. subulata. C margi-

ARIEHICAN PLANTS. 189

iiata. C vestita. C. tentaculata. C mlliaiis. C lupulina. C plan-
taginea- C anceps. C granulans- C miliacea. C. pseudo-cyperu3.
C lecurva. C pellita. C lacustris. C. vessicaria-
ScLERiA trigloinerata.

Order 4'.
Alnus serrulata. A- crispa ?
DioTis lanata-
UiiTicA pumila- U- urens U- diuica. U. procera. U- chamaidroides. U.

capitata U divaricata. U. canadensis.
MoRus rubra M. scabra
Amaranthus albu3. A. gruecizans A lividus. A. hybridus. A- panicu-

latus A sanguineus A retroflexus.
Myiuophvllum spicatum. M verlicillatum.
Sagittaria sagittifolia- S obtusa. S hastata. S- heterophylla. S lanci-

folia. S graininca. S natans-
QuERcus phellos. (Willow oak ) Hab on tlie Arkansaw. &c- Q imbricaria.

(Burriers oak ) Q. heterophylla Q inonticola Q prinoides. Q cas-

tanea. Q bicolor. Q nigra Q fairata Q tinctoria Q discolor Q.

rubra. Q cuccinea Q Catesbfei Q palustris. Q. ilicifolia. Q. alba.

Q stellata. Q macrocarpa. Q lyrata.
Carpinus amcrlcana.
OsTRYA virginica.
CoRYLus americana- C- rostrata-
Faous sylvatica. F. ferruginea.
Castanea americana. C. pumila.
Betui-a populilolia. B. excelsa. B. nigra. B. papyracea. B. lenta. B.

glandulosa
Plata.vus occidentalis.
LiquiDAMBER styraciflua.
JuGLANS nigra J cinerea. (Canja.) 3 olivffiformis. J. sulcata. J. alba.

J tomentosa. J aniara. J porcina.
Arum dracnntium. A. triphylluni. A. virginicum.
Cajlla palustris.

Order 8.

Pints resinosa. P rigida P serotina. P. strobus. P. larix. P. micro -

carpa P flexilis N S ?
Abies canadensis. A. balsamea. A. nigra. A. rubra. A. alba.
Thlma occidentalis.
CupREssus disticha.
Acalypha virginica.

Croton ellipticum. C capitatum. C. glandulosum.
Iatropiia stimulosa f)n the Canadian.
Euphorbia hypericifolia E maculata E. polygonifolia. E. ipecacuanha.

E peplus E. dentata. E. Ihymifolia. E niarginata.
Melothria pendula
MoMORDicA echinata.
Sycios angulata
Cucv.Misr . Nab on the Arkansaw. C. pepO' The size of a large

orange.

VOL. II. — C 2

190 CATALOGUE OP AMERICAN PLANTS.

CLASS XX.— Order 2.

Valisneria spiralis.

Salix nigra S discolor. S. myricoides. S. corJata. S. rigida. S lucida.

S planifolia. S rosmarinifolia. S fuscata S conifera. S longifolia.

S- angustata. Bab. westward to the Rocky Mountains. S nigra. S.

grisea.
Fraxinus sambucifolia. F. quadrangulata. F. cpiptera. F- acuminata. F.

pubescens
Maolura aurantiaca. Ntitt. (Bow wood ) On the Arkansaw and Canadian.
VisouM rubrum V purpureum- V. verticillatum.
Nyssa villosa N biflora. N. tomentosa. N. denticulata.
Zanthoxylum fraxineum-
AcNiDA cannabina. A rusocarpa.
HuMULUs lupulus. Within the Rocky Mountains.

Order 6.

Smilax hastata. S. bona nox. S. sarsaparilla. S. rotundifolia. S. caduca.

S laurifolia. S- peduncularis. S. herbacea.
DioscoREA villosa.
Gleditschia triacanthos.

Order 8.

PopuLUs balsamifera. P candicans. P. trepida. P. hudsonica. P. grandi-

dentata P angulata. (Cottonwood) To the Rocky Mountains.
DiosPYROs virginiana.

Shepherdia argentea Nutt. On the Platte.
Udora canadensis. Niitt. (Elodea canadensis. Mick.)
Gymnocladus canadensis.

Menispermum canadense. M. virginicum- M. Lyoni-
JuNiPERus communis. J. virginiana.
Taxus canadensis.

No. IX.

Remarks on the Sandstone and Flmtz Trap Formations of the
Western Part of the VaUeij ol the Mississippi. Bij E. P.
James, attached to the Exploring Expedition commanded by
Major S. H. Long, of the United States Engineers. And
bi/the Major communicated to the Society, xcith the permis-
sion of the Hon. J. C. Calhoun, Secretary of War. — Read
(in conjunction with the preceding Kumber) on the i7th
of August, 18S1.

The district of country contemplated in the following
Efsay, lies on the south western margin of that great valley
which is watered by tiic Mississippi and its numerous tril»u-
taries. We have confined our attention to tliat tract which
lies south of the river Platte, and west of a meridian line
intersecting the Arkansaw at the confluence of the Ne-
gracka.

Towards the West, our examinations have been termi-
nated by the first ranges of the Rocky Mountains ; and by
Red River on the south.

E. r. JAMES.

Smithland, Kentucky, iZth April, 1821.

s

193 REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

It is remarked by Maclure and others, who have made
the requisite comparisons, that the rocky formations of North
America appear less disturbed and confused than those of
Europe. If this be the case with that part of the country
which has been examined by the above mentioned philo-
sopher, it is perhaps more so with a large and interesting
portion of it hitherto little known to the g(olo2;ists of Eu-
rope or America. I refer to that extensive plain, a part of
which contains the bed of the Mississippi and its tributaries,
and to the stupendous range of mountains which constitute
its western boundary.

T hese mountains have by some been considered as a con-
tinuation of the great chain of tlie Andes ; and in conformity
to this opinion, the name has been extended to them. It is
to be regretted, that common consent has not as yet esta-
lished a distinctive appellation for this important range.
Snowy, Rocky, Shining, Chippewan, Sandy, Missouri, Caous,
and Mexican, are a few among the attributives hithei to be-
stowed upon it. It is to be hoped that one of these, or some
other, may finally gain the ascendancy, and it is of little im-
portance which it shall be.

The general direction of the range is from north west to
south east. It extends from near the Gulf of Mexico on tlie
south east to the Northern Ocean at the mouth of Macken-
zies River on the north west.

It will be proper first to direct our attention to the great
plain, or, as it lias been called, the Valley, of the Mississippi,
which must be considered as commencing near the sumnn't
of the Alleghany Mountains, and stretching westward to the
feet of the northern ^ndes. In this region, the observer dis-
covers few traces of those tremendous upturnings and com-
motions whose history is so plainly written on tlie rocky
strata in the eastern part of the continent. Tntil he arrives
within a few leagues of the Rocky Mountains, he finds all
the materials constituting the surface resting undisturbed in
their original position. The rocks are almost universally
stratified, and their stratifications commonly maintain a pa-

FL(ETZ TRAP FOltMATlOXS. 198

rallclisin with the liorizon. The slia;ht inequalities of the sur-
fiicc arc often manifestly the effects of water, which running
forages over a ligiit and loose soil, have hollowed for them-
selves channels and valleys proportioned to their size and
velocity. Wherever these currents, or other causes, have
laid hare the rocky substrata of the soil, the remains of ma-
rine animals are found incorporated in the boily of the rf)clv.
They are also met with in most perfect preservation in the
soil.

These appearances aftoid suflicicnt cvidenrc. that at some
remote period the waters of the ocean rested ui)on tliis ex-
tensive region.

Proccechng westward from the Mississippi, the surface
rises gradually, having however inclination sufficient to give
to many of the streams which traverse tliat part of the coun-
try a velocity of near six miles per hour. This inclination
seems to Ije greatest in tlie neigiibourhood of tlie Missouri,
as that river, the Quicurre, Platte, ^*c. have a much more
rapiil current tiian tlie Arkansaw and the south western tribu-
taries of the Mississippi. The country bordering on the
Mississippi is for the most part deeply covered with soil,
whicli supports a profuse vegetation. To tlic north and
west it differs little from one extensive savanna. The tra-
veller Journeys, for weeks in succession, over a dreary and
monotonous plain, sparingly skirted and striped with narrow
undulating lines of timber, which grow only along tlie mar-
gins of considerable streams of water. In these boundless
oceans of grass, his sensations are not unlike those of the
mariner, who beholds around him only the expanse of the
sky and the waste of waters.

The Missouri, between the Mississippi and the mouth of
the Platte, passes through some considcral)!y extensive fields
of com|)act limestone, sandstone, and other horizontally stra-
tilled rocks. On tlic Platte, no rocky formations aj)pear
within about four hundred miles from its confluence with
the Missouri. At about this distance, some inconsiderable

194 REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

ridges of coarse friable sandstone occur. These hills, though
irregular in direction, appear to range from north to so ith.
They may perhaps be a continuation from the Cotes N'oires,
or Black Hills, which are situated farther to the north, and
are said to contain the sources of the Shian, the Little Mis-
souri, and some branches of the Yellowstone. Lewis and
Clark's Hist. Vol. I. p. 183. The strata which compose
these hills are not inclined, and their appearance indicates
recent marine origin. The only rock wliich I have met
with here is sandstone, of a kind not unlike that wliich usu-
ally accompanies coal. This inconsiderable tract being
passed, the surface again sul)sides to a plain ; but is more
barren and gravelly than before. Instead of tlie tine and
somewhat fertile sand which prevails to the east of the above
mentioned ridge, the surface is here almost entirely made
up of small pebbles and gravel. The soil is of course bar-
ren.

From this plain the Rocky Mountains are first seen at a
distance, in some states of the atmosphere, exceeding one
hundred miles. They first discover themselves, not by
emerging from below the sensible horizon, but become dis-
tinguishable from the clouds and the sky above it. Their
snowy and shining summits, when first seen, were mistaken
for clouds by almost every individual of our party. On ap-
proaching such considerable elevations, it is not uncommon
to look for great changes in the structure and materials of
the surface. But here none such are seen until you arrive
at the very foot of the mountain. Where the Platte first en-
ters the plains, the horizontal strata of sandstone exten;! to
within five miles of the commencement of the high granitic
ridge which forms the first barrier of the Rocky Mountains.
On the Cannon-ball River, eight miles above its confluence
with the Platte, and less than one-thir d of that distance from
the granitic ridge just mentioned, are several ranges of small
hills ruiuiing parallel to the general direction of the moun-
tain, and extending to the northward for a considerable dis-

FLCETZ TRAP FoaMATIOXsi. 193

tancc. Where these have been cut through by tlie bed of
the nver, they arc found to consist of a soft horizontal sand-
stone abounding in mica.

In a soinewhat elevated district, a little to the south of the
immediate valley of the Platte, similar ridges occur, at a
greater distance from the primitive mountains.

After passing numerous small and rounilcd liills, wliose
surface is chiefly composed of gravel, sometimes intermixed
with rolled masses ol" granite and other similar rocks, there
is seen a range of naked perpendicular and lofty rocks, rising
from the naked plain at the veiy foot of the mountain, and
presenting to the eye the forms of walls, columns, pyramids,
^•c. These, when minutely examined, appear to be of
the same sand rock found so al)undantly in the plains ditVer-
ing from it iiowevcr in the particular of that great inclina-
tion which its strata in this instance |)ossess. 'I'hese ranges
appear to be formed by the margin of the strata of sandstone
which occupy the plain; this maigin, by the violent opera-
tion of some unknown cause, having been broken oH' from
the body of the stratum and thrown into the perjiendicular
position in which it is now seen. Climl)ing to the summits
of these ridges, and crossing their stratifications in a direc-
tion towards the primitive. api)carances occur similar to what
are seen in the same rocks remaining in their original posi-
tion, wlien circumstances enable us to push our iiK|uirics at
any consi(leral)le distance below the surface. Having cross-
ed the upturned margin of the whole secondary formation
which occupies the plains, and arriving at the primitive, an
unexperienced geologist will perhaps be suiprised to find
these rocks, so evidently ol' recent maiine oiigin, reposing
inmiediately against the granite. Previously formed opi-
nions may have induced him to expect appearances which he
will not here find. He will scare li in vain for any traces of
those rocks wiiicli occupy so ron-picuous a place in the
works of systematic geologists. (Ifnominated rocks of transi-
tion. He may also be surprised at the total absence of
those primitive strata which the theory of universal forma-

196 REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

tions may have taught him to look for above the granite. He
will find recent marine sandstone abounding in organised
remains, with its stratifications nearly perpendicular, and in
immediate contact with the side of a granitic mountain of
vast magnitude tind elevation, and of a character most ma-
nifestly and highly primitive. The inclination of the strata
of this sandstone varies within a shori distance from liori-
zontal to an angle of more than sixty degrees. It is some-
fimes difficult to determine, by the eye alone, which way it
varies from an exact perpendiculai-. 'I'hose laminpe or
strata of it, which are most distant from the primitive occu-
pying the eastern ridges of its first elevations, have the least
inclination, and may with propriety be denominated the up-
permost. At the level of the surface of the great plain they
sink beneath the alluvial, and in the immediate neighbour-
hood of the river Platte tney are no more seen. The up-
permost are of a yellowish grey colour, moderately fine,
compact, and hard, constantly varying however at different
points in colour, as well as most other characters. The
light coloured varieties frequently contain numerous small
round masses of about the size of a musket ball, whicii are
more friable than the rock in which they are imbedded, and
from which they are easily detached, leaving cavities cor-
responding to their own shape and diihensions. They are
commonly of a dark brown colour, and of a coarser sand
than that which enters into the composition of the rock it-
self. Mr. Say informed me that their appearance was not
unlike that of certain organic remains of the Genus Ovulite.
Where these are found, I could never discovei- any of those
numerous animal relicts which are so common in many of
the secondary rocks of this district.

Crossing the edge of these strata of sandstone, the cha-
racter of the rock is found to change, on coming ncai-cr to
the primitive. The rock becomes more coarse and frial)le,
its colour inclining more to several shades of red and brown.
This variety contains numerous masses of iron ore. and does
not appear to abound in the remains or impressions of orga-

FliCETZ TRAP FORMATIONS, 197

nised beings. It is also less distincth stratified than the va-
riety before mentioned, and contains many beds ot purjdins;-
stone (le |)Oudingue of Brochant.) Tliese beds are some-
times of great extent, but certainly cannot be considered as
constitiitin^j; a stratum distinct from the sandrock. Tiiis
tract of inclined sandstone, which skirts the eastern boundary
of the Rocky Mountains, and which we have considered as
constituting a part of that immense formation of secondary
which occupies the valley of the Mississippi, abounds in sce-
n<'ryof a grand and interesting character. The great incli-
nation of the strata we have before noticed. That side of
the ridges which is nearest the primitive, appears as if bro-
ken off from a part of the stratum l)eyond, and is usually an
altrupt perpendicular precipice, sometimes overhanging and
sheltering a considerable extent of surface. 'I'lie uppei- part
of the stratum, or that surface which is most distant from the
primitive, is usually smooth and hard, and both sides arc
alike destitute of soil and verdure. Elevations of tiiis sort
are met with varying from twenty to several thousand feet
in tliickness. Nor are they by any means uniform in height.
Some ol'then\ rise probably tliree or four hundred feet, and
considering their singular character, would be high, were
they not subjected to an immediate and disadvantageous
comparison with the towering Andes at whose feet they are
placed. Their summits, which in some instances are regu-
lar and hoiizontal. are crowned with a scanty growth of ce-
dars and pines. Where the cement, and most oltiie ma-
terials which constitute the sandstone, arc silicious. the rock
evinces a tendency to separate in fragments of a rhombic
form : and in this instance the elevated edge often presents
a notched or serrated surface. Those sandstones which con-
sist of silex with the least intermixture of foreign ingredients
are the most duial)le. jRut in the region which we are now
consi.lerinir, tlie variations in tlw composition, character, and
cement of the sandrock, are innumerable. Clay and oxide

VOL. II. D S

198 REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

of iron abound principally in those varieties nearest the gra-
nite, which are usually of a reddish colour. When these en-
ter into the composition of the rock in certain proportions,
they seem to disqualify it for withstanding the attacks of the
various agents, whose effect is to hasten dissolution and de-
cay. Highly elevated rocks of this descri|)tion may well be
supposed in a state of rapid and perceptible change. The
sharp angles and asperities of surface which they may have
originally presented, are soon worn away. The matter
wliich is constantly removed, by the agency of water, from
their sides and summits, is deposited at their feet ; their ele-
vation gradually diminishes, and even the inclination of their
strata becomes obscure, or is rendered wholly undiscover-
able. A soil is at length formed over the whole surface,
which gives support to a covering of vegetables. This is
probably the process by which have been formed the nume-
rous conic hills and mounds, that are now seen interspersed
among the highly inclined naked rocks of which I have been
speaking. These liills, often clothed with considerable
verdure to their very summits, add greatly to the beauty of
the surrounding scenery. The contrast of colours which is
here seen, often produces the most brilliant and grateful ef-
fects. The deep green of the small procumbent cedars and
junipers, with the less intense colours of various kinds of
deciduous foliage, acquire new beauty by being placed as a
margin to the glowing red and yellow which is seen on the
surface of many of the rocks. In the narrow but verdant
valleys, small pyramids and columns of the purest wiiite arc
met with, standing solitary and detached from any surround-
ing rocks.

The district of country of which we have now been speak-
ing may, without impropriety, be denominated the valley of
the Platte, as the waters which flow from it are dischaiged
into that river.

Near the summit of the small ridge which, running east
from the Rocky Mountains, divides the waters of the Platte

FLCKTZ TRAl' FOUMATIONS. 199

from those of tlie Arkansaw, the sandstone district presents
the following; appcaianccs, in naversini; it from tlie east to-
ward the primitive :

1. Conjpact, hard, yellowish grey sandstone, containing
organised remains, but not in great ahiinchmce. This rock
is inclined to the west, at an angle of about twenty degrees.
It forms an inconsiderable, but continuous elevation, stretch-
ing along the loot of the mountains, ficm nortli to south, its
western side exhibiting a perpendicular piecipice.

^. In the valley between the last meniioned and the suc-
ceeding ridge, are several detached columns, of great height
and thickness, standing perpendicular, and Ining irregularly
dispersed through the narrrow but woodless valley. These
masses are usually of a deep red colour. 'I'hey consist of
sandstone of various degrees of fineness, the particles of
which are held together by a cement of clay and oxide of
iron. 'I'hey have an irregular surliicc, which evidently owes
its present form to the action of water ; and their summits
are usually sharp. Several of them, though of great height
and covering a considerable extent of surface, are so naked
and steep on all sides, as to bid defiance to all attempts at
climl)ing them.

At a short distance beyond these, is the commencenjent
of the high primitive mountain. The beginning; of the as-
cent upon this is covered by a thick bed of white pudding-
stone, rising upon the side of the granite to an elevation
of about two hundred feet aI)ove the little plain just men-
tioned. This rock, though conmionly very coarse, contains
small beds and stripes of the fineness of ordinary sandstone,
in which there occur several small oval masses of yellowish
and blueish white hornstone. On the surface ol these
masses, are the relicta of marine animals, mostly bivalves, in
beautiful |)reservation. This rock also abounds in ironstone.
From its eastern declivity about two hundred yards from the
point at which the granite emerges, there issues a consider-
able spring of water, highly impregnated with muriate of

SOO REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

soda. The granite which here rises from beneath the secon-
dary strata, is coarse, consisting of a large proportion of reddish
brown feldspar in imperfect crystalline masses. The mica
is black, and in small proportion. The granite is not com-
pact, and decays rapidly. Beinej separated probably by the
frost, it crumbles into small fragments, which roll down from
its steep declivities and accumulate in great quantities in the
small hollows and in the beds of streams. This rock rises
abruptly to a vast elevation, and probably extends far to the
west.

These appearances are found on the southernmost of
those branches of the Platte which descend from the moun-
tains before their junction with that river. Proceeding still
southward, the sandstone ridges nearly disappear in the ele-
vated tract which divides the waters of the Platte from those
of the Arkansaw. The smooth and grassy plain is here ter-
minated by brown and naked piles of granite, which rise
almost perpendicularly into the regions of perpetual frost.

The secondary district which lies beyond this ridge, has a
surface slightly inclined towards the north east, discharging
in a contrary direction several small streams into the Ar-
kansaw. The most striking feature of this region is consti-
tuted by certain moderately elevated tabular hills, with [)er-
pendicular sides and level summits, w!t ch are scattered irre-
gularly about the country, addina; greatly to its beauty. In as-
cending these hills, their sides are almost invariai*ly found to
be of coarse friable sandrock and loosely cemented, conglo-
merate. Above these, and forminsr the top of the hill, is usu-
ally a stratum of fine compact sandstone. It is also obvious,
on the slightest examination, that in the sides of those hills
which stand near each other, there are, at equal heia;hts on
each, corresponding stripes and beds similar in colour and
other particulars. These appearances are so constant as to
leave little doubt that the hills in question are the remains
of a formation of coarse sandstone which may formerly have
covered a great extent of the plain country iKirdering on the
mountains. From the nature of the cement, the fineness

FLffiTZ TRAP FOUMATIONS. 801

of llie sand, or from otiier causes, insulated poi lions of tlie
upper part of this fortnaiion have resisted the action of the
water, and of the various aj>;cnts which have broken down
and removed the adjacent parts. 1 hese portions have pro-
tected and preserved entire 'he coUimns of louse sandstone
on which tliev rested. One of these singular liills. called the
Castle Hock, of which Mr. Seymour has preserved a sketch,
when seen from a little distance, presents tlie appearance of
columns, porticos, arches, ^c, having a most striking re-
semhlance to an architectuial ruin.

One of the fust con<ideral)le trihutaries which the Arkan-
saw receives from the north, after it enters the plains, is
called the Boiling-spring Fork. It has received this name
hom a large and uncommonly beautiful spring of water, si-
tuated upon it immediately at the foot of tlie mountain.
'I'his spring is but a few rods from the commencement
of the granite, wliich there rises into what is called by Pike
the " highest peak," and issues from a chasm in a stratum
of fine compact sandstone of a deep red colour, which re-
poses against the granite at an angle of near forty degrees.
A short distance to the right, this sandstone is succeeded bv
an extensive bed of silicious breccia resting against the gra-
nite in a similar manner. This agii;regatc consists of coarse
angular fragments of hornstone, jasper, and other silicious
minerals, firmly cemented. It is also of a red colour, and
abounds in iron.

The spring above mentioned tlirows out a consideral)le
quantity of water, perhaps fifty gallons per minute, and also
about an equal volume of an aeriform fluid. The water is
lin)pid and colourless, and when freed by Ijoilifig from t!ic
carbonic acid whicli it contains, is entirely without taste.
Immediately on comins: in contact with tlie aii'. it is covered
with a pellicle of carbonate of lime, which substance has
been so copiously deposited as to form a capacio\is bason
overhanging a considnrable stream of water, and luoks
as if chiselled from the whitest marble. The risinij ol' thr

802 REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

air throii2;h the water of this 'bason produces a constant and
violent agitation similar to boiling.

When fresh horn the spring, the water has the taste and
appearance of tlie common soda water, and is, I believe, as
higl'.lv impiegnated with carbonic acid as it could be by the
most powerful artiiicial means. It is extremely agreeable
to the taste, and when drunk in the quantity of several pints,
is followed by no sensible effects exce|)t a very considerable
degree of exhilaration, which is immediate.

The general direction of the first ridge of the Rocky
Mountains, from beyond the Platte to the Peak, is from
noith to south. A few miles south of the peak, this ridge
abruptly terminates, sending out, in a south eastern direction
a long range of low secondary hills. Crossing these in a
south west direction, we found, that though broken and ele-
vated, they consist almost entirely of horizontal sandstone.
This rock is of a yellowish white or light grey colour, of an
uncommonly slaty structure, and evidently contains a large
proportion of clay. Organised remains are to be seen in it,
but these are not numerous or conspicuous. It is traversed
by narrow upright veins of carbonate of lime, in crystals. It
contains horizontal beds of bituminous shale ; and selenite is
sparingly scattered over the surface. This formation of ar-
gillaceous sandstone extends far to the south and south
west ; it also occupies the large amphitheatre or bay which
is formed between the main range of the mountains and the
projecting spire which contains the high peak. At the ex-
tremity of this bay, the sandstone is red and highly inclined,
similar to that on the Boiling-spring Fork ; but this appears
to dip under the argillaceous sandstone above mentioned.
At the place where the red sandstone ridge is divided by the
bed of the Aikansaw, are several springs highly impreg-
nated Willi nuniate of soda, sulphate of magnesia, and pro-
bably several other soluble salts. They also emit carl)onic
acid and sulphuretted hydrogen gases. The water of these
springs, except one, is nauseous to the taste, and their dis-

FLCETZ TRAP FORMATIONS, 203

agreeable smell is perceptible at some (listance. They are
not like most of the saline springs frequented by herbivorous
animals. They are six or seven in number, antl all rise
within a few yards of each otiier. The mineral substances
which they hold in solution are probably nearly the same in
eacli ; but the water of one of them is highly charged with
fixed air, and for this reason is more agreeable to the taste.
Their temperature appears to be that of the earth at a small
distance below the surface. In the middle of July, the me-
dium temperature of these springs, as well as of tiic great
one at the foot of the peak aI)ovementioned. appeared by se-
veral trials, to be al)out sixfv-two degrees of Fahr. In the
air the thermometer ranged from fifty to one hundred and
four degrees. These springs have been called Bell's Springs,
in compliment to captain John R. Bell, who visited them on
the 18th of July, 18^0. The sandrock from which they is-
sue is rapidly succeeded by one still more fine and hard, and
of a browner colour, alternating with each other, and rest-
ing against the perpendicular gneiss rock which there forms
the commencement of the primitive, and beyond which it
seems almost itnpossible to penetrate. It appears, however.
frf)m the Journal of that enterprisins; travellei, the late Ge-
neral Pike, that he entered the mountains at this place. The
Arkansaw rushes with great violence of current from a nar-
vow gap in this gneiss rock, and is then for a considerable
distance confined to a narrow and deep valley bounded on
both sides by precipitous walls of sandstone rising from one
hundred to one hundred and fifty fept to the level of the
great plain. These rocky banks are of the argillaceous sand-
stone before mentioned, and appear to extend si\ty or se-
venty miles from the mountain. Where the exploring; par-
ty forded the Arkansaw, about one hundred miles from the
mountain, the country is not rocky, l)ut rises very gradually
from the river, till at the distance of six qr eiiiht miles it is
broken by a few inconsiderable gravelly hills. A little dis-
tance from the considerable streams, it varies but little from

804 REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

the country about the river Platte, which is an arid and ste-
rile jjlain of sand and 2;raveL

From the Arkansaw to the sources of its lon.9;est tributary,
the Canadian, is a distance of al)out one hundred and tifty
miles in a direction nearly south. The district between th'se
two rivers is nearly plain, iiut the small streaiTis whicli tia-
verse it are sunk in deep and narrow valleys terminated by
precipices of sandstone similar to the valley of the Aikan-
saw. In tlie sides of these deep canals the rocks are so ex-
posed as to afford convenient op|)or'lunities for examining
a shor't distance into the internal structure of the plain. Her'e
as in the other districts which we have mentioned, the low-
est and almost the only rock found in the plains is sandstone,
This we shall consider as of two varieties, tlroirgh we do not
doubt tiiat those who are fond of system and of calling; liy
different names things which are essentially the sajne, would
be at no loss to discover here every variety of sandstone
hitherto dcsciil)ed, and perhaps many more.

1. Red sandstone. 'F'his rock which is the lowest of the
horizontal or secondary rocks here met with, is very abun-
dant in all that part of the plain immediately sulyacent to
the Rocky Mountains which we have had the opportunity to
examine. A similar rock is met with ir) the eastern part of
the State of New York, and is there, as in the instance of
which we are speaking, placed near the borders of this
great secondary forrrration. I have never met with it in the
eastern part of the Mississippi valley. It occupies the coun-
try about the Canadian River, occurrina; on both sides most
of the way from its sources to its confluence with the Ar-
kansaw. It appears at intervals along the feet of the Rocky
Mountains, rejiosing against the primitive in a highly inclined
position. It vaiies in colour from vermilion red to dark
brown, and sometimes to various shadc^s of yellow and <i:rey.
Its cement is however almost invariably ferrirciinou'j. and the
predominance of red in tlie colourinc; cer-tainly entitles it to
the disttnctive appellauon of red sandstone. The lowest

FLQiTZ TKAI' FORMATIONS. 205

part of the stratum has ficquciilly least colour, and is also
most compact and hard. Tiiis is not liowevcr invariably
the case : for aI)out tlic Platte, tliat part of it which lies im-
mediately upon the granite is white, and contains numerous
and extensive beds of coarse puddingstone. Al)out the Cana-
dian, and in other places wlierc tiiis rock still lies in its original
horizontal position, the up|)er part of the stratum is soft, and
pretty uniformly of a red or yellowish brown colour. It is
disposed in immense horizontal strata or lamina;, which when
broken, transversely exhil)it some tendency to separate into
fragments of a cubic or rhombic form. In tlie face of the
high precipices, are often seen broad stripes or belts of a
lighter colour, conspicuously marked with reticular yellow-
isli veins, wliich arc of a substance similar to hornstone.
The cross fracture of the rock of course varies with the linc-
ness of the particles of sand of which it is composed. It is
often even, and sometimes approaching to splintery. When
divided in a direction parallel to tlie stratilications, it fre-
quently exhibits small scales of mica ; but these arc not nu-
merous. Specimens from many parts of this stratum are
entirely similar to that which is quariicd in New Jersey,
and used in great quantities in the cities of New York, Al-
bany, ^'c. for building. That (jf the Rocky Mountains usually
contains less mica and in smaller scales ; but in other re-
spects is similar. The cement of this rock is sometimes
argillaceous; but I iK'Iicvc this is iiy no means universal.
WJiethcr this sandstone is in all respects similar to the '' Old
Red Sandstone" of Werner,* which makes so conspicuous a
figure in the systems of certain geologists, we are not able
to say. It however certainlv occupies a place similar to the
one which has Ijcen assigned to that rock. It is the lowest
of the flcetz or horizontally stratified rocks, and it is perhaps
not improbable that it may extend under a great part of the

• This red sanilstoiie is first found on the wafers of the lakes on the strait
between Lake Uircm and Lake Superior, anil form- the fall tiillcd the Sautdc
St. Marie BoIdw that [.oint of the tide water, it is- gciieially limestone.
VOL. II. E 2

206 REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

formation of secondary which we are now consideringc. We
have already mentioned that in an horizontal position it co-
vers a very extensive tract to tlie south west of tlie Arkan-
saw, that it skirts the eastern side of tiie Kocky Mountains,
rising at a great angle from beneath the superimposed strata.
It also occurs in the Catskill Mountains, and in the Suit Dis-
trict in the western part of the State of New York, having a
similar relation to the secondary rocks in that quarter. The
old red sandstone of Werner has hy some been referred to
the rocks of transition, and considered as tlie most recent
member of that class ; others have considcM-ed it as the old-
est of the secondary. But it seems to have happened here,
as in other parts of this yet imperfect science, that distinc-
tions have been made, for which there is really no founda-
tion in nature. The red sandrock now under consideration
appears at one place with every character requisite to place
it among the rocks of transition, at another it is manifestly
secondary ; yet its continuity may be traced through minute
shades of gradation, or by a sudden transition from one of
these points to the other.

Immediately above the red sandstone, when any rock rests
upon it, I have commonly found a greyish or yellowish white
sandstone which may perhaps be with some propriety dis-
tinguished as the second variety. It commonly contains a
greater or less proportion of clay in the cement, and has a
somewhat slaty structure. Hence it may properly be call-
ed argillaceous sandstone, though in some respects it may
differ from the rock known to many by that name.

2. Argillaceous sandstone. This variety being uppermost
in actual position, is perhaps more frequently seen on the
surface than the other; while at the same time it is |)robal>ly
less al)undant. The line of separation betwixt the two
is often manifest and well defined, and in other instances
they pass by imperceptible gradations into each other The
upper or argillaceous sandstone is usually more comp:ict
and more homogeneous in its composition than the red. It
is also of a close texture and a fine grain, embracing few

FLCETZ TRAP FORMATIONS. 507

foreign substances, and I believe in some rare instances,
passing; into a coarse or coinilonieratc^ pu(l(liny;stonc. It
sonietiniis breaks into large rhombic masses (thoii2;b in this
case it must be acknowledged that it contains little or no
clay.) and these, on account of a more compact texture,
retain tlicir Ibrm lonticr than similar juasses of the other.
The precipicis t'ormed l)y Ijotii are rrecpientlv lolly and per-
pendicular, but the projections and angles of the red are
more worn and rounded than those of the variety now under
consideration. The narrow deliles and ravines which tlie
streams of water have excavated, are less tortuous as well
as narrower, when made entirely in this rock, than in other
instances. Tlic springs of water which it affords are some-
times saline, but more comnuiidy free liom mineral impreg-
naiions than sucli as are found issuing front th(> otiier va-
riety, it sometimes consists of glittering cryslahine parti-
cles, but. does not in tiiis case appear to i)e a chemical de-
posit. In line, it appears under an almost endless variety
of characters, vvhicii it would be in vain to attempt to enu-
merate. Though not in%arial)ly distinguished by the pre-
sence of an argillaceous inuiredient. yet this is often tlie case,
and it is constantly found accompanying the beds of soft
clay slate or bituminous shale, whenever these occur. Whe-
ther coal accompanies these beds in the neii^hbourhood of
the Hocky Mountains, as it usually does in other |)laces. we
are unai)Ie to say. It is however certain that tliey contain
similar impressions of vegetables, and in other respects close-
ly reseml)le the bituminous shale of many coal districts.
Aliout the sources of the Canadian, this shale occurs in very
narrow horizontal lieds. and contains charred veiretable mat-
ter which could not readily be distinguished from connnon
charcoal.

ll'this formation of sandstone, ronsi-^ling of the two va-
rieties just mentioned, ever extended across the valley of (he
Mississippi to thf* Alh-ghany Mountains, as some ini!>;ht be
disposed to imagine, I cannot pretend to determine what was

508 REMAliKS ON SANDSTONE AND

the position it occupied relative to the immense masses ot
flcetz limestone and other secondary rocks which are now
found in that valley.

But as the red variety is still extensively disseminated,
and usually accompanied by those valuable substances, salt
and plaister, (sulphate of lime) it may not be amiss to trace,
as far as our examinations have enabled us to do it, the out-
line of the region it occupies.

As we have before mentioned, it is found in the vicinity of
the river Platte, in a highly inclined position, coverins; a nar-
row margin, immediately at the foot of tlie Rocky Mountains.
From the account of Lewis and Clarke, we are disposed to
believe that it exists under similar circumstances near the
falls of the Missouri. On the Canadian, it is constantly met
with from the sources of that river, which are on the bor-
ders of New Mexico in west longitude about 106 degrees,
nearly to its confluence with the Arkansaw, in 97 degrees.
The waters of the Canadian, from flowing over the sandstone
in question, acquire an intense red colour, and are so im-
pregnated with muriate of soda and other soluI>le salts, as to
be unfit for the uses to which common water is applied.
This, it is well known, is also the case with the waters of
the three small rivers tributary to the Arkansaw, above the
Canadian, on the same side also with the waters of Red
River. Hence the conclusion appears to be justified, that
this rock extends from near the Arkansaw on the north to
a point beyond Red River on the south, and from near the
mouth of the Canadian an unknown distance to the west be-
yond the remotest sources of that river. It is not unlikely
that it exists about the sources and upper branches of the
Rio Colorado of California, though we must acknowledge
that the name of that river is the only foundation we are
acquainted with for sucli an opinion.

Near the mountains at the head of the Platte, and for a
great distance to the south and east of the higli peak, the red
sandrock is covered by the stratum of argillaceous sand-
stone already mentioned. It has, however, in many in-

FI.CKTZ TRAP FOUMATIONS. 209

Stances, been laid hare by the action of water, which has
worn away the superincumbent stratum, as is the case on
tlic Vermihon llivcr, a Ijrancii ol' the I'latte wiiich rises in
the plains at a considerable distance to the east from the
peak. This argillaceous or grey sandstone is the uj)per-
most of those horizontally stratilied rocks which are seen in
this region, jwssessing within tiiemselvcs convincing evidence
of their having been formed by deposition from the waters
of the ocean.

Another family of rocks of recent, but doubtful, origin,
which are usually found resting on the sandstone last men-
tior)ed, remains to be considered. These are rocks of ba-
saltic or tiappean conformation, by some geologists deno-
minated su|)erincumbent rocks, and by many supposed to
Ixj of volcanic origin.

They present a striking contrast by their dark colour, and
the vastness and irregularity of their masses, to the smooth,
light, and fissile sandstone on which they rest. In their tex-
ture and external conformation they often make a nearer
approach to the piimitive rocks than to those denominated
secondary among which they occur. Their appearance and
position are such as to lead almost involuntarily those least
attached <o visionary theories into speculations concerning
their oiigin. Sometimes they are observed compact and ap-
parently homogenous in their composition, presenting a crys-
talline rather than a stratiform appearance, and in many parti-
culars of structure, form, hardness, colour, ^c. seeming close-
lyalliedtothe rocks of primitive formation. In other instances,
black and scmivitrilied substances are seen scattered al)out
the plains, or heaped in conic niasses, but never ap|)roacliing
in character the rocks on which they rest. Most of the rocks
of this sort which were observed, arc found in the country
about the sources of the Canadian FJiver. Amons; them may
be distimjuished two kinds referable to two divisions of the
class called by Werner superincumbent rocks, viz. green-
stone and amygdaloid.

i. Greenstone. nninstoin. JFrrn. Roche ami)hibo-

;310 REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

lique, Haiiij. It appears, in tlie limited district whic'i we
examined, under almost every variety of form and character
ever noticed by o;eoloij;ists. Sometimes it is neatly free
from any intermixture of hornblende, and is of a tine dark
green colour, nearly resembling some varieties of serpen-
tine.

Its minute structure Is often manifestly crystalline ; in
which case its fracture is granular. In other instances its
particles are not |)erteptibly crystalline, and the fractuie is
earthy. Sometimes its colour is a dull grey, giadueiting into
brown and black of vaiious shades and intensities. Tiiis
rock forms numerous conic hills of considerable elevation,
which are irregular in height, and scattered without order in
various parts of the plain. These hills are usually of a re-
gular and beautiful form. The great plain in vvhich they
stand is elevated, and destitute of tintber or water, but oina-
merjted with a thick and verdant carpet of grasses and other
heri)acious plants. The hills, though steep and high, are
sn)ooth and green to the summit, their surface being nearly
unl)roken by rocks, and covered with thick turf. The whole
forms a scene of singular beauty. During our journey across
that district of country which is l)ased upon the rocks now
under consideration, we had constant occasion to admire the
exuberance and freshness of vegetation. The plains of the
Platte and Arkansaw we had seen brown and desolate as if
recently ravaged l)y Hre, yet here we passed elevated tracts
having a scanty soil, and scarcely affording water for our ne-
cessities, yet the vegetation possessed the freshness of spring
in the most fertile regions.

The conic hills above mentioned are not the only nor in-
deed the most common form under wliich the greenstone
appears. It sometimes forms low ridges extending a con-
siderable distance, and slopiirg gradually on l)oth sides into
the level of the plain. In the narrow channels which the
strf-atTis of water have sunk in it may be seen perpendicidar
precipices of considerable elevation : but the valleys are usu-
ally much obstructed by large broken masses of the rock

FLCETZ TRAP FORMATIONS. 2(1

which sometimes exhil)it a prismatic form. It fliUs readily
into large angular fragments, hut srems strongly to resist
that progress of disintegration which il must undergo heforc
it can be removed by the water. The face of the perpendi-
cular piecipices which it forms is often marked by large
parallel vertical seaiiis. Following the water courses, which
are sunk a considerable distance l)flu\v ilie smface. the line
of separation from the" sandstone on which the greenstone
rests at length becomes visil)Ie. The saiidrock in these places
has its strata nearly or quite horizontal, and in all other cha-
racters is similar to what we have formerly mentioned.

2. Amygdaloid. Kirxcan. ManJelstein, IVerner. Roche
amygdaliiide. nrochnttt.

\\c ajjply tliis name to a porous or vesicular rock of a very
daik grey, greenish, or l)lack colour, usually accompanying
the greenstone, and sometimes in connection with the sand-
stone. In its ultimate composition it resembles greenstone,
but I have never seen in it such large fragments of feldspar
and scales of mica as are observed in that rock. The cavi-
ties which occur in every part of the substance of this rock
are of various sizes, some of them havina; the appearance of
bubl)les which had been formed in a semifluid mass and af-
terwards lengthened and variously distorted by the motions
of the contiguous matter. Near the surface they contain a
soft while or yellowish cari)onate of lime nearly fdling tlic
cavity and giving to the recent surface a variegated or spot-
ted appearance. In surfaces which have for some time been
exposed to the air. this soft substance has been removed,
and tlie little cavities are found empty.

Amygdaloid does not appear to occupy any great extent
of the country near the Hoeky Mountains. I ha\e not met
with it imbedded in, or surmounted by. any other rock. It
forms conic hills like the greenstone liefore mentioned, and
these sometimes occur ir) deep waterworn valleys l)outi(led
on l)oth sides by precipices of fjandrock rising much above
the elevation of the amvgdaloid. It is likewise seen In the
high plains, sometimes in narrow and crooked ridges, as if

21S REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

following the direction of what were formerly the beds of
small brooks. This appearance was in one instance so strik-
ing, that several of the party who saw it were induced to be-
lieve that the materials whicli constituted the ridge had for-
merlv been ejected in a fluid state from beneath the surface.
We had not an opportunity to examine the surrounding coun-
try with sufficient minuteness to enable us to form a conjec-
ture concerning the accuracy of this opinion. Some high
and sharp conic hills were visible to the westward, but at a
great distance. Two of this kind, which stand near each
other and appear to be detached from the primitive moun-
tain, are called the Spanish Peaks, and at the end of July,
snow was still to be seen on them.

Where either of the two rocks last mentioned occur, it is
not uncommon to meet with detached masses of a substance
greatly lesembling the pumice stone, which is an article of
commerce, and entirely similar to that which is often seen
floating down the Missouri. It is usually of a faint red or
dirty yellow colour, but sometimes brown or neaily black.
It feels less harsh than common pumice stone, and is com-
posed almost wholly of clay.

With regard to the alluvial formations of the portion of
country of which we have been speaking, little need be said.
The trap rocks are often covered with a scanty daik co-
loured soil, free from pebbles or waterworn masses, and of
consideralile fertility.

The sandstone districts are often covered to a great depth
with rounded fragments and particles of rocks similar to
those of the primitive mountains. The fineness of this soil
bears a pretty constant proportion to tlie distance from the
mountain at which it is examined. On the lower part of the
Platte scarce a stone or a pebble is to be seen. At a dis-
tance of two hundred miles from the mountain the surface
is often like a gravelled walk or a street paved with pebl)les,
and near the foot of the mountain it is covered witli large
boulders. The soil is almost invariably arid and barren.
The total absence of any formation of limestone in the dis-

FLCETZ TRAP FORMATIONS. S18

trict of country under consideration, will not fail to be re-
marked, but 1 l)clicve is also common to several other simi-
lar districts. A traveller to the upper part of the Missouri
mentions '• calcarious and pctrosihcious hills" as existing in
the coal foimations on that river. But in ascending; the I'laUc
from its confluence witli the AJissouii, not a fragment of
limestone or petrosilex is to be seen. Small veins of car-
bonate of lime, crystallised in the usual form, are found in
the argillaceous sandstone of tiie Arkansaw. / Iso the sul-
phate in small quantities. Gypsum is very abundant on the
Canadian River at the distance of tiiree or four hundred miles
from its sources. It is disseminated in veins and in thick
horizontal beds in red sandstone. Tiie extent and thickness
o/ these horizontal beds are perhaps sucli as would justify
the appellation of stratum, but as it is not met with in
great quantities, except in connection with this sandstone,
with which it often alternates, it may with propriety be con-
sidered as a subordinate rock.

Rock salt. It has been often and confidently asserted, that
this substance exists in some part of Upper Louisiana in the
form of an extensive stratum.

I have met with it among the natives in masses of twenty
or thirty pounds weight. These, of which I have seen oidy
two, were about six inches in thickness and eighteen or
twenty in diameter. They were in the possession of an
Ankara who lives among the Paunees of the Loup Fork, and
when we saw him, was on his return from an excursion to
the Arkansaw. The inteiior of these masses, when broken,
presented a crystalline structure, being made up of incom-
plete cul)ic cry-itals variously grouped together. On one of
the surfaces of the mass, which had prol)abIy been the one
in contact with the groimd or rock on which the salt had
rested, a considerable mixture of red sand was discoverable.
These masses, it is highly probable, had been produced l)y
the evaporation, during the dry season, of the waters of some
small lake. The Indians who wander near the moutitains

VOL. n. — F 2

214< REMARKS ON SANDSTONE AND

had considerable quantities of salt, which was in the form of
large detached crystals, and seemed to have been formed in
the same manner as the other. They said it cajiie from
the south west, and as we understood thein, from some of the
upper branches of Red River.

The whole country near the mountains abounds in licks,
brine springs, and saline efflorescences ; but it is in the
neighbourhood of the red sandrock that salt is met with in
the greatest abundance and purity.

The immediate valley of the Canadian River, in the upper
part of its course, varies in width from a few rods to three
or four miles, but is almost invariably bounded by preci-
pices of red sandrock, forming what are called the river
bluffs. On the valley between, these incrustations of nearly
pure salt are often found covering a considerable extent of
surface, in the manner of a thin ice, and causing it to appear
when seen from a distance, as if covered with snow.

Most of the remarkable formations of rock salt hitherto
known in various parts of the world are contained in what is
denominated the lowest red sandstone which appears to cor-
respond in character, position, ^'C. with the sandrock above
mentioned. In this connection it is found in Cheshire, at
Northwich and Droitwich in Kngland, at the feet of the Car-
pathian Mountains in Poland, and in Peru. Accident, or fur-
ther examination, it is probable, may hereafter bring to light
those extensive beds of this substance which there is every
reason to believe exist in the neighbourhood of the Rocky
Mountains.

The briny character of tliose two great streams, the Ar-
kansaw and Red River, flowing from this district of country,
scarcely permits us to call in question the existence of such
repositories; and the greatness of tlie quantity of salt whicli
those rivers have for ages been washing away, would lead
us to conclude that its beds must be of great extent. Ana-
logy would teach us to look for them in depressed situations
and in bason-shaped concavities, whose contents had not yet
been worn down and removed by currents of water.

FLCETZ TRAP FORMATIONS. 215

Other rocks of secondary formation are found in the great
valley of tlie Mississippi, but have not been observed in tiiat
portion of it of which we have been speaking. These will
be noticed at another time.

No. X.

Some Observations on the Anatomy and Phffsiology of the
Alligator of North America. Lacerta Alligator, Gmel.
Crocodilus Lucius, Cuvier. Communicated to the Ameri-
can Philosophical Society by N. M. Ilentz, Member of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. — Read 2ist
July, I8g0.

I WAS first induced to write the remarks which 1 have
made on the anatomy of this animal, from observir g the
singular structure of the orga?is of circulation, presented on
dissection ; which 1 believe have hitherto been inaccinately
described. I frequently repeated my dissections, and always
found the same organisation of those parts, and have con-
cluded to lay my observations before the Society.

It is not my intention to give the whole anatomy of the
animal ; such an attempt would be not only useless but al-
together out of my power, under present circumstances ;
and its osteology has already been ably described byM. Cu-
vier in the .Sfinales du Museum. It is highly pi'obabie. Iiow-
ever, that in Europe the examination of the viscera has
been confined to very young subjects.

M. Correa de Serra had the goodness to inform me
that a traveller in the West Indies, Descourtils, had written
a dissertation upon the anatomy of tliis animal. M. Cu-

ON THE ALLIGATOR 01- XOUTH AMERICA. 217

vier, in the tenth voUime of the Jhinales du Museum men-
tions his name, and says that he Iiad dissected thirty or forty
alhgators. The work of this author 1 have not been able to
procnre ; and 1 tliink it is not to he obtained in tliis country.
Strongly impressed with the remarks of M. Correa de Serra,
I had relinquished the idea of giving |)ublicity to my remarks,
believing that the subject jiad been treated accurately by
able anatomists ; but reflecting that this traveller wrote in
1806 or 1807, — that in the lii'gne Animal published iii
1817, at least ten years after, M. Cuvier descril)es the circu-
lation in the crocodiles, as similar to that in the cheloniens
or turtles, — and that the result of my dissections is far from
coinciding with that description, I concluded that an error
must still exist in regard to that important point of anatomy
and physiology.

I now therefore lay before the American Philosopliical
Society my notes, illustrated by several drawings of the heart,
and have them to judge of the correctness of my observa-
tions,

I thought proper to add the diawing of the alligator,
which I have taken from the recent subject, because in the
new Dictionmiirc (V Histoire Mdurelle I lind that no correct
representation of this animal has yet been made.

The circulation being the most important point, I shall
begin with the description of the heart, and shall fust give
the descri[)tions and opinions of M. Cuvier.

In the cheloniens or turtles, it appears that the heart is
composed of two auricles and one ventricle, sometimes
partly divided into two cells, which always communicate.
It results from this organisation, that the blood relmning
from the different parts of the body, is partly propelled
through the aorta ; and that a portion of the blood biought
to the heart by the pulmonary veins, flows again by the pul-
monary artery into the lungs. M, ('uvier thinks that the
circulation is the same in the Snuriens, which order includes
the genus Lncorta of Liniueus, to which the alligator be-
longs. In his Regnc Animal, M. Cuvier merely expresses

218 ON THE ALLIGATOR

this opinion, l)ut gives no particular description : in his Com-
parative Anatomy, liowever, he describes the structure of the
heart in the crocodile. 1 shall here sul)join a literal transla-
tion of this passage, which must be compared with my ob-
servations: —

" Heart of Reptiles.

" We shall first describe the heart of crocodiles, because
it furnishes us with an example of the most complicated
structure that we have observed in animals of this order, or
indeed in the whole class of reptiles.

" The pericardium adheres, as in the chelome?is, to the pe-
ritonjeum, which covers the convex surface of the liver, and
its point is retained by a very strong tendinous chord to the
free portion of the sack, which is extremely thick, and ex-
teriorly of a fibrous structure. It is fixed on one direction
between the two lobes of this viscus ; on the other, between
the two lungs. The auricles, a little smaller than those of
the cheloniens, have however the same relations, thick pa-
rietes, closed by strong fleshy columns, crossing in different
directions. The ventricle, properly so called, presents an
oval form, and very thick parietes ; its cavity is divided into
three cells, cummunicating with each other by many orifices, but
giving, nevertheless, to the blood which they receive a suffi-
ciently determinate course. One of these cells is inferior, and
on the right : the auricle of the same side pours out the blood
which it receives from the veins of the body by a large open-
ing, bordered witli two valves and placed at the most ad-
vanced part of this cell : upon the left side of tliis same cell,
but still before, we find the opening of the left descending
aorta ; and behind this opening, an orifice which leads to the
smallest of the tliree cells, placed at the middle part of the
base of the heart, and into which opens tlie common trunk of
the pulmonary artery.

"Consequently, the blood which arrives from the right

OP NORTH AMERICA. 3U>

auricle into the cell of the same side, has two courses to
take : — 1. That of the left deseiuling aorta ; and 2. That of
the pulmonary cell which forces it into tlic artery of the satne
name ; it may even take a third route, in filtrating through
numerous canals that traverse the partitions wliich separate the
two preceding. — the left and superior cell. Tiie left fiuricle
propels into tliis the Mood which it has received from the
pulmonary vessels. Its opening is bordered oti the right
side with a meml)ranous valve, to the right of which opens
the common trunk of the right descending aorta, the caro-
tids, ami the axiilaries ; which blood, passing into this trunk,
is distributed {)articuiarly to the head and to tlic extremities;
or it lihrates lluough the intervals of liie fleshy columns of
this coll. and penetrates into the two others. It results from
this, that the carotids and the axillaries carry to the anterior
portion of the body, the iliacs to the posterior portions, and
the median sacral to the tail, the blood which comes almost
entirely immediately from the lungs ; whilst a portion of that
wMiich takes its course for the viscera (l)y tlie left aorta)
comes from the right cell, and from the auricle of tlie same
side ; and consequently has not traversed the lungs in order
to be nmditled by the surrounding elrment. The jiidmo-
nary blood does not inix tiicn so well with that of the body,
as in the clielonicns. Such is the structure of the heart in
tlie crocodile of the Nile and the Caiman," Ciiv. Anat.
Comp. Vol. IV., p. 221.

I shall now give the result of my dissection, which difters
very much from the preceding description : —

The heart, in the alligator, is placed in the centre of the
thorax, exactly under the middle of tlie steriuim ; it occupies
a large space between the two lol»es of tlie liver and the
lungs. The heart itself however is not as large as might he
expected from the mere inspection of it, when contained in
the pericardium: the arterial tul)es. nearly as bulky as the au-
ricles and vmtiieles togethei', till a gieat space in the peri-
cardium, which contains besides a large quantity of lul)rica-

330 QN THE ALLIGATOR

ting fluid. The parts composing this organ are two auricles,
two very distinct ventricles, a set of veins from the body,
the pulmonary artery, two veins of the same name, a branch
for the aorta on the left, anotlier for the right side, the right
subclavian, and the carotid artery. I shall now describe
these parts, beginning with the veins returning from the
body :

The vena cava descendens follows for a time the right
subclavian artery ; it enters the upper part of the [)ericar-
dium, and is attached to the inner coat of this membrane
until it joins the vena cava ascendens, opposite to tlie right
auricle, where they unite. This vein runs along the right side
of the vertebrae, until it reaches the inner and lower part of
the large lolie of the liver ; there it enters this organ, run-
ning in a perfectly straight channel, formed near the edge of
this viscus, receiving from it a great number of veins, and
comes out a little above the gall-bladder, where, along with
four or five veme Aej^o^icee, it enters directly the pericardium.
This is closely attached to the liver, as M. Cuvier observes,
but more so in that part than any other. There is another
vein bringifig the blood from the left axilla, whicii pierces
the pericardium near and above the left pulmonary vein, and
enters the sinus venosns. This vein is anal igous to the left
subclavian (of the human subject.) differing only from this,
in its entering the right auricle separately: tliis, and several
important observations, I owe to Dr. Harlan, who has exa-
mined the heart witli me. These three veins empty them-
selves into the right auricle, which, rather larger than tlie
left, is situated above and on the riglit side of the heart. The
right ventricle, very muscular, has, like the left, thick pari-
etes ; it extends a little lower than the other, and is rather
more spacious ; it is furnished witii two large valves situated
near the orifice of the auricle to prevent the return of the
blood. Tliis ventricle has an opening into two arterial tubes ;
one on t)u^ left and superior part is furnished with two semi-
lunar valves opposed to each other, and opens into thesplanch.

OP NORTH AMERICA, Sgl

nic or left aorfa. At tijis place, the partition between the two
ventricles is not as thick as helow, i)iit tliere is a cartila2;inous
septum, whicli is so placed as to tlividc and give tiasticity to
the orilice of the pulmonary artery, and the sjjlanchnic or
left aorta, I have endeavoured in vain to lind here a direct
communication with the left ventricle. Tin pulmonary veins
pass under the bronchia, and pierce the pericardium l)ehind;
they then unite, and enter the left auricle, which is placed on
the upper and posterior part of the base of the heart. The
left ventiicle is situated partly behind the other ; it extends
a little higher, and seems to t)e rather smaller ; it is furnish-
ed, like the other, with two valves, placed l)efore the orilice
of the auricle ; it has also an opening into two arterial tubes ;
the fnst leads into the left or splanchnic aorta, and is onlv
separated from the orifice of the right ventricle into the
same artery by the cartilaginous partition : it is bordered by
a valve, which nearly closes it, so that a very small quantity
of blood only is allowed to pass from this ventricle through
the opening. The other |)assage for the blood is placed above;
this arterial tul)e divides into //iree branches — one which forms
the right or systemic aorta. anotl)cr forming the right sul)cla-
vian, and a third the carotid artery, which at first inclines on
the left side, s(M»d3 a branch which is the left subclavian, and
previous to its enteringthecranium,divides into two branches.
This common tube, together with the left aorta, and the
canal for the pulmonary arteries, is united, and forms a
large arterial sack, siiuatcd al)ove the heart, which is inclosed
within the pericaidium : tlie arteries divide into branches
as they pierce tlirougli this sack. These three canals, above
the ventricles, and l)eforc leaving the pericardium, are ex-
tremely enlarged, and form wide baijs, capable of containing
more blood than all the cavities of the heart together. Such
lalwavs found the structure of the heart in the alligator.

Thus the iilood coming from tiie body is introduce! into
the right auricle ; from this cell it (Inws into the right ven-
tricle, which propels it into the pulmonary artery, and partly

VOL. II. G 2

333 ON THE ALLIGATOR

into the left aorta. On the other side, the pulmonary veins
bring the blood from the lungs into the left auricle, which
discharges it into the ventricle of the same side ; from thence
it is propelled into the right aorta, the right subclavian, and
the carotid artery. It appears, that the circulation goes on
in this manner whilst the animal is allowed to breathe ; but
when it is confined under water, when the lungs have ceased
in part to perform tlieir office, the right ventricle must send a
greater quantity of blood into the left aorta, which becomes
filled with an increase of the fluid ; the weight and pressure
must act on the valve, which, as I have already observed,
allows but a very small quantity (if any) of the blood com-
ing from the left ventricle to penetrate into the left aorta.

M. Cuvier describes the ventricle as being divided hUo
three cells, communicatiTig xvith each other by many orifices.
1 have proved, if my observafions are correct, that there are
two ventricles, very distinct, and having no manner of com-
munication from one to the other through their partition :
only nature has placed a large arterial tube (the left or
splanchnic aorta,) which has a communication with the
right or systemic aorta, and which being capable of great
distention, when filled with the fluid, empties part of its con-
tents into the right aorta.

This structure which M. Cuvier thinks analogous to that
in the cheloniens, differs essentially from it. In turtles, a
mixture of arterial and venous blood takes place in the ven-
tricle : whilst in the alligator, when the left aorta becomes
much distended with blood, which must be the case when
the animal is under water, this artery may supply the left
ventricle with part of its contents, but the two semilunar
valves placed at the orifice of the right ventricle into this
tul)e prevent the introducfion of any part of the fluid into
it from the arterial canal, so that the lungs never receive
blood which has not passed through the system. Moieover,
when the animal is exposed to tlie atmo'^phere, when the
lungs receiving the regenerating element, allow the venous
blood to flow towards these organs, both ventricles must re-

OF NORTH AMERICA. 333

ceive an equal propoitioii of the fluid ; the risiht aorta rc-
cei\es a fi;ieater quantity, and the left aorta must cease to he
distended with a surplus othlood. whilst tiiat part of it eoiitiiin-
e<l in the left ventricle must act u|)on the valve placed bel'ore
the orilice leading to this same left aorta, and thus prevent
the flowing of the blood fiom that artery. In this state, the
other arteries are supplied wiili nearly pure blood. Sucli is
the result of my observations. It appears that M. Cuvier,
whose anatomical knowledge is well known, has dissected
only a small alligator whicii was sent alive from the West
Indies, which, tliough it died on the passage, arrived in time
to be examined. Youth, disease, and several other causes,
may have rendered this body an unfit sul)ject to examine
with certainty those organs ; which I have dissected several
times in laige animals, soon after their being deprived oi
life.

In the alligator, the muscles are not very numerous, but
extremely large in general, and strong; tliosc of an animal
killed as it has just left its winter retreat, are white and flac-
cid ; they stand several days in the open air without any al-
teration, whilst tlie muscles of one killed in the summer are
red, more firm, and rcseml)le those of any animal with dou-
ble circulation, except in their great contractile power after
apparent death. I shall enumerate those muscles which are
most conspicuous. On the thorax, there is an extensive pec-
toral nmscle, covering nearly all 'he ribs, and inserted on
the humerus; there is al)0ve, a flat and long muscle extend-
ing from the sternum to the lower jaw by one fasciculus,
and to the larynx by another ; one extending from the
clavicle to the larynx ; anotlier arisirig from the os hifoidcs^
covering!; the larynx, and ending at the point of the tongue;
and a last smaller nmscle, arising frou) the os hj/oides, and at-
tached to t!ie lower jaw. Thesr muscles having cotmections
with the throat, brim; down tlie larynx and the tongue, and
probably assist deglutition. The most important muscle of
the abdomen is one that arises from the os pubis; it passes
under the abdominal ribs which have been described by M,

334 ON THE ALLIGATOR

Cuvier, and is attached very closely on the anterior surface of
the two lobes of the liver ; a thin aponeurosis extends far-
ther and nearly surrounds this ora;an ; the contraction of
this muscle must move down the liver, the heart its; If, and
indeed most of the viscera contained in the abdomen. Fi-
bres from the above mentioned aponeurosis are attached be-
hind the liver to the ribs, forming a sort of diaphragm, or
a partition which divides the thoracic from the abdominal
viscera. The last which I shall mention, remarkable for its
size, arises from the first inferior process of the vertebra
over the lungs ; as it comes out of the thorax, it all at once
grows very thick, and sends on each side a tendon which is
attached to the first rib ; it tapers gradually above, and is in-
serted into the sphenoid bone ; it appears to me to be an an-
tagonist to the muscles of the neck. The lower muscle of
the tail is inserted on the pelvis, and to the femur by a ten-
don on each side. The intestinal canal is not very large ;
the ffisophagus is extremely thick, and capable of great dis-
tention ; the stomach has a rounded oblong form ; on the
right side, close by the orifice of the oesophagus, is that of the
duodenum. This intestine, near the end of its second turn,
receives the duct of the gall bladder. Near the end of the
rectum, on each side, are two intestina cwca; tliey at first
take a direct course upwards ; above they lie in a vermi-
form position, fixed by a folding of the mesentery.

I always found the stomach empty, with the exception of
some gravel and a few small pieces of wood. It is generally
believed in Carolina, that the alligators swallow a piece of
the resinous knot of the pine tree, before they retire to
their winter retreat. A. glass stopper has been found in the
stomach of one, which had assumed a round form.

On each side of the anus there is a gland, which contains
a thick yellow fluid having a strong smell of musk ; I)ut tills
smell is perceptil)le in every part of the body in old animnls.
M. Cuvier (Begne Animal) states, that on each side of i!ie
thioat there is the orifice of such a gland: on dissectina; this
part, I found a small bag having an opening near the lower
jaw ; it contained some particles of sand ; towards the hot-

OF NORTH AMERICA. 225

torn of this bag there is a white glanihilar substance, which,
when opened, presents no cavity discernible by the naked
eye. and is destitute of smell; the fore extremity of this is
terminated l)y a similar sul)stance, in the form of a cord,
which is attached to the extremity of the cornu of the os
hijoides. Several gentlemen informed me that when the
animal is wounded or angry, he contracts the lower mus-
cles of his neck, and the two bags protrude. I liave not been
able to discover the use of these organs. It has been said,
that in the alligators and turtles, the heart beats for a long
period after being extracted from the body ; for my |)art, al-
though I dissected the animals immediately after they were
killed, nay whilst their limbs still preserved a sort of invo-
luntary motion. I always found that the heart had entirely
ceased to contract.

I cannot close my remarks without mentioning a circum-
stance which I am unable to explain : Whilst dissecting these
animals. I often found small hags, apparently formed by the
cellular substance ; they contained a black residiunn. and
some fine gravel: in one of them I discovered the elytrum
of an insect of the genus Dijtiscus, well preserved. There
%vas no connection with the suriounding parts, and no cica-
trix could be perceived in the skin near them, 1 even found
one of these bags under the sternum. I leave it to future
observation to explain liow they are formed.

This is the amount of my observations on this singular ani-
mal during my residence in South Carolina. I regret that
it is not more complete. I have endeavoured however to
make known such facts only as appeared to me to be new,
omitting those which are already known.

Since writing the above, I have had an op|)ortunity, in
conjunction with Dr. Harlan, of minutely dissecting a young
alligator. The animal l)eing injecli'd, furnished clearer de-
monstrations of the correctness of mv lemaiks.

S26 ON THE ALLIGATOR

The following is a brief exposition of the result. The
mucous coat of the stomach is smooth, without rugse. About
one inch from the pylorus, there is a constriction of the
duodenum, forming another pylorus ; immediately beyond
this, the duodenum forms a loop, in which is found the pan-
creas ; through this gland passes the gall duct. There is
not the least vestige of the valvulfe conniventes tluoughout
the intestines ; but in place of them are transverse constric-
tions forming the alimentary canal into numerous cells,
which must necessarily impede tlie progress of the contents.
There was no blind gut in this animal.

In this subject, which was three feet ten inches long, the
intestines were five feet in length.

The spleen lies beneath the duodenum, above the verte-
brse. The left aorta, in the abdominal cavity, previous to
its visceral divisions, gives off a considerable branch, which
communicates with the right descending aorta; the rest di-
vides into several branches distributed to the abdominal vis-
cera.

The bag under the throat, in this young animal, contains a
musky substance.

Letter from Dr. Harlan to JV*. M. Hentz, Esq. containing
some further Observations on the Physiology of the Alli-
gator.

Philadelphia, i9th May, 1834.

Dear Sir,

Since I had last the satisfaction of cotnmunicating with
you, I have enjoyed another opportunity of dissecting an al-
ligator, three feet in length, which had lived several months
in the Philadelphia Museum. As the following facts tend to
confirm the observations we made some time ago, on three
individuals, I hasten to communicate them, in order to give

OP NORTH AMERICA. 2537

you an opportunity of adding them to your paper, which I
understand will soon l^e published. This dissection was
performed on the 0th of January, 1834.

f . I forced air into the vena cava ascendens, which inject-
ed the right auricle and ventricle, passed into the lyngs
through the pulmonary artery, and into the splanchnic aorta,
also into the systemic aorta through the valvular opening at
the base of the former.

S. I forced air into one of the pulmonary veins, which in-
flated the left auricle and ventricle, passed into the systemic
aorta and the subclavian trunks which leave the supercordal
sack.

The apex cordis was not attached to the pericardium, as is
usually the case.

Tiie circulation of these animals is briefly as follows ;

The blood passes from the right auricle into the ventricle
of the same side. From this cavity there are three open-
ings:— 1. One into the systemic aorta, by a valvular com-
munication at its base, which allows the continuation of the
circulation, when the progress of the blood through the lungs
is impeded by expiration. — 2. One into the pulmonary ar-
tery — 3. And one into the splanchnic aorta, carrying black
blood to the viscera. During expiration, there is still some
pulmonic circulation; a small quantity of blood passing froni
the lungs into the left auricle to the ventricle of the sanie
side, from whence it has a direct passage into the systemic
aorta. The valve at its base will not permit even wind to
pass into the right side ; nor will the semilunar valves of the
aorta permit regurgitation ; so that the only mixture of the
black and red blood takes |)lace in the systemic aorta, dur-
ing expiration or collapse of the lungs.

With sentiments of respect,

I remain your friend, ^'c.

R. HARLAN.
N. M. Hentz, Esq.

S28 ON THE AlililGATOR

EXPLANATION OF PLATE II.

Figure i*

•

a The heart contained in the pericardium.
b — b The vena cava descendens.
c — c The pulmonary arteries.
d — d Left axillary vein, or subclavian.
e — e Pulmonary veins.
f—f Left or splanchnic aorta.
g — g Right or systemic aorta.
h—h Carotid artery.
j — j Right subclavian artery.
i Trachea.
h Bronchia.
/ The lungs.
m The liver.

n Muscle covering the liver.
o CEsophagus.

Figure 2.

This figure represents the heart, the pericardium being opened; and a sec-
tion of the right ventricle and the left aorta.

1. Sinus venosus.

2. Right auricle.

3. Orifice of the right auricle into the ventricle of the same side with the
valves.

4. The right ventricle cut open.

5. Orifice of the pulmonary artery.

'6. Pulmonary artery, which being situated behind, is merely indicated.

7. Left aorta cut open.

8. Semilunar valves.

9. Cartilaginous septum.

10. The whole arterial trunk.

11. Part of the left auricle.

12. Attachment of the ventricles to the pericardium which is mentioned by
M. Cuvier.

Figure 3.

This represents the heart viewed behind.

1. The left ventricle cut open.

2. The orifice of the left anricle, with the valves.

3. The opening into the left aorta nearly closed by the valve.

4. The common tube for the right aorta, partly cut open.

• The latter of the double Utters in Figure I, have reference to Figure 2, in tlie Pla'.e.

No. XI.

.Analysis of the Hydraulic Lime used in constructing the Erie
Canal in the State of New York. By Henry Seybert. —
Communicated on the i9tkofJuly, 1822.

Philadelphia, iOth July, 1833.

Deau Sin,

Agreeably to your request, I examined the Hydrau-
lic Linie which you presented to nie, and herewith transmit
to you the detail of my experiments. In Professor Silli-
nian's Journal, Vol. III. No. 2, p. 231, we have a statement
of Dr. Hadley's analysis of this substance, viz. carbonic acid,
35.05; lime, 25; silex, 15.05; alumina, 16.05; water, 5.03;
oxide of iron, 2.02 ;=98.20. On examining these results,
it was evident that the proportion of carbonic acid was too
great for the lime : from my analysis, it appears that he
overlooked the magnesia, which forms an essential consti-
tuent of this mineral.

I am.

Very respectfully.

Your obedient servant,

H. SEYBERT.
Dr. James Mease.

VOL. II. II 2

§30 ANALYSIS OF

Afialysis of the Hydraulic Lime used in constructing the Erie
Cental in the State of Neiv York.

This mineral is greyish both in mass and powder. It is
without lustre. Opaque. Amorphous. Fracture irregular.
Fragments indeterminate. Yields readily to the knife, and
is easily frangible. Fine grained ; presenting an earthy as-
pect, its specific gravity is 2.753.

Analysis.

A. Three grammes of the mineral, finely pulverised,
were digested in a phial containing a determined weight of
diluted muriatic acid. The addition of the acid to the mi-
neral occasioned an immediate and violent effervescence.
After three or four hours, when the carbonic acid was sup-
posed to have been entirely disengaged, it was ascertained
that the diminution of weight amounted to i.\S grammes.
Hence we have 39.333 per lOO of carbonic acid.

B. The mixture (A) was then submitted to el^uUition.
When all the soluble matter appeared to have been taken up
by the acid, the whole was evaporated to dryness. The re-
sidue was treated with water acidulated with muriatic acid,
and again moderately evaporated. It was then treated witli
more water, and filtered. The residue on the filter was
nearly colourless ; and after calcination it weighed 0.435
grammes. This residue was calcined with three parts of
caustic potash in a silver crucible, and dissolved in an ex-
cess of diluted muriatic acid. By subsequent evaporation
of the liquor, ^c. it was found to consist of 0.353 grammes
of silica on three grammes, or H.766 per 100; and 0.85
grammes of alumina on three grammes, or a. 733 per lOO.

C. The excess of acid of the liquor (B) was neutralised
with causfic potash. On adding hydrosulphate of potash,
there was produced a black precipitate, wiiich, after being

HYDRAULIC LIMB. 881

roasted and calcined with a little nitric acid, yielded 0.45
grammes of peroxide of iron on three grammes, or 1.5
per 100.

D. After the separation of the ferruginous precipitate
from the liquor (CJ it was treated with oxalate of potash,
which occasioned a voluminous white precipitate. This pre-
cipitate, after exposure to a high temperature, afforded 0.75
grammes of lime on three grammes, or 25.0 per 100.

E. The magnesia precipitated from the liquor (DJ by
an excess of caustic potash, after edulcoration and strong
calcination, weighed 0.535 grammes on three grammes, or
17.833 per 100.

F. Three grammes of the pulverised mineral were sub-
mitted to a strong calcination. The diminution of weight
occasioned by this treatment was 1.235 grammes. Now in
deducting i.is grammes of carbonic acid (Ji) we have 0.045
grammes of moisture on three grammes, or 1.5 per 100.

We then have the following results, as the products of the
preceding experiments, viz. :

(Per 100 parts.)

.9.

Carbonic acid

39.333

B.

Silica

11.766

B.

Alumina

02.733

C.

Peroxide of

iron

01.500

D.

Lime

25.000

E.

Magnesia

17. 833

F.

Moisture

01.500

99 6«)5

Loss

100.000

000.335

8

No. Xll.

Papers 6n Various Subjects connected with the Survey of the
Coast of the United States. By F. R. Hassler. — Commu-
nicated Sd March, 1830.

CIRCULAR LETTER.

Treasury Department,

25th March, 1807.

Sir,

The President of the United States being authorised
by an Act of the last Session to cause the whole of the
coast of the said States, together with the adjacent shoals and
soundings to be surveyed, it is his intention that the work
should be executed with as much correctness as can be ob-
tained within a reasonable time ; and he has directed me to
apply to you, requesting that you would have the goodness
to suggest the outlines of such a plan as may, in your opinion,
unite correctness and practicability.

As each nautical survey of the shoals and soundings, pre-
supposes a knowledge of the position of certain points of
the coast, it seems to me that the work should consist of
three distinct parts, viz. :

1. The ascertainment, by a series of astronomical obser-
vations, of the true position of a few remarkable points on

SURVEY OF THE COAST OP THE UNITED STATES. 233

the coast ; and some of the Uglit liouses, jilaced on the princi-
pal capes or at the entrance of the principal harbours, ap-
pear to be the most ehgil)le places for that purpose, as being
objects particularly interesting to navigators, visil)le at a
great distance, and generally erected on spots on whicli simi-
lar buildings will be continued so long as navigation exists.

8. A trigonometrical survey of the coast between those
points of which the position shall have been astronomically
ascertained ; in the execution of which survey, the position
of every distinguisliable permanent object should be care-
fully designated, and temporary beacons be erected at pro-
per distances on those parts of the coast on which such ob-
jects are rarely found.

3. A nautical survey of tiie shoals and soundings of the
coast, of which the trigonometrical survey of the coast itself,
and the ascertained position of the light houses and other dis-
tinguishable objects would be the bases ; and wliich would
therefore depend but little on any astronomical observations
made on board the vessels employed on that part of the
work.

Biit this is submitted to your consideration not for tlie
purpose of pointing out any plan in preference to another,
but only in order to shew the view which we have taken of
the subject, and the degree of accuracy which we arc desi-
rous of obtaining.

I will only add, tliat the greatest practical difficulties which
have heretofore occurred, relate to what I call the nautical
survey ; and on that j)art of the subject the following itKjui-
ries have arisen : — Can a correct survey be taken with one
vessel alone ? Can angles be taken with sufficient correct-
ness from on board a vessel, so as to ascertain its position in
relation to three visible olyects on shore? Or is it neces-
sary that the vessel's position, at the time of taking any par-
ticular sounding, should be ascertained by observers on
shore? And many others which an examination of the sub-
ject will naturally suggest to you.

334" SURVEY OP THE COAST

Permit ine also to ask, whether you know any person
whom you might recommend as capable of acting in the dif-
ferent parts of the work.

I have the honour to be
Respectfully,

Your obedient servant,
(Signed) ALBERT GALLATIN.

Mr. Hassler,

Philadelphia.

Philadelphie, S Avril, 1807.

Monsieur,

Honore de votre lettre du 25 Mars passe, je prends
la liberte de reponJre a la confiance que vous voulez bien
me montrer, et de vous communiquer mes idees sur les
meilleures methodes a suivre pour la levee des cotes, desi-
ree par le gouvernement.

La marche que vous avez trace e a cet ouvrage dans votre
lettre est tres juste, et en contient les veritables principes ;
permettez moi de les etendre seulement, en y appliquant
quelques considerations plus detaillees.

Pour faire cette levee avec toute I'exactitude possible, la
marche a suivre seroit la suivante :

De mesurer par toute I'etendue des cotes avec un cercle
repetiteur a deux lunettes, d'un pied de diametre (ou a son
defaut, avec un theodolite anglois de me me diametre au
moins, et susceptible de multiplier les angles) une chaine de
triangles d'environ 60 a 100 mille piedsde cote, fondee sur
deux ou plusieurs bases mesurees, avec les moyens d'exacti-
tude connus. Toutes les observations et determinations astro-

OP THE UNITED STATES. S35

noiniques, que Ics circonstanccs pcrmettront, on qui pcuvent
etre exigecs, doivent etic t'aitcs dans le cours de cet ou-
vrage, aux points convenables, tant pour determiner les Ion-
gitudes et latitudes des points, que Ics azimuths des cotes
des triangles; se servant piincipalement du soleil et de
I'etoile polaire pour les dcrnieres determinations et de
signaux instantanes (p. ex. fusees volantes ou deciiarges
d'arnies a feu) donnecs d'un point intermediaire entre
ilcux observateurs. On doit determiner en meme terns
autant de points sccondaires, et nn'Miie autant de simples
directions, qu'il sera possible, sans entraver Ic but prin-
cipal. CcUc mcsurc determincrait, ainsi que vous I'avez
observe, les fanaux, villes, villages, et autres |)oints prin-
cipaux des cotes, avec un nombre suffisant de signaux,
eriges dans les lieux convoriables pour la continuation des
levees au detail. Les resultats seralcnt portes, d' apres les
differences des meridiens et parallelcs, calculees pour le
spheroide terrestrc, sur des grands papiers divises en
planches, d' apres la convcnancc, accompagnes d'un tableau
des longitudes, latitudes, distances, et azimuths.

II serait avantageux de reunir toujours deux observa-
teurs et une personne entendue pour signaler, f^c. : il faut
les subordonner, pour eviter les retards possibles d'une dif-
ference d'opinion sur les operations. II serait utile dc for-
mer un centre pour tout I'ouvrage, sous un hommc qui re-
unirait aux connaissances mathematiques celles de la geo-
graphic da pays ; chez lui seraient les calculs et la r«''duction
de la grande mesure, la distribution, verification, et rassem-
blenient des ouvrages de detail.

Lesjouinaux doivent etre tenus avec une telle clarte que
les observateurs, ajjres leur retour, puissent les dormer a
toute autre personne entendue en tels ouvrages, pour en tirer
les resultats. lis doivent etre in folio, et I'opposee de
chaqne page d' observation entierement destinee aux re-
marques, dessins, descriptions des stations, nu'-me notice du
terns, et autres. Une bonne rncthodc de signalisation est tres

S38 SURVEY OF THE COAST

importante pour la vision distincte et certaine, et par conse-
quent pour I'exactitude et I'econoinie du terns,

Les signaux de la chaine de triangles*doivent elre des py-
raniides triangulaires equilaterales de 10 a 30 pieds de haut,
a base proportionnee selon I'exigence des localites, formes de
trois sapins fixes en terre et reunis au haut, surmontes d'une
forte perche, portant une boule de poterie, avec un fort bon
vernisjaune, d'unpiedde diametre, soit de toute autre niatiere
qui formerait un point reflechissant, ou bien d'une sphere de
1 J a 2 pieds de diametre, formee de cercles de barils, recou verte
de toile blanche ou noire, selon que leur projection rclatiye-
ment a I'observateur tombe sur des objets tencstres, ou bien
datis I'air ou la mer. Pour les signaux de nuit, des lampes
d'Argand, agrandes meches, de six pouces et meme plus, de
diametre suivant les distances, peuvcnt etre fixees sur ces
signaux. Dans les basses terres ou les marais, les signaux
eleves seraient indispensables. Au centre de la pyramide,
pourrait etre place un appareil, d'un transport facile, pour
supporter les instruments et les observateurs separement.
De cette maniere, on pourrait observer avec une stabilite suf-
fisante sur les terrains marecageux ; surtout si Ton doit se
servir du cercle repetiteur a deux lunettes.

Dans les bois, les signaux peuvent etre eriges sur quel-
que point un peu plus eleve, ou unis a des arbres d'une
hauteur predominante. lis pourraient etre arranges de ma-
niere qu' un observateur piit monter dessus, pour prendre les
angles avec un instrument a reflexion, suppose que leur me-
sure ne put etre suppleee par celle des autres angles du
triangle, avec le grand instrument.

Les geometres charges de la levee du detail, auxquels
les planches et tableaux susmentiones seraient distribues,
doivent baser sur ces points donnes, pour faire tons les rem-
plissages qui peuvent etre desires, soit avec de petits theodo-
lites, la planchette, la boussole, le sextant, ^c. suivant la con-
venance des localites et les moyens dont ils pourront dispo-
ser, 11 pourrait etre reserve des determinations moins es-

OP THE UNITED STATEs. S37

senlicllcs, qui nc lour seraiciU pas coininuriiqui''CS potir ser-
vir I'nsiiitc u Vfrilici Icur oiivia2;e.

Les sondes seiaient k-vees par nn petit batiment (p. ex.
un pilot boat) avec un obscrvateiir a hord. suivaiit et secon-
dant Ic si'onu'tic levant les cotes. II devioit otie accom-
pasne dc deux clialoupcs. [)oui' la convenance dcs obscr-
vateuis, pour servir de sic;naux, ^'c. Le batiment s'ar-
retant cliaque Ibis qu'il cliang;eiait de direction ou pren-
diait qiiclque sonde reniarqiial)le, Tobseivateur a bord nie-
surerait avec un scxtaru raii,2;lc entre la station dc I'oijser-
vateur et la cote, (auquel il donne un siu;nal) etquelqu' au-
tre |)oint convenal)le; en nuMue terns Tanaile entre le bati-
ment et qtieique point convonal)I(', doit etrc observe sur la
cole. La route dn b-.itinietU ainsi levee, independaniment des
determinations de loc et boussole, qui seraient neanmoins
faites, decouvrirait les courants (s'il y en a) par leur diffe-
rence.

La levee nautique serait par la evitec, ou en cas de besoin
substituee, lorsque cellc aux cotes ne pourrait avoir lieu, sui-
vant la convcnancc, et pourrait toiijonrs etre basee sur cette
derniere. II conviendrait que ces eeometrcs fussent second«''S
par un pilote. ou a son drfaut par une autre personnc con-
naissant bien les cotes, pour leur faire connaitrc les objets
remarqualiles. les noms, tS'c.

Dans ces levees, le problenie dcs trois points, dont vous
avez fait u'cntion, trouverait souvent son afiplication, mais
etant sujet :i une erreur d'autant |)lus grande, (en supposant
qiiolqtie erreur d'ohscrvalion ailleins sans consequence) que
le point a trouver s'approclie |)lus du cercle qui passe par
les trois points donnes, au quel cas il devient indetcrmine,
il ne pent etre donne en instruction ^enerale. L'observateur
doit done, avant de s'v tier, s'assurer piu raitcment qjie, dans
le cas oil il sc trouve. Pu'^aaje liii en convient.

Le lieu d'un observatetir pent aussi rtre determine par
une seule linne, donnee en lonsueur et diiection avee le me-
ridien. sous \vs latitudes donnees. par la mcsure dc leur an-
gle au point clierclic, et d'un a/imuth.
VOL. n. — I 2

SURVBY OF THE COAST

Pour toute determination d'azimuth, il faut faire usage
des observations du soleil et des etoiles, surtout de I'etoile
polaire. 11 serait avantageux pour les geometres occupes
au detail de faire une instruction des problemes de cette es-
pece, qui montrat dans quel cas I'application de I'un ou de
r autre est favorable ou non, avee les meilleures melhodes
d'en faire l-observation. le calcul, la construction, ^'c. le tout
atlapte au mode de levee qui sera mis en usage, peut etre
meme on pourrait y joindre des tables.

Un tel systeme d'operation etant susceptible de tous les
degres d'exactitude qu'on peut desirer, (dans les grands
triangles elle peut etre a tA^v) et portant avec lui sa propre
Verification, donnerait des resultats a tout usage, et permet-
trait de travailler liardiment dans les levees de detail, par
les occasions frequentes de verifier I'ouvrage ; cette partie
tire sans cela toujours beaucoup plus en longueur qu'on ne
pense d'abord. Plus le systeme adopte s'approchera de
celui que j'indique, plus il donnera d'exactitude et d'utilite
dans les resultats.

Si un tel plan d'operation etait regarde comme d'une ex-
ecution trop entravee par les localites, il faudrait y substi-
tuer le suivant, qui serait :

De suppleer la niesure triangulaire par les determinations
de longitude et latitude, avec des clironometres et des sex-
tants ou cercles de reflexion, qui doivent dans ces cas etre
de premiere qualite, et les chronometres toujours. 2. Une
serie de points et signaux, systematiquement places et dis-
tribues, doivent par la etre determines, de meme que les tri-
angles de la methode precedente ; des determinations d'azi-
mutiis et meme des lignes mesurees et des triangles leves
avec les instruments a reflexion, devraicnty etre joints, lors-
quel'occasions'enpresenterait, tant pourmultiplierlenombre
des points determines que pour verifier les determinations
astronomiques. Tunc par I'autre mutuellement. Pour sup-
plier au dcfaut de pouvoir observer la double hauteur me-
vidienne du soleil en ete, il faudi:ait se servir d'etoiles bien
dctern^inees, surtout de I'etoile polaire.

OP THE UNITED STATES. S31>

Aux cndroits convenahlcs ct cl'iin interet niajeur, il faiid-
lait. par la multiplication et variation dcs observations, su()-
plecr par la jonction dcs ol)scrvations astroiionii(iues aux
mesures des triangh'S nientionnt'S dans le systeme precedent.

Cette metliodc, quoiqu' ellc ne soit pas susceptible de toute
I'exactitude de la |)recodentc, est cependant excmptc du defant
d'accunuilation d'erreurs, parceque les determinations sonl
independantes Ics u^es des autres (on pent estimer les lati-
tudes a (0" de dcgre, et les longitudes par cbronomrtres a 2"
de temps exact.) Son inconvenient est de ne pas donncr avec
la meme t'acilite et precision des determinations de distance
en longueur pour I'usage des levees de detail, desavantage
qui est en proportion de la grandeur de I'eciiclle dans la-
quelle elles sont dcsirecs. Ce qui a et«'> dii sur la v«''rifica-
tion des diftercnces de longitudes par signaux instantanes, sur
les sii!;naux, les divers journaux, et les personncs requises,
est aI)solunient le meme pour cette metliode. Les levees
de detail pourraient y etre faites de la memo maniere que
dans le systeme piecedent, en disposant proprement pour
ces usages, les triangles, et autres mesures mcntionnees.

Les details pourraient aussi etre leves par une extension
de cette dernicMe metliode jusqu' au detail, et altcrnative-
nient meme a une levee nautique. Mais alors, pour ne
rien oniettre, il faudrait fairc tons les calculs de suite. Apres
les observations, on pcrdrait I'avantage de pouvoir les ve-
rifier et tirer parti d'obscrvations sul)sequentes. Les
memes personncs employees aux determinations les plus
essenticllcs, scraicnt ainsi chargees des menus details, ou
en dependraient dans leur marche, «''tant obliges de dirigcr
ou |)reparcr et fournir I'ouvrage des geometrrs occupes du
detail, la marche systeniatique n'existerait done plus.

La d«''pense de Tune et de I'autre de ces deux nietliodes
pcut etre regardee conime la meme. Ce que Tunc coute
en instruments a mcsurcr les angles et trans[)orts dc terre.
I'autre le coute en chronometres et louage de hatimens.

L'i^conomie du terns estdecidee: i° Par la saison plus on

2

340 SURVEY OF THE COAST

moins favorable aux observations astronomiques, dont la le-
vee chronometrique a plus beS'.in que celle des triang;les,
qui peuvent etre mesures souvent, quand les observations
astronomiques ne peuvent avoir lieu ; 3° Uu degre d'exac-
titude exisie de la mesure des triangles, qui deniandent plus
de terns a proportion que les ol)SPrvateurs doivrnt etre
scrupuJeux ; 3° Du plus ou nioijis d'eutraves que les loca-
lites uiettt;nt a 1-une ou I'autre methodt*.

La ditterente nature des cotes et le different nonibre
d'objets a lever (comme isles, bayes, ^'c.) sur luie meuie
etendue de cotes ex'erieures, pourrait, peut-etre, fane prefe-
rer, pour une partie de I'ouvrage, la lev6e suivant une me-
thode senililable a la premiere, et pour une autre la levee
cbiononietrique, et meme la nautiquc. Pour bien juger de
cela, il faut avoir des connoissances locales, qui me manquent
jusqu' a present.

Excusez, Monsieur, ces details et la longueur de cette
lettre ; mais neuf encore dans ce pays, je n'ai pu parler
qu'en principe, et discuter, sans decider : la connaissance
des vues particulieres qui pourraient entrer en considera-
tion, des moyens scientifiques et des personnes dont on peut
disposer, ainsi que des obstacles qui peuvent se rencontrer,
me manque ; de la depend la decision de la preference pour
I'une ou I'autre des deux methodes. qui sont, a mon avis,
les plus exactes, et les plus convenables aux vues principales
du gouvernement.

J'ai I'honneur d'etre,

Avee le plus parfait respect,

Votre tres devoue serviteur,

F. R. HASSLER.

M. Gallatin.

OF THE UNITED STATES. S41

Plan Jar putting into operation the Survey of the Coast of

the United States.

In my general |)lan of oi)cration for the survey, I men-
tioned, that tlie cstal)lislimcnt of two ol)servatoiies would l)e
necessary ; and I thought it |)ro|)er to prfjcure tlie instru-
ments, destined for them, of such a qiiahty and size, as to
be suital)le for a permanent national institution. For this
purpose, it would now be necessary to add only a mural
circle and a zenith sector, which, however desirai)le, I did
not venture to order, as their absolute necessity, in con-
nexion with the survey of the coast, was not so obvious as
that of the instruments procured.

These observatories form the fixed points, to which the
survey, and particularly tlie naval part of it, is referred. The
selection of pro|)er jilaces, the erection of the buildings, and
the setting up of the instruments, will require some time. It
would therefore he desiral)le to begin with this part of the
general observation as soon as possilile.

As they will be permanent scientific establishments, it will
be proper to decide whether the expense of their erection
shall be comprehended under those of the survey, or be
considered as separate.

It will also be necessary to decide, where they shall be
erected. To procure the greatest advantage for the survey,
their positions should be as far north-east and south-west
as the very favourable position of the United States admits.
The same location atlbrds also the greatest scientific advan-
tages. Supposing one in the District of Maine and the other
in Lower Louisiana, nearly every celestial phenomenon ob-
servable fiom tiie tropic to the arctic circle, and within
about two hundred degrees of din'ercnce of longitude, could
be observed at one or other of them. The comparison of
their distance and position, as determined astronomically and
geodesically, would olfer the most rigorous proof of the sur-

342 SURVEY OV THE COAST

vey. The observations made in them could be compared
with each other, so as to render them independent of fo-
reign observatories. Still, various considerations might oc-
casion and favour the desire of placing one of these obser-
vatories in the city of Washington, as observatories are placed
in the principal capitals of Europe, as a national object, a
scientific ornament, and a means of nourishing an interest
for science in general.

This observatory would then be the most proper place of
deposit for the standards of weights and measures, whicli
make part of the collection of instruments.

The observatory will require a constant observer; the
duties of whom are evident from the nature of the instru-
ments and the object of the establishment, viz. to make ob-
servations of every plienomenon leading to the determina-
tion of time and longitude. When the position of such an
observatory shall be determined, I will have the honour of
submitting a plan of construction adapted to the object and
the locality.

The wooden stands for the instruments, the boxes for the
bars to measure the base lines, and the tin cases to make
the pyrometrical experiments with, being objects of bulk
and inconvenient transportation, 1 preferred having them
made in this country. Their construction is necessary to
fit the instruments for actual use. As soon as this is done,
I should proceed to standard the bars for measuring the
bases, and to make the pyrometric experiments upon them.
It would be very desirable that 1 should be authorised to
make an expenditure of about eight hundred dollars for
these objects, as well as for signal splieres, and lamps fur
night signals, which I found it also better to have made in
this country.

All these preliminary objects could be attended to this
winter, so as to enable me to begin, next spring, tlie first
part of the survey itself, viz. the reconnoitering of a part of
the coast, in order to project a part of the triangles best suit-

OF THE UNITED STATES. ;343

cd for accuracy, as well as approacliino; nearest to the fi2;urc
ot the coast, anil to lind a i)ro|)er place for a l)asc line to
ground them upon.

In this operation, I should wish to be accompanied by a
man acquainted with tlic part of the country I shall have to
go thiougli, and to he allowed an expenditure, for tlie trans-
portation olthc small instruments, the erection of temporary
signals, ^'c.

'I'hus prepared, it would i)e possible to make the actual
measurement of one base line in the latter jiart of the sum-
mer or in the fall of the present year. Dining this time, the
building of at least one of the ol)servatories should be com-
j)leied. The instruments destined for it could then I)e put
up during the winter, and the adjustment of those intended
for the survey itself could be made with the necessary at-
tention and minuteness.

The work of the principal survey will he to form a chain
of tiiangles, with sides of about thirty miles in lengtli, along
the whole extent of the coast, so as to join the distant parts
by the shortest and most accurate lines possible, and to de-
termine the azimutlis of the sides of the triangles, and the
latitudes and longitudes of their angular points.

Within these, a series of triangles, with sides of about ten
miles, will be formed to join them, part of which it will some-
times be possible to carry on simultaneously with the large
ones. The object of these will be to furnish an ample num-
ber of determined points, to which the survey may be re-
ferred, in all its details.

It will be necessary to furnish the chief operator with the
following assistance :

1. Two officers of the corps of engineers, well informed
in mathematics, and with so much knowledge of the practi-
cal operations, as will enable them to make the secondary
observations, and to keep the journal of them correctly.

2. Twelve men of the corps of engineers, most of them
artificers, with a sergeant and corporal.

344 SPRVEV Of THE COAST

3. One baggage wagon, with the necessary horses, and a
driver.

i. Tents and other field utensils, sufficient to accommo-
date the persons employed, and to shelter the instiunjents.
It will be necessary to construct the tents for the instruments
particularly for the purpose

5. It would be convenient, and in many cases important,
that a few cadets should be added, who, by following the
work, would prepare themselves to take the station of the
officers, when they would be employed in operating by them-
selves, as will be mentioned hereafter.

The duty of one of the officers will be, — to act as assis-
tant observer, captain of the men employed, and purser for
all expenditures relating to the transportation of instru-
ments, the construction and election of signals, and other
similar objects. For this purpose, it will be necessary to
make a yearly appropriation of about two thousand dollars,
of which he will have to keep an account. I suppose that
the support of men and horses will be comprehended under
the military expenditures.

The duty of the second officer will be, — that of a lieute-
nant of the soldiers, and of secretary to the observers. This
last office is necessary for the observations. Witliout it, it
would be often impossible to execute them within the abso-
lutely necessary limit of time.

The wagon will serve to transport the baggage, provi-
sions, tents, signals, tools, and such of the instruments as
Will bear this mode of transportation.

The employment of the men will be, — to carry the piin-
cipal instruments from station to station, to erect signals, to
prepare the stations for observation, clearing the ways, and
various similar works, which will occur constantly in the
course of the survey.

This mode of proceeding will make the actual expenses
of the survey the smallest possil)le, as the requisite aid may
easily be obtained from the army, without interrupting its

OF THE UNITED STATES. S45

service. It will have the advantage of preparino; officers in
an essential part of their eni[)loyincnt, and of givinj; them a
knowledge of the localities of the conntry, by which tliey
may become particularly useful in future.

The survey cannot be carried into its details, until such a
portion of tlie above work shall be executed and actually
calculated, as will serve to occupy two or three detail sur-
veyors, in a certain district.

The same is to be observed with respect to the nautical
survey, wliicli is to extend fioiii the coast as far as any ob-
ject important to navigation may occur. It will be most pro-
per to use, in these parts of the work, well informed officers
brought up at tlie military academy, and naval officers.

It was tlic intention of Mr. Gallatin to divide the whole
work into two parts. If that should l)e the wish now, two
corps of surveyors, as described above, would be required.

As the general chain of great triangles must, however,
form one single system, it may be found proper not to make
this division, until a part of these are done, and when the
secondary triangles, being more numerous, will require an
increase of the numl)er of observers.

Such distril)utions of the work may be advantageously
made, as the |)rincipal work is proceeding ; when it might
be divided into such a numl)er as the localities would indi-
cate. Tluis. for instance, the coast of Louisiana being, by
its geograpiiical position, separated from tlie other jiarts of
the coast of the United States, would, of itself, form such a
subdivision.

Roliert Patterson, Esq. Director of the Mint in Philadel-
phia, has, from the beginning, been appointed irencral su-
pcrintendant of this work. In him the correspondence, and
general communications relative to it, have been made to
centre.

This part of the arrangement is therefore considered as
fixed, independently of the present plan ; which is intended
merely to comprehend the ways and means for putting the
survey itself into operation.

VOL. II. K 2

246 SURVEY OF THE COAST

According; to tlie directions of Mr. Gallatin, the collection
of instruments is made sufficient to furnish, temporarily, the
necessary instruments for a determination of boundary lines.
If, therefore, any such work is now in contemplation, the
instruments for it may be supplied from the collection.

F. R. HASSLER.

Washington.) 5th January, 1816,

On the 15th of May, 1816, a communication was made
to the government, on the measures necessary to he then
taken, in order to i)ut into immediate operation such por-
tions of the work as could he undertaken during that sea-
soru As this communication d.d not differ, in any essential
paiticidar, fioni tiie above, it has not been thought neces-
sary to insert it here.

Ji Catalogue of the Instruments and Books collected for the
Survey of the Coast.

It may he proper to insert this catalogue in these papers,
both for the convenience of reference, and as an account of
the means by which the work of tlie survey was to be exe-
cuted.

The instruments were the following:

1. One theodolite, of two feet diameter, made by Mr.
Troughton.

3. Two double repeating theodoHtes, of one foot diameter,
with a complete vertical circle l)y the same.

3. Two doul)le repeating circles, of eighteen inches dia-
meter, with two telescopes, made by the same.

OF THE UNITED STATES. 24,7

4. Four double repoalin'>; reflecting; circles, often inches
diameter, with stands and artiticial mercury horizons, and
spirit levels lor measuring small angles of elevation, made
by the same.

5. Two reflecting circles exactly like the former, without
stanilsor levels, hy the same.

6. Two artificial Iiorizons of mercury, with a glass cover.

7. Two artilicial horizons, of dark plane glasses, of eight
inches diameter, with ground spirit levels.

8. Two common surveying theodolites, of nine inches
diameter.

y. Two compasses, with needles one foot long, with cen-
tre work and spirit levels, made by Thomas Jones.

10. Two alhidadcs for plane tables, with transit telescopes,
made by Thomas Jones.

11. Two plane tal)lc's, suited to these instruments.

12. Two sets of apparatus lbi- measuring base lines by a
peculiar arrangement : each set consisting of the following
parts, viz. four bars of iron, intended to be made the length
of two metres ; various screw works and a numl)er of roll-
ers for the motion of these bars, and of tlic boxes intended to
receive them ; a sector with a spirit level ; a directing teles-
cope ; four thermometers ; and three stands, with motion
works, and microscopes with two different loci. Made by
Mr. Trougliton.

13. One standard Rnslish brass scale, of eighty-two inches
in length, divided on silver into tenths of inches, with a mi-
croscope, and an arrangement for the comparison and con-
struction of other scales. Made by Mr. Trougliton.

14. One iron toise, standarded by Lenoir in Paris, and
compared with the toise of Peru at the observatory, by-
Messrs. Arra2;o and Houvard.

l.T. One brass metre, standarded by Lenoir, and compared
with the iron metre at the observatory of Paris, by the same
gentlemen.

ift. A certificate of these two comparisons, signed and
sealed by these gentlemen.

248 SURVEY OF THE COAST

17. One iron metre, standarded by Lenoir.

18. One iron tool for filing off bars, perpendicularly to
their length, by a rotatory motion.

19. Ont* iron plane.

20. One strong very fine balance, with English weights,
from 10,000 grains to decimals of grains, standarded by Mr.
Trough ton.

21. Two subdivided kilograms, in the form of parallele-
pipedons, standarded by Fortin in Paris, who was employed
by the Committee of Weights and Measures in making the
originals.

23. Two standard litres, with covers of ground plate
glass, standarded by Fortin.

23. Two transit instruments for observatories, with five
feet telescopes, made by Mr. Troughton.

24. Two as'ronomical clocks for the observatories, with
mercuiial compensation pendulums, made by William Har-
dy in London, on the same plan as that of the Greenwich
observatory.

25. Two box chronometers, going one day, with silver
dials, and corrections for short and long vibrations, made by
the same.

26. One box cin-onometer, going two days, by Mr. Brock-
bank.

27. Two box chronometers, going only one day, by the
same.

SS. Two silver pocket chronometers, by the same.

29. One box chronometer, l)y Grimaldi and Johnson.

30. Two tin»e pieces, shewing the three hundredth part
of a second by a hand attached to the balance, made by Mr.
Hardy.

31. One six feet achromatic telesco|)e of Dollond, with a
four and a hall' inch apeiture, one terrestial and six astro-
n* mieal eyepieces, a finder, the tube in three parts screwed
together, and a mahogany stand in two parts.

33. One five feet achromatic telescope, with a four inch
aperture, one terrestrial and six astronomical eye tubes, brass

OF Tllli UNITED STATES. 349

shifting equatorial motion, mahogany folding stand, steadying
rods, and a ianthorn illumination, by means of a small reflec-
tor in the centre ; also by Dollond.

33. One five feet achromatic telescope of TuUy, with a
four inch aperture, the tube in two pmts, one terrestrial and
four astronomical eyepieces, level, linder, steadying rods,
folding mahogany stand, ^'c.

34. One achromatic telescope of Tullv, four feet eight
inches in length, with a three and a iudf inch aperture, tube
in two parts, two terrestrial and four astronomical eyepieces,
mahogany folding stand, cS"c.

35. One three and a half feet achromatic telescope, with
a three inch aperture, one terrestrial and six astronomical
eyepieces, simple brass tube without stand or fnider, by J)ol-
lond.

36. One three and a half feet achromatic telescope, with
one astronomical and two terrestrial eyepieces, three inch
aperture, brass stand, and steadying rods, by Troughton.

37. Three double wire micrometers, by Dollond, witii
changes of eyeglasses and prisms for high altitudes, to be
placed l)eforc the eyepieces, two of tliem tilting the teles-
copes, No. 31 and 32, and tiie third the four other teles-
copes.

38. One top joint and socket for a telescope, on three
legs of wood, to lit any tekscope, for easy transportation.

39. Six mountain barometers, with brass mountings, by
Mr. Troughton. N. B. Tliese were brought without mercury
in them, for greater security against lircaking on the voyage.

40. Two large thermometers, extending to the boiling
point, with Falirenlieit's and FJeaumur's scale, intended for
the observatory, by Mr. Troughton,

41. Two thermometers, on boxwood scales, brass shelter
to the balls, also for the observatory. i)y Mr. Troughton.

4S. Four detached spiiit levels, of two diflTcrent sizes.

43. Two sets of magnetic bars, one containing two. the
other four bars.

44. One dynamctcr. by Dollond.

350 SURVEY OP THE COAST

45. Two beam compasses, vviih short and lon^ rods, and
a double set of points, and one set to work upon brass, by
Fidler.

46. Three proportional compasses, with perpendicular
legs, for reduction and for constructing maps, by Fidler.

47. Two steel rules, live feet long and four inches broad,
and four steel triangles of two sizes, to use with them by
Fidler.

48. Various duplicate parts, to replace accidental loss or
breakage ; as turnscrews, metal wire, spirit level tubes tilled,
dark glasses, magnifiers, barometer tul)es, Sjc.

49. The books consist of the best and most recent works
on astronomy and geodesy, particularly useful for the in-
struction of the young officers intended to be employed in
the work, — the newest astronomical and logarithmic tables
of different kinds, — catalogues of the fixed stars, and celestial
atlasses, — some other works of interest for the observatory,
— the French Connaissance des Tems for several years, — in
the whole forty -five works, of many of which duplicates were
provided.

Comparison of the French and English Standard Measures
of Length, and Regulation of the Bars for the Base Line
ApiHiratus.

The necessity of having a standard measure of length, as
accurate and as authentic as possil)le, for the measurement
of the base lines, is suff^iently evident to shew the propri-
ety of all the care which was taken to attain this object.

The two measures of leni»;th which have been the most
scientifically ascertained and compared, are the French and
English.

They are essentially different in their principle, and of

OF THE UNITEn STATES. 351

tlifTercnt metals, whicli circumstance has always presented
ditriculties ii] tlieir comparison.

The Knglish standard is a hraas scale, divided into inches
and tenihs of inches. U|)on this, the mean of all the possi-
ble n>easiircments of any distance is considered as the pro-
per standard value of that distance, the yard and the foot
measured in this manner heins; equally lei!;al standards,
thou2;h prol)al)ly the yard was originally intemled as such.
The diffVrent scales are of ditlerent aa;es and accuiacy ; hav-
ing been successively improved by various artists, by mak-
ing scales from the mean lengths of various distances, taken
according to convenience, upon the scale from which the
new standard was co|)ied. Upon this siilyect. Sir George
Simcki)urgh Evclin's Account of tlie Comparison of Mea-
sures may be consulted. — Philosophical Transactions of Lon-
don, 1798.

'I'he Fi'ench standard consists in a certain determined unit
of length in iron, given by a bar cut off' to the given length,
either a toise, as formerly, or, as at present, a njetre ; the
iron toises of Peiu being the only authentic original to
which all toises are referred, and the metres of the Commit-
tee of Weights and Measures the authentic originals of the
metres. Of their ratio and the mutual comparison of their
measures, the '• Base du Systeme Metrique" gives a suffi-
cient account.

The standard temperature of the V^nglish scale is 63°
of Fahrenheit's thermometer ; that of the French metre 33°
of the same scale; and the metre having been compared
with the toise at this temperature, it ha-* also been adopted
for the toise, which was formerly referred to J0° of llcau-
mur's scale.

He who has ever attempted to copy any al)soliitc mea-
sured length, with the accuracy necessary to form a standard,
must have soon discoveied what great minuteness, and care
in the choice of means, an- retpiired for this |)urpose.
Beam compasses and similar fiicans will soon be I'ou'hI in-
admissible. 'J'he successive transfer of a measure from a

§52 SURVEY OF THE COAST

scale is far less satisfactory than the successive mechanical
addition of a number of copies made from a standard unit,
and compared to the same, or any other, by proper means.
'J'his conviction, derived from experience and a careful com-
parison of the modes of proceeding used in tlie late works
of this nature in Europe, decided me to adopt, for the unit
measure of the bars intended for \he base, the combination
of four iron bars, each of two metres in length.

I had one more decisive reason for tliis choice, viz. that I
had at my disposition one of the metres standarded by the
Committee of Weights and Measures in Paris, in 1799, which
being of the same authenticity, in all respects, witli any of
these measures in the possession of the respective govern-
ments, and with the platina metre of Paris, places the ac-
curacy of my unit measure beyond all possible doubt. The
comparison made between the different standards, this being
among the number, reduces any multiple length of my de-
terminations to any standard desired, ijy an easy numerical
calculation.

This comparison of the different standards, and the stand-
ardingof tlie bars for the baseline, I executed in the months
of February and March, 1817; but I intended to repeat all the
comparisons again, before the measurement of tlie first base
line with the bars. I had likewise intended to compare the
standard metrical and troy weights, of which I had a full and
authentic collection, by the fine balances placed in the col-
lection for that purpose, and by anotlier founded on hydro-
static principles, invented by my friend and teacher, M.
Tralles. All these it was not possible for me to effect: I
will however here record what I have been able to do in this
respect.

I will first give an account of the particular standards
which I have compared, and of their origin, so that a judg-
ment may be formed of their authenticity. I shall also state
the means employed in their comparison, and for the stand-
arding of my bars, — to shew the degree of reliance which
may be placed in my results.

OP THU UNITED STATES. 258

The standards were the following : —

1. An iron metre standarded at Paris, in (799. hy the
Coniniiltce of Weights and Measures, composed of memlK-rs
of the National Institute, and of dei'uiies from other coun-
tries. Its breadth is 1.13 inches, its thickne>s 0.3(i inches,
Englisli measure. My friend. Mr. J. (1. '['rallos, now mem-
ber of the Academy of Sciences of Berlin, was at that time
the deputy of the Helvetic Republic lor this purpose; and,
as may be seen in the account of the operations of this Com-
niittee, he was the foreign meml)er directing tlie construction
and comparison of the measures of length. He had one metre
constructed for himself and one for me, at the same time
with all the others, and subjected in all respects to the same
processes and comparisons. In the ultimate distril)ution, it
is known, that they were taken indiscrirninately, and consi-
dered equally authentic, this metre being one taken by M.
Trallcs. He was so kind as to give me, at the same time,
a standard kilogramme, constructed in the same manner,
utuler the direction of Mr. Van Swinden, 'I hcse original
standards, both of lengtli, measure, and weight, bear the
stamj) of the Committee, viz. a section of the elliptic earth,
of whicli one rpiadrant is clear, with the numl)cr to. 000. 000
inside of the arc ; the other tiuce quadrants being shaded.

2. One iron toise, with its matrix, in which it fits exactly,
forming together a bar of three inches broad and half an
inch thick, French measure. It is of careful execution, and
presents the form seen at IMate IX. fig. 11. It was made by
Canivd, a la sphere, d Paris, whicli is also engraved upon
it, as also the notice, Toise dc France, etnlonee le i6""' 8*",
1768, a la temperature de 16° da Thermometre de M. de
Reaumur. A line is drawn along the Iiack of the toise, and
from a perpendicular, crossing this line near one of its ex-
tremities, to a point taken near the other extremity, is en-
graved, La double longueur du Pendi.le sous I'Equateur. A
point is marked between the other two at the simple length
of the pendulum. Having been in Paris, in I7i)6. shortly
after the death of M. Dionis du St'-jour, I bought this toise

VOL. II. — L 2

354 SURVEY OF THE COAST

from his lieirs. M. Lenoir, the artist who made the metres
of the Committee, considered this standard, and that of M.
Lenoir, well known from the Base Metrique, to !)e the most
authentic of the kind in private hands. About the time
stated for the standarding of this toise, the Academy of Sci-
ences of Paris discussed the propriety of establishing, as a
natural standard, the double length of the pendulum under
the equator. M. Du Sejour being then a member of that Aca-
demy, and interested in the subject from his situation, this
toise probably had reference to their views, which were af-
terwards directed to the metric system.

3. Two copies of the toises of Lalande, which were
compared in England with Bird's scale, in 1765. The ori-
ginals were lent to me by M. Lalande, in 1793. M. Tn.Ues
and I made two exact copies of each. Tlie present are two
of those copies : they are marked A. and B. like their ori-
ginals.

The standards hitherto mentioned I brought with me to
this country, in 1805. They are now deposited with the
American Philosophical Society in Philadelphia ; togetiier
with various works connected with the subject of a Gene-
ral Standard of Weights and Measures.*

4. A brass metre, of the same breadth as the iron metre
above and half as thick, standarded by Lenoir in Paris, and
compared by Messrs. Arragoand Bouvard with the iron me-
tre, at the observatory, the iGth of March, 1813, as stated,
No. 16 of the catalogue of instruments procured for the sur-
vey of the coast. M. Lenoir, who was employed by the
Committee of Weights and Measures for the construction of
the standard, had made for himself, at that time, a brass
metre, whicli underwent all the comparisons at the standard
temperature at the same time with all the iron and the
platina metres. The present is a copy of this metre, re-
specting which the certiiicate mentions, — En applicant a nos
mesures une correction dependante de I'incgalite de dilata-
tion des deux metaux, il nous a semble, qu' a zero du ther-

'^ See p. xliii., Vol. VI. Old Series.

OF THE UNITED STATES. 256

inometre, le metre en cuivre serait plus court que I'eialou
en I'er (le nos arcliives de Ti^ine iIc uiilliinetre.

5. An iron toise standai cled In Lenoir, No. 18 of the cata-
logue of instruments. It is an inch and three quarters broad,
and one third of an inch thick. The comparison of it by
Messrs. Aira2;o and Houvard, made at the same time witli
tiiat of the metre al)0\ e. says that it was Ibuntl exactly equal
to the toise from Peru in the archives of the observatory.

fi. One iron metie standarded l)y Lenoir in Paris, but not
compared at the observatory of Paris ; l)cin2; No. 18 of tlie
catalogue. It is exactly of the same breadth and thickness
as the metres of the Committee.

7. An iron bar, similar to the metre just mentioned, and
intended to l)e !)rought to the metre length, in the course of
these operations.

8. The brass standard scale, No. 13 of the catalogue, by
Mr. Troughton. It contains 82 inches, divided into tenths,
upon a strip of silver extending over its whole length. It is
three inches broad, and half an inch in thickness. It bears
the arms of the United States, and tlie name, Troughton^
London, 18 1 3.

To it belongs an ap|)aratus for coiriparing measures by
two compound microscopes, sliding on a rule and |)laced pa-
rallel to the scale of the same breadth and thickness. One
of the microscopes has two fixed wires crossing under 30°,
the other a micrometer witli similar wires, pointing out dis-
titKtly the ten tliousandth part of an inch. This apparatus
has been described in Nicliolson's Journal, and other works.
A proi)er apparatus, witli a Hindley's tracing tool, was add-
ed, to whicii tlie miciometer microscope is adapted, for the
purpose of constructing other scales from this.

The scale was divided with that extreme care and accuracy
for whch Mr. Troughton is so justly |)raisfd. It contains the
douliU* length of the principal part of his scale, oC which an
account has been given in Sir (leorge Sbuekburgh Kvclyn's
paper referred to above. Mr. Troughton tirst compared the

S

Tio6 SURVEY OF THE COAST

different portions with one another, for which coMiparison and
the subsequent division, he liad constructed a proper appa-
ratus. He thus formed a table of errors for his scale, in tlie
manner described in his method of dividing, (Phil. Trans, of
1809) and then laid off the new scale, correcting each point
according to the indication of the table.

The French standards were all compared with this scale
of Mr. Troughton, by means of the apparatus described, and
by methods which will be mentioned hereafter.

My particular method of standarding the double metre
jjars required another apparatus, which I had constructed
for the purpose.

It may be said to be impossible to cut a bar perpendicu-
larly to its length, by hand, with the accuracy required. The
tool in question is intended for this purpose. The following
are its principal parts : —

A plate of cast iron, about eight inches broad and two feet
and a half long, exactly even and smooth, is adjusted by screws
from below, upon a strong iron frame, at one end of which
two pieces direct, in a perpendicular slide, the socket piece,
which receives the axis of a circular file, of about tliree
inches in diameter, to which the above plate is adjusted, so
as to make the bar laid upon this plate, and presented to
the file, exactly perpendicular to it. A strong iron bar is
made to slide over the whole length of the plate, by means
of two horizontal screws. The bar to be filed being laid
upon the plate, and against this bar, a trial of filing, in two
inverted positions, will show any defect of adjustment dou-
ble. The adjustment must be made accordingly, and the
surface of the cut will be perfectly even. There is a change
of files of different fineness, and for the last, a turkey stone,
which will take off all the marks of the file, and grind the
surface smooth.

When only one bar is to be standarded, this tool must be
used throughout with its different files, and the turkey stone
last. But as I had four equal bars to standard at once, and
could make the planes of their ends more perfect in conse-

OF THE UNITED STATES. S57

qiicnce of the great surface tliey presented when joined to-
jrether, I proceeded soniewliat diircrcnlly for the last
finisliing.

Tlie bars were guaged, as nearly a3 the workman in Lon-
don could do it, to the hreadth and tliickness of the metres
of tl'.e Committee, and made seven feet four inches long.
The doul)ie metre being only al)out six feet seven inches,
there were nine inches to be cut off, whicli allowed me to
make choice of the best paits of the bars for the cuts, and
to avoid the parts near the ends, which are never equally
well guaged, because the tools, wliich they are worked with,
lose there tluir steady support, and fall off. The pieces
so cut off were besides wanted for making the butting pieces
for these bars and the metres in the comparisons, and for
the final adjustment of these bars, as will be shown here-
after. The bars were lettered A, B, C, D, for tlie conve-
nience of registering them. After their first cutting, there
was enough left in length for the perpendicular tiling. To
bring tlicm as nearly as possible to an equal breadth and
thickness throughout, so as to present for the final adjustment
one entire connected mass, they were all four laid close to
each other upon a strong work bench, and pressed together
by wcilgcs. In tliis position, they presented, by tlie sum of
their breaddis, a surface four inches and a half broad, and
by that of tiieir thicknesses, one inch and a half. They were
then filed togetlier, with one of the circular three inch files
of the above tool, varying their situation successively on
both sides and in all positions. By this process they were
brought to present, in all the combinations, an equal iireadth
and thickness tliroughout. and to lie together like one mass.

Having thus fitted the bars for lying accurately against the
filing tool, they were filed down nearly to their proper length.
A projjer arrangement was made to extend the horizontal
plane of tlie iron plate, so as to support the whole of the
bar. Two of the pieces cut from the ends, one five, the
other seven inches long, were adjusted, by the filing tool.

g58 SURVEY OF THE COAST

like the bars themselves, and rubbed with emerv and oil, to
serve as butt ends, for the final adjustment of the i)ars.

To execute tliis, (he iron plate of the filing tool was fitted
tight in the end of a |)lank, so as to continue its plane over
the whole of it, to a greater length than the bars, and the
plank was then planed, so as to form an exact continuation
of the plane of the iron plate. Upon this plane tlie four
bars were laid along side of each other, pressed together be-
tween brass |)ins and wooden wedges, and held down by
wooden clan)ps. The ends upon the plank were butted by
a straight piece of wood. '1 he ends on the iron plate were
rubbed with the seven inch long buttutg piece, with emery
and oil ; changing their relative position occasionally, until
their ends piesented, in all positions, one even, i)lane, and
smootl) surface, upon which the rubbing piece touched
equally in all places, so as to |)resent with them all one even,
sharp, and straight line at their upper surface.

They were tlien all turned end for end, and made to fit
against the five incli iron butting piece, so as to present again
one even and sharp line, to whicli they were of course per-
pendicular. In this position, they were again fastened as
before, and rubbed again with the seven inch butting piece,
changing their relative position, until they presented, at these
ends also, one uniform regular surface and sharp top line.
The two iron meties of the Committee and Lenoir were
then laid upon them, and appeared to coincide with them in
length. 'Ibis was of course tried several times ; wishing
however to suffer them to be somewhat longer, because tl)e
cooling down of the metal, which is always more or less
heated l>y the working, will always short'u them somewhat.
Indi-ed I have observed that the copies of measures made in
this way are generally shorter than their oiiginals, from this
circumstance ; their compar'son !)eing probably made too
soon after the work, and before the metal is actually cooled
down to the temperature of the original with which they are
compared.

OP THE UNITED STATES. 259

For the actual comparison of tlic metres and these hars.
it was necessary to place tlicin on tlie work bench, on wliich
tile above described comparator and English brass scale were,
at the exact height, which would bring their upper surface,
without parallax, to the foci of the microscopes, which were
of course adjusted for the divisions of the scale. The influ-
ence of unequally supporting the standard bars, by merely
laying someiliing uuvier them at diftcrent places, being great.
I caused pine rules to be made, of sufficient breadtli and
length, and of the exact thickness required for each stand-
ard, L'pon these each standard was laid, together with its
proper butting pieces, when under comparison.

As it is wholly inadmissible to take the edge of a bar as
an object under the microscope for the purpose of compa-
rison, because it never gives a good image, the shorter pieces
cut from the bars, from two to four inches in lengtli, were
filed on the tool, in the manner of the butting pieces above
described, brought to the exact thickness of the standard
with which they were intended to be used, and then the butt-
ing faces of them rubbed against each other with emery and
oil, upon the iron plate of the tiling tool, constantly inverting
their positions, until such a perfect contact was obtained,
that the line formed by it was not so thick as one of the di-
visions of the scale.

These pieces were always laid against the ends of the
standard under comparison, so tliat the junction appeared
like a line drawn upon the standard, with which tiie cross
wires of the micrometer were made to intersect. The mi-
croscopes were furnisiicd witii reflectors, formed of white
paper placed in a position inclining forwards, between the
microscopes and their supports. By these the light was
reflected upon the scale, or tlie standards, in the direction
of the division lines, as required for accurate reading.

To prevent the heat of my bofly from having any influence
on the scale and apparatus, a large sheet of paper was nailed
to the work bench near the microsco|)es, and I worked with
gloves on.

860 SURVEY OF THE COAST

From seven to twelve thermometers were laid constantly
over the scale and the standards, and were read at proper
intervals of time.

The work bench itself was about double the length of the
scale. It was accurately adjusted before the work, and the
scale was so placed with respect to the windows of the room,
that the microscopes received their light from separate win-
dows.

I'he bench was made of two planks three inches thick,
placed at right angles to each other, so that a transverse
section was in the form of the letter T. The top plank was
about twelve inches broad, and the whole rested on six legs.

No fire was kept in the room while the comparisons were
making ; and for some time before, the windows were left
open day and night, to keep the different parts of the room
in an equal temperature, being that of the surrounding at-
mosphere.

For the comparisons intended to be made in one day,
every thing was prepared the day before, and left in such a
state as to require as little handling as possible. This was
done, in order that the parts of the apparatus might acquire
throughout an equal temperature.

All tliese precautions were necessary to obtain satisfac-
tory results, as is well known to men in the practice of such
operations.

The probable error in the microscopic readings may be
considered as increasing with the number of these readings.
Having four metres, and the scale being sufficient to take in
two, I had the means of diminishing this eiror one half, by
comparing two at a time, instead of one. An equation be-
tween the results then enabled me to obtain the value of
each metre. This method had the advantage of removing
every prejudice from the mind of the oI)server in regard to
the readings, in as much as the combination of the diffe-
rent measures and the different influence of temperature
occasioned a variation which completely precluded previous
estimates.

OF THE UNITED STATES. 261

To prepare for reading;, the microscopes were placed over
the decimals, which, on the scale, corresponded to the length
of two metres, viz. 78",7 or 78",8 ; and this distance was
taken from +(" to 79",8 ; whicli brought it equidistant from
both ends of the scale. The microscopes were fixed to
this distance upon the scale with the greatest care ; were
then left for some time and were again verified. The scale
was removed, and the two metres, with their supports, pro-
perly laid in its place, so as to bring the middle of their
breadth under the faces of tiie microscopes. The middle
contact was exactly made, the butting pieces laid to botli
ends, the coincidence of the end under the microscope with
fixed wires effected, the middle contact again verified with
a magnifying glass, tlie moveable wires of the micrometer
microscope moved bytiie micrometer screw upon the image
of the contact under its focus, and the value of the corre-
sponding subdivisions read on the micrometer by its revo-
lutions and subdivisions.

The longitudinal motion required to effect the contact can-
not be communicated by the hand alone : the best mode of
communicating tins motion is by a few light strokes of a
suitai)le piece of wood, applied carefully, and in such a man-
ner as not to separate the different pieces by the counter-
stroke.

Tiie value oftlie micrometer parts was ascertained by re-
peated measurements of a decimal in difi'erent parts of the
scale. From a mean of many such measurements, with the
adjustment of tlie microscopes used for the metres, I found
one decimal on the scale to be measured by one decimal
and four units of the micrometer, or 0",l of the scale equal
to 0",1004 of the micrometer.

Lastly was to be determined, the individual value of the
distance on the scale used in the comparison, in relation to
the moan value of the same distance, resulting from its mea-
surement taken on as many parts of the scale as were ad-
missible, in order to give to the standards compared their

VOL. II. — M 2

g6S SURVEY OF THE COASt

value in terms of the mean distance of the scale, according
to the principle of the En,a;lish standard. This was effect-
ed by about fifty measurements with an unahered micros-
cope, and gave the distance used, 79",8 — i",0=78",800i72
of the mean value of the scale. To this distance all the va-
lues obtained in the metre comparisons were ultimately re-
ferred.

To shorten the mode of registering the results, the com-
bination of the metres, and their position, the following no-
tation was adopted : —

M " denotes The iron metre of the Committee of Weights and Measures

in Paris.

M' The iron metre of Lenoir.

M* The brass metre of Lenoir.

M y The iron bar which I intended to bring to the metre length.

M'^-h' The metre of the Committee and that of Lenoir added to-

gether,— all m.irks being upwards.

M.o+j The same metres, — all marks being downwards.

In like manner, in the other combinations, the addition of
the special marks at the top, always denotes the sum of the
metres so indicated, and the inversion of these letters the
inversion of those metres.

On the 13th of March, early in the morning, the eleven
thermometers, which remained on the scale during the pre-
ceding night, were read ; and after having assured myself
that all was in good order, 1 observed the comparisons in-
serted in the following table : —

OF THE UNITED STATES.

S63

Standartls
compared.

^licrometric
measurement!.

78',r60400

r8',r6ii5o

Ends changed to middle.

78',r60990
78',r6l310

Moan of the
tour results.

Correction of
micmraeter.

Pinnl vnlue
of the mean.

■ r8',760962 — 0",000244 78",760718

Mean of

thi-rmo-

m'-ii-rs.

Fuhren-

heil't

Scale.

30°,85

ai*+' 78'',759030 ~

Mv+/ 78',r60575

Ends clianged to middle. }>78',759777
Mi+l 78',759200

Mg+i 78',760je3

-0",000240 78',759537

Mc+/ 78",760415

Mj+; 78",760450

Ends changed to middle.
M^+' 78",7604r5

Mj+/ 78'',760o50

> 78',76047iJ

-0".000242 78',760230

34M

About half past eleven, the four double metre bars were
successively put under coniparisoti for the lirst trial of their
length, and tbund, by one single measurement only for eacli,
as follows : —

Bar A
B
C
D

78',761500
78 '.762275
78,761450
78,760900

— 0",000246 78,761254

— 0",000290 78,761985

— 0",000245 78',76I205

— 0',000240 78',760660

Sum 315,046125

—0,001021 315',045I04

36*,1

The sum of the four double metre bars appcarinji; slill too
great, the bar B, which gave a result above the otiicrs, was
rubbed somewhat more in the manner above stated, though
single, some of the butting pieces being laid on the side to
support tlie plane.

s

S64

SURVEY OP THE COAST

The micrometer microscope, in the foreo;oins; comparison,
was read hy addition, or from 78",7 onwards. On the I7th
of March, it was turned one half revolution horizontally, so
as to read l)y sul)traction, or from 78",8 backwards, to com-
pensate any possible influence of the micrometer. The mi-
crometer values were verified a»ain in this position, and
found as before ; all other thinst* beina; left as before, and
prepared for the comparison of the next day.

On the 18th of March, early in the morning, all being ve-
rified again and found in good state, the comparisons were
repeated, with the results exhibited in the following table : —

Micrometrio Corrected re- Meao

Standaids readings suli- Mean nf tlie Cwreclionof suits to b' sub- Actual value ef of the

contpured. trat-ttv^ from four results. microraeter. Iraut'-d f ■oin the distance, thcrrno-

78",8. 78",8. meters.

M'-+' 0" ,044075"
M,-|-, 0" ,043030
Ends chang. to mid.
M'+' 0",043250
Mo+i 0".043235_

>0",043900 0",0001756 0",043724 78",756276

46 ,6

W+y 0",03917.5"1
M.,+/; 0",039300
Ends chang. to mid.
M<:+ii 0',040'200
Mj+g 0",040135

>0",039r02 0",0001588 0",039643 r8",760357

48°,S

M'+^ 0",041325"
M,+/f 0",()40830
Ends chang. to mid.
M'-J-." 0',041600
M,+« 0",041225.

>0",041295 0",0001651 0",041130 78^758870

The four double metre bars were now successively put
under comparison, in their four possible positions, the inver-
sion of the letters denoting the inversion of the bars : —

OF THE UNITED STATES.

365

Micrometrio
Standard* reailingssub- Mean of the
compared. trafliv.-Ooni four results,

■8",8.

Bar A 0",044475"

V 0',044'2,iO
Chang. «nil for end.

A 0-,0443'25

V 0",044425

Correcleil re- ^(<.■nn

Correction of suits lo !>• sub- Actual value of of the

micrometer. tmci.-.l from the distance. tli- rnio-

"8", 8. meters.

.0,0443690 O'.OOOirroO 0',0441915 78",7558085

B 0",0433r5'
a 0'.043750

Chang, entl for end. J>0",0433620 O",00017340 0",0431886 78",7568U4
B 0 ,043150
a 0 ",043175

C 0",043575
3 0",043775
Chang, end for end.
C 0,043850
3 0',043975j

>0',0437940 0",00017520 0',0436190 78',7563810

49°.8

D 0",0433001
a 0,043100
Chang, end for end. W',0433625 0",00017345 0",0431890 78",7568110
D 0' ,043550 I
a 0",043500j

50',5

In the afternoon of the same day the comparisons of tlic
metres were repeated, with the results presented in the fol-

lowing table : —

M'-H-' 0,045390'

M.+, 0",044625

Endschang. tomid. J>0',0448290 0".00017930 0",0446497 78",7553503

M'+' 0,044750

Mj+/ 0",044550_

50\3

M<-+y 0',040475")

M, + /r 0",040525 |

Emtschang. tomid. W',0408500 0,00016340 0",0406866 78",r593134

M +y 0 ,04085

Mj-f-zt 0',0415;

mid. ^0
0850 I
1550j

M+y 0",043175"
M -+-« 0,042450
Ends chang. to mid.
M 0 .042.)0()

Mi+X a',042525

)",0426125 0",00017040 0",0424421 78',7575579

51",8

306 SURVEY OF THE COAST

To make tliese results comparable, it is necessary to re-
duce them all to one temperature, by the difference of ex-
pansion between iron and brass. I shall for this purpose
make use of the results of my pyrometric experiments,
made immediately after this comparison, aud described in
p. 224, Vol. I. N. S. of the Transactions of the American
Philosophical Society, the mean results of which gave the ex-
pansion expressed in decimal parts of the whole length, for
one degree of Fahrenheit's Scale, as follows : —

In iron,=0,000006963535

In brass,=0,000010509030

Difference,=0,000003545495

As all tlie details of the comparisons are here stated, it
will be easy to apply any other expansion in the further cal-
culation of the result, if desired.

The temperature having increased during the comparison
with considerable regularity, and my work having been un-
interrupted and uniform from the beginning of each series
of comparisons to the end of it, the temperature correspond-
ing to each of the results may be considered equal to the
mean temperature between the two observed. The tempe-
ratures adopted in the table of results were therefore deter-
mined upon this principle.

I found it best to reduce all comparisons to the tempe-
rature of 32° Fahrenheit, or 0° Centesimal and Reaumur,
for both the brass and iron, as we may easily obtain this
temperature in nature, and it can therefore be presented by
experiment ; which would not be possible, if the value of
the French measures at 32° were given in a length of the
English brass scale at 62°, since this would always introduce
a result of mere calculation. I shall reduce from iron to
brass : so that the length of the metres will be given in En-
glish inches in brass, at the temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.
The brass metre is therefore in this case considered as need-
ing no reduction.

or THE I'NITED STATES,

<J67

In the final reduction of the values olitained. 1 shall aild.
as a constant quantity, 0".0()0t7.2 to each result; this havins;
been shown aljove, to he tlie surplus lena'h of the individual
division used over the mean length of the scale for 78",8.

The following table will |)rcsent the results of all tlie fore-
going; comparisons for the tcmi)erature of 32°, with all the
necessarv reductions : —

Dates of

Temp.

Immoilinip rc-

Uie

Stftnilanis

atlhtf

Sllll uf

Fahrcn-

RcJuelion for tem-

Valoc at S2 »

coinpa-

compared

compa-

tlie compari-

liiil,32''.

pet*alure.

Kahieoheil.

riM>ii9.

rison.

son.

AM. 1^^.+,

}>l'-+l> Sr.l r8",7607180 — 0%6 — 0",0000837-30 78",760806229
32°,5 78 ,7595370 -fO-,5 -f 0",00<10G98108 78' ,759778811
33",7 78',7602300 +r.7 +0',00047-J7134 7S",7G087671S

Mar.18
AM.

M<-+l 47M 78",7562760

15°

,1

M'+!/ 48,1 78',7603570

16'

,1

M'+i' 48-,9 78",7588700

16'

.9

Bar A 49,2 78', 7558085

W

,2

B 49",5 78",7568114

17"

,5

C 49 ,8 78',75638I0

17

,8

D 50^2 78,7568110

18^

.2

A+B+C-fD

Mar.18 J ^1'

PM. i;;;.

W+' 50",5 78",7553503
+ y 51 ,0 78',7593134
+^ 51 -,5 78V575579

18%5
19 ,0
19",5

0 ",00421 65000 78",760664500

0' ,0044957000 78,765024700

0',0047 191000 78',763761100

0' ,0048028600 78",760783360

0 ,0048816200 78',-6 1865020

0 ",0049704000 78 ',761523400

0 ,0050820400 78'.762065090

315",046236870

0",005 1656700 78",760687970
0 ,0053055500 78 ,764790950
0",0054451000 78'",763 175000

The piinciplcs of the arrangement of this comparison
show that tlic result for each individual metre will be ob-
tained by a simple equation of tlie following form, viz. :

2

and in like manner for all the others, by a proper mutation
of letters.

368 SURVEY OF THE COAST

The following table will present these results : —

Dat«ofcomp. M= M' M* M^

Mar. 15, AM. 39",380952064 39",S7992415 39",379854162

Mar. 18, AM. 39",380964100 39",37970040 39",3840606

Mar. 18, PM. 39",381151960 39",37953601 39".3836290

Means 39",381022708 39",37972015 39",379854162 39",3838448
Correction of Brass Metre, as per Certificate +0" ,000393810

Brass Metre corrected according to Certificate 39",380247972

These results might now be compared with others: viz.
with those obtained by M. Pictet of Geneva, in 1802, and those
by Captain Kater, since mine were made ; but as 1 have not
the details of their operations and the expansion they used, on
which it is evident that much depends, I shall omit such
comparison here.

I shall confine myself to inserting the final results found
by Mr. Troughton and myself, in London, in 18 1 3, from a
comparison of the two metres of Lenoir, in iron and brass,
with Mr. Troughton's own scale, each metre being compared
singly by the help of the butting pieces, as above described.
They are : —

Temp, of Correction Value at

Fahrenheit. (for tempi-rature.) 32".

M'=39",3783658 45°,5 +0",0018848 39',3802506

(for certificate.)
M*=39",3799395 46° ,0 +0",0003938 39",3803333

the brass metre requiring no reduction for temperature.

The mean of these two metres in this comparison may
be considered as identical with the mean of the three in the
comparison detiiled above ; and its difference from the mean
obtained above for the same metres is equal to 0,00030789.

The consideration of all these results proves that all co-
pies of metres tend to be shorter than the original from

OP THE UNITED STATES. ;269

which they are taken, from the circumstance that whenever
they are worked, eitlier by tilinji; or rul>l)ing;. to brills'; them
to the proper length, they acquire unavoi'lal)lv a certain de-
gree of heat occasioninii; an expansion wbicli docs not sub-
side fully, l)efore the comparisons vvhich direct the standard-
in* are liiiished. 'I'he metre bcini;; therefore rendered e(|ual
to the oriiiinal under these circumstances, will be found too
short, when it is completely cooled down. Thus the me-
tres made l)y Lenoir are bodi shorter than the orii^iital metre
of the Committee of Weip;hts and Measures. It is fiom
this consideration that I did not l>rino; the bar fully to the
measure, but it still remained consideral)ly above the |)ropcr
len^h. Being however engaged in the comparison, I dis-
liked changing it, and thereby overthrew a part of my work,
wishing to delay it for a future time.

On the 2tst of March, I took the dilferent standards of
the toise under comparison.

The toise of Canivet being half an inch French in thick-
ness, and the English brass scale half an inch English mea-
sure, the microscopes svere adjusted to lit this toise without
parallax, and then the difference was compensated by laying
four thicknesses of white paper strips under tlie wliole
lenscth of the scale. The other toises had strips of proper
thicknesses laid under them to bring them to the same fo-
cus.

'I'he distance of 7fi",8, which is nearest to the length of
the toise, was taken I)ctween the microscopes, from +i" to
78".8 on the scale, placing them nearly at equal distances
from both ends.

The value of the micrometer was determined by lepeated
measuiements of the decimal on the scale between 7>^",7
and /«",><, which decimal was found to measure o", 10053
by the micrometer.

I intended, as l)efore, to determine their value by other
intervals also ; but this being deferred until tlic end of the
operation, as well as the determination of the value of
the distance used in mean distance of the scale, neither of

VOL. II. — N 2

S70 SURVEY OF THE COAST

these measurements has yet been made, on account of the
interruption necessary in order to make the pyrometric ex-
periments before the breaking up of the winter. The mi-
crometer values indicated in the results are however cor-
rected for the above value, and represent therefore actual
decimals of the individual subdivision mentioned. From
this circumstance, the comparison remains confined to the
distance used on the scale ; but it may easily be extended,
by measuring this distance, as indicated, on as many other
parts of the scale as admissible ; and the difference will
probably not be much.

When the microscopes were screwed fast in their places,
the 0° point of the micrometer did not exactly agree with the
division of the scale from which it was intended to read. In-
stead of adjusting it by the screw which guides the slider
of the micrometer and the divided head of the screw, I pre-
ferred ascertaining carefully the point of coincidence on the
division and on the micrometer, and to adopt tliis last as the
0° point of the micrometer, from which the divisions were to
be subtracted, since the micrometer was read from 78",8
backwards, or by subtraction. The point so determined
was 78",8001375; or the actual distance from which the
readings were subtracted was 76",8001375.

The repetition of the comparisons with the microscopic
readings direct, which I had also the intention of making,
was prevented by the circumstances stated above ; and 1
never afterwards could bestow any time upon this subject,
before the collection left my hands.

The abridged notations for the registering of the compa^
risons are as follows : —

C denotes the toise of Canivet.

L Lenoir.

i* the copy of the toise of Lalande marked A.

l^ the same marked B.

the inversion of the letters denoting that the marks on the

OF THE UNITED STATES.

'27 i

toises are downwards, the erect positions that they are up-
wards.

The length of tiic contact in the toise of Canivet is about
two-thirds of an inch. In this three points were observed,
as marked Plate IX. fig. 8, between mm, in the middle ;
between ii, at about one-fourth of the coritact with the ma-
trix from the inner corner ; and between ee, about 0",06
from the end of the contact. The toise was of course kept
with the matrix, as this formed a proper butting piece to
observe by, though the line was not altogether as sharp as
that with tlie butting pieces made for the other standards.
The breadtli of the matrix prevented me however from turn-
ing it end for end, as tliere was not room enough between
the microscopes and their supports.

The following table will present these comparisons ; —

CorreclcJ
readings.

A'aluc of llie Tem-
scalc or pera-

measurc. tare.

33°,4

Toises Mici-omrter Mean Correction

com- readings sub- of ihe read- of

pared, tinctire from ings. raicroractcr.

76",8(Xn375

C" 0',058250 "^

C O",059J00

C« 0",056400

Chan, end for end ^0",0576958 (K,OOOS058 0",0573900 76".742r475

u^ 0 ,057050

,3 0,058675

,0 0",056300

L 0",061530 ■) 35M

1 0, 0605 50
Chan, end for end W',0G06200 0',0003i!13 0",0592987 76,7408389
I. 0,060700
q a,059700 J 36° ,9

'' ^''^cl^?^ I 0",0618350 0",0005277 0",06l50-3 76',7386302
,; 0 ,0d2oo0 )

'". ^'^-?^^!! ? 0,0536750 O',0002845 0,0533905 76',7467470

39' ,0

The results of this table are now to be reduced to the
standard temperature of 3;^'' Fahrenheit, as was done for the

37S

SURVEY OP THE COAST

metres ; for which I shall again use the results obtained by
me, and stated before : —

Toises
com-
pared.

c

L

Tem- Immediate result Reiluction

pera- of the Temp. — 32°. for

ture, comparison. tempetatare.

34°,25
36',00
37",40
38',50

76",7427475
76",7408389
76",7386302
76' ,7467470

+

2%2
4%0
5",4
6^4

+
0",00059722
O",00108820
0 ",00 146921
0",00174145

Value at SSo.

76",74334472
76",74192710
76 ',74009941
76",74848845

76",74429393

At the time of comparison of the two toises of Lalande in
1765, when compared with Bird's scale, the mean of both
was 76",734 at the temperature of 6a° Fahrenheit ; and it
was stated that it was o",034 longer than when determined
by Mr. Graham, of which comparison I know no details.
This comparison of 1765 reduced to 33°, by the results of my
experiments on expansion, would give the mean of the two
toises of M. Lalande, equal to 76",7^^3i63. Whut expan-
sion was used tlien, or whether any correction was applied
for it, I do not know. I have no knowledge of other com-
parisons of the toise, except that which might be drawn
froni the determination of the distance over the British Chan-
nel, by both French and Knglish measures, in the operations
made by General Roy, and by Cassini de Thuiy, for the
junction of the Observatories of Paris and Greenwich.

It is proper that I should observe here, that the toise of
Canivet served to make the four toises for the base measur-
ing apparatus, which was used in the measurement of the
base line of about 43,000 feet on the Marsh ofMoratin
Switzerland, made by Mr. J. G. Tralles and myself, upon
which the triangulation of Switzerland, begun by us, has
been founded.

Though it is evident that the above comparisons of toises

OP THE UNITED STATES. i273

give only individual results, yet it may be proper to men-
tion, approximately, the ratio they give between the length
of the toise and of the metre, omitting the toises of Lalande.
The comiiinations which they give occasion to make, all
give the metre, in parts of the toise, between 0",513162 and
0 ",513137. The Committee of Weights and Measures
adopted, in the construction of the metres, the ratio, 0"51317.
M, Delambre gives, in the Base Metrique, 0",513111185 at
l6io centigrade.

Description of the .Apparatus for measuring Base Lines.

In all surveys of considerable extent, the exact determi-
nation of the line, whicii forms the base of the whole trian-
gulation, is of the greatest importance.

This line forms the absolute unit on which all future units
depend. It is expressed in terms of the unit of Icnglh cm-
ployed in its admeasurement ; and the extreme distances of
the whole survey referred to it must correspond to the places
which astronomical observations assign to them on the earth.

The measurement of a line may appear simple and easy
in common life, where no minute degree of accuracy is re-
rpiircd, and where commonly the line itself is of no conside-
rable Icnglh.

In the application to large surveys this forms the most te-
dious part of the work; and presents, in its meciianical exe-
cution, difficulties, which have always called forth the inven-
tive genius of the oj)erators.

This is not the place to expect a history of the different
means employed in determining tliis line, nor to comment
on their comparative advantages or dinicultics.

It may be easily conceived tliat the most mitnite care is
required to determine the fundatncnial unit Icnglh of a Ijar
or chain to be used in the measurement of a !)ase, from the

274 SURVEY OF THE COAST

Standard unit of length measure, and that the standard unit
employed in it must be well authenticated. The means
which I used, and the authenticity of my standards, are de-
tailed in another place, to which I must refer for informa-
tion on this subject. I shall only observe that I had pecu-
liarly authentic and well adapted means to obtain a multi-
pie of the metre lately determined from the measurements
of twelve degrees of the meridian in Kurope, and to deter-
mine the length so formed in English measure. 1 was there-
fore lead to give this multiple the preference, and accord-
ingly I formed bars of eight metres in length, which I con-
sidered as the longest that would be well manageable in the
actual measurement of a base line.

Considering the principles on which the measurement of
a base line must depend, it is evident that the problem re-
quires :

1. To determine absolutely in space the extreme points
of the unit employed in the measurement.

2. To make this line begin at any given point.

3. To give it a certain determined direction.

4. To ascertain its position with respect to the horizon.
To satisfy tiie first condition, the theory of mathematics

applies most generally three rectangular ordinates, and it is
easily conceived that in this case something similar must be
mechanically executed by some means or other.

In all the methods hitherto used, the meclianical contact
of the bars or chain with the point from which eitlier a pre-
vious bar or a line perpendicular to the direction of the base
is measured, has been aimed at, and as the moving of the
bars in their perpendicular direction presents much difficul-
ty, on account of their weight and friction, this has been ob-
viated l)y small sliders measuring the intervals between the
bars laid near each other in the direction, occasioning of
course a vernier reading which required much care and at-
tention to small quantities.

I considf'red an optical contact of the ends of the bar with
the determined point preferable to any other, both for ac-

OF THE UNITED STATES. S7y

curacy and easy manipulation, and I obtained it in as perfect
a manner as possible, by nieans of tbe following arrange-
ment : —

This part of the apparatus is a microscopic arrangement,
ofwiiici) I'late 111. fig. i, presents a vertical section, of ai)Out
thefouith part of their real size, showing all the screw mo-
tions in the direction of the three rectangular ordinates.

A compound microscope, aa, about seven inches long.
is kept in a vertical position, l)y passing tlirough two ho-
lizontal plates, bb, projecting from two columns, ee. It
can be raised or lowered to bring it to the proper focal dis-
tance, and tlien hold fast by the screws, dd, which press the
spring of tlic circular part of tlie plates, bb, together.

The object glass of this microscope is formed of two halves
of lenses of ditterent foci. The one half will Ijring the
image of a cobwel) tlircad stretched over the end of the bar
at €, about three inches fiom the lens, to the focus of the eye
lenses: the other half lens will bring to the same focus the
image of the rectangular crossing of two lines traced on a
small plate of ivory, h, which is screwed to the middle of
the thick brass plate, ii, at about six inclics from the object
lens, and adjusted in the collimation line of the microscope.
The ends of the bar have, through the middle of their breadth.
a semicircular opening, to admit the cobweb to l)e stretched
across it, and to admit more light from the point h, to come
to the microscope, as seen in its natural size in the horizon-
tal section at g.

In using the a|)[)aratus, the images above n^entioned are to
be brought in contact as in a reflecting mstrument, cither by
the screw of the microscope, or that of the bar, as the case
may require. As the coI)vvcb thread at the end of tlie bar
is perpendicular to the direction of the base, it is best to
place the rectangular crossing lines on the ivory plate, so as
to make angles of 45'^ with the direction of the base. The
contact will then be effected l)y makinii; the image of the cob-
wel) bisect the right angle thus formed. The mierosropes
ihemselves arc to l)c jjlaced <:o that the line dividitig the two

S76 SVRVEY OF THE COAST

half lenses may be in the direction of the base or bars, in
order that the light from both objects may be as equal as
possible, which would not always be the case in any other
position. The microscope must of course be placed at the
proper distance from the point /i, so as to present a distinct
image of this point.

It is evident, that by this arrangement the optical contact
obtained is similar to that of the microscope reading on a cir-
cular instrument, and can be made with great ease and ac-
curacy. The determination of the point of contact in the
veitical direction is equally accurate 5 fur the limit of only
tolerable vision in the compound microscope, which for the
cobweb has about three inclies focal distance, is already very
narrow, and within less than one-twentieth of an incii. This
would hardly aftcct the level of the bars, and still less tlie
difference between hypothenuse and base. But when the
vision is carried to distinctness, it will be totally destroyed.

The two horizontal motions required to place the point
h, and the microscope, are made, in the direction perpendi-
cular to the bars by the screw, kk^ revolving in the end pieces
of the plate, ii, and working in the soLk'>t which projects
above tiie middle of the lower plate, jy. In the direction of
the bars, the motion is made by the screw, W, which turns
in the lower plate, jj^ and works in the socket projecting
fiom the circular piece, ?«;«, below. '1 he positions of these
screws, wlien in actual use, are seen in Plate III. fig. 7 ^' 8.

The circular plate, mm, is encompassed hy a ring. «;?,
which presses it down to the plate, 00, to which this ring is
fastened, but in such a manner as to admit its entire revo-
lution within them, by hard friction, as it is usually called.
By the circular revolution of this plate, mm, the whole up-
per part of this apparatus can be placed in tlic |)osition I)est
adapted to receive the bars freely, as is represented in the
figure.

The plate, 00, is about four inches and a half in diameter,
and is fastened to the steel triangular bar, pp. wiiich is about
seven inches long, and which slides closely up and down \u

OF THK UNITKn STATES. 577

ilie heavy brass truncated cone qq restina; on three less
like r.

'I'lie steel tiiun2;le pp is moved vertically hy the strong
screw 5 of wliith the capstan head t is turned downwards,
and rests a'^ainst the smaller l)ase of an inverted hollow
cone int screwed fast to the solid [)iece q. This screw s
can he moved very gently, to bring the cobweb of the bar
ii.to the focus of the microscope, by a pin and handle fitted
to the holes of tlie capstan head t.

'llie legs ;t. which support this apparatus, are of wood,
and a number (►f tliem ot dillerent lengths should be pre-
pared to suit the inequalities of the ground within the limits
ol the motion oi' the triangular bar />/;, by which the nearer
adjustment to the focus is made. 'I'hey screw in brass fer-
rules, which serve to connect them to the solid piece qq.

Ill the actual use of the ap|)aratus, it is necessary to have
at least three such microscopic arrangements, that while two
of them are used before, the third may I)e left behind for re-
ference in case of accident. This arrangement will be taken
forward when the bar is laid oflTthe second time.

'I'he point //. so determined in space, becomes that from
which, when the bar is moved forwards, the further mea-
surenient is to l)egin. By means of this apparatus, it remains
steady in its place, and the bar. when laid down in the next
position, is adjusted by making tl)e colnveb at the other end
c incide with the focus of the half lens corresponding to it,
as at^; all motions are then niade by the screw work on
the bar ap[)aratus, of which a description shall immediately
be given.

The second and third requisites make it necessary that
the bar which is to measure the distance should be adjusta-
ble in all directions, ft will immediately be seen that the
longitudinal motion is attended with the most friction, and
must on that aecount be impeded as little as possible. This
precaution however seems to have been overlooked in the

VOL. II. — o 2

278 SURVEY OF THE COAST

English base apparatus, where this motion was impeded by
the weight of the whole box and its apjjaratus.

Plate IV, fig. 1^2, presents a horizontal and vertical sec-
tion of the whole apparatus, placed as when in use.

The whole bar between the two foci of the microscopes
consists of an assemblage of four iron bars each of two me-
tres in length, and exactly of the same breadth and thickness
as the metres constructed and standarded by the Commit-
tee of Weights and Measures in Paris in i799. Tliey are
joined together end to end by means of two iron clamping
pieces AA, a section of which, perpendicular to the bars, is
seen, in one-fourth of its real size, in Plate I. fig, 2. Each
of these pieces being clamped to its bar I)y the screw B, the
two corresponding pieces of the adjoining bars are screwed,
in order to make the contact of the bars, by the longitudinal
screws CC, above and below the bars. The bars can be ea-
sily brought in contact, as any gap would be immediately
observed ; and there is no fear of compression, because the
instant of contact is easily ascertained, and before any com-
pression of the metal could take place, the friction of the
screws B would give way, and restore equilibrium and con-
tact.

This assemblage of bars stands edgeways upon rollers F
of one-third of an inch in diameter, placed at short distances
(so that each double metre bar may have four) in brass
pieces DD, which bear also pillars of about one inch in
length EE, rising on both sides of the bars and presenting a
rounded surface to them like a section of a cylinder. Tliis
surface is near enough to the bars to prevent their vacillation,
but not their motion. Different sides of tliem are seen at
Plate HI. fig. 2, 4, n, and a plan of one of them is seen at
fig, 3. In one of these pillars, which is directly above the
screws for the motions of the bar, there is a clamping screw
G. (Plate I. fig. 4) by which the longitudinal motion of the
bars on these supporting pieces and rollers is arrested. From
this point, therefore, the expansion of the bars is allowed to
act with full freedom upon the rollers F.

OF THE UNITED STATiis. ^79

The pieces DD, wliich arc thus tlie iinniediiUe bearers of
the bar, are fastened upon a wooden quadrangular l)ar H
of two inches square and al)out twenty-six I'eet Ion;:;, reccd-
ing about seven inches from each end of the iron l)ar, Plate
III. tig. -1-. and Plate IV. 'I'o prevent, as much as possible, this
wooden bar from warping in (he air, it was formed of strips
of wild cherry, glued together so as to break joints, 'I'o
move this bar H in the direction of its length, and thereby
also the iron bars, there is a brass frame K, Plate III. fig. 4
t^ o, and I'lale IV. with a screw anangement adapted to one
end of it. by three screws LL going through the wooden
bar and the two brass plates which embrace it on both sides.
Two strong perpendicular pieces iMM, Plate III. iig. 4, of
which one forms the butt end of the bar H, and the other
is held parallel to it at the distance of eight inches, form the
socket of the axis of the steel screw Q, which is about 0,6
inches in diameter, and which is hid in the brass framing K.
It is turned by the mdled liead screw I, seen at the end ot
this frame, perpendicularly under the bar.

The piece P, which has the mother screw corresponding
to Q, is fixed solid to the O, which lies flat in the bottom of
the box (o which it is fastened f)y four strong screws passing
through the brass and the bottom board, and made fast by
mother screws from the lower side of the board.

I he piece P, having the mother screw corresponding to
Q, has two friction rollers KU on its side, Plate III. fig. 5,
which press against the upper plate N of the brass frame
K, to prevent any rotatory vacillation by the friction of tlie
screw.

By the screw Q, the measuring f)ars are evidently moved
in the box in the direction of their length. This motion is
fully eased \)y eleven rollers SS of about half an irjch in
diameter, passing under the whole l)rcadth of the bar H.
All lateral motion is prevented l)y steel springs T, pressing
moderately against it from both sides, and which are fast to
tfie uprights holding the rollers, so that the contact of the

s

280 SURVEY OF THE COAST

cobweb on the bar with the imasi;e of the cross on the ivory,
is made by it, when tliis bar is to be placed for i;;oing off
again from tlie point determined by the position of the mi-
croscope.

The piece O, bearing above the mother screw correspond-
ing to Q, has also a i)art X, going downwards through the
bottom of the box, which forms the socket of a steel axis of
two inches long and two-thirds of an inch mean diameter,
ascending vertically fiom the l)rass mother piece Y, which
runs upon the steel sciew ZZ, by which the box containing
all the ap|)aratus above described is moved horizontally in a
direction perpendicular to its length.

The screw ZZ is held by a strong brass fraine which is
fastened to the end of a board of an inch and a half in thick-
ness, by screws exactly similar to those which fasten tlie
piece O to the box. At the other extremity of the box, a
strong circular socket is fastened by screws, receiving below
an axis Y, exactly equal to that described before, and move-
able in the same manner by another screw Z, equally fasten-
ed to the thick lower board Z'.

This lateral motion is again eased by twenty-four brass
rollers GO, an inch in diameter and one incli and a quarter
long, fastened below the l)ottom of the box, and so tixed
that two are opposite to each other near the side of the box.
This motion being across the grain of the wood, there arc
screwed to the lower l)oar(l Z', tliin crossing pieces bb. of
very hard wood, and in the direction of the grain, upon which
rollers move with great ease, and without making any im-
pression.

The box of this apparatus is always carried upon the thick
board Z', and jjlaced upon theliipods in a direction so near-
ly true, as to be within the limits of the screws ZZ : it is
then placed by these screws accurately in the true direc-
tion, being guided by a telescopic arrangement at the top of
the box, to be described immediately.

The strong board Z', which supports the box with the bar
apparatus, rests upon five tripods with elevating screws in

OF THE UNITED STATES. 281

ihe centre, as seen in Tlatc IV. A ninnl)eroftIiesc tripods,
?liftk'icnt to sujiport two Ien2;lh-i of l)ais. niust he in icadi-
ness. They should have lej;s of dilliTent lcn>j;th'«. so that
they may be raised or lowered, to suit the inequahtics of the
ground.

'I'o place these tripods properly, so that tlie l)o\ may rest
equally on them, it is iiecessaiy to have a lari^jc level, similar
to those used by masons, and lotis; enouG;h to reach three tri-
pods. It should have an alhidade han.2;ins vertically l)y its
own weight, with a horizontal spirit level, and an arc Ixdow
consisting of as many degrees as the locality of the ground
may require, as seen at Plate IV. tig. 3.

The hox includina; the bars and the other apparatus de-
s( r-l)cd. of which XX is the bottom, is about nini* inehes in
\\id;h and lie'glit at l)oth ends and llfleen inches in the n)id-
(llc. it is strengthened at the upper part l)y seven crossing
pieces (Id, with notches holding tlie sides in their [)roper
jiositions. There is no wooden cover to the box, as a piece
of canvas is intended to be huns; loosely over it, vvhicli pre-
vents the inner part of the l)OX from heating. At both ends
there are iirojectino; pieces, which widen so as to cover the
microscope a[)paratus. and shut out the side lii^ht from the
olijects observed and the sun from the ends of the bar. They
move on hinges, in order to turn them back on the sid<>s of
the box and to prevent them from injury. This airange-
ment is seen at IMate IV.

At the top of the side of the hox, near the end where the
screw motions are, a brass support c Is adapted, having a
te|('seoi)e exacllv equal to those on the ten inch sextants,
and adjustable exactly in the same maimer in its hori/onial
diieclion. It is of small mignifying [)ower, so that a pin. /J
erected at the other extremity of the Iiox. mav be seen with-
out parallax at the same time with a distiint signal rlirecling
the measurement. It has a verti'al wiic in tin* focus to ef-
fect the adjustment of the box inde|)endeiit of the pin. It
may not be amiss to place two such telescopic arrangements

^SS, dURVEY OF THE COAST

on the box, one directed forwards in tlie manner described,
the other backwards on the other side of the I)ox. These
will serve for the purpose of verification, and may be taken
from the collection of instruments, of which all the parts are
double.

It is evident that half the breadth of the box, or distance
of the directing telescope from its middle, must be consi-
deied in viewing the signals used in the alignments of the
base. This condition will be satisfied by making the breadth
of the signals equal to that of the box, and by directing the
telescope to the proper side of each signal in the fore and
back observations.

In relation to the fourth requisite of the apparatus for
measuring base lines, viz. the ascertaining of the position ol
each part towards the horizon, the simplest and easiest mode
might seem to be to measure the line actually horizontal,
and in case a difference of level should occur, in which it
would be too inconvenient to follow the same level, to fall
or rise to a different level by means of a plumb line. But
this mode should not be adopted when great accuracy is re-
quired, as experience would soon prove to an attentive ope-
rator. The deviations from the level to be obtained will
increase so as to be unsatisfactory, and the placing of the
apparatus will be found too tedious, and at the same time
liable to inaccuracy.

The measurements were generally taken as near as pos-
sible to the soil. This supposes of course that the lines mea-
sured in the intervals were all straight lines, which probably
was not the case.

I considered that the shortest as well as most accurate
mode of proceeding was to ascertain the true position of
each bar when it was actually employed in the operation.
Horizontal measurements, however, should be taken when-
ever the ground is favourable to them ; and when this is not
the case, the tripods should be fixed to the proper inclina-
tion by means of the level above mentioned.

or THK UMTEU STATES. 4*88

The local point of tlie cobwcl) on the bar being dftcrmincd
with srcat accuiacy jn lespcct to its elevation, (as is evident
iVoni tlie al)sence ol" parallax between the two olyccts,) we
may measure from it in any inclination that occurs, without
ftar of error in the distance.

The following is the arrangement added to the i)ar appa-
ratus to measure this inclination. It is seen in both figures
of Plate IV. hut more ])articularly in Plate 111. fig. 4, 5, fj R.

Upon the strong brass frame K. forming the leading part
of the wooden bar H, a sector of ten inrlics ladius is screwed
by its strong edge bar mtn, (fig. 4) and presents itself verii-
tically, its centre being at A, and the divided arc ff, at the side
of the head I of the screw Q. It contains an arc of upwards
of thirty degrees. Upon the alhidadc of this sector there
is a spirit level of al)out seven inches long, ad)ustal)lc to the
0'' of the sector by the screw i, which makes it revolve about
the point /r. The alhidadc being moved by the tangent
screw racking in the circumfeiencc of the arc c^. until the
level be obtained with the alhidade corresponding to any in-
clination of the apparatus, the reading of the vernier on the
arc will indicate the inclination of the ai)paratus or the bars
to whicli tlie sector has been adjusted.

For the reduction of the inclined distances to the horizon-
tals, it is evident that a table of differences between the hy-
potenuse and base of a right angled triangle can be con-
structed to any degree of accuracy desired, the quantities of
which referring always to the same unit, viz. the length of
one full system of bars, will be taken out without any calcu-
lation, and their sum can be subtracted from the sum total at
once.

Respectitig the thermometers, it will not be necessary to
say any tiling here, as it is easily conceived that they must
all be read at each laying of a box.

1 might now (lescril)e the manipidation of this apparatus
in the actual measurement of a base line, but I consider the
use of each part of it so obvious to a person sufficiently ac-

§84 SURVEY OF THE COAST

quaintcd wiili these subjects, as to render such description
unnecessary. Plate IV. presents both a horizontal and ver-
tical view of the whole apparatus, as when actually employed
in the measurement.

The safe transportation of the boxes between their placing
and removal, from under the microscopes, will requiie con-
siderable care, and also an arrangement to prevent the box
from being put out of shape, in carrying it upon uneven
ground, and by which in an extreme case even the bars
might lose their contact. It will therefore be proper to ad-
just these bars, in case of any suspicion of this kind.

There being two complete sets of instruments in the col-
lection intended for the survey, and a case seldom occurring
in which l)oth sets shall be employed at the same dme, it may
be convenient to use more than one full set in an operation.
For instance, take more than three microscope stands. For
greater security, take the directing telescope of tlie set not
in use to make the back verifications of the line, by placing
it at the other side and end of the box. Take additional rol-
lers, thermometers, changes of legs, tripods, ^c. ^c.

The manner in which the journal of the measurement of
a base line should be kept requires minute care, on account
of the great number of observations and remarks to be in-^
serted. 1 would here give a sketch or extract of such a jour-
nal, had I completed the measurement of a line with ths appa-
ratus ; but the survey of the coast was interrupted before this
could be effi-cttd. I shall however insert a few remarks,
which occurred to me in Switzerland, when measuring with
Mr. Tralles. now Member of the Academy of Berlin, in 1791
and 1797, a base line of alwut 42000 feet in length, and upon
which the triangulation was founded. This base was mea-
sured twice : first, with a chain similar to that made by
Ran\sden for the Rnglish survey, — and secondly, with an ap-
paratus of four toise bars, somewhat similar to that above de-
scrilied.

1 shall place these remarks under the following heads : —

OF THi: TNITEI) STATES. a85

1. It is necessary to mark in tlic preliniinat v measiirc-
meiit and the alignment ot the hasc a nunibti ol points, at
equal and moderate distances I'rom each otiier, so t:iat at
least one ol these points may be found in each day's work of
the accurate mcasuri-nicnt. lor the purpose of showing whe-
thci' the lcn2;th of a l)ar had heen omitted, or written twice.

2. The jomnal must have re2;ular columns for the obser-
vations made at the laying; oft" of each box. and a c(tlumii
should !)c left for incidental remarks, ihe liist eolninn sliow-
ing t!ie number of each barliomthe l)e^inninii; to the end.

3. I he time at which the adjustment of each bar is effect-
ed by the microscopic apparatus sliould be noted to the near-
est minute. Tliis may be entered in the second cohnnn. It
is evident that tliis will serve to check the registerinu; of the
bars, by showinn; whether any mistake had been made that
was not accounted for in the remarks inserted in the left co-
lumn.

4. The stand of the sector, indicating the position of the
bar towards the horizon, toj^eilier with the stands of the se-
veral thermometers, marked and placed after each other in
the order in which they have been read, should occupy the
third or next column.

5. The points of coincidence of each of the marks stated
in Art. l with the bar or any fraction of it must be carefully
marked in the next column. Likewise the passage of any
ditch, fence, or other permanent object that may be of use
in fmding any particular point in the line after having pass-
ed it.

6. At every fifty or hundred bars, a mark should be left
behind, so accurately determined, that, in case of accident,
the measurement n»ight be auain made from it, without the
necessity of returning to the bei!;iruiing. These marks should
be numl)ered. and the time of ()lacing them should be writ-
ten in the journal.

7. In the evenimr. or at any other time when the work is
susjjeiidrd, tlie place of the last microscope apparatus taken
oft' should be maikedand registered in the journal.

vol.. II. — e i

§86 SURVEY OF THE COAST

8. At such suspension, the last microscope stand and the-
bar last layeil off' with its microscope stands adjusted, must
remain in their places till the work is resumed. The whole
must be covered with a tent, and well secured.

(A tent made for this purpose, with others made for the
microscope stands, was delivered with the apparatus.)

9. Notwithstanding all these precautions, it will be proper
to keep a constant watch over the apparatus when left out.
and even perhaps to make a fence round it, if it be in a
place where cattle pasture.

10. In the morning, or whenever the work is resumed,
every thing must be carefully verified and noticed in the
journal.

11. It is of course understood that the dates before and
after noon, the slate of the weather, the temperature of the ex-
terior air at stated intervals, and any circumstances that may
increase or diminish the confidence in the work at any time,
must be inserted in the journal, and that it should contain a
detailed account of the manipulation adopted, the persons
employed, ^c.

13. If the base should not finish v.?ith a full length of bar,
as is generally the case, the last point determined by the bars
should be carefully marked on the ground, and the comple-
mentary distance measured by means of a beam compass,
or by any other means that shall lead to satisfactory re-
sults.

13. The measurement of a base line should be continued
with as few interruptions as possible. Considerable trouble
will then be saved in respect to covering, fencing, ^c. the
apparatus, and all sudden and unequal changes of tempera-
ture in the bars will be completely guarded against. I would
therefore advise the operator to finish each day's measure-
ment without interruption, and when this cannot be done, to
suspend the work till a more favourable opportunity presents
itself.

OF IHE UNITED STATES. S87

Description of the Two-feet Theodolite.

Plate V. presents a general perspective view of the in-
strument ; and Plate III. fig. 7^8, the details of the centre-
work in a horizontal and veriical section.

The horizontal circle aa is of two feet diameter, divided
on a silver arch to every five minutes. It is fastened on
six conical hollow radii bb, proceedinp; from a strong hollow
hexagonal centre piece c of six inches in diameter, to which
tliey are screwed fast each by four strong screws passing from
the inside of the piece r into the strong base of the cone.
'I'lic diameter of the cones is three inches at the base, and ah
inch and a half at the outer circumference of the circle.

Of these six radii, three reach only to the outer circum-
ference of the circle, and the three otheis, intermediate be-
tween these, project about two inches farther, to receive the
spheric nobs dd, through which vertical double screws pass,
wliich level and support the instrument upon the truncated
cones ee. These elevate the instrument sufficiently above
the stand, to admit the verification telescope under the cen-
tre of tlie instrument.

The construction of these double screws for the adjust
ment of the instrument in levelling is best seen in the sec-
tion of the Repeating Tlieodolitc, Plate IX. fig. 2 ; as this
construction has been ap|)lied to all tlie larger instruments,
in order to render their adjustment more exact, c' is the
outer screw, which is of I)rass, going into the mother screw
perpendicularly through the nob. and having its milled head
c' below it. This screw being hollow receives the steel screw
a' through its whole length : tlie milled head d has below
it a sei>ment of a sphere, left rough so as to impress itself
into the lead which is in the top of tlie cone r. The screws
being placed so as to give play to the screw c' both in the
nob and inner screw a', the motion of the screw c' serves to

288 SURVEY OF THE COAST

raise or lower the arm or radius of the instrument wliich it
directs ; and the inner steel screw having smaller threads
than the outer c', the effect of its motion is proportional
only to the difference between the distances of the thieads
of the two screws, by which means a very delicate motion
is obtained.

By the three cones 6f, e, e, the instrument is fixed upon a
solid stand of pine wood, the circular top board of which is
two inches thick. A hexagonal frame underneath joins this
board to the three legs, and at the same time preserves the
top from warping. Pine wood was preferred, l)ecause it
warps the least ; and though, strictly speaking, a triangular
board would be sufficient, the circular one is much prefera-
ble, on account of the protection wliich it affords to the in-
strument against accidental touches in passing round it dur-
ing the observation. The board is, for the same reason,
three feet in diameter ; and I even took the precaution of
placing the cones e always above the legs of the stand, to
give the instrument more firmness. In the centre of the
board is a hole, so that the centre of the instrument may be
centered to the station by a plumbline hung from a loop in
the centre below the axis.

The hollow hexagonal centre piece e above mentioned
receives through its middle the bell metal axis f, Plate V.
fig. 2 65 3, eleven inches in length, two inches in diameter
at the bottom of the inner hollow part of the piece c, and
an inch and a half at the top. which shows above the drum
in the perspective view of the instrument, Plate V. The
bottom part of this axis has a shoulder hh by which it is
fitted into the hexagonal centni piece, and below it the plate
gg projects to the outer circumference of the same hexagon,
which serves to fasten the axis to this piece, by means of
six strong screws, seen in fig. 8. The circular liole in the
bottom of the centre piece c is the centre upon which the
circle was divided.

The brass socket of the axis, by which the whole upper
part of the instrument revolves upon the above axis, readies

OF THE UNITED STATES. XiSU

tliroiiG;li the drum, and is fastened to it l)v the three circular
plates tbrniino; the toj), the bottom, and the middle plate ol
the drum /, Plate V. fig. 3.

This drum is nine inches in diameter and five inches and
a half ill heip;ht. From tlie side of it project three horizon-
tal amis /, /, /, at l:iO degrees from each other, which are
hollow truricated cones similar to the radii of the horizontal
circle, and of the same diameter near the drum, but much
more tapering. Each of them bears at the end a strong
piece (/(/. with a circular vertical hole to receive the com-
pound micrometer microsco])es by which the divisions are
read off.

1 hcse microscopes are six inches long, and with a mag-
nifying power of about fourteen times. They are marked
A, B, C, in the direction of the numbers of the gradation.
The degrees are only read by the microscope marked A,
and are there indicated i)y the light index m. which projects
from below the arm of the microscope, and folds back upon
it when not in use. When in use, it is made visible by the
microscope, when laid out so as to point close to the divi-
sion, without however touching the arch, in order not to
scratch it. The field of the microsco|)es embraces about
4,.T minutes of the division, so that there is never any ditTi-
culty in reading the smaller parts. The thirty minute marks
being extend'.-d entirely across, like those of degrees, and the
degrees distinguished by a strong dot in the protracted |)art
of the line, always one or the other appearing in the field.
The micrometer heads nn read in the inverted direction, on
account of the inversion of the image i)y the microscopes, so
tliat while the degrees go from right to left, the reading in
the microscopes presents itself directly, or from left to
right.

These microscopes being well known by various descrip-
tions, it would not lie proper to enter here into further de-
tails resprctim:!; them. They can l)e adjusted to 120 de-
grees by a small horizontal motion, which they admit in the
pieces q, directed and fastened by three screws on the side

ggO SURVEY OF THE COAST

of these pieces at about 120 degrees from each other. The
vertical adjustment of the whole microscope to the proper
focus is made by two milled rings embracing the micros-
cope, one above, the other below, the piece q. The adjust-
ment for the arrangement of the microscope, as it refers to
the proper situation of the wires with respect to the focus of
the object glass, is obtained by screwing the lower concealed
part into or out of the upper cylindrical part. It is held in
its proper place by a small ring b'. As it is well known that
these two last mentioned motions must always be made to-
gether, and the clearness of vision, absence of parallax, and
accurate measurement must be obtained by both at the same
time by trial, it will be sufficient here merely to indicate the
screw serving for it.

A small screw pp^ at the end of the micrometer opposite
the screw head moving the rake or indented plate of the
same which indicates its 0° point, will make the final adjust-
ment to the division point, or the distance between the mi-
croscopes desired.

After some experience, I have, however, found it best not
to adjust the microscopes to 130° distance, as it appears to
me that the influence of a little deviation in this respect may
be wholly neglected in comparison with the advantages of
having the microscopes fixed simply in the middle of their
holding pieces qq, which makes them more firm, and places
the 0° point of the micrometer in the middle of the field of
vision. 1 used them therefore always in this position, in
which they remained perfectly steady, and which gave be-
sides a kind of moral advantage, from the circunislance, that
as the readings became thus different in minutes and seconds
for each microscope, the observer remains entirely unpreju-
diced as to what he should read at each microscope, and
each reading becomes thereby equally independent and im-
partial.

Upon the drum i are two spirit levels, four inches long, at
right ansjles to each other, to serve for the first approximate
levelling of the instruments, which 1 found, under tolerably

OF THE UNITED STATES. aUl

favourable circumstances of temperature, always exceeding-
ly correct, and rivalling the large upper level, wlien tiiat
nicety of adjustment was observed which their smaller scale
naturally required.

Tlie transit telescope, which forms the upper part of this
instrument and by which the angles are observed, is sup-
ported by two columns fifteen inches high screwed upon the
drum at right angles to the microscope A. In travelling,
these colunuis are unscrewed at oo, to prevent the box in
which they are carried from being top heavy, and more ef-
fectually to secure them from injury ; though I had the box
also fitted to receive them with the instrument in some
cases, in order not to disturb the upper adjustments of the
instrument.

>t the lower part of the drum, in the direction of the two
columns, towards flie right from the microscope A, is the
arm k, made broad, but thin, so as to have sufficient strength
in the horizontil direction and yet very little friction on the
limb. This has the clamping and tangeni screws, and pre-
sents itself always conveniently to the hand, in all positions
of the instrument towards the observer.

The tops of the two vertical columns bear two pieces //jy,
projecting outwards to admit the axis, twelve inches in length,
of the transit telescope, which is supported between them in
rectangular Y's as usual. In one of these pieces, at ;•, is a
screw, with a capstan head, showing through a cut in the
side, which bears by the head upwards against the piece ;/,
and by the screw part below against the uppermost part of
the column, forcing the piece y upwards by the mere spring
of the metal, and, between this bearing point and the screw
5, fastening this piece to the column.

The telescope is a complete and very excellent transit
instrument, describing a whole vertical, the eye end of the
telescope havitig room to pass between the two columns
witliout touching the top of the axis /^'. It has thirty inches
focal length, two inches and a hall' apeiturc, and four numni-
fying powers, the largest of which is about sevcnlv-scven

292 SURVEY OF THE COAST

times, and one of the niifldle ones prismatic. There is a
lengthening tube of alioiit five inches in length to the object
end, to keej) off the side Ught and shelter the object glass.
It balances at the same time the opposite end of the teles-
cope. Then equilibrium is estal>lished in all positions of the
telescope without clamping, which always more or less affects
the accuracy of its position.

In the focus of the telescope there are three fixed verti-
cal wiles, and one horizontal one moveable i)y a micrometer
arrangement similar to that of the reading microscopes, by
which sjnall differences of level can be measured, as a very
fine large spiiit level can be hung lengthways to the telescope
by two a(ljustai)le steel pins, on the side of the tube not seen
in the figure. The vertical wiies are of course adjustaltle
like those of any transit instrument, by two opposite screws
on the sides, as d'.

The middle piece of the transit is a zone of a sphere of
five inches in diameter, to which the two parts of the teles-
cope are screwed in diametrically o()posite directions, and at
right angles to these the two truncated cones, forming the
axis. Their base is a circle drawn on the cord of about i20°
of the central sphere. It diminishes to three-fourihs of an
inch at the other end, to receive the bell metal axis piece
of half an inch in diameter. This shape presents a great
strength of support against the sinking of the telescope by its
own weight, wliile the central sphere is much lighter than
the square formerly used, without any loss of strength.

This axis is perforated on one side to admit the liglit of
a lantern placed on a piece projecting from the top of the
column. A plane white glass is placed at the end of the
axis, and in the si)heric centre piece a plate, at an angle of
45°, perforated for the passage of the rays to the telescope.
It is covered with gold leaf left unpolished, to prevent the
glare of the reflected light on the wires. It admits of a small
adjustment by the fastening screw t in the middle of the cen-
tral sphere.

The lantern beaver is very light, slides from outside on

OF THE UMTEli sTATlis. ;89c{

the piece //. so as to cmhiace it hv two small pieces, and is
screwed on from below In- a fmgei- screw.

The other end of tiic axis bears outside of its support a
circle of six inches in diameter, divided on silver. Upon
this revolves an alhidade of three arms, the two horizontal
arms ?/, u serving to read on both sides by verniers whicli are
attached to them and to hold the spirit level. The vertical
arm r, which is formed of the same piece of metal as the
vernier arms, clamp these and the level, l)y the linger screw.
The level being adjusted by liand, when so clamped, the te-
lescope will, in revolving, read vertical angles with suHkicnt
approximation to serve for finding a star, or determining
any other elevation, within a certain degree of accuracy.

The adjustment of the axis of the telescope and tlic llnal
levelling of the instrument arc effected by means of a large
spiiit level w, suspended by hooks frojn both ends of the
axis, outside of the supports //,//. As the space immediately
under the axis is not iree, it hangs on each side close to the
columns. It is purposely without adjusting screws, and is
therefore brought to adjustment by the filing of its hooks;
and as the level is ground to a regular curve inside, the nice
adjustment is made by two small ivory scales sliding upon
the level, by two sections of tube holding to it by their spring.
This is the arrangement of all the larger levels of the instru-
ments, excepting those of the repeating circles.

Below the horizontal circle is a verification telescope, sus-
pended in hooks from two opposite conical radii 6, b, exactly
similar in size and construction to the upper telescope, but
of course witliout a vertical circle.

, The eye end has a micrometer arrangement similar to the
upper telescope, with one fixed wire in the direction of the
length of the micrometer and three wires perpendicular to
it, moveable by the micrometer screw. The whole micro-
meter arrangement stands at an inclination of about i.j° with
the horizon, so as to increase the chances of intersection
with any disfinct object within the field of the telescope.

VOL. II. Q s

g94 SURVEY OF THB COAST

The object end has a lengthening tube giving to this part
some preponderance, by which the eye end is pressed up-
wards against an arrangement of three small sliding tubes x,
which reach downwards from the limb of the circle, and
present the rounded end of the finger screw z' to the upper
part of the telescope. By the sliding of these tubes, and the
filial adjustment by the screw z'. and the micrometer arrange-
ment, the accurate pointing upon an object for the sake of
verification is obtained.

As it cannot be my object liere to go into such details of
description as must be considered generally known, the above
is, I believe, sufficient to explain all the peculiaiities of the
instruments, and to detail their principles and use.

Methods of Observing with the Two-feet Theodolite.

The limits assigned to the present papers rendered it ne-
cessary, in the description of this instrument, to suppose that
a general idea of it might be obtained from the figures there
given. The same reason now compels me to consider the
general principles and method of levelling it, together with
the adjustment of its line of collimation and axis, as well
known, and to confine myself to the explanation of its pe-
culiar properties, and of some theoretical principles and prac-
tical advantages not hitherto treated of, at least to my know-
ledge.

An observer furnished vvith an instrument with which he
has never oliserved should first ascertain its properties
and defects from the mathematical principles on which it is
constructed. This will be more indispensalile, when the in-
strument has had to undergo transportation.

In this inquiry he will be much assisted, — if, besides his

OF THE UNITED STATES. 2\)5

general scientific knowledge, he is acqiiaint^fl wifli the man-
ner in which the instiuinent lias l)een constiiictcd. and the
peculiar abilities of the artist wlio constructed it. Judi>;ing
tVoni these circumstances the possible and proportional ac-
curacy of the execution of the instrument, he w II be al)le to
direct his inquiry sooner to a satisfactory result.

In an instrument which is as perfect as possible, the ad-
justments are of course only accurate within certain limits,
and he has to guard against tiie errors which he n)ay be lia-
i)Ie to in consequcjice of them, as well as against those ot
the instrument itself.

It l)ecomes therefore the duty of an accurate o!)servcr in
no case to rely merely upon the accuracy of his instrument
and his own skill. I)ut to adopt such a metiiod of ol)serving
as will counteract, as far as possil)le, the errors ol' the instru-
ment and those to which he himself is liable in making his
observations.

Without such a method, and a regular system in his obser-
vations, his mean results will be under the influence of ha-
zard, and may even be rendered useless by adding an ob-
servation, which would repeat an error already included in
another observation.

It is possible to correct angles measured by an incorrect
or ill adjusted instrument, by mathematical formidiv, when
the data for the reduction are exactly known ; l)ut such data
aic always difficult to ascertain with sufficient accuracy.
The reductions rccpiire longer calculations than the obser-
vations themselves, or at least are more tedious than a re-
petition of the obsei vations. In a work of great extent, these
reductions occur so fiequently, and the calculations of the
ol)servations art- at the same time so mntierous, as to render
any method, m wliich it would be necessary to retain them,
extremely lalxtriuus. On the other harnl, the ol)servations
mav always be repeated in a way in wbicli these corrections
will compensate each other.

As to the instrument intended for the survey, which is the

s

S96 SURVEY OF THE COAST

subject of the present papers, I had reason to entertain the
liighest expectations. It was executed under my own in-
spection l)y that distinguished artist Mr, Edward Trougliton
of London, agreeably to our united views, and with that in-
terest for its success, which the great friendship with which
lie was pleased to favour me could alone inspire.

The actual operations made at a station of a survey on
solid ground, in a proper place, with good signals, ^c. are in
every respect best adapted for the trial of the instruments,
and ibr devising a proper method of observing with them.

From the remarks which will be found in their proper
place, on the method of dividing used in England, it may be
observed and has been observed already by Ramsden in de-
scribing his dividing engine, that the exact placing of the
axis in the centre of the division is still effected by trials and
indirect means, and that when obtained exact, it may even
lose this position by transportation or accident. It will there-
fore be proper to inquire whether the instrument be well
centred or not, and, at all events, to use the indiscriminate
mean of the two or more equidistant readings, which are
now made on every instrument, as one single reading would
be affected by the whole error of the eccentricity.

The half sum of any two vertical arcs in a circle is equal
to the arc at the centre. Therefore the indiscriminate mean
of any even number of opposite readings on an instrument
will be equal to the angle at the centre. Also the third of
of three angles at the same point out of the centre of the
circle is equal to the angle at the centre of the circle. And
in general it will be seen, that the indiscriminate mean of any
number of equidistant readings will be equal to the angle at
the centre of the circle. This property is new as far as I
know, and may be demonstrated as follows :

Plate V. fig. 1. — Let C be the centre of the division, C the
centre of motion, d the point on the limb marking the read-
ing of the alhidade ; C<f=the radius of the division. Then
C'CM is the line joining these two centres (protracted),

OP THE rNITED STATES. S97

and rfC'M=tlie angle of tlie first reatlin;^ with the line joining
the centres. In the triangle rfCC, let

dC'M=<t

Cd =R=Radius of the circle,

CC =e = Eccentricity of the instrument ; also

let 2/7+1 denote any uneven number of equidistant readings,
into which the circumference has been divided, (as for even
numbers, the demonstration is evidently made by the cor-
rection of two opposite readinsrs.) and put .3=the constant an-
gle between tlie readings : Then we have dCM — rfC'M=

C'dC, and sin. rf= ^jsin.'? for the first reading, or that nearest

to the line C'CM.

The second reading will give,

Sin. d'==^sin.('?-f-*3).

The third,

Sin. d"~sin.{<p+2f).

And the 2n"' or last reading will be,

Sio.d"'" = ^s\n.h+2m).
ft/

The sum of all the corrections will therefore give the fol-
lowing series.

Sin. rf+sin. d'+s'm. d"+ . . . +sin. d =

„ sin. »-i-sin.(*+^)+sin.)»+2/')+ . . . +sin,(»-f-2«^) |

The sum of the series in the parentheses is equal to
Cos.r.— 4^)— cos.(*-f-^*)

X598 SDllYEY OF THE COAST

the numerator of which is 0, for (2n+i)s=2„=ihG circum-
ference of the circle; and which shows that the indiscrimi-
nate mean point indicated by all the readings will 2;ive the
true ang;le at the centre of the division between any given
point and the line of centres.

For any other series of readings making with the line of
centres an angle=<}.', the series of corrections would be simi-
lar to the above :

Sin, .c+sin. /+sin, <»"+ . . . +sin.,f =
7- sin. 9'+s\n.(f'+i^)+s\n.{f'+2$)+ . . . +sin.('f'+27i^)

The correction of the angle measured by these two series
of readings will be equal to the sum of the difference of the
two corrections for eacli microscope. Or,

=(s\n.d — sin. <r)+(sin.rf' — sin. y)+ . . . +(sin. d — sin. <r )

=:^ sin. <p — sin. ^'+sin.(f+^) — sin.(*'+/2)+sin.(9-f-3;e) —

sin.(<f' -1-2/2)+ . . . +s'm.(<i'+2m) — sin.(9'+2w/3),

observing that sin. <? — sin.<i''=2sin.f(* — <f')cos.|(«+;^), and so

on for the other arcs, the second terra, or the sum of the
corrections will become,

S=^sin.|(<f'— *)[ cos. ^ +cos,(^+^)+cos.(-^+2/3) +

cos.(^+3^)-^ . . . +cos.(^+2w^) 1

The series in the parentheses being that of cosines of arcs
in arithmetical progression, is

_«■"■(— + -^0-sm.(—-^)
2sin.i^

OF THE UNITED STATES. ^yO

whence,

S=

and since by the supposition, ('2n+i)B=Zr, (2n+^)s=2T — \a
- — \^. the two sines in the parentheses become identical,
and consequently S=0.

It follows tlieiefore, that wliatever be tlie number of equi-
distant readings into which the circumference is divided, the
indiscriminate mean of all the readings will give the true an-
gle at tlie centre of the division. It is evident that for three
microscopes, ?;=i, so that (2«+l)/3=360°=3^.

The same circumstance which occasions the eccentricity of
an instrument, may also cause the axis of motion not to be
perpendicular to the divided plane of tlie circle. The a.xis be-
ing placed vertical, by the adjustment of the instrument, the
plane of motion, thus horizontal, will not coincide with that
of the divided circle upon which the readings are made, and
will require a reduction to the imaginary horizontal plane,
^vIlich will l)e exactly analogous to the reduction of the ec-
liptic to the equator, and may be determined by the formula
given for that purpose.

It is evident that in changing the position of the instrument,
so as to make the legs successively change their places, the
plane of the circle will be placed in the same symmetrical
j)ositions with respect to any angle measured upon it, as was
the case in the readings of the angle ; and the angles will
lequire successive reductions corresponding to the same
numlier of symmetrical arcs.

Tlie indiscriminate mean of these an^jles, observed in all
these positions, will again l)e the true horizontal angle cor-
rected for the want of perpendicularity of the axis upon the
divided liml).

Plate VI. tig. .3. — Let ad l)e the inclined limb of the di-
vided circle, ac the horizontal i)lane, a the point of intcrscc-

300

SURVEY OP THE COAST

tion of the two planes, d being any point observed on the
limb. Drawing the arc dc perpendicular to ac, the corre-
sponding point in the horizon will be c, and ac will be the
reduced arc. Calling the inclination of the planes dac=^ ;
the constant equal angles between the legs=^, (commonly
three;) and the distance of the point cJ from the intersection
of the two planes=?; the series for the reduction of the ec-
liptic to the equator will give the corrections for each suc-
cessive position as follows :
For the first position,

ig'

ad — flc=<r=-^-^,sin.2'?' . ^

For the second position,

'■^'^°^,sin.4^-t-^%-sin.6», ^c.

sin.3'

ad'-~ac'=<r'=^^,sin.S(»+/8)— ^li^sin.4(?.t-^)-f- ^^,9in6 (,+/?), ^c.

Z'.~ac'=<r'=-¥-^,sin.S(»+/8)-

sin.2"

sin.3'

For the third position,

ad" — ac"=t" = %i^,%v[\3(<^+n^)—0^,%\nA(*+2^), &c.
sin.l" ^ ^ sin. 3' ^ ^' ■'

and so on for any greater number of legs and positions of
the instrument. The sum of any number of such correc-
tions being taken to ascertain the total correction as here-
tofore, and ordered according to their common factors, the
following expression will result :

-M-^\ sin.3f-f-sin.S(*+/3)-fsin.g(*-f-2^)+, 5)C.
-^ "", sin.4f+sin.4(»+/3)+sin.4("?-f-2y3)-}-, ^'c.

t+i'+i'= J

+^4^rsin.6»-fsin.6(»+/8)+sin.6Cf+2,s)+, kc. 1
sm.3'[_ ^ J

and so in case of more legs.

OP THE UNITED STATES. 6U t

It is evident that (he series in this sum are similar to that be-
fore considered, being the sums of sines of arcs in arithme-
tical progression, limited by the sum of the &'s being equal
to the circumference of the circle, which makes their sum
=0, and proves the indiscriminate mean of the angles ob-
served in the symmetric positions of the instrument to be
the accurate iiorizontal angle.

In an eccentric instrument, it is of course impossible to
make the microscopes measure exactly in all parts of the
division, but the above shows that if they arc adjusted in
any one position, tlieir measure will be corrected Uy the
changes of position of the instrument, without having re-
course to any other means.

EiTors may also arise from a want of horizontality in the
axis of the instrument. It is proper therefore to adapt the
method of observing so as to correct these errors. But such
errors are easily corrected in this instrument, by observing
with the telescope in two positions diametrically opposite to
eacli other.

In Plate VI. fig. 2, let ab be the horizontal line in which
the axis should be, and tp the section of the (rue vertical
plane wliich (lie telescope should describe. Instead of this
let the axis be inclined in one position of the instrument, so
that the telescope moves round the line a'b', and describes
a circle making with the vertical an angle /rf',= loi'^bcb'. All
the results of observations on objects taken in this plane will
require a reduction corresponding to this angle. Turning the
telescope so as to revolve through a semicircumference ho-
rizontally and vertically, and observing thci same objects again
without any change of the adjustments of the transit, the axis
will come in the direction a''b'\ and the plane of revolution
of the telescope will make with the vertical the angle t''ct=
t'd ; but on the side exactly opposite. All results of ob-
servations will require exactly the same correction as before
in respect to quantity, but they will be negative in respect to
the former, and the indiscriminate mean of the two will be

VOL. n — n 2,

303 SURVEY OF THE COAST

as before the true angle between the verticals of the observed
objects.

I his operation will besides bring; the horizontal angle ex-
actly to the points of the circle diametiically opposite to the
former, and will again act as a correction in the same sense
as the two mentioned before.

An error in the line of collimation will of course combine
with that of the verticality of the circle descrii)ed by the teles-
cope, and be corrected partially by the double operation ; but
this adjustment is easily verified in this instiument.

An iriegularity in the axes of motion of the instrument
would of course have an influence on the observations ; t)ut
in the horizontal angles, it is evident that this influence
would be destroyed by the exactly inverted jjositio'is of the
instrument in which the observations are made. 'I his error
therefore falls in with all the otiiers, wliich appear of course
always combined, and are finally compensated by a certain
determined number of observations systetnatically arranged.

The only cause of error still remaining is the accidental
error of any particular division, which might have been used
in the series of angles. This chance can occur only by
some particular accident in the work, as the dividing engine
of Mr. Troughton is so regular, and his attention and care
so great, that the error of the division may be supposed a
minimum.

The displacement of my microscopes from their exact
distance of 130° was too small to produce any influence on
the accuracy of the compensations.

Upon the |)rinciples here demonstrated I grounded the
following method of observing all horizontal angles with the
two-feet theodolite,

1. Having carefully adjusted the instrument in all respects,
the telescope is placed in such a position as to brino; its eve
eiid perpendiculatly over the microscope A. In this posi-
tion, which I call direct, 1 observe all the objects between
which I intend to determine the angles at the time.

2. Then I turn the telescope round vertically, so as to

OP THE UNITED STATES. iOi

bring the object end of it pei pendiculaily over tlie micros-
cope A, wbich position 1 call reversed, and observe the
same objects which I had ol)served before ; without any al-
teration in the adjustments of the instrument, not even its
general levelling, if tjjere has been no accidental derange-
ment, l)ut in every case without any alteration whatever in
the adjustments of the transit telescope.

3. Then the theodolite itself is tuined round horizontally
for one change of legs or about 130°. So thai all ani:;les
will now be read by each microscope at i^O"^ from the for-
mer situation. In this position the instrument is again care-
fully levelled and adjusted in all respects.

4. In this second position the two operations before de-
scribed are repeated ; that is the same objects are again ob-
served in botii the direct and the reversed position of (he
transit.

o. After this the theodolite is again moved horizontally
for one change of legs in the same direction as before, so as
to come into the third possible situation, and each micros-
cope to read again on the limb at 120° from its former situ-
ation.

6. In this third position, the same objects are again ob-
served, both in the direct and in the reversed position of the
transit; after the instrument has been adjusted in all respects
as in any one of the two former positions.

By this method each angle is observed six times in the
systematic order required for the compensation of all errors
arising from tlie causes heretofore treated, and with much
less trouble than if an equal iiuml)er of observations were
made by the merely accidental positions of the instrument,
and as many ol)scrvations would most probably be taken at
all events of such points as would l)e considered as re(|niring
great accuracy. The final angles are thus determined by
the influence of eighteen angles on jnuts of the division sym-
metrically siiiialcd.

Experience has completely sanctioned tiiis method of ob-

30* SURVEY OP THE COAST

serving, by an accuracy in the final results never obtained
without it.

1 must here observe, in relation to the actual application
of this method of observing in my triangulation for the sur-
vey of the coast, that it will not be found to have been ri-
gorously followed ; because it was the result rather than the
element of that part of the work which I could execute.
The necessity of advancing in the work, at the same time
that I was bringing my method of observing to perfection
both by theoretical researches and by practice, caused me to
make use of all the observations obtained lor both purposes.

In the examples of the Day-Book and the Journal of Re-
sults inserted at the end of the paper will be seen some fully
registered in proper order. These are taken from the work
on the Boundary Line with Canada, as I had not the oppor-
tunity of referring to any of my journals from the survey,
having delivered them to the War Department.

The observations of the azimuths of celestial iiodies, par-
ticularly of the sun, are very accurate and easy with this in-
strument. They should unite in one final result a complete
system of the above compensating method of observing, be-
sides an equal number of observations made six hours before
and after the transit of the heavenly body used. This com-
bination is necessary in order to render the elements for the
calculations of the azimuths compensating to each other, and
the influence of their error the smallest possible, as well
as to make the observations the most favourable and accu-
rate.

A full result of azimuths must therefore consist of twelve
observations, which is not more than the number whicli would
of choice be given to this element of the triangulation. With
respect to the instrument, it will be the mean of thirty-six
angles symmetrically situated upon the circle ; so that the
accuracy thus obtained must prove very satisfactory. In
case that this complete series of observations cannot be ob-
tained on a station, the only correction whicii may be omit-
ted is that of the change of the theodolite upon its legs. All

OF THE UNITED STATES. 305

the others are completely indispensable for obtaining a sa-
tisl'actoiy result

In ot)serving the celestial body, its transit is observed on
all the three vertical wires of tiie telescope ; and when the
sun is ol)served, which is the most advantageous of all for
aziniutli determinations, the contacts of both liml»s are taken.
By tliis mode of ob-erving, which is very easy, and even very
pleasant, with tliis instrument, the most essential clement of
tlic azimuths, the time, is observed six times (with the sun)
for each ol)servati()n, which is of course a great advania2;c as
to accuracy. I should even have wished that the telescope
had five vertical wires instead of three.

The following is tlie order which I followed in such an
observation : —

Having carefully verified all the adjustments of the instru-
ment, and the telescope being in the position which I have
called direct, I observed first the terrestrial object with which
the azimuth was to be taken, choosing for it the signal wliich
I»y its illumination at the time appeared the most distinct,
and in case of equality in tliis respect, that ?iearest to the
sun, and read oft' the three microscopes. Then I tiu'ned
the telescope horizontally, so as to receive the transit of both
limljs of the sun at all the three vertical wires, and having
clamped the telescope in this position. 1 ol)served these tran-
sits, the time of each being carefully oliserved by a chrono-
meter or clock to seconds and decimals, and written in the
day-book by the secretary. After this I read the three mi-
croscopes on the circle.

Then I placed the telescope immediately in tlic reversed
position, and ol)servcd the transit of the sun again as before,
and after it the same terrestrial ol>ject again.

By this method the two azimuths are oliscrved tlic near-
est possible to each other, and the terrestrial objects observ-
ed, correspond to each position of the transit.

If the circumstances allow one more azimuth to l)e taken,
without however admittini? the chan2;e of the irislrument
upon its legs, and an assistant be at hand (o determine the

306 SURVEY OF THE COAST

time by the chronometer or clock, without taking the ob-
server away from the azinmth, then the above second ob-
servation of tiie terrestrial object in the reversed position of
the transit can be followed immediately by one of the sun
in the same position of the transit ; and returning the teles-
cope to the direct position, one can egain be niade in this
position, and the terrestrial object observed again for veritica-
tion's sake, the terrestrial observation in the reversed situ-
ation serving for both azinmths in that position. Thus lour
azimuths, each from six transits of the sun's limb at the ver-
tical wires, can be observed in a very short space of time.

It is evident that these azimuth observations would, when-
ever found necessary, be very well suited for the reduction
to the mean time, according to the method invented by Mr.
Soldner.

It is proper to make the azimuths as independent of the
rate of the timepiece as possible, and therefore to make ob-
servations of time as nearly as possible before and after tliose
of the azimuths ; and if several observers should be togetiier,
a proper combination, which would admit both observations
to be made at the same time, would be very advantaj;eous.

The calculation of the result can of course be varied ; be-
ing made either for each limb's transit, or, as I did, for each
transit of the centre ; but it is not allowed to take direct and
reversed observations together in the same calculation.

The form of such an observation, and the manner of re-
gistering the results, will be seen in the corresponding ex-
amples of the Day -Book and Journal of Results.

I will here describe another metliod of ol)serving azimuths,
which may be of use in circumstances which admit only a
portal)le transit and the means of determining the time. I
applied it in 1793 in Switzerland, and it may sometimes be
preferable to a measurement on a less accurate instrument.
I adjust the transit telescope exactly in the vertical of the
object, before the time when the sun will pass this vertical,
and observing the transit of l)oth limbs on all the wires, tlie
time of the transit of the centre is thus obtained ; and it is

OP THE UNITED STATES. 307

evident tlmt the result of the calcul ition of the azimuth of
the sun will give at tlie same time the azimuth of tlie ohject,
the time heing determined hy proper moans as near to this
observation as possil)le. In this manner the azimuths of all
ohjects in the vertical of whicii the sun passes in the day
(on hotji sides of the zenith) may he determined, and the
terrestrial ani;les between them be toleral)ly well ascer-
tained.

By the same method also an astronomical circle well ad-
justed in the vertical may serve for the determinaiion of
azimuths; and when it is required to lay ofi' certain direc-
tions on the earth, sigtials may be |)laced purposely to ob-
serve azimutlis upon them i)y this method ; and if the sufi
slundd not at tl)e time pass such a vertical, a star properly
situated should be chosen for the purpose.

It is pioper in this place to introduce some practical re-
marks relative to the illumination of the division, whicii has
a eonsi(ieral)Ie influence on the accuracy and facility of tlic
reading. The light upon the divisions must be reflected
from a white unpolished plane ; it must fall upon the divi-
sions in the direction of tlieir lenglli, and not fiom the side ;
and if the reflection from tiie limb enter the microscope, the
greati'st liglit will lie ol)tained. All glaring light will i)e im-
proper, I found white paper the most proper suiHice; and
fortius pmpose I folded a quarto sheet into an octavo foi'm,
and to give it more solidity folded rims to the open sides ;
then giving to this again a fohl in the middle, so as to make
the two parts stand at rii!;ht angles with each oth'-r. in the
middle of one half I cut a circular hole r-xaetly litting the
microscope tulie below its holder, and adapted to it by its
close fitting. The screw going over the whole length of
the tul)e, it kept its position, and the other half hung down
to within a short distance of the li i)b of the circle outside ;
the reflecting surface being thus a tangent to it, and neaily
perpendicular to the liml). When the observer stands in
the direction of the radius of the microscope, the liL'ht comes
as from the centre of the instrument, rcflLCted in tlie same

308 SURVEY OP THE COAST

•

direction, and presents the divisions without any false shade,
and very distinct. In any other position of the light or of
the reflection, the strokes, which always present cavities,
though they appear filled, will be viewed on the side, as one
side of this cavity will always be in the light and the other
in the shade ; and the influence of this upon the accuracy of
the reading is much greater than might be imagined, exceed-
ing the limits within which it is possible to read with these
microscopes.

For this same reason, night observations have not the same
degree of accuracy on the horizontal limb of a theodolite as
those made during the day ; because in this case it is impos-
sible to make the light fall in the proper direction, as no
light can be placed in the centre, and outside, in the direction
of the radius, it would occupy the place belonging to the ob-
server. Night azimuths lose much on that account, and sel-
dom give the satisfaction expected.

On the Sig?ials and the System of Wires in the Telescope.

An object closely connected with the accuracy of the ob-
servation of terrestrial angles, is the choice of proper and dis-
tinct signals, and the adaptation of the system of wires to
them.

In dip first place, 1 must observe that objects seen from a
great distance are visible rather in proportion to their differ-
ence in light and colour from the surrounding objects or the
back ground on which they are projected, than in proportion
to thfir size, which actually contributes very little towards
the effecting of the vision, and is always detrimental to its
dihiinctness. A small object seen by the shaded side, if pro-
jected upon a clear sky, will be visible at a great distance,
and will be much more distinct, if it reflect the rays of the

OP THE UNITED STATES. 309

sun to the observer. These remarks must certainly have
been often nmde ; and yet I have not seen that advantage
has ever been taken of them for the purpose here in view.

A staff" is always a bad signal, as it will always be seen
differently according to the state of the illumination; and if
it is furnished with a flag for the purpose of discovering and
discerning it from other similar objects, tliis will easily mis-
lead the observer as to its aciual position, and certainly make
it appear to stand out of the peipendicular, if at any conside-
rable distance. Truncated pyramids are inconveniently
large, and require peculiar reductions according to the side
of them which is observable, and whicli may even change in
the course of the short time of observation, by the change
of the illumination.

For the vertical angles tlie staff* cannot serve at all. The
point at wliich it is fastened into the earth can never be as-
certained with certainty, as it may be hidden by uneven
ground I)efore, or the ground from behind upon which it is
projected may be mistaken for it. Truncated pyramids may
be seen of different heights in different states of tl)e atmos-
phere.

A signal showing itself detached from the ground on which
it stands, will also he distinguished far better than a much
larger one connected with the ground.

All these remarks I might support with daily experience,
of which it will suffice to mention, that in a warm summer
day, the gilt hall of a steeple may be seen at a great distance,*
when the steeple itself is only su[)posed, and not actually dis-
tinguished.

Making in 1798 a triangulation in Switzerland with a re-
peating circle witli two telcsc()i)cs, where the angles are
measured in the plane of the objects, and the determination
of the elevation of the triangle points being an ol)ject of in-
terest, 1 was desirous of a distinct signal which should l)e seen
equally in all directions: this lead me to the idea of forming
spheres elevated on poles. They were formed of barrel

VOL. n. — s S

310 SURVEY OP THE COAST

hoops, making the ribs of the sphere, and covered with
white linen. Their diameters were from sixteen to twenty
inches. They were very distinctly visihie with the telescope
on my instrument, t!ioiigh only thirteen inches in length, at
a distance of lifty miles, aiid as far as ten miles with the na-
ked eye ; but they did not answer equally well in the lower
atmosphere of this coiintiy near the sea shore, as was to
be expected. 1 was therefore induced to use a kind of sig-
nals presenting aluminous point by the reflection of the sun,
and adapted to the situation of that body at such times of the
day as from the general state of illumination appeared to be
most favoura!)le to observation. In the middle of the day,
the illumination will not serve at all for distinct vision, and
even the largest objects become indistinct, on account of the
vapour, (as this is con monly called) ; or rather because the
reflection of the light from all objects goes upwards, and does
not meet the eye of the observer on the surface of the earth.

As the cheapest reflecting surface which I could choose
was sheet tin, and the construction of si)lieres became more
difficult and expensive ; and the spheres themselves always
presented a small point, I chose the form of a truncated cone,
under such an angle as would be the most favourable for the
morning and evening illumination.

The next point wliich appeared desirable with respect to
the signals was to find their places in case they shoidd be
removed. The means which 1 considered as best adapted
for the purpose were the following : —

Plate VI. fig. 4. — aa.bb is a truncated cone of tin, the
height ab equal to nineteen inches, the lower diameter aa
equal to seventeen inches, the upper diatneter bb equal to
fourteen inches; the top e is a horizontal tin plate of three
inches diameter, elevated five inches above the dianjetrr bb
which serves to nail the signal to the top of the pole ef, and
from which to the diameter bb it forms a truncated cone of
a greater vertical angle. The pole ef. upon which the signal
is fastened, is about three or four inches in diameter, and of

OF THE UNITED STATES. 311

such length as to bring the top e of the signal aliout eight or
nine feet above the ground at g. 'Ihe tin cone is liclcl stea-
dy in its vertical position bv two iron wires fastened at tiie
lower rim aa of the cone, in diametrically opposite places,
and wound lound the pole, and making right angles with
each otlier.

To place a signal, a hole was dug in the sroutul to the
depth of about three or four feet, and of proportional width,
and a j)ernianent mark was then placed properly centred
in the station. These maiks consisted of truncated hollow
cones of liard baked stonewaie open at top and bottom, tlieir
height ed equal to sixteen inches, the inner diameter at the
top cc equal to six inches, the lower diameter (]d equal to
twelve inches. They were at such a distance below the
surface of the ground as to be perfectly secured from acci-
dents arising from jiloughing, ^'c.

Tlie signals can be pulled out of these cones perpendicu-
larly, and the holes filled with eartli so as to leave no appa-
rent mark; while at any future time the cones can be easily
uncovered ; and being emptied of earth, without being dis-
placed, they will be prepared to receive other siu;nals,

'I'hcsc signals answered in every respect perfectly well,
and though constructed of apparently costlier materials than
rough signals, the expense attending them, with the pertna-
nent mark in the ground, h^z. amounted only to aliout three
dollars and a half each, — a sum for which no pyramid, or
any thing similar, could be constructed.

In favourable circumstances, these signals appeared like
a stromj; luminous point, often requiring, wlien the signals
were near, the use of a dark glass before the eye. Their
form then became as distinctly visil>le as the limbs of a pla-
net.

In distances ofthiity to forty miles, they presented a dis-
tinct luminous point, when the sun was in such a situation
as to reflect its rays directly to the observer, wliich time is
ofsuflRcicnt duration.

2

313 SURVEY OF THE COAST

It is evident that the luminous point which was observed
on the tin cone depended on the angle which the sun sub-
tended with the line from the observer to the signal, and
required of course a small reduction to the centre of the sig-
nal. To obtain this element of reduction easily, 1 observed
always at intervals the sun to the nearest degree only, as
no great accuracy is required, by placing the telescope of
the instrument in the shade formed by itself, and reading the
stand of the microscope A on the limb. Calculating the ap-
parent angle subtended by the mean radius of the signal cone
for each distance, 1 formed a small table, and placed it at
the head of each station in the Journal of Results. The re-
duction was very easy, and was quickly made by a construc-
tion and a short multiplication of decimals, of which it is
proper to give here the explanation, as well in principle as
in practice.

In Plate VI. fig. 5, let a be the station point of the obser-
ver, c the centre of a signal observed from this station, Ibd
the mean circumference of the tin cone, and os the direction
in which the sun is seen from the station, at the time of the
observation.

For the purpose here intended, it is perfectly allowable to
omit the correction of the azimuth of the sun, between the
station point and that of the signal (which would be propor-
tionate to the convergency of the meridians,) and also to
suppose the lines drawn from the different parts of the sig-
nal to the observer as parallel, which would vary always less
than the apparent radius of the signal.) This permits us to
suppose, das=cas—ccs'=fds" .

By the principles of reflection, the point on the circumfe-
rence of the cone which will be reflected to the point a, will
lie at d the middle of the angle s'ca, supplement to the angle
observed between the sun and the signal. The correction
will therefore be proportional to de the sine of acd=i.s'ca,
or to the cosine of the complement of it, that is to cosine
icas, or half the angle between the sun and the signal.

OF THE t'NITED STATKS. 318

Expressina; tlicroforc the nidiusn/ I)y tlie seconds and de-
cimals whicli it subtends at the station a, the nitiltiplication
ot" this by the cosine of hall" the angle observed gave the ap-
propriate correction or corr. {cd)" co%. kcas.

To construct this correction with great case. 1 divided a
quadrant on pasteboard of one foot radius, numliered with
tlie doul)le angles as in a reflecting instrument, beginning to
count as if Jroni the point of the circle perpendicular lo va,
whicli represents olcoursc the jiosition of tlie sun in the pro-
traction of ac behind the sioinal. This radius was divided
into ten parts, and liiiKs drawn perpendicular to ii, cutting
the circumference in the corresponding points, indicatiui? the
angles to whicli they coircspoml. Upon a smaller piece,
cut at right angles, one of these decimals was divided into
ten parts again ; this piece being slided along the line near-
est to the angle observed between the sun and the signal,
the subdivisions of it being perpendicular to the same, until
these intersected the circumference at the actual observed
angle, the tenths and hundredths of the radius correspond-
ing to this angle, were indicated, these being midti|)lied in
the seconds, tenths, and hunilredths subtended by the radius
of the signal, gave the correction corresponding to the ob-
served angle.

This operation was of course of sufTicirnt accuracy, and
nuich shorter than the calculation either by natural cosines
of the half angles or their logarithms.

Opcratina; in the same manner for both signals, between
which the ani!:lc is to be corrected, the total correction of the
angle is obtained according to the following easy princi|)les,
which will be evident, without demonstration, from a mere
inspection of the figure:

1. When the sun is seen between the two signals, the sum
of the two corrections is added to the angle.

2. When the sun is behind the station a in the vertical
ancle of the signals, as it) liak, the sum of the two correc-
tions is to be subtracted from the angle.

314 SURVEY OP THE COAST

3. In all other positions of tlie sun, with respect to the
two signals, the difference of the two corrections must be
subtracted fiom the angle.

The angle between the sun and the signal determining the
angle at the centre of the signal between the station and the
reflecting point, and being bisected, it is evident that the ac-
curacy obtained by tiie method described is fully adequate.

When the sun does not shine, and the state of the atmos-
phere is such as to affect no reflecting point, which will hap-
pen in dull and cluudy weather, the whole signals will ap-
pear like a while surlace and \n lull sl/.e ; and accordin2;ly
if its centre be observed, no reduction will be requisite.
The state in which the signals are seen is therefore one of
the ne(;essary remarks to be inserted in the journal.

The system of wires in the telescope is to be adapted to
the form of the signals, in the same manner in wliich the
wire anangement in the microscope is adapted to the kind
of division of the limb. In this instrument the division be-
ing by lines, the wire arrangement in the microscope is that
of wires crossing each otiier under an angle of about thirty
degrees, which in placing it by the micrometer upon the di-
vision, will present this angle bisected, and enable us to judge
accurately of the coincidence.

With a similar view, I suppose, Mr. Ramsden applied this
arrangement to the telescope of General Roy's theodolite in
the English survey, where staffs were used as signals, wliile
the division of the instrument being with points, the micro-
meter wires were simple perpendicular wires.

For my signals therefoi'e, the perpendicular wires were
best adapted ; and as they were fine and exceedingly well
defined cobwebs, they showed the light of the reflected point
of the signal on both sides, by the irradiation, which of course
afforded a very nice pointing, far preferable to the contact
on the side of the wire, which has sometimes been substi-
tuted for the l)isection by the middle.

I shall add one remark more : —

OP THE UNITED STATES. 815

An attentive observer will find the object pointed at al-
ways disappearinsj; when very near the wire, and as if it were
brok( n otl". In like manner, in pointinj;; with the ciossing
wires upon a signal prescntinj; a point, it will be impossible
to place it actually in tbe vertex of the angle ot" intersection,
and it will become visible only at a certain distance, stand-
ina; free between the wires, without admitting actual contact
with the wires themselves.

Mditions made to the liepeciting Circle with tico Telescopes.

The general principles and construction of this instrument
are well known from the descriptions given l)y French wri-
ters on the subject. The peculiar construction adopted Uy
Mr. Troushton is described in the English Kncyclopedias. I
sliall tlierefore suppose such constructi in known, and de-
scribe only the [)cculiarities of the two circles which Mr.
Trougliton made for me.

In the usual constiuction of this instrument, when an ob-
servation is to be renewed for the sake of repetition, the front
telescope bearing tlie verniers is to be moved; no trace of
the foregoing observations is left ; their value in some mea-
sure is concealed l)y the position of the back telesco|)C or
level. In celestial observations clouds or intervening cir-
cumstances in general, which occur so frequently in o!)ser-
vations, may at this moment render all previous attention
and care useless ; and the observer feels always somewhat
anxious on that accoimt.

It is however evidrnt that the successive steps of the level
or back telescope measure the an2;lf" in tlie same manner as
those of the front telescope. V\)nn this consideration I
founded a construction, liy which the instrument 2;ives two
separate scries of angles upon the same division, from the

316 SURVEY OF THE COAST

same observations, by adding only one observation more at
the end, and if accident should occasion the loss of one se-
ries, the other may be preserved.

Plate VII. fig. 1, is a general view of the instrument from
behind, where the additions made to it are all visible. Fig. S
represents a section of the limb and two readings, in the di-
rection of a radius.

The limb of the circle consists of two circular rings fixed
to each other, as seen in the second figure. A section of this
limb or of the wings which form it resembles letter T. To the
lower ring the radii r of the frame of the circles are fastened,
the upperonebeing the divided limb itself, which is sufficiently
elevated above the radii to give passage to the clamping piece
D of the front telescope. The verniers of the front telescope,
which are four as usual, reach to the division of the limb from
the inside. To the back telescope and level, a frame, exactly
similar to that of the front telescope, is adapted, with four
verniers W, X, Y, R, which are fastened to the part of this
frame extending beyond the circle by two pillars, bringing
them round the limb outside, to reach to the division of the
limb ; so that there remains a sufficient space of the division
free between two verniers to read them accurately, when
two such verniers stand opposite each other. This space
is about half the length of the strokes. The verniers then
pass by each other freely, and are read upon the same divi-
sion. The two magnifiers, which revolve upon the centre
on arms, in the front of the circle, as seen in b, fig. l, serve
equally for both series of readings. As to the divisions, tlie
strokes denoting degrees and half degrees are drawn out on
both sides equally, so that tliey show equally for both the
inner and the outer verniers. The degrees have points in
the middle of the strokes, wliich will show when two ver-
niers are opposite, and will serve to count them from the
number seen on the left beyond the alliidade. Every ten
degrees being engraved outside, and every five inside of the
division, there is always a clear and equal reading for both
positions of the verniers.

01' THE UNITED STATES. 317

The verniers arc all ot double length, having on each side
of the usual vernier one liall'length oi" vernier over. In- which
means two readings are obtained. A mean of these read-
ings can betaken, in case of any diflerence.

The whole framing of the instruments is in general strong-
er in every respect than tlicy were made l)efoie, and parti-
cular attention is paid to the staltility of all the adjusinients,
as may be observed from a mere comparison of this figure
with those in tiie Kncyclopedia.

'I'lie breadth oi'thc ring to which the radii of the instru-
ment arc fastened being al)out one incii. the distance at which
tiie verniers W, X, ^'c. of the back alhidadc must be sup-
ported by it would twist this alhidadc by their weight, whicli
would occasion them to read did'orcntly indilfcieiu positions
of the circle, as they would in all cases sink. This is avoid-
ed by adding on the side opposite to the vernier the nobs
II. (I, forming a counterpoise to the verniers, and effecting
thereby tlicir verticality in all positions.

To give more stability to the vertical or any inclined po-
sition of the circle, there are two semicircles k, k fastened
to the horizontal axis q round which the circle is moved,
close to the uprights supporting this axis at both ends, to
which they are clamped I)y two screws /, /, instead of only
one as in the former construction. There is also a small ball
s upon the socket of the axis of the circle, between the coun-
terpoise and the clamping arrangement ii of the circle, ad-
justable by a sliding |)iece in the small upright /, which re-
ceives one of the axes of this level. The level swings on
an axis, to serve in both opposite positions in which the cir-
cle may be placed by revolving upon the semicircles.

It appears to me, that in all instruments the alhidades
should l)e clamped on a se|)aratc arm not bearing any read-
ing, (when these arc not upon a full circle.) Iiecause the
clamp is very apt to affect the reading to which it is adapt-
ed. For this reason, tlie clamp and tangent screw of the
hack alhidade is put to the separate arm v. perpendicular to

VOI-. II. — T 2

318 SURVEY OF THE COAST

the telescope and level, and the reading arms are all left to
their natuial spring. By this arrangement also, the assis-
tant, who sets the level during the ol)servation. acting in a
more convenient position, is less liable to affect the position
of the instrument by the weight of his hands ; and there be-
ing milled heads at both ends of the tangent screw, as in all
others of the same kind, he can act with great steadiness by
applying both hands.

The good quality and power of the telescopes is a desirable
requisite in the observations ; for it will be found that a great
magnifying power facilitates all the observations. There-
fore, though the circles are eighteen inches, the telescopes
are twenty-two inches, which the instrument bears very well ;
and I found that a j)ower of about sixty-six times was tlie
most advantageous for use. The object ends have light
lengthening lubes of about three inches, adapted instead of
the covers, and equilibrating the telescopes.

The front telescope has three horizontal and three vertical
cobweb threads in the focus. The back telescope has only
two crossing each other at right angles.

The four readings of tlie front telescope are marked in tiie
order of the divisions by the letters D, E, F, G, whicli serve
to register them properly in the journals of oI)servations, in
the same manner as those of the back telescope are repre-
sented by W, X, Y, Z.

As a very great convenience for night observations, Mr.
Troughton usually adds to his circles a smaller divided cir-
cle, fixed to the part bearing the level, and to the telescope
he adds an arm, reaching over the frame of the instrument
to this circle. Sliding pieces are adapted to this circle, and
being adjusted to the proper zenith distance of the star, on
both sides of the zenith, will arrest the telescope in such a
situation as to bring the star in the field of the telescope, by
the horizontal revolution of the instrument. Tiiis arrange-
ment underwent a shght modification, on account of the in-
terruption which a long arm from the front telescope would
have met with from the back alhidade.

UF THli UNITED STATES. 3t9

An arm j\ similar to that for the clamp, rises [)erpen(licu
lar to the level, IVom the centre [)iece ot" the hack alhidade
to the circii micro lice. Tlierc it hcnds over to (/,• and has a
circular ring lasteiicd to it, going lounii the circiind'eience
and forming a complete semicircle ddd^ which is again fas-
tened near both endd to two knees r, extending from the
level frame. This semicircle is divided upon the flat outer
part, like the moveable quadrant ol a glolje. Upon this ring
small pieces e, e slide by means of springs on their inner
part, and present their projecting part to a small arm g, ada|)t-
ed to tlie fiont telescope, by which this is siop[)ed u|)on the
proper zenith distance to which the stops t', e have been
placed. This piece g should be a very liglit piece of brass,
made to spiing or give way when it comes in contact with
the stops ; so that it could not all'ect the pcjsition of the ttle-
■icope in coming accidentally in contact.

The motion of the horizontal axis of the circle is stopped
by the screw ?/, which presses to this axis an arrangetnent
similar to the stop of a windmill ; and the small motions are
made by the screw at w?, at the end of two artns, one of
which is fast to this arrangement and the other to the centre
piece of the horizontal axis q. To make this motion easy,
the screw at m consists of two parts of unequal tlneads or
paths, eacli going in the nut of its respective arm, and tlierc-
by causing the motion of the circle itself to arise only from
the difference of the two screws. This motion is therefore
as small as that arising from any other tangent screw on the
instrumefit; and the use of the screws in the legs of the in-
strument can be fully dispensed with in this respect.

Tlie horizontal circle of the instrument is lixed to the co-
nical radii, which form at the same time the legs of it. 'I'he
clamping and three readings A, B, C are adapted to the co-
lumn forming the socket of the vertical axis of tlic instru-
ment. A magnifier revolving round tlie lowermost part of
the colunm serves equally lor all three readings.

To stop the horizontal motion of the upper circle in the
proper situation in respect to the azimuth, when stars arc

2

320 SURVEY OP THE COAST

observed at nij>;ht, two small stops ?;, n are placed on the
limb of the horizontal circle, and are fastened to it by a
spring beneatli it, and presenting their projecting parts on
tlie limb to the sides of the alhidade A, in the two positions
of tlie circle in which the star is met by a vertical [)lane pass-
ing through it.

Instead of the arrangement formerly used to produce a
small vertical motion in the legs of the instrument, the sciews
are here again constructed on tlie same piincij)les of two
screws working in each other, exactly equal in all respects
to those described in the two-feet theodolite.

On some Adjustments of the Repeating Circle.

It will not be expected that I should give here a full de-
scription of the adjustment of this instrument : it is too easy
and too well known. But I have no where seen mentioned
the most proper mode of placing tiie circle accurately in tlie
plane of the vertical and of verifying the parallelism of the
two motions of the circle and the telescope.

This consists in observing the pole star, (best in its great-
est digression,) both directly and by reflection from a mercu-
rial horizon. I do it in the following manner, whenever any
more nicety is desired than can be expected from the mere
placingof the two semicircles A'Artothe coincidence of certain
strokes made upon them at oo, with the sides of the supports
of the horizontal axis q.

Having carefully levelled the horizontal motion of the in-
strument by the large level on the circle, so that the verti-
cality should take place by the above adjustment, the tele-
scope is pointed to the pole star, and the horizontal motion
clamped. Then reading the approximate altitude or zenith
distance, the telescope is lowered so much below the horizon

OF TIIU UNITED STATES. 381

as to receive its reflection from the artificial horizon, whicli
is now placed in the situation indicated by the telescope, and
sheltered from vacillation, if necessary, from the wind, by
a glass cap.

If the motion of the telescope is exactly vertical, the re-
flected star in the mercury will coincide with the same ver-
tical wire wliich was jiointed njion the star viewed dii'cctly :
if not, it must he corrected, half by movin>>; the plane of tlic
circle round upon the axis q, afrer unclampint!; the screws
/, /, and half by the tangent screw on the horizontal circle.

If the circle is moved in tlie vertical, with the telescope
clumped and every \\\\n\x, arrans;efl as in the al)0ve oI)serva-
tion, the veiticality of its motion will be ascertained. If there-
fore there is any doul)t respectina; the parallelism of the circle
and tlie telescope, it will be I)est to begin first by making the
observation witli tlic circle, the telescope being clam|)cd, and
when this is adjusted, to adjust the wires accordingly.

When these adjustments are made, and before any change
in the level of the instrument takes place, tlic level s on the
axis must I)e adjusted, and it will then serve to verify the vcr-
ticality of the circle, as long as this circle is ke|)t in its place.
1 therefore had the packing boxes so constructed, that the
instrument miglit be removed witliout taking it apart, as I
observed tliat the separate packing of the circle with tlic
great counter[joise subjected the instrument to injury.

I think that some meclianical arrangeinent mizht be easily
a?id advantageously adopted, for tlie |)ur|)osc of giving to this
adjustment a still greater dcgn e of accuracy.

The illumination of the readings must be carefully attend-
ed to, as at night tlv y are very dilTicuIt. and thereby become
uncertain. I applied here also, with the best success, paper
reflectors ; folding a quarto sheet exactly as dcscrilx-d for
the two-feet theodolite ; but instead of giviug it a foUl to
bend it at right angles, I cut from about threc-f|Uarters of
an inch behind the circular hole, which is here mad(r so as
to fit the tube of \\w magnifier, a slit to admit the arm of
this magnifier, about two inclics and a half loriir. and about

333 SURVEY OF THE COAST

half an inch farther, another short slit, at right angles to the
former. By these the paper was slided and held upon the
arm of tlie magnifier, and screwed to it along with its tube.
Holding a light on the opposite side of the circle properly,
the light will be reflected very well on the divisions, and give
a very good reading. During the day the free light will [lave
the same effect.

It is useful to know exactly the angular distances of the
wires in the telescope, and the values of the divisions of the
level. The first are very easily determined by pointing
upon a well defined object with the different wires and read-
ing the verniers. The last are equally easy to determine in
these instruments, having readings to the level motion, by
placing the level on all divisions successively, and reading
all four verniers. It is proper to repeat these observations
when made, as the determination has regard to a very small
quantity. Methods for this purpose will easily suggest them-
selves to a skilful observer, and a very good use may be
made of the results, when accidents have disturbed the usual
regularity of an observation. Still I do not approve of a
method suggested sometimes, viz. reading the level, though
not fully adjusted, and keeping account of its standing at each
observation.

In one of these circles, the intervals of the wires were
8' 0.5 '',3 in the arc, and ten small divisions of the level sub-

Methods of observing a Series of Vertical Jingles uith t/ie Re-
peating Circle.

The instrument being well adjusted and levelled by means
of the large level of the circle, I place the front telescope
before the observation upon any convenient point of the cir-

OF THE UNITED STATES. ^23

cle, and read its four verniers D, E. F, G, takiria; a mean be-

tween the readings within and without llieii' nominal, wlioii
any difference appears ; or I read tiicni in their accidental
position, which may be that of the last preceding obser-
vation.

'riicse readings are written in the third, fourth. Hftli, and
sixth columns of the Day-Book. Iti the second colunm the
lirst letter of the series of readings is written, and the first
column is left for the times.

Ill a night observation, the stops e. e, are placed to their
j)ropei zenith distance, allowing some free space for the quar-
ter zenitli distance of the star out of the meridian, and to
avoid touching in pointing the telescope. The alhidade with
the levels is moved so as to bring them near the projecting
g of the front telescope, taking care to avoid actual contact,
'i'hc circle is now turned so as to bring the level into an ho-
rizontal position.

By the horizontal revolution of the circle, the star will
now api)ear in the field of the telescope, and when found,
the horizontal stop 7', fitting to the side on which the circle
is, is placed in contact with the alliidade A.

Tht>n the observer will make tiie accurate pointing u|)on
the star or ol)ject, by the motion of tlic screw m, which guides
the whole circle, while the assistant observer will adjust the
level l)y its proper screw at the arm h. When l)oth these
are riglit together, the time is marked in seconds and deci-
mals from a time piece l)y a second assistant, acting as a se-
cretary. The time is written in the first column of the Day-
Book Iicfore the readings of tlie front telescope, and forms
the first tinie for the scries of atigles of the front telescope.

By the |)lacing of the level, the verniers \V. X. Y, Zcome
into their first position for the series of the level or back te-
lescope. These four verniers arc therefore now read off.
and their readings written below the others in the same or-
der, l)cing marked in the second cohmm l)y the letter W.

The circle being now brouirht on the other side of the co-
lumn bv a half revolution on the vertical axis, the observer

334 SUHVEY OF THE COAST

will move the front telescope near the other stoj) e, and make
the second observation, pointing by the tangent screw of this
telescope on the arm D, while the assistant will adjust the
level, if it should be necessary, by the circle screw at ni;
though this adjustment will be very slight, if any, wiien ihe
circle is well adjusted.

The time of the simultaneous coincidence of the pointing
and adjustment of the levels is again noted ijy the secretary,
and written in the first column before tlie readings W, ^c.
constituting the first time of the series of angles witii the
back alhidade.

Before turning the circle off, the observer will take care
to place the other horizontal stop n to the contact with tlie
alhidade A from this second position.

From this, the circle will be placed again in the first posi-
tion, and the observations continued regularly and in the same
order exactly to the last of the series, which must be like the
first, an observation in which the level is placed by its own
screw at /*, so that the whole series consists of an odd number
of observations.

The series being thus closed, all verniers of i)oth sets are
read off, those of tiie front telescope are written opposite to
the time before the last, and those of the back alhidade to
the last time, prefixing again in the second column the first
letters of the set of readings.

All these will be observed in their regular order in the
corresponding examples of the Day-Book.

By one observation more than is usual in the other circles,
these give therefore two complete, equal, and (so far as le-
fers to readings) independent series of observations. To
that of the fiont telescojie belong all the times, the last ex-
cepted, and to that of the back alhidade all the times except
the first. They form a check upon eacii other against mis-
takes or errors, and may in some measure serve as a test of
the proportional accuracy of different series of observations,
besides that all results are evidently doubled.

The convenience obtained byjhe use of the screw m. for

OF THE UNITIiD STATES. 325

the circle is such as to make the use of the screws at the
legs for this purpose actually olycctiunable, as it brin<;;s the
instrument out of its vertical and occasions always a tedious
adjustiuent of the level ; besides, tliat when a number of ob-
servations are to be made consecutively, it would be neces-
sary to level the whole instrument again after every one,
while otherwise the circle, once well adjusted, will remain
so for as many observations as may i)e made in a whole
night, if proper care has been taken as to the solidity of the
stand, which, in the field, must always be placed on three
plugs reaching deej) into tlie ground.

It is evident, that the measurement of a series of angles
in the plane of two objects may be conducted, in respect
to the successive motions of tlic front and back telescope,
exactly as lias l)een described above, and the results taken
in the same manner.

As two opposite readings correct the eccentricity, if any,
it is evident that the indiscriminate mean of any two opposite
readings sliould always be equal ; but the diilcrent sinkings
of the readings, and the diflferent influence of the weight of
the telescope and other moveable paits of tlie instrument,
may introduce diflercnces. as is well known and sufficiently
discussed; therefore the indiscriminate mean of all four read-
ings is also here to be preferred, and will ultimately be found
to give a better result than a discrimination would give. The
Day-Book examples will show, in their places, how I pro-
ceeded, in this respect, to scrutinise the results of my obser-
vations.

It is well known that this instrument is calculated to cor-
rect all its own eriors l)y the ell'ect of its repeating projierty
and construction, particularly in the vertical angles. Still
it is well known that (for instance in determinations of lati-
tude) it is proper to take the indiscriminate mean of an efpial
numl)er of results of observations froin the north and the
south side of t!ic xenith.

For the same reason, if ever anv doul)t should exist as
to the want of stability in the parts ol the instrument, which
VOL. II. — r 2

326 SURVEY OF THE COAST

is very possible, the circle should be used in the two invert-
ed positions which the semicircles admit.

Peculiar Method of Observing Time with the Repeating

Circle.

In the observations for tlie determination of time, this ele-
ment itself is the principal object of research, and may be
considered as the most difficult to obtain accurate. The pro-
per adjustment of the level in an observation of such a tran-
sitory nature, and during which the circle may move con-
siderably in tiie vertical by pointing, requires great dexterity
in the assistant ; and since the level itself oscillates in passing
to equilibrium, it is often very difficult to be sure of its po-
sition.

From one complete observation with the circle in its two
positions and the indiscriminate mean of the four readings,
all the main corrections of the observation are obtained. Suc-
ceeding observations serve only to augment the probability
of accuracy, and to correct accidental errors of division,
which, as already stated, may be considered a minimum in
the instruments of Mr. Troughton.

A method satisfying the two first mentioned desiderata
will therefore secure more accuracy in this kind of observa-
tion than the usual mode of repeating. IVly peculiar situa-
tion, with assistants entirely unacquainted with observations,
joined to these considerations, led me to devise the follow-
ing method of observing time, which I have ever since prac-
tised, and which Dr. Tiarks, the British astronomer for the
boundary line at Canada, adopted also in our common works
there.

The instrument being well levelled and the position of the
front telescope read off as usual, the circle is placed so as

OP THK UNITEU STATES. 337

to receive the transit of tlie star, or both limbs oi the sun, at
all the horizontal wires. In this situation the level is adjust-
e(J with ease, sulTicient time being given, by the placing of
the circle ; and the transit of the star, or both limbs of the
sun, at eacii of the thiee wires is observed. This can be
done with tlie greatest nicety, tlie instrument being at rest
and all tlie observer's attention being directed to the time of
contact which is rapid; the observer calling out J^ull, at
each transit, the secretary being attentive to tlie chronometer
or clock, can note the time with the greatest accuracy ; and
the transit of the sun's centre is determined I)y six observa-
tions.

The circle being now brought into its second position, by
a semi-revolution on its vertical axis, the level will remain
adjusted, if the instrument is well levelled. If it require any
correction, this must be made by the circle screw rn, as the
position of the level upon the circle must be preserved.

The telescope is then undamped at ]), and again placed
so as to receive the transits as before. These are observed
and the time noted, as has been done in the lirst position.

This observation being made, the verniers of tlic front te-
lescope are again read, and give the double zcnitli distance,
or rather the sum of the two zenith distances at the times of
the observed transits. The half of this sum is to be consi-
dered as corresponding to the mean time between the two
transits.

Such an observation, when taken near the prime vertical,
will not exceed the time allowed for taking an arithmetical
mean, and will be the result of six or twelve observations of
time.

If the transit of the sun is supposed to take too much time
to observe both liml)s on each side, tlie antecedent may l)c
taken in the lirst position, and the consequent in the second.
There being then but half the number of times obtained, the
observation may be repeated after the reading, and a mean
of two such observations taken, as in any other case, calcu-
lating each separate.

S

338 SURVEY OF THE COAST

In all cases, tlie application of Mr. Soldner's method oi
reducing all observations to the mean time, by correcting the
result for their respective distances from the same, applies
here with great ease and accuracy, since for each transit the
distances of tlie wires are equal on each side, as nearly as
the distances of the wires are, and tlierefore the calculation
of this correction maybe made for half their number only.
It will therefore always be found advantageous to apply this
method in the calculation of the results.

This method of observing will be found very satisfactory
in practice, in regard to accuracy and a saving of time, toge-
ther with the facility of choosing it so as to come nearest the
prime vertical.

This method will admit an observation of time to be taken
among flying clouds, when the method by repetition would
be inapplicable ; and when no complete observation can be
obtained, the observation of any pair of corresponding wires
in both positions of the circle will at least give an approxi-
mate result, which will often be useful.

It would be very advantageous, in using this method, to
have five horizontal wires in the telescope within a space near
that occupied by the three, as the transits could easily be
observed, and the gain for each wire woidJ be double in tlie
result. I have therefore sometimes applied them.

The registering of such an observation and the manner of
taking the result will be found in their proper places in the
Day-Book and the Journal of Results.

Description of the Repeating Theodolite of One Foot Diameter.

Besides the great theodolite, it was very desirable, as well
for the intended survey of tlie coast as for other uses in the
country, to have some instruments of the theodolite kmd of

OF THE UNITED STATES. 3S9

a smaller diameter, and yet capal)le of givinjj; the same ac-
curacy as the lar^c instruniciitr^. thoui:;h at the expense of
niore skill, labour, and lime of the observer. It was also
di sirable that the same instrument should equally serve for
vertical angles, in order to enal)lc tiic ol)server to determine
accurately latitudes, times, and tlie angles of elevation of the
signals.

The multiplication of the terrestrial angles in the plane of
the horizon was far preferable to that in the plane of the ob-
jects, on account of the great influence of lefraction near the
sea shore, particularly upon sandy beaches and islands, where
it may be considered as varying constantly ; and even a sav-
ing of time in the calculations was an object worth conside-
ration.

It was necessary, on this account, that tlie instrunicnt
should be of the repeating kind, and a theodolite.

In planning an instrument to answer thi'se views, the prin-
ciples mentioned when treating of the two-feet theodolite
and the repeating circle with two telesco|)es, lead me to
unite the properties of l)oth these instruments, omitting only
the means of measuring ani^les in inclined planes.

In repeating instruments, tlie main points to ensure accu-
racy are, — the exact and steady levelling of the instrument,
and the constant parallelism of the motions with respect to
each other, in the course of the re|)eatcd measurement of an
angle. These being secured, the plane of llie divided circle
itself, with its division, serves as a mere indicator of the ope-
rations, which has no influence until in the final reading of
the stoppins; point, by the amount of the reduction of the dis-
tance of it from its intersccti(tn with the real hoii/on and by
the accidental erroi- of the division used, which have been
shown to be the two smallest errors. The influence of ec-
centricity beinja; corrected tiy the indiscrin\inate mean of the
three readings, and the instrument admitiina; ;ill the systema-
tic coml)ination of the series of ani^les which the two-feet
theodolite admits for the siuKh* aniiles.

The same principles, as far as relates to the mode of mul-

830 SURVEY OJP THE COAST

tiplying and the motions of the axis, could evidently be exe-
cuted in the vertical as well as in the horizontal circle. By
making the latter revolve in the manner of a transit, not
only all counterpoising weight might be avoided, (and tliere-
fore the weight of the instrument very much diminished,) but
also its stability in the observation might be secured.

Upon these considerations 1 founded the construction of
an instrument, of which I presented a plan in full size to Mr.
Trougliton, who, approving the principles, thought however,
at first, that with eighteen inches diameter, as 1 wished it, it
would present some difficulties, and therefore executed two
of them of twelve inches in diameter, availing himself of the
liberty left to him, as a skilful and experienced artist, to alter
in various respects their external appearance.

Plate VIII. fig. 1 is a full perspective view of the instru-
ment, and fig. 3 is a vertical section of the horizontal circle
through the centre.

The centre piece aaaa of the stand part is two-thirds of a
strong sphere, perforated to receive the axis of the horizontal
circle. The three hollow conical arms forming the legs of
the instrument are fastened to this piece by large strong
screws, which are stopped below by the small screws 6, b.

These arms terminate in spherical nobs which receive the
vertical double screws a', c', in the same manner as in the
two-feet theodolite and the repeating circle. They rest
upon three truncated cones having lead in the top, and being
sufficiently elevated to admit the verification telescope be-
tween the instrument and the stand.

The vertical axis cc of the instrument is fitted in the sphe-
ric centre piece by a collar, in the same manner as in the
two-feet theodolite, and fastened by six screws from below.
The lower part of this, represented by ee, is nearly two
inches higli, and forms the axis of the horizontal circle, which
revolves upon it by means of the socket dd. The upper
part, seven inches long, has its diameter diminislied so as to
leave a collar ee of about one-tenth of an inch to rest the
upper part of the instrument upon. This socket is in the

OF THE UNITED STATES. S3 1

middle between the two columns ^.^Sf which support the axis
of the upper tek-scope and circle, and is connectiMl with them
by means of the plate // of alioiit half an inch thick, and tlie
cross piece /at the up[)crend of it.

Upon the spheric centre piece aa is fixed a circular ring
hh. ha\ing; three radii in the direction of the three legs of the
instriinient. which hear at their ends the three verniers 1),
E, F. Nvith a clamp and tangent screw at V). This holds the
circle dd hy its lower plane, which is also that of the radii
of the circle.

The divided limb of the circle /'/ is elevated aI)ovc the
other plane, so as to leave both on the inside and outside a
recess sufficient for the clamping; parts of the irujcr and the
outer vcrtiiers. The inner clamp and tangent screw at A
clamping and leading the upper |)art of the instrument, has
the three verniers A, B, C reaching upon the same division
of the limb ii, and affording readings for both the forward
and the backward motion of the telescope. These motions
are required in measuring an angle by multiplication. For,
alternating between the two clamps at A and at I), the circle
will, in one motion, move with the upner part of the instru-
ment, and in the other retiiain clamped to the stand part.

The reading glass is on a deiached part, consisting of a
piece m about an inch and a half Ions, two-thirds of an inch
broad, and one-third of an inch thick, l)earing at one end
a small pillar, upon which the projecting artn revolves. This
brinfxs the magtiilyiny; glass, with its reflector over any vernier
required. At the other end a solid nob forms, at the same
time, a handle and counterpoise to tlie magnifuM-. The
reflector is a circular [jlate of brass lined below with plaister
of Paris.

The two colunms gs^ rise from the strong plate// on both
sides of the centre, so that their bases trmch the base of the
central cone whicli forms the socket ol' the axis, 'fhey are
about two inches and a half in diameter at the base, and fif-
teen inches higli. Kach carries ujjon its top a solid piece ////.

332 SURVEY OF THE COAST

which projects a little more than an inch beyond the column,
to bear the supports of the transit axis of the telescope.

The axis of the transit is nine inches lon^. Its two parts,
as well as the two parts of the telescope itself, are screwed
in a spheric centre piece of about two inches and a half in
diameter, and are in all respects similar in construction to
the telescope of the two-feet theodolite. The telescope it-
self is nineteen inches long and of two inches and a half aper-
ture. It has a lengthening or rather sheltering tube before
the object glass, and in the focus three vertical and three ho-
rizontal threads of cobweb. The eye glasses are exactly the
same as those of the two-feet theodolite and repeating cir-
cles; so that they will serve for any of these instruments
in case of loss. The largest magnifying power is about for-
ty-five times.

On the side of the telescope tube opposite to the circle,
there are two small pins or axes, which are adjustable, and,
by receiving a level constructed for the purpose, make this
telescope serve as a very fine levelling instrument.

Through one side of the axis the wires in the focus are
illuminated by the lantern which is placed upon a light pro-
jecting piece opposite to the axis, and fastened to the piece y
by a screw.

The other part of the axis of the telescope forms the axis
of the vertical circle, which revolves upon it in a manner
exactly similar to that of the horizontal circle upon its axis.

An alhidade, bearing two diametrically opposite verniers
W, X, is fastened to the axis of the telescope by its middle
circular part, and forms the outer reading upon the divisions,
exactly as in the horizontal circle, and clamps in like manner
to the outer part of the limb.

A triangular piece, of which one side is horizontal, iiears
the two diametrically opposite readings Y, Z, reacliing upon
the division from the inside, and clamping to the limb of the
circle by means of the inner recess between its plane and the
plane of the radii.

OF THE UNITED STATES. 333

To the angle ol' this piece, which is turned downwards, is
attached a piece c/, whicii bears a steel pin litiiiii!; in a vertical
slit in the bar olthc triangle, which prevents all angular mo-
tion of this j)iece around the colunin.

In the middle, between the two verniers of the bar of the
horizontal triangle, is the centre socket p, within which the
axis of the telescope revolves. This socket, and that of the
telescope, are held to the axis by the ring //, which is screwed
to the shoulder of the bell metal part of the axis of the te-
lescope foiming the axis to these two motions.

The two magniliers, whicli serve for all readings, revolve
with their arms, round the socket of the triangle. They are
fixed to a ring that turns round this socket, and wjuch is held
in its place by the projection of the same piece u.

In observing vertical angles, the circle is clamped al-
ternately to the alhidadc of the telescope or to the triangular
piece, by the alternate use of the clamps at X or at Z, and
the two series of motions give two separate series of angles,
each with two diametrically opposite readings.

All the verniers of both circles are double in this instru-
ment, as in the repeating circle, having one half vernier on
eacli side.

The adjustment of the axis of the telescope is made by
two strong screws under the pieces y, //, showing a capstan
head at ;• in the uppermost plate of the column, and pressing
these pieces upwards by their spring around the screws fi.
l)y which they are held last to the columns.

A detached level is placed upon the ends of the axis, pass-
ing between the radii of the circle, for the final accurate
levelling of the instrument. When the instrument is adjusted,
this level is removed and placed uj)on an arm /, at the top
of the column opposite the circle, in a position paiallel to
the same, and there adjusted by a screw, below one end of
the arm, to serve as a constant test ol" the sfal)ility of the
level of the instrutnent during the observation.

By bending the lower angular part of the triangle above

VOL. ir. — X 2

334 SURVEY OF THE COAST

mentioned a little inwards, it may be disengaged from the pin
in the piece q, which holds it in its position. Tlien the axis
of the telescope can be lifted out of its supports, and the
whole upper part, which serves to measure vertical angles,
can be taken off, and placed in an inverted position for the
verification of the line of collimation of the telescope, tliough
it can not serve in this inverted position for tiie measurement
of vertical angles.

The verification telescope below the instrument is exactly
similar to the upper, and can, if desired, be used in its place.
It hangs in hooks x^ x, one of which hangs from one of the
legs, and the other from an arm of the stand part of the in-
strument, purposely intended for it. It is pointed in the
same manner as that of the two-feet theodolite, by an ar-
rangement w of three sliding tubes, and a screw presenting
its head to the upper part of the telescope tube at the eye
end, which is pressed upwards to it by the overpoise of the
object end.

To ease the first approximate levelling of the instrument,
there are two small levels k, k, about two inches and a half
long, and half an inch in diameter, placed at right angles to
each other, at the side of the socket of the axis, between the
two columns, on the side opposite to the vernier marked A,
which in the figure show only a little between the axis and
the columns.

The elevation of the upper telescope above the horizontal
circle increases the facility of observing very high altitudes.
The eye end passes through the nadir above the piece f,
crossing the top of the vertical axis. The whole instrument
is about thirty-two indies high, and the base of it through
the truncated cones is a circle of about nineteen inches in
diameter. It is therefore well proportioned for stability, par-
ticularly as the upper parts are not heavy.

In my original plan several of the arrangements were dif-
ferent. They were executed with great success in another
instrument ; and every artist or practical experienced ob-
server will of course vary the disposition of many of the parts

OF THE UNITED STATES. 33p

according to his own convenience and experience, and also
according to the particidar skill or means of the artist who
constructs the instrument. The hij!;li opinion whicli I had
reason to entertain of so distinguished an artist as Mr.
Troughton induced me to leave much to his judgment and
ideas.

I had the horizontal circle constructed so as to have the
axes of l)otIi motions. The centre part had cones both
downwards and upwards. The axis downwards revolved
in the centre of the stand part. The legs of this were in-
clined from the centre to the circumference where the per-
pendicular screws come and upon which the instrument
stands. The other axis receives the upper part of the in-
strument by means of a socket similar to that in the other
instrument, but much shorter.

I'hese two axes weie of bell metal, with steel rings at their
inner and outer ends. They were differently proportioned
to eacli other. The lower was about twice as long as the
upper, and of a more acute conical shape, in order to give it
a greater wedging power ; which, with the greater superin-
cuml)ent w^eight on it, when the circle is moved with tlie up-
per part, increased its friction. The upper axis was about
two inches long ; its lower diameter was about the same
length, its upper less than one inch. The socket of the axis
lay close to it, and moved with ease, as the weight of the
upper part was light. Accordingly, in moving this part, the
great weight of the horizontal circle, and its great friction
prevented all dragging of it after this motion. This, in the
instruments made by Mr. Troughton, and in wliich the ho-
rizontal circle is light, is prevented by completely detaching
the circle from the upper part, when the clajnp A is loose.

Mr. Troughton's objection to this shape of the axes was,
that they could not be rubbed so well witii emery in a kind
of screwing motion which takes off all the rings of turning
and renders them smooth. But as these rings always form
themselves in the instrument by use, I should think that in

336 SURVEY OF THE COAST

vertical axes there is no bad influence to be apprehended
from them.

The vertical circle being supported in this kind of instru-
ments between two columns, it is subject to less spring, and
has much more stability than in the circle with two tele-
scopes, where the double weight of the circle hangs upon a
short axis, upon which equilibrium is maiistained between
the circle and its counterpoise. The verification of the
verticality by the pole star can be made with the greatest
nicety ; and the large detached level itself can be adjusted
upon it.

Method of Ohsei'viiig Horizojital Angles with the Repeating

Theodolite.

The adjustments of this instrument are evidently the same
as those of the two-feet theodolite, and grounded upon sim-
ple and well known principles, which are self evident from
a view of the instrument, and need therefore not to be ex-
plained here.

The use of common theodolites with double axes for the
repetition of angles is also so well known, that the mere de-
scription and view of the instrument would lead to the use
of these double repeating theodolites, yet it may be proper
to describe here the mode of taking a regular series, in or-
der to render more intelligible the other pecularitios which
are to be mentioned as means leading to the greatest accu-
racy.

When the instrument is carefully levelled, the riding level
is placed upon the arm t, parallel to the vertical ciiclc, and
there adjusted.

Then the vernier A being placed upon 0° or any other di-
vision, which may also be the last reading of a foregoing sc-

or THE CKITED STATES. 337

lies, the stands of the verniers A, B, C arc inserted in the
Journal. The chinip D l)ciiig loose, the teleseopc part, to-
getlier with ihe circle, will he turned so us to point the tele-
scope upon the object to the Ici't ot the observer, and tlie
pointing made by the tangent screw at J). Alier which, the
three verniers I), E, Fare read oir, and inserted in the Jour-
nal. It is Ijcst to wiite tlieni consecuiixoly in the six lirst
columns of tlic journal, heading eacii with its proper letter;
the suj)eiscrii)tion of the angle to be measured Ijeing gene-
ral, and above all the letters, with any requisite remark or
designation of the signal, ^'c.

Then tlie clatnp at A being opened, the upper part of the
instiument without the circle is turned towards the object to
the riglit of the ol)server. and being pointed I)y llie tangent
screw of the same, the lirst angle of the series of the three
vert)iers A, IJ, C may l)e read.

.After this the clamj) at 1) being opened, and the telescope
part, together with the circle, being turned \n\ck upon llie
object to the left and pointed by the tangent screw at I), the
first angle of the series of I), E, F will be ol)tained.

In this manner will the observations be continued through
as many repetitions as may be desired, paying attenti(jn to
concUuie with the same kind of movement with which the
ol)servation has commenced, in order to give to i)oth scries
the same number of angles.

In order to keep some account of the progression of the
angles, it is also proper to read one vernier, for instance A
and I), at each observation, and insert the readings in their
l)roper place in the Day- Book.

From the order of pio^ressing here indicated, the angles
will successively follow the oider of the divisions. II' more
series are observed, it may he proper to take the second se-
ries in an inverse order, or backwrncN on the divisions; as the
influence of pressures of screws or friction, t^r. woidd act
inversely, and tlie indiscriminate mean correct them as far
as possible.

His also evident, that if the greatest accuracy be aimed at,

338 SURVEY OF THE COAST

it is advisable to take two series, like the simple angles in
the two-feet theodolite, with the telescope in a direct and in
a reversed position, in order to compensate the influence of
the verticality of the telescope ; though near the horizon this
influence is very small. In like manner also, the instrument
may be placed in the three possible positions of the legs
upon their cones, and such series may be taken at each po-
sition.

All these changes would undoubtedly contribute to accu-
racy, by the compensation which they would give to the in-
discriminate mean of the proper number of series. It might
be asserted that these changes with series of only a smaller
number of angles would be preferable to long seiies in one
position.

What has been said upon this subject relative to the two-
feet theodolite, refers evidently to this instrument, as it is
grounded upon the same principles, the multiplication of the
angles excepted, which, in using it according to such a sys-
tem, would be considered merely as a compensation for the
greater diameter of the instrument. I shall not enter here
into further details on this subject, as I never had time or op-
portunity to test these instruments completely. I measured
only some angles by way of trial, the coincidence of which
with those of the two-feet theodolite was very satisfactory.

Method of Observing Vertical Jingles with the Repeating

Theodolite.

When the instrument has been carefully adjusted and level-
led in all respects, the observation of a series of zenith dis-
tances with it is taken nearly in the same manner as with the
repeating circle 5 but in respect to its order in the use of the

OF THE CNITED STATES. .33a

fiamps. it admits two ditferetit successions, dirt'eiiiio; ocily in
the ease ^vitll which the screws come to the hand in each
motion.

The observation can evidently he made by one person
alone, as the level requires no particular attendance. It may
however be observed liom time to time, to be sure that the
instrument has not been disturbed.

The following order will bring the screws so as to l)c al-
ways convenient to the hand of the observer.

1. Place the vernier Z on 0° or any division, and read Z
and Y. These readings arc written in the third and fourth
columns of the Day-lJook.

2. The clamp at X being loose, make the first observation
by the motion of the telescope alone, and point l)y means of
the tangent screw of the same vernier Z. When the object
observed is a celestial body, tlie time of this oI)scrvation is
observed, and written before the readings of Z and Y, in the
lirst column of tlie Day-Book.

3. Then W and X arc read off, and written in the fifth
and sixth colunuis of the Day-Book, one line I'arther down
than the Zand Y have been written.

4. Unclamp the circle at Z, turn tlie upper part of the in-
strument one half a circumference round hori/.ontally, and
the telescope together with the circle through the zenith
again to the object to be observed, upon which, the clamp at
Z being again fastened, the pointing is effected by the tan-
gent screw of the same Z. and the time observed is written
in the first column opposite to the foregoing readings. By
this, the fust angle of the series by Z will be obtained.

5. Turning the instrument a semicircumference horizon-
tally, and after unclam|)ing the vernier X, also tlie telescope
alone without the circle through the zenith to the object to
be observed, the pointing is again performed by tlic tangent
screw of the same vernier X. wlierol)y the lirst angle of the
second series, or by W, X, is ol)taitied, and the time observed
is written again in the first column,

n. The observer may proceed in this order, and in the

340 SUUVHY OF Tilt COAST

same manner as with the repeating circle, by a succession of
the above alternating motions, until the desired series is ob-
tained, ending at last witli the same motion with which the
series was begun, as here by a pointing with the tangent
screw at X.

7. All the times of such a series, except the last, will be-
long to the series of Z and Y, and all times, excepting the
first, to the series of the reading, W, X.

If several series of the same zenith distance of a terrestrial
object should be desired, for the sake of great accuracy, it
would be advisable to take these series in the two different
manners which the instrument admits, and to use the indis-
criminate mean in preference to either.

The manner of taking out the results of such a series of
observations, and of calculating them, is of course exactly
the same as in the repeating circle with two telescopes ; and
the mode of registering the observations and the results in
the day-books and journals may therefore be omitted here,
as sufficiently obvious.

It is evident that the method of observing time described
in the repeating circle, applies also to this instrument with
equal advantage and ease.

Besides this, the ease with which the light vertical circle,
or the telescope alone, moves upon the transit axis, affords,
in the present case, another method, — viz. to measure dou-
ble altitudes by reflection on a mercury horizon, the level
showing the stability of the instrument, which for this kind
of observation needs no inversion or movement in azimuth,
except for the small progress of the celestial body during the
observation.

By alternating the motions of the transit, with and witliout
the circle, between the direct object and its image in the
mercury horizon, a series of observations of double altitudes
may be obtained with great celerity ; and if the sun should
be the object, the limbs may be alternated, as in another ob-
servation. The times of the two series will follow exactly
as in the series for the zenith distances ; and all other diree-

OP THE UNITED STATES. 341

tions given for these apply equally to the series of double
altitudes. An observer, with a little experience, will be able
to make such an observation without fiirtlier direction. All
that is desirable for it is a large mercury horizon, in order
to have no need of moving it during the observation.

It is easy to adapt to this instrument a stopping arrange-
ment for fmding stars by night. These may be very ligiit,
and re moveable, when not needed. On this occasion, I
may remark that it is proper to make the touches of these
stops liglit springs, and not solid purtjt, that in case they
sliould come to touch, the telescope or other part of the in-
strument stopped, may not be atlected by it.

Description of the Repeating Circle of Reflection.

The application of the principle of reflection from plane
n)irrors has produced tlie instiument whicli has most con-
tributed to the advancement of nautical astronomy and geo-
graphy.

When tlie mirrors are perfect, the accuracy which maybe
obtained in the measurement of vertical angles observed by
means of the mercurial horizon, is certainly far superior to
that from any other instrument of equal size, in which the
level or plumb line is used, the circumstances in all other
respects being the same.

The use of a circle, instead of a sextant or octant, intro-
duced by Tobias Meyer, has in this, as in all other instru-
ments, freed the results from the influence of eccentricity ;
and the improvements of it hy Horda have furnished the
means of correcting t|je errors of the glasses and adding the
property of repetition.

In multiplying instruments, the constant parallelism of the

VOL. II. — \ s

343 SURVEY OP THE COAST

motions is one of the principal properties required, as stated
before.

This is evidently to be applied in this instrument to the
plane of reflection, which is itself determined by the posi-
tion of the large mirror.

In Borda's construction, the axis upon which the mirror
revolves being short, the plane of reflection is too much
guided by the plane of the hmb, which artists well know
can not be executed with the same accuracy and ease as
the axis. From this cause, the English artists abandoned
the principle of repetition ; and Mr. Troughton gave to the
circle a construction, in which the motion of the mirror is
determined by a longer axis, and the eccentricity corrected
by three readings ; without repeating which, from the excel-
lence of his work, and his great care in the choice of the mir-
rors, has given most excellent results.

Reflecting instruments being indispensable in the survey
of the coast, for the observations, to determine soundings,
and others to be made on board of vessels, ^'c, I consider-
ed it proper again to turn my thoughts to the improvement
of this instrument, as I had done long before, so as to pre-
serve both the multiplying principle and the stability of the
plane of reflection. 1 considered the circle itself as of mi-
nor influence, and therefore allowed it to be moveable, and
alternately clamped to the soHd part of the instrument, which
bears the small mirror and the telescope, or to the alhidade
of the large mirror, and moving with it.

Having made a description of such an instrument with a
drawing of full size, before I left the country, I presented it
to Mr. Troughton, who said immediately that he would make
me one upon the same principles, though different in shape,
as he wished the instrument to be lighter. He showed me
at the same time the ideas of Mr. Mendoza, which had com-
pletely failed in a similar attempt, and of which I then ob-
tained the first information.

Mr. Troughton gave to the instrument a shape similar to
that of his reflecting circle, from which my drawing differed

OP TOE UNITED STATES. 343

in many respects ; but liere I had the reason, as in the other
instruments, to leave him at lull liberty in this respect.

I may therefore be allowed here ajjjain to suppose the con-
struction of Mr. Troiighton's reflecting circle fully known,
and describe only the alterations made to it, to give it the
repeating property.

Plate IX. fig. 1 is a perspective view, and tig. 10 a section
of the centre i)art ol the instrument. The parts «, b, c, d, e,
form the frame of the instrument, wijich contains in the cen-
tre piece e the axis both of the mirror and the circle ; in a,
the support of the telescope, which may be lowered or ele-
vated ibr the equalisation of the illumination of the two ob-
jects, in the same manner as in Mr. Troughton's circle : in
c, the small mirror is fixed, exactly in the same maimer as
are also the handles//, and the rectangular piece ^j^', reaching
over the large mirror to receive the straight i)andle ; l)ut the
frame reaches only so far as to unite all the above parts.

The circle itself revolves on the side of the frame oppo-
site to the mirror, by a bell metal socket /, ^ of half in inch
in length, upon an axis turned to the lirass centre piece c of
the frame, tlirough the middle of which the axis of the great
mirror s, s passes, as far as the upper part where the mirror
is fastened to it.

The alhidade AB of the great mirror is at the end of the
axis, opposite to it, and revolves upon the circle so as to read
upon the divisions.

The alhidade DC is fixed to the frame of the instrument,
between it and the circle, and forms tviro diametrically op-
positf readings upon the circle, for the motion of the mirror
and the circle together.

The two axes have therefore entirely independent revolu-
tions, the mirror within, and the circle without th^^ piece //. u.
The clamps of the two motions are here bodi outsi(|c of the
circle, as it is not necessary that they cross each other in the
observation. Both alhidades will give a sepaiatf sf-i'-'^ of
angles, corrected for eccentricity by the two opposite read-
ings.

S

344 SURVEY OF THE COAST

When the mirrors are parallel, the alhidade AB stands un-
der the telescope, and the alhidade DC is at right angles with
it, so that in the observations, the vernier A comes alternate-
ly on the two sides of the telescope. The angle between
the collimation line of the telescope, and that from the cen-
tre to the small mirror, form an angle of about 17° at the
small mirror. The direction of the handles /,/is perpendi-
cular to the collimation line of the telescope.

As all angles are measured at least double, namely on
both sides of the parallelisms, the circle is divided like every
other into 360°.

To give to the great mirror the full field of reflection, on
the side of the telescope, when large angles are measured,
the telescope is not screwed fast in the support at n, but the
part commonly made to adjust the collimation line parallel
to the plane of reflection is here extended into a tube 7n about
four inches long, in which the telescope is slided in and out
according to what the angle may admit, and to keep the cir-
cle not farther from the eye than necessary.

On account of the ease of holding it, the screw I in the te-
lescope tube slides in the slit of this tube, to prevent it from
turning and thereby altering the direction of the collimation
line towards the plane of reflection.

The different eye pieces are fitted in a separate tube which
unscrews atj?, for the ease of packing.

To give to this instrument the same advantage in finding
stars by night, as the circles of eighteen inches have, there
is a light divided semicircle o, o adapted to the alhidade DC,
supported in the middle by a small piece reaching to the
telescope a. Upon this two sliding pieces q, q are placed
on both sides of the middle, to the proper double altitude
of the star, and the light pieces r, r fastened to the other
alhidade at A will be arrested by them, whether this alhidade
moves alone or with the circle.

The other parts of the instrument being exactly similar
to Mr. Troughton's circle, need not here be mentioned. It
is also evident that the construction and shape of this instru-

OP THE UNITED STATES. 3-15

ment may be varied in clifTcrcnt inaiiiiers, without altering
its principal qualities. I made various plans ; but it would
be needless to state here their varieties.

Alethnd of Ohxfin'ing imth the Repeating Reflecting Circle.

The adjustments of this instrument being of course in eve-
ry respect the same as tlie well ivnown adjustments of any
reflecting instrument, must not be repeated here. In all re-
peating instruments, attention is required, to avoid mistak-
ing in tlie regular course of alternating observations, and use
of clamps and screws. It is therefore necessary to proceed
at first with measured and cautious steps, and to form a re-
gular habit of an order easy in the manipulation, wiiich, when
it becomes habitual, will always proceed more surely and
rapidly. The examples of observations given in the exem-
plar of the Day-Book and Journal will prove that two series
often altitudes may be taken in the space of five or six mi-
nutes.

The correspondence of observations with this instrument
and others with the eighteen inch repeating circle, whicli I
had an opportunity of making at the northern boundary line,
proved tiiat the former was capable of giving an accuracy
nearly as great as the latter.

The most convenient order of proceeding in a repeated
double series of observations is the Ibllowing : —

i. Place the vernier A upon 0° or any desired or roimd
number ; and read off B.

2. Write these readings in the third and fourth columns
of the Day-Book. (Vide F.xcmplar.)

3. The alhidade DC i)cing undamped, make an observa-
tion, by the motion of the mirror and circle together, the con-

346 SURVEY OF THE COAST

tact being made by the tangent screw at C, when this has
been clamped. The time of this observation is written in
the first column, before the readings of A and B.

4. Kead the verniers C, D, and write the result in the fifth
and sixth columns of the Day-Book, one line lower down
than the foregoing.

5. If a night observation, place the stop q on the light cir-
cle near the outside of the projccthig piece r of the alhidade
A, leaving it some freedom of motion, and the other piece
q upon the opposite side of the parallelism, upon the same
number of degrees, ^c.

6. Invert the instrument, either from right to left, when
in a vertical observation, or upside down in other positions,
and unclamping the alhidade of A ^ B, move it up to the
opposite stop on the small circle, or in general near the place
which will be indicated by the reading on the small circle,
and after clamping there, make again an observation, bring-
ing the objects in contact by the tangent screw at A.

7. The time corresponding to this observation being ob-
served, it is written in the first column below the former
time, and opposite to the second reading.

8. If the stand of the alhidade of A 6j B is now read off,
a result is obtained of the first angle of this series, to which
the two times observed would correspond ; and in a vertical
observation on the mercury horizon, the angle indicated
would be the double altitude corresponding to the mean of
the two times.

9. Invert the instrument again, to bring it in the same po-
sition as for the first observation, unclamp the alliidade C, D
and move the circle with the large mirror, (the alhidade of
which remains clamped to it) near to the first posifion or
place of the stop, where C is again clamped.

10. In this posifion, make again an observation effecting
the contact by the tangent screw at C, and writing the time
under the second time.

H. In reading the verniers C ^ D, the first angle of the

OP THE UNITED STATES, 847

series would be obtained, giving again directly the double
altitude corresponding to tlie mean of two last times, if the
observation is a vertical one on a mercury horizon.

12. To continue tlie series farther, the next operation will
be the movit)g of the alhidade A, or the mirror alone, as in
No. 0, and the alternation may be continued as far as de-
sired ; the last observation being always one of the same kind
as tliat first made, in order to give to both series the same
number of angles.

13. The times belonging to the first series A ^' B will be
all the times observed, except t!ie last; and the times of the
scries C ^ D, all the times except the first, as in tlie repeating
circle with two telescopes, and the calculation of each series
will be separate.

If the angle observed should increase during the observa-
tion, as in observing time for instance, it will be proper to
attend occasionally to the stops, that they may not be too
near, so as to occasion them to be touclied by the alhidade,
and disturb the readings. In observing the sun, these stops
are best removed to the end of tlie circle.

In keeping fast the clamp of the alhidade C, which holds
the circle, and moving only the mirror, the instrument will
perform exactly the same functions as Mr. Troughton's cir-
cle, by the single cross observation ; and in determining the
point of parallelism of the mirrors, the same observations
may be made as with a sextant ; but in these the instrument
loses not only its peculiar advantages, but even would not
serve so well as a sextant, which is lighter, and its parts [)ur-
poscly calculated for solidity in this kind of observations.

If in terrestrial angles, the two objects observed sliould be
equally well illuminated, so that the equalisation of light
could be made constant, the alternation of the angles can
be effected without inverting the instrument, by changing al-
ternately the object to be viewed directly ; i)y whicli tlic other
will be brought to alternate equally with the position of the
mirror, to receive the reflection ; and the inconvenient posi
tion of the hand, or the change of handles, is avoided.

348 SURVEY OP THE COAST

Description of the Plane Table, and the Alhidade to the same.

The best method of surveying the minute details which
are to fill up a triangulation, is undoubtedly by the plane ta-
ble and its alhidade, with a telescope revolving in the verti-
cal. This method will give to the detail surveyor the full
result of the triangulation with respect to the relative posi-
tion and distances of the points to be determined, in a me-
chanical form, appropiiated to the nature of liis work ; and
which will not only be a guide and reference, but also a
means of enabling him to determine his distances, and to ve-
rify his work constantly as he proceeds, and by reviewing
the fundamental points, to discover an error immediately,
before it may mislead him. The detail surveyor can there-
fore proceed with confidence and celerity, and his work will
be greatly diminished by this method, as well as by saving
all the work commonly called plotting, (necessary in all
Other methods,) which besides introduces new errors, while
those made in the field remain concealed until it is too late
to correct them properly.

The plan of the triangulation being propeily adapted, will
besides be made at once sufficiently by the mere projection
of the triangulafion, as will be observed in its proper place.
The details lieing introduced in the field, immediately under
the eye, will be much more numerous, more accurate, and
natural ; so that to a man acquainted with tlie subject, it will
be easy to distinguish details and plans surveyed by this me-
thod fiom those taken by the theodolite or the needle. The
last of these instruments is the worst that can be employed
for the purpose, and has probably been transferred to land
only from its use at sea. As a historical proof of these asser-
fions, 1 shall only mention tliat the plane table has been used
in the surveys made in East India by the East India Company,

OF THE UNITED STATES. 349

under the direction of a German, and on account of the ad-
vantages for which I gave it the preference in this work.

The principles of the alhidade are simple. It may bcac-
curately constructed, and easily verified, ih properties
should be : —

1. To level a plane.

2. To describe an exact vertical upon this plane.

3. To draw, or rather indicate, upon this horizontal plane
a line parallel to the vertical plane of an object.

All further complications are not only useless, but always
prejudicial to the accuracy of some of its main properties,
particularly in applications similar to those intended in this
work.

In Plate IX. fig. S, 3, ^ 4, a, b is a rule of about sixteen
inches long, three inches broad, and one-tenth of an inch
thick. Four pillars c, c, near its middle, rise about three
inches high. They support a frame d, d perpendicularly
across tiic rule, about six inches long. Upon the two ends
of this arise perpendicularly two uprights e, e of four and a
half inches in height, forming the supports of tlie axis of the
telescope.

The telescope/.^ is a regular small transit, describing an
exact vertical upon the horizontal axis A, h without clamping,
stop circle, or any similar contrivance. It is about fifteen
inches long, and of about an inch and a quarter aperture. It
slides forwards and backwards in a tube/, ^ of foin- inches in
length, fixed to the square centre piece, and may, by that
means, be placed in equilibrium, so as to remain in all po-
sitions by the mere friction of the axis in its supports, and
the level hooks-.

In one of the supports is the adjustment for levelling the
axis of the telescope, by a capstan head screw i,i. There is
expressly no horizontal adjustment for this axis, to eflect the
parallelism of the vertical plane of the telescope with the
sides of the rule, because this is intended to be fixed and
adjusted by the proper filing of the Y's in tiie sup[)oits, or
the placing of the frame d, d on the columns c, c.
vol.. II. — z 2

350 SURVEY OP THE COAST

Before the object end of the telescope there is a light
lengthening tube of three inches in length, to keep the side
light and glare from the object glass, winch is very necessary
in this instrument.

The eye part of the telescope is in a long tube sliding in
the main tube. By sliding it in and out, the wires are placed
in the focus of the object glass ; and by turning it in the tube
they are placed perpendicular.

There are three vertical and one horizontal wires. The
multiplication of the vertical wires is for the observations of
transits of celestial bodies in observing transits, by which a
survey may be properly oriented, or a true meridian drawn
in it. The eye pieces may be chosen at the pleasure of the
observer, and, in respect to their magnifying power, they must
be adapted to the middle distance of the objects which may
come under observation. It is therefore proper to liave se-
veral clianges ; and it will be very convenient to have one
prismatic, which being placed so as to look upwards, will
serve for objects at such an elevation as will not easily allow
room for the head between the plane of the table and the
eye piece ; and it would not be proper to give to the instru-
ment too great an elevation in its construction, because it
would affect the stability of the vertical plane of the tele-
scope.

The spirit level k hangs to the axis by hooks, and has
proper adjustments. It serves for the levelling of (he axis
of the telescope, and the plane table itself. The method of
using it is too evident and simple to be detailed here.

As this instrument will, in its use, be placed on diffcient
parts of the j)lane table, it becomes a desirable object that it
should be as light as may be consistent with its necessary
solidity, in order that it may not affect the level of tiie plane
table. For this purpose, tiie large rule is cut out as seen in
fig. 3, so as to form only a skeleton to tlie outei- straight
line, and the sujjports of the telescope. In like manner, the
frame J, d and the supports e, e are cut out, so that the in

OP THE UNITED STATES. 351

strument is rendered very light, and at the same time very
solid, by the nature of its framing.

It may be useful to give here the description of an addi-
tion which this instrument admits, and by whicii it answers
the purpose of a very good goniometer.

In the middle, between the pillars c, c, is a socket which
receives an axis of at least one inch in length and about one-
third of an inch in diameter. At both ends of the rule, a
^' b, there are two very thin pieces, either added to the end
edges, or worked out in it, in which two points are made, at
equal distances from the centre, and diametrically opposite
to each other.

Another rule similar to the above, and of equal breadth
and length, is kept from bending below by an edge bar taper-
ing from the centre tcnvaids the two ends. This has in its
middle the steel axis to the socket of the other rule, whicli is
put upon it, and held by a screw from above, when the in-
strument is to be used as a goniometer.

fn the middle, below the rule, is a centre piece, either
square or round, with a screw sufficiently solid to hold well,
and adaptable to any stand, which will of course be conve-
niently contrived so as to suit the motion work of the plane
table. This table will be descril)cd hereafter.

A decimal scale will then be constructed on the radius of
the instrument considered as a unit, which therefore tnay be
chosen so as to serve at the same time as a scale for the
l^lanc tal)le operations. The cords must be measured by a
beam compass of proper length, ^'C. The numbers on the
scale may be marked at one half their value, so that when
the cord measured by the beam compass is applied to it, they
will immediately indicate the size of half tiie angle, which
Ijeing taken from a table of natural sines, will give the an-
gles with great case, and, if proper care is taken, with consi-
derable accuracy.

'I'he levelling, and all adjustments of this instrument, are
of course exactly the same as when used on the plane table.

352 SURVEY OF THE COAST

The measuring of the angles can of course be varied, and the
cords of the two vertical angles can always be measured, and
in many cases the supplements. It will be more proper to
let every angle be composed of two, given by tiic cords of
two angles, goi g oft' from a fixed position of the lower rule,
than to place the lower rule together wiih the upper upon a
point, with their points placed upon each other.

Instruments such as I have now described at length, I had
executed in i79Ji, by the exact artist Develey in Lausanne
in Switzerland, for the Surveyors of the Comissaiiat General
of Berne, as we were not satisfied with the usual alhidades
with lights. These instruments have, m all respects, an-
swered very well, and liave not deteriorated by long use.

The plane table itself ought to be about tliirty inches by
twenty-four in size, as light as it can be made consistently
with solidity, it may, on that account, be proper to have it
pannelled. 1 have always found that old pine board, which
had served long as doors or house furniture, ^"c. was the
best material for it. The size above mentioned allows pa-
pers of such dimension as will be found advantageous, while
a small table will introduce inaccuracy, by the necessity of
changing often, and adjusting many papers. For the same
reasons plane tables, with frames to stretch the paper upon,
are to be rejected. The paper must be allowed to be of
great length ; and a breadth of three feet and a half may well
be placed on tiie table, of thirty inches in one direction. It
is good to have the edges rounded oft", so tiiat when the pa-
per is wound round it, the part not used may be rolled up
under the table, and kept from Iblds or bends.

The paper is stretched and held upon this table by brass,
or (which is still l^etter) steel springs of sufficient sfrengtli,
and of the shape and about the size seen in Plate IX. fig. (5
^ 7. These springs sliding over the edges of the tal)le. and
holding in front, admit freedom to the paper arcnind the ta-
ble, l)y the greater width of the round sprinii part behind.

The motion work of the plane table is exactly similar to
that of the large needles, and may be seen in Plate IX. fig. 3.

OP THE UNITED STATES. 353

Instead of the pillars d, d, which cany the needle, there are
three screws, liy wjiich the iippeiiiiost circular piece n, n is
screwed last to (he middle of the plane tal)le, which has for
that purpose a circular part, giving an additional thickness to
the table in this place.

The piece;?,;/ is a strong circular rim, eiglit inches in dia-
nieter, witli six strong radii. The outer part has a l)ell me-
tal ring, upon whicli it revolves upon tiie lower plate/,/, to
give a smoother motion than brass on brass. In the centre
m is a boll metal axis, about three inches and a hall" long,
passing through the centre of the piece /, /. Tl»e piece /, / is
similar to tlie above in shape, only stronger, and [irojecting
somewhat over it, so as to admit the clamping part />, which
goes in a small rim cut in it all roimd. and i)y wliicli the
plane table is placed in the pro[)cr dii-eclion by a tangent
screw, after beins; approximately placed by hand.

Fn the centre piece /. / is a strong piece o. n. through which
the axis of the upper plate passes, and in which its revolu-
tion may be fully stopped by the milled h; ad mother screw
/. This centre piece has a small neck at o, o, below which it
is formed in a part of a sphere of aI)out an inch and a half in
diameter, which is held down to the lower |)iccc ;•, ;- by the
sections of a hollow spherical piece //, q, covering the above
part of a sphere.

In the plate i\i\ which is again formed like the others, but
niade the strongest of the tliree. (the rim being about an inch
and a half bioad and one-third of an incii thick.) tliere are
three perpendicular screws e, at one hundred and twenty de-
grees distance (Vom eacli other, supporting; the piece /. / upon
round nobs, and being turned by their milled heads below the
plate, which lidl exactly in the middle between the three
sockets s. These sockets receive the Joints of the brass fer-
rules a. whicii move round tlic pin passina; throucjii them,
and have a stron<; Wf)od screw inside, in which woodi'U legs
five feet long are screwed fast, and extend far enough out in
all situations of (lie trronnd, in ordei- to ajivc suffieient solidity
to the table. These legs have iron ferrules and points below.

354 SURVEY OF THE COAST

At about two-thirds of their length from below, they are near
two inches thick, tapering gradually and equally out on both
sides ; so that the lowest end becomes the smallest, and is
reduced to about one inch. This form of the legs adds con-
siderably to their strength, and prevents them from bend-
ing. ' -'

Of these albidades and the motion works for the plane ta-
bles, I had only two constructed in England, tliough in the
farther progress of the work a greater number of them would
be required. These, however, might be made in this coun-
try, using those constructed in England as models.

Description of the Magnetic JVeedles.

In the survey of a sea coast to which ships come under the
guidance of the magnet, it was of course of interest to ob-
serve the variation of the needle, to obtain data for this inte-
resting element.

For this purpose, and not with any view to its use in the
actual survey, two needles were constructed ; and 1 intended
to join to the observations of the variation, those of the os-
cillation, and for which I had a needle of my own. They
are constructed exactly on the same principle as the one I
had constructed in 1801, by M. Esser, Mathematical Instru-
ment Maker at Aran in Switzerland.

Plate IX. fig. 5, is a vertical section of this instrument,
which may suffice to explain its construction. The needle
Z, z one foot in length, is in a circular box about an inch high,
having an horizontal circle x, x silvered, and divided to eve-
ry twenty minutes, A small silver vernier on the needle
assists in reading the subdivisions (wliich might however
have been carried farther on the circle itself) The circle is
divided as usual into 360°, beginning from a radius parallel

OF THE UNITED STATES. 355

to the telescope. Tlie glass cover rests on three points, and
is held to them by the spring of a brass ring above.

The needle .r.r hangs edgeways, has a jewelled cap mount-
ed in brass, which can be screwed in the centre from both
sides, to verify and compensate the parallelism of the mag-
netic line of the needle with the middle line of its iigure,
which serves for the readings.

Four pieces are adapted outside of the needle box. pro.
Jecting a little above it, to receive a large spirit level across
the bo.\. in two situations, at right angles to each otiicr, one
parallel to the telescope, the other parallel to the axis, — by
which the instrument is levelled.

The needle box has below two strong pieces b, b diame-
trically opposite to each other. These form the sockets of
the horizontal axis //, c of the telescope, bearing at its thicker
side c the piece //, in which a tube of four inches long is fas-
tened. Through this tube passes a telescope, in all rcsi)eets
exactly equal to that of the |)lane tal)le alhidadc, so that they
might be interchanged in case of accident.
. This telescope describes a complete vertical circle, to
which it is of course adjustable by the motion of the wires,
and it was not found pioper to give it any other adjustment.
Its verticality is best verified by the reflection in a mercury
horizon of the pole star, or any other object seen under a
large vertical angle, when the instrument is adjusted by the
level. The coirection is of course to be made, if necessary,
half by the wires, and half by the supports of the level. The
needle itself is then equilil)rated for this adjustment by the
brass counterpoise / 'I'he adjustments are so sim[»le, easy,
and apparent, as to need no description.

The needle is prevented from moving by a stop, when not
in use.

The needle case with all the above rests upon six pillars d,
d, by which it is made fast to the plate n, n which is the Ih'st
of the stand part of the instrument. All the lower parts being
exactly equal to those of the plane table, I shall refer to the
description of that instrument for further details.

356 SURVEY OF THE COAST

In making an observation, the needle box revolves by the
rims at n upon the plate I, I, and is clamped, and the telescope
pointed, by the clamping and tangent screw at p. If the sun
or a star is observed, the transits of the three wires are ob-
served as in any other azimuth, and the time accurately noted,
and determined by other observations.

When a magnetic azimuth lias been observed, and read
off at both ends of the needle, with the telescope on one
side of the box, suppose to the right hand, then the needle
must be turned a semicircle in the azimuth, and the telescope
as much in the vertical, and the observation repeated again,
exactly as in the observations with the two feet theodolite.

The indiscriminate mean of these two observations, with
their four readings, must be taken for the result, as it will
be corrected for the eccentricity of the needle, and the eccen-
tric position of the telescope.

A more minute description of the operations will not be
necessary. The inversion just mentioned ought never to
be neglected in any use of the magnetic needle whatever, as
no reliance can be placed in the results without it.

It may be proper to observe that it is necessary to pay
great attention to obtain what is called free brass for the con-
struction of all instruments in which the magnetic needle is
used. All castings from brass fiUngs or borings contain more
or less iron, which will act upon the needle.

With a view to have the needle as little affected as possible,
I requested that the body of the azimuth compasses under
consideration should be made of pure copper. But such was
not to be obtained ; as in England the copper in commerce
is made by a precipitation from a copper solution by means
of iron. By this process, it is always mixed with iron, and
therefore rendered unfit for the use intended. I was there-
fore lead to the use of free brass, as just stated.

OP THE UNITED STATES. 357

Peculiarities of the Fire Feet Tvanait Instruments destined fm-

the Observatories.

The axes of the transits are generally made of considera-
ble length ; but there is probably more lost by this in solidity
than can l)e gained by the nicety of the adjustments.

In each of the transit instruments made by Mr. I'roughton
for the two observatories wliich were intended to be built,
the axis is thirty-three inches long between the supports.
The two truncated cones which form it meet in the middle
upon a spherical piece al)out nine inches in diameter, which
receives also tlie two parts of the telescope ; exactly in the
same manner in all respects as the transit telescope of the
two-feet theodolite.

The bell metal ends of the axis, which are about three
quarters of an inch in diameter and one inch and a quarter
in length, rest on supports which are screwed to the flat top
of tlie stone pillars, the transit not being hung to the inner
side of the pillars, as was formerly the custom. They are
of the following form : —

In Plate IX. fig. 8 ^ 9, a, a, a, a is a plate of brass al)out
lialf an inch thick and six indies and a half square. Four
strong screws b. b, b, b, fastened in the top of the stone by
gypsum, receive it, and it is secured by four mother screws
pressing it close to the stone.

In the middle of this plate is elevated at right angles a
strong piece c, c, about three inclies high and one inch tliick,
in the shajie of a l)ridgc, which slides in a runner, cut in the
plate parallel to the telesco|)c. This piece bcim; moved by
means of the screw c, e. will adjust the telescope to the me-
ridian. In tiie uppermost part of this piece is the rectangular
incision, forming the Y's upon which tiie axis revolves. Be-
low it, this piece is cut out in the form of a segment of a cir-
cle, whicli is subtended l)y a perpendicular sricw in tlic rnid-

VOL. U. .3 A

358 SURVEY OF THE COAST

die d, which can be moved by its milled head, and presses
with its lower part against tlie cord part of the same piece
below; the upper screws in the bridge thus forcing its middle
up or relaxing it by the mere spring of the metal. This is
all the adjustment which is allowed to the supports, as it is
supposed that the stone pillars, and therefore the plates, may
be brought within these limits by previous levelling, and
thereby greater stability be obtained.

About five inches from both ends of the axis, are two
strong rings, of about four inches diameter, turned exactly
on their edges. These turn upon perpendicular rollers of
the same diameter, which are pressed against them from be-
low, instead of counterpoises, by means of springs enclosed
in circular boxes, about eight inches long, which press up-
wards the square slide bearing the rollers. The springs are
moderated from below, by a screw at the lower end of the cy-
linder. These counterpoising arrangements are fastened to
the inner sides of the pillars, in the same manner that the
pans of the transits rising between the pillars usually are.

There is neither semicircle, nor alhidade, nor clamp of any
kind, to keep the transit in a certain position ; as all arrange-
ments of that kind are very apt to disturb the verticality or
accuracy of the circle described by the transit ; which indue-
ed Dr. Maskeline to remove them from the transit of tlie
Greenwich Observatory, and to substitute in their place an
optical arrangement.

In these transits the pointing in altitude is performed by
two semicircles, one on each side of the eye piece, on which
levels move by friction, around their centre, with verniers
and all proper adjustments. These circles are numbered, so
as to show altitudes, as they could not be adjusted to decli-
nations or polar distances, on account of the unknown lati-
tudes of the future observatories. The verniers being there-
fore placed upon the proper altitude, the telescope is turned
upon its axis until the level is horizontal, when the star in-
tended to be pointed at will appear in the telescope, — one

OF THE UNITED STATES. 359

semicircle serving north of the zenith, and the other soutli
of it.

The level for the axis of the transit is a I'rec level hanging
between the pillars, and has a tube of upwards of an inch in
diameter.

The illumination is through the axis, by a lantern placed
on one of the stone pillars.

To see the meridian mark distinctly and without parallax,
in case of its being somewhat near, (as the nice adjustment
will not permit iis to alter the focus from the infinite distance)
it has been usual to adapt before the object glass another
glass of the focal distance equal to the distance of the mark.
I considered this method liable to some objections, and be-
sides could not know tlie distances of the future meridian
marks.

I suggested therefore the following simple arrangement,
the correctness of which [ had long ago tried, and which ob-
tained the approbation of Mr. Troughton. A brass plate is
screwed to the end of thr. additinnal tiil)p plarpH before the
object glass, having in its centre a hole of not more than half
an inch in diameter tlirough which only the middle rays of
light are admitted. Thus all parallax is avoided, the image
is exceedingly well defined, and the great loss of light which
naturally takes place is of no importance.

As these transits are not within my reach, it would be im-
proper to enter into a more minute description of them.
This task is left for the astronomer to whose care they shall
be committed.

On the Astrononiical Clocks intended for the Observatories.

About a year before 1 came to Lonilon, a new clock had
been put up in the Royal Observatory of Greenwich, to serve

360 SURVEY OF THE COAST

with the mural circle which Mr. Troughton was then making.
Dr. Pond gave me the most favourable account of this clock.
He told me it never deviated iroin true time more than half a
second ; atid accordingly I considered it proper to have the
clocks for the intended observaiories made by the same ar-
tist, and upon the sairic principles; as it is difficult to get a
very good clock, and the prices asked are proportionally far
above those of chronomtters. A greater number of the lat-
ter are constructed on account of their constant use in the
navy and naval commerce, which forms in England the prin-
ci|/al support of this branch of the arts, as well as of the ma-
thematical instrument making.

Thf clocks were therefore constructed by the same artist,
Mr. William Hardy from Scotland, residing in London, and
who is eminent for various valuable inventions in the line of
clock and chronometer making, and for the very sui)erior
execution of all his works. The scapenient, as well as the
arrangement of the wheelwork, is of his invention, and exact-
ly siniilur to tlic clock of the Greenwich Observatory, with
only some small differences which 1 suggested, in order to
augment the stabihty, and facilitate the reading upon the
dial.

As I have not access to these clocks at present, I cannot
give as full a description as might be desirable. 1 must
therefore confine myself to observing, that each of them con-
sists of four wheels, and has the hour wheel of about four
inches in diameter in the backward motion of the drum, car-
rying a plate whicii shows the hour through the dial plate.
It may however be useful to descril)e the scnp' ment fr<'m
the drawing which I made of it in London, as 1 know of no
description either of it or of the other peculiaiities of Mr.
Haidy's clocks.

hi Plate VI. fig. 8, 9, 10, 11, rt, a, a is the scapement
wheel, with thirty teeth. The pinions go on jewels. It
stands l)eyond tiie hind plate of the clock b. b. Its outer pin-
ion goes in the bridge c, c projecting from the back plate, the

OP THE UWITED STATES. 361

aibor going through the clock to bring its other |)inion in the
front phite of the clock.

A stions: piece ol l)rass d is atlapted to tlie |)latc h. pro-
jecting a triangular i)iece e dncctly over thcVcapenient wheel.
It receives on each side two steel springs w, w^»,//. These
are held fast to the piece e by the lower screws if. ,if ; and
by means of tlie upper sciews /. / they can he adjusted to
more or less pressure in their lower parts. These form the
sloping and impelling [)art of the scapenient, which is thcrc-
foie regulated I)y them.

All the four springs have circidar holes, at exactly equal
height, immediately below the triangular piece c. and between
the two strengthening rims h, //, where they are weakened
so much, as to present only a very light S[)ring in their ac-
tion upon the scapenient wheel.

At that place also, the springs are bent, so as to make them
tangents to the scapenient w'heel.

Kach of the spiings ii, ii bears at i a ruby iriounted in brass,
and adjustable by the small screws ^, k, projecting from the
spring towards the clock, over the scapement wheel, which
is stopped by their iailing alternately within the circumfe-
rence of the wheel upon a tooth, when tliey are not support-
ed by the pendulum in its motion. These rubies stand ten
teeth and a half distant from each other. 'I'he distance
which they arc allowed to fall is regulated by two screws/, /,
going through strong arms reaching up from the bridge c.
The screw / is screwed in or out, as the adjustment of the
fall of this spring may require. At the end of the springs
arc light i)rass pins o.o. projecting ouUvards over the pendu-
lum .s. to meet the inclined |)lanes /?, /; at the two ends of
the cross bar of the penduhnu. By tins the springs are al-
ternately lifted to disengage the scapement wheel.

The two springs m. m I)car. at the distance of one tooth
farther on each side, each an indin'-d plane or |)allet q, q,
which are jewelled, and I)y means of which the springs are
alternately lifted by the teeth of the scapement wheel, when
this slides under them, after being unstopped ; so that on

362 SURVEY OF THE COAST

tlie side at which the wheel is stopped, the tooth is at the top
of the inclined plane, and on the side where the top falls be-
tween two teeth, a tooth stands below the inclined plane.
These two springs have also at their end, each a light brass
pin ;*, r reaching to the same inclined planes ;;, p, which ter-
minate the cross bar of the pendulum. This inclined plane
or pallet meets these pins exactly when the stop i is disen-
gaged and the oscillation of the pendulum is completed, and
the pins press upon it by the strength of the returning spring,
to give to the pendulum the necessary impulse after each
oscillation. This impulse is moderated by the screws/,/
and the inclined plane returns, by the same power of the
spring, into such a position between two teeth, as brings the
screw which is more distant exactly at its lower end.

The succession of these motions, alternating between the
two sides, forms the scapement. Their equality, and coin-
cidence with the motion of the pendulum, is adjustable by
a small horizontal movement of the bar p, p upon the pen-
dulum, which is directed by a short arm or tooth z, turning
upon the pendnlnm by means of a key, and fitting in an in-
denture of this bar. The motion is stopped by the pressing
screw y in the middle of tlie cross bar, the hole being some-
what elongated, to admit a small horizontal motion.

The pendulum s, s is suspended from a strong brass bar
u, u passing over the upper ends of both plates of the clock,
and supported (agreeably to my suggestion) outside of the
pendulum, by a strong square pillar t, which stands under it
and is screwed below to the same strong brass plate upon
which the clock itself is screwed fast.

The spring v, which foims the suspension of the pendu-
lum, is mounted in a brass piece w, sliding in a slit of the bar
u, and there kept in its proper place by a steel pin crossing
over the piece u, u. The pendulum rod is adapted to the
spring by a steel pin x, crossing both.

To determine the centre of oscillation in the suspending
spring V, this is again perforated, the horizontal diameter of
the round hole being exactly in the same horizontal plane

OF THE t'NlTEU STATES. 363

with the horizontal diaineterof the four holes of the springs,
in order that the motion of the pendulum and the spring may
go oft" as from one axis, to avoid ail friction in the toucliing
of tlic ])ins rand o ujjon the inclined plane p.

The pendulum rod itself is a parallelopipedon of steel, one-
third of an inch broad and one-tenth of an inch thick. 'I'hc
compensation for temperature is made hv a mercury column
about seven inclies high, and i.'j inches in diameter, included
in a glass cylinder, which serves as the lens of the pendulum.
ft is therefore adjustable by exi)criment. and completely at
the disposal of the observer, and lor any latitude. There is
also a screw at the end of the bar. by which this arrange-
ment is suspended to it, and by which the length of the pen-
dulum itself is adjustable.

This pendulum is well known by the nante of the Mercu-
ry Compensation Pendulum; and it is evident that it was the
only one adapted to my purpose, as I was uncertain in what
latitude the observatories would be built. On general prin-
ciples, any compensation of a pendulum must compensate
for the sum total of the effect of temperature upon the going
of the clock, and not merely for the expansion of the rod
itself It must therefore be determined by experience and
observation ; as a rod compensating itself exactly in a pyro-
meter, would not for that compensate every clock ; and these
clocks would not be compensated by it, on accoin>t of the
influence of the temperature upon the scapement springs.

The jewelling of the larger pinion holes of a clock does
not appear to me to be of any advantage. The pressure
upon them appears too great, and on that account occasions
a grinding of" the pinions. Therefore only the scapements
are jewelled in these clocks. 'I'he other pinion holes are
boxed with brass taken from a piece brought to England
from B( ngal as a sainple. which was 2;iven by the Tioard of
Longitude to iMr. Hanison, the first inventor of chronome-
ters. At his death, Mr. Hardy bought it, and uses it with
the greatest economy for such purposes, 'f'he ends p. p of
the cross bar on the pendulum are also lined with this brass.

364 SURVEY OF THE COAST

The dial plate is thickly plated with silver, in order to pre-
serve well tiie whiteness, which facilitates the reading, while
the mere silvering commonly used, soon becomes so dull as
to render tlie reading by night or from a distance inconve-
nient.

With the same views — to facilitate the reading, the circle
of the second hand is larger than usual, and all useless num-
bers are excluded, in order to give to the divisions a more
striking appearance.

It was my intention to make the weight always move at
some distance even, below the lens of the pendulum, to avoid
the too great influence of it upon the j)endulum, particularly
in the proximity of the lens, as it is a well known fact, that
the clock will always change its rate of going in consequence
of the mutual attraction between the lens and the weight.

In clocks which go only twenty-four hours, as those de-
scribed above, which are always wound up at regular times,
this influence, occurring every day equally, will on the whole
compensate itself, and the intermediate deviations occasion-
ed by it will remain concealed, as the clock will always be
regulated according to its mean daily rate. It appears there-
fore the most evident in those clocks which go a long time
with one winding. On a Franklin clock, which I put up at
West Point in 1808, and which shows only four hours, and
went forty days with one winding, the pendulum was com-
pletely stopped when the centre of gravity of the weight was
about ten inches below that of the lens, their horizontal dis-
tance being three inches and a quarter ; the weight and lens
both were considerably heavy.

To counteract this mutual influence, I hung a musket ball
by a thin wire from the board on which the clock rested to
the point where the centre of gravity of the weight was
when the clock stopped, and in a few seconds it began to os-
cillate isochronous with the pendulum.

These two experimems I repeated several times, with ex-
actly equal results ; and though 1 attributed the stopping of
the clock to a small defect in its position, I made the weight

OP THE CNirEU STATES, 3fi5

to go in future below this stopping point, and I never wound
it up as far as that point. This reduced its time of going,
till the weight rested on the floor to fourteen days, and also
destroyed the efl'ect of the attraction of the lens and weight.
The placement of the clocks here described requires great
care, attention to solidity, and various peculiar arrangements
which cannot be described here. Without such arrange-
ments, tliey would be spoiled immediately, and disappoint
the expectations which are with reason entertained of tlicm.

Plan of an ObseiTutory proposed to be built in Washington.

In my plan of operation for the survey, 1 proposed the
erection of two oI)servatories in such places as miglit be
found most advantageous. It seemed evident to me that the
use of these establishments might be extended to objects of
general scientific in)provement, independent of the survey,
without any consideraljle increase of expense : and my views
on this subject were supported by the approbation of many
eminent men in public life.

When I rendered in the accounts of my mission for the
instruments in June I8i(5, the I'rcsident, Mr. Madison, as
well as the Secretary of the Treasury, Mr. Dallas. Were as
desirous as I was, that this part of my plan niight receive its
immediate execution. I thought it important that one of these
observatories sliould be located at the scat of government ;
and many considerations led me to select for this purpose a
part of the hill north of the Capitol, and in the centre of the
city. Circumstances whicli it would be useless to relate
here prevented the execution of tliis ])rojcct ; but still it may
be proper to give the plan and dcstription of the proposed
observatory, as they are necessary to complete the subject

VOL. II. 3 B

366 SURVEY or THE COAST

of these papers, and may at some future time become use-
ful.

The present state of astronomy is averse to tliose vast and
splendid buildings formerly erected for observatories which
now stand near the smaller buildings forming the actual ob-
servatories, and obstruct their view.

I therefore thought it my duty to propose a comparatively
small building, adapted to the instruments intended to be used
in it, but still so formed as readily to admit of enlargement,
if this should become necessary.

The principal aim in an observatory building, besides pro-
per shelter for the instruments and convenience for tiieir use,
is the stability of the instruments them.selves, so that they
may be independent of the influence of any motion in the ob-
servatory itself, or in its neighbourhood. This object is ob-
tained by founding the parts intended to support any instru-
ment at some depth in the earth, insulating the building from
the surrounding ground by a ditch, and supporting the floor
of the observatory itself upon pillars separate from all other
parts of the building, and particularly from the pillars that
support the instruments.

The instruments for which my plan was adapted were, —
a transit instrument of five feet, an astronomical clock, the
eighteen inch repeating circles, and the large telescopes, and
a zenith sector of six feet, ordered and yet expected of Mr.
Troughton. It was also intended to make this observatory
the place of deposit of the standards of weights and mea-
sures, the chronometers or any other instruments of the col-
lection when not in use, and of an appropriate library.

Plate VIII. fig. 1, is the plan of the observatory, at the le-
vel of the floor ; fig. 3 the vertical section, in the direction
of the meridian, through the transit ; fig. 3 the northern front:
and fig. 4 the vertical section in the direction of the parallel,
through the transit.

The whole building is forty-two feet in the direction of
the parallel, and twenty-eight feet in the direction of the me-
ridian. The walls are at least two feet and a half thick below

OP THE UNITED STATES. 307

ground, and may be diminished to about one foot and a liall
at tlie top.

The south front has three windows, the ca^t and west
front each one. and the north front two. The door is in
the place of the north eastern window. In tlic middle of
eacli of the windows, the wall projects inward, in form of a
semicircular pillar two feet in diameter, <7, a, a, tlie top ot
wiiicl). together with the windnw slielf, is covered with one
Hat hewn stone, fastened in the wall, and three feet al)0ve
the level of the floor. This admits any moveable instru-
ment to be placed under the window for observation, even
in the meridian of the transit, and the wintlows and shutters
can be closed outside of it, without disturbing it.

'IMie windows are all five feet broad and nine feet high in
the clear, which will admit observations as near to the /enith
as is otherwise practicable with moveable instruments, and
give sufficient freedom in the azimuth, not only for all cir-
cum-meridian observations, but also for corresponding alti-
tudes.

The windows and the shutters slide by counterpoises en-
tirely below the window seat, in the recesses b. b, made
for the purpose in the outside of the wall, and covered by a
wooden frame projecting sufficiently to shelter them all.
The covers c, c of this frame form the outer part of the win-
dow seat, and move on hinges ; by which means tliey open
or shut the recess with its frame, and support the windows
and shutters, when these are closed.

The middle of the observatory is occupied by the transit,
which rests upon two solid stone pillars ;;, p elevating it near-
ly seven feet al)0vc the floor. Their inner sides arc perpen-
dicular, and thirty inches from each other; the three outer
sides are ta])ered towaids the top. Their bases are about
two feet square, and the tops about ten inches, l^pon their
flat tops tlie supports of the transit are fastened, and on the
inner sides the counterpoising spring rollers, as has been de-
scribed in the proper place, and may be seen in fig. 4,

368 SURVEY OF THE COAST

These pillars go through the floor without touciung it, and
rest below upon a solid block of masonry, about six feet
high, firmly founded below the excavation of the cellar on a
base the breadth of which must be proportional to the soli-
dity of the material employed, of which the best would be
one solid block of stone.

Upon a similar pillar q, somewhat on the side, to the south
east of the transit, the clock is to be placed in such a direc-
tion as to present the face about perpendicular to the desk.
The centre of the second hand must be made to come about
five feet eight inches above the floor, for the ease of reading
and to show below the transit. It can be easily illuminated
by a lantern placed on the side of the pillar near it, so as not
to throw any light to the eye of the observer,

'I'he top of the pillar is regulated by the size of the clock,
and the base by the necessary solidity. It must be indepen-
dent of the floor, and have a particular shape adapted to the
clock, 'I'o admit the case to go round it, without enclosing
the pendulum in the stone, it may rest upon the same base-
ment as the transit, or upon a similar one equally solid ; but
there must be room made in it to admit the weight of the
clock, intended always to go below the floor.

The complaint against the small cuts in tlie roofs of ob-
servatories is well known, and their influence, in a warm
climate particularly, in producing a local refraction near the
observer, would be too great. This was the reason for plac-
ing the ti'ansit in the direction of the windows, which will be
opened entirely for observation.

The part above the window, up to the roof, presenting
itself outside like a continuation of the wall, fig. 3, e, e, must
also open completely, like an inside shutter.

The roof over the transit between the two windows must
slide out to both sides upon the other roof for the whole
breadth of the windows. It is composed of five double shut-
ters of strong sheet tin, moving on round iron bars^, g lying
on the roof, and reaching far enough in the cut to give a solid
support to the shutters ; and if small, they might go entirely

OF THE UNITED STATES. 369

across without taking; so much light from the telcscoi)c as to
produce any impediment.

'I'iie easy motion of these shutter?;, and their close shut-
ting, against drifting snow [)articuluriy, is an object to be at-
tended to carefully, which cannot be described liere.

The second instrument, for which a separate stand was to
be prepared in the observatory, wastlie /enith sector. 'I'his
was intended to i)e placed upon the conic pillars/, and to have
a large and suitable aperture in the roof, like that for the
transit. But as the zenith sector is not yet obtained, all ar-
rangements could be merely preparatory ; and they could
only be well adapted when tho, instrument sliould be at
hand.

Wiien at any fulure time a mural circle should be added
to the o!)scrviitory, tliis was intended to take the place of
the sector, and tiie roof between tlie corresponding windows
to be opened as for the transit. 'I'he sector would then be
removed to tlie corresponding situation on the other side of
the transit,«wliere now the observer's and guard rooms were
placed, the partition being taken away, and an addition of one
or two windows breadth being made to the east of the build-
ing to provide these necessary rooms.

The entry wouUl still remain the same, and it must be ob-
served, that all direct communication between the actual
observatory and any other room which may be heated in
winter, must be avoided.

These rooms must be placed in the cast side of the build-
ing, and the fire place as much as jjossible towards the south-
east, because the north-east wind is in this country the rainy
wind, and therefore the smoke of the chimney, wliich woidd
obstruct the observations, can only be i)rought by the wiud
over the observatory, when the weather would otherwise
not allow the oiiservation to l)e made ; and with all other
winds which accompany fair wealher. it will be (bi\cii from
ihe observatory so as never to be incommoding.

The floor of the observatory is su|)ported upon separate
pillars of masonry h. h. built in the cellar, and touches neither

370 a^URVEY OF THE COAST

the wall nor any of the pillars ; the joints being covered with
cloth nailed to the floor to prevent the draft of the air from
the cellar. The under part of the floor is plaistered lil<e a
ceiling, in order to prevent more effectually the dampness.
and make it a more compact body or mass.

The cellar must be about five feet deep, as well to pre-
vent dampness under the floor and about the pillars, as to
admit easy access to these, and beneath the floor, in any case
of need. For the same reason also, the bull's eye windows
are given to it in the southern and northern front. The ac-
cess to it may be under the step which leads to the upper
room, and under the main door and the bridge before it a
door may be made to come into the ditch.

The ditch around the building must be at least four feet
deep, and about three feet in breadth, to intercept all oscil-
lations of the surface of the earth which may be occasioned
by wagons, ^c. particularly in cities or near inhabited places,
roads, ^c. This of course renders necessary a light bridge
passing to the door. •

The roof is arched, and elevated about twenty feet above
the floor, to avoid all close air under any circumstances what-
ever.

Instruments which would reach into the upper heated air-
of a room would never make a good observation, particular'
ly in such a variable climate as this.

My plan for the framing of a roof may be seen in the
figure. In the arrangement of the rafters, it was necessary
to pay attention to the opening in tlie roof that might be re-
quired for the additional instruments mentioned above.

OP THE UNITED STATES. 371

Promiscuous Remarks upon the PrmcipJes of Construction^ the
Choice and Trial of Instruments.

After having; described various instruments, it may not be
improper to add sonic general observations upon the subject,
which niv experience has enabled me to make.

The navy, and ships employed in commeice, constitute in
England the principal support of the mathematical instrument
making, and have established this branch of the arts on a
large scale, and contributed to its perfection in the last cen-
tury, after tiie invention of tiie reflecting instruments.

The next encouragement arises from gentlemen who take
a pleasure, and rationally amuse themselves in astronomical
observations. These amateurs occupy the artists on instru-
ments of larger dimensions, of greater accuracy, and more
complicated and varied construction.

The use of instruments for scientific establishments come
after these two in the line of influence. The instruments
constructed for such purposes are, comparatively speaking,
limited as to their number, and last too long to be of much
consideration to those who construct them.

From this results the following state of things in relation to
the instrument making in England.

The instruments suitable for naval purposes and for com-
mon surveyitig and levelling fiu'nish the principal support of
the artist. From the profits arising from these, he i)ays his
workmen, and l)rings up his apprentices. The extent of
these two liranches is proved by the numl)crs whicli arc put
upon the instruments in regular succession.

Amateurs requiring Iron) the artist a greater variety, and
instruments of a larger size, he is enabled to extend his esta-
blishment, and to employ his workmen at a greater variety
of work. This prevents their passing itito the class of com-
mon mechanics, to which those are really reduced who arc-

37S SURVEY OP THE COAST

confined to the making of the usual naval or surveymg in-
struments.

The scientitic instruments which the best artists alone will
or can make, are improved by the establishment of the works
for amateurs ; and the artist obtains by them his credit and
fame. But the profit on them is of little consideration ; as
the time and care which the artist must bestow upon them
himself, to the detriment of his profitable work, renders them
very expensive to liim. On this account, none but artists
who are in easy circumstances can execute them.

On the continent of Europe, the case is somewhat different.
The navy does not of course employ as many of these esta-
blishments as in England. They are more limited in their
extent, divided into a greater number of branches, and di-
rected more to such instruments and philosophical apparatus
as are used on land.

The English establishments of this nature having towards
the end of the last century surpassed those of the continent
of Europe, they have frequently supplied the latter with in-
struments of various descriptions. But the improvements to
which science lias given rise on the continent, the delays oc-
casioned by the distance, and the separation occasioned by
the events of the last twenty-eight years, have established this
branch of the arts again on the European continent, in the
hands of various artists, and on a new and well principled
foundation.

The frames of instruments made on the continent are ge-
nerally cast in one single piece, and filed by manual labour.
Their diameters are three feet, to avoid the spring of the
metal. Mr. Reichenbach in Munich refuses to make any in-
struments of greater diameter, in consequence of the bend
or spring to which they are subject.

The English prefer such constructions as admit of turning.
They avoid the manual labour of filing, and therefore com-
pose all the instruments of large diameters of pieces that can
be turned. By this means, the instruments are constructed
lighter and at less expense than by the former mode, Mr,

OP THE UNITED STATES. 373

'I'roiiwhton makes use ol'the spring of the metal itself for the
aeljiistment of his iiistriinients, as has lieen seen.

The comparison might be made to a greater extent, but
such would not be consistent with the object of the present
papers. It will be proper, however, in any given case to pay
attention to the nature of the establishment, anil the particular
branches in which each artist is most distinguished, that a
preference may be given to such as will be likely to give
most satisfaction.

Similar considerations apply to the ditterent kir»ds of time-
pieces. Chronometers arc of such importance to the navy,
that every attention has been directed to their improvement,
sit:ce their invention by Mr. Harrison. On the contrary, the
improvements in clock making have been comparatively
limited, and the artists employed in this branch are not so
able as those employed in the construction of chrono-
meters.

Astronomical clocks are not kept for sale as chronome-
ters arc. There are but a few constructed, and those agree-
ably to order only.

As to chronometers, it is hardly to be expected, that among
the great numbers kept on hand by dilVerent artists, there
should not be some of them preferable to others. If there-
fore several chronometers be required, as was my case, it
will be proper to take them from difterent artists, in order to
have a greater chance of success, which no artist can inva-
riably attach to his work.

It must be ol)served, from the principles upon which chro-
nometers are constructed, that they will go differently at
sea from what they do on land. This I have proved by se-
ven chronometers wliieh I kept going on my passage from
London to Philadelphia, and which I compared logelher dai-
ly. It is evident that the constant motion of the ship must
aflect the heavy balance, which is 'never an'ecled when the
chronometer is completely at rest. The (|ii;intity of fh's ef-
fect is of course both micertain. and piuidiar to each chro-
nometer, both in respect to quantity and direction.
VOL. n. — 3 c

374 SURVEY OF THE COAST

The delicacy of the scapement may be the cause why
English chronometers are very liable to momentaneous gains
or losses, which amount to a considerable number of seconds,
though in other respects they may be very good, and may
again return to their usual rate. It is probable that these may
be owing to some very slight motion which occurs just at the
moment when the scapement passes the stopping spring.
which then may either let the wheelwork, and of course the
hands, pass a number of seconds, or stop it for some time,
before it recovers its free and regular play, and rate of going.
This cannot be prevented in any voyage or journey.

On the continent of Europe, a much smaller number of
chronometers is made, for the same reasons as stated in
respect to mathematical instruments. Only the most emi-
nent watchmakers engage in them, and they are, generally
speaking, as successful as the English. The principles upon
which they work are also different : but this is not the
place to enter into details on this subject. It is only proper
to mention that in case repairs, or even cleaning, should be
necessary in a chronometer, it can seldom be expected, that
any other chronometer maker will be able to do it so well
as he who has made the instrument, on account of his pecu-
liar mode of working. A like remark will apply with greater
force to English and French chronometer makers.

1 should advise the use of no chronometers but such as go
only one day. All that go for a longer period have by no
means the same degree of accuracy. It is probable that one
of the causes of this arises from the too great influence of the
inequalities of the springs, which must of course extend over
a longer space of time.

As it is well known that the principal difficulty in the di-
vision of mathematical instruments consists now in the pro-
per centring of the division with the axis of motion, it may
be proper to mention the manner in which this is effected,
and to give an idea of a dividing engine by which this error
may be avoided, and which 1 communicated to Mr. Trough-
ton. He approved of it so fully, that he advised Mr. The-

OF THE UNITED STATES. 373

mas Jones, who made several of the instruments here de-
scribed, to make his dividing engine upon the principles
\vl)ich I indicated.

Wiien the instrument comes from the hands of tlie first
workman, it is technically said to be tight, or fitted so as to
admit little or no motion of its axis. Then the circle intend-
ed to be divided, with its axis screwed to it, is i)ut in a lathe
to receive the last adjusting turning, lioth witli respect to the
axis and the plane of the circle. For this pur|)ose, it must
turn upon two points making part of the protracted axis.
As it would not turn sufficiently concentric in any common
lathe arrangement with chucks, a temporary |)ulley is fixed to
some convenient part, for the cords of the wheel to run in.

The motion should be slow and steady, to avoid all vacil-
lation and swinging. Therefore tiie wheel is small, com-
monly one of those used with the hand lathe, and it is turned
regularly by a separate person by hand.

When the axis and the plane of the circle arc thus finally
turned true, and before any thing is changed in the arrange-
ments, those circles, between which the divisions are to be
drawn, are immediately turned upon the plane of tlie instru-
ment, by the pressure of a fine point held in a position in-
clined to its motion, at about an angle of ten degrees, so that
no actual cuttitig takes place. 'I'hese circles are perfectly
concentric with the axis, and aro described better on a silver
arch than one of brass, on account of it's mure uniform tex-
ture and the ease with which it receives such an impression.

The instrument being now taken from tlic lathe, the socket
of the axis, finished in the same manner, is rubbed upon it
with emery and oil, by a kind of screwing motion, untd an
easy and even motion is olMained. This turning following
always the conical surfaces by close contact, has no sensible
tendency to chance the centre.

The present construction of the Fnglish dividing engines
requires an operation which makes the centre of the division
depend on the motion of the axis. It is necessary to take

376 SURVEY OF THE COAST

the axis out of the circle, to adapt this latter to the engine,
and consequently it is not absolutely certain that the axis be
screwed again exactly in its position, ^'c.

The dividing engines have all a centre pin, to which the
instrument is centred. These pins are either tixed, or
changeable, for different diameters of axes, suited to the usual
and common instruments. To adapt any instrument having
a central aperture for an axis different from these, a collar is
turned, having its outer diameter to fit this aperture, and its
central hole the centre pin of tlie engine. But it is evident,
that the concentricity of these two circles is not always cer-
tain, and that in the last turning above mentioned, the centre
may have been displaced from the centre of the aperture,
which receives the axis, and which was of course not turned
with it.

The division being completed, the axis is again screwed in
its place, and the adjustment of it is to be made, both with
respect to its concentricity and its perpendicularity to the
circle. The reading of opposite verniers or microscopes
must indicate the corrections which are necessary. To
give the axis its proper position, it is necessary to raise three
burrs with a punching tool at such places as appear to re-
quire it. By repeated trials of tills kind, the axis is again
centred, and this operation is to be discontinued when a suf-
ficient approximation is obtained. When an instrument has
to be removed to a considerable distance, these burrs may
wear out by the greater pressure they sustain, and the in-
strument may become eccentric by it.

All this troublesome operation, and the disadvantages at-
tending it, may easily be avoided, if instead of the pin or
axis, the dividing machine had in the centre a circular hole
of about five inches diameter, and of sutticient depth to ad-
mit the lower parts of the axis of any instrument, so that the
instrument could be placed upon the engine, together with the
axis, in the same situation as it came from tlie last turning
and rubbing, without any dismounting whatever. To ease
the approximate placing of the circle on the engine, a num-

OP THE UNITED STATES. 377

ber of concentric circles of proper diameters could be drawn
upon the plate.

The axis of the engines being generally very strong, would
easily admit the necessary aperture in the centre; and it
might for that purpose have an outer diameter of seven
inches, without impeding its easy motion in the manner in
whicli the engine is otiiciwise made and used. All otiier
parts of the engine would be exactly similar to that of Mr.
Troughton, as described in the Encyclopedia of Brewster;
Art. Graduation.

The circle intended for dividing being laid upon tlie en-
gine, with its axis last to it, and centred approximately by any
one of the circles, a compound micronieter microscope is
placed between the two bars, at tlic place of the cutting tool,
having its wires so placed as to form one or more tangents
to the circle drawn on the instrument for the limits of the
divisions. The instrument will evidently be centred, when
the wire of the nncroscope touches this circle always in the
revolution of the engine upon its axis. As long therefore as
this docs not take place, the position is to be corrected, half
by moving the instrument properly upon the engine, and half
by !)ringing the microscope, or its wires, nearer to, or fartlicr
from the centre ; and the different circles upon the instru-
ment may serve to verify each other.

When the instrument is thus adjusted upon the engine, it
may be fastened by various means. If melted wax Ije cast
about the parts by which the instrument is supi)ortcd, it will
be sufficient to keep it steady during the time required for
dividing, and will not derange it by any unequal pressure.

In the present improved state of the dividing engine of
Mr. Troughton, accidental errors of the divisions arc scarcely
possible, if due attention be paid to the proper stability of
all the moveable parts, and the legulaiity of treadinir. so that
no tooth of tlie racking wheel may be passed over, and that
the tracer may not admit any vacillation in its adjustments.

The tracer of Mr. 'I'roughtnn is better tlian the roimd point
comn\only used. It is groimd below to an elliptic section, of

378 SURVEY OF THE COAST

which the longer diameter is in the direction of the lines,
and the shorter perpendicular to the same. The intersec-
tion of these two lines forms below a short and sharp edge
which cuts with such ease and keenness, that on silver the
tool cannot even be left to press with its full weight, and on
brass its weight alone is sufficient to make a deep and sharp-
ly defined line in one stroke.

The verniers may be easily divided, by placing them on
the instrument itself at such a proportional distance within
the circumference of the circle as the part shall be into which
they are to divide a subdivision of the instrument, and then
dividing as usual. This produces evidently, when they are
removed to the circumference, the loss of one division upon
their full length, in their comparison with the divisions of
the circle. On the dividing engine, with a tangent screw,
this division can be made by the mere adjustment of its re-
volutions.

On some of my instruments, the pin holes which served
for this operation, and which are usually filled up again, are
left open, that a vernier may be restored again from the di-
vision of the instrument itself, if need should be.

It may not be improper here to mention some of the de-
tails which are to be observed in the choice of instruments,
or in the direction of their construction ; as their influence
on the practical use of the Instruments is greater than might
be supposed, and as they are not always attended to by every
artist.

The quality of the metal of which the framing part of tlie
instrument is made is not indifferent, as the stability of the
instrument depends in some measure upon it. H brass is
used, this is subject to very great variation, without being ob-
served by a person not well acquainted witli the subject.
The mixtures of copper and tin, properly cannon metal,
though usually called bell metal, are much more easily dis-
finguished in quality, and therefore preferable in many in-
stances. The use of this metal for tlie axes, when the sock-
ets are brass, or for the sockets, when the axes are steel,

OF THE UNITED STATES. 879

must be considered as iiulispcnsablc. Formerly the artists
ill England had for this purpose a still better metal, — the
tutenague, imported from China, but now prohibited. The
greater hardness of this metal was particularly favourable for
the axes of transits, b^c. which, by their frequent revolution
upon the same parts, without going completely round, are
very apt to become partially worn, and which catuiot be
made of steel, on account of its rusting. All the nobs and
sockets in which the tangent screws move should be of good
cannon metal ; for tiicse screws, being frequently used, will
soon lose their easy motion, if they turn in brass, in conse-
quence of their close contact and equality of texture ; and
after this, they acquire an inefficient or lost motion, to the
great annoyance of the observer. To avoid this in all cases,
1 think it would be easy to adapt a spiral spring of steel wire
around the screw between the two nobs in which the screw
works, pressing it always to the same side of the path.

In the general construction of the instrument, attention
must be paid to give to the lower parts such strengtli and
weight witii respect to the upper, as may not allow of any
spring. This is the great difficulty which requires tire obser-
ver's particular care in the repeating circle with two tele-
scopes, where the main weight of tlie instrument is support-
ed in equilil)rio upon a small axis, so that the vertical obser-
vation must in some measure be made without touching the
instrument.

The verniers which present inclined planes to the divisions
must toucli them in order to show accurately the coincidence
and avoid parallax. This renders it necessary to give some
spring to the arms which bear them, and care must therefore
be taken, that they do not rub the divisions, and of course do
not drag. Mr. Rtichenljach in Munich avoids this by divid-
ing the verniers upon a complete circle, which presents it-
self inside to the divisions in the same plane. lUit this re-
quires very nice work, and as the circle is light, some rare
to prevent its warpino;. which may l)c occasioned by a retuiii
of some hammered i)arts of it to their former irregular shape.

380 SURVEY OF THE COAST

These light parts are very liable to spring back, on being
exposed to a considerable variation of temperature. By this
construction, Mr. Reichenbach has applied verniers in his
circle of the Paris Observatory, of which the diameter is one
metre, and which is the largest size he finds advisable to
give to any instru.nent.

The English artists, on the contrary, use compound mi-
croscopes for the readings, where the diameters are above
eighteen inches, atd find them to be very convenient. These
microscopes, and probably the readings with them, are more
accurate ; but they require more labour and very accurate
work.

I have already observed, that for a division by points, the
micrometer must have one single wire in the direction of
the radius ; and for a division by lines, two wires, intersect-
ing each other and inclined equally to the radius, making
angles of about fifteen degrees on each side ot the division
stroke, the equality of which is very easily judged with great
accuracy.

The divided circle, as well as the radii, arms, or plates
bearing'verniers or microscopes, ought never to be attached
to other parts of the instrument, except the central piece,
in order to be in all cases equally free, and left to their own
spring and shape. In like manner the centre piece is to be
connected with the stand part alone.

The clamping and tangent screw arrangement ought al-
ways to be strong, and never to be fixed to an arm bearing
a vernier or a microscope. It is very apt to affect it differ-
ently from the other verniers, as it has to act on all parts as
leader, and to overcome the resistance of the central friction.
On this account, it is commonly made somewl)at stronger
than the others. If tlie verniers are not attached to a full
plate, it will be best to give the instrument a separate strong
arm, expressly for the purpose, and to make all arms of ver-
niers or microscopes exactly equal.

The quality and power of the telescopes on an instrument
must always exceed the degree of accuracy which is obtain-

OP THE rNlTED STATES. 381

able by tlie other parts ol" the instrument, as it serves to ve-
rify these, and also gives certainty to the observer by the
accuracy of the pointing. 1 liave always found, in terrestrial
as well as celestial observations, the largest power wjiicli tlic
telescope could bear the most advantageous for use. Great
light is not an essential requisite. The distinctness of the
image and its size are lar preferable, as in terrestrial objects
they help in pointing minutely, and in celestial oljscrvation
they increase the quantity of visible or a{)parent motion.
The same considerations show, that there is no gain in a dis-
proportionate aperture. Accuracy of the image is lost by it,
as may be easily tried by diminishing the apertures of large
telescopes by covers of dilVerent openings.

In the course of my gcodcsical operations, I was oliliged
only towards winter to lay aside the greatest magnifier
of the two feet theodolite, of seventy-seven times, and take
the next, of about fifty times. But soon after, oI)servations
at some distance became entirely impracticable, so as to give
the desired degree of accuracy.

These circumstances render it proper to choose the dia-
meters of instruments such as to allow with propriety and
ease the application of some of the telescopes which are ob-
tained in creatcr perfection ; and in this respect it is proper
to mention here some facts relating to this subject.

'i'he telescope which is obtained the most perfect in its
kind is that of three feet and a half focal length, and about
three inches aperture. For instruments, the aperture ol'
about two inches and a half is preferred. Below that size,
the telescope of thirty to thirty-two inches, with the same
apertures, is obtained in great perfection. These two regu-
late therefore the size of the largest moveal)le instruments.
Alter this, the telescope of twenty-two inches, with about an
inch and three-quarters aperture, which is well suited for the
eigbtecninch circles, is very good foritssi/c. Thesmallersizes
are made in great numbers and of various qualities, where
almost no distinction can lie made in respect to size, except

VOL. II. 3 D

38S SURVEY OF THE COAST

what chance introduces. 1 hose, however, about thhteeu
indies long, for some of the better geodeslcal instruments,
and six inches long for reflecting instruments, are the most
careliilly attended to. Above the three feet and a half tele-
scope, those of five feet focal length, and three to four inches
aperture, are frequently obtained very good ; and Mr. Tully.
Optician in Islington, has been very successful in them.
Those of six feet focal length are difficult to obtain in great
perfection. They have the same aperture as the five feet
ones ; and Mr. DoUond has made some very good telescopes
of this size, though of course after many trials, and the re-
jection of many glasses.

A good telescope of seven feet focal length and greater,
with four to five inches aperture, may be considered as the
result of a happy chance, and proportionally to what is ex-
pected of such telescopes, I heard only of about three or
four that had acquired a well deserved fame. Of these the
largest and best is the ten feet telescope, with six inches
aperture, made by old Mr. Dollond for the Greenwich Ob-
servatory, to prove the possibility of making an achromatic
telescope equally as good as the ten feet reflecting telescope
of Dr. Herschel. Tn this he actually succeeded, but only in
one glass out of a number made with that view. This tele-
scope has lately been adapted by Mr. Troughton to a transit
instrument for the Observatory.

The sizes intermediate between five feet and twenty -two
inches are considered as generally speaking not good. For
instance, the four feet focal length is not suitable for scien-
tific purposes. They are therefore generally mounted for
pocket telescopes or spy-glasses.

In the larger telescopes, the optician is not quite certain
of the focal length in the formation of his object glasses.
This may vary within two inches, though tiie glasses come
out of the same forms: but such a difference is of no impor-
tance.

A high polish to the object glasses is not desirable in in-
struments. The glaring liglU which it occasions is not agree-

OF THE UNITED STATES. 383

able in observing. A well defined imixs^e in a niilkish white
li2;ht will be found more aij;reeable. 'rhongh the artists say
that they can polish an object y;lass as much as they clioose,
without detriment to the shape of tlie ti;lass, and therefore
accuracy of the image, I should |)refer, from experience, the
greater certainty of accuracy with less polish.

The object glassi-s frequently contain crystallisations,
which injure the brii^htness and accuracy of the image.
These crystallisations become very apparent in the following
mode of trial, which I found to be tiic best forjudging of tlie
accuracy of the image : — Wlicn the telescoi)c is adjusted and
directed upon a fixed star, the eye part is drawn out, which
will cause the microscope which the eye glasses form, to
view in its focus successively other sections of tlie cone of
light of tiie object glass, and in proportion as the light will
be equally diHused upon the circle so seen, and as it will
bear to be more drawn out, without becoming dirtused, the
telescope will be more perfect and more accurately adjusted.
Few telescopes will stand a very scrupulous trial of this
kind. .Most generally the light will be much stronger to-
wards the circumference of the circle than in the interior,
and in this will almost always be found some dark sj)ots
of angular shape, |)resenting themselves exactly like crystals
under a microscope, which show the cftectof the crystals in
the glass, throwing the light from its regular course. Any
stray lisiht. as the opticians call the rays wliicli appear as if
darting out of tlie circle, is very api)arent in this trial. The
best telescopes therefore are tliose which, directed upon a
small and not twinklinE: star and put a little out of focus,
will present a sharply defined image with a disk like a pla-
net. The larger tliis imaije can lie made, the better tht; le-
lescope.

The opticians meet with great difTiculty in finding t:;ood
gla><scs: and in makinoc larc;e ol»)ect 'glasses, tnucli more glass
is wa.Htcd thai is iH'd. Various other ciicimstanees also
increase the price of the larger glasses ; so that a good olject

384! SUttVEY OP THE COAST

glass of a long focus and large aperture has completely a
fancy price : — But it would be too tedious for me to enter
here into details on this subject.

It may be proper for me to mention a source of error
which may affect the accuracy of the spirit levels. These
may generally be supposed to be adjusted at a mean tempe-
rature, of course a mean length of the bubble. At the iiigher
and lower temperatures in whicli it is often necessary to ob-
serve, the longer or shorter bubble may measure differently
in the course of the level, if this is not very regular ; besides
that its oscillation will at all times become sluggish and more
irregular.

The manner of packing the instruments is of considerable
importance for the preservation of their accuracy. The
boxes ought always to be of light and straight grained wood.
No piece must ever be fixed in a direction diagonal to the
grain, as it will be pressed out of shape by the drying of the
wood. Any piece fastened separately must always be placed
in the direction of the length of the fibres. In travelling,
the instrument should always be placed as much as possible
in the same position in which it is used, those parts only
which are not fixed to it being taken off and packed sepa-
rately. The centre being the part which bears the greatest
weight, must be the most firmly supported. Any stay used
to steady the instrument in the box must be placed against
one of its solid parts. No circle nor telescope should ever
be suffered to toucii the box, nor have any bearing to sup-
port or steady the instrument. They must be suspended
freely in the box, by the parts destined to hold them. It
is even advisable, in all cases in which the weight of the in-
strument allows this precaution, to make the boxes as light
as possible, that in case of accident, they may break, belbre
ati effectual reaction upon the instrument can take place.

The larger instruments of the collection for the survey of
the coast all travel in their boxes in the position used in ob-
servation, and arc supported according to the aliove princi-
pies ; and Mr. Troughton agreed with me in preferring this

OF THE UNITED STATES. 385

mode of j)acking to the usual one, which requires the instru-
ments to be dismounted.

On the Mechanical Organisation oja Large Survey, and the
Particular Application to the Surveti of the Coast.

Though the matheinalical theory of sucii works is fully
treated and well known, their practical applicatiun is left com-
j)lete]y to the practical nian ; and the success and accuracy
depend in a great measure on the organisation, and tiic dif-
fcient details of airangemcnt, which such a work requires.
It may therefore be useful to give here some practical prin-
ciples on tliis subject, in order to guide the operator in taking
proper advantage of the time and circumstances, and to
overcome the diiricullies which arc always to be met with in
practical works.

The application of tliesc to the survey of the coast may
serve as an example, which at tlie same time will give sucli
information with respect to tiiat part of the work which I
have executed, as may enable the operator to take advantage
of it. or to continue it in future.

The leading features of the general organisation arc ex-
posed in the plans of operation which 1 presented to govern-
ment j ant! now inserted in these papers ; and of which the
present will show the more detailed application.

The (hst operation is of course to tlnd a |)ropcr ])lace Ibr
a line of sulVicient length tofornt the base of the triangulation,
in such a situation as will enable the surveyor to arrive by
simple operations and with accuracy to the determination
of a distance between two elevated points, in a favf)ural)lc
position relative to the surrounding mountains and the coun-
try at large. If these points be at the same lime the liiglu'st
and freest in the n«'ighl)ourhood, the multiplication of the

386 SURVEY OF THE COAST

chances of forming the subsequent triangles will not onlv
accelerate the work by the greater number of points which
may be determined from them, but also enable the operator
to choose the most advantageous combination of triangles:
and if the survey shall extend over a whole country, it is
proper to begin in sucli part of it as will soon lead to the
largest triangles possible.

This was the principle which induced me to begin in the
neighbourhood of New York, after 1 had received a ktter
from Mr. Dallas, Secretary of the Treasury, authorising me
to begin wherever I should think it most advantageous.

The configuration of the country, particularly the direction
of some principal chains itf mountains, may guide us in the
research for a base line, because it is generally parallel with
straight ranges of mountains, that the more level and exten-
sive plains are found, and the first triangle point will fall
upon some elevation in an opposite range of mountains, if
these be not very elevated.

It is therefore necessary to make first a preliminary recon-
noitring survey of such a tract of the country at least as may
be likely to furnish the base, and a complete system of tri-
angles, admitting of verification. The more minutely this
can be done, the more advantageous on every account will
it prove for the actual survey.

In an uniform simple triangulation, it is most proper to
place the two base lines, which are necessary at least in all
such works, near the two extremities of the triangulation,
and therefore to make also at the beginning the necessary
reconnoitring for that purpose. But in my casein this work,
it was desirable to obtain in an early staseoftlie work a ve-
rification of the linear unit upon which the triangle was
founded, to allow me to make use of it for the detail sur-
veys as soon as possible. Besides, in all cases where the
triangulation is to serve for geographical purposes, it may
most generally be expected that several base lines will be
measured in the course of the work.

This first reconnoitring requiring the most extensive and

OF THE UKITEU STATES. 387

iree view of the country, must be made early in the spring
or late in the fall ; for the naked woods will admit many
views hidden in the summer by tlic branches and leaves,
which may be altorwards cleared away lor the work of the
actual triangulation. Such was for instance my case with
the base line itself and several important triangle points.

This geometiical view of a country is by no means with-
out didicultics, and requires great attention and a kind of
geometric eye, as the accuracy of the work depends much
on tiie favourable system of triangles which is projected on
these data.

The most favourable season for the actual triangulation is
during spring and summer, wjien the length of the mornings
and evenings will afford the longest time of favourable illu-
mination for observing, which at tiie noon elevation of the
sun is inadmissible. In this climate this time is often inter-
rupted by the frequent rains in August.

In the fall, the atmosphere of low countries, particularly
the sea shore, becomes very untransparent, and the time of
the day favourable for accurate obseivations so limited, that
it can hardly ever be expected to take a full series of angles
consecutively. For instance, from my station at the east
end of the verification base near Gravcsend, in December,
1S17, the large lighthouse otV Sandy Hook, oidy about niiie
miles distant, was never visible a whole hour in the morn-
ing or evening: and as soon as the ground was warm in the
morning tlic signal at the west end of tlic verification base,
near five miles off, moved about irregularly in a circle of
about one minute.

Tiic winter will be fully employed in tlie final calculations,
projecting the triangles upon paper, and oilier labours rela-
tive to the last summer's operations and prejiaratory to those
for the next summer. This will occupy more persons than
the actual observations have occupied in summer; as it is
proper that all actual calculations be made at least doultlc,
and by different persons. The veritiration, comparison, and
combination of tlie results will take up much time.

388 SURVEY OF THE COAST

In choosing a station and in reconnoitring, due attention
must be paid to select the most advantageous point of the
mountain or place for the view of all the signals required,
and the most conspicuous and easily discovered from other
places. We must clear, in case of need, the neighbourhood
so as to make the signal distinctly visible. Besides this, the
ground upon which the instrument is to stand must be very
solid. Unless upon rocks, or very dry hills, the solidity will
hardly ever be found such as not to affect the level of the
instrument by walking near it, or by the different position in
which the ol)server stands with respect to it.

In a simple triangulation, where only few angles are ob-
served upon the same point, it may be allowed without much
inconvenience to place the instrument at any point near the
actual signal which may be favourable for the observations,
and to reduce the angles to the signal or station point by the
angle of position and distance required. Thus we may use
steeples, parts of buildings, or sucli fixed points, (but never
trees) as station points. This however must be avoided,
when a great number of angles rest upon a point, and it is
to serve for detail surveys ; because the consequent calcula-
tion of the reductions is actually more tedious than the cal-
culations themselves, and because it would be very inconve-
nient to keep account of two such near points on the papers
intended for the detail surveys.

It must however be observed, that in general steeples and
buildings are always to be avoided if possible, on account of
their not giving accurate signals. They should therefore
only be used for the determination of their own position, and
not to form points in a series of triangles.

In any case of such a reduction occurring, I used to calcu-
late separately all the angles subtended i)y the eccentric dis-
tance, at each of the signals upon which angles were oI)serv-
ed, and to combine them according to the case of each of tlie
angles wliicli 1 had to correct, as the following equation takes
place in all cases : —

OP THE UNITED STATES. g89

ill riate V. fig. 13, let

S=Station |)oiiU observed.

C=CeiUie of the station or si'j;nal.

A ^' B= I he two signals observed from S

Then is evidentlv,

C+A+B=l80°=S+(A±SAC)+CB±SnC)
where the signs are easily known Irom angles liSC and ASC
compared with ASB.

I tbund tliis method tl»e simplest, sliortest, and least Iial)lc
to mistakes.

When the ground at the station point is not perfectly solid,
it is necessary to place in the ground strong plua;s or short
posts, sawed ofl" horizontally, and nearly level with each
other.

'I'he sand hills on the low sea shores, and tlie looming
which takes place upon them, would have rendered necessary
for these places the construction of a stand of al»out twenty-
four leet elevation, solid and fnmly attached to the ground,
upon which the instrument with its stand mi2;hf l)e placed.
I intended to liave had one constructed in the form of a tri-
angular pyramid ; but it is evident that the use of such means
is to be limited as much as i)ossible, on account of the many
inconveniences attending them.

The instruments must be well sheltered from all weather,
and the sun must not shine even upon the stand or the ground
near its Ici:;?. It is therefore necessary to have a separate
and suitable tent constructed for each instrument, with cur-
tains all around, but separate, so as open the side necessary
for observing, without (lepriving the instrument of its shelter.

The instruments arc to be taken out of their boxes, plac-
ed, levelled, and adjusted in all i especfs. as soon a-? possible
after arriving at the station : in order that iliey may recover
from any unequal pressure to which they niay have been
subject in the boxes and in travellinj;, so that the parts may
come to rest in their proper position some time before the
instrument is used.

VOL. 11. — 3 E

390 SURVEY OF THE COAST

The chief observer, as well as all the assistants and the la-
bouring men, must be encamped at the station, the latter not
so close, as to occasion any impediment or interruption to
the observations by the noise of any other necessary occu-
pation. The living in neiglibouring houses is completely
incompatible with the advancement of the work.

The safest, and at the same time most expeditious and
least expensive, mode of transporting the instruments is in
a spring carriage constructed purposely, the body of which
will closely fit the whole of the boxes of the instruments, so
that they stand in it packed, without being permitted to shake.

On the first station of such a work, the task of tiie obser-
ver is of considerable extent, besides the mere observation
of the stations. He must begin by supposing his instruments
completely out of adjustment, which will certainly be the
case with all moveable instruments, particularly if they have
undergone any long transportation of any kind. He must
adjust them, and observe with them some time, not with the
view of the actual use of the observations in the work, but in
order to get acquainted with his instruments, to find an easy
mode of using them, and to discover all their qualities and
defects.

Absolute mathematical accuracy exists only in tlie mind of
man. All practical applications are mere approximations,
more or less successful. And when all has been done that
science and art can unite in practice, the supposition of some
defects in the instruments will always be prudent. It be-
comes therefore the duty of an observer to combine and in-
vent, upon theoretical principles, methods of systematical ob-
servations, by which tlie influence of any error of his instru-
ments may be neutralised, either l)y direct means, or more
generally and much more easily by compensation. He must not
leave his first station, before he is so far clear upon this sub-
ject, as to need nothing more than the proof, always anxious-
ly looked for, of the sum of the three angles of Iiis lirst tri-
angles. It is not here the place to present a thi>ory on this
subject, nor to enter into practical details. I wdl merely re-

OF THE UNITED STATES. 391

fer to my operations witli the two feet theodolite as an ex-
ample,

'I'hc methods thus decided upon will determine the num-
ber, as well as the lorm and coinhination, ol" the ohseivations
which arc required to give the greatest probability in the re-
sults, and these methods nmst be the constant rule for all the
observations.

If oi)servations, which are limited by their nature to a cer-
tain time, are niade with repeating instruments, the number
of observations must be determined by a proper combination
of the theoretical formula or principle used in the case, the
nuv.iber of ol)scrvalions required tt) conqiensate the jjossiblc
errors of the instrument, a!id the accuracy aimeil at in the
observation. Tiiis is the case, for instance, in circummeri-
dian observations, tSjc.

'I he quantity of work which is made in one summer's
campaign, the muliiplicity and variety of cases occurring, ob-
literatitig naturally the accurate remembrance of the pecu-
liar circumstances of an observation, which however deter-
mine tlie degree of relative confidence which it deserves, it
is necessary to be very accurate and minute in the notation
of every thing in the day books and journals kept of all ob-
servations and otiier operations. A certain systematic and
constant form must be observed in them ; they must be writ-
ten with such regularity and perspicuity, that any man, with
the proper theoretical knowledge, could execute the calcu-
lation"-, though he miglit have been unconnected with the
work itself.

It is best to keep them in folio form, to bring as much as
possible under view at once, in order to facilitate the taking
out of the results for use in calculation, to admit room for all
accessory notices, and bring every thing readily under the
eye.

If assistance enough could be had, it would be proper al-
ways to make two fair copies from the first journal, kept un-
der the direction of the observer. These first journals should

s

393 SURVEY OP THE COAST

rather be written in ink than in pencil, for greater distinct-
ness and better preservation, as it is proper to preserve them
at least till after all calculations are made, in oider to be
able to verify the fair copies by them, in case of any doubt.

The method which I adopted in this respect is evident by
the exemplar given of it in these papers. I distinguished
the day book and journal evidently only to facilitate the or-
der of the work by sei)arate denominations. Every paa;e is
divided into six columns, which suit very well for all kinds
of observations and results, and the headings of which go
uniformly through the whole book. Not having my journals
of the actual work of the coast survey at my disposiiion,
the exemplars are taken from the similar operations made
for the determination of the boundary line between this coun-
try and Canada.

The day book is kept by minute order of time. The re-
verse page of each leaf is destined for all the details of the
observations, and the direct page facing it for the immediate
results of them in all their details. The further particulars
may be seen in the exemplars themselves.

The journals of results are two fold. One series of them
is destined for the vertical angles, with the heading, " Of
the repeating circle," though it contained vertical angles in
general. The other series contained the results of all ho-
rizontal angles, and was superscribed, " Of the great theodo-
lite," this being the instrument used. In these journals, the
order of the subject is the leading principle, and they subdi-
vide naturally, as seen in the exemplars at A and B. The
date in the first columns refers each result to its observation
in the day book. The next columns contain the resulting
lines and angles, ^'c. forming the element of the calculation,
of which all the particulars are introduced in separate co-
lumns, for the ease of the verifications. The final result
with the minute details may he seen in the exemplars. I
have not the opportunity of giving an exemplar for tlie ele-
vation of the terrestrial objects, signals, ^'c. over the sea,

OP THE UNITT.U STATES. 398

which was of course apart from the operation. But it may
easily be imagined how such a journal sliould he kept.

The ultimate results of the work arc to he collected with
great order into a separate hook. The mode of doing this
I cannot exemplify further than will appear from No. 3 of
the Journal Exemplars. The titles of the other columns
depend in some measure on the formula of calculation used,
the methods of projecting, and the like, besides the general
results, which will always remain. Examples of it may he
seen in the different accounts of measurements of degrees,

For the assistants in the calculation, it was my intention, if
the work had proceeded to a greater extent, to have had for-
mula; of blank calculations printed purposely, which is a
great lucans of security against omissions in the calculations.

To proceed in such a work with the greatest advantage
and celerity, it is proper tliat various assistants and an ade-
quate number of labouring men be with the chief operator.
'I'he necessary discipline and icgularity which the nature of
the work requires, would, when possililc, give ibr both the
preference to military men. Good old soldiers will always
be the best for the labours, 'I'hc whole work must go on
with the greatest regularity, to give proper confidence in the
precision of it, and the desired accuracy in the results.

The better the assistants are informed in mathematics, and
the more they take a pioper care and active interest in the
work, the more advantageous will it !)e. They must I)e fur-
nished with wriltcn instructions upon their respective duties,
and it will be proper that they change duty in regular rota-
tion, either weekly or l)y station. 1'he separate journals
wjiich they will have to keep are to l)e signed by them at the
end of every day, to facilitate a reference to their recollec-
tion, in case of mistake.

I found the following distril)ution of their work advanta-
geous : —

One to act as secretary to the observer. He is to write tlie
Jiames, readings on the instruments, f^c. under his dictatiorr.

391 SURVEY OP THE COAST

and always to repeat them aloud when he has written them,
to prevent mistakes ; and if he is attentive, and acquainted
by practice witli the proper succession of the readings, he
can, in cas(; of mistaken or improbable readings, by warning
the observer, cause the correction of any mistake, by a re-
petition of the reading before the instrument is moved. In
observations requiring tlie notation of the time, he will count
with the chronometer, and mark the moment when tlie word
is given to him by the observer.

A second will act as an assistant observer in such obser-
vations as require it, observe regularly, at stated hours, and
at the time of every observation requiring it, the barometer
and thermometer, of which he will keep a regular journal,
make the observations of the magnetic needle, in cases where
it is of interest, as in the survey of a sea coast.

A third assistant will find sufficient employment in preli-
minary calculations, the making of a second copy of the day
book, occasional attention to the signals, directing the men
in clearing views, and various similar occupations.

One of the assistants should be a draughtsman for views,
who should draw on each station the view of the whole ho-
rizon, marking the positions of all the signals, so as to indi-
cate their place if they shoidd be needed at any future time.
The foreground of his drawing will also aid in finding the
station point itself. He will also make detailed drawings of
the signals, as they present themselves in the magnified
scale through the largest telescope, with all the other ob-
jects accom|)anying it in the field of the telescope. This
will direct the observer in distinguishing the signals in the
smaller telescopes of the instruments from other objects
which it might be easy to mistake for them.

These drawings, which will form a pretty large collection,
may assist in the proper shading of tlic elevations in tl)e
drawing of the maps; and tliey may serve, il' circumstances
should make it desirable, to made a model in relief of a part
of the country, for which many of the mathematical data are
given in the survey, as the elevation of all the signals over

OF THE. UNITED STATES. 395

the sea will be determined by the vertical angles observed at
the stations.

'I licsc additions to tlie mere hori'/.ontal survey will add
more interest and nsct'ulness to the work than ini!j;ht l)c ex-
pected, not only in a scientific point of view, but also for
public utility. Joined to an accurate aiul minute detail sur-
vey, executed u|)on the princijjles whicli will be exposed
heieafter, all the data slioidd be collected, to enable the go-
verninent to judge with piopiiety of the plan of any pulilic
imdertaking or service, such as roads, canals, means of de-
fence of the country. tS'c. That the survey of the coast was
to contain all these data, besides the mere outlines of the
coast, and that they were as necessary as the soundinj;s out-
side of the line of the coast, appeared to me too evident to
admit of any doubt, and I would have considered tiic full
aim of the work missed without them.

Another addition, particularly useful to navigation, was to
obtain a comjilete series of observations of the variation of
the magnetic needle over tlie whole extent of the coast.

I intended that the magnetic l)earings siiould be ol)scrved
at all the stations every day by an assistant, the needle being
stationary in one point for that purpose : I)ut during the shr)rt
time that I worked, the multiplitity of niy otiicr occupations
and other circumstances hindered me from doing more than
just to observe it once myself at the close of each station.

An oscillation needle, which I have, and which lias been
observed in I'aris, in Lotulon, and in Washington, was in-
tended to be oI)served also regularly at each station. The
union of these two kinds of observation would have given
an interesting result relative to this sulijcct.

It will not be necessary to enter into the reasons which
dictated the estal)lishment of one or more observatories con-
necied with the chain of triangles, then-by to bind the wink
to one or more permanent points astronomically determined.
The advantage of such an arrangement is perfectly evident.

The following is the most proper orflerof the operations
on a favourable day, at any station. Every day's work nuist

396 SURVEY OF THE COAST

be brought lo approach as near to it as possible. It will
show that !io idleness is adniitted, as the omission or loss of
the points here mentioned would occasion an encroachment
upon the next day, or perhaps its recovering be long imped-
ed by circumstances, I suppose the observer to be furnish-
ed with at least one instrument for vertical angles, and one
for horizontal angles, time pieces, a barometer, tiiermometer,
sextant, and artificial horizon.

The observer must be at his instruments one hour before
sunrise, to test their solid standing, clean them with a feather
from sandy dust, which is so often introduced by the wind
into the open axes, and upon the limbs, ^'c. If they need
any oil in the open axes, merely passing over the finger is
surtlcient. He must level the instruments and verify all ad-
justments; adjust the collimation line and the focus of the
telescopes and the reading microscopes, to clear vision, and
complete freedom from parallaxes, and verify the value of
their reading. For all this, the quiet state of the atmosphere,
and the coolness of the morning, with the full light which
precedes the rising of tlie sun, furnish the most favourable
circumstances. His instrument must necessarily be in good
order, and need very little of all these adjustments, ^'c. if he
shall be ready about sunrise, as he should ; and this will be
the case, if he has devoted the proper attentions at the begin-
ning of the stafion.

Then he will level his instrument finally, and the rising of
the sun will the proper moment to observe the angles upon
the signals, within about 40° on each side of the southern
meridian, until such time as the sun is about its double dia-
meter above the horizon in case of a southern declination,
or on the six o'clock meridian wlien in a northern declina-
tion ; at which time it is proper to take one or two azi;uuths
of the sun, in the manner indicated at the proper place.

These azimuths must be followed immediately by obser-
vations of zenith distances or altitudes of the sun, for the de-
termination of the time, which it is necessary to liave as fiee
from the rate of the chronometer as possible, and which

OF THE UNITED STATES, :Jl)7

should therefore be made during the azimuth ohscrvatioii it-
self, if assistants for that [)urpose are at hand.

After tht'se observations, the instrninont liuvino; l)cen vcri-
tied again, the observations of terrestiiul an'j;les will l)c con-
tinual, upon the signals from the fore mentioned situation to
about due north utitil near ten o'clock, if the illuniination of
the (lay is iavourablc, Al)out ten o'clock, coirespondins; al-
titudes may be taken with the sun, for which tlie easiest, and
probably most accurate method will be, to take with a re-
flecting instrument the contact of both linil)s of the sun, no-
ting the time, and laying the instrument undislurl)ed and cure-
i'ully aside, to observe tlie same again after noon. Tiiis will
avoid every influence of any error of tiie instrument.

Durinii; the middle of the day, the state of the atmosphere
and the illumination are so unfavoural)le to the observation of
terrestrial angles, that none must be observed, tlic objects
being all seen in the shade, and the reflection from the sig-
nals and any object in general passing high over the oI)ser-
ver. In a hot summer day, the illumination will even cease
to be favourable after 9 o'clock. But when the sun has a
low southern declination, it may sometimes be possible to
observe somewhat longer u[)on signals nearly nortli.

This is therefore the time to transcribe the oI)servations
into the day book, to take out the results of the terrestrial
angles, to examine them, make such preliminary calculations
as may l)e required to determine the time an(l rate of the
chronometer, and arrange the work of the afternoon, ^'C.

AI)Out thirty minutes before noon, it will be necessary to
adjust the vertical circle, and prepare for the circummeridian
observations of the sun. For though it is not absolutely ne-
cessary in a triangulation, to determine the latitude of every
station by actual ol)servation, still it is not proper to let the
sun pass the meridian without observing it, as every observa-
tion is an addition to the mass of this kind of observations,
which it is necessary to have as large as po-*sib|c. and they
are all reduced to one point by the gcodcsical calculations,

VOL. II. — 3 F

398 SURVEY OF THE COAST

within sucli limits as will not admit too great an influence of
tlie figure of the earth upon the reduction.

After this observation, time tnay be allowed for dining,
attention being paid however not to miss the corresponding
altitudes of tlie afternoon, the time of which must be calcu-
lated approximately before hand

Between tiiree and four o'clock the favourable time for the
observation of terrestrial angles may begin again, sometimes
a little later, seldom earlier. Tiiere will be little time to
lose, after the corresponding altitudes and the calculation of
their result, before it will be necessary to commence the
levelling of the theodolite, and the revision of all its adjust-
ments.

The illumination will now become favourable for the sig-
nals in succession from due north past tlie east to about south
or somewhat farther, according to tlie declination of the sun,
as this forms the element of the angle of reflection from the
signals to the observer. By this it is also evident that the
time for accurate observations upon terrestrial objects be-
comes always more limited on both sides of noon, as the de-
clination of the sun becomes lower, and an attention to this
subject will have a great influence on the accuracy of the re-
sults.

The order of the observations in terrestrial angles, azi-
mutlis, ^c. in the afternoon will be exactly the reverse of
that of the morning, except that though it was possible to
observe with and read on tlie instrument in the morning
before sunrise, this will not be possible after the sun is set.

The task of the day is still not over. For it is necessary
to introduce all the observations of the day book, to take out
all the results and introduce them into their proper place in
the journal of results, or at least into a register of the results
of the station, to examine and compare them, in order to
see what degree of accuracy has been obtained hitherto, and
what is yet needed to complete the work of the station, and
to plan accordingly for future observations. It is necessary to

OF THE VNITEU STATES. 3911

do all this before any derangement of the instrument lias
taken place, that any discrepancy in the results may be tested
and corrected immediately.

This will most likely not allow an early rest to the obser-
ver. Tliercfore it will hardly ever be |)ossible to do what
would now be advantageous, viz. to observe ciicunimeridian
zenith distances of stars in the night, particularly to the north,
to compensate the influence of the instrument upon the ob-
servations taken to the south with the sun, and coricct the
result by their means. The observer will l)e oljligcd to re-
serve Ills strength for the work uf the next day, as his ob-
servations would lose much of their accuracy, if he should
be overfatigued. Such night observations are therefore only
possible, wiicn he has assistants able to take a part of the
task of the day from him.

Night observations require besides a temporary observa-
tory, built for the purpose, and appropriated to the instrument
used, like one which I had constructed for the work of the
boundary line with Canada.

It is proper therefore that a peculiar and suitable station
be selected, to make a regular and well coml)ined series of
observations on the latitudes, with all the necessary means
and arrangements for accuracy. As it will then be possible
to obtain many more observations of stars than of the sun,
their number and kind may be so combined, as to serve as a
full compensation for all tiie ol)servations of the sun made
at the other stations, and which are to be reduced to this by
calculation.

It will natinally occur, that at such a station a complete
series of azimuths may also be observed by a variety of me-
thods, and with every means of accuracy ; and that after
such a station has been mad(% it will not be necessary to ob-
serve them on the neigiibouring stations.

The indispensable oliservations of longitude are of course
to be referred to the permanent ol)servatory of the country,
if such a one exists : if not, they also become necessary at

8

400 SURVEY OP THE COAST

such stations rnore particularly as are made for the series
of the observations of latitude ; without however excluding
the observations of occultations or eclipses, which may occur
on any station, and which it would never be proper to omit.

Those observations only deserve complete reliance, in
any kii;d and case whatever, which are made under proper
arrangements, and with ease to the observer. A strong glare
of light which dazzles the eye, and an inconvenient position
of the body must always prevent the accurate pointing of
the instrument and reading of the arcs. The ease and con-
venience of the observer are therefore not luxuries, but are
necessary to the accuracy of the observations.

Though a detailed account of the work of the survey of
the coast executed during the year 1817, in wliich I worked
at it, would not be of any general interest, and could not in
fact be given, as my papers have been delivered to the go-
vernment, yet I will present here, by way of record, a sketch
of the principal triangles executed either fully or partially,
and add a few notices, which may give an idea of the ar-
rangement and plan of the work, and of the accuracy ob-
tained.

It is evident, that of the accuracy which 1 aimed at nothing
could be abated, if the work were to be such as ought to be
expected in the present improved state of science. The
chance of an accumulation of errors upon such a long extent
of sea-coast as that of the United States, particularly in the
direction in which it lies, would have been too great, the
consequences of a want of system and care would have be-
come too glaring, not to bring discredit and shame upon a
less accurate operation. '

The different parts of the work would have given occasion
to make a number of determinations of the length of degrees
of longitude and latitude. From its extent and position, it
would have had particular interest, and might have served
as the foundation of a system of weights and measures for
this country.

The principal base line was of somewhat more than nine

OF THE UNITED STATES, 401

tiioiisand metres, and between Cli and Vr, Plate IX. The
Jirst triangles lie upon Ihe points W and Cr. In the th.st, all
three angles were measured, and W ibrnied of course (he
main point. In the second, the angle at Qli could not be
measured, on account of a near wood which hid the whole
mountain upon vvhicli Cr was ; while a high signal in Ch was
distinctly observable from Cr. From the next point. BN, all
the foregoing were oI)scrvable, and vice versa. This gave
occasion to bring, upon the line F and BM, the results of
both into comparison, where from tlirec triangles, of which
all three angles were measured, and three in which two had
only two angles measured, the two results were, — through
W=i.T.508,S8 metres, and through C7-=li5 .508,8(5 metres.

In the triangles, the sum of three angles, which I am un-
able to state from recollection, was satisfactory. I had not
yet all the angles measm-ed in the complete systematical
order wliich I explained in treating of die two feet theodolite ;
because the great delays of all kinds which I experienced on
the first station, on which I combined (he method fust, had
occasioned me to leave it and be satisfied for the time with
the numljcr of angles I had in general.

The triangulation being now continued through S/7, TN,
LS, WE, and EK, of which the stations TN" and LS could
not be observed for want of time, the verification base be-
tween WE and EPj was measured, and compared witli the
result brought from the first base by nine triangles, and the
coincidence proved as follows, from all the points named : —

The distance from WE to EE was= 7753,81. met.
Witiiout using the triangle EE, LS, WE= 8.3

EE,TN,WE= 90

By actual mcasuremcnt,= 7753,

This last number in the measurement was made a round
number, on account of a chain measurement made jirclini-
narily only, though twice, and within less than half a metre
in the results, being all the accuracy that can be expected liy
this method.

403 SURVEY OF THE COAST

The base between Ch and Yr had also been measured
twice with the chain carefully, and if I recollect right, there
was hardly three-tenths of a metre difference in the results.
As this base was intended for a standing one for the work in
genera], the neighbourhood of it was surveyed in detail pre-
viously, in order to lay it out in the most advantageous posi-
tion for the future accurate measurement, with the apparatus
described in its place.

The base between WE and EE being intended, as has
been stated above, only for an early verification of the linear
unit of the work, in order to be enabled to begin the detail
surveys as soon as possible, would most likely not have been
remeasured, but another one, at a greater distance from the
first, substituted for it, in the continuation of the triangu-
lation.

The chain with which they were measured was made pur-
posely, of links of a metre in length, which, as they do not
bend into all the small inequalities of the ground, are far pre-
ferable to small links.

The coincidence of the two bases was, under these circum-
stances, of course above expectation, and as it gave such a
proof of the accuracy of what had been done, has brought it
far within the hmits of what it would in any suitable scale be
possible to show upon paper, it was of course considered suf-
ficient to serve to ground the detail surveys of tlie neighbour-
hood on the triangles executed from these, which are seen
in the sketcli.

The point H was intended for the continuance of the sur-
vey to the east connected with W : the points Sp and B were
inteirded for the same purpose towards the south.

The distance HF having been determined both through
W and through Cr, had given a coincidence sufficiently sa-
tisfactory for the few angles which it had been possible to
measure upon H from Cr and W, which would of course have
been repeated in the further operations, and corrected by
the observations on H itself

OF THE UNITED STATES, lOa

Tlirough W the result was=4a392,()3 metres.

Throu2;Ii Cr the result was=4r23y i,fi4

The othtr coincidences being equal to these, in general
it appeared to me evident, that in a()plying the method de-
scribed when treating of the two feet theodolite, in the angles
of the main triangles, I could reach the accuracy of less than
one second in the sum of the three angles, with full certainty
always, and that only one pair of direct and reversed oI)ser-
vations was fully sufficient to determine any near detail point ;
that it was therefore most advantageous to observe them in
this manner from any station where they would be visible,
as this gave a verification from different bases.

The azimuths observed gave results equally satisfactory,
so far as they were calculated, but as their calculation was
not completed, when the work was interrupted, what had
been done was again cast away, as it did not present a final
result, and might, by being considered as such, ratlier mislead
than serve for any useful purpose. This was so much the
more proper, as they were all to be considered as merely
preliminary.

I had built in Newark, in my garden, a small observatory
which could be determined from BN, and in which I intend-
ed to make a regular scries of latitude, longitude, and azimuth
observations, as staled above.

It will easily be observed, in the sketch of the triangles,
which are the stations on which I observed any angle, the
lines of the triangles being there drawn full, while to the
points on which Iliad not observed, they are merely dotted.
The angles of elevation of the principal |)oints were taken
on all stations, so that their relative height can \>c calculated.
To reduce it to the level of the sea, I levelled actually from
the point N down to the water, this point being close to the
shore, in the narrows, upon the high eastern bank.

The results of all that relates to this have not been calcu-
lated, as this could only take place after the calculatiori of the
distances. The geodcsital parts were of more importance
to obtain first, as they lay nearer to immediate use.

404 SURVEY OF THE COAST

Latitudes were observed on various stations, for temporary
use in tiie determination of time, ^c. The longitude was
taken from the general acceptation of the longitude of New
York ; but all this to determine accurately, was of course re-
ferred to regular observations in the temporary observatory
built for the jiurpose.

The organisation of the detail surveysalwaysdependsupon
the administrative views according to which the work is to be
executed. Its details must therefore he omitted in the present
papers. Regular and lull instructions must be given to the
detail surveyors in writing, both on the principles wliich they
shall make use of in their works, and on the objects to be
attended to. 'I'he nature of the tirst is indicated to tiiem by
the instruments which tiiey are to employ, and by the papers
containing the triangulations which are given them to till up,
with the detail notices which shall accompany them. Tiie
mere elementary mathematical part is sufficiently treated of
in a number of works. The latter must be reduced into regu-
lar tables forming the questions, which they sliall answei by
filling them up ; and in an extensive work they should be in
printed formulae. "I heir nature, in the survey of the coast,
is evident, from what has been said before upon this subject.
1 intended to plan such instructions, after my summer's work
was finished.

The plane table is the most appropriated practical means
that can be used for actual surveying in this case. It is
also the most accurate and expeditious. Every other means
will be found to require more labour, and to multiply the
chances of disadvantage and error.

This part of the work is nmch more expensive and te-
dious than the triangulation. The surveys must be laid down
on a larvae scale, j^Vo- at least. The ports and harbours
ought to be at t^tot- And all may be brought to an assem-
blage with convenience and propriety in the scale of is-sos at
least.

If the governments of those States through which tlie sur-
vey of the coast was to go, could be induced to take an inte-

OF THE UNITED STATES. 405

rest in this part of the work, I considered the utility of the
work would be much extended, both for the general 2;overn-
inent and those States, the proportional expenditure much
diminislied by their distribution, and thr final execution more
accelerated than could be possil)lc by any other means. In
the execution of the triangulation, it was easy to sui! some
peculiar want or interest of any State. This would iiave
added doiiljle value to the woik for this State, without in-
creasing the expenditures and the work by any amount worlli
consideration.

Some remarks upon the best methods of transferring the
result of the triangulation to paper may be inserted here ; as
frequently nuich of the accuracy of the work is lost by in-
sufficient methods, and ihese are left to the knowledge and
practical skill and experience of the operator, though the an-
alytical formuhc of calculation and the principles of projec-
tion have been treated repeatedly and extensively.

In former works I have always found the calculation of
the points in degrees, minutes, seconds, and decimals more
convenient for tliis use than those in linear measures ; and
as the ap|)roximation can be carried, l)y the decimals of se-
conds, farther than it is possible to subdivide actually upon
paper, tliere is no accuracy lost, particularly as all the deci-
mals are always preserved in summing up any number of
results that concin' in the determination of a j)oint, just as
the logarithms obtained in the calculation are always used
in any place where the results are required, and not again a
logarithm of the number found anew; any loss in the frac-
tions in transferring to paper having thereby no farthei inllu-
ence than upon the point itself.

1 made a table of the values of the minutes, seconds, and
decimals of latitude and longitude for all those jjar's of the
projection whicli had been calcidated, for the suiidivisiDns of
the different trapezii, which were traced by the projeciinn,
and which I conunonly made only of five minutes at most,
both in lutitudf and longitude, in order to bring the distances

VOL. ir. — .1 c

406 SURVEY OP THE COAST

to be laid off from them within the limits of usual dividers;
and in this manner every point was laid off by rectangular
ordinates, from the nearest sides of the trapezium of the pro-
jection.

The accuracy of the projection is therefore the basis upon
which the accuracy of the wliole work depends, and to this
great attention is to be pa"'d. It will, on every sheet, be;gin
by a right anyrle in the middle, extending over the whole pa-
per both in latitude and longitude ; and to ol)tain this wi^h
accuracy, as well as in all other parts of the construction, it
is necessary to assist the eye with a maa;nifying glass, to aug-
ment the sharp vision of the small points, which it is only al-
lowed to make, if the sinking of the beam compass shall not
introduce errors in the work.

It is not allowed to use any compasses but tliose with rec-
tangular points. For the smaller parts, the proportional
beam compasses, No. 46 of the Catalogue of Instruments,
"Were intended. They are very convenient in the hand, and
easy to support against making too deep points. To prevent
the beam compasses from making deep impressions, and to
ease their guidance, I used to suspend them over the table
by a roller with a counterpoise.

It is evident that in no case whatever a method of laying
off a point, by means of an angl*" any how constructed, can
be ajiplied in these works. The only place where these are
admissible is in the plane table operations, and in laying off
points of soundings with the station pointer, observed by the
prottlem of three points.

The projection which I intended to use was the develop-
ment of a part of the earth's surface upon a cone, either a
tangent to a certain latitude, or cutting two given parallels
and two Meridians, equidistant from the middle meridian, and
extended on both sides of the meridian, and in latitude, ordy
so far, as to admit no deviation from the real magnitudes,
sensible in the detail surveys. I had just commenced some
calculations relative to the question, — which radius of the
earth was most advantageous to admit the greatest extent to

OP THE UNITED STATES. 407

the projection under the above condition, whether the geo-
centric radius oi' the hititude, tlic railiiis of curvature of the
meridian at the tangent jwint, or the radius of the sphere tan-
gent to the spheroid at the point. Further than this I had
not proceeded, when I abandoned tlie subject, by tlie inter-
ruption of my work.

It is at all events necessary that these projections go off
from different points of hititude, and be all of equal extc?it
from the central meridian and parahcl, in order tluU the de-
viations fiom tlie real magnitude may never become so
great as to require the application of correction for the plane
table operations, whicli determine of course the details in
the neigiibourhood of any point of a triangle from the posi-
tion of these points, as laid down by tlie projection, — and
that in bringing the different parts together, their points on
the edges may meet again completely, being equally aHected
by the projection.

In each of these sheets? it was intended to liring tlie results
of several parallels, so that the central meridian alone should
become a straight line, and all the other meridians and jja-
rallcls broken lines, nearest the curve, to which they belong;
the angular points of the trapezium being transferred to pa-
per by their rectangular ordinates, from the middle right
angle, calculated from the angle at the centre of the projec-
tion, in the protracted axis of the earth.

The papers to be given to the detail surveyors should lie
divided differently : viz. they nmst always contain tliose
points, and extend over such parts as may, l)y the nature and
configuration of the country, be best ada|)ted to be surveyed
together. But the points must be laid down upon them ac-
cording to the place whicli they would occupy in the al)ovc
regular disfiihution of the projections.

This distribution of the projection, in an asseml)lage of
sections of surfaces of successive cones, tangcrUs to or cutt-
ine; a regidar succession of parallels, and upon rci;;idiuly
changing central meridians, appeared to me the only one

408 SURVEY OF THE COAST

applicable to the coast of the United States. Its direction,
nearly diagonal through meridian and parallel, would not ad-
mit any other mode founded upon a single meridian and pa-
rallel, without great deviations from the actual magnitudes
and shape, which would have considerable disadvantages in
use.

Their union in one general map on a small scale would
be exceedingly easy, and in making a minute projection,
could almost be done without the aid of instruments.

OF THE UNITED STATES. 409

ISSi^m!?!LAIB3

OF THE

DAY BOOK AND JOURNAL OF RESULTS.

NoTF.. — In the Manuscript, the twelve columns used in each of the fol-
lowing pages are extended over two pages, — six being placed on eacii ; and a
reference to this arrangement is made in the body of the Paper. It was found
impracticable, however, to print them in this form : but it is believed that the
change will not give rise to any embarrassment.

SURVEY or THE COAST

CO

5: 01

s. «

Iz;

O

,^^

•I g

II

II

o

a

o

CM

CO

O

>-.

t^

Cl

CM

.1 §

.d

o

= 9

Q

fe

£<

»rt

IS

-*

8

_^-

a o

c t;

T

+

Sd.

'-<o»

^ -^ tJ

^ ifiirtmiftV)'n*o>n^

o

o

S& SS 6fl f

96 9r 51 V

I SO'„SS ,So ^ 3I8',/)S 7C

00

o

^

2 b ^

o c*> — wi '■•: o c

set =t "s.

-tl ! 7

1 ■) ?

C oe c^
in 3» O

ic .E 1^ ^'5 oc h^ C) rv

_ oc K. ^r cc r^ ift

c '-; — 1/^ CO 3* 0

h. CO C)

o c o

cSr

CO c^ '* *c r^ 00 o

i ,s3s§&^

>. CO ^ W fO co^

■^.^^^•^-^•^•^-(^•^•^•^l^ HH

or THE UNITED STATES.

411

&

in

o

CO

o

S

c«

= s

s

e>

o>

^

3
II

1

II

t-^

«n

«n_

»rt

■5

c

«

»n

O

r

ee

-f

-

o

-*

^z

•£>

—

->

1

r^^^

rvA^

r^A^

rxA^

o

.

« in

»rt irt

m o

■c

rr o o

gs

SS

S3

e

? QO .

55

3! :

S :

tprf

c»

ae :
0»

s =

oo

«i

!*5

55

S3

35

9 y

Ei3a

xsj

(^ —

•* o

-*f* ^

o» «

~?,

■- b«

^. c»

e

S3

«o -*

-J-H-

-*• ■*

es,

«

;j

<=^ .

c^ .

u o
6 S

- "a

oo :

«

Z '

—

INI

nil

«

n 11

nil

Ji

^=-

u

Si

Cfc<

■?>-

_ ■ '

^

o

■J

^

»

O

OS 9t

8

ee

»

—

^

fl»

fl

^.

oo

^?*

f}

""

*i

i*

« ' "■

n>a

d

i^

3C ^>.

^ no*

32

£ 5

II II

S-5

■ e E

(- c a

5£ =

O J, _,

I "i ^ ;

)( H )()()()( )

C>_ « C^>n *n O^O^O^'ft O C »A O,

53

SS

" to ^

ii

:23

t:3

~!-

II II

^i'

OtO 030C00- — — •

. — « CI ot o( 01 ?i c» 5i 1*3 « to « "> «5 t*; ■* ^l"

41 g

SURVEY OF THE COAST

•O •=

T, «

H J ^

<fl

£14

O

K

^

^

tr

UCQ

-:;

—

•a

«

s

•u

■3

S:i

N^

M

■ri

K

cn

-*

r>

C US

O

•<f

■ i-o:

■Saira

cnQO

^ K i*

-r ~ "3

5 « n

c o -*
O -* 01

o — to

Ot -* o

£ -s

a e

o
H —

o •* :n

O . «3

w^ »« Ci
O •* ^

3§

o

3§

So

I"

CQ

£"0 O'J^ o »ntnO 0000
f_ o) © -* p_, C-* -* o

■J © -* Ld
-: '^i —
O^ -^ -T

4J O) -^ 1^

oc O C
O* -j" -^

^-^v^^ "s-v^ ''-'x^-' ^-'vw' ^ v-^^w \-iv^

^ 01 «

c^, o. o_ K_ O. O, w^ o^
'^ t- c^ 00 r^ irt o t^.

Ql 01 <.-i o ■* VI — CO

-< -* "jr> ^trt -^

rri ^ ^ a> *" '-■

— •" C 00

« in CO •#
-^ to -* tn

CO CO ai-«*<

irt .— m >o

w-. m C_^ O V5 O "ft in

CO 1^"— «r co'ao'cTof

CO — coco ifiin — --t

CO CO CD -■* c» o» m •<}•

m •" »rt o ^^. rm in tn

«!■ o ao "* O -* to Od® 00 O

O tn 'f •:*' n o -rfTirTsO C*c to"

«*• ** 10 10 o o o o?-^ -^^ c^' — o

^•Y*^ ^^V*^ *^«^ *-#Y^ = ^**r*^ '^-^Y^-^o ^

CO -^ --f inSoO OOir-O

CO ^ O — SOGl,-.—

o» 'ft -< co2i-< -jtinoo

'^ — CO w E — _ ^ —

c» — — o

CI O -ef —I
O ^ CO
tr> CO CO

CI o •* -*

Oi Ct CO
CJ CO CO

•o tjo i*

"2
<:d.

O

o

9i'-At ,tr. qs i5'„oo,ofiis

«

CI

01

.5? S

— S 2^(5

>H S '^, ^. ^^ ^, ®, ^, ^ ^"-^ ^, =^,

a

<

1

CO

*5

•*

__ c

CQ

;5

,-«^-^

0

«s f^ 0

3

u

0 - o>

c/} ^cn

n « a «
^&jO Sc U} U3

c/5 cn jjx

n a rt «
c = C C
bc bc a/: to

.3

K U?5

;«Sj

[is '^~-Z

;k I r

£ es o
>. _• tn -: S

G ~ _ t_ .

... "^ a i- ^

i i W c -
'^^ - S w s
<: c a r a-

« w :^ cs
£ = C C
U. if u to
cr i^ './J 'X

■i^sl

: " 3 "

= = »

OP THE UNITED STATEft.

413

e

"a

c
£

X

,^

*^

^

'.'

o

«

^

o

l-

■J"

a

o

'/5

o

-r.

ee

WJ

o

X

c*

oe

ce

O

t-S

y

en

<C

rt

u

,

1^

». o

a

«rt

2

3 r

C**

£.

o"

■■• ;j

8

'-•":

*w» -^

-<

»

"^ r"

an

t^

>:

3C

r

I -

;«

c

o» "'

«

tT>

-' "^

o

o

D

o

^-'i^

V^Y^

<*

c-*

??

cr:

S!

t^

:

;

-r r

£

•o

Ol 'M

o

»a

o

5

c

t-

>rt

»ft

*rt

u

»

o o

a

s •

v^v«>'

—

^-^t^

■s,<

«^

f)

<c

o

o

o

<

-*

oo

-f

o

&

ei

s

c

c

<

G

Si)

o

u

X

>.

SI'„17'

,'^ MS

li//

^7. x'U ^'J

t

,^«^

r*>^

*A

fN.

tn

o

'O

<r

-o-

~ ^

f

^

3

£

^

a. ^

~ ^

5

3

3

i^=^^

/'^

-^«-^£

1-*^ r>f^

■^

S o

w* ■ •«

s = =>. -

"*• •'V * • -*, -* "*-

_

£

5; 353

355

58

i

*>»u

^ irt -n -n

■« »o

«

ta o

o ooo

«

^^

^^

^^

^ •

Ma;

«*

«^

^, _^

*«

•J o

'Ex

tK J

^ ^

0. .

h< .

<« -

»; o

ocn

a-J)

c »

«i3

S w

M 9

?;3

9S

r a

Ji

u;'o

U-J

oa

CJU

Oi Of

oTaT

OD en

•n 30

CO 30

CO OO

tf. 00

-

ss

o ao

9t 30

S??

O 30

C» CO

of to

2^

(o'n."

- o

CO

S5

• -*

. '-1
• to

CO .

to .

_

© O
CO tn

8??

CO'O

oe* iC

1 ^ "^

ficO .

•^

t

'

>>

^ ■■ ■■

to •

a •• :

. .

1

S-f o

S ■" o

1:;-

4> «n »n

to ^
cftcT

— CO

~Xi

CO OO

•*• 00

r

u -

"3

1

o

N. -t; I©

H * c?>
»n irt 01

C» oo

*

^SS

O oo_ O^
-• «- *rt

in oo"— *
to m oi

55gf

O 3 S
— to w

2S5

2S&

c

t- oe C4

w 0« <0

SSiS5JS22

S£2

^

o, o„ o.
e» •« —

irt — «

vToTof

•ft er) ^

ro O «.

S3 2

CO CO.

in »rt or*

»rt -f CO

1^

in o CO

O O trt

c"-oo*

to -♦ tf>

^

55 & CI

oSi^

SSS

-■•to —
-f -T »o

JsSS

'c-.?.S3

"to

: : :

i

C
3

s
o

1

O O 00^

= 25

trt en CI

S5>s

■+ CO C»

3-S2

00 «-f

3f3

-o q_ C5_
c to *n

'•> c o

33'?!"

<

555

^:?.-

V

s=s

oi'?

it

3:15

3:?3

5

N
O

c
•3 ■

oe tn «

3

•^ '.O t.

-rs ^ -1

S, 5 3,

o -o

"3 * ■
So

i"

'r.

in

_„

:ft

; ~ 3 — -• s

■ 7^ « t« 2

■ ^ - c !** _

UU<5

,f.^s

7, S|3;

i£=j

o .

-X

£«

?xs

i-ii

^l=;i

n't

5-5 u;

5 "^3

2?3

•r.HU

il3

VOL.. II. 3 H

414

SURVEY OF THE COAST

'ee ^
g»3

•^as

ga gtf

-S3

o .

■5«

Sj g:S

= 1.= ^

a

oTao

en

oo to

O — '

CO

m O

S2

o> —

S2

OJ »-

fe§

l« 00

??.S

C O^

xt O

« ID

ce o

55

oo"— "

00 »A ■ 00 O*

o t^

CO CO

00 o

. — ■<:)■

*; : o

*o to

^«o

O

rf)

CB

H

n
o

c
.2

1

u

r

o

u

u

s

3

-a
o

02

<u

bC

O V ^

£ S S

o

HO

o

35

o O, -*

O -^

O"* —

Sh-VT

i^^^o"

oo kn

a; -^ O

•^ o

U 9> vrt

Oi-

f_« ^

h- OO

m —

h. 00

K oo

h* 00

«oc*

CO -^ 0- ^ O

o» O "ttJ en ^^

W4 —

01 — CO S o »o —

O w -* "H 00 00 o

' " "Is"-''/

_ «2 cr. »>

o -* -<j« o

^ b- (0 oo

p^ CO 0* CO

, 0) K. C 00

^— oo'eo"

' = O « -

CO o o ii.© o oi

wi Mf in ■» «j« CO -

IT) — -f

o o —

5 CO ^

o (O o o en « c

ift »ft »n
oo irt -^ -

o» o* 0>

»s.^co t- 0^0i_*0 = O O O O^O. <rt

C00040 o»C4*n5o'»-"'-'^ t^ tn tn

COC»-* •*-rhvn:rco«f'« ^--o»

co-^tn co-«r«"oo*-*-^ co-^u-j

OCOC^ -* — O"CCrtCi«0 -*•-«

^ ^ ^ ao CO CO o C^ — r^

S 1

CO

1^

. 'o
^ . =

. o

1^1

j2 -c 2 i^ ~ 5

i:a

tn

^a'

LU

C/3

.05<=-

. C

^ c ^

jw"

« OWS OW«5 OM«>, OWS OWS OWi*

■S-S

s .s «

sac

■S t3

? <=

« Si -

« S

^ ^

£ y o

« J2

c c

o ■£ >

rt 1)

O bfi

1 ^

S JZ

O o

.£ 2 S

— ^

1 «.i

rt c

1^

•§>£ J

A s

^2-£

11

^11

d a>

u

<U V

C C

<" ?r

»

flo

2 S

■Z3

S

■| Is

.I"!

s
2

£ g Ml

« ~ g

V

1

5 H <n

r

6»^

en C

S 1

&>

s

M- -S

2 1

rt

oi

13

'a

03

>

B
O
•3

^

a: £ s

.2 f.

g

S.i g

- "

?^

s, u S

t- c

O

c3 =- a

S Pi S

S r;

ais

.11 c

s « S

3

ca

t. -i a»

o 3
S S

"6

V

° E "

— ^

'i

o

■S --S

H 2 2

.2

J 1 S

Si

OP THE UNITED STATES.

415

s Co

ac

g

o

CO

•J
->1

o

OS
OS

■J

9j

S fe

o
o

PS

u

53

i:;

-♦

-t

1

~ O

£■ =

^^■^N

w f

» '='v

O « a»

p^

ao «o f-

»n to 'ft

a u

o o o

iS

: : :

U . ..

== H

2:^.

S : :

!=,- -

6'-''

a

<="!.*

r"

2SS

»o * «

K j: ^ ;■*

O « -1

— 04 ro

r"

1-

O O-i-

■* :

c

trt -f

o

O Ci VO

II'

52 Vr-

o — ^

WJ . .

r"c

CI : •

^ -•

3 £

'O •-*: ws

i^r

2SS

0) -o «

•?(•).

51 . 1-

N

£

zy.

e=>

oo3
2 S3

O 3

1. ■"-

S 'g

J o ■= -^ •• •* 1

f-V.

^_i

**.

OD

^

a.

00

^3

^

S

^

~~

"

•M

-

u

-f

^5

i

^3

-

8

=J

o

Jl

<~

"^

CO

C»

o

00^

O*

•3

s t^

r^

9

-*

"

■^

1

- 8

en

o

•rt

a

^

D

li

'^

CI

H-

Q

•

00

^H

H

V c

-<

C

S a

S

1-3

'-m »

= S

*

s

O

i

"1

fR

V4 ^

O V?

1

H

■«

?5_

^r

o
■3

1 +

CI

T

s

6<

4-

■<

II rw,

II

II

g

§

«

^■•i:d

:n

crt

Co

■^

~^ 1

A

PS
14

|o

^= 8

^

".

s

H

» o

§!

u

S 5

fc-o '^

m

-^

Q

S =

^~"

" Vl

>rt

BJ

V.'

n

CI

^^

f^~~

rM -f

1— «• -o

o

01 -t

*£

to o

= S

• =

o"

o"

c

CO

^-

S::Si:^

§3te3

•5ie

-

c»i>.

iia -

-r

.Sf'**^

1.

t'SSR??!

V3

35

ova

«"

"^ — ;i •» <o

r*^

w C

-*

'^. •^^tOifit^at)-'

.. _

—

i*."^

-

CO

>« rM -* C

—

51 -•

wi -a

t^. 00

o

= C"

S x

.^ JC

c -

c -.

T

( ) (

"T

)(

TT

) (

T

£3

63

ct

wi. O q. "1 O O O^ »0 O O 'rt

=*-

%

o»

— ' -»' -rT ^

^IC»

fe!?

35

I--

''s

m

O lA IN —

en

m 1

-*

«e

5353

»,

K> OtO -

"i* <o

-*

*

^

-r

-r-r

<o *n

•rt >n

irt

«..

H/:

Jl

—

■"■* — ■

""

~ —

" —

"■ —

"•

v3

,^

^~

t-' C

k

fc. *

hS

00

c~S

U

00

6

1^

If

^

416

SURVEY OF THE COAST

+=

- - ■■ ■■■■ C5.

■oo

-*

t (>» o

(O

ta

*- »rt

T+

+

1 +

+

Dioi

^^c^-^^io^o.« o o» <3 o*_ _
©"o ©"o o"-** « -- o^'oi"<rf -*

«« CO 0> 00 <0 I-* OO C» --f CJ *- -* o t>.

*— , —. o* i>- to *o -^ -* ;■. C» i-> •— ■-

e0 00000000000000aS0000000000Q0000000C1ClC»C»COW0»0»C»C»'^0»C^010»0»->

o 0>
in m

tn u^ «n »rt *o ©
O C O O © — •

.0<C^O»^'J»C*C*co«coc*5C^<?;p5-<t -<*'

O

OF THE UNITED STATES.

417

■ij

•TS!

Ci

Q

^

^

hi

»i^

e

<o

a

<u

-«;

a

**^»

E-l

'?=^

S

^

«o

is

s

-f

t<5

v>

ft;

<

<4J

"c:

t<»

'^

v>

a

s

«

«j 3

53

a ^

c 2i ^

j3 « n a> ao *n

» — 5 o

1 o o -»

— - ^ O •— 00 —

2 — C ^ — v,

.- o • 1^ r. 'C «

N " " «: o (^ h-

■5 « nh,-."*.

S * ^ 00 >/i .^..f

S J= c w 71 —

[ = - - c o ..•,

,^ "si :? 0» oc w,

^ z O ei C» «: tr

ft5

53

.£0 =
it 1

.5

1

1

5

oe « h, -*
tf) V) ^ -<r

0

e

S t3 :

is

ij

s

5.

<

H

— (O '« «

Ch

5

-

5» r>. « 30

CI ffi -r •«

IW

Ed

t-

DS

.. C

f-i'.

2 < a;

2 ^ £

en

■2 ? - ^3 g!"

60 i I

Ed
H

pq

o» "^ -♦ 00 i

00

so

l>5

3

v>

:j

-f

09

•^

c

*J^

1*1

*o

10

m

a

w.

&£

,

-^

T

*o •£ o* *o "« -^

-r «o trt •« •« «

CO Vi

cs

s

d

c
0

_5d

3 S n

■n

■0

. . :

n

^
«

J9

■•> »c 0 -♦ c> -n

«.

555^^2

*^

dXXZSX

418

SURYEY OP THE COAST

OS

I

s

I-
&

<3

to
8

c«o

a

1 e

CO C4

Q

-•

.2 U

cT

flj M «

u ■»

*

o. S

to g

+

»<

u

OO

In. m to

« 5

C» « CD

a>

«f»

w ^

to o> «

Ol

O >n 'o

< o

01 In. Ol

o>

(N.

mition
f

nt.

isl

SfeiS

a ° o

co" u

o CU

w 3 a

'AJ -SijU

saiSiiY

« nn

jOtDUj^

%n'

^

see

^ H

OP THE UNITED STATES. 419

NOTE.

This Paper was followed by a Journal of the " Principal
Dates connected with the Survey of the Coast ;" but as this
Journal was not considered of general interest, and as the
paper was already of gi'eat length, it has been thought pro-
per to omit it.

420 SCBVEY OF THE COAST OF THE UNITED STATES.

INDEX TO NO. XIL

Circular Letter from Secretary of the Treasury, - - 232

Letter from F. R. Hassler to Mr. Gallatin, - - - 234
Plan for putting into operation the Survey of the Coast of the United

States, -------- 241

A Catalogue of the Instruments and Books collected for the Survey

of the Coast, - - - - - - - 24&

Comparison of the French and English Standard Measures of Length,

and Regulation of the Bars for the Base Line Apparatus, - - 250

Description of the Apparatus for measuring Base Lines, - - 273

Description of the Two Feet Theodolite, ... - 287

Methods of observing with the Two Feet Theodolite, - - 294

On the Signals, and the System of Wires in the Telescope, - - 308

Additions made to the Repeating Circle with Two Telescopes, - 315

On some Adjustments of the Repeating Circle, - - - 320
Methods of observing a Series of Vertical Angles with the Repeating

Circle, -------- 322

Peculiar Method of observing Time with the Repeating Circle, ^ 326

Description of the Repeating Theodolite of One Foot diameter, 328

Method of observing Horizontal Angles with the Repeating Theodolite, 336

Method of observing Vertical Angles with the Repeating Theodolite, 338

Description of the Repeating Circle of Reflection, - - - 341

Method of observing with the Repeating Reflecting Circle, - 345

Description of the Plane Table, and the Alhidade to the same, 348

Description of Magnetic Needles, ----- 354

Peculiarities of the Five Feet Transit Instruments destined for the

Observatories, - --,. . . , - 357-

On the Astronomical Clocks intended for the Observatories, - 359

Plan of an Observatory proposed to be built at Washingion, - 3G5
Promiscuous Remarks upon the Principles of Construction, the Choice

and Trial of Instruments, ------ 371

On the Mechanical Organisation of a Large Survey, and the Particular

Application to the Survey of the Coast, - - - 385

Exemplars of the Day Book and Journal of Results, - - - 409

Xi^ilh

IScr.
o

^

W

/'/..I7\

/••(■</ V

t\troUn* JltiMUr J)<0L

f.'un.it .'.i t'\- J )\hjf

'0-i\v

PI. All: III

k

/••/„

^

y

Lfmirn hr utritha^ HojjUr

I'h.wi: till.

"■jw,, Ar ,\n-,'t„„ ILusIn-

/■v.( ;'.

/'/..ni: j.v

r-

r

u

■J

■5f

IpUiLC

a

1-

v>r

No. XIII.

Metnoire pour accompagner le Tibleau des Ohei'vatidns Me.
teorologiqucsfaites « ^rus/ilngfon, depuis le 17 Avril 1853
jusqu'au 18 Avril 1834. Par

Jules de Wallenstein,

Memhre Correspondant de I'Academie d'iristoire de Madrid.

Read, Tth May, 182-1.

Le Tableau dcs Observations Meteorologiques que j'ai
rhonncur d'offVir a la Socirto Pliilosopliique de Pbiladclphie,
enibiassc I'iiitervallc du 18 Avril 1853 jusqu'au 18 Avril
1824.

Le baroint'de dont je me sers a «'•(('• construit par M. For-
tin, I'babile artiste qui vient d'eniichir I'Obscrvatoire Royal
de Paris d'uu beau cercle, et qui etait connu anterieuremeut
par I'extrenic exactitude de ses balances et d'autres instru-
ments qui demandeiit une ejiiale liabilcto. La cuvette de cc
barometrc a un fond mobile : un point d'ivoire indique le
moment on la surface du mercurc, dans la cuvette, est a son
vrai niveau. Un curscur, muni d'un vernier, donne le moyen
de connaitre jusqu'au fO'""d'un millimetre ou un quatrc
milli«''me d'un pouce anglais, la hauteur de la colonne baro-
metrique.

L'instrumcnt est visse, dans sa partic superieure, de ma-
niere a consei ver constamment sa veiticalite. On en trouvera
une description plus detailb'-c dans le Traiie de Physique Ex-
pcrimentale et Alat/iemafique (]eM. Biot, (Vol. T', page 83.)
C'est avec cette especc de barometrc que Ics observations

VOL. II. — 3 I

42a METEOROLOGICAL OBSEUVATIONS

sur la pression atniospheriqiie sc font a rObservatoire Royal
tie Paris. Un theniiometre centigrade est enchasse dans la
monture du baronietre. On no sauiait trop recomniander
cet instrument aux physiciens voyageurs. 11 est le inoins
sujet a se casser ; les branches de liois, en forme d'echasses,
qui lui servent d'etui, le couvrent de maniere qu'il suffit de
tres peu de soins pour le preserver d'accidents.

I/hygrometre de Saussure a 2,5 decimetres de longueur :
Tare est divise en 100°. Le point extreme de la secheresse
est reduit par le calcul a zero de I'eelielle. Je tiens un ther-
momelre centigrade de Fortin suspcndu a cote de cet in-
strument, et ils sont, I'un et I'autre, rcnfermes dans une pe-
tite case, qui les preserve de la poussiere, et dont les deux
Cotes opposes sont converts d'une gaze assez fine, pour
les laisser en parfait contact avec I'atmosphere. L'exposition
de ces instruments est a I'ouest : ils sont suspendus a 3,4
metres du sol.

J'emploie aux observations purement tliermometriques,
deux thermometres gradues sur les tubes memes, dont I'un
est de M. Lerebours, artiste attache au Bureau des Longitudes
de Paris, et I'autre de M. Fortin ; et d'un thermometre de
Mr. Troughton, avec des echelles centigrade et de Fahren-
heit.

La plupart de mes instruments etant dlvises d'apres
I'echelle metrique, j'ai du reduire chaque observation en
mesure d'Angleterre, pour rendre plus aisee la comparaison
de mon travail avec ceux qui se font dans d'autres points de
ce pays,

J'ai suivi les conseils de M. Biot, relativement a la correc-
tion de la capillarite et de I'influence de la temperature sur
les observations barometriques. Le diametre interieur du
tube de mon barometre est de 9,.^™™ . J'applique une correc-
tion de 4,893'"'" k chacune de mes observations, en tirant
cette quantite par interpollation de la Table de Depression
calculec par M. de la Place. Cette correction est additive,
et par elle les observations, indiquces dans le Tableau, sont
comme si elles avaient ete faites avec un tube assez large,

MADE AT WASHINGTON. 453

pour que le mercure ne s'y abaissat pas au dessous dc son
niveau, ainsi que cela arrive dans les tubes capillaires.

Pour rcctilk-r Ics observations, suivant la tcnipi'-rature du
mercure, qui rcin[)lit Ic tul)e Ijaronu'tricjuc, j'eiiii)loie la for-

mule domiee par M. Biot, (P)=P , dans laquellc P

o-ili
cxprime la longueur dc la colonne observee ou la longueur
appaiente, T, la temperature indiquee par le thermomi'tre du

1
barometrc : la constante represcntc la dilatation vraie

du mercure pour chaque drgrt', cntrc les deux termcs dc la
glace roiulante et de Feau bouillantc. Au rnoyen dc cctle
correction, la valeur indiquoc dans le Taljlcau, est la presslon
atmospherique, rapportce a la tcmi)iMalure de 33° Fahren-
heit. La comparaison dc quclques hauteurs npparejitcs fera
connaitre Timportance de cette reduction :

Tlicrmomfrtrc
Duroniilie. ilii I'oiicci fianciis. I'miccs migln.s.

Boromdirc.

■". , p. I.

Le 2lj Juin a 4h. 0,7('40 21,0 28 1,57 29,981
Lc 29 Juin a 4h. 07640 26,0 28 0,46 29^822

Differences, „ 5,0 i,ii 0,159

On remarquera que, dans les premiers mois, les obser-
vations n'ont pas eto faitcs aux mcmcs hcures : en voici la
raison. Parnii les cbangemens qti'oprouvc Tatmosphrrc,
celui qui est indique par les variations lioruircs du barome-
tre, n'est pas le moins curieux, ni le mieux eclairci, jusqu'a
present. sf)it par la tlit-orie, soit par les ol)servations. M. dc
Humboldt s'est pru'-otre le |)lus occupe de ce sujct dans sa
Geoiiraphie dcs Plantes, (p. 91.) II rappclle les remarqucs
dc Godin et de La Condamine sur les oscillations horaires
du barometre sous I'equateur. Godin a, selon lui, indique

3

424i METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

le premier ce phenomene : e'est a 9 heures du matin et a
3 heures de I'apres-midi que ces variations ont lieu, suivant
M. de la Condamine, sous I'equateur: — mais il ne dit point,
a laquelle de ces deux epoques le maximum ou le minimu?n a
lieu. M.de Huniboldtconclutdeses propres observations, que
"sur les cotes de la nier du Sud, dans les plaines de la riviere
des Amazortes, et dans les endroits eleves de 4000 metres,
les epoques de ces vaiiations sont les memes ; qu'elles sont
independantes des changemens de temperature et des sai-
sons, et que le barornetre est a son maximum a 9 heures
du matin, qu'il ne descend que tres-jjeu jusqu'a 12'' , mais
beaucoup depuis midi jusqu'a 4 heures ou 4 heures et
demie, et qu'il remonte de nouveau jusqu'a 11 heures de la
nuit, ou il est un peu plus has qu'a 9 heures du matin : il
baisse de nouveau toute la nuit jusqu'a 4 heures et demie du
matin, ou il est un peu plus haul qu'a 4 heures de I'apres-
midi: enfin, il remonte depuis 4 heures jusqu'a 9 heures
du matin." Je renvoie le lecteur a I'ouvrage de M. de Hum-
boldt pour les resultats remarquables, auxquels de pareilles
observations peuvent conduire, et qui ont fixe I'attention de
plusieurs savans.

Dans un autre ouvrage,* qui n'est qu'en partie traduit en
franqais, et dont la publication est anterieure de plusieurs
annees a celui que nous venons de citer, M. de Humboldt
avait considere les variations atmospheriques, sous le rapport
dela physiologic et de la pathologic. "S'il existait constam-
ment tine me me difference entre la pression barometrique de
deux lieux; si, par exemple, dans I'un de ces endroits, elle
etait de 28 pouces, et dans I'autre de 24 pouces, les corps
organises seraient probablement affectes de I'inegale densite
de I'air, d'une meme maniere, d'apres les loix de I'irritation
habituelle. L'elevation et I'abaissement dubarometre, dans
un meme endroit, ont un efFet different. Je ne doute point
que les pays ou les variations barometriques sont les moins

* Experiences sur I'irritation des Fibres Musrulaires et Nerveuses, (en
allemand,) Vol. 11. [Le Premier Tome est le No. 1130 du Catalogue of the
.^mericuu Philosopldcal Society. 1824.]

MAIJK AT WASHINGTON. MS

consicl*' rabies, ne soicnt aiissi Ics plus sains," (Vol. s, p. 248,
249.) M. (le Hiiinljoldt cite, a rap|)ui dc ccttc o|)iiiioii, la salu-
biite du Perou, du Chili, et des pays rnoiita^runix. •' Jr suis
poite a, croirc,"' dit le inome autcur. dans nn autre endioit du
mOme ouviage, (p. 29:2.) ''que la nature ou la composition
de ratmosphcre est moins variable sous les tropiqucs que
dans les regions teniperccs du globe. Tous les phenomenes
nieteorologiques paraisscnt y sui\ re inic certainc loi, dont ils
ne s'ecartcnt que tri-s-i)eu : le flux et le reflux iliurnes dc la
clialeur, dc la liMiiiere,de relectriciti',et du fluide magm-tique,
y sont plus egaux dans leur marche, du moins autant (|u'il
est permis d'en juger par le pcu d'ol)servations recueillies
jusqu'ici : memc le baronu-tre, dont les variations, si coinpli-
quecs dans nos cliniats, embarrassciit tanl les naluralistes,
s'abaisse et monte regulierement, sous les tropiqucs, 4 Ibis
dans I'espace dc 2 4< licures. Doit-on attribucr u cettc regu-
larito dans la constitution de ratn)0spliere,le caractere oI)stine
des maladies e[)idemiques, sous le climat des palmiers?
Des que sous ce climat undesordre arrive dans les fonctions
vitales, il fait des progres, sans etre arreti* par nullc cause
exterieure. Les changementsdu fluide environnant ne sont
pas assez grands, pour arrcter les decompositions. Ce
n'est qu'a Tarrivce d'une nouvelle saison, que la force des
causes excitnntes exlericiires (|)ailiogeniques) triomphc sur Ic
developpement morbide, qui alien dans la fil)rc. Dans les
climats temperes, au contraire, les variations dans les prin-
cipes constituants de ratmos|)here sont si fiequcntes et si con-
siderables, qu'clles agissent puissamment sur les fonctions
vitales. Uncliangemcntdans I'elastici.ede Pair, dans la charge
electrique, dans la qu.intit*'* d'oxigene et dans I'humidiJe,
modifle les fonctions vitales, et le progies des maladies
epidemiques est, en partie, paralys*'* ()ar cette modilication
continuelle des eh'ments exterieurs, ou le mal prend bieniot
partiellement une autre forme. Des modecins, hons obser-
vatcurs, ont remarqtie que. dans la /one tempeu'T, les e •-
droits, ou la temperature est la plus variable, sont les moins
exposes aux maladies «''pidemiqucs."

426 METEOROLOGICAL. OBSERVATIONS

Dans cet ouvrage, publie en 1797, M. de Humboldt se rap-
portait aux observations de M. Moseley (Treatise on Tro-
pical Diseases) relativement aux oscillations horaires du ba-
rometre sous les tropiques, et a celles que M. Francis Bal-
four (Asiatic Researches, Vol. IV.) avait faites au Bengale.
D'apres le Tableau Physique des Regions Equinoxiales, im-
prime en 1805, ces observations ne s'accordent pas avec
celles que M. de Humboldt avait faites, lui-meme, sous les
tropiques. (Voyez p. 90 et 91.)

En Allemagne, malgre de nombreuses perturbations dans
la marcbe du barometre, on trouve une certaine regularite
dans I'abaissement de la colonne du mercure, qui a lieu a 2
heurs apres-midi, et son elevation, qui a lieu a 8 heures du
soir."*

" M. Cotte a deduit d'un grand nombre d 'observations
faites en FAirope, que le minimum de la bauteur barome-
trique y a lieu 3 lieures apres la culmination du soleil, et
par consequent, 3 heures plutot que sous I'equateur,
Dans nos climats temperes, les variations horaires du
poids de I'air sont, peut-etre, cachees sous une multitude de
causes locales, qui font monter et baisser irregulierement les
baronietres. Mais je ne doute pas, avec M. Van Swinden,
que des termes moyens, deduits de plusieurs milliers d'ob-
servations, faites d'heure en heure, n'indiquent que, meme
dans nos latitudes, le barometre monte et descend a des
epoques determinees."

M. Biot (Traite de Physique Experimentale, Vol. I. p. QS)
rappelle les resultats auxquels une longue suite d'observa-
tions a conduit le celebre naturaliste des Pyrenees, par rap-
port au sujet qui nous occupe. "M. Raniond a reconnu
qu'en France, le barometre a son maximum de hauteur vers
9 heures de matin ; apres quoi il descend jusques vers les 4
heures du soir, ou il atteint son minitnum : de la il monte
de nouveau jusqu'a H heures du soir, ou il atteint de nou-
veau son maximum: apres quoi il redescend jusques vers

* Experiences sur I'Irritation, &c. Vol. II. p. 293.

MAUE AT WASHINGTON. 4S7

les 4 heures du matin, pour revenir a son maximum vers 9
hcures. Cettc niarclic est soiivent drrangee dans nos cli-
inats d'Kiirope, on Tetat de I'atniosplierc est si varial)le."

L'iistronoinc cinharqiu' siir Ics vaisseaux nisscs qui, en
1850, out piucoiii u Ics liaules laiitudcs australes, a ol)serve,
pendant la navigation entrc les tropiques, que " le haionielrc
eprouve roguliercnient une l)aisse et une haussc pcriodiqiies
et journaliercs, de maniore qu'il attcint son plus haut point
a 9 lieures du matin ct ii 9 iicurcs du soir, de m«>mc (ju'il
descend au plus has a 3 heures du matin et a 3 heures
de I'apres-midi.'"*

Je me suis longtems arrete aux oscillations horaires du ba-
rometre, Mais je |)ense que cette partie de la physique mc-
rite d'autant plus d'attcntion, qu'elle parait avoir peu fixe
jusqu'a present celle des naturalistes voyageurs. II en est
de menie de la variation diurne del'aiguille aimant»'>e, dont
peu de piiysicifus se sont occupes dcpuis Van Svvinden,t
avec autant d'attention et de perseverance qu'il a mises
a ses rechcrches. Peut-otre de bonnes observations sur
les variations periodiques de Taiguille aimantee, de I'elec-
tricite et du barometre, recueillics par des savants tels que
La Condamine, Mufis, Humboldt, et Buch, feraient-elles
drcouvrir quclquc liaison entre ces phenomenes,ou lemoyen
d'expliqucr Tun parl'aiitre.

II suftit, enfin, de savoir que les savants que nous venous
de nommer, se sont occup»''S de ce sujet ; qu'unc liaison a
etc remarqure, par I'un d'eux (M. Mutis) entre les varia-
tions horaires dc la colonne baromrtriquc, et les conjonc-
tions et oppositions de la lune, et que M. de La Place a sou-
mis au caicul TinHucncc que peuvent avoir le solcij et la
lune sur I'atmosphere, pour ne pas juuer inutile dc s'at-
tacher avec quelque soin a ces observations; et I'on avait
besoin de consulter des autorites aussi imposantes. pour nc
pas se laisser, en genC'ral, decourager de tout travail meteo-

• Nouvellesi Annates de Voyage dc M. Malte-Brun, Vol. XX.

t Recueil de M6moires sur I'Analugic dc I'Electricite et du Magiictisrae,

r. III.

428 METEOROLOGICAIi OBSERVATIONS

rologique, par la defaveur, et presque le ridicule, qu'a jete
sur cette partie de la physique, un astronome renoirime par
ses longs et utiles travaux. (Bode. Gedankeri uber den Wit-
terimgslauf. Berlin, 1819.)

Mais pour obtenir des resultats satisfaisants sur les change-
meiits periodiques du barometre, je devais, dans le com-
mencement, etre incertain sur les heures convenables aux ob-
servations, a defaut d'y consacrer plus de terns qu'il ne m'etait
possible d'y vouer. Suivant M. Raniond, I'heure de midi est,
en general, I'instant le plus favorable aux observations ba-
ronietriques, " parceque I'equilibre de I'atmosphere, altere
paries vents du matin, se trouve ordinairement retabli vers
le milieu dujour," (Memoiresde finstitut de Frange, Tome
VI.) Aussi ai-je, des le Avril, observe a cette epoque la

pression atmospherique. Mais j'ai ete longtems incertain
pour les autres heures. C'est le 37 Juin que j'ai cotimien-
ce 11 fuire toutes mes observations meteorologiques 4 fois
par jour, c'est a dire, a 7 heures, a 9 heures, a midi, et a 4
heures. On verra par le Recueil de mes Observations, qu'a
Washington, le barometre est a son maximum de hauteur
vers 9 heures du matin, et qu'il descend jusqu'a 4 heures.
Je ne me crois pas encore en droit de tirer de mon travail
d'autres conclusions. C'est aux physiciens, qui voudraient
examiner mes recherches avec impartialite, a determiner
jusqu'a quel point les elements que j'ai fournis, peuvent etre
compares a ceux, dont on a tire les seuls indices d'une loi
dans la marche du barometre et del'aiguilleaimantee. Pour
ma part, je me crois oblige de continuer mes observations,
avant d'en deduire positivement un resultat. Ce n'est
qu'apres de nouvelles recherches, que je me croirai egalement
autorise a oHVir des remarques sur les vents et leur influence,
sur la charge electrique et I'humidite de I'air du lieu de mon
sejour. Les observations que j'ai faitesjusqu'ici, s'accordent
si pen avec les conclusions de M. de Volney sur le climat
de Washington, et je suis si peu dispose a hazarder des as-
sertions contre un auteur renomme, dut il en avoir donne
lui-meme I'exemple, que je prefere prendre I'engagement do

MADE AT WASHINGTON. 4S9

continuer nion travail ct de redoublcr d'attcntion dans mes
recliercfies, que de risquer soit de I'iniitcr, s'il a etc trop har-
di dans ses conjectures, ou de ne pas lui resseinbler, s'il a
bien observe, ce qu'il dit avoir examine.

Je viens apresent aux resultats que fournit le calcul de
mes observations :

Le Tableau, Ko. l, contient :

1. Lcs temperatures moyennes de chaquc mois.

2. Les temperatures moyennes « inidi, pendant chaque
mois.

8. Le maximum de la temperature, le jour et ii I'hcure ou
il fut observe, chaque mois.

4. Le minimum de la temperature, lejour et a I'heureou
il fut observe, chaque mois.

5. (Dans une colonne suivante, on troiive la difference dcs
deux quantites precedentes.)

6. La hauteur moyenne du barometre pendant chaque
mois.

7. Le maximum de la hauteur de la colonne barometrique,
(jour et heure.)

8. Le minimum dc la hauteur de la colonne barometrique,
(jour et lieure.)

9. (Dans la colonne suivante, on trouvera la difll-rencc du
viaximum et du minimiim.)

10. Moyenne des observations hygronu'triques faites avec
I'hygrometre de Saussure, pendant chaque mois.

11 ^12. Maximum et miidmnm dcs oI)servations hygro-
metriqucs et ditferencc de ces quantites.

Ces resultats offrent un fait remarquable : pendant les
mois de Mai, Juin, et .Tuillet, la mojf/'nnc tempi' vat urc iln mois
etait il fort pen prcs cgale a, la iemj)f^raturc mojienne du mois
precede7it, a midi.

VOL. II. 3 K

430

METEOROLOGICAIi OBSERVATIONS

Mai

Temperature moyeune

du tnois.
Centigrade.

21,9

Juin
Juillet

24,0

27,1

I'craperaiure moyenne

a 7mtli,

Cenligrade.

Avril

21,2

Mai

25,0

Juin

26,6

Voici les differences des moyennes des mois ;

'Mai 2,1

Juin 3,1

Juillet 0,6

Aout 4,5

Septembre 8,7

Octobre 7,1

Novembre S.3

1823.

1824.

^Decembre

"Janvier
Fevrier
Mars

1,3

s,7

5,1

La plus grande difference est entre Octobre et Septembre,
et la plus petite entre Aout et Juillet. J'exclus li difference
des mois d'Avril et Mai, et celle d'Avril et de Mars, parceque
j'ai commence ettini mes observations le 17 Avril.

La moyenne des temperatures a midi de deux mois suc-
cessifs, ne different souvent que d'un petite quantite.

Mai

Juin

Juillet

Aout

Decembre

Janvier

Difference.

1,6

0,1

0,7

La plus grande difference est entre Novembre et Octobre.

Le maximum dela hauteur du mercure dans le barometre
etait generalement au matin. En Janvier, ce maximum a
ete observe a 4 heures du soir.

MADE AT WASHINGTON. 431

Le minimum a rtc observe, le soir, pendant 9 mois.

Ce tableau prouve, qu'a Washington la niarche clii baro-
metre est loin d'etre aussi reguliere que sous les tro|)iqnes.

Les observations t'aites avec rhygiotneire de Daniel! sont
en trop petit noinbre pour etrc leduitcs a unc nioyennc. Je
me propose dc fairc une suite reguliere d'expericnces avec
cet instrument, dont M. le Professeur Scluiniacher continue,
si je ne me trompe, a fairc usage, et qui se prele, mieux, que
celui de Saussure, ii la decouverte de plusieurs faits meteo-
rologiqucs. Sa construction est decritc dans les Nos. IG et
25 du "Journal of the Royal Institution.'" Les observations,
ou plutot les experiences, que j'ai faites avec cet instrument,
ont ete calculees, au nioyen des Tables de Mr. Daniell. Cet
hygrometre sounut le pliysicien, qui s'cn sert, non seule-
inent a un travail plus longqu'aucun autre instrument meteo-
rologique, mais a unc depcndance dc bons laboratoires de
chimie, (luclqucfois fiicbeuse pour ses recberclics. J'ai ett
la |)lus grande peine de me procurer, a Washington, de I'ether
d'une qualite convenable a ces experiences. Dans un long
voyage, a travers un pays encore pen habite, cet instrument
ne serait, par cette raison, d'aucun usage. Mais, rxccpte
cettediflkulte,ilnierite la preference sur celui de Saussure,
qui est plus sujct a sc derangcr, ct dont les irrcgularites ne
sont le |)lus souvent rcconnues, que lorsque I'on ( si force fi
remplaccrle clicveu> et :i recommcncer les cxp«Miences qui
servent a determiner les deux termes extremes de I'eclielle
liygrom»'trique. L'instrumcnt dont je mo suis servi, et qui
m'a ete fourni par M. Fortin, ayant «''piouve ce derangement,
I'artistc qui s'est charge dc le reparer, n'a pu, rnalgre les
plus grands soins, faire parvenir quelques cheveux lesciv6.s
par M. Fortin, qu'a 10'^, lorsque rinstrumcnt devait etre au
maximum dc la sechcrcssc.

Les observations hygrometriques faites avec I'insirumcnt
de M. Saussure, montrent la grande hunridit*- dont I'atmos-
pbere de Wasliington est cliarg»''e. pendant une ijrande par-
tee de I'annee. Mais le minimum a ete prcscpic observe

43i8 METEOROLOGICAL. OBSERVATIONS

dans le meme mois (Juin,) que le maxinumi, (96°,5 et
4i6,°5). Le minimum absolu a ete trouve le 38 Octobre,
a 4 heures (43°,0). En Novenibre (le 7,) a 4 heures, I'hy-
gronielre etait exactement au milieu de I'echelle (50°j. Le
S5 Aout, a 4 heures, I'instrumeut etait a 50°,5. L'accident
dont j'ai parle plus haul, ni'a ennpeche de continuer les ob-
servations hygrometriques pendant les nioisde Janvier, Fev-
rier, et Mars, et la premiere moitie d'Avril.

Falii-enheit. DifRrence.

Moyenne de la tempera-
ture pendant I'annee 58°,5
Moyenne pendant I'ete 67°,^
Moyenne pendant I'hiver 47°,9

19°,6

Pouces ansilais. Difference.

Hauteur moyenne du baro-

inetre pendant I'annee 29,92.2

Hauteur moyenne pendant I'ete 29,9 lO ^ n 016

Hauteur moyenne pendant I'hiver ^9,9^6 3 '

D'apres un tableau meteorologique de M. Josiah Meigs,
ancien employe du '■^General Land Office," la temperature
de Washington, pendant I'annee 1830, etait 55°, 02, Fabr.

Voici un tableau comparatif de la temperature de Wash-
ington, pendant les 7 derniers mois de 1830 et 1833 :

Observations faites en 1833«

Fahrenheit.

71°.4
75°,3
80°,8

79°,r

71°,6
55°,9
43°,2
39°,0

Observations de Mr

.Meigs en

1830.

Fahrenheit.

Mai

63°,35

Juin

72^34

Juillet

78°,81

Aout

75%71

Septembre

67°,44

Octobre

gi°,6i

Novenibre

43°,43

Decembre

34°,95

MADE AT WASiriNOTON. 438

II re?ulterait de cettc comparaison. que la temperature a
ete sotieralnient plus olovt'e, perulaiu Ics memos mois en
1853, qu'en 1824. Mais avant d'en venir si cette conclu-
sion, 11 faudrait etre sur que les observations ont etc laites
avec la me me precision, et avec de hons instruments, qui
seuls sout comparahles. D'ailleurs, Ics observations ther-
mometriqucs dependent tellement de I'endtoit on les instru-
ments sont lixes, de leur emplacemeiit |)ar rapport aux vents
les plus domitiants et dcs beures oii Ton obseive, que Icurs
resultats ne peuvent etrc admis commc des donnees
comparatives, que lorsque le physicien, qui entreprend de
les ra{)proclier, peut elre sur qu'elles ont etc faitcs d'apres
une methode a peu prcs unitbrme.

Ces conditions sont toujours remplics suffisamment,
lorsque I'on a le bonhcur de comparer des ol)servations
que Ton salt avoir ete faites avec une scrupuleuse ex-
actitude, avec celles qui viennent d'un astronomc pratique.
J'ai I'intime conviction que le travail meteorolosique, publie
cliaquc annee, dans I' Almanac de PAcadomie des Sciences
de St. Petersljourg, nc laissc rien s\ desirer.

Les observations sont faites par M. dc Wisniewsky, astro-
nome-adjoint de TObservatoirc Imperial et un dcs savants,
a qui la geographic a le plus d 'obligations, pour ce qui
concerne la Hussie. II m'est doux de rapprocher mes
recberclies du travail de ce savant, qui a dirige mes etudes
dans I'aslronomic pratique, et a qui j'aimcrai u rapportcrle
fruit de tons mes efforts dans les sciences.

En 1820. Maximum de la temperature observe a SI. Pc-
tersbourg, le 2fl Juillet (7 Aout,) a midi, 20,5 de Reaumur=:
78,1 de Fahreiibeit.

En 1822. Maximum de la tempiMature observ6 a St.
3
Prtcrsbourg, le — Juillet, a midi, 23,6, R.=85,l, F.
15
En 1823. Maximum de la temperalurc observe a Wash-
ington, Ic 16 Juin, a midi, y5,y, F.

4-34 METEOROLOGICAL OBSEIIVATIONS

En 1820. Le plus grand froid a St. Petersbourg, le
6

— 18 Janvier, au soir, — 25,4, R.= —
18

En 1823. Le plus grand froid a St. Petersbourg, le 30
Decembre 1822, (li Janvier 1823,) — 14,2= — 0,2.

En 1824. Le plus grand froid a Washington, le 2 Fevrier
a 7 heures, +11,3, F,

En 1820. Mz.'cm?/;/? de la hauteur du baronietre observe
7
a St. Petersbourg, le — Decembre, 29^,1 6 de Paris.

19
En 1823. Maximum observe a St. Petersbourg, le 23
Decembre 1822, (3 Janvier, 1823,) 29^,13 de Paris.

En 1823, Maximum de la hauteur du barometre, obser-
ve a Washington, le 29 Novembre, a 9 heures du matin,
30,603 pouces anglais,=28''' 8'-,56 de Paris.

En 1820. Minimum de la hauteur du barometre observe
a St. Petersbourg, le 18 Novembre, a midi, 26'',97 de Paris.

En 1822. Minimum de la hauteur du barometre observe
a St. Petersbourg, le 27 Fevrier, au matin, 27'',06 de Paris.

En 1824. Minimum de la hauteur du barometre observe
a Washington, le 25 Janvier 1824, a4heures, 29,317 pouces
anglais,=27i' 4' ,78 de Paris.

Les observations ont ete faites a I'Observatoire de St. Pe-
tersbourg, 3 fois par jour :

Pouces de Paris

Moyenne tiree des 1098 observations faites
pendant 1820 38,509

Moyenne des 1095 observations faites pen-
dant 1832 28,180

Moyenne des observations faites a Washing-
ton, depuis le 17 Avril 1833 jusqu'au 17 Avril
1824 28 01,66

MAUE AT WASHrNGTON, 4;io

J'auiai I'honneur de fournir a la SociC'te riiilosopliiquc
une traduction dcs autrcs resultats inetcoiologif|Ucs, coritenus
dans les Almanacs de I'Acadrinie dcs Sciences de St. Peters-
bourg dcs annoes (830 ct 1822.

Le tal)lcau de I'etal de I'atmosphere n'est pas fait avec line
exactitude coniparai)le a celle des autres parties de cc travail.
Le langage adopte en Angleterre pour depeindre I'aspect du
ciel et la forme des mnv^es ['^ prevaiimg clouds,") n'est pas
encore assez universcl, pour que je puisse beaucoup rcgri'ter
de ne pas fn'y etrc conibrme. Je ne pretends pas, non plus,
que le Tableau No. 2, montre exactement le nombre de jours
on certains vents out regni' a niidi. Quelqucs mois d'oI)ser-
vations m'ont trop appiis coml^ien les marees atmospluMiques
sont viariables sur les bords du Potomac; j'ai vu trop souvent
les vents parcourir, en peu d'lieures, tous les points du
compas. pour que je puisse me promettrc des n'^sultats tres
instructif de la direction des vents a une certaine heure de
jour. Avant de suivre, avec plus d'attention, cette partie de
la nieteorologie, je desirerais savoir, si midi qui, si jc no me
trompe, est I'instant auquel sont rapportees les observations
sur les vents, faites en Europe, par des astronomes, est le
plus convenable dans un lieu ou les vents sont si extremc-
ment variables.

Ayant «''t»^ absent de Washington, depuis le milieu de Sep-
tembre jusqu'aux premiers jours de Novembre,je suis moins
a me me de garantir les oI)servations pour cet intcrvalle du
tcms, que si je les avais faites ou si je les avais, du moins,
surveilU'CS. Mais je crois avoir etc, a cet egard, aussi bien
servi que Ton pent I'etre : et mes regrets de n'avoir pas pu
suivre sans interruption ce travail, sont efllict'S par le souvenir
des liaisons que j'ai formees, pendant mon sfjour n Philadel-
piiie et les impressions [irofondes que m'ont laissccs mes
entretiens avec les savants, de qui je pouvais plus aisement
obtenir deslumieres, qu'il ne n'est possible delcur en fournir,
malgre tous mes efTorts.

Pliiladelpbie, 4 Mai, 1824.

436

METEOnOTiOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

t3

s

■aouuoyiO

o_ >3 ^^ -(T. if.^ w q i^v H.

Cn}-C<Dd t-' « O CI -*
CO --t- 'r: «*■ CO -t -* -* 0»

■ainiurujiv

C O m in u-i_ C. O^ O^ O^
lo' oc" r -" irT O^ to' of O h-
u-i .+ -t in «n •■* -* w^ "i

■3.in.ni

t^ oo M <+•*-* -^ ■** c»
,rt -3J .« .« -rt .rt -rt ^ -■?!

Ml»)|'

3 .^ _ :m lo c cc fo "
CO — ,- 0» no ct —

uinuiiXBj^

c_ c v; q. q, in q ^„ q,

-jfinO'nooOQcO* —

•3403^

-.-« -a '?S .CB -^ -rS ^rt -« -7J

•anof

0-:0«OI — — int-.ci

CO — — —1 --

•^uuii'ijv

r.o — i-^ uD '+"i^'"r-. -**■ r*
w 1^ 1^ t^ 1- r- tr: (JT r-

a p

ni

BIBI^Ml- S-^i-TiOJ

<c «n (.

— ^3 — OJ

o> I- a> to

e c

00 0_,OJ_

-* C^ CO

Oi O oo

•a.n3ajinij,\[

. ::■ lo en 'O
: - 1 Oi CO tC
. C^ — CM ^

?_^q^q^q_o
ro''-"o''o.

— tN. oc t* CO Cl

siciSuG saonoj

1 O) tc — o

; I-* CO — en
1 CO "n o to

en X t^ :

-^ -f — c
l^ in Oi t

•3.n^ui!l|riij

-Tf O* (^) — —

CO o o '>> -^
in -!T in in in

ift *n ■*

N. CO in
-* 01 cft
■7? in «t
(>. t^ r^

•ajnoH

•jnof

: j= ^ ^ —

C W •* -# O)

•*t b- •* in -* -<#

' -«

-:fl

-vB

,*

^?:

-s

-«

,ra -rt

-rt ^

^71 -rt

o»

-^ go

JC

01

c*

:::;

X

0»

(J»

5.

s.

U

1

aj

u

i;

•-

L

I-

:-

1

a>

S(K]oUi; saono.

-1

tN. in
tC o
CO O)

OOi-o*";'cooOoooot^
oo«?o«nco~tocotO^O
0-) G)^ CO in CO (O m -:^ m -* — *

o' — ' o' zT o" o" cT o' o* cT o"

■r: CO ro '-': "T CO "" ■— "T CO —

•3Jl^air|l!IM

b- t*

— — oc O - ^ OJ =•. -T 1^ t--

aiOiCTitCOt-tOOltOG*-*

toto(ci>.i^t^t^b-r^h,co

' o" o' o" o" o" c o o" o" o" o"

•ajnajj

b- 00

^ -rt -rt '^J -rt -rt -rt 'M -^ 'M -rt .« .a;

•jnof

0*toO»tOint*s>— cntoooco^co
CI ci ^ c< ci o» — c»

2 ^
S S

E^r

■3.inajj

I ?

000"S<OtOtOtON.ts.ts.t^S.O>

,rt ^ -rt -S .

a 'rt -fj -rt .<s -rt -fli_^<6_-*

•anof

•liaquaaijKj

•apBjSjiuJO

•a.in^JH

oom ^cO'^b-OiCOoo c< "-1 C^
0» (^ C^ 0> — CO ^ CI

in 00 »h I*. ~ I* CO t--^l-^0 O^q t^

irT CO »n •+ 'n ^ '" tn tO O oe a> co
o<cocococratr:o*»^T-<o*— ■ — o*

-rs -S ^ .^ .«-«■-:'! '^g ■« -<g '^ -^ --^

MHOf

Ii .»|U,.jq.:j

.•[IIU.TJIIU^O

■j.j.iu.-.iqi.^

^^?n^^^^^

;»>■**• c* o oj C) c

M tr"tc ^ oc CO >n hs.' tc ';: .+ c "^

•apGjSnusQ I -^

'— "«+' tCtc"c*"co'tc"co in oTw"':

Cl C< O CJ 01 »- -

1^ S. oo

-•J O OP

-4j ^

CCD

MADE AT WASHINGTON.

437

1

TABLEAU

De Velat de Patmosphhe a Washington, du 18 Jivril 1823 at* 17 ^vril, 1824.

tn

>

r

■""I.)

3!

•n \ np

-

<o

-r

t^

-f

-

ao

-

r^

-

■♦

- 1

1^

0 •^ "1

"

=

"

"

■>•

—'

""

•~

—

-r

-r,

o.i •;

=

"

"

z

"

-

-

~*

:

:

^o

^

-'

o S "«

pns np

00

U-,

;

"

-

=

z

:

<o

■■

""

'■"

•pns KB
■A S np

;;

V)

o>

t*

-

«

o

«-

•■

'^

»>.

O

<y-.

a sn«
3.1 •!'

c^

»

m

-*

«■

•*-

t^

c%

:

=

»n

;s

■3N "P

c»

-

"

-

P5

o

"

■M

*n

M

•*

'"

?J

•a N i<»
p.tu^ np

tn

•♦

a

t0

eo

t»

t>.

r<-

•^

■■

»n

-

en

C
V

a

to

c

£

>
'■V

» J

■Ji

u
3
O
»-*
in

0)

-o
K

g
o

tnpa »1 'OJ

3

r

:

=

-

:

:

^

«

"

"•

•

=

oiisiq ogpo

-

;

=

;

'

r

=

-t

■c«

=

"

1

=

1-

•aS.ax

r

S

=

*

-

=

=

3»

"

"

-*

'

=

-otunjQ

-

s

=

3

:;

:

^

6«

^

6*

— -

~ «

:

■jj^uoo.L

1.1 ».M«|3a

;

^

"*

CI

01

s

z

:

s

r

xnoditjo

StllU.IX

"

•o

c

-r

«

e»

=

=

z

o*

"

■

-

»n

'xn^unid
tduiax

o«

!>.

to

■♦

■*

•♦

<n

!«.

«

tn

■*

»n

«

'UJAno.1
"'"".I.

-t

»^

■»o~

6

r*

=

•n

OD

*n

-*

z

rt

o

2

•<lui.H Ii«{|

(C

-r

-f

t-

a

»n

^

ta

8

•^

»n

=

o

o

c

>

<

*5

'5
— )

o

o

.a

t
o

o

i
s

a

oo

g

-2.

1

■1

u

VOL. ir. — 3 L

No. XIV.

On the Language^ Manners, and Customs of the Berbers, or
Brebers, of Jifrica. Commnnicated by Willia^n Shaler,
Consul of the United States at Mgiers, in a Series of Letters
to Peter S. Du Poficeau, and by the latter to the Society. —
Read at different times.

I.

Letter from Peter S. Du Ponceau to the President of the So-
ciety.

Philadelpliia, 15tli September, 1823.

Dear Sir,

I have the pleasure of enclosing to you a communi-
cation which 1 have received from William Shaler, Esq.
Consul of the United States at Algiers, on the subject of the
Berbers of Africa, and particularly of tlieir language. I beg
you will be so good as to lay it before the Society at their
next meeting.

The Berbers, as is well known, are a white race of men,
who inhabit the chain of Mount Atlas, and extend to the bor-
ders of the Desert of Sahara. To the north of tliem are the
Bedouin Arabs, and still farther north are the Moors, whose
dominions line the south western coast of tiie Mediterra-

ON Till: LANGUAGE OF THE BERBERS. 439

nean. The country of the Berbers is considered as included
within tliose dominions, but tlie Moorish governments have
not yet succeeded, nor probably ever will succeed, in reduc-
ing these tribes to a state of com[)lcte subjection. Although
the greatest part of them follow the practices of the Maho-
metan religion, yet like our ultra-Mississippian hidians, they
live in a state of savage independence, occasionally sul)mit-
ting to, but never acknowledging, the supremacy of their no-
minal masters.

These people are divided into four principal nations or
large tribes: 1. The Amaziig, who inhabit the dominions of
the Emperor of Morocco ; their language is called S/iilha.
2. The Kabyles, to the eastward in the territories of Algiers
and Tunis, and whose language is called Showiah. 3. The
'I'uarycks, in middle Africa, south westward of the kingdom
of Fczzan. I. The Siwahs, to the East, extending to the
frontier of Egypt. These inhabit the Oasis of the same name
where is supposed to have been the oracular temple of Ju-
piter Ammon.

Some authors have considered the Tibho as a part of the
Berber nation ; they live to the south east of Fezzan, and are
believed to be the remains of the ancient Troglodytes men-
tioned by Herodotus. They, in fact, live in caves like their
ancestors. But they are a coloured race, approaching in
the shape of their features to the Negroes, althougli they do
not exactly resemble them. Nor have we yet any specimen
of their language, at least that I know of. It seems prema-
ture, therefore, to include them within the general denomi-
nation of Berbers.

The Amazirg and the Kabyles were the only peojjle of
this extended nation known to the world. — the former by
mcansof the travels of George Hocst, a Dane, and the latter
by those of Dr. Shaw, until Mr. Horncmann, who, in the
years 1797 and 1798, travelled from Cairo to Mourtzouk,
the capital of Fezzan, in the employment of the English So-
ciety lor explorin-j; the interior of Africa, became and made
us acquainted with the Siwahs and the Tuarycks, and disco-

3

440 ON THE 1.ANGUAGE

vered that the Sliilha and the Showiah, the idioms of the
Amazirg and Kabyles, were with little difference tlie same.

Mr. Hornemann having sent a scanty vocabulary of the
Siwah dialect to Sir Joseph Banks, the late President of the
Royal Society of London, it was by him communicated to
the learned William Marsden, who, after comparing it with-
out success with various oriental and other languages, at last
betliought himself of comparing it with the language of the
Amazirg, wliich is called Shillah by the Arabs, and by them-
selves Amazirg, and to his great surprise and delight, he
found a very great affinity between those two idioms, so
much so, that he did not hesitate to express his opinion,
" that the languages of those countries of Siwah and Shillah,
distant from each other by the whole breadth of Africa, were
one and the same ; whence he presumed that the Shillah or
Berber extends across the whole African continent, in a di-
rection between the Negro dialects on the southern side, and
the Moorish or Arabic of the Mediterranean coasts, and that
it was the language of the whole of northern Africa before
the period of the Mahometan conquests."

This hypothesis being once afloat, other philologists set
themselves to work, and made profound researches to de-
stroy or confirm it : the latter conclusion appears to have
been the result of their investigations. The celebrated Vater,
whose profound learning is only equalled by his astonishing
sagacity, discovered this ancient African language in that of
the Guanchos, who still inhabit the Canary Islands, of which
they are considered as the aborigines. He traced also in it
some affinity with the Amharic and Coptic, but not sufficient
to lead to a satisfactory result.

Yet this interesting phenomenon of one nation and one
language, extending across Africa from the Canary Islands
and tiie coast of the Atlantic Ocean to the Ked Sea, is only
evidenced by about twelve words of the Shillah and Siwah
dialects compared together by Mr. Marsden. by a lesser num-
ber com|)ared by Vater with that of the Guanclios, and hy the
assertion of Hornemann that the Tuarycks speak the same

OF THE BERBERS. 4-41

lansuage with the Siwahs. It is clear, tliat however plausible
tliese proofs may appear, the subject still requires further
investigation.

With this view, understanding last year that Mr. Shaler
was about to return to his consulate at Algiers, and knowing
him to be a zealous friend of the sciences, and at the same
time possessed of such mental qualifications as fit him for
their pursuit, I prevailed upon him. (not witliout difficulty,
however, on account of his great diffidence. ) to devote part
of his time to the investigation of tlie history, manners, and
customs of the Berbers, and paiticularly of their language, in
order that the hypothesis of Mr. Marsden and Professor Va-
ter might be brought to a surer test than has been done here-
tofore. The enclosed communication contains the first fruits
of his labours, and we may expect hereafter sometiiing more
important, which I sliall not fail successively to conmiunicate.
I have thought that tlie Society would not consider as devoid
of interest, a sutyect that has attracted the attention of the
most learned philologists of Kurope.

The Society will easily pprceivo that the study of this lan-
guage has not only in view the gratification of philological
curiosity, but that it is an interesting oly'ect to trace, if possi-
ble, througli it, the history and origin of tliis extraordinary
people. On this subject there are various opinions among
the learned. Mr. Marsden, and wiiii him Air. Langlos, is
of opinion that the Berber is a corrujjted remnant of the Pu-
nic, while Professor Vater, with more pr(»bal)ilily, is inclined
to consider it as the ancient Numidian. altered in a degree
by intermixture with other idioms and parliciiiaily the Ara-
bic. The reasons that lie gives for not tliinking it to l)e the
Phenician are very strong, and in my opinion conclusive.
He ol)serves that tlie languasje ol the Carthaginians was not
far spread into the interior of Africa, and that tliey were ol)-
liged to learn the Libyan language (as it was called) as well
as their own. whence they were called l)y tlie poets fiilin-
giies,* migdibiles or mi gdolibvs, and bisulcili/igues. Tlie first

• " Dommn timet ambiguam, Tvriosfjue l)ilingucs." — Virgil.

44S ON THE LANGUAGE

and the last expression might have been metaphorical, and
intended to express their alleged moral duplicity, but mig-
dolibes, an epithet applied to them by Plautus, could hardly
have been so> as it implies a mixture of nations or languages.
Indeed, it is not probable, that the comparatively small num-
ber of Phenicians who settled themselves on the northern
coast of Africa could have introduced the use of their lan-
guage far into the interior of the country : on the contrary,
it is astonishing that they themselves preserved it so long as
they did ; for it was still in use at the time of the Vandalic
War, as we are informed by Procopius. And when we see
a language extending itself from the Atlantic coast almost to
the Red Sea, we cannot presume it to be that of a foreign co-
lony, whose dominions never extended to that distance.

It is therefore more natural to suppose that the language
of the Berbers is that of the ancient inhabitants of the coun-
try between the sea and the desert, who have been driven
back by successive conquerors into the mountains. Moun-
tainous countries are known to be the repositories of ancient
languages, of which a stronger example cannot be given than
that of the Basque, which has existed for so many centuries
in the Pyrenees and their vicinity. When we consider the
peculiar structure of that language, we cannot entertain a
doubt of its antiquity, and it may be reasonably presumed
that it was once spoken in various dialects throughout the
western part of Europe. The late investigations of the Ba-
ron William von Humboldt* have gone far towards proving
this supposition ; but more and still stronger proofs of it are
yet to be and no doubt will be obtained. The examination
of the numerous traces of it which Larramendif has found in
the ancient and modern languages of western Europe re-
quires to be farther pursued.

But to return to the Berber. Mr. Marsden thinks that he

* Piiifung der Unteisuchungen ubcr die Urbewohner Hispaniens, vermittelst
der Vaskischen Sprachc.
t See the Introduction to his Dicdonario trilingue. St. Sebastian, 1745.

OF THE UEKBBUS. 44,3

has perceived in it, independent of the Arabic words that it
contains, some strong aftinity to the oriental languages which
the German philologists call S/iemitic, and hence he con-
eludes it to be the ancient Carthaginian. But Mr. Marsden
does not tell us in what that alUnity consists, and has exhibited
no specimens to satisfy us on this point. Of the grammati-
cal forms of this idiom we know too little, to be able to form
a satisfactory comi)arison. We must wait until Mr. Shaler
shall have pursued his inquiries fortiier on this interesting
subject. His present communication offers but few speci-
mens of grammatical forms. There is one, however, wiiich
appears to deserve particular attention, as it bears a strong
affinity to those curious discriminating forms whicli prevail
in the languages of our American Indians. It seems that
Tamtolz in the Showiah is the word commonly used to sig-
nify " a woman," but if the speaker is addressing several
women being in the same place, he makes use of the word
Khuleth. A form analogous to tliis exists in the language of
the Cherokees, in which the dual number of the verbs varies
its inflections, according as those to ur of whotu one is speak-
ing are present or absent. My learned friend Mr. Pickering
has now in the press a grammarof this language; I shall not
tl)ereforc anticipate upon the interesting information we may
expect to derive from it.

If Mr. Shaler's communication contained but this simple
fact, he might be said to have made a valuable add tion to
the Philological Science. IJut his vocabularies are impor-
tant, inasmuch as they confirm the opinion before entertain-
ed, that tiiree at least of the Bcrl)er idioms, the Sliillia, Sho-
wiah, and Siwah, are dialects of the same general language.
The Sliiiha and Siwali had been compared by Mr. Marsden,
and the vocal)ularies that wc possessed of the Sliowiah,
though not very extensive, showed a strong similarity between
it and the two others. Mr. Shaler has carried the pioof far-
ther as will appear from the following words, found only in
his vocal>ularies, and which bear an inconlestal)le affinity u^

444 ON THE liANGUAGE

the same words in the Siwah, as given us from Hornemann by
Mr. Marsden :

Showiali of Shaler.

Siwah of Hornemann & J

Beard,

Tamert,

Itmert.

Bread,

Agrom, Agarom,

Tagora.

Dates,

Theganee,

Tena.

House,

Ackham,

Achben.

Sheep,

Ouly,

Jelibb.

Thus we have accumulated proofs that three nations re-
siding at opposite ends of the peninsula of Africa speak dia-
lects of the same language, radically ditterent from those
which surround them, and peculiarities have begun to be ob-
served in its grammatical forms, which lead to the conclusion
that this must be an original idiom, whicli once extended
over a much larger surface of country. That the Tuarycks,
who reside between these nations, speak a similar dialect,
we are informed by Mr. Hornemann, who no doubt had it
from good authority? but we have not yet the means of in-
stituting an actual comparison. Of the Tibbo we know no-
thing, but that this people exists, and that it differs in colour
and features from the other Berbers, and therefore probably
in language. It is to be hoped that intelligent travellers will
add to the stock of our information respecting them. I ex-
pect much from Mr. Shaler's inquiries and exertions, parti-
cularly if this Society should feel an interest in his re-
searches.

In order to make Mr. Shaler's vocabularies more useful,
I have arranged them in alphabetical order in a tabular form,
and have added in a separate column the vocabulary of the
same language (the Showiah) by Dr. Shaw. What farther
information I have received from Mr. Shaler, not contained
in his letters, I have subjoined in the form of notes, and from
a wish to make this communication as complete as possible
on the subject of which it treats, I liave translated from the
Mitbridates Professor Vater's account of the grammatical

OF THE BERBERS. 445

forms of the Beibor, with the Lord's Prayer, in the Shilha
dialect, from Jezrit-l Jones' Dissertatio;,* upon lliat lati2;iiaKe,
which is also found in tiie .Miihridates, and have inserted
them at the cod of the communication.

I am, with great respect and esteem,

Dear Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Peter S. Du Ponceau.

II.

Extract of Letters from William Shaler, Esq. Consul of the
United States at Jilgiers, to Peter S. Du Ponceau.

21st January, 1823.

On making inquiry concerning the Biscaries, of whom you
wished to obtain some precise information. I find that they do
not possess an original language, t)ut use a dialect of ihe Ara-
bic. 1 have made some progress in obtaining a vocal)ulary
of the language of the Kabjiles, (so named from an Arabic
word which signifies a " tribe," and is therefore a[)plical)le
in tliat sense to every separate horde in Africa,) and it is my
intention to extend it as far as 1 can. By an occasion for
Marseilles, [ will transmit to you the result of my itiqiiiiios on
this subject. In the words which I have collected, I dis-
cover several which are evidently Arabic, such as father,

• Jezr. Jones — Disaerlatio de Linfrtia Shilhensi, in the work entitled, Dit-
serlalinnen er occasione Syllo!;es Oralionum fhnni licariim Scriplir ad Jolian.
Chamberlaynium. Ainstel. 1745. This book, it is believed, is notiii this coun-
try.

VOL. II. 3 M

446 ON THE LANGUAGE

mother^ son, daughter; and Adrar, mountain, that corre-
sponds exactly with the Siwah and Shilha of Hornemann
and Maisden. I have two other words of the short list of
the latter, viz, sun, Jetig, and cow, Tesley, which are entire-
ly different. In Jitig the / has the sound of the Spanish Jo-
ta. Respecting tlie Biscaries, as they have no language to
investigate, I can only repeat what I have heretofore said,
that their appearance and manners are purely African, while
the Kabyles resemble in both the peasantry of the north of
Europe.

i5th Februarij. \ herewith have the pleasure of transmit-
ting to you a beginning of a vocal)ulary of tlie language of
the Kabyles of this kingdom. I have had the good fortune
to interest in this pursuit a Swedish gentleman attached to
the consulate of his nation here, who is a man of considera-
ble regular instruction and possesses some knowledge of the
Arabic. His translations are given by him in English, and
in addition to the lists of words, he has given me many valu-
able explanations. My other co-adjutor is an intelligent He-
brew, well acquainted with the Arabic, but with whom 1 com-
municate in French. I trust that in future I shall be able to
explain the discrepancies which are found between the two
lists. I have already an impression that they arise in a mea-
sure from the abundance of the language. At present I send
them as 1 received them, not daring to trust myself with
making any correction in either ; for the sounds are probably
recorded as they struck the ear respectively : it is also pro-
bable that our alphabet is unequal to rendering tlie exact pro-
nunciation of this language. You will remark, however, that
they are both sufficiently distinct to prove i^s identity with
the vocabularies of Hornemann and Marsden. Then it ap-
pears to me establisiied beyond a doubt, that this language is
spoken by the inhabitants of the mountains of Morocco,
(Shillah of Marsden,) at the Oasis of Jupiter Amnion, (Shvah
of Hornemann,) and by the Tnnrychs, who are represented
by Hornemann as a great and powerful people, extending to
the neighbourhood of Tombuctoo. Captain Lyon speaks of

Of TUB UKHULHS. -h-iy

them ill the same iiianiier, and adds that they are proud ot" tl»e
antiquity of their laiiL;uau;c, whieli, they say, was spoken in
preleicnce to any otlicr hy jSibuh. Thus this language is
s|)oken in several vast regions of Africa, by nations who ex-
hil)it traits of original character and resenjhlance with each
other both |)hysical anil nioial, as 1 shall presently notice.
Shaw remarks that the language of the mountaim-ers of Mo-
rocco is termed Shidah, and that of this country Shoiviah,
of the derivation of which terms, he says, they arc ignorant ;
but as these languages are essentially the same, they may be
denominated tribes of a common origin. I cannot refrain
here fiom lamenting that so accomplished a scholai as Dr.
Sliaw, who resided twelve years in this C)untry, should have
devoted so little of his time to philological lesearcii. For
ought I can discover, the Teutonic origin of the Kabyles
nuist be aliandoncd as indefensil)le ; but being on the spot, I
will venture to iiazard a few observations, which, if they
should prove to be Ibundcd, would tend to reniove the an-
tiquity of their origin into the night of time, and perhaps dis-
cover this language to i)c that wliich you are in searcli of.
The Kubyles of north Africa are a white people, tliey inva-
rialjly inhabit the mountains where they maintain their in-
dependence, and probably have never been completely sub-
jected by any of the conqueiors who have at dilTorent pe-
riods overrun this country. Each mountain usually loiin.s
an independent state, an(i they are often engaged in petty
wars with each other, which are fomented by the Turks, who
thereby sometimes succeed in extorting from them a preca-
rious tribute; i)ut since the daysof Barbarossa, allhough some
may have been exterminated, none have been entirely sub-
jected to Turkish domination. Although the Kabyles are a
very ingenious people, with the most tradalile and social
dispositions, they have not the commercial propensities of
the Moors and Arabs, Independence appears to be the
greatest object of their existence, as with it they chcerhilly
endure poverty in the most rigorous climates. Such, at least,

448 ON THE LANGUAGE

is their actual political condition, and witli sucli unequivocal
marks of primitive originality of character, I tiiiiik they may
be regarded as a safe depositary of a language. From va-
rious causes, they may have thrown oft' their surplus popu-
lation amongst their neighbours, and even sent out colonies
in a country that does not appear to have ever been proper-
ly settled, yet under sucli circumstances, having no distinct
religion of their own, they migiit easily enough accept that
of their neiglibours, where nothing was hazarded by it: at
this day the Kabyles are regarded as very barbarians, both in
the theory and piactice of Islamism ; there is a foundation in
Algiers expressly for their instruction, which they receive
gratis. From what is related of the Tuarycks by Horne-
mann and Lyon, they are also a white people, very nume-
rous, brave, warlike, and of an independence of manners and
deportment that displays a remarkable contrast with tlie ser-
vility in practice at the court of Fpz7.an. They inhabit vast
regions intersected by desert, have little knowledge of Islam-
ism beyond its forms, and in several districts they are pagans.
It is not therefore a great stretch of credidity to believe that
the Tuarycks are also an original unconquered people, and
the depositaries of an ancient language, which being identi-
tified with that of the Kaliyles, leads to the conclusion that it
is one of the ancient languages of the world, which has ^^ith-
stood the conquests of the Phenicians, of the Romans, of the
Van vials, and of the Arabs. As 1 iiave the authority of tlie
learned Shaw for believing that this language is radically dif-
ferent from the Hebrew and the Arabic, 1 think the premises
justify this conclusion, though it would certainly be more in-
teresting to discover the language of Sanchoniaton than the
Numidian. Tfiis question, however, must be left to the
decision of the learned, when its vocat)ulary is made more
complete, and a greater insight is obtained into its gramma-
tical forms.

N. B. — Accident, to which we owe almost every thing in
this bari)arous land, has lately discovered that there is a pe-
riodical caravan from Oran to Tombuctoo, under the auspices

OP THE BERBERS. 449

of a Sheik in the npia;hhourhood of Saliara, who is indepen-
dent of this government. This personau;e is expected to vi-
si' Oran this ensuing spiiii";, and through my Jewish friend,
I have taken measures to ohtain all the information that can
be procured relative to this interesting fact, which may lead
to the most imjwrtant discoveries. I really wish that our
government would determine to educate a youtii here,
througli whom, when well instructed, and under al)le direc-
tion, we might take our share in the honourable task of un-
rolling the records of time. He miglit, througli such re-
commendations as the government might command, learn
the rudiments of the Hebrew and Arabic in the Oriental
School of Paris, and then come here and acquire a perfect
familiarity with the dialects of this country. With such an
instrument, if he should happen to be of the right stuff, there
can be no conjecture as to what could he olMained.

noth April. I herewith transmit a continuation of the lists
of words of the Kaliylc language by the same persons. On
examining in the works of Chernin and of .^/i Fiefj, their vo-
cabularii's of the languages spoken by the inhabitants of
Mount Atlas, to which they give the dcnominatioti of lirebe^
I liiid that theie can be no d()ul)t of their identity with this,
1 shall, therefore, in future, consider this fact as established.
If the same idmtity with the Sirrahf/n and the Tunnick were
as well proved, the cotK-lusion would be iriesistible Miat this
is one of the diah'cts of ancient Libya. You will of course
remark the discrepancies between the two lists, and of both,
in many instances, wi!h the vocabulary of Shaw. Whether
this arises fi om the ignorance of the persons qiiestiotied. who
are common jieasants, from there being seveial dialects oi"
the same latiguage, or from its own abundance, I cannot yet
deteitnine : for instance, the different words expressing .N??,
which may possibly express different degrees of ne«iation.
I will endeavour to obtain all the information that is possible
upon tliis subject.

There is a people inlial)iling the Sahara. «nuth of the roim-
try of the Ijiscurics. known by the name ol the Mozabis, who

450 ON THE LANGUAGE

have a commercial compact with this government, and
main'ain an Afni?i or residtnt heie to take care of their inte-
rests. I am assured that these people speak a language to-
tally different from any other in use here. Their trade with
Algiers consists in dates, slaves, gohh ostrich featiiers, ^c. I
am not so credulous as to believe without good authority for
it, that they speak an original language; for 1 am informed
they inhabit an Oasis in the desert, only three days journey
from its northern border ; a position where it appears to me
they never could have maintained the independence necessa-
ry for the preservation of a language. 1 have taken mea-
sures, however, to obtain the best possible information on
this sulyect.

5th May. I have just received some notions respecting
the Mozabis, which 1 avail myself of an opportunity for Gib-
raltar via Oran, to communicate. My information is derived
from a Jew wfio has commercial relations with these peo-
ple. I gave him a list of words, and he brougiit me their in-
terpretation, which F wrote down, as he spoke the words, as
nearly as I could express the sounds with our English alpha-
bet. 'I'his language, as you will remark, has an evident affi-
nity wifh the Shillah, the Showiah, and the Siwahan, and is
probably the Tuaryck. I wish I might be permitted to de-
nominate the main stock the " Libyan." They are all cer-
tainly kindred dialects, but at present 1 dare not hazard any
further speculation upon the subject. My Jew informs me
that " Mozabees" is the Arabic translation of the Hebrew term
" Beni Moab," or Children of Moab. They inhabit the de-
sert, forty days journey from Algiers, the precise direction
he could not inform me of They dwell in live large towns,
districts, 1 presume, as the same word in these languages is
used to signify a town or a district of country. They say
that they profess the Mohammedan faith, only from policy
when here. Their own religion, which they say is not Is-
lan)ism, they term the fifth of the world. They do not fre-
quent the mosques in Algiers ; they have a place of worship
of their own in a mill. They say their forms of prayer are

OF THE BERBERS. 451

different from those of the Moslems. When tliey address
the Divinity, they strip as naked as decency permits, and
stand erect with one hand behind the hack. They are a
white people, very intelligent and keen in trade ; they are
very industrious, and are undertakers of all the baths and
ndlls in Algiers. They are very clannish, they mutually as-
sist each other, and invioial)ly keep each other's secrets.
They never appeal to the Algerine tribunals for justice: all
disagreements among themselves are amicably settled, or by
their Amin.

0|)portunilies are so rare from here. Sir, that I determined
to send you these notes just as I received fhem. I have ta-
ken measures to obtain furtlier and more exact information
respeciing tliis interesting people, which I will not fail to
communicate as occasions occur. My Jew assures me that
not one of the enclosed list of words has any affinity with
the Arabic. By the first convenient occasion I shall send
you corrected duplicates of all I have before written upon
this subject.

P. S. — On applying to major Rennell's map, I find that
they have been measurably correct in stating the distance
of the country of the Mozabees from Algiers, and that they
must be the identical Tuarycks. A wealthy nierchant of
this nation is to visit mc in a few days, when 1 hope I shall
be al)le to ascertain this fact, and possibly, in consequence, to
solve a philological prol)Iem of the utmost importance.

10/// October. From a T/ialcb of the nation of the linri
Movinh or Mozabis., 1 have learned that these |)eople inhabit
a district of the desert, stirroimded l)y high, rugijed, barren
mountains, twenty days journey of a caravan south of Al-
giers ; that the nation is formed of live towns or districts, viz.
Gardica, Birigan, Warsala, Enijensa, and Xadrama. rach of
which is governed i)y a council of nota'tlcs, elcct'Ml l)y the
people. 'I'heirs is a barren countrv. producing little clst^ of
value than dates, 'fhey have no intercourse with the inte-
rior of Africa, but through C.adamis afid Tafilet. Fn thoir
mountains there arc mines of gold. 'I'hey profess Islamism.

452 ON THE liANGUAGE

but the Arabic language is unknown amongst them, except
by those who travel abroad. He appeared to be well ac-
quainted with the Tuarycks, who, he said, were a formida-
ble naion of robbers, inhabiting the desart, and speaking the
same languaij:;e as his nation. I showed him the coloured
prints of the Tuarycks in Lyon's travels, which he named
immediately, examined them attentively, and said they were
a most perfect resemblance of that terrible people. I find
the names of the districts composing this nation laid down in
major Rennell's map between the thirty-first and thirty-third
degrees of north latitude, which makes the distance shorter
fiom here than that given me by my Thaleb. unless a day's
journey of a caravan be only fifteen miles, and boih are lial)le
to error. I found this tnan reserved, and disposed to equi-
vocate in his answers to my questions, as they all are, excs^pt
the Kabyles, from some vague fear of committing themselves,
and particularly with a consul. My dragoman came in dur-
ing this interview, which completely disconcerted the Tha-
leb. I tried to verify with him the list of words which I had
collected ; he contradicted several of them, and gave me the
Arabic terms in their stead ! I have never been able to see
again the Jew who first assisted me in forming a list of the
words of this language, and who may probably entertain the
same foolish apprehensions.

I am, ^c.

William Shale r^

OF TOE BEBBBR8.

453

HI.

Vocabularies Of the Language of the Kahyles.

Apples
Arm

The Fore-arm

The Upper-arm

Arms (weapons)

Array

Arrow

To Ascend

Ass

By a Jrwldi
Inlrrprrier.

tefah

afflus, plur. ef-
fasscn

slahy
mheila
aiiH'zrig
anallj

aghiul.aKioul,
Jem. tagioult

Bt % Swpilith
CicnilrmaD.

irril, phir. i-

gVallnik
irilik

tigeltzint
gassin, gasia

agajeeul

Or Nhiw

Bad

Balloon

Barlej

Battle

Bath

T.) Be

Bean

Beard

Bird

Blood

Body

Boy

Litile Boy

Bread

Breast

Brother

Bull

Butter
Butter-milk

B

efah

asenik

defoual

tiemzin

eeming'ry

themzce

anessan

akiy

tamert

ibbaun

plur. yibowne

agtit

(egctit
idieraen

trissa

jitta

akschisch

ackshcesh

tivourt lemsicn

agrom
chaboffi

agarom

agroume

eguia imy)

a7.giiir, plur. ez-

garem

aoi alkak

ilfilinn

swaagy

Camel

elgom./j/ur.ei-
ogman

eeltegamd

V0I„ II.— 3 N

454

ON THE LANGUAGE

By a Jewish

By a Swedish

By

Iiiteipreter.

Gt'nllt'man.

Dr. Shaw

Cat

einshis,/ewi. tera-
shist

Cattle, flock of.

egenmy

plur. acktar

Cheese

abagsy

ageese

City, town

elmelki

mourt

arsh

Cloak

abidy

Coal

tirgith, plur. tir-
gin

Cock

ejaset,/em. te-
jaset

Corn

ynden

timesin

earden (wheat)

Country

mourt

Cow

tesley

teft'unest
D

Dates

etmet

theganee

Daughter

elli

illi

Day

ess, essa

ouess, wess

Death

elmaut

To Descend

ansoub

To Dismount

erse

To Do

anih'dem

Dog

ackashium

Door

tivourt

A little Door

tivourt semsien

To Drink

anesson

atsoue

E

Earth

elkaa

The Earth (world)
To Eat anousch

Enemy plur. ehaseaniou

Eye emizoquin, plur.

atten
Ewe (brebis) tigsy

eekel

dunit

isetsch

adou

tet plur. etten

tiksy

elkaa, tamout
(The)

aitch

Face

akaeeoum

woodmiss

Father

baba

baba

Feet (The)

thareet

Fever

toula

thaulah

Field

caha

zahal

Figs

tazart, plur.
zart

, ete-

tib zinzin,
khazizin

tib

Fine, handsome

adjemi

OF THE BERBERS.

455

Flesh
A Fool

Foreign coontry
Forest
Fountain
Friend

By I Ji^wish
• Interprtler.

aksautn (meat)
einabout (a mad-
man)

emadatamazerit

denser

;)/ur. amiteakliou

Br • Swrdnh
GentWmaa,

mourtibadin

aou

Bv

Dr. Shim

ak^oume
abcloule

thaw-went

Garden

Girl

A little Girl

To Give
Goat
Good
Grapes

Grass
Great

adakfka
Jem. tagat
eilaij
tezarin
tuga
amekran

tackscliist
tacksliist taem-
sient

tagat

tisurin
tuga

taksheesii

ouse

illaaleh
thezaureen

amoukran (a
great man, a
mastery

Hand

H

elcouflTa.p/j/r. el- ;)/«r, effus
couftution

To Hate

kraaht

T? Have

gnrv

Head

akirouj

akaroy

fousc

Heart

oule

Heaven

tigcnoute

Hell

ouzal

Here

akyth

Hill

timmcry

Hillock

tissaunt

Honey

tament

tliament

Horn

isch

Horse

hadin, phir,
dioum

ca- audin

aowde, yeese

House

akam

ackham,

Eckaiian

akham

Jackall

I
oushin

Ice

egris

ffig'ris

Iron

ou7.ail

It (^someth

ing)

ikra

456

ON THE LANGUAGE

By a Jt wish

By a Swedish

By

L

Interpreter.

Gentieroan. *

Dr. Sbaw,

Lamb

isimur

Land

serinel

thamurt

Lance

segerget

Leg

rin

atar (legs, feet)

Lentils

laeeds

Life

eder

Light

temesebat

A little

amerxan, choui-

thamzeen

To Love

M

Man

ergas, argaz.

ergas

ergez, arghaz.

plur. argazen

plur. ergassen

Young Man

serges semfien

Mare

tamguut

tegmert, alow-
dah

Market

zuk

Market town

mourzuk.mourt-
zuk

Meat

aksounv

el meekela

Milk

aifky

aukfee, ikfee

Money

edremen

Month

agour

Moon

ayur

eijur

tizeer, youle

Mother

imina

iinina

To Mount

einah

Mountain

adrar, plur. idu-

sederer

athraiz, plur. i-

rar

thourair

Mouth

akimousch

sekemousch

eraee

Much

bouan

Mud

acal

seberet

Mule

eserdun,/em. ti-
serdunt

N

Neck

ezkeba, aqaleb

Night

eta

thigata

No

ella, elda, tesea,

aela.assun

Nose

tinfert, j5/j<)-. en-
fern

0

Oil

ezit

zUt, zeit

Old

amgar

amegat

OF THE BERBERS.

457

Br a Ji'witb

Bv a Sweditti

Or

Inttrpreur.

Cjr iilt'fnan.

Dr. ijhaw.

~"^

•^_

Olives

tazunry

esemor

Olive tree

tazcmourt

Oranges

china

Ox

eyng

sejous, sejug
P

Partridge

teskourt

Peace

nifra

atia

Pen, quill

eft'eru jascte

People

gashi (un peu-

pie)
lauta

medden (nation)

ewdaa

Plain (subst.)

lota

Prince, chief

eghelid

tenressuat
R

Rain

leona

Ifehuva

River

•

igasar
S

yegazar,;)/ur.j
gazran

Sand

ermel

Sea

bhar

bahar

To See

akel

Sheep

ikcri plur. ike-
rein

ouly

Sickness

yoden

Sister

ouMma Tmy)
kini, khim

To Sit down

Sky

asiggcna

Slave

akly

To Sleep

igen

Shake

azum

o

azrimme

Snow

adfil

edfcll

altill

SnufT

shinima

Something

ksa

Son

To Stand

einmi

jemmi

bidfillah

Star

jetri,;)/Mr.jetran p/wr. ithri

yethra

Stomach

abbot

Stone
Street

equnhy

Kblat, oblat
asenik

azgrcw

Sun

jetig

telTuckt

taphoute, kyiah

Sword, sabre,

agenouy

escheniiy

knife

T

Table

relubra

To Take away

elef

owee

Tent

elkba

khabba

Thigh

euiiat

458

ON THE LANGUAGE

Tobacco (smok-
ing)
To-day
To-morrow
Tootli
Tree

By a Jewish
Interpreter.

essa
azequa

sigra

By a Swedish
Gentleman.

dockhan
uessa, wessa

By

Dr. Shaw.

assa
arica

■phir. ouglan
tabia

Valley

Water

War

Week

Wind

Woman

Wood

World

aman

amengui

gemha

tamitut
sgarin

denia

sesenick
W

dsemong'ry

ato

tamtolz, khaleth thamatouth
sesg'raura (fire-
wood)

Year
Young

assugas
amzian

jemissien

aseegass

NUMERALS

One
Two

yeoun
sin

luon
sin

The remainder as in Arabic.

I or me

Thou

He

It

We

You

They

Mine

Thine

My hand

Tliy hand

His hand

Your hands

neky
goug
neta

nekny

kanouy

nutny

enou

inek

afus

afusis

afusorien

ifasen

PRONOUNS

nickhy

ince

ewan
seen

neck

ketchc

netta

ikra

nekenee

hownouwee

nuinee

eni>u

caniss

OP THE BERBERS.

439

Their hands
My horse

Bv » Jewish
Iiilerpreler.

ifasen ensen

By 1 Swedish
GeoiU-maD.

auain ince

Br

Dr. Shaw.

VERBS

I love

Thou lovest
He loves
"XVe love
You love
They love
I speak
Thou speakest
I spoke
Thou spokest
Eat 1 (iniper.)
Drink I (iinper.)
Rise ! (imper.)

neky thebit
ki'cheny thebit
kecliy thebit
nekny thebit
kaiiouy ihebit
nuttiv thebit

neck sewel

ketche sewel

neck aeulgas

ketche seulgas

itch

iswa

iker.

PHRASES.

By a Swedish Gentleman.

Good morning,
Go>>d evening,
Have you heard ?
Sit down, (imperat.)
Come hither,
Give paper to write on,
■\Vhich is the way to the English gar-
den ?
Go, bring my horse.
Go to your country.

Esbahala h.iireli.

Unisele liaireh.

Eselit?

Kim kii shini.

J IV garda.

Aunia el caret ektylen.

Ensi cbbrid hat el gennan Inglisi

Rouha ouiee audin inu.
Rouh hat mourtik.

£y Dr. Shaw.

Manee ilia ?
Oushcc eide.
Oushedowra.

Ifkee, or Ifgee, is another word for Give me : as,

Ifkee ikra adetshag nerk alouMgh.
Ifkuf ikra wainaui adeswaag ncc fou-
dagah.

"Where is it?
Give me that,
1 give it.

Give me to eat, for I am hungry.
Give ine water to drink, for 1 um thirsty,

460 ON THE LANGUAGE

I am not thirsty. Neck urfedaag ikra.

How many years have you been here ? Kadesh assegassen themeurtaye a-

kyth ?
A good man fears nothing, Ergez illalee oury tagadt ikra.

A bad man is afraid, Ergez defoual tagedt.

IV.

Kutes on the foregoing Vocabularies. — From Mr. Skater's

Comnmnicutions.

The modes of spelling adopted by tlie Swedish Gentleman
and Jewish Interpreter who compiled these Vocabularies are
to be attended to. The latter seems to have had in view
the French pronunciation of letters, the former that of his
own language or the German. Therefore the letter j, when
it occurs in his vocabulary, is to be pronounced as our y
before a vowel, and the ii like the u of the French language.
Tlie sound wliici) he expresses by the diplitliong re, he states
to be a middle sound between the French a and e, resem-
bling the e apertum, in the French words bete, tete, and our
diphthong ai in hair, fair. The th in his vocabulary is to
be pronounced as the English th in the. Ti.is combination
of letters does not appear in that of the Jewish Inteipreter.
The guttural sound of the Spanish jota or German ch is ex-
pressed by kh.

In the vocabulary of the Jewish Interpreter, the Kal)vle
words are explained in French : in tliut of the Swedish Gen-
tleman, partly in French and partly in English, Init principally
in the latter language. We have here used the English
throughout.

There are in the Berber, as in the Arabic, several sounds
of the letter s, one of them approaching to that of the F.ng-
lish sh. It is expressed in these vocabulaiies l)y sh or ich.

There is a sound in this language peculiar to it, which Mr.

UF THE UERBERS. 4(31

Shaler calls '-a monster in pronunciation;" it is that oltlic
g durum of our iangua2;e, as we pronounce it before tlie let-
ter o in God, i(otien, followed by that of the r forte mail gras-
sci/ee,as the French would express it. 'Vh\s grass('iieme7it is
not known in this couiitiy. though in England it is occasion-
ally met with. It cannot be represented e.\ce|)t to the ear.
In this Berber sound, the g is softly and the r strongly arti-
culatcd. It is represented in these vocabularies hy g'r.

JMr. Shaler has hitheito been al^le to communicate but lit-
tle information respecting the granuuatieal peculiarities and
the forms and construction of this language. The following
is all that his latest communications contain.

The word asenick, which means balloon, signifies also a
street. Voting and little are expressed in the same maimer
by temsien, — a little door, tivoiirt cenisien ; a little (or a young)
girl, tacks/list ta-wsien. The letter t prefixed or alTixed indi-
cates the feminine gender.

The woid moiirt signifies both town and countrij ; mour-
tihaden, a foreign country ; rouh hat mourtik, go to your
country. The word zuk signifies viurkrt, which seems to
give the etymology of the name of the city of J/o//;7;//A:, ca-
pital of the kingdom of Fezzan, inourt town, zuk market, a
market tmvn. But it is said that zuk or zonk signifies also a
market in Arabic ; so that this name may not be entirely and
originally of Berber derivation.

There is a remarkal)le peculiarity in this language. The
word woman, as we see in the vocal)ulary of Mr. Shaler's
Swedish fiiend. is expressed in the Kabyle dialect by tanitolz
audkhaleth; but he observes that the latter word is only em-
ployed when sj)eaking to several women in the same place.
This is analogoirs to the varifuis dual forms which exist in
the vert)S of our American Cherokees, which vaiy in ilx-if
inflections according to the persons to or of wliom one speaks.
'I'his will be explained at large in a grammar of the Chero-
kee language, which our learned countryman Mr. Pick<Ming
of Salem is now preparing for the press, and which may be

YOL, II. — 3 o

46S

ON THE liANGUAGE

expected shortly to appear. We will not anticipate upon the
interesting facts which that work will communicate.

V.

Vocabulary of the Mozabee or Mozabi Dialect.

An Ass

Barley

A Bird

Black

Bread

Butter

A Camel

Country

Dates

Day

An Ewe

A Field

Figs

Grapes

A (she) Goat

The Heavens

(Sky)
A Horse
A Man
A Mare*
Meat
Milk

The Moon
A Mountain
Night
No

Aziun

Temzeyenee

Ageet

Aberkan

Argoum

Tiluzee

Aziun

(See Town)

Tineenee

Duges

Tesfrin

Amezin

Temshem

AdiUee

AUeem

Ageenee

Izee

Erges

Afoonest

Assium

Amelelee

Tezjeree

Amzies

Dgueed

Eyuee

A Slave

Aberkan

A Star
The Sun

Eteyan
Teforeit

Tovvn(orCoun-

Atfran

Tree

Zejereet

Wheat

Arden

White

Ameleleen (co-

lour of milk)

A Woman

Taj in meet

Yes!

E.e!

NUMERALS.

1

Egat

2

Senet

3

Sharot

4
5

Engest
Semset

6

Zet

7

Sat

8

Temmet

9

Tzat

10

Mireott or mireon

20

Senet mireon

30

Sharot mireon

100

Tuin seet.

• JVate by Mr. Shaler. — I think ray friend must have made a mistake, and that a bull or ox is meant
by afoanest, vhicb seems to be according to the geoius of the language ia dislioguishiog male I'rom
female.

OP TirE BERBERS. -^63

VI.

Grammatical Structure of the Berber Language. — Translated
from the Mithridates, Vol. III. Part l, p. 51.

1. Besides the letters of the Arabic alphabet, tlie Berber
languaiie has the sounds of the three Persian Utters. Gam-
ma (Ghiiin) and Thetn arc predotniimni sounds ; words with
kha, dhdd, and dha are not of Berberic origin.

3. The substantives borrowed from the Arabic, after
throwing out the Arabic article, prelix the letter / or nit :
ex. el mukhal is ciianged into temukhalt or temukhalnit ,•
thimdint is derived from medinat, for which tlie lierbers liad
no word ; the letter /, moreover, is expressive of tlie femi-
nine gender : ex. emchich (in Morocco, mouch) a cat, in the
feminine is temchicht, and in Morocco tanioucht; mezzi sm<dl,
fem. tamziitt. To the Arabic adjectives the syllable da is
prefixed, as for qadi/m old, duqndijm.

3. The formation of the plural of' nouns is very dilTicuU
in consequence of tlie many changes of tlie vowels in the
syllables of the words, of transpositions of the consonants,
and many additional terminations, whicli |)erliaps may l)c con-
sidered as the result of the intermixture of other languages.
The inflections or terminations are in^ awen, an, en. i, uen,
ain, er ; ex. einzid a cock, plm-. iouzad ; aidi dos;, plur. idan
(according to Verdure; according to Hnest, tlie singular of
tins word is aid. and idee accordinc; to Jones ,•) erghaz man,
plur. irghazen {Jones) or evges, plur, ern^essen (Shaiu ;) ikhf
or aqaroui head, plur. ikhfawen or iqnharouin (Jin^s ;) or
eaghph. jilur. eaghfan. tlie sinijular according to JJnest \saga-
yo ; edrar mountain, plur. idonrer ; or atlira'n\ [Shaw) plur.
ithournr, (the singular according to Iloest is adarar.)

-l. The cases arc cx|)ressed by prepositions: the genitive
by en., mi, &, ghi. n. eh. vou. eghij ; the dative by /, ghcr,
se, es, ghi ; the ablative by zigh, ghaf and so ; ex. amouqran

464 ON THE LANGUAGE

ghi Ft'lissm, the Seheick of Felissen, (amouqran, fern. ; mou-
grit signifies properly great ;) i ouerghaz, to the man ; s'ak-
ham, at home (a la maison ;) zig/i thesirt, from the mill.

5. Sliaw is the only one who lias given us the personal
pronouns in this language. He has given the pronominal
adjectives or possessive pronouns as separable or indepen-
dent words, which all l)egin with ea or en, to whicii the pro-
nominal is suffixed. But tliese pronominal adjectives are
also suffixed to the substantive, as 7202/ mine, nek or nak thine,
and sen your (plural.) These, when suffixed to the verbs,
exi)ress the accusative or dative of the persons, i me, th
(in tiie Arabic with three points) him. These accusative or
dative pronouns are moreover prefixed to the verb, preced-
ed by the syllable adh, as adhi to me, adhasen to them. If
the verb is negative, tlie pronominal sound is annexed to it,
and so placed before the verb ; ex. ouagli yrwet, not us man
strikes (we are not struck.) In the second and third per-
sons of the pronouns there are different modes of connect-
ing them with substantives feminine, as in tlie Semitic lan-
guages.

6. The root of the verb is the imperative. In order to
form preterites, gh is added at the end of the first person of
the singular, t at the begiiming of the second, and i at the
beginning of the third in the masculine and t in the feminine
— plural, 71 at tlie beginning of the first person, t at the begin-
ning of llie second, and 7?i at the end in the masculine and
?nt in the feminine, and n at the end of the third person in
the masculine, and nt in the feminine. The present is ex-
pressed by putting ed or e before the preterite. The impe-
rative plural ends in the masculine in et, in the feminine in
imt. According to Shaw, in the countries where he was,
the present is not at all inflected, and in the preterite the
termination ^fls is suffixed: in both cases, however, the per-
sonal pronoun is prefixed.

OP THE BERBERS.

465

Berber Numerals. — From the Mithridates, p. 57.

Shiiha

ShiIha

Shnwiah

Tibbo

accoitJing to

acooi'fling to

according lo

acconliDg to

Jonrs.

Hoeit.

Vcniure.

Hornrmann.

■ 1 —

_.

1

Yean

Jen

Ouan

Trono

2

Seen

Sin

Thenat

3

Crat

Karod

Kcrat

Aguesso
Fousso

4

Koost

Kuz

GoU7.

5

Summost

Semus

Surnmus

Fo

10

Murrow •

Merau

Meraoua

Markhoun.

Note. — As far as these Numerals go, no marked aflfinity appears between
the Berber dialects and the Tibbo. This would seem to support our hypothe-

sis, that the Tibbo are not a part of the Berber nation.

The Lord's Prayer in Berber.-

dates, p.

-From Jones, in the Mithri-
64.

Amazeagh, Lord, noble

na baba, our father

Erby, God

ghi, who

y ginna, in heaven

berkat, hallowed be

ysmanicA-, name thine

yi hackem, thy kingdom

gcegn tusked, be coming

ougus>>ceda, kingdom

beherra, great

isker, happen, be done

omovnick, will tUine

ophodn doonit, as on eartli

wi y gitina, so in heaven

fkee, give

na nogh, to us

oghorom/ia, bread our

oghagossa, daily, for every day

amazeaglma erby, Lord God, Lord

OUT God
t'opphur, release, forgive
dnwb«og-A, sins our, ofi'cnces otir
7.oond, as
smahnogA, release wt

yeadnm, others

clmorhottye<:n, offenders

uphalaortfA, against us

addan, and

woortphilt, not let

en yxshem, go

y allowwr, into temptatioii

adono^A, but us

tiphkeet, preserve

oghodn, from

dnoob, evil

dwynnicA-, for, because thiiu

ega, is

houtkemt, kingdom

ogo.

downit, earth

om'tr, power

rga, is

omorHicA-, power Ihint

fphulAcf/, glory Ihine

glinwii, is

n'tapliookt, above sun and light

abatian, ever

wo abadan, and ever

oghozont. Amen, so be it.

No. XV.

Solution of a General Case of the Simple Pendulum. By
Eugenius JSiilty. — Read s,ist August, 1818.

In a letter which I wrote to Dr. Patterson, and which the
Society tliought worthy of piibhcation. 1 found a new con-
Terging series for determining the times of oscillation of
the simple pendulum in a plane. This has since led me
to consider a more jieneral case of the simple pendulum,
in which the motion is supposed to arise from the action of
gravity and an impulse not directed in a vertical plane, and
to take place in the surface of the sphere of which the radius
is the length of the string connecting the oscillating point
and centre of suspension. As the series which I have found
in solving this problem have not been noticed by the latest
writers on mechanics, I have thought that the following in-
vestigation might not be unworthy the attention of the So-
ciety.

Let X, y, z be the vertical and horizontal distances of the
oscillating point from three rectangular planes X. Y, Z, given
in position with respect to the centre of suspension, d^ the
element of time during which the motion is considered as
uniform, and^ the accelerating force of gravity.

The velocities at the beginning of dt in the directions of x,

y,z&ve _?, J^, -^ ; the forces lost during this element are
HZ or Qv

GENERAL CASE OP THE SIMPLE PENDULUM. 467

therefore ^, -r-=/, — ; and by the principle of virtual ve-

UL \jC Kit/ ^

w •

locities, the sum of these forces, multiplied by the variations
of their directions, is equal to the action of gravity multiplied
by the variation of its direction. We have therefore

d'x _. . d'i/ , d'z / . X

Let the invariable length of the pendulum be denoted by
a, and let the common intersections of tiie three planes X,
y, and Z be in the vertical passing through the centre of
suspension at a distance equal to a below this point. We
shall then have

^l(a—xy+tf+z'}=a,
and of which the variation is

a a a

an expression which the variations in the equation (i) must
satisfy.

Let us therefore multiply tliis expression by an arbitrary
quantity 7' and add the result to the equation (i). Wc
shall then tind

The variations ix, sy, n are independent in tliis ♦equation
by virtue of the arbitrary quantity T, and accordingly we
have

468 GENEBA.I. CASE OF THE

df a ^ '

df a

df fl '

which are easily verified by observing that the first terms
are the components of the inertia of the oscillating point in
the directions of a:, ?/, Z; the second terms, the components
of the tension of the string in the same directions ; and g the
effect of gravity in the vertical direction x.

Multiplying these equations respectively by do:, dz/, d^;,
adding the results, and observing that by virtue of the equa^
tion (3) we have

X-

— da:+^d2/ +— d2;=0,

a a a

we shall get

d'a;, d'«, d'z, ,
d^^'^+dP^Z+^dfe^d^,

of which the integral is

At'

2g{b-x). (3)

Again, multiplying the second and third of the preceding
equations by z and y, and taking the difference of the results,
we shall find

d^w d^z n
Z - — II — =0,

d^^ -^df '
of which the integral is

SIMPLE PENDDLUM. KiM

dt ^ '

The equation (3) expresses the known principle of living
forces, and the equation (4) that of the equable description
of areas.

Let V be the horizontal angle formed by the projection of
a on the plane X, and by the vertical plane Z. Then it is
evident that y=\/{-zax — .T').sin. v and z=>/{'Zax — x').cos. v ;
and their differentials are

dy-—p ^.s\n.vdx+x/(s,ax — r')cos.T'dtJ,

•^ vinax—x") ^ ^

dz= — ^.cos.rd.r — ^(2ax — :i;*)sin.7)dr.

^(200: — X-) ^ ^

Substituting these expressions in the equations (3) and (4),
we shall find after ol)vious reduction,

i^p ^ — ^2s(zax—x-).(b—x),

(2ax — a:')dT;_,,
d^

from the first of which eliminating dv, and from the second
d^, we get

dx C2ff)* r. /-X

_ = ±(^^f. (5)

in which F=x' — (2a + b)x^ + 2af -r — c, and c = — .

These are the equations from which the motion of the pen

VOL. II.— 3 P

470 GENERAIi CASE OP THE

diilum is to be determined. The first will give the time in
a vertical direction, and the second the horizontal angle de-
scribed about the vertical which passes through the centre of
of suspension.

In order to integrate these equations, let us observe that
the oscillating point can neither ascend so high on the sphe-
rical surface as to attain a point of which the vertical ordi-
nate is equal to 3«, nor descend so low as the horizontal,
tangential plane X. The curve described will therefore be
contained between two horizontal circles drawn on the sphe-
rical surface, and it will evidently touch these circles in two
points P and Q, corresponding to the greatest and least va-
lues of the vertical ordinate^. Let these values, or the or-
dinates of P and U be denoted by p and <?, and let us observe

Ax
that tiie vertical velocity -i- decreases as the oscillating point

approaches P and Q, and vanishes at the instant of their co-
incidence. We shall therefore have Fz= 0, both when x = p
and x = q^ and accordingly this equation must be divisible
by each of the factors x — p, x — 9, and consequently by their
product xf — (p + q)x+pq. Let the third factor of i^ be
X — r. Then we shall have

F or x' — (2a + b)x^+ 2abx — c = ^x'' — (p + q)x + pq\ .(x—r),

from which, by comparing like powers of x, we get
2a + b=p+q + r, 2ab =pq + {p + q)r, c = pqr,

and thence

r=2a+ — ^i , c = (2a+ — ^ — )pq.

2a — p — q ^ 2a — p — q^^

The equation F may now be transformed into the product
lx'-^(p + q)x +pq] . {x^(2a + -_^---)],

8IMPLE PENDULUM. 471

which may be written in the form,

={tZ^).(i-.u^)P^,(i^ku), by putting
P±^-.xJ^u, and 2a + —^ l^J!^^,

S 2 ' 2a— p — q S '2k

By virtue of tliis assumption, we have

vF=p=.^.(J^^)\^l ii^tn.ii +ku)i

in which u= — 1 corresponds to x=p, and u=i to x=q.

Substituting this expression in the equation (5), and ob-
serving that dx= — ^IZl{\ii^ we shall find

^ lgip—q)y ^Ui-^^),[i^ku)\, and thence
d^ ak^ ' ^

With respect to the equation (6), we have

= ~^.{i + k'2i).{i—k"u\ by assuming
^tll=k{2a—^^)=k"^^, and accordinglr

473 GENERAL CASE OP THE

and thence

, _. nek J ■iak'k" 6u , .

^"^-^-^^ '{]p^''{i+k'iiUi—k"iiW{{l—u'Ui+ku)Y ^^^

These are the simplest forms in which 6t and dv can be
presented. It is impossible, however, to express their in-
teo^rals in finite terms by means of circular arcs and loga-
rithms ; but series exhibiting their approximate values may
be found in the following manner :

Putting, for the sake of brevity, the constant coefficient

ok
— r = ^} and expanding the factor {i-vkii)—^ by the bi-

g{p—<i) to J J

nomial theorem, we have

- -.yx /» dM c ^I l'3i2 2 4.3,5,3 1 4.3.5.7,, X o -i

in which, if we put the integral of — r- jr=arc(sin.=a;)=^,

d?/
V(l^')'

and the integral of _ ., = — \/{i—x)=M^ we shall have

7/'d7/ J\—Us/Y—oe^ B

f

J VI— m' S.4 ~ 2.4'

J VI— m'~ S.4.6 ^3.4.6'

^C. «JC.

u'Au _ 3JB— az/yi— m" C

U^du 5C— 3.4MV1— W^ -O

/

SIMPLE PENnCLUM. 478

v'l— «' 3 3 '

v'l—u'~' 3.5 ~3.5'

7i\\ii c— 3.3mVi— «' jy

/ 11 (111

3.5.7 3.6.7'

by virtue of which, the integral of the preceding expres-
sion is

la'i ^^ u 7.QC' ,, 9.1 1. 13/)' ,, , .

the diff'^rence between two vahies of wliich corrcspondinG; to
given values h. h' o{ x will give the time taken by the oscilla-
ting point to describe a portion of the curve, corresponding
to the vertical height h — //'.

If we extend the intcgial from X—p to x=q, and conse-
quently from u= — 1 to ?/=!, we shall have the time (t) which
the oscillating point requires to descend from the hit;;hest
point P on ihc s[)herical surface to the lowest point Q. and
vice versa. In this case, the integral .] becomes siiii|)ly

-, (tt being [)ut for the semicircumfercnce of a circle to radius

= 1,) the integrals B, C, D, ts:c. l)ecome respeeiivrly .7. 3.?,
D-Z.nA, ^c. and the integrals A,B, C',IJ, i^c. all vanish.
We shall therefore have

TOL. II. 3 Q

474 GENERAIi CASE OF THE

,, ,^, e 1.3, „ 1.3.5.7,4 1.3.5.7.9.11,6 - >

=^*-fl + ^^'+.a,^/c'+^3-^^^ + , ^c.^, (9)

jSj, ^3, representing the second, third, ^c. terms.

Let us resume the differential equation (7) and put s =

1 11^

— — . From this we get
i+ku

putting for the moment 5^ = 4 — 4s + ks\ and thence
^{{i—u').(ii+ku)} = si{i+ku) = ^{s{i—^± -5f5)^,and

dM= — ;^5l \- —Si ?. Substituting these expressions,

we shall have

—6s

dt=Ki .

vfs(4— 4s+fcV)|'

Let s — ms and 2 — ns be the factors of the quadratic
4— 4s+)tY in this expression. We shall then have m+n=2,
m7i=k-, and thence /«= 1+^(1—*^'), 7i=i—<,/{i—k^). The
preceding expression may now be written

v^«(3— ms).(3 — ns)^

which will take the form of the original equation (7) by as-

suming s= ; since then — ds= — , ^/^ s(2—ms).{2—ns)l=:

° m m '• ^

SIMPLE PENDUI.UM. 4^5

=jiri. We have therefore

K/viii-u").{i+k,in^'

an expression which integrated between the hmits «'=i and
«'= — 1 as before, gives

a series exactly similar to that above found, and derivable
from it by introducing the factor K,, and changing k to k^.

It is evident that a third series may be derived from this
by introducing a new factor Jr=v'^l+3v'(l— A"i)|,and chang-

j • i f ^+\/(t — k,') , , ...

mg ki into kj = — — -^- r— - ; and that a simuar process may

l+3v^(l A"' 'J

be continued ad intiniium. We shall therefore have

or rejecting the second, third, ^c. terms of the series in the
brackets as indefinitely small,

^'^-^'< K,.K,.K. . . . k}- (""

This 13 an elegant expression for the determination of (t).

476 OENEnAL CASE OP THE

It has not been hitherto noticed, at least to my knowledge,
and is the object I had in view in the present paper.

It may be proper to observe that the equation (10) may be
easily modified so as to apply to the case in which the vibra-
ting point moves in a vertical plane. We have merely to put
5'=0 in the expressions represented by E and k. since then
the constant arbitrary quantity b' expressing the effect of the
impulse from wliich the conical motion arises will vanish,
and the vibrating point will descend to the horizontal plane
X. The values of K and k will become, in this case,

and -— i- — , and the corresponding value

of {t) will be exactly of the same form as that just consider-
ed. If we limit the expression to the factor K, we shall
have a paiticular case of the first expression found for (/),
the same as that already given for the common pendulum.

With respect to the equation (lO), I shall only observe
that its integral may be found in a seiies bv means of the
integrals A, B, C, ^c. Ji', B', C\ ^c. after the factors
(l +ku), (i + k'u, (l — k"u), are expanded by the binomial
theorem. By using peculiar artifices, other series may also
be found ; but their coefficients are so complicated, as to de-
ter me from inserting their invesiigatiou.

I shall conclude this paper by a computation of the value
of (t) for a particular value of k. This will give an idea of
the rapidity with which the quantities k,. k^, ^c. decrease, and
at the same time show the great superiority of the formula
(lO) over the series (9).

The extreme value of which k is susceptible being unity,

let us suppose this quantity greater than its mean value ,

or= — . Then we have k = — , k. = , a fraction of

which the square and higher powers may be safely neglect-

SIMPLE PENDULUM. 477

ed. We shall therefore have A' = — , K = ^^'^^'^^^

5' ' 17 '
vCA'j.A'j) = 3.685433, and accordingly

a result which is true to the last figure.

3

Again, substituting — instead of k in the series (9), we
shall get

(t) = E^\ 1.00000000 \

6750000

1338906

33890-i

90193

26318

7914

2453

775

248

81

26

8

= K^ { 1.08535735 |,

in which the last two figures are incorrect, although the di-
visions have been extended to tlie ninth decimal place.

No. XVI.

JsTofice of a Kew Crystalline Form of the Yenite of Rhode Is-
land. By Dr. G. 1 roost. — Read, i5th October, 1824.

1 PUBLISHED in the Journal of the Academy of Natural
Scier.ces of this city the discovery of the Yenite, found for
the fiist time on this side of the Atlantic. The specimens
of that mineral which fell under my examination presented
only the quadriduodeci7nal and some crystals approaching to
the trioctorial and monostique of Hauy. Dr. Mease, one of
our memi)ers, lately presented through me a specimen of
the Scime mineral to the cabinet of our Society, which con-
tained some crystals deviating considerably from the forms
mentioned ; but they were so small as to prevent me from
ascertaining the value of the angles, and I was therefore not
alile to determine their true form. Having since received
some specimens through the politeness of Dr. Samuel Ro-
binson of Providence, R. I., I found them of the same form,
and of a size sufficiently large to enable me to measure the
inclination and to determine the form. The crystal in ques-
tion is a straight rhomI)oidal prism, the angles being 83° 58'
and 96° 2', and the sides forming with the base an angle of
90°. I call it

Prismatic Yenite. (Fer calcareo-siliceux prismaiique.)

ON THE \ENITE OF RHODE ISLAND. 479

If we adopt the primitive fonu oljtaincd l)v meclianical
division by Hauy, which is a icctang;iilar octaedron, we shall

have for representative signs 4 F 4 B ; and adopting the hy-

1
s r

pothetical nucleus of Cordier, which is a straight rhoinboi-
dal prism, its representative signs would be 4G4 V.

s P

The specimen now in the collection of the Society is coni-
posed of a few of the above described crystals placed in an
horizontal position, with crystals of greasy quartz, on gra-
nular quartz, containing some minute octacdrons of magnetic
iron ore which make it act upon ihc nragnetic needle.

I found some moditications of the same form on the spe-
cimens which 1 received from Dr. Rol)inson. Some of the
prisms are joined side by side, so as to form an even plane
which might be taken for an extensive tabular crystal ; but
when examined by a magnifying glass, we perceive the joints
by which these different prisms are united. Some of these
tables are terminated by a plane under an angle of 90^, and
must therefore be composed of the prisms above described.
Others are terminated by an angle of between l-l-j^and ioO^
which I have not been al)le to ascertain owing to the position ;
so that it is probal)le that at this locality some other forms
may l)e discovered.

The Yenitc is generally of a black colour ; as is the case
with the European mineral. But that of Rhodi- Island oilers
also a greyisli wliitc, intermixed with yellow and passi.ig
from that through the various shades of rul)iginous yellow
and blown to |)erfect black. However these coIoim's arc
rare. I have but one specimen in my collection, and it is
the only one that I have seen.

It occuis likewise in Ihc quartz already mentioned ; and in
limestone of a peach blossom led colour, |)rol)a'>lv coloin'cd
by manganese and some green fibrous sul)3faiice which
seems to be the acicular actinolite and limestone, which has

480 ON THE YENITE OP RHODE ISLAND.

assumed a fibrous appearance, — and it is only by a magnify-
ing iriass that we discover that the fibres of the Yenite are
formed by a combination of minute crystals of that mineral.

As to the geoenostic situation of this mineral, nothing can
with certainty be said. It is found on the farm of a Mr.
Brown in Cumberland township, fifteen miles north of Pro-
vidence, Rhode Island, where it occurs, according to Dr.
Robinson, among heaps of stone which were blasted no one
knows why, — possibly for the purpose of obtaining metal.

DONATIONS

Received by the .American Pliilosophical Society, since the
Publication of Vol. 1. — JVerv Series.

FOR THE LIBRARY.
FROM SOVEREIGN PRINCES AND STATES.

From His Majesty the King of France, hi/ Baron Hyde de Neuville.

Dictionnaire Chinois. Francois, Latin : par M. de Guignes, fol. Paris, 1813.
Leonis Diaconi Hist. Scriptoresque alii ad res Byzantiaas pertineates, fol.

Paris, 18 19.
Annuaire Hist. Univ. pour les annccs, 1818, 1819, par Lesur, Paris, Svo.
Choix des Poesies orig. des Troubadours. Par M. Renouard, 3 vols, 8vo, Paris.

1816—1818.

From His Majesty the King of the Netherlands.

Flora Batava. Figures par J. Le Sepp & fils, et description par J.Kops, liv-
raisous 41 — 64. Amst. 4to. (No. 58 is wanting.)

From the State of Pennsylvania.
New ed. ol (he Laws of the State, vol. 6. By Joseph Reed. Phil. Svo, 1822.

From the State q/" South Carolina.
Map of that State. By John ^Vilson ; Tanner, engraver, 1823.

FRO.M AMERICAN AND FOREIGN SOCIETIES.

Albany, Trans, of Soc. of Useful Arts of State of N. York. Vol 4th, Svo.
1816—19.
Mttn. of the Board of Agriculture of the State of N. York, -2 vols, Svo,
1821—23.
vol., II. — 3 H

483 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Batavia, Trans, of Bat. Soc. Arts & Sci. Vol. 8th, 8vo. 1816.

Bath, Trans, of the Bath & West of England Soc. Vol 10—14, 8vo, 1805—

1816.
Berlin, Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenchaften, 1804

—1819. 5 Vols, 4to.
Bologna, Mem. de I'lnstit. Nazionale Italiano. Classed! Fis. et Mat. Vol.
1 &,2, 1806— 10.— Classe di Mor. Pol. Litt. &c. Vol. 1, Part 1 & 2, 1809
— 13, 4to.
Boston, Trans, of the Am. Acad, of Arts & Sci. Vol. 4th, 41o, 1818—1821.
Coll. of Mass. Hist. Soc. Vol. 7—10, N. S. 8vo, 1818—1 823.
Trans, of Medical Soc. Vol 3, part 1st, 1819.
Brussels, Nouv. Mem. de I'Acad. Roy. des Sci, & Belles Lett. Vol. 1,
1820, 4to.

Mem. sur les tjuestions proposeespar I'Acad. Roy. 1813 — 1816, et
cjui ont remporte les prix, 1817, 4to.
Calcutta, Asiatic Researches, or Tr. of Soc. Bengal, Vol. 10 — 14. 1808 — 22.
Copenhagen, Det Kong. Danske Vidensk. abernes Seiskabs Skrivter, 1802 —
1820, 4to.
Oversigt over det Kongel : Danske Vidensk. Selsk. arbeid, &c.
1815 — 1821, 4to. Received from P. Pedersen, Dan. Minister.
Edinburgh, Trans, of the Roy. Soc. of Edinb. Vol. 7th, part 2d, to vol. 10th,

part 1st. 4to, 1815 — 1823.
Goettingen, Comment recentiores. Vol. 3 — 5, 1814 — 1822, 4to.
Havanna, Mem. de la Real Soc. Economica, 4th vol. 4to, 1817 — 1820.
Leeds, Lit. & Phil. Soc. Introd. Disc.of C. T. Tackrat, 1821, 4to.
London, Tr^ns. of the Roy. Soc. 1807,— part 2d, 1823, 4to.

of the Soc. of Arts, Manuf. & Coram, vol. 33 — 41, 1815—
1823, 8vo.

of the Horticul. Soc. Vols 3, 4, & 5. 1820—1824, 4to. Also List

of Officers & Members, & Report of Garden Coinmittei-.

. of the Geological Soc. Vol. 4th, part 2d, 5th, & vol. 1, part 1,

N. S. 1807—1822. 4to.

of the Linnean Soc.vols9 til 15, 1808— 1822, 4to.

. of the Astronomical Soc. vol .1, 1822 — 25. Uules of Soc. and

Address, 4to, 1820.

Archseologia or Trans, of the Soc. of Antiquaries, vols 14, 18,

19 & 20, part 1, 4to, 1817— 1823.
New York, Collections of N. York Hist. Soc. vol. 3, 1821, 8vo.

Annals of the Lyceum of Nat. Hist. vol. 1, part 1 — 8, 1823 — ■

25, 8vo.
2d Annual Report of the Amer. Bible Soc. 1818. 8vo.
Paris, Mem. de la classe des Sci. Mat. et Phys. de I'Inst. Nat. de France,
1813—1815, 1 vol. 4to.

de I'Acad. Roy. des Sci. de I'lnst. vol. 1— 3,4to, 1816—1818.

— — de I'Inst. Roy de France. Classe d'Hist. & de Lit. Anc. vol.

1_4, 1815—1818, 4to.
■ , de I'Acad. des Inscriptions & Belles Lettres, vols 5 & 6, 1822.
Presented by La Society Rnyale des Antiquaires de France.
M6in.de I' Academic Celtique, 5 vols, 8vo, 1807—1810.

DONATIONS FOR TIIK LIBRARY. 483

Paris, Mem. ile la Sncietc Rov. <les Antiq. dc Fr. 3 vol-;, 8vo, 1817 1821.

Granimaire t'elto-Biet.inne, par Lei;ciniiler, IBor, 8vo.
Diet. C'elto- Breton ct Fran^di-t. par \e niOmi-, 8v.i, 1821.

Presented bv I a Societc Asialir|iie (received from Jules Klaprotli)-
Journal Asiati(|ue, 4 vols, Svo, \H'1-Z — 18C4.
Discours ct Rapports dr la Soiicic A'^ial. — Si^nnce ann. 18'24.
Philadelphia, Mem. of the Philad. Soc. for promoting Aitriculture, vol 4tli,
8vo, 1818.
Journal of the .Acad, of Nat. Sci. vol I — 4. 8vo, 1817 — 1825.
First .\nmial report of the Franklin Institute, 1825.
Pisa, University &. Oliservatorv- — From Prof. Malam na, \n H Sproni.
Hist. Acad. PisaiiR?. auct. A. Fabroni, 3 vols, 4to, 1791 — 1795.

From Prnf. G. Piazzini.
Osserv. delTKclisse di iSole, 1806, calcol. da O. P.— Ver. 4to, 1791—95.
Occuh. del Toro soito la Luna, 1806. Obs. Sid. hab. Pisis,
1786—1790.
Nov. Plan, observ. et 1 heo. Auct. J. Slop, 4fo, 1782.
Botanicoii Ktruscum, auct. G. Savi, vol. 3, 8vo, 1808.
Comment, inserviiurum Hist. Pi^ani Vireti,auct J. Calvi, 4to, 1777.
StPetf.usblroh, Mem. ile I'Arad Imp. ties Sciences, N. S. vols 6 — 9, 4to.

pourlesann< es 1813 — 1820. St Pet. 1818 — 1824.
Salem. (Mass.) Plan,&c. K. Iiid. Marine Soc. — Caialo^. of their Library, 1801.
Stockholm, Kongl. Vetenskaps Academiens Nva ilandlingar, 1785 — 86, 1815
-182.^. Bvo.
Aors berSltelser om Vetenskaperna* Kranistpg. afgifne af Kongl.

Vet. Aiiid. Eiolietsinan, .T vols, 1821, 22, & 23.
Tal. om Climaternes riirlighet af Frih. Khrcnheim, 8vo, 1824.
— — om menskliga kunskapens framskridande af A. F. Skojolde-

brand,8vo, 1824.
Om Sveriges Matt, mal och Vigt utgifvet af Kongl. Vet. Acad.

8?o, 1823.
Danielis Justenii Fennici Lexici Tentamen, 4to, 1745.
Lexicon Lapponicum, .Auct. Joh. Ihre. — Lindal och Ochrling'g
Grammatica ejusd. linguae, 1780, 4to.
TvBiN, Mem. de I'Acad. des Sri. Litt. et Beaux Arts, Partic Physitjue et
Math. 1792— 1800, 1801— 1812, 4to, 6 vols.
Partie Litt.et Beaux Arts, 1801 — l812,4to, 5 vols.
M in. lie I'Acad. Roy. dcs Sci. 1813—14, 4to.

della Realc Arad. dellc Science d\ Torino, vols 23 — 27 (of the

whole Series) 1815— 1822. 4to, 5 vols.
UrsAL, Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Scien. vols? Be 8, 1815 — 1821.

484 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARl,

FROM INDIVIDUALS.

Astley (Thomas) New Modern Atlas, by J. Pinkerton, Am. Ed fol. Phil. 1818.
Agaidh (Caroli AJ Synopsis Algarum Scandinavise, Lon 1817, 8vo.
Adelung (Frederick) Worter-Sammlueen aus den Sprachen einiger vdlker des

Ostlichen Asiens und der. N. West-Kiiste von Amer. von J. V. Kru-

sentern, St. Pet. 4to, 1813.

Sieginund Freyherrn Von Heberstein mit besonder Rucksicht auf Seine

Reisen in Russland, St. Pet. 8vo, 1818, F. A. Author.

Linguarum totius orbis Vocabularia comparativa Augustissimae Cura Col-

lecta, 2vol9,4to, St. Pet. 1787—1789.

Rask (R. K.) Undersogelse om det gamle Nordiske eller Islandske,

Sprogs Oprindeise, &c. Copenh. 8vo, 1818.

Angelsaksisk Sproglare tilligemed en kort Leesebog, Stock. 1819.

Higanoff(Rev. J.) Slovar Rossiisko Tatarskii, &c. St Pet. 1804, 4to.

Grammatika Tatarskago Yazwika, 1801, 4to.

Juden (Jac) FinskaSprakets grammatik, 12mo, Wiburg, 1815, 1816.

— - Schilling (Burin de) omnibus numeris Tab. ccxiv. Classium in quas

distribuunt Sinenses literas, St Pet. 1818.

A collection of Bibles and New Testaments in different languages —

Bibles, Arminian, Slavonic, Illyrian, Finnish, French.
Testaments, Georgian, Arminian, Romaic, German, Polish, Esthonian,

Tartar, tirusinian, Persian, Samogitian, Calmnrk. Mongiil.
Stephansohns (Wolf) Serbisch, Deutsch und Laleinisches, Worterbuch,

Vienna, 1818.

- Diction. Slavicum Grsecum Latinum, Mosquee, 1684.
Strahlman (Z.) Gram. Finnica, St Pet. 1816.

^^-— ^PiToTTupa. 'avatM/^fiocs" T« vcKfAivn iTepoi^g- TritgxTetr vvv, OCC. IjeipZ. 1817-

Hamel (J.) Der gegenseitige Unterricht Geschichte, Paris, 1818.

—— Fischer Essai sur la Calaite & Turquoise ; sur la perle des Freres
Zozima, 1820, St Pet.

Uebersicht aller Sprachen und ihrer dialekte.

Mainoni Spiegaxionedi due medagli Cufiche, Mil. 1818.

Spasky de antiq. Sculpt, et inscript. in Sibiria repertis, St Pet. 1822, 4to.

Arnold ( Tlins.) The Amer. Pract. Lun. Seaman's Guide, 8vo, 1822, Phil.
Adams (J. Q.) His report on Weights & Measures, as Sec. of State of the U.

States, Washington, 1821.
Anderson (Wm.) His system of Surgical Anatomy, part 1st, N. York, 4to, with

highly finished engravings, 1822.
Bache (Rich.) Post 0 iices of the United States, 1822, 8vo.
Bache (Franklin M.D.) His system of Chemistry for Students, 8vo, Phil. 1819.

4 vols valuable Pamphlets of Dr. Franklin's Collection, 1765 — 1785.

Bailey (Francis) His method of finding the Long, by the culmina of the Moon

and Stars, 4to, Lon. 1824.
B rbe Marbois, Complot d'Arnold et de Sir Henry Clinton, Paris, 1815.

Miim. Hist, relatif a la Statue Equest. de Henri IV. par F. Folie, Paris,

1819. Sa visite aux prisons de la Seine Inferieure, 4to, 1822, Paris.
Idem d'autres departments, 1823.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 483

Barton (Edw. M. D.) Charact. gen. plant, ins. mar. austral, auct. J. K. Korstci.

4tn, Lon. 17*6.
Barton (W. P. C.— M. D.) His Flora of N. America, 3 vols, 4to. Phil. ISiO—

18-23

Chambers' Diet. 3 vols, fol. (imperfect) — Volume of Pamphlets on Mi-

neralugv.
Bradford (Saml'i Murray, Fairman, & Go's Edit, of Rees's Cjclopedia, 47 vols,

4to, completed, Pliilad. 18'2I.
Brandis (J. D ) Ueber B^chische Heil-mittel und magnetismus, 8vo, Kopcnh.

1818.
Beasley (Fred.) His Search of Truth in the science of the human mind,

Phil. 182-2.
Berruti (S. G. M.— .M D ) Disput. Publ. in Reg. Torineusi Athen. Habit.

18-22.
Bell (J.— M. n ) His Ed. ofCoombe's Phrenol. 8vo, Phil. 1822.
Bell (John) Hist, of Virg. bv Burke, Jones & Girardin, — 4 vols, 8vo, Pet.

1804—1816.
Brewster (D.-»v.) His descrip. of the Hopeitc New Min. Alte nburgh, 1821.
Bennett & Walton, Darby's Edit, of Brooke's Gazctti-er, Phil. 1823.
Brt-ck (Saml) Sketch of the Internal Impnivemciits in Pi-nn. 8vn, 1818.
Biddle (Nicholas) Diet, of Modern Greek, Lat. Fr. & Ital. by V'lachas,

Ven. 1*84.
Biddle (James) Unanue, Obs. Sobre el Clima de Lima, 2il Kd. Mad. 1815.
Biddle (C C.) Smiths's Wealth of Nations,— with Playfair's notes, and life by

D. Stewart, 2 vols, 8vo, Hartford, 1818.
Bigsby (J J. — M. D.) Notes on the Gcog. & Geol. of Lake Huron, 4to,

Lon 1824.
Bigelow (J. — M. D.) His Amer. Medical Botany, 3 vol-, 8vo, Boston, 1818.
Bioren (John) Laws of Peon. Vol. 6th, edited by J. Reed, 1812—1824,

8vo, Phil. 1S22.
Botta (Carto) Storia della guerra dell'Indep. dcgli Stall Uniti d'America,

4 vols, 8vo, .Milan, 1319.
Borgnis fj. A.) Traitfc complet de Mcchan. appl. aux Arts, 4 vols, 8vo, Paris,

1818—1819.
Brown (P. \.) Synopsis of Contents of the Brit. Museum, Lon. 1821.
Bowditch (Nath.^ His Astronom. papers from Trans, of Am. .\cail. Vol. IV.
Bowdich (T. K) His Essay on the Geol. of N. W. Africa. — British Sc French

Expeditions to Teenibn. — Introduction to the Ornithul. of Cuvier. —

Analysis of Nat. Classif. of Mammalia, 8v(), Paris, 1821.
— — On the Customs, Superstitions, &c. common to Ancient Egypt, .Vbys

synia,& Ashantee, 4to, Paris, 1821.
Bvwatcr (J.) His Phy-iologital fragment's, Lon. IK24.
Carey (Matthew) Hi's Vindicia- Hibcrnicte, 8vo, Phil. 1810.

.\ Collection of Pamphlets on a variflv of subjects.

His Olive Branch, 1813.— New Olive Branch, 1821.— The Bible,

4to, 1803.

Various Tracts nn Politicat Economy, and Various Adilres^cg of Phil,

Snc. on Natioiiil Industry.

A Collection of Reports of the Public Secretaries of the U. .St«lc».

Care- & Son, Lavoisnc's .\tlas on the plan of Le Sage's improved, with a

large adilition of Maps, Phil. fol. 1820.
VOL. II. — 3 S

i86 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Carey & Son, Completion of "W. P. C. Barton's Veg. Mat. Med. (J. States,
2 vols, 4to, 1823.

Commercial Relations of Span. Amer. & IJ. .States, by J. Tard, 8yo, 1818.

Carey (H. C.) & I. Lea, Their complete Hist. Clironolog. & Geog. Atlas of

America, on tlie plan of Le Sage, fol. Phil. 1822.
Carlini (F.) Nuovo Metodo di constiuire le Tav. Astron. Milan, 8vo, 1818.

Tavole dell'equazione de centro e riduz. all'Eclittica pei quattro nu-

ovi piaiieti. Mil. 8vo, 1818.
Carre (J. T.) Script, llei Rusticte Veteres Latini, 2 vols, 4to, Leips. 1774.

His Traitt; complet de la prononc. de I'Anglois, Phil. 1818.

Castiglioni (Count Louis) Maldnnado, Viag del mir. Atlant. al Pacif. d'un

MS. di Carlo Amoreiti, Milan, 1811, 4fo.

Pigafetta (A.) Primo. Viag. intorno al Globo sulla Squadra del Cup.

iViagagliaiies, 1519 — 22,— con not. di C. Amoretti, Milan, 1800
Chapman (Nath.) Philad. Journal of Phys. & Med. Sci. 9 vols, 8vo, 1820
--1824' Also 182^ by N. Chapman and J. D. Godman.

Mayow (J.) Tract. V. Med Phys. Sal-nitro — Spirltu nitro-sereo, 8vo,

0.xon. 1674.

Murray 'J. — M. D.) Experiments on Muriatic Acid Gas, Edinb. 1818.

— — Chinese Account of Vaccination in their Language.

Chaumont (J. D. Le Ray de) His Address to the Agric. Soc. Jefferson Co.

N. York, 1815.
Colhoun (Suml — M. D.) Woodward's System of Universal Sci. 8vo, Phi!,

1816
Chazotte (P. S.) His Essay on teaching forei|;n Languages, Phil. 1807.
Cleavelanil (_P.) Elem. Tieat. on Miner. & Ge'ol. 2d Edit. Boston, 1822.
Collin (Rev. D. N.; Ainsworth's Latin Diet, abridged, Phil. Edit 1812.

A Swedish Bible, 4to.

■ Keill (J.) Lectiones Physicae, Lon. 1799, 8vo.

Fuller on Eruptive Fevers, with Plates, Lon. 1730.

Laws of Virg. (Title Page wanting,) 1661 — 1768, fol.

Boetii Gemiiiarum et Lapidum Hist. I^ugd. Bat. 1636.

. Paiey's Nat. Theol.Svo, 1820, N. York

Kcenig(Eni.} Aviceniife Regnum minerale. 4to, Bazil, 1696.

Svensk Ornitliologie Utgifven af Anders Sparrman, with 47 Plates, fol.

(Imperfect,) Stockholm, 1806.

Collins (Z.-i Weekly Mercury, Phil, 1732, 33, & 34, by A. Bradford.

Scholler (¥. A.) Flora Barbiensis, Leips. 1775, 8vo.

Chaisneau (D.) Atlas d'Hist. Nat. Fol. Paris, I'an 11.

Daubuisson on the Basalts of Saxony and on the origin of Basalts,

transl. by Neal, Ed. 1814, 8vo.

- Persoon C. H.) Icones Pictse variorum Fungorum, Paris, 1803.

Weiss (F. G.) Plantse crypt. Florce Gottiiigensis, 1770, 8vo.

Scropoli ^J. A.) Ann. i — 5, Historica — Naturalis, Leips. 8vo, 1769

— 1772

Scheuchzer (J.) Hist. Graminum, Juncorum, &c. Ligur. 1719, 4to.

Gauss (C. F ) Theor. motus Corpor. ccelest. in sect, conicis Solem am-

bientium, Hamb. 4to, 1809.

< Horatii Opera Ed. Oelph. not. Desprez, 8vo, Phil. 1804

— — G. Wasliington's Uffic. Lett, in Amer. Revolutionary War, 2 vols, 8vo,

N. York, 1796.

DONATIONS rOK TIIK LIBRARY. 487

Collins (Z.Hurckliar.It (J. C.) Table ties divis. ilepuis 1—3 mill, avec lob

iiomhres premiers, Pari*, 1817, 4to.
Correa (Eilw.) Not. sur la vie et les travaux ile M. Currca de Serra, p.Tr F

(I'Almcida, Paris, 18-24, -4to.
Coxe (D. W.) Cours Complet et Diet. Uiiiver. il'AKriciil. par Rozier 4to

Paris, 1801— 1805.
Conyngham R ; Sundry interesting Extracts from the ancient Records of

Peim. by his order. — Tlie great Law of 10 Dec. lG8->.

MS. Copies of Knglisli Records, 1664- 168-2 Dalch, 1652, 155C.

Procured by the State of Penii. from the Records of the State of

New York.
Clyraer (Geo.) Testimonials relative to hi^ Columb. Press, 4to, Lon. 1818.
Darby W.) His Mem. on the Geog. and Naf. and Civ. Hist. Flor. 1821, 8vo.

His Emigrant's Guide lo W. &, S. AV. Ter. Bvo, N. York. 1818.

TourlVomN. York to Detroit, 1819.

Chron. Hist, of N E. discov. and early navig. of the Russians, by James

Biirney, 8vo, Lon. 1819.

Skelrhes Hist. & Topog. of the Floridas, by J. G. Forbes, 8vo. New

York. 1821.
Dacosfa {¥.) Descrip. de I'art de Fabriqucr des Canons, par Moniie, Paris,
1S02, 4to. .

Agnesi Mue — Du calcul different. e» do Calcul Integral, trad, de I'lta-

lien.Sto, PariB, ir"5.
Drake ;Dan. — M. D.) Dissert, on Med. Education, Cincin. 1820.
Daschkoff (A.) A Russian Grammatical treat, ou the Tcheremiss Laneuaire

St Pet. 1775. * *" '

Liturgy of the Greek Church in the Arminian Language.

Mem. rel. a I'organisation des lois, avec rapports a S. M. L de Russie,

1st part, St Pet. 1804. 4to.

A Russian & .\rminian Grammar, 1802.

A Grammar of French & Rcmiair Greek, by A'entoti, 1810.

Deatibate (Gaspare Calendario della Corte, Torino, 1823.

D. Burh (L. Lettre a Humbi>ldt. Tabl. (iecd.du Tyrol Meriil. 1822.

Delano [A.i Travels & Vuy. round the AVorld, Boston, 1817, 8vo.

Delaplaiiie ; F i Repository of Lives and Portraits of distinguished American*,
vol. 2, pan 1, 1818, 4to.

Destutt de Tracy, Comment, sur I'esprit des lois de Montesquieu, PariH,
1818, 8vo.

Dcsmarest A. G.) Premiere Decade Ichlhyologique, Paris, 1823.

De Saossure iH. AV.) Ueports of Decisions in Chaiiiery Cases in S. Car. Co-
lumbia, 8vo, 3 vols, 1817.

Desilver( Robert) Robinson's (M. D.) Analysis of the Constit. of the U. States
of Asner. Phil 1820.

Shallui (F.I Chron. Tables for every dav in the year, 2 vols, 12mo.

Phil. 1817.

Weekly Messenger, State Papers, &lc. 1813—1815, F'hil. 2 vols, Bvo.

Ure's Diet. Chemistry ulth notes by Dr. Hare, &. Dr. F. Bache, Bvo.

Phil. 1821.

Caldwell's life of General N. Green, 1819. Al.so, Original Lrlteri

from (il■n.^Vashingtll^, Green, Ike. lo C. Pettil, quarter master Ge-
neral of Penn. (bound in 12 vols.)

488 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBHARY.

Devcze (J.) Traite de la Fievre-jaune, Paris, 1820.

Dewees (W. P.) Means of lessening the pains of parturition, 2d Editior.
Phil. 1819

Essays on various subjects connected with Midwif. Phil. 1823, 8vo.

Le Clerc's Hist. Morale, Civile, & Polit. de la Russie Auc. & Mod.

6 vols, 4to, Paris, 1781—85.

De Witt cS.) His Elements of Perspective, Albany, 8vo, 1813.

D'Oinelius d'Halloy, Observations sur les Cartes Geol. de la France, 8vo,
Paris, 1823.

Dupin (C.) Essai Hist, sur les trav. Scient. de C. Mnnge, Paris, 8vo, 1819.

Mem. sur la Marine, Ponts et Chaussees de France & D'Angleterre,

1818, Paris.

Du Penceau ()e Chev.) His translation into French of Heckewelder's ac-
count of the History, Manners, &c. of the Anier. Ind. Paris, 1822.

Du Ponceau (Peter S.) His Dissert, on the Jurisdiction of the Courts of the
U. States. — His Discourse on Legal Education : — and Thomas Ser-
geant on the powers exercised by the Supreme Court of tlie United
States, previous to the adoption of Federal Constit. Phil. 1824, 8vo.

Zeisberger (D.) Delaw. & Eng. Spelling Book, 1st Edit. 1776, 12mo.

De Brue's Univ. Atlas, fol. 1814—1816.

Royaumont's Hist, du V. &du N. Testament, S. Brieuc, 1802, 8vo.

Friends' book of Discipline for Penn. & N. Jersey, MS. copied from

MS. 1719.

Eliot (J.) Grammar of the Natick or Mass. lud. MS. copied from first

edit. 1666.

Proces verbaux des stances de la Chambre des Deputes, 1822.

Repository Lit. Sci. & Rev. 3 vols, 8vo, N. York, 1820 — 22.

Amer. Month. Mag. & Rev, 3 vols, 8vo, 1817— 18, N. York.

Portico of Lit. 5 vols. Bait. 1816— 18.

Diet. Historique de la Vie de tous les Hommes Celebres, 8 vols, 8vo,

Paris, 1786.

Vocab. de la lengua Quichua de los Indies del Peru por Rubio y Figuc-

redo, Lima, 1754.
Logick of Condillac, trans, from French by Jos. Neef, Phil. 1809.

No Cross noCrovvn,by Wra. Penn, 1807, transl. into French by C.Gay,

Paris, 1747.
Dr. M'Nevin's exposition of the Atomic Theory, N. York, 1819, 8vo.

A Collection of Pamphlets, by C. G. Haines — Dr. Hosack — H. Clay —

E. Livingston, &c. &c.

A. Young's Trav. in France, 1787 — 99, 2 vols, 8vo, Dubl. 1793.

Weekly Mag. with State papers, 4 vols,8vo, Phil. 1787—89.

Steuben (Baron) Regul. for the discipline of the Troops of the U. States.

Phil. 1779, Orig. Edit.

Gerard on Taste ; also Montesquieu on the same subject, Phil.

1804, 12mo.

Thos. Carpenter's Amer. Senator, 1796—97. Phil. 1811,8vo.

Pazos (V.) Lett, on the U. Prov. S. Amer. trans, by Crosby, N. York,

1820, 8vo.

Picket (A.) The Academician, on Philos. Educat. N. York, 1820, 8vo.

Schumann (G.) Corpus Juris publici S. R. Imp. 3 vols, 8vo, Leipz. 1794.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIDRARY. 489

EberJeCJohn — M. D.)IIis Treatises on Mat. Med. & Therapeutics, Phil. 1824,
C vols, 8vo.

iy G. M'Clellaii, (M. D.) Vol. I. Medic. Rev. & Analeclic

Journal, vol. 1, 1824— C.i, Phil. 8vo.
Elliot (Stephen) Sketch of the Botany of S. Car. & Georg. 2 vols, 8vo, Phil.

18-21 — 1825.
Engles (J. P.) Riccate delle Corde ovvero fibre elastiche, Bologna, 4to, 1767
Ferussac (Le Baron) HisTabl. Sv*t. des aniin. Mollusques.

Monoj;. des Ksp. Mclanopside, Melaiiopsis, Paris, I82.^>.

Francklin (\V.) Inquiry into the Site of Ancient Palabothra, 2 parts, 4to.

Lon. 1817.
Fraser (W. C.) Anon. .Vnti-Machiavel, Latin, (Title Page wanting,) 12ino.
Frick (Geo.— M. D.) His Treatise on Diseases of the Kye, Bait. I82.>.
Gallatin {\.) Voyage dans la Nouvellc France, par Chaniplaiii, with MS.

notes by the donor, Paris, 4to, 1632.
Gardiner .'R. H.) Statistical account of Maine, by Mr. Greenlcaf, Boston.

1816, 8vo.
Gardiner (Mrs. R. 11.) Pt-nobscot Indian Vocabulary, MS.
Garden (Alex.) Anec. of Revol. War, in the U. States, and .Sketches of Cha

racters, 8vo, Charleston, 1822.
Gastellier(R. G.— M. D.) Ses Ouvrages Mod. 1773, Paris, 8vo.
Gerardin (V. N. .\.) His inaugural Dissertation on Contagion, in Latin,

Paris, 182;'), 4to.
Gibson (Wm.—M. D.) Instit. and Practice of Surg. vol. l.Phil. 1824.
Gibson (John) MS. Documents relative to the Wyoming Penn. Controversy.
Gilmer (F. W.) Vindication of Laws limiting rate of Interest, Richmond,

1820, 8vo.
Gilpin (Josh.) His Mem. and Documents relative to Delaware and Chesap.

Canal, 1821, 8vo.
Godman (J. D. — M. D.) Western Quarterly Journal, No. 1 — G, Cincin. 1822.

His .\natom. Investigation anil Remarks on Morbid Anatomy, Phil.

1824.

Monition toStutlents of Medicine, 1825. — Annals of Anat. 1824.

(iorham 'J. — M. D.) His Elem. of Chem. Sci. 2d vol. Boston, 1818.
tiulianoft', Discours sur I'ctude fondain.des Langues, Paris, 1822.
Gummere (J.) Elem. Treat, on Geometry, Phil. 1822, 8vo. ,

Haines (R.) Second .\merican Rep. of Soc. to prevent Pauperism, New

Jersey, 1820.
■ Weekly Mag. Polit. Controversy, 5 vols, Lon. 1763 — 6.5.
Hall (J. E.) The Port Folio, a Literary Journal, edited by him. Phil- 1818

— 1823.

I)c Regini. Secul. Ecclcs. auct. Theod. Reinkingk, Frankf. 1039, 4t<).

Hammer (J. Von) His Constantinopolis unci dcr IJusporos, Q vols, Peslh.

1822,

His transl. of Spenser's Sonnets into German Verse, \\

.\rabian Tales transl. by him into French, and thence into fierman b-.

Zinzerling, part 1st, Vicn. 1823.
~-— Les Mines d'Orient, vols 4, 5, & G, fol. Vien. 1814.

VOL, II.— 3 T

490 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Hamtner (J. Von) Co])ie fig. d'un Rouleau de Papyrus Egypt, public pai

Fontana, explique par J Von Hammer, Vien. 1822.
A Monument to the Memory of Count Von Purgstall, Vien. 1821,

(German.)
.: Omaggio delle prov. Venete alia Maesta di Carol. Imp. d' Austria, fol

(plates) 1818.

Hormayr (J. F. Von) Biogr. ZUge aus den Leben Deutscher Milnner.

Journal of Styria, No. 1, GratzT 1821, vol. 1, Leipz. 1815, (German.)

Joanneum, Seventh Rep. on Education, Vien. 1808.

Codices Arabici, Persici, Turcici, Vien. 1820.

Jahrbiicher der Litteratur, Vien. 1822.

Hannah (D.) Astley Cooper's and B. Travers's Surgical Essays, Phil. Edit.

1821.
Harding (J.) Influence of Tropical Climates on European Constitutions, by

Johnson, Phil. 1821.
Harlan (R.— M. D.) His Fauna America.— Mammif. of N. Araer.Phil. 1825.

• Observ. on a New Genus of Salamandra, N York, 1825.

— — Introd. toComp. Anatomy and Physiol, by Lawrence, Lon. 1816.

Lect. on Phys. Zooi. & Nat. Hist, of Man, by the same, 1819.

Harris (Levett) Owen's New View of Society, Lon. 1813.

Potocki, Hist. anc. des Gouv. de Cherson & Podolie, St Pet. 1804.

Chronol. des deux premiers Livres de Man^thon, 1805.

Exam. Crit. d'un fragm. Egypt. Anc. Cronique, 1806.

Principes de Chronol. des temps anter. aux Olympiades, 1811.

Hays (I. — ?tI. D) Laws & Constitut. of New York Lycseum of Natural

History, 1822.
Hazard (Samuel) Gram. Dizio. &c. Ital. Grec. Volg. Turc. di Pianzola^

Vien. 1801.
llcckewelder (Rev. John) His MS. Explanation of Indian Names of Persons,

& Places in Penn. 4to, 1822.

His Narrative of Moravian Missions to Delaw. Ind. &c. 1740 — irSS.

Phil 1820.

Lieberkuhn's Harmony of the Gospels, transt. by Zeisberger into Delaw.

Ind. Language, 1784.

C F. Dencke's transl. of John's Epistles into the same, 1784.

B. Franklin's Remarks on the protest against his being agent for

Penn. and anonymous answer thereto, 1764.
Narrative of the massacre of the Ind. at Lancaster, 1764.

Benezet(A.) On the Ind. Life & Character, 1784.

— — Dickinson's & Galloway's Speeches on the proposed change of Govern.

in Penn. 1764.
Hembel (Wm. J.) Essai de Geologie, par Faujas de St Fond, 3 vols, 8vo,

Paris, 1803.
Henry (Wm.) Tribute to the memory of the late Prcs. of Lit. & Phil. Soc.

Manch. 1819.
HogermviUer (Von) Vorschlage zur errichtung eines Erziehungs- Inst, fiir

Diensbothen, Wien. 1810, 4to.
Holmes (A.) Report to the Soc. for propagating the Gospel amongst the Ind.

Boston, 1819.
Horner (W. E— M. D.) His Lessons in Pract. Anat. Phil. 1823.

UONATIONS FOR TlIK 1,IUHAU\. ly 1

Horner (\V. E— M. D.;i'atalo2o ilcgli Aiitl(|iu Monument, dalla iliscopertu

Cilia irKrcolano, Naples, 1754, vol. l.lol.
-; — Gli Accailemici d'Kicolano, Le PiKuie Antiilio c coiitorni incise con

qualche Spienazioni, 17J1 — 77, Ci vols, M. N;iples.
Horsefield (Thomas— M. D.) His Zoolog. Kesearclie* in Java. -Jto, ISM —

18-24, Lon.
Hosark Dav.) His .<5ystenis of Pract. Nosnl. Oil K.lit New York, 1821.
Bio!;rapliical Mcmoii ol Hu-jij Williamson. N York, 18^0.

Ktlitioii ol Thomas's Practice, N. York, IH-Z4.

Kssays on various subjects, 2 vols, 8vo, 18'24.

Address to the Med. Soc. N. York. 1824.

Hulings (W. E.) Descrip. Hist, et Clhronol. of two Stones, cont.nniri^
the Mexican Calendar, found I7'.KI, Iraiisl. by \V. E. H. from the Span*!
of A. do Leon y Gania. Mi?. 1818.

Humboldt (Alex.) Essai Geognost. sur le giscmcnt des roches, dans les deux
Hemispheres, Paris, 1823.

James l". C— .M. I).) Ai^iicnla (G.) De lie Melaliica, 4to, Basil, 1657.

.Moriice (T.; ^(ate letters of R. IJoyle, Earl Orrery. &c. 1688, 8vo, 2

vols, Dublin, 1743.

• Collegiate Inst, at Singapore, Mai. 1823. 4to.

Jarvis (S. F.) His Disssert. on the Religion of the Indians of N. .\mcrica.
N.York. 1820.

Jones (^V m.) His Reflections on the Winter Navigation of the River Dela-
ware. Svo, 1822.

Dcscrip. de la Nouv. Suede ^Penn.) et des Indes Occid. 1691. MS.

Johnson (Wm.) Sketches of the Life & Correspondence of Gen. Nath. Green,

2vols, 4to, Charl. 1822.
Izard (Georgei His Odirial Correspondence with the Department of AVar of

the Ur States, 1816, 8vo.
Translation of Rocca's Mem. of the French War in Spain. Phil, 1820.

Fry's (K.) Pmldgraphia, or Digest of Phonnl. Lon. Svo, 1799.

A Ciilleriinn of Interesting P.imphlets, by Ricard. Volney, Kentish^

Guillemot. C Urown, 1). Ramsay, A. Benezet, &c. &c.
Klaproth , Julius, His following works :

.\sia Polyglotta, 4to, mitcinem Sprach .\tlas, fol. Paris, 1323.

— ^ Sur I'origine du Papier Monnaic Ju a la .Soc. Asiat.) 1822, Paris.

LTdcntite des Ossttes du Caucase, avcc les Alains, &c. Paris, 18JS.

Quelques aiitiq. dc la Sibcr c. Paris, 1823.

Examen des Extraits d'une Hist, des Khans Mongols, 1823.

AbhaniHing iiber die Sprache und Schrilt der L'igurcn, Paris, fol.

1820.

Deux I<ettre8 a la Soc. Asiat. par Louis <lc I'Or, 1 825.

Voyage au Mont Cauca-e, et en G -orgie, 2 vol^, 8vo, Parin, 1625.

NKin. Hist. Gfog. Philolog. relat. a I'Asie, Paris, 1824, 8vo.

Exirait du Journal Asiat. sur les Houkhares, 1823.

Zorab (M. J.'i Lettie an subjet de la Nouv. Gram. Arininieroc, par M.

Citbiod, Paris, 1828.

Discours a la Soc. .\9iatir|uc, par I'- Baron Svlv. dc Sacy, Pari*.

1822.

493 UONATIONS FOR THE LIBRAUT.

Keating (W. H.) His Dissertation on the Art of Mining in Europe & America

Phil. 18^-21.
Kinder (A.) Biblia Espanola (Bible of the Bear) Basil, 1569, 4to.
Krusenstern (A. J. Vonj Reise uin die Welt, 1803— 1806, aufBcfehl S. K. M.

Alex. 1. auf den SchiBen Nadeshda und Newa, 3 vols, 4to, Plates, fol.

St Pet. 1810—12.
Laurence (W.) Treatise on Ruptures, 4th Edit. Lon. 1834
Lisboa (.1 da Silva) Estados do Bern commum e Econoniica Politica, Rio Jan.
Livingston (Ed.) Rep. of a Penal Code to the Legislature of Louisiana, 1822.

Report to the Same, on a Civil Code by himself & others, 1822.

System of Penal Law prepared by him, for tlie State of Louisiana, 1st

part, fol. 1824.

His Speech in Congress on Internal Improv. 1824.

Long (S. H.) Account of an Exped. to the Rocky Mountains, by order of the

U. States, 2 vols, 8vo, & Atlas, 4to, Phil. 1823.
Account of an Expedition to the Sources of St Peter's River, Lakes Win-
nipeg and of the Woods, by order of the U. States, by S. H. Lung, H.

Keating, Callioun, & others, 2 vols, 8vo, 1824.
Lorich (Chev. Sev.) Codex Juris Vestrogothici, part 1st, Lundfe, 1818, 4to.

Codex Syriaco-Hexaplaris Ambrosiano-Mediolanensis, editus et La-

tine versus a M. Norberg, Lon. Goth. 4to, 1787.

Svenska Lakare-Sallskapets Handlingar, 5 vols, 1788.

Aors Berattelse om Svensk Luk. Sallsk arbeten, af Sekret. C. Cat

lander, 1818.

Prospettiva de'Pittori e Architetti d'Andrea Po/.zo, part 1 & 2, fol.

Rom. 1758—64.

Lovcnhdrn (Admir.) Schumacher Dist. of Moon's Centre, from Venus, Mars,
Jup. & Saturn, for 1824, Copenh. 1824, 4to.

Lowndes (William) Journal of the Convention of the U. States, 1787, Bos-
ton, 8vo, 1819.

M'Clure, (David) Survey of the Delaware from a mile below Chester to Rich-
mond, 1818.

Macnab (H. G.) Analysis & Analogy applied to Education, 4to, Paris, 1818.

Maxwell (J.) Manners and Customs of several Ind. Tribes, by J. D. Hunter,
Phil. 1823.

Digest of Laws of the U. States, 1780—1820, by J. Ingersoll, Phil. 1821.

M'Williams (R.) On the Operation and Origin of the Dry Rot, 4to, Lon. 1818.
Mease (J.— M. D.) His Sketch of the Life of Robert Morris, 1821, 4to, Phil.

His Description of Medals relative to the important Events of the Revol.

War, Phil.

The Marquis of Worcester's Century of Inventions to'l665, Glasgow,

1794.

Dudley's Malleum Martis, smelting with Sea Coal, 1654, Glasg. 1794.

Livii (Ti(i) Qui extant Historiarum Libri, 2 vols, Cantab. 1679.

(Depositedby him) Holme's Map of Penn. 1681, then only three counties.

Meade (William — M. D.) His Chemical Analysis of the waters of N. Leba-
non, State of N. York, Burlington, 1818.

Chemical and Medicinal Qualities of Ballston & Saratoga Waters,

Phil. 1817.

Manual of Chirurgica! Pharmacy, transl. from J. Wilson, by W.Meade.

Phil. 1818.

DONATIONS FOR THB LIBRARY. 4-9y

Melish (J.)Geog. descriptor the World, Phil. 1818.

Geog. (lescript. of the U. States, 1818.

Meredith (William) Washington's Letters to Sir John Sinclair, with Fac Si-
miles, 1800, Lon. 4to.

Grammar of the Bengal Language, by N. B. Halkcd, 1775, 4to.

Micliaux ,F. A.) His Am. Svlva, Kiiglish fid. J vols, (.'nlouriMl Plates.

De I'Industrie Fran^aise, par Chaptal, 2 vols, Paris, 1810.

MS. Botanical Journal of his father A. Michaux, in America, 1787

—1796.

Deleuze (M.) Description and History of the Roy. Mus. N'a(. Hist. 2 vols,

8vo, Paris, 18-23.

Girard sur les Calculs Vessicaux, et sur I'operat. dc la Taillc dans Ic

Cheval, 8vo, 1823.

Kops J.) Index plant, qute in Horto Rheno-Trajcctino coluntur, 1823.

' Gingins (F ) Mem. sur la famille des Violacees, 4to, Geneva, 1823.

— — Coulter (T) .Mem sur les Dipsacees, Geneve, -Ito, 1823.

Miller (C. C.) The Oriental Linguist or Hiudostanee, by Jnhn Gilchrist.
Calcutta, 1798.

Mills (Robert) His Plan of a great Canal, &c. between Charleston and Co-
lumbia, 1820

Milne (Jos.) Treatise on the value of .Annuities, &c- 2 vols, 8vo, Lon- 181,1.

Mitchel, .Ames, & White, Their Edition of Parr's Medical Diet. 4to, 2 vols,
Phil. 1819.

Mitchel (Samuel A ) American Entomology, by Thos- Say, part 1, with
Glossary, Phil. 1825

Mitchill (S L. — M. D ) Account of the Institution of the Deaf and Dumb, N.
York, 1819

on the Causes &Cure of Intemperance.

Montgery iM de) Mem. sur les Mines Flottantes, &c- Paris, 1819.

Ragles de Pointage a. bord des Vaisseaus, Paris, 181G.

Morenas (J ) Lcttres sur les Hindous et leurs Castes, Paris, 1822.

Petition aux Chambres centre la traito des noirs, Paris, 1820-

Giudicelly (L'.Abbe) Sur le mime sujet, defense dc Morenas, 1820-

Mott (Valent — M D ) On securing the Apteria Innominata in a ligature. New

York, 1818
Neuville (Baron Hyde de) lia Divina Commedia di Dante Alighicri, col

Comment di G Uiagioli, 3 vols, 8vo, Pariit, 1819-
Nichols (F ) Treatise on Plane 8c Spher Trij;. Pliil Ibl 1-

Butler's (Sam.) Geographia Classica, New Vork, 1821.

West's (Jiilin) Elements of Conic Sections, Ni'w York, 1820.

Kirby's iJohn) Arithmetic, Nautical, Logaritli and .Mgcb- London,

1735, 4lo

Brosiin (F ) New method of finding the lat. by double altitudes of the

Sun, Camb 1815
Nicklin (P J ) Purdun's Digest of the Laws of Penn 1818.

Say's Pol Economy, transi by Princeps, with notes by C- C- Biddic,

2"vols, 8vo, Boston, 1821
Niles ,H ) Weekly R.-^ister. vols 18—26, Bait 18-20—24
Nuttal (Thomas His Genera of the plants of N .America, 2 vols, Phil 1817

Jiiurnal i>f his Travels in the Arkaris.is Territory in IH17, Phil 18r!1

VOL. II. — 3 a

494 DONATIONS FOR THE L.IBKAUY.

Ord (G ) J Bruce's Travels to discover the Sources of the Nile, 1761 — 178S,

5 vols, 4to, Edinb 1790.
Christian's Dictionary of the Bible, by T. Wilson, Bagwell, & Simson,

fol Lon 1728

Catalogue of the Phil Library, 1770 Presented by the Company to

Dr Franklin.
Otis (G ) His transl of Botta's Hist of the War of the U States of America

for Independ 3 vols, Phil 1820.

• De Piadt's Europe after the Congress of Aix-La-Chapelle, Phil- 1820.

Paiiaco (M ) Bosquejo de la Revol de Mexico, (Iturbidej Phil- 1822.

Palmer (T. H ) Comparative Table of the Constitutions of the U States,

Phil 1822.
. A Large Collection of Public Docum- of the U- States, used by him in

the U. States Register, 1812—14
Plantou (M ) His Observations on Yellow Fever, and Method of Cure, Phil.

1822
Parker (D-) Army Register of the U- States, 1819.
Parkes (Sam.) His Chemical Essays applieil to Arts & Manuf in Great Brit.

2 vols, 8vo, Lon 1823
■ Letteis to Farmers, &c. on the use of salt for manure, and Cattle,

Lon 1819
■ Chemical Catechism, 3d Edit 1819-~Rudiments of Chemistry, Lon.

3d Edit 1822.
Patterson (R) His Treat on Pract Arith Phil 1818

Patterson (R M — M D ,Legendre's Theorie des Nombres, Paris, 1808.
— — President Munroe's views on the subject of Internal Improvement to the

House of Representatives, 1822.
Petty's Polit. Arith. Lon. 1699.

Fabre sur la construction des Machines Hydraul. Paris, 1783.

Leslie's Elements of Geometry & Plane Trigonometry, 3d Edit. Edinb.

1817.

Taylor (Dr.) Elements lllust. of the Celest. Mechan. of La Place,

Lon. 8vo, 1821.

Garnier's Elem.de Geom. Analytique, Paris, 1808, 8vo.

— — — Discussion des racines des equal. &c. et elimination entre

deux equal. Paris, 1813.
. Azimaret Garrison, Trisection de I'angle suivie des recherches Analyt.

Paris, 1809.^
Du Bourget, TraitfesElem. du calcul differ, et du calcul integral, 2 vols,

Paris, 1819.

Annales de Math. Oeuvres Period, de Gergonne Paris, 1824, 4to.

Pedersen (P.) En Dansk og Engelsk OrdBog, af Ernst Wolff, Lon. 1779, 4to.
• Oversigtover det Kong. Danske Videiisk. Selsk. Arbejd,1815 — 21, 4to.

Det Kong. Danske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrivter, 6 vols, 4to, 1802

—1810.
Peironnet (Thomas) Aikin's Annual Review of Literature, &c. 6 vols, 1803 —

1808, Lon.

. Moyens de mettre en valeurla Guiane, par M. Lescallier, Paris, 1798.

Perkins (Jacob) Memoir on the Compressibility of Water, 1820, Lon. 4to.
Piazzini, Osserv. delle Ecclisse di Sole, 1806, Verona, 1810.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIURARY. 4yd

Pickering (John) Kssay on the pronunciation of the Greek Laneuaec. Boston
4to. 1818. * *

Eliot's Grammar of the Mass Iiul. Lang, republished with notes by P.

S. l)u Ponceau & J. Pickering, Boston, 18-22.

11 Vangelo secondo S. Giovanni, transl. in Line. Ital. e Malt. Lon

18-22.
— — --. 2T;i;^ir« rir <fi«.oirc$iii»V •HSixJf, uTi Siiifum B«^^«, "EdT. 1818.

Poinsett i. R ) Flis Communication to the Sec. of State of the U. Stales,
on S. Amer .\ffairu, 1818.

A curious Collection of Spanish MSS.

Relative to Ceuta & Oran, l.i05— ir63, bv Dr. A.de Gaver, 2 vols.

Relative to S. America, 175G— irH.i, by Paras, Perez, &. G. dc Doblas.

On the Revolution attempted in Peru, by Tupac Amaru, 1:80 85.

HisNoti's on Mexico, made in 1822, for the Govern, of the U. States,

with a sketch of the Revol.in 1824, Svo, 18-24, Phil.

Pomeroy tR. \V.] Biography of the Signers of the Declaration of Independ-
ence, commenced by Mr. Sanderson, & continued by R. Walsh, Jr. &
R. Wain, Jr. 1—5 vols. 1820—24.

Poole (E.) His Edition of Oliver Goldsmith's animated nature, Phil. 5 vols
1823— '24.

Potter ''N — M. D.) Mem. on Contagion as regards Yellow Fever, Bait. 1818.

His Edition of John Armstrong's practical illustrations of Fevers, Phil.

1821.
Potter (S.) & Co. Mem. of the Protestant Episcopal Church, in the U. States

of .\mer. 1820, Phil.
Ralston (R.) Rapports de la i:oc. Bibllque, Paris, 1820.

A Collection of Rep. of Domestic Societies.

Ramirez (.\lex.) Mcm.de la Real Soc. Econ. 1820, Havanna.

Ramsay (J.) Djvid Ramsay's History of the U. States, from 1607 1808.

Continu.ition by Dr. S. S. Smith, 3 vols. 1818. Phil.

Raymond (D.) Thonghtx on Pol. Econ. Bait. 1821.

On the .Missouri Question, 1819.

On the Constitutionality of Mass. refusing to comply with the requisi-

tion of the Govcrntnent of the estates, 1814.
Reed (Joseph; Volume 6th of his Edition of the Laws of Penn. publ. by order
of the State, 1822.

Also. Several Public Dnc. of the State of Penn.

Lowber and Miller's Digest of the Ordinances of the Corporation of

Phil. 1822.
Restrepo J. M > Codigodc Leyes dc la Rep. dc Colombia, sancionadas, 1821,
Bogota, 182-2.

Semanario del nuevo Reyno de Granada, 1809.

Rilev iJas.; Authenl. Nar. of his Capture, and being prisoner with the Arabs.

Hartford, 180".
Rio (And. del 'r.il)las mineral, de Karsten tr. en Castellano, 1804.
Rivinus (E. F) Hist. Stat, darstcllung des Nordlichen England, Lcips. 8vo

1824.
Roberts (H.) Original MS. Letters of W Penn, 1689 & 1097.
Robinson (VV. I).; Mr-m. addressed to the Jews in Euroni-, Lon. 1819.

Republished with a Table of the Constitution of the V. States

49fi DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

His Mem. of tlieMex. Revol with his plan ofopenin;; a communication

between the Bay of Mexico and the Pacific Ocean, Phil. 1820.
Rodhe (C. W.) De Oiigine Mali, commentatio, 1821.
Rodrigues, Quinte Curce traduit par Vaugelas, 3me Edit. Paris, 1659.
Russel CJ.) Acreiius fin Swedish) on the State of New Sweden (now Penn

W. Jersey, & Delaw.) Stockholm, 1757, 4to.

Also, a Valuable Collection of MS. documents, copied by his directions.

and, at his expense, from the Svved. Gov. Records, relative to the Prov
of New Sweden, 1640 — 55.
Rusconi (M.) Desc. anal, degli organi di circolazione delle larve delle Sala
mandre Aquatiche, Pavia, 1817.

Del Proteo Anguino di Laurente, Monografia, 4to, 1819.

Say (J. B.) Catech. d'Economie Polit. 2d Edit. Paris, 1821.

Traite d'Economie Polit. 2 vols, Paris. 1819.

Say (Thos.) Description of Land and fresh Water Shells of the U. States.
Phil. 1819.

Amer. Entom.or description of the Insects of N. America, 1817.

Schaeft'er (Rev. T. C.) His discourse on the third Centurial Jubilee of Luther's
Reformation, New York, 1817.

His Address at laying the Corner Stone of the Luther. Church, New-
York, 1821.

Index Libror. ad celebr. Sec. Reform. Berlin, 1821.

Seckendorf (C.) Zimmerman's Account of Hamburg, (in Germ.) up to 1819,
Hamb. 1820.

Bottiger (C. A.) Amalthea or MusEeum of Mythol. and Archaeology, part

1, 8vo, Leips. 1820.
Small (Abraham) Marshall's History of the Colonies of N. Amer. from the
Settlement to 1775.

A Treatise on the Adulteration of Food & 'Culinary Poison, by Fred.

Accum, Phil. 1820.

Mem. Hist, de Napoleon, part 1st, Phil. 1820.

Willich's Dom. Encyclop. edited by T. Cooper, 3 vols, 8vo, 1820.

Parry (W. E.) Voyage for discovery of a N. Western Passage to the

Pacific, Phil. 1821.

Anecdotes of the life of Watson, Bishop of Landaff, written by himself,

Phil. 1818.
Five Thousand Receipts in the Useful & Domestic Arts, by Colin

Mackenzie, 1825.
Sansom (Joseph) Sketches of Lower Canada, New York, 1817.

Fry's Pantographia, 1799, Lon.

Sanford "(F. A.i His Hist, of the U. States before the Revolut. and some

account of the Aborigines, Phil. 1819.
Sergeant ^John) Addition to the 4th volume on Population, by Malthus, Phil

1817.

Census of U. States, fol 1820, and a Collection of Public Documents of

of the U. States.
Seybert (.\dam— M. D.) His Statistical Annals of the U. States, 1789—1818,
4to, 1818, Phil.

A large Collection of Public & Hist. Doc. which he used in his Work.

Boerhaave's Cheni. 4to, 2 vols, 17r)5.

UONATIONS Foil TIIK LIUUAKV. l}),-

Sevbert (Ailam — M. D.) Newman's Chcmiral Works, 4to. Lon.

Bufton's Hist. Nat. vols 1, 2, Sc :,, 4to, Paris, 174(5.

I)e Loliiie on llie Const, of Ena;. N. Yuik, ir9-2.

Moheau et Messance, sur la pi.pulaiion ile la France, 1766 1778.

J Miller's Min. Tables, H Slicets

Schweinilz i,S. D.) His Synopsis Fungonim Carol, ."^upcr. 4lo.

Florii- America? Sept. Cryjjt. Raleigti, ISiJl.

Stover ,B.j Hist. & Pol. Tracts ol (jueon Anne's Rcifjn, 1811 — 1-2, Lon.
Scoresby (W.j Journal of a Voyage on the New Whale Fishery, 18-2,>, Ktlinb.
Stockier (F. tie li. G.) Sobre a origem c progressos das Math, en Fortuc.
1818, Paris. o r o 5

Elem.de Geom. Philos. Lisboa. 1S18.

Short (AVilliam) Rochon (.\.) Voyage aui Indes Orient, et en Afrique,
Paris, 1807.

Journal de la Litcrat. dc France, 1803. 4, & 7.

Dralrr iM.) Descript. des Pyrenees, Gcolog. Econ. Polit. &c. Paris,

■2 vols, 1 81 3.

AViiliams H. M.) Events from the landing of Bonaparte, March. 181j,

to the restoration of Louis XVIH. 1815, Phil.

Pougins .Charles) Sur les .Vntitj. du Nord, et sur les Anc. Langues,

Puvmaurin, L'.Vrt d'extrairel'Indigo du Pastel. Paris, 1813.

Smith (^ Sir Sidney) His plan for liberating the White Slaves, in Africa,

1816.
— - — A large Collection of French Pamphlets cuiinecled with the Revolut.
Era, and also relative to Franklin, and the U. States of Ainer.

Mr. .slinrf lia« .iKn il.-()osiip(l with the Soc. his valuable Library, com-

prising about 1 -■500 Volumes.

Schulze (G. S ) Encyclop. <I.t Hhiino ivit-uonrimiiax IR04. GnH.

Schumarhcr (H. C.) The distances of the Moon's Centre from thp. four Pla-
nets Venus, Jupiter, Mars, & Saturn, for 1824 &,2j.

His .\uxiliary lables for 1821, 22, 23, 24.

I'he first no. of the (Collection of Constant. Auiil. Tables.

The two first vols of the .Vstronoinischc Abhandlungen, with a sepa-

rate vol. of Plates.

His letter to M Others, containing the description of his apparatus for

measuring abase line, .\lten. 1821.
Schumacher (C. F.J Essai d'un nouv. sysi. des habitations des Vers T6staccs,

a\et 21 planches, Copeiih. 1817.
Survilliers (Joseph Bonaparte, Count de) Essai Theor. & Experini. sur Ic Gal-

vanisme, Paris, 1804, 4to.
Tanner (.H. S.)BMUchette's Topogr. Description of Lower Canada, 1815, Lon.
——^— A General outline of the U. States of N. .America — her Resources and

Prosnects, Phil. 1825.
Tanner, Vallance, & Co. & H. S. Tanner, New American Atlas, Phil. fol.

1818.
Todd (J. P.) An .\ddress to the Albemarle Agricultural Soc. by J. Madison,

1818, Richm.
Thomas (Isaiah) Massachusetts Spy, (a Journal edited by him,) 1788—1818,

14 vols, Worcester.

VOL. II.— 3 X

498 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Thomas (Moses) Johnson's Diet. Phil. EtI. 4 vols, 8vo, 1818.

Tydiinan (P.) lia vie de Guill. Penn, par Marsillac, 2 vols, Paris, ir'Ji-

Vassali Eandi, Ann. de I'Observ. de Turin, 1810 — ll,4to.

Vaughan ('Petty i Hist, of Acadie, &c. with Statistical view of Maine, by Jos.

Whipple, Bangor, 1816.
Vaughan (W ) Rise and Progress of Saving Banks, Lon. 1818.
Vaughan (Joiin) Hist, of the District of Maine, Boston, 1795.
——^ Gordon's (W.) Hist, of the Rise and Indep. of the U. States, and an

account of the Revol. War, 3 vols. New York, 1794.

Anonymous account of the European Settlement in America, 2 vols,

1758, Lon.

Kalni's Travels in N. America, Warrington, 3 vols, 1770 — 71.

Historical Account of Georgia & South Carolina, 1779, 2 vols, Lon.

Bossu's Travels in Louisiana, 2 vols, 1771.

Brackenridge's Views of Louisiana, Pittsburg, 1814.

Brackenridge's Voyage to S. America, by order of the Gov. of the U.

States, 2 vols, 1819, Bait.

Ramsay's History of S. Carolina, from 1670 — 1808, 2 vols, Chariest.

Warren (Mercy) History of the American Revolution, 3 vols, 8vo,

Boston, 1805.

Lambert's Travels through Canada and the U. States, 2 vols, Lon.

1816.

Douglas's History of British Plantations in N. America, 2 vols, 1749

— 1753, Boston.

Keith {S. W.) History of the same, 1738, 4to, Lon.

J. Dickinson's Political Writings, 2 vols, 1801, Wilm.

Allen's History of the American Revol. 2 vole, laig. Bait.

Journals of Congress, 13 vols, 1774—1778. 1800—11.

_____ ij. State Doo a» etato papo.-c. -ianQ — 15,5 vols, Boston.

. View of the Causes, &c. of the American Revolution in 13 Discourses,

preached in America, 1797, 8vo, Lon.

. Duane's Edition of the works of Franklin, 6 vols, 1808 — 18, Phi).

Colden's Life of Fulton, and account of Steam-boats, N. York, 1817.

Pownal (T. ) The administration of the Colonies of Great Britain,

1786, Lon.

. Robson's Account of Six Years' Resid. at Hudson's Bay, 1752, Lon.

Webster's Political Essays on Finance, &c. 1775 — 91, Phil.

Brown (Charles P.) His Life by William Dunlap, 2 vols, 1815, Phil.

_^— W.Jones' Grammar of the Persian Lang. 2d edition, 1775, Lon.
_^— Grundriss einer Geschichte der menschlichen Sprache, von J. C. C. Ru-

diger, Erster Theil, 1782, Leipz.

Gram. Allemande & Francoise, Anon. Lausan, 1796.

Diccion. de la lengua Castellana, par I'Acad. R. Espan. Madrid,

1780, fol.

Evans ( W.) English & Welsh Dictionary, 1771, Caermarth.

Hottingeri (J. H.) Gram. Hsebr. Syriac, Cald. et Arab. 1659, Heidelb.

Milburne (W.) Oriental Commerce & Description of the E. Indies,

2 vols, 4to, 1813, Lon.

Collins (L. Col.) Account of the Eng. Colonies of New South Wales,

4to, 1804, Lon.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 49i*

Vaughan (John) Bowdicli (T. E.) Account of tlie Ashantee Mission from C.
Coast Castle, 4to, 1819. Lon.

Colquhoun (F.) On the Wealth, Power, and Resources of the British

Empire, 4to, ISl.i, Lon.
On the Police of I,i)nilon, 1798.

Turner's Embassy to tiie Court of the Tcshoo Lama in Thibet, 4to,

1800, Lon.

Vene^as. N>ticia tie California, 3 vols, 8vo, 1757, Mad.

Molina (translated by Shaler_; Geog. Nat. & Civil History of Chili,

Middleton, 1808.

i^parman (.\.) Voyage to the Cape of Good Hope, '2 vols, 1785, Lon.

Tournefort's Voyage to the Levant, 3 vols, 8vo, 17-11, Lon.

Leo Afric, Description of .\frica, transl. by J. Porey, 1600, Lon.

History of Ireland, from the Union with Great Britain, 1801 — 1810,

3 vols, 1811, Dublin.

Kennet's Antiijuities of Rome, Phil. 18'22.

— — Pulteney's View of the Writings of Linnwus, Lon. 1781.

Evelyn's Sylva, or Dissertation on Forest Trees, with Hunter's notes.

2 vols. 4to, York, 1812.

Rui/. &. Pavon, Syst. Veget. Flor. Peruviante et Chilensis, Madrid,

1798—99.

Dccandole et Lamark, Flore Franeoise, 6 vols, 8vo, Paris, 1815.

Wildenow (C. L.) Numer. Plant. Horti Reg. Botan. Berolcnsis, -Z vols,

1809.

Cavanilles, Hist. Nat. Geog. Agric. del Reyno de Valencia, 2 vols,

fol. Madrid, 1757.

Persoon (D. H.) Synopsis Methodica Fungorum, Goettingen, 1801.

Hernandez (¥.) B<»'""" **-'••" *•'• ■w-."*. Hiinanifp Thp<;Biir"«. fol-

IVOIIItC, lUJ/ .

Pursh's Flora Americana, Septent. Lon. 2 vols, 8vo. 1814.

Duhamel du Monceau, La Pliysique des arbres, 2 vols, 4to, Paris, 1758.

Smellie'e Philosophy of Natural History, Phil. Edition, 1791.

Girard (J.) Anatom. des Anira. Domestiques, 2 vols. 8»o, Paris, 1807.

Blumenbach's Comparative Anatomy, transl. by W. Lawrence, with

notes, Lon. 1807.

— Elements of the Natural History of the Anim. in Great

Britain, 2 vols. Edinb. 1817.

Nemnich's Natural History Lexicon, 2 vols, Hamliurij, 1795, 4to.

Polyslottes Lexicon der Naturgescliichte, 2 vols, Hamburg, 4to.

1798.

Cuvier's Theory of the Earth, with Jameson's notes, and Dr. Mitchcl

on Geology, New York, 1818.

Williams (John) Natural History of the Mineral Kingtiom, edited l»v

J. Miller, 2 vols, Edinb. 1810.

Gndart (J.) On Insects transl. from (he Dutch, York, lfi8'2.

Hodke fR.) Micrographica, Examination of minute Bodies by Miero

scopes, fol. Lon. 1667.

Cluverus (P.) Introd. in Univers. Geogr. 4to, Lon. 1709.

Edinburgh Review, vols 1—10, 1802 — 14. Quarterly Review. 1 — 10

1809—13.

500 DONATIONS I'OR THE LIBRARY.

Vaughan (John) B. Dias del Castillo's Hist &c. of the Conquest of Mexico,

transl. by Keating, 2 vols, 4to, Lon. 1807.
Herrenschwaril, sur la Popul. et sur I'Econ. Pol. Mod. Paris, I'aii 3.

Collections Academiques, Partie Ftan^oise, 1 — 5, 4to, 1754 — 75.

Etrangeie, I — 12, 4to, 1757 — 74.

Senefelder's Complete History, &c. of Lithography, 4to, London,

1819.

Vertot's History of the Knights of Malta, fol. vol.1.

Vitruvii Architectura, ful. Lit. Venice, 1497.

Trigonoin. Britan. Brigii, et Gellibrandii, fol. Goud. 1633.

— — — Description de la partie Francoise de St Doiningue, par M. de St

Mery, 2 vols, 4to, Phil. 1797.

Lempriere's Universal Biography, New York, 2 vols, 1810.

Glossarium ad script, mediee et infimse Latinitatis, 3 vols, fol. auct.

C. D. du Cange, Lat. Paris, 1678.
Ejusd. Glossarium ad script, medise et infimge Groecitatis, 2 vols, fol.

1688.

Blumenbachii, Instit. Physiologicse Gott. 1787.

English Com. Prayer Book, translated into Mohawk, by Brandt,

New York, 1759.

Oratio Dominica ^rtM/^xaTToc, (Mottus's) 4to, Lon. 1713.

The following works deposited by him :

Hermandi opera, 3 vols, 4to, Madrid, 1790.

Ornithol. e Storia Nat. degli Uccelli, 5 vols, fol. (4th volume want-

ing) Flor. 1767—76.

Flora Peruv. et Chil. prodromus, par Ruiz e Pavon, 2 vols, fol. Mad.

1798.

FInra Sihiriro lv»' f^ ':- " ""''■ f"' .■■JtK a volume of PlatCS, PctrOP,

1747.

Vater(J. S.) Untersuchungen iiber Amerikas Bevolkerungaus den alten Kon-
tinente, Leips. 1810.

Mithridates oder Allgem. Sprachenkunde, von J. C. Adelung & J. S.

Vater, vol. 3, part 2d, & vol. 4, (relative to American Languages,) Ber-
lin, 1817.

Monumentum Pacis Fcederalis Armis Restitutfe, 1814.

Jakob (Von) Die Staats iinanz. Wissenschaft, 2 vols in one, Hal. 1821.

Schmutz Erfahr in Gebiete der Landwirthschaft, 4fh vol. Leips. 1820.

Vaux (George) Du Buat's Principes d'Hydraulique, 2 vols, Paris, 1786.

Vaux (Roberts) Life and sufferings of George Fox, 2 vols, Phil. 1808.

Journal & Works of Thomas Chalkley, New York, 1808.

Wolman's Works, 5th Edition, Phil. 1818.

Gospel Labours of S. Crisp, 1694, Phil. Edition, 1822.

Original and Present State of Man considered, by J. Phipps, Phil. 1818.

Barclay's Apology, dedicated to Charles II. Phil. Edition, 1805.

Also in French, transl. by Bridel, Lon. 1797.

Treatise on Church Government.— Also Pike's Epistle, Phil. 1822.

Penn's No Cross no Crown, Phil. Edition, 1807,

Waite & Sons, U. States Public Documents, 1789 — 1801, Boston, S volS:

1815.
State Papers from Accession of Washington to 1817.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIfiRABY. 501

Wain (Robert. Jr) View of the Life of Charles I. Lon. iroti.

Walleri Gram. Grwca arit6 4 Tellero nuo ad Dialectos complcta, Leips.

1708.

Epicteti Enchir. Lat. Versib. adumbratum per Ivie, Ox. 1723.

-^— Alcmari Opera Omnia; Astron. Hvdrograph. &t. 4 vols, 4to, Ainstcrd.
1633.

Tertulliani Apologeticum, cum Mimic. Pel. 8vo, Cantab. IG86.

Boelim, Kirchen Calendar in 13 Fredigten verfasset, Wirtem. 1671,

Baroui Philos. Theologiie ancillaris Lon. H\5ii.

AValsh (Robert) His Appeal from Judgment of Great Britain respecting the

U. States of America, Phil. 1819.
— — Rapport llist. par Dclambre, sur les progres dcs Sci. Math, dcpuis

1809, Paris, 1810.

Hist civil del Paraguay y Tucuman, por G. Funes, — Comprehend, la

revolution del Peru por Tupac-Amaro, 2 vols, 4to, (.3d wanting) Bu-
enos Ayres, 1816.

Beawcs' Civil, Political, & Commercial History of Spain & Portugal,

fol. Lon. 1793.

Archives des Dccouv. & Invent. Nouv. 8vo, 1816, Paris.

Warden (D. B.) Traite de Chrystallographic de Hatiy, 2 vols, 8vo, with
Plates, 4to, Paris, 1822.

Desmarets sur deux genres de Coquilles, Paris, 1817.

— — Mem. sur les Kangaroos, 1817.

- Gouan(Ant.) Hist, des Poissons, Lat. & Froncli, Strasb. 4to, 1770.

Plowden (F.) On Human Subordination, and on Catholic (Irish) Enian-

pation, 8vo, Paris, 1824.
— — Almanac de Paris, &c. 1824.

Soc. Linncenne de Paris — Rapports sur le Fossile de Fontainbleau,

1824.

Warren (J. C. — M. D.) Comparative View of the Sensorial and Nervous Sys-
tem, Boston, 1832.

Webster (James) Medical Recorder, vols 1— G, 1818— 24,8vo, Phil.

Laeunec on Disorders of the Chest, translated bv Forbes, Phil. Edition,

1823.

Underwood on Diseases of Children, with notes by B. Hugcr, Phil. 1818.

Hamilton on Purgative Medicines, Phil. Edition, 1818.

Tracts on Medical Jurisprudence, by Thomas Cooper, M. D.Phil. I8I9.

Cooper (Asiley) &Travers(B.) Surg Essays, parts 1 & 2, Phil. Ed. 1821.

Wilcock (Benj.) Continuation of Morrison's'Chinese Diet. vol. 1, part 2d, &

vol. 3, 1816—18
— — Sentences and Dialogues, Chinese and English, Macao, 8vo, 1816.
^^— View of China for Philosophical purposes, Macao, 1817.
Wilson (Rev. J. P.) Will of the Chinese Emperor, Kicn Long, 1821.
^— His Introd. to the Hebrew Lang, without Points, Phil. 1812.

Transl. of tiie Bible into Chinese, (Deposited by him.)

Zollikoffer, Mat. Med. of the V. States. Bait. 1812.

Treatise on the Medical Properties of Prussiatc of Iron in Fevers.

1822.

VOL. II. — 3 Y

503 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Received whilst this Sheet tvas printing.

Bonaparte (Charles Lucian) American Ornithology, consisting of Birds not
given by Wilson, vol. 1. fol, Phil. 1825.

Lee (Richard Henrys A valuable Collection of original letters written to his
grandfather Richard Henry Lee, by the principal Characters of the
American Revolution.

The Original Draught of the Declaration of Independence, in the hand-
writing of Thomas Jefferson, with marks in the places where altera-
tions were made, and a copy of the Letter from Mr. Jefferson to R. H
Lee, accompanying the same, dated July 8th, 1776.

MAPS, AND PLANS

Not included in the preceding List of Donations.

Deabbate (G.-| Citta di Torino.

Melish (John) His Map of the U. States, with the contiguous possessions of
Spain & Great Bi it.iin, 1818,

Torrey's Map 'if Wayne and Pike Co. Penn. 1814.

Mease (James — M. D.) Holmes's Map of Penn. — then (1682) only three Coun-
ties, Chester, Phil. & Bucks, (and so remained until 1729,) London,

Munsel (L.) Map of Kentucky and part of Illinois and Indiana, 1816.

Pedersen (P.) A Collection of Maps of the Danish European Dominions, 17
Sheets, executed under the direction of the Danish Government, 1768
—1805.

Short (Wm) Plans of Naples, Milan, Venice, Turin, Florence, Rome, Ge-
neva, Amsterdam, and Lyons.

Tanner (H. S.j His Map of Mexico, 1825.

DONATIONS FOR THE CABINET.

Baldwin W. — M. D.) Eighteen dryed Specimens of the Genus Rhyncospora.
Binns (Johnl His Engraving of the Declaration of the Independence of the U.

States, wi,h a Fac Simile of the Signatures, and the Arms of the Thir-

States.

DONATIONS FOn THE LIBRARY. 503

Bolton (R.) Bronze medal of Matthew Holtnti, Solio, Great Britain.

Buifinch (C.) Specimen o( polished Breccia, used in the Columns of the Ca-
pitol, Washintrion.

Curson (S.) Ancient Peruvian Cloth from a mound near Lima.

Chapman (.N. — M. D.t Orig. Portrait of Alexander Wilson the Ornithologist.

Dearborn (B.) An improved Baliotini; Hox.

J)asrlikoft" A.I Bustvin Plaster) (d" Count UomanzoB".

Du Ponceau ^P. S.i Orig. Portrait of J. Ilcckew elder, executed for him.

Gilpin (J & T.) Sj). of their paper CEndless Sheet) pp. 45. printed as it came
damp from flie manufacturing rollers.

Heckewelder (Miss) .\ pair of Iiuliun Mocka'^ens and Pipe.

Jones (Wm) Skeleton, Head, and Horns of the .Vsiatic Wild Buffaloc. Spe-
cimens of Coral, and o specimens of Birds.

Le Baron (F. — M. D.) Specimens from Cobalt Mine in Connecticut, and of
coloured Glass with it.

Lorich (Chev.) A polished Vase of Swedish Porphyry from the Royal .Manuf.
of Klfdals in Dalerarlia.

Mease 'J. — M. D.i Engraved Portrait of Sir Isaac Newton.

Murray, Fairman, & Co. Specimens of Engraving in Steel Plates, to prevent
forgery.

Ord (G.) Several Old English and American Coins. — Also a Lithog. Engrar-
ingof the Ichthyosaurus Giganteus.

Pekenino, His Engravings of Franklin, Locke, Bonaparte, &c. &c.

Rodney (Ca-sar) A diillarof 1813, from Rio de la Plata.

Ronian/.ort" tCount) His Bust in 15ron/.i> — upon receiving this Bust, that pre-
sented by Mr. Uaschkort' was placctl in the Academy of Fine Arts.

Sansom tJoseph) Old .Viiierican Provincial Coins. — Three silver Medals ; of
Franklin, engraved for him by Rcicii, 1771) — of Washington, irOT^-of
Franklin Hi Washington, 1785. Designed by him as a commencement
of a .Medaiiic History of the U. States.

Shervall (Sarahs Electrical Copper point of Lightning Rod of E. Kinnersly —
the first struck by Lightning in Phil.

Short (Wni) A Collection of French .Medals, relative to the American Re-
volution, &c.

Smith (Charles) Two pair of Deer Horns interlocked, with the Skeleton Heads
(Cerv. Virg ) supposed to have perished in battle.

Vater (J. S.) Seven rare specimens of .\inbcr from the Baltic.

Vaux (Roberts) \ Box made of the Kensington Elm, under which Penn made
his Treaty with the Indians.

Vaughan (John) R. Patterson's .\pparatus for measuring altitudes, and Dr.
Coates's Hydrostatic Balance.

Consider.iblc a^lilitions have been made to our Minerals by the liberality of
Wm. M'Clure — N. A. Ware — Z. Collins.

And also by H. Abbot — Major Aberl — L. Baldwin — R. Conyngham
— Jos. Cloud — It. Dietz, — I. .S. Davis — Gen. Devereux — Wm. Dailcy
— Rev. J. W. Hvinel— S. Jackson— J. Lukens— S. .Merrick— B. K.
Morgan — Samuel Parkes, Lon. — T. Peironnet, &t.

Wistar (Mrs.) Three Boxes of Insects from China.

.\ Portrait of Dr. Priestley by R. Pcalc, painted for our late President,

Ca.=par Wistar.

ERRATA.

In Vol.1. New Series, p. 401, tlie Paper of Thomas Say waspriuted during liis absence,
and contains the following errors : —

Plate Xin. fig. 19 represents a varieCy of C. pusilla, fig. 12, and not the C.formosu,

as was inteniled.
Fig. 11 represents a variety of C. punctulata, (Oliv.) fig. 9, instead of C. deceinnolata .
as was intended.
In the present volume, correct the following errors :
Page

26,

line 7 from the bottom.

for

is

read

be

52,

line 30

do.

for

Marshal

read

Marsham

63,

line 2

do.

for

depressed

read

impressed

93,

line 32, 33,

do.

dele

labium and

271,

line 33

do.

for

fig. 8

read

fig, 11

275,

line 28

do.

for

ee

read

CO

278—

-284, passim.

for

Plate IV.

read

PI. III. fig. 7,

278,

line 25, and 4 do.

for

Plate I.

read

Plate III.

281,

line 9

do.

for

c

read

e

287,

line 31

do.

for

Plate III. 7, 8

read

Plate V. 2, 3

11

line 11

do.

for

Plate IX.

read

Plate Vm.

tc

line 5

do.

for

d

read

a'

288,

line 15

do.

for

e

read

c

<c

line 5

do.

for

S

read

3

296,

line 4

do.

for

Plate V.

read

Plate W.

316,

line 20

do.

for

R

read

Z

317,

line 13

do.

for

ball

read

level

tc

last line

for

n

read

h

355,

line 35

do.

for

XX

read

IZ

366,

line 8

do.

for

VUl.

read

X.

401,

firstline

for

Plate IX.

read

Plate IV.

451,

line 11

do.

for

£ii)i

read

£eni

463,

line 29

do.

for

the three

read

three

I